Waterproofing Tenders

Details: Description Lot 1 - Foods And Beverages Services Nc Ii 1 200 Pieces Chair Dining Type : Dining Side Chair Body Shape: Square Material : Metal (round Or Square) Dimension: Total Height - 33" X 15" X 15" (minimum) Capacity: 150 Kg. Black Colored Powder Coated Frame With Foam On Seat Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 2 8 Set Coffee Pot, 2 Pints Type: Manual Drip Body Shape: Round Material : Stainless Steel With Cover Capacity : 2 Pints Outside Diameter : 90 -110 Mm Over-all Height : 200 - 230 Mm Thickness : 0.5 - 1 Mm With Handle And Spout Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 3 20 Pieces Container, Creamer Design: Type: Porcelain With Spout Body Shape: Circular, Material: Porcelain Diameter : 50 - 65 Mm Height : 80 - 105 Mm Color: White Appearance : Glossy White Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 4 96 Pieces Cups And Saucers 5-6 Oz. 1. Material : Porcelain 2. Capacity : 5 Oz./140 Ml 3. Heatproof Up To 300 Deg. C 4. Color : White 5. The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 5 96 Pieces Fork, Cocktail 1. Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Plain Design 2. Type: Rounded Tip Handle 3. Over-all Length: 110-165mm 4. Width: 20-30mm (minimum) 5. Handle Thickness: 2mm To 4mm 6. Handle Length: 75-90mm 7. Small 8. Color: Silver The Item Must Be Branded And Have Good Quality. 6 96 Pieces Fork, Dessert Type: Dessert Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape, Round Tip Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, With Plain Design, Rounded Tip Handle Length: 150mm-175mm Width: 20-30mm Handle Thickness: 1.5mm-3mm Number Of Tines: 4 Handle: 130mm (minimum) Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 7 96 Pieces Fork, Dinner Type: Dinner Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, With 4 Tines Over-all Length: 120-175mm Thickness Of Handle: 2-3mm Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 8 96 Pieces Fork, Fish Type: Fish Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape With Round Tip Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, With Plain Design Over-all Length: 180-215mm Fork Width: 1.5mm-3mm Fork Thickness: 1mm-2mm Number Of Tines: 4 Length Handle: 120-130mm Handle Thickness: 2mm-3mm Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 9 96 Pieces Fork, Oyster Type: Oyster Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape Material: Stainless Steel, With High Polish Appearance, And With Plain Design Length: 90-120mm Thickness: 1mm-3mm Silver Color With Three Short Wide Curved Tines Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 10 96 Pieces Glass, Champagne Flute Type: Flute Glass Body Shape: Round Material: Clear Crystal Glass Dimension: Height: 20-24cm, Top Diameter: 50-70mm, Bottom Diameter: 60-80mm Capacity: 250ml (minimum) Thickness: 1.5-3mm Packed In Carbon Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 11 96 Pieces Glass, Collins Type: Tumbler Body Shape: Round Material: Clear Glass Capacity: 10oz To 14 Oz Thickness: 1.5-3mm (minimum) Packed In Carbon Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 12 96 Pieces Glass, Juice / Hi-ball 1. Material : Clear Glass 2. Type: Hi-ball 3. Height: 140-160mm 4. Bottom Diameter: 50-70mm 5. Top Diameter: 50-70mm 6. Thickness: 2-4 (minimum) 7. Capacity: 8oz. To 10oz. 8. Dishwasher Safe 9. The Item Must Be Branded And Good Quality Packed In Carton Box 13 96 Pieces Glass, Pilsner (ice Tea Glass) Type: Flaired Rim Body Shape (round Slender) Material: Clear Glass Capacity: 20oz. To 23oz. Over-all Length: 22-25cm Thickness Of Glass: 1-3mm With Flaired Rim And Slender Shape Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 14 96 Pieces Glass, Red Wine Type: Royalty Body Shape: Balloon Shaped Bowl Material: Crystal Clear Glass Rim Diameter: 55-60mm Thickness: 1.5mm-3mm Over-all Length: 200-220mm Capacity: 250-300ml Stem Diameter: 6-8mm Stem Length: 85-90mm Base Diameter: 75-85mm Base Thickness: 2-4mm 15 96 Pieces Glass, White Wine Type: Royalty Body Shape: Balloon Shaped Bowl Material: Crystal Clear Glass Rim Diameter: 55-60mm Thickness: 1.5-3mm Over-all Length: 200-220mm Capacity: 270-300ml Stem Diameter: 6-8mm Base Diameter: 70-80mm Base Thickness: 2-5mm 16 16 Pieces Gravy Boats Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Boat Shape With Handle Material: Stainless Steel Capacity: 5oz. Appearance: Mirror Polish Finish Size :17cm X 7.3cm X 8.2 Cm / 6.7 X 2.9 X 3.2 Inches (minimum) The Item Must Have Good Quality Packed In Plastic Pouch 17 8 Sets Ice Bucket, 2 Liters With Tongs Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Circular Set Includes: A. Ice Bucket Material : Stainless Steel Diameter : 140 - 180 Mm Height : 140 - 170 Mm Thickness Of Bucket : 0.7 - 2 Mm Capacity : 2 Liters (minimum) The Item Must Have Good Quality 18 96 Pieces Knife Butter 1. Material : Stainless Steel W/ Highly Polished Appearance 2. Over-all Length : 140 Mm - 150 Mm 3. Handle Thickness : 3 Mm - 5 Mm 4. With Dull Edge And Rounded Tip 5. The Item Must Have Good Quality. Packed In Carton Box 19 96 Pieces Knife, Dinner Type: Dinner Knife Body Shape: Flat With Round Tip Material / Appearance : Stainless Steel Blade Highly Polished Handle Material : Stainless Steel Overall Length : 160 - 190 Mm Blade Thickness : 2 - 4 Mm Handle Thickness : 3 - 6 Mm Serrated Blade With Rounded Tip Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 20 96 Pieces Knife, Fish Type : Fish Knife Body Shape: Flat With Pointed Tip Material / Appearance : Stainless Steel, Highly Polished W/ Plain Design Overall Length : 200 - 220 Mm Width Blade : 20 - 25 Mm Thickness Of Blade : 2 Mm - 4 Mm Thickness Of Handle: 3 Mm - 6 Mm Wide Blade, Dull Edge, Tip Made With A Notched Point Color : Silver Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 21 8 Pieces Menu Folder Type: Leather Menu Folder Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Leather With 2 Partitions And 6 Inserts Size: 31.5cm X 24.5cm Color: Brown/black Applicable Paper Size: A4 22 24 Pieces Napkin Holder Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Rectangular Material : Stainless Steel With Highly Polished Appearance Dimension : Width : 70 - 90 Mm X Length : 150 - 170 Mm , Thickness : 0.7 Mm -2 Mm Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 23 8 Pieces Order Pads Type: Numbered Pads Body Shape: Rectangular Material : 80 Gsm Offset Paper Each Pad Comes With A 100 Sheets And Corresponding Copy Page Each Pad Has Sequentially Numbered Orders To Make It Easy To Keep Track With 100 Sheets Per Pad And 10 Pads Included Can Take 1000 Orders Before You Run Out Packed In A Plastic Pouch 24 8 Pieces Pepper And Salt Mill Type: Pepper & Salt Mill Body Shape: Round Body Material: Wood Size: Diameter: 5 Cm X Height: 20 Cm (minimum) Carved Of Wood With Stainless Steel Grinding Mechanism Color: Natural Screw Cap At The Top Of The Mill To Adjust The Thickness Of Peeper Or Spices Preferably With A Packing Case Food Grade And Nontoxic Must Be Branded 25 32 Pieces Plate Covers Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Stainless Steel, Mirror Polished Diameter: 10 1/4 Inches (minimum) Height: 2 7/8 Inches (minimum) Thickness: 1/16 Inch. (minimum) With Handle Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 26 96 Pieces Plate, Dessert, 7” To 8” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Porcelain Supply Must Be A Set, Consisting Of One (1) Of Each: 7 Inches And 8 Inches Plates Color : White Inner Diameter: 145 To 165 Mm Thickness : 3 To 6 Mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 27 96 Pieces Plate, Dinner, 10” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Porcelain With No Design Color: White Inner Diameter : 200 Mm - 215 Mm Outer Diameter : 250 - 260 Mm Thickness : 3 Mm - 6 Mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 28 96 Pieces Plate, Fish, 8” To 9” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Circular Material : Porcelain With No Design Supply Shall Be A Set Consisting Of: One (1) Each 8 Inches And One (1) Each, 9 Inches Color : White Inner Diameter : 165 Mm - 190 Mm (minimum) Thickness : 3 Mm - 6 Mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 29 32 Sets Round Table (8’s) Type: Foldable Body Shape: Round Material: High Density Polyethylene Tabletop Powder Coated Steel Frame Size: 154cm X 74cm X4.5cm (minimum) Good For 8 To 10 Seater Capacity Tube Size : 28 Mm Diameter X 1 Mm Thickness Packed In A Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 30 96 Pieces Salad Forks Type: Salad Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, With 4 Tines Length: 150 Mm - 175 Mm Thickness Of Handle : 2 Mm - 3 Mm Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 31 96 Pieces Salad Knife Type: Salad Knife Body Shape: Semi Rectangular Blade With Pointed Tip Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Plain Design Overall Length: 145 -160 Mm Blade Thickness: 2 Mm To 4 Mm Handle Thickness: 4 Mm To 6 Mm Handle Material: Stainless Steel Rounded Tip Handle Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 32 96 Pieces Salad Plates 7” To 8” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Porcelain With No Design Supply Must Be A Set Consisting Of One (1) Each: 7 Inches And 8 Inches Plates Color: White Diameter (inner): 150 Mm - 165 Mm Thickness: 3 Mm - 6 Mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 33 16 Pieces Salt And Pepper Shakers Type: Glass Type Body Shape: Square Material: Glass And Aluminum Over-all Height: 75 -90 Mm Length: 50 -60 Mm Width: 50 -60 Mm Aluminum Cover Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 34 8 Pieces Sauce Ladles Type: Spouted Bowl Body Shape: Circular With Pouring Spout Material: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished Appearance Over-all Length: 220 -230 Mm Ladle Bowl Length: 60 -65 Mm Long Ladle Bowl Diameter: 65 -70 Mm Depth: 10 -15 Mm Handle Details: 150-155 Mm Long X 20 -30 Mm Wide X 2 - 4 Mm Thick Color: Silver With Hang Hole For Hanging And Easy Access Dishwasher Safe Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 35 8 Pieces Server, Cake 1. Material : Stainless Steel Blade , Highly Polished Appearance 2. Over-all Length : 220 To 270 Mm 3. Width : 60 - 80 Mm 4. Thickness : 1.5 Mm To 2 Mm 5. Handle : 120 -140 Mm Long, Non-toxic Plastic 6. Shape : Shovel-shaped 7. Color : Silver 8. The Item Must Have Good Quality Packed In Carton Box 36 24 Pieces Service Forks Type : Service Fork Body Shape: Fork Shape Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Palin Design Over-all Length: 220 Mm - 260 Mm Width: 20 - 25 Mm Handle Thickness: 1.5 Mm - 4 Mm Handle Length - 165 Mm - 185 Mm 4 Tines Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch 37 24 Pieces Service Tray Type: Plastic Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Plastic (pp) Size : 14 Inches X 18 Inches X 1 Inch (minimum) Color : Any Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 38 24 Pieces Show/service/base Plates 11” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Round Material: Porcelain With No Design Supply Must Be A Set Consisting (1) Of Each: - 11 Inches; - 12 Inches; - 13 Inches, And - 14 Inches Plates Color: White Diameter, Inner : 225 Mm - 250 Mm Thickness: 3 Mm - 6 Mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces 39 96 Pieces Side Plates Or Bread Plates 6” Type: Plain Type Body Shape: Round Material: Porcelain With No Design Color: White Inner Diameter: 95 Mm To 120 Mm Outer Diameter: 145 Mm To 170 Mm Thickness : 3 Mm - 6mm Smooth And Glossy Surfaces Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 40 16 Pieces Side Towels Type: Chef's Towel Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Oxford Polyester Soft Cloth Over-all Length : 640 - 680 Mm Over-all Width : 420 -460 Mm Color : Plain White Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 41 32 Pieces Silver Platter Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Diameter: 300 -330 Mm Thickness: 1 - 2 Mm Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 42 96 Pieces Soup Bowl Type: Plain With Two Handles Body Shape: Circular Material : Porcelain Capacity : 24 Oz. (minimum) Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality Packed In A Carton Box 43 8 Pieces Soup Ladle Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished Appearance Over-all Length : 220 -235 Mm Ladle Bowl Details: 60 -65 Mm Long, 60 -75 Mm Diameter, 10 -15 Mm Deep Handle Details: 145 - 155 Mm Long X 12 - 25 Mm Wide X 1.5 -3 Mm Thick Color: Silver With Hang Hole For Hanging And Easy Access 44 16 Pieces Soup Tureen Type: Steel Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Capacity: 7 - 11 Quart Size : 60 X 35 X 32 Cm (minimum) Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 45 96 Pieces Spoon, Dessert Type : Dessert Spoon Body Shape: Oval Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished With Plain Design Over-all Length : 175 To 190 Mm Thickness : 2 Mm - 3 Mm Shorter Handle : 120 -130 Mm Color : Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 46 24 Pieces Spoons, Service Type : Service Spoon Body Shape: Oval Material: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Plain Design Over-all Length: 220 Mm - 250 Mm Width: 30 - 38 Mm Handle Thickness: 1.5 Mm - 4 Mm Handle Length - 165 Mm - 185 Mm Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 47 96 Pieces Spoons, Soup (cream And Consume) Type: Soup Spoon Body Shape: Round Material/appearance : Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Plain Design, Rounded Tip Handle Over-all Length : 165 Mm - 200 Mm Smaller Oval Shaped Spoon Bowl And Tapers Slightly To The Tip Shorter Handle : 110 Mm - 170 Mm Thickness : 1.5 Mm - 3 Mm Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch 48 96 Pieces Steak Knife Type: Steak Knife Body Shape: Flat With Serrated Edge Material: Stainless Steel Blade With Wooden Handle Length: 170 Mm To 203 Mm Handle Wood Thickness: 10 - 14 Mm With Serrated Blade Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 49 20 Pieces Sugar Container Type: Glass Type Body Shape: Round Material: Glass With Brass Lid (or Equivalent) Diameter: 70 -80 Mm Height: 130 -140 Mm Capacity: 12 Oz. Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 50 16 Pieces Table Cloth, 54 X 54 Inches Type: Plain Cloth Body Shape: Square Material: Oxford Polyester Cloth Color: Plain White Dimension: L 54 Inches X W 54 Inches (minimum) Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 51 8 Pieces Table Cloth, Rectangular Type: Plain Cloth Body Shape: Rectangle Material : Linen Size : 120cm X160cm (minimum) Color : Any Color But Not Black Feature: Washable Packed In A Plastic Pouch 52 120 Pieces Table Napkins, Cloth, 16” X 16” Type: Plain Cloth Body Shape: Square Material: Oxford Polyester Cloth Or Its Equivalent Size: L 16 Inches X W 16 Inches (minimum) Color: Plain White Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 53 8 Pieces Table Skirting Cloth 90” X 90” Type: Plain Cloth Body Shape: Square Material: American Cotton Twill Cloth Color: Any Color Except Black Dimension: 90 Inches X 90 Inches (minimum) Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 54 48 Pieces Table, Square/rectangular (4’s Or 6’s) Type: Foldable Plastic Body Shape: Square/rectangle Material: High Density Polyethylene Tabletop Powder Coated Steel Frame Dimension: 37 - 39 X 37 - 39 Inches Color: White Good For 4 Persons Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 55 8 Pieces Tea Pot, 2 Pints Type: Porcelain Type Body Shape: Round With Handle And Pouring Spout Material : Porcelain Capacity : (2 Pint) Color : White Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 56 96 Pieces Teaspoon Type : Tea Spoon Body Shape: Oval Tip Material/appearance: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished, W/ Plain Design Over-all Length: 120 Mm To 140 Mm Handle Thickness: 2 Mm To 4 Mm Short Handle Length - 100 Mm (minimum) Color: Silver Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 57 8 Pieces Tong, 8 Inches Type: Tong, 8 Inches Body Shape: Standard Material: Stainless Steel Size: 8 Inches Stainless-steel Arms With Soft, Comfortable Grips Nylon Heads Safe For Nonstick Cookware Heat-resistant Up To 400 Degrees Fahrenheit Tongs Lock Closed For Storage Preferably With A Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher-safe Must Be Branded 58 16 Pieces Toothpick Holder Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished In Appearance Diameter: 30 -35 Mm Diameter (minimum) Height: 65 -75 Mm Capacity: 1.24 Oz. (minimum) Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 59 8 Pieces Tray Stand Type: Foldable Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Chrome Plated Metal Folding Tray Stand Length: 470 -490 Mm Width: 400 -440 Mm Height: 770 -790 Mm Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 60 8 Pieces Tray, Bill Folders/change 1. Material : Heavy Duty Plastic ( Abs ) Or Its Equivalent 2. Height : 190 - 220 Mm 3. Width : 120 -140 Mm 4. Thickness : 2 Mm To 3 Mm (minimum) 5. Color: Black 6. With Check And Pen Holder 7. The Item Must Have Good Quality Packed In Plastic Pouch 61 32 Pieces Tray, Round (bar) Type: Plastic Body Shape: Round Material: (pe/abs) Plastic Rubberized Surface, Non-slip/grip Tight Over-all Diameter: 345 -360 Mm (minimum) Thickness: 2 - 4 Mm (minimum) Color: Black Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality 62 96 Pieces Water Goblet Type: Water Goblet Body Shape: Balloon-shaped Bowl Material: Crystal Clear Glass Over-all Length: 200 -220 Mm Capacity: 270 Ml To 300 Ml Rim Diameter - 55 -65 Mm Thickness: 1 Mm To 3 Mm Stem Length : 75 -85 Mm Stem Diameter : 6 -8 Mm Base Thickness : 3 -4 Mm Base Diameter : 7 -80 Mm Packed In Carton Box The Item Must Have Good Quality 63 24 Pieces Water Pitcher Type: Steel Type Body Shape: Circular Material: Stainless Steel, Highly Polished Appearance Height: 170 Mm To 220 Mm Top Diameter: 110 -120 Mm (approximate) Capacity: 1 - 1.5 Liter With Pour Spout Dishwasher Safe Packed In Plastic Pouch The Item Must Have Good Quality Lot 2 Cookery Nc Ii And Bread & Pastry Production Nc Ii 1 12 Pieces Apple Corer Type: Apple Corer Body Shape: Tubular Material: Stainless Steel Total Length: 18 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Hard Plastic, Polypropylene Handle Dimension: Length-10 Cm X Diameter-2 Cm (minimum) Blade Size: Length-8cm X Diameter-2 Cm (minimum) Preferably With Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 2 3 Pieces Bain Marie, Table Type: Bain Marie Table (food Warmer) Body Shape: Rectangular Material: 304 Stainless Steel, 0.8 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimensions: Length-1500 Mm X Width-700mm X Height-800 Mm (minimum) Power Source: Voltage: 220 Volts - 230 Volts, 50 Hz/ 60 Hz With Royal Cord 1.5 Meter Long With Attachment Standard Type A Male Plug Or Provide Plug Adopter 10a/220v 3 3 Pieces Blender, Electric Type: Blender Machine Body Shape: Round Jar Material Housing: Plastic (polypropylene) Jar Height : 25 Cm To 28 Cm Jar Thickness: 4 Mm To 8 Mm Heat Resistant Glass Jar With Cover Source Voltage: 220 Volts / 240 Volts,50 Hz / 60 Hz With Power Cord 1.5 Meter Long With Attachment Of Standard Type A Male Plug Or Provide Plug Adopter 10a/220v. Power Wattage: 300 To 700 Watts Blade: Stainless Steel, 3 To 4 Metal Blades 4 48 Pieces Board, Chopping/cutting, Plastic Type: Cutting Board Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Plastic (polypropylene), Food Grade Board Size: Length: 15 Inches (minimum) Width: 12 Inches (minimum) Thickness: 0.5 Inch (minimum) With Hole For Storage Purposes Preferably With Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher Safe 5 3 Pieces Boiler, Double Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1/16 Inch (1.5 Mm) (minimum) Lid Material: Glass Riveted Handle On Both Side Diameter: 9 1/2 Inches (minimum) Total Height: 9.4 Inches (minimum) Inset Bottom Diameter: 9 Inches (minimum) Inset Top Diameter: 9 Inches (minimum) Capacity: 2 Liters (minimum) 6 24 Pieces Braising Pan, Medium Type: Braising Pan Body Shape: Round Material: Enameled Cast Iron And Stainless Steel Size: Diameter: 28 Cm X Height: 10 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 4 Liters (approximate) With Stainless Steel Cover, Solid Cast Stainless Steel Side Handles And Riveted Handle On Both Side: Length: 10 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 Mm To 10 Mm 7 3 Pieces Can Opener Type: Can Opener Body Shape: Materials: Stainless Steel Dimension: Length-21 Cm X Width 10 Cm X Depth:2.5cm (minimum) Multi-use: 3 In 1 Can Opener Also Opens Bottle Tops- Can Lids And Tabs 8 12 Pieces Casserole, Medium Type: Casserole Pot Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick Dimension: Diameter- 24 Cm X Height -14 Cm (minimum) Tempered Glass Lid Welded Handle On Both Sides, Size: 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 Mm To 10 Mm Preferably With Packing Case 9 36 Pieces Casserole, Small Type: Casserole Pot Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick Dimension: Diameter- 20 Cm X Height -12 Cm (minimum) Tempered Glass Lid Welded Handle On Both Sides, Size: 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 Mm To 10 Mm 10 5 Pieces Colander, Medium Type: Colander, Medium Body Type: Round Material: 304 Stainless Steel Diameter: 30 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 8 Quarts (9 Liters) Welded Handle On Both Sides, Size: 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 To 10 Mm 11 12 Pieces Colander, Small Type: Colander (small) Body Shape: Round Material: 304 Stainless Steel Diameter: 26 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 5 Quarts (5.6 Liters) Welded Handle On Both Sides, Size: 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 Mm To 10 Mm Body Thickness: 0.8 Mm (minimum) Full-ring Support Base, 15 Cm Diameter Preferably With Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher Safe 12 24 Pieces Cup, Measuring (for Solid) Type: Measuring Cup Set Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick (minimum) Each Set Contains The Following: 1 Pc - 1 Cup (237 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Cup (118 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/3 Cup (79 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/4 Cup (59 Ml) Handle Dimension: Length-12 Cm X Width-1 Cm (minimum) Measuring Capacity Engraved On The Handle Strip Handles Have Provision For Hanging Preferably With Packing Case Smooth Surfaces And Dishwasher Safe 13 12 Pieces Dispenser, Paper Towel Type Paper Towel Dispenser Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Abs Plastic Dimensions: Length =260 Mm X Width =100 Mm X Height = 211 Mm (minimum) Capacity: 200 Paper Paper Size: Length-20 Cm X Width- 8 Cm (approximate) Mounting Style: Wall Mounted Tissue Box 14 3 Pieces Fan, Electric Stand Fan, Electric Material: Metal, Plastic Size/diameter: 18 Inches Power Rating: 70 Watts (minimum), 220 / 240 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz, Single Phase Rotation Angle: 90 Degrees Base: Stable, 16 Inches Diameter (approx.) Removable Metal Guard On Front And Rear 3-speed Settings Comes With 1.5 Meters Power Cord And With Molded Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 3a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Includes User's Manual In English Which Contains: A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names 15 3 Pieces Fire Extinguisher (with Contents) 1. For Type A, B, C Fire: Dry Chemicals (monoammonium Phosphate) 2. Portable Type 3. Capacity: 5-6kgs 4. Rechargeable Cylinder Metal 5. Working Pressure Of Cylinder: 400 Psi 6. Brass Valve With Pressure Gage 7. With Rubberized Hose And Aluminum Nozzle Attached With Squeeze Lever To Discharge And Safety Pin 8. Painted With Metal Primer And Red Enamel Paint 16 3 Pieces Fish Poacher, Medium Type: Fish Poacher Body Shape: Oval Pot For Poaching Material: Stainless Steel, 0.64 Mm Thick Dimensions (l X W X D): 45 Cm X 15 Cm X 12 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Stainless Steel Riveted Looped Handles On Both Side, 7 Cm (minimum) Handle Diameter: 8 Mm To 10 Mm 17 9 Pieces Fork, Carving Type: Carving Fork Body Shape: Square Shape Prong Prong Material: High Carbon Stainless Steel Overall Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Blade Dimension: Length- 15 Cm X Width- 0.5 Cm X Thickness- 0.3 Cm (minimum) Number Of Prongs: 2 Prong Comes With Square- Shaped Prongs And Pointed Tips Abs Plastic Triple-riveted Handle Preferably With Packing Case 18 24 Pieces Fork, Kitchen Type: Kitchen Fork Body Shape: Standard Material: Stainless Steel Dimension: Length - 32 Cm X Width- 3.5 Cm (minimum) Fork Size: Length: 8 Cm X Width -3.5 Cm (minimum) Handle :abs Plastic Number Of Tines: 2 Tines With Tapered End 19 6 Pieces Frying Pan, Large Type: Frying Pan (large) Body Shape: Round Pan Material: Aluminum With Non-stick Coating Thickness: 3 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimension: Diameter-30 Cm (minimum) X Height- 5.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Stainless Steel With Silicone Riveted Handle: 20 Cm Long (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Oven Safe Up To 250⁰f 20 24 Pieces Frying Pan, Medium Type: Frying Pan (medium) Body Shape: Round Pan Material: Aluminum With Non-stick Coating Thickness: 3 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimension: Diameter-24 Cm (minimum) X Height- 4.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Stainless Steel With Silicone Riveted Handle: 19 Cm Long (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case 21 36 Pieces Frying Pan, Small Type: Frying Pan (small) Body Shape: Round Pan Material: Aluminum With Non-stick Coating Thickness: 3 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimension: Diameter-20 Cm (minimum) X Height- 3.8 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Stainless Steel With Silicone Riveted Handle: 12 Cm Long (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Oven Safe Up To 250⁰f 22 12 Pieces Funnel, S/s, Medium Type: Stainless Steel Funnel Body Shape: Round Material: 304 Stainless Steel Dimension: Diameter-15 Cm (minimum) X Height- 15.8 Cm (minimum) Tube Diameter: 2 Cm X Length: 7.3 Cm (minimum) Comes With Handle For Easy Hanging Preferably With Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 23 12 Pieces Funnel, S/s, Small Type: Stainless Steel Funnel Body Shape: Round Material: 304 Stainless Steel Dimension: Diameter-11 Cm (minimum) X Height- 10 Cm (minimum) Tube Diameter: 1.5 Cm X Length: 5 Cm (minimum) Comes With Handle For Easy Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 24 12 Pieces Garbage Bin Type: Swivel Lid Garbage Bin Body Shape: Round Material: Hard Plastic, Polypropylene Dimension: Diameter-26 Cm X Height-47 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 4 Gallons (minimum) Removable Dome Shape Lid With Spring Return Swivel Preferably With A Packing Case Color: Any Color 25 36 Pieces Glass Rack Type: Glass Rack Body Shape: Square Material: Polypropylene Plastic Overall Dimensions: Length - 19 1/2 Inches X Width - 19 1/2 Inches X Height - 4 Inches (minimum) Compartments: Full-size 25 Individual Compartment Glass Rack Compartment Dimensions: Length - 3 1/2 Inches X Width - 3 1/2 Inches X Height - 4 Inches (minimum) Easy Grip Handles Molded Into All Four Sides Preferably With A Packing Case 26 6 Pieces Ice Cream Scooper Type: Ice Cream Scooper Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Scoop: Diameter- 5 Cm X Deep-2.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 10 To 12 Cm 27 24 Pieces Knife, Boning Type: Flexible Boning Knife Body Shape: Ergonomic Material: High Carbon Steel Overall Length: 28 Cm (minimum) Blade: Length-15 Cm X Width- 3 Cm (minimum), Pointed Tip Cutting Edge Angle From Tip To The Heel Is 13 To 14 Degrees Handle Length: 12 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Hard Plastic Handle With Rivets Preferably Wiht Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 28 30 Pieces Knife, Chef Type: Chef's Knife Body Shape: Flat Materials: Stainless Steel Overall Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Blade Size: Length - 20 Cm X Width-4 Cm (minimum) Blade Thickness: 2.5 Mm (minimum) 29 6 Pieces Knife, Cleaver Type: Cleaver Knife Body Shape: Flat Blade Material: Forged Stainless Steel Heavy Duty Blade Length: 17 Cm (minimum) Overall Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Cutting Edge: Straight Handle Material: Ergonomic Wood Handle With Triple Rivets 30 12 Pieces Knife, Oyster Type: Oyster Knife Body Shape: Ergonomic Blade Material: Stainless Steel Blade Dimension: Length - 7 Cm (minimum) X Width - 2 Cm (minimum) Blade Thickness: 2 Mm (minimum) Handle Material: Smooth Wooded Handle Rounded Handle Size: Length-10 Cm X Diameter- 3.5 Cm (minimum) Total Length (from The Tip Of The Handle Up To Tip Of The Blade) :17 Cm (minimum) 31 3 Pieces Light, Emergency Emergency Light, 2 Heads Led Materials: Metal, Anti-rust Coated Duration Time (2 Heads): 5 Hours (minimum) Automatically Light Up During Power Outage Overcharge And Over- Discharge Protection Built - In Ac Charger, Power Cord Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 5a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) Battery Test Switch - External Safety Fuse Head: White Led 1w (minimum) 3.5 " Dome 32 3 Pieces Meat Slicer Type: Meat Slicer Body Shape: Circular Housing Material: Die Cast Aluminum Alloy And Body Painted Dimensions: Width-40.5 Cm X Depth- 45.7 Cm X Height- 38 Cm (minimum) Stainless Steel Rotary Blade Diameter: 190 Mm (minimum) Power Source: 220 Volts-230 Volts, 60 Hz With Power Cord 1.5 Meter Long With Attachment Of Standard Type A Male Plug Or Provide Plug Adopter 10a/220v 33 24 Pieces Pastry Tube Type: Pastry Tubes Body Shape: Tube In Different Shape Of Nozzles Material: Stainless Steel Set Contain: 24 Different Shapes Of Nozzles (minimum) Tube Height: 3.5 Cm To 5 Cm Tube Diameter: 2 Cm To 3.5 Cm Thickness: 0.5 Mm (minimum) Tube Tip: Assorted Designs (create Swirls, Rosettes, Flowers, Stars, Leaves And Other Designs 34 24 Pieces Peeler, Y-type Type: Y-type Peelers Body Shape: Ergonomic Material: Stainless Steel Overall Dimensions (l X W X H): 7 Inches X 2 1/4 Inches X 1 Inch (minimum) Blade Material: 304 Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Head Dimension: (l X W X H) 2 1/4 Inches X 2 1/4 Inches X 1 Inch (minimum) Handle Material: Stainless Steel Handle Length: 4 3/4 Inches X 1 Inch Diameter (minimum) 2 In 1 Design With 2 Blade Reel, Built In Potato Eye Remover And Hole For Hanger 35 24 Pieces Pepper And Salt Mill Type: Pepper & Salt Mill Body Shape: Round Body Material: Wood Size: Diameter: 5 Cm X Height: 20 Cm (minimum) Carved Of Wood With Stainless Steel Grinding Mechanism Color: Natural Screw Cap At The Top Of The Mill To Adjust The Thickness Of Peeper Or Spices Preferably With A Packing Case 36 24 Pieces Piping Bag Type : Piping Bag Body Shape: Triangular Material: Transparent Disposable Plastic For Dispensing Ingredients To Pastries Length: 9 Inches Minimum Width: 3 Inches (minimum) Volume: 500 Ml (approximate) 37 36 Pieces Plate Rack Type: Plate Rack Body Shape: Rectangular Material: 304 Stainless Steel Dimension: Length-475 Mm X Width- 290 Mm X Height- 380 Mm (minimum) 38 15 Pieces Preparation Table With Sink Type: Preparation Table With Sink & Shelves Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Stainless Steel, 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimensions: L-1200 Mm X W - 700 Mm X H - 850 Mm (minimum) Stainless Steel Tabletop And Stainless Steel Under Shelf Fully Welded Construction Sink: Left Side Single Bowl Sink With Drainer 4 Inches & Faucet Provision Sink Dimension (l X W X D) 400 Mm X 500 Mmx 25 Mm (minimum) 39 3 Pieces Pressure Cooker Type: Pressure Cooker Body Shape: Round Material: Polished Aluminum Dimension: Diameter: 32 Cm X Height: 25 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 10 Quarts (11.3 Liters) Side Handles For Secure Carrying Equipped With Safety Opening Mechanism, Spring Safety Valve, Rubber Seal Ring 40 12 Pieces Roasting Pan Type: Roasting Pan Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Stainless Steel Dimension: Length: 40 Cm X Width-35 Cm X Height -7 1/2cm (minimum) Thickness: 1.5 Mm Thick (minimum) Welded Handles On Both Sides Removable Stainless Steel Wire Rack 41 24 Pieces Scissor, Kitchen Type: Kitchen Scissor Body Shape: Ergonomic Blade Material: Stainless Steel, 2 Mm Thick Handle Material Heavy Duty Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (abs) Plastic Overall Length: 20 Cm (minimum) Width: 7.5 Cm (minimum) 42 24 Pieces Siever, Small Type: Fine Mesh Siever Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Diameter: 20 Cm (minimum) Depth: 7 Cm (minimum) Twin Wire Handle: Length 20 Cm X 5 Mm Diameter (minimum) Fine Mesh: 0.7 Mm (1/32 Inch) (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case 43 24 Pieces Skimmer, Fine Type: Medium Fine Mesh Skimmer Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, Polished Overall Length: 34 Cm (minimum) Skimmer Head: Diameter -10 Cm X Depth- 4 Cm (minimum) Diameter Of Holes: 2 Mm (approx.) Handle: Length- 12 Cm X Diameter- 2 Cm (minimum) Handle Has Hole For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case 44 24 Pieces Skimmer, Spider Type: Skimmer, Spider Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, Polished Overall Length: 35 Cm (minimum) Skimmer Head Diameter: 15 Cm X Depth 4 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 12 Cm X 2 Cm Diameter (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 45 36 Pieces, Soup Cup Rack Type: Soup Cup Rack Body Shape: Square Material: Polypropylene Plastic Dimension: Length: 50 Cm X Width: 50 Cm X Height: 10 Cm (minimum) Compartment Length: 11 Cm Compartment Width: 11 Cm Compartment /inside Height: 6.7 Cm No. Of Compartment: 16 Compartments 46 6 Pieces Soup Ladle, 12 Oz Type: Soup Ladle Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Handle Length: 34 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 12 Oz. (341 Ml) Ladle Type: Round Bottom Hooked Handle Design Allows It To Easily Sit On The Edge Of Pots. Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 47 24 Pieces Soup Ladle, 3 Oz Type: Soup Ladle Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Handle Length: 28 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 3 Oz. (85 Ml) Ladle Type: Round Bottom Hooked Handle Design Allows It To Easily Sit On The Edge Of Pots. Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 48 24 Pieces Soup Ladle, 6 Oz Type: Soup Ladle Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Handle Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 6 Oz. (170 Ml) Ladle Type: Round Bottom Hooked Handle Design Allows It To Easily Sit On The Edge Of Pots. Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 49 9 Pieces Soup Ladle, 8 Oz Type: Soup Ladle Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Handle Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 8 Oz. (236 Ml) Ladle Type: Round Bottom Hooked Handle Design Allows It To Easily Sit On The Edge Of Pots. Preferably With A Packing Case 50 24 Pieces Spatula Type: Offset Spatula Body Shape: Flat Blade Material: Stainless Steel 316 Handle Material: Hardwood (smooth Finish) With Rivets Blade Dimension: Length= 7 .5 Inches X Width-1.5 Inches (minimum) Thickness Of Blade: 1.7 Mm Thick (minimum) Total Length: 12 To 14 Inches Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 51 24 Pieces Spoon, Kitchen Type: Kitchen Spoon Body Shape: Oval Material: Stainless Steel, 1.5 Mm Thick Overall Length: 30.5 Cm X Width-7.5 Cm (minimum) Spoon Head Dimension (l X W) 9 Cm X 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle: Abs Plastic Spoon Head: Oval Type Preferably With A Packing Case Heat Resistant Up To 220 ° C Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 52 24 Pieces Spoon, Kitchen (slotted) Type: Kitchen Spoon Slotted Body Shape: Oval With Slot Material: Stainless Steel, 1.5 Mm Thick Overall Length: 30.5 Cm X Width-7.5 Cm (minimum) Spoon Head Dimension (l X W) 9 Cm X 7.5 Cm (minimum) Handle: Abs Plastic Spoon Head: Oval Type With Slot At Least 6 Rectangular Slots Preferably With A Packing Case Heat Resistant Up To 220 ° C Dishwasher Safe 53 24 Pieces Spoon, Measuring Type: Measuring Spoon Body Shape: Bowl In Shape Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick (minimum) The Set Consists Of The Following Sizes: 1 Pc - 1 Tbsp. (15 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Tbsp. ( 7.5 Ml) 1 Pc - 1 Tsp. (5 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Tsp. (2.5 Ml) 54 24 Pieces Spoon, Parisienne Type: Parisiennes Spoon Body Shape: Round Double Headed Parisiennes Scoop Bar Tool Material: Stainless Steel, Polished Overall Length: 240 Mm (minimum) Scoop Diameter: 30 Mm And 24mm (minimum) With Plastic Handle (polypropylene), Size: 130 Mm X Width-20 Mm (minimum) Draining Small Hole In The Scoop 55 72 Pieces Spoon, Serving Type: Serving Spoon Body Shape: Oval Materials: Stainless Steel Dimension: Length: 23 Cm X Width: 5 Cm (minimum) Scoop Dimension (l X W X D): 7 Cm X 5 Cm X 0.9 Cm (minimum) Spoon Thickness: 1.6 Mm (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 56 24 Pieces Spoon, Wooden Type: Wooden Spoon Body Shape: Oval Material: Hardwood Dimensions: Length- 10 Inches X Width- 2 Inches (minimum) Bowl Dimension: Length -3 Inches X Width 2 Inches X Depth -3/4 Inches (minimum) Total Length: 10 Inches (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Smooth Surface Finished And No Sharp Edges 57 6 Pieces Stock Pot, Large Type: Stock Pot, Large Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.8 Mm Thick (minimum) Top Diameter: 30 Cm (minimum) Height: 31 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 20 Quarts (22.7 Liters) Oven Safe To 350⁰f And Dishwasher Safe. With Aluminum Disc Layer In Bottom For Even Heat (5 Mm Aluminum 58 9 Pieces Strainer Chinois, Small Strainer Chinois, Small Body Shape: Conical Material: Stainless Steel Strainer Diameter: 14 Cm (minimum) Strainer Depth: 13 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 15 Cm (minimum) With 1 Mm (approx.) Fine Mesh Handle Has Provision For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 59 6 Pieces Strainer Chinois, Medium Type: Strainer Chinois, Medium Body Shape: Conical Material: Stainless Steel Strainer Diameter: 20 Cm (minimum) Strainer Depth: 21.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 20 Cm (minimum) With 2 Mm. (approx.) Fine Mesh Handle Has Provision For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 60 24 Pieces Strainer Medium, Fine Type: Strainer, Medium Fine Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Strainer Diameter: 20 Cm (minimum) Strainer Depth: 7 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 18 Cm (minimum) With 2 Mm. (approx.) Fine Mesh Strainer’s Two Layers Of Tightly Woven Mesh Catches Handle Has Provision For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 61 24 Pieces Strainer Small, Fine Type: Strainer, Small Fine Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel Strainer Diameter: 13 Cm (minimum) Strainer Depth: 5 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 13 Cm (minimum) With 1 Mm. (approx.) Fine Mesh Handle Has Provision For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 62 24 Pieces Tenderizer, Medium Type: Tenderizer Body Shape: Ergonomic Material: Cast Aluminum Overall Length: 26 Cm (minimum) Dual-sided Hammer, Square Head: 6 Cm X 6 Cm (minimum) Ridged Surface With Rows Of Dull, Pyramid-shaped Spikes Weight: 250 Grams To 500 Grams Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 63 9 Pieces Thermometer, Pocket/pin Type: Pocket/pen Thermometer Body Shape: Tubular Pen Style Digital Thermometer Product Size: 100 Mm X 40 Mm X 14 Mm (minimum) Display Size: 40 Mm X 20 Mm (minimum) Prove Length: 200 Mm (minimum) Measuring Range: -50 °c To 300 °c (-58 ⁰f To 372 ⁰f) Resolution: 0.1 °c / 0.2 °f 64 24 Pieces Tong, 12 Inches Type: Tong , 12 Inches Body Shape: Standard Material: Stainless Steel Size: 12 Inches Stainless-steel Arms With Soft, Comfortable Grips Nylon Heads Safe For Nonstick Cookware Heat-resistant Up To 400 Degrees Fahrenheit Tongs Lock Closed For Storage Preferably With A Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher-safe Must Be Branded 65 30 Pieces Tong, 8 Inches Type: Tong, 8 Inches Body Shape: Standard Material: Stainless Steel Size: 8 Inches Stainless-steel Arms With Soft, Comfortable Grips Nylon Heads Safe For Nonstick Cookware Heat-resistant Up To 400 Degrees Fahrenheit Tongs Lock Closed For Storage Preferably With A Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher-safe 66 24 Pieces Tray, Baking, Small Type: Baking Tray Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Stainless Steel Dimension: 20 Cm X 30 Cm X 3.7 Cm (minimum) Body Thickness: 0.7- 1.0 Mm Preferably With Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 67 36 Pieces Tray, Utility Type: Utility Tray Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Stainless Steel Dimension: Length- 48 Cm X Width-32 Cm X Height-2.5 Cm (minimum) Reinforced Edges Finish: Polished Preferably With A Packing Case Washable And Oven Safe 68 24 Pieces Turner 3” X 6” Type: Slotted Turner, 3" X 6" Body Shape: Straight Material: Stainless Steel Blade Size (lx W): 6 Inches X 3 Inches (minimum) Handle Length: 5 Inches (minimum) Overall Length: 13 Inches (minimum) Solid Turner With Straight Slotted Blade Wooden Handle With Triple Rivets Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 69 3 Pieces Utility Cart Type: Utility Cart Body Shape: Rectangular Material: Plastic, Polypropylene(pp) Dimension: (l X W X H) 84 Cm X 43 Cm X 95 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 330 Lbs (150 Kg) Loads (minimum) Three (3) Shelving With At Least 25 Cm Distance Between Shelves Tub Shelf Measure (l X W X D) 84 Cm X 43 Cm X 7 Cm (minimum) With Four (4) Swivel Caster, 10 Cm Diameter, Two Which Have Locking Brakes Preferably With A Packing Case Easy Grip Handles On Each End Of Cart 70 12 Pieces Weighing Scale, 1 Kg, Digital Type: Digital Weighing Scale Body Shape: Rectangular Materials: Engineering Plastic And Stainless Steel Weighing Plate Capacity: 1 Kg Accuracy: 1 Gram Back Light Lcd Display With 15 Mm Minimum High Digits Weighing Units: Gram, Ounce, Pound Size: L X W X H Mm ) 163 Mm X 245 Mm X 79 Mmm (minimum) 71 6 Pieces Weighing Scale, 5kg Type: Mechanical Weighing Scale Body Type: Circular Bowl Material: Stainless Steel Bowl And Metal Body (coated) Mechanism Type: Spring Lever Capacity: 5 Kg /11 Lb. Sensitivity/graduated By 10 Gm Measurement Units: Gram/kilogram Manual Setting On Zero, Must Be Accurate And Durable Calibrate The Scale Using The Adjustment Knob Preferably With A Packing Case Delivery Must Include Instruction Manual Written In Good English With Service Centers Located In The Major Cities In The Philippines Warranty Period Of 1 Year (parts And Service) Must Be Branded 72 24 Pieces Wire Skimmer, Small Type: Skimmer, Wire Mesh Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, Polished Overall Length: 40 Cm (minimum) Skimmer Head Diameter: 12 Cm (minimum) Diameter Of Holes: 2 Mm (approx.) Handle Has Hole For Hanging Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwashing Safe Must Be Branded. 73 6 Pieces Wire Whisk, Heavy Duty Type: Wire Whisk, Heavy Duty Body Shape: Ballon Material: Heavy Duty Stainless Steel Dimensions (l X W): 31.8 Cm X 7.6 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 12 Cm (minimum) With Hanging Loop No. Of Wires: 8 Wires Wire Diameter: 2 Mm (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 74 24 Pieces Wire Whisk, Medium Type Wire Whisk, Medium Body Shape: Ballon Material: Stainless Steel Wire Whisk Medium Dimensions (l X W): 25.4 Cm X 7 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 10 Cm (minimum) With Hanging Loop No. Of Wires: 6 Wires Wire Diameter: 1.8 Mm (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 75 24 Pieces Wire Whisk, Small Type: Wire Whisk, Small Body Shape: Balloon Material: Stainless Steel Wire Whisk Medium Dimensions (l X W): 20.3 Cm X 6 Cm (minimum) Handle Length: 10 Cm (minimum) With Hanging Loop No. Of Wires: 6 Wires Wire Diameter: 1.8 Mm (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded. 76 3 Pieces Wok, Medium Type: Wok, Medium Body Shape: Round Material: Carbon Steel Thickness: 1.8 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimensions (dia. X H): 45 Cm X 14 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Steel Riveted Convenient Both Side Handle 10 Cm (minimum) With Flat Bottom Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwashing Safe Must Be Branded. 77 12 Pieces Wok, Small Type: Wok, Small Body Shape: Round Material: Carbon Steel Thickness: 1.5 Mm Thick (minimum) Dimensions (dia. X H): 36 Cm X 10 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Steel Riveted Convenient Both Side Handle 8 Cm (minimum) With Flat Bottom Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwashing Safe Must Be Branded. 78 6 Pieces Working Table Type: Working Table, Stainless Steel Body Shape: Rectangular Material: 304 Stainless Steel, 1.29 Mm Thick (gauge 16) Minimum Length: 1220 Mm (minimum) Width: 700 Mm (minimum) Height: 850 Mm (minimum) Tubular Stainless Steel Legs, 38mm (minimum) With 4 Adjustable Bullet Feet Fully Welded Construction Thickness: Gauge 16 (1.29 Mm Thick) Minimum Stainless Steel Table Top With Stainless Steel Undershelf Distance Between Table Top And Undershelf Is 650 Mm (minimum) Preferably With A Packing Case Or Crate No Sharp Edges And Rough Surfaces Must Be Branded. 79 24 Pieces Zester Type: Cheese Zester Body Shape: Standard Material: Stainless Steel Grating Surface Dimensions (l X W): 20.3 Cm X 4 Cm (minimum) Overall Length: 32.5 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Plastic (polypropylene) Ergonomic Handle Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe The Plastic Material Used Must Be Non-toxic Must Be Branded. Bread And Pastry Production Nc Ii 1 2 Set Air Compressor With Airbrush Cake Decorating Set Tight-tolerance Head Provides Extremely Fine Atomization With Razor-sharp Detail Needle Backstop At The Rear Of The Airbrush Allows You To Pre- Set The Trigger Travel, Producing Consistent Line Widths Includes Pre-installed 0.2mm Nozzle (tip), Nozzle Cap, Needle, And Removable Needle Cap For A Spray Pattern Between Hairline And 3/4″ (20mm) Fine-finish, Stainless-steel Needle Minimizes Tip-dry Gravity-feed 2cc Color Cup Won’t Obstruct Your View During Fine Detail Work Solvent-resistant Needle Packing Allows Safe Use With All Types Of Spraying Mediums Uses Standard 1/8″ Bsp Air Hose Fittings 2 12 Pieces Beater 3 12 Pieces Board, Chopping, 6 Color The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Polypropylene, Food Grade 2) Board Size: Length: 18 Inches 3) Width: 12 Inches 4) Thickness: 0.75 To 1 Inch 5) Color: Assorted Colors, 6 Different Colors Per Set 6) With Hole For Storage Purposes 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 8) The Item Must Be Branded 4 2 Pieces Boiler, Double Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1/16 Inch (1.5 Mm) (minimum) Lid Material: Glass Riveted Handle On Both Side Diameter: 9 1/2 Inches (minimum) Total Height: 9.4 Inches (minimum) Inset Bottom Diameter: 9 Inches (minimum) Inset Top Diameter: 9 Inches (minimum) Capacity: 2 Liters (minimum) 5 24 Set Bowl, Mixing (6 Pieces/set) 6 12 Pieces Cake Pans, Round #4, #6, #8, #10, #12, #14, #16 7 12 Pieces Cake Stand, With Tier Type: Cake Stand With Tier, Food Grade Body Shape: Circular With 3 Tier Material: Hard Plastic, Polypropylene, 4 Mm Thick The Tier Consists Of The Following Sizes: Tier 1: 18 Cm Diameter (minimum) Tier 2: 25 Cm Diameter (minimum) Tier 3 : 30 Cm Diameter (minimum) Column Diameter: 20 To 30 Mm (solid) Distance Between Tiers: 15 Cm Over-all Length: 30 Cm (minimum) Assembled Column Is Used For Maximum Strength And Stability Of The Stand Must Be Packed In Set Smooth And No Sharp Edges 8 6 Pieces Cake Turn Table Type: Turn Table Body Shape: Circular Material: Cast Aluminum Plate And Cast Iron Base Upper Plate: 30 Cm Diameter (minimum) And 1.4 Cm Thickness (minimum) Base Dimensions: 18 Cm (minimum); 1.4 Cm Thickness (minimum) Total Height: 10 Cm To 15 Cm Turntable With Ball Bearing To Turn Easier Preferably Packed In Any Kind Of Packaging Comes With No Sharp Edges To Rotate Smoothly In 360 Degrees Clockwise Or Counter Clockwise 9 26 Pieces Coupler Type: Food Grade Body Shape: Tubular Material: Hard Plastic, Polypropylene, Any Bright Color Height: 3cm (minimum) Top Diameter: 1.27 Cm (minimum) Bottom Diameter: 2.54 Cm (minimum) Preferably With Storage Case The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic And Dishwasher Safe 10 24 Pieces Cup, Measuring (for Solid) Type: Measuring Cup Set Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick (minimum) Each Set Contains The Following: 1 Pc - 1 Cup (237 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Cup (118 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/3 Cup (79 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/4 Cup (59 Ml) Handle Dimension: Length-12 Cm X Width-1 Cm (minimum) Measuring Capacity Engraved On The Handle Strip Handles Have Provision For Hanging Preferably With Packing Case Smooth Surfaces And Dishwasher Safe 11 24 Pieces Cup, Measuring, 250ml For Liquid Type: Measuring Cup Set Body Shape: Round Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick (minimum) Each Set Contains The Following: 1 Pc - 1 Cup (237 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Cup (118 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/3 Cup (79 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/4 Cup (59 Ml) Handle Dimension: Length-12 Cm X Width-1 Cm (minimum) Measuring Capacity Engraved On The Handle Strip Handles Have Provision For Hanging Preferably With Packing Case Smooth Surfaces And Dishwasher Safe 12 24 Pieces Cup, Measuring, 500ml For Liquid The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Clear, Non-porous Glass 2) Food Grade 3) Freezer And Microwave Safe 4) Holds 500 Ml, With 25 Or 50 Ml Increment And With Specified Metric And English System Of Measurement 5) With Handle & Spout For Easy Pouring 6) With Permanent Graduation Markings 7) Item Must Be Branded 13 2 Pieces Cutter, Dough Type: Scrapper Body Shape: Straight Blade Material: Stainless Steel Straight Blade With Stainless Steel Handle Blade Dimension: Length : 15 Cm X Width: 11 Cm X Thickness: 1.2 Mm(minimum) Handle Dimension: Length: 15 Cm X Diameter: 3 Cm (minimum) Preferably With Packing Case Food Grade And Dishwasher Safe Design Allows Item To Be Hung For Storage 14 12 Pieces Cutter, Pie The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Blade Material: 2 Mm (minimum) Stainless Steel 316 2) Cuts 8 Even Slices, With Handle On Both Sides 3) Diameter: 26 Cm 4) Food Grade 5) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 6) The Item Must Be Branded. 15 12 Pieces Flour Sifter, Hand Cranked Type: Hand Cranked Body Shape: Round Shape Material: Stainless Steel Dimension: Diameter: 133.3 Mm (minimum) X Height: 165 Mm (minimum) Thickness: 0.79 Mm (minimum) (body) And Constructed With Stainless Steel Wire Mesh # 30 Bottom Volume Markings Should Be Seen Inside And Outside Of The Sifter Capacity: 5 Cups (1.18 Liter) Spring Action Squeeze Handle Stainless Steel Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe 16 12 Pieces Grater Type: Four Sided Box Grater Body Shape: Box In Shape Material: Stainless Steel Blade And Plastic (polypropylene Handle) Grater Dimensions: Height- 25 Cm X Width-13 Cm X Depth-10 Cm (minimum) Side 1: Large-hole Shredder With 6 Mm Hole Side 2: Slicer Side 3: Small-hole Shredder With 3 Mm Hole Side 4: Grater With Strips About 1.27 Cm To 2.54 Cm Length Preferably With Packing Case Food Grade & Dishwashing Safe 17 12 Pieces Knife, Kitchen The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Stainless Steel Blade 2) Handle Material: Hard Plastic ( Polypropelene) 3) Overall Length: 10 Inches (minimum) 4) Blade Length: 5 Inches (minimum) 5) Handle Length: 5 Inches (minimum) 6) Thickness Of Blade: 1/8 Inches (minimum) 7) Blade Width: 1.5 Inches (minimum) 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 18 12 Pieces Knife, Pallet The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Blade Material: Stainless Steel 316 2) Handle Material: Hardwood (smooth Finish) 3) Blade Dimension 4) Length= 7 .5 Inches (minimum) 5) Width = 1.5 Inches (minimum) 6) Thickness Of Blade: 3/16 Inches (minimum) 7) Total Length = 12 To 14 Inches 8) The Item Must Be Branded. 19 12 Pieces Ladle, 3 Oz. Material: Stainless Steel Thickness: 1 Mm Thick (minimum) Handle Length: 28 Cm (minimum) Capacity: 3 Oz. (85 Ml) Hooked Handle Design Allows It To Easily Sit On The Edge Of Pots. Preferably With A Packing Case Dishwasher Safe Must Be Branded 20 12 Pieces Loaf Pan Big The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Length: 15 Inches (minimum) 4) Width: 4 1/2 Inches (minimum) 5) Depth: 4 Inches (minimum) 6) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 7) Food Grade 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 21 12 Pieces Loaf Pan, Medium The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Length: 12 Inches (minimum) 4) Width: 4 1/2 Inches (minimum) 5) Depth: 4 Inches (minimum) 6) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 7) Food Grade 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 22 12 Pieces Loaf Pan, Small The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Length: 8 Inches (minimum) 4) Width: 4 1/2 Inches (minimum) 5) Depth: 4 Inches (minimum) 6) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 7) Food Grade 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 23 12 Pieces Muffin Pan, Big The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Cup Diameter (top): 3 7/8 Inches 4) Length: 13.75 Inches (minimum) X Width: 10.5 Inches (minimum) X Depth: 2 Inches (minimum) 5) Number Of Cups In A Tray: 6 Cup 6) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 7) Food Grade 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 24 12 Pieces Muffin Pan, Medium The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Cup Diameter (top): 3 1/4 Inches 4) Length: 13.75 Inches (minimum) 5) Width: 10.5 Inches (minimum) 6) Depth: 1 1/2 Inches (minimum) 7) Number Of Cups In A Tray: 12 Cup 8) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 9) Food Grade 10) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 11) The Item Must Be Branded 25 12 Pieces Muffin Pan, Small The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 2/32 Inch (minimum) 3) Depth: 1.13 Inches (minimum) 4) Length: 20.63 Inches (minimum) 5) Width: 14.13 Inches (minimum) 6) Number Of Cups In A Tray: 24 Cup 7) Cup Diameter (top): 2 3/4 Inches 8) Extended Sides For An Easy Grip And Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 9) Food Grade 10) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 11) The Item Must Be Branded. 26 12 Pieces Pie Pan, 10 Inches Diameter The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 1/16 Inch (minimum) 3) Depth: 3 To 5 Inches 4) Set Must Each Contain The Following Volume Capacities: 6inches - 1.5 Liters (minimum) 8inches - 2.1 Liters (minimum) 10inches - 2.6 Liters (minimum) 12inches - 3.3 Liters (minimum) 14inches - 3.7 Liters (minimum) 16inches - 4.2 Liters (minimum) 5) Rolled Edge For Better Strength And Smooth Surface With No Sharp Edges 6) Food Grade 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 8) The Item Must Be Branded. 27 12 Pie Pan, #6, #8, #10 The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Anodized Aluminum 2) Thickness: 1/16 Inch (minimum) 3) Depth: 3 To 5 Inches 4) Set Must Each Contain The Following Volume Capacities: 6inches - 1.5 Liters (minimum) 8inches - 2.1 Liters (minimum) 10inches - 2.6 Liters (minimum) 12inches - 3.3 Liters (minimum) 14inches - 3.7 Liters (minimum) 16inches - 4.2 Liters (minimum) 5) Rolled Edge For Better Strength And Smooth Surface With No Sharp Edges 6) Food Grade 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 8) The Item Must Be Branded 28 12 Pieces Pillars, Cake The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Crystal Clear Fiber Plastic, Food Grade 2) Tube Diameter: 2.5 Cm (minimum) 3) Base And Top Diameter: 3.5 Cm (minimum) 4) Height: 13 Cm (minimum) 5) Four ( 4 )pcs Per Set. 6) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 7) The Item Must Be Branded. 29 50 Pieces Piping Bag The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Transparent Disposable Plastic For Dispensing Ingredients To Pastries 2) Food Grade 3) Length: 9 Inches Minimum 4) Width: 3 Inches (minimum) 5) Volume: 1 Liter (approximate) 6) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 7) The Item Must Be Branded. 30 8 Pieces Rectangular Pan, 1 X 8 The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Aluminum 2) Thickness : 1/16 Inch (minimum) 3) Dimensions: # 8 : 11 Inches X 7 Inches X 2 Inches 4) Oven Safe To 500°f / 260°c 5) Food Grade 6) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 7) The Item Must Be Branded. 31 12 Pieces Rolling Pins The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Hardwood (solid Wood In Natural Color) 2) Dimensions: 2.36 Inches Diameter X 9.45 Inches Length 3) 1.57 Inches Root Diameter X 2.76 Inches (approximate Dimensions) 4) Handle Length: 3.15 Inches 5) Smooth Surface Finish With No Sharp Edges 6) Smooth Rotation Of The Revolving Barrel 7) Materials Used Must Be Food Grade 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 32 12 Pieces Rubber Scraper The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Silicone Blade (head) & Plastic Handle, (polypropylene ) 2) Color: Any Color 3) Head Length: 11.5 Cm (minimum) 4) Head Width: 7.0 Cm (minimum) 5) Handle Length : 24 To 30 Cm 6) Safe Working Temperature : -40°f To 446°f 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 8) The Item Must Be Branded 33 12 Pieces Sauce Pan The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Stainless Steel 2) Diameter: 16 Cm 3) Height: 8 Cm 4) With Stainless Steel Cover 5) Welded Handle (insulated) : 15 To 17 Cm 6) Thickness: 1.8 To 2 Mm 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 8) The Item Must Be Branded 34 12 Pieces Sheet Pan The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Aluminum 2) Thickness: 1/16 Inch (minimum) 3) Length: 17 Inches (minimum) 4) Width: 12 Inches 5) Height: 3/16 Inches (minimum) 6) Smooth Finish Surfaces Without Sharp Edges 7) Corrosion Resistant 8) Superior Heat Conduction 9) Oven Safe To 500°f / 260°c (maximum) 10) Heat Resistant 11) Food Grade 12) The Item Must Be Branded. 35 50 Pieces Spoon, Measuring Type: Measuring Spoon Body Shape: Bowl In Shape Material: Stainless Steel, 0.7 Mm Thick (minimum) The Set Consists Of The Following Sizes: 1 Pc - 1 Tbsp. (15 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Tbsp. ( 7.5 Ml) 1 Pc - 1 Tsp. (5 Ml) 1 Pc - 1/2 Tsp. (2.5 Ml) 36 12 Pieces Spoon, Wooden The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Beechwood Or Equivalent 2) Length :12 Inches (minimum) 3) Width: 2.6 Inches (minimum) 4) Depth = 1.0 Inch (minimum) 5) No Hole Or Slot Within The Spoon Bowl 6) Smooth Surface Finish With No Sharp Edges 7) Handle With Hole For Hanging Storage Purposes 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 37 12 Pieces Strainer The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Stainless Steel Frame 2) Thickness Of Frame: 1/16 Inch Diameter (minimum) 3) Handle: Stainless Steel 4) Basket Material: Stainless Steel Wire Mesh, Very Fine Mesh 5) Diameter: 8 Inches (minimum) 6) Half-rounded Mesh 7) Smooth Surfaces With No Sharp Edges 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 38 40 Pieces Tip, Decorating The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Materials: Stainless Steel 2) Tube Height: 1 To 1.25 Inches 3) Tube Diameter: 0.7 To 1 Inch 4) Tube Tip: Assorted Designs 5) Wall Thickness: 1/32 Inch (minimum) 6) Tube Shape: Conical 7) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic 8) The Item Must Be Branded 39 12 Pieces Weighing Scale, 10kgs The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material: Aluminum Pan And Metal Body (coated) 2) Color: Any Color 3) Mechanism Type: Spring Lever 4) Capacity: 10 Kg / 22 Lb. 5) Sensitivity/graduated By 10 Gm 6) Measurement Units: Gram/kilogram 7) Manual Setting On Zero, Must Be Accurate And Durable 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) Delivery Must Include Correct Instruction Manual Written In Good English 10) Warranty Period Of 1 Year 11) The Item Must Be Branded 40 12 Pieces Weighing Scale, 5kgs, Digital The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Materials: Engineering Plastic 2) Capacity: 5 Kg 3) Accuracy: 1 Gram 4) Four-digit Lcd Display 5) Auto Power Off 6) Size: ( L X W X H Cm ) 24 Cm X 17 Cm X 4 Cm 7) Battery Operated, Two Aaa Batteries 8) Warranty Period Of 1 Year 9) The Item Must Be Branded. 41 12 Pieces Wire Whisk, Medium The Item Shall Have The Following Specifications: 1) Material - Stainless Steel 2) Overall Length - 12 Inches (minimum) 3) Depth - 3 Inches (minimum) 4) Whip Length: 7 Inches (minimum) 5) Diameter Of Wire: 2/32 Inches (minimum) 6) Handle Length: 5 Inches (minimum) 7) Number Of Looped Wire = 6 (minimum) 8) The Materials Used Must Be Non-toxic. 9) The Item Must Be Branded Lot 3 Hairdressing Nc Ii 1 2 Pieces Body Brush, Prosthetic Material: Stiff Nylon Bristle Size: At Least 41.8 Cm X 6.5 Cm (over-all Size) Brush Height: 8mm(minimum) With Wooden Handle 2 2 Pieces Bowl, Mixing, Plastic Material: Plastic Inner Diameter: 10.5 Cm (minimum) Height: 6cm (minimum) Thickness Is 2mm (minimum) Any Color Non-toxic 3 4 Pieces Bowl, Shampoo Bowl Material: Abs Plastic With Adjustable Stand (height: 39 Inches To 54 Inches) Minimum Bowl Dimensions: 19 Inches(l) X 20 Inches(w) X 10 Inches(h); With Sealed Foam Rubber Neck Rest For Shampoo Bowls With Hose Attachment Of 7 Ft. Long(minimum) Stainless Steel Frame Portable Type Packed With Shipping Carton Box Branded 4 2 Pieces Box, Hairpin Material: Plastic Bristle Paddle Brush Type Wooden Handle Minimum Width: 2 Inches Non Toxic Packed With Protective Carton Box 5 2 Pieces Brush, Applicator Material: Plastic Non-toxic Size: Small=190mm Length Medium=270mm Large=300mm Handle Width:70mm (minimum) Width Of Tip: 80mm (minimum) With Hair Coloring Dyeing Board Packed With Plastic Pouch 6 2 Pieces Brush, Hair Material: Plastic Bristle Paddle Brush Type Wooden Handle Minimum Width: 2 Inches Non Toxic Packed With Protective Carton Box 7 2 Pieces Cap, Frosting, With Hook Cap Material: Silicone Type: Reusable, Perforated Cap One Size Fits All Or At Least 31cm X 22cm With Pre-cut Tipping Guides With Bleed Proof Inner Liner With A Rounded Metal Hook To Pull Hair Through The Ready Made Perforations Packed With Plastic Pouch 8 2 Pieces Cap, Heating Waterproof Cloth Material. Cordless Type To Fit An Average Size Head (21-24 Inches) Stretch Up To 29 Inches Unisex Hair Care Treatment Styling Reversible And Reusable, Non Toxic Includes With User's Guide In English That Contains: A. Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names B. Operating Procedure On How To Use The Equipment C. Safety Precaution When Using The Equipment Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedure 9 2 Pieces Cape Polyester Cloth Size: At Least 125 Cm X 140 Cm Hairstyling Type Non Toxic Packed With Plastic Pouch 10 6 Pieces Chair, High Bar Stool Material: Metal, Painted With Anti Rust Width Of The Chair:15 Inches Minimum Height :33 Inches (minimum) Synthetic Leather Seat Material Barstool Crown Back Type With Rubber Ring Of Barstool For Anti Skidding 11 12 Pieces Chair, Hydraulic Material: Metal Base Size:length59 Cm, Width54 Cm, Height From 51-78cm Hydraulic Pump Can Be Up And Down By Pedaling Load Capacity:180kg Hydraulic Styling Chair Type Heavy Duty Hydraulic Pump For Height Adjustable And 360' Rotation Hydraulic Pump Build In For Adjusting The Seating Height. With Foot Rest 12 2 Pieces Clamp Material: Plastic Overall Length: 9.5cm Thickness:10mm(minimum) Hairstyling Clamp Type 13 2 Pieces Clamp, Duck Bill Material: Metal Length: 11 Cm (minimum) High Elasticity Stainless Steel Spring. Nonslip Handle Packed With Plastic Pouch Branded 14 2 Pieces Clipper, Hair Body Material: Hard Plastic Blade Material: Carbon Steel Capacity:6 Watts (minimum) Complete With Blade Guard And 4 Comb Attachments (#1, #2, #3, #4) Motor: Magnetic Type, Corded,12v Ac/dc Adaptor Delivers 1,400 Strokes Per Minute, With Complete Accessories Including The Cleaning Brush With Cord 2 Meters Length Minimum With User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions, C. Operating Procedures, Packed With Protective Carton Box Branded 15 2 Pieces Comb, Afro Material: Plastic Size: Overall Length At Least 7 Inches Width: 3.25 Inches(minimum) Number Of Teeth: 12 Teeth (minimum); Teeth Height: 2.5 Inches Long (minimum) 16 2 Pieces Comb, All Purpose Material: Plastic Size#3 Or At Least 18 Cm Long (minimum) Has Both Fine And Medium Teeth Position On One Side Only Height Of The Teeth: 2 Cm (minimum) Non Toxic Packed With Plastic Pouch 17 2 Pieces Comb, Haircutting Material: Hard Plastic Length Including The Handle:180mm (minimum) Width: 30mm (minimum) With Detachable Steel Blades And Blade Holder With Two Sides For Different Cuts With Extra Blades 18 2 Pieces Comb, Large Toothed Material: Plastic Size: At Least 15 Cm Number Of Teeth: 10 Teeth (minimum) Gap Between Comb's Teeth: 0.4 To 0.5 Cm Gap From One Another Teeth Size: At Least 0.3 Cm In Width X 4cm In Length Non Toxic Packed With Plastic Pouch 19 2 Pieces Comb, Tail Material: Plastic Size : 8 Inches(l)minimum X 1 Inches (w) Minimum Tail Length: 4 Inches(minimum) Tooth Length: 3/4 Inch(minimum) Packed With Plastic Pouch 20 2 Pieces Comb, Teasing Material: Plastic With 2 Rows Of Teeth 1st Row: Large Teeth With At Least 25 Mm Long 2nd Row: Small Teeth With At Least 19 Mm Long Over-all Comb Size: 20 Cm (l) Minimum X 3.8 Cm (w) Minimum Non Toxic Packed With Plastic Pouch 21 2 Pieces Comb, Wide Tooth Material: Plastic Size: At Least 15 Cm Number Of Teeth: 10 Teeth (minimum) Gap Between Comb's Teeth: 0.4 To 0.5 Cm Gap From One Another Teeth Size: At Least 0.3 Cm In Width X 4cm In Length 22 12 Pieces Crimpers Power: 25 Watts(minimum) Size: At Least 38 Cm X 15.5 Cm X 9 Cm Maximum Temperature: 200 Degrees Centigrade With Variable Heat Setting. With On/off Switch Button Rated Voltage: 110 -230volts Ac With Power Cord With Plastic Handle 23 12 Pieces Curling Iron Ceramic Curling Iron Capacity: 65watts Voltage: 210-240volts Ac With Power Cord Barrel Size: 1 Inch (minimum) Adjustable Heat Setting With Maximum Temperature Of 200 Degrees Centigrade Swivel Cord Up To 360 Degree 24 2 Pieces Drip Pan Material: Hard Plastic Size: At Least 17.5 X 25.8 X 1 Inches Thickness: 1/8 Inch (minimum) Shallow Rectangular Type Packed With Carton Box 25 12 Pieces Dryer, Hair Power: 1000w Rated Voltage: 220vac At Least (l X W X H): 18.5cm X 16cm X 6.5cm With Plastic Handle Design Packed With Carton Box With Styrofoam Holder With User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels B. Assembly Instructions 26 2 Boxes Gloves, Disposable Material: Plastic Size: At Least 25cm X 23cm Packaging Is 100 Pcs Per Box 27 2 Pieces Gloves, Rubber Size: Medium Thickness: 4 Mil Acid Resistant Packed With Plastic Pouch In Pairs. 28 2 Pieces Gown, Smock Material: Polyester Sizes: 1 Piece = Small Size, At Least (50 Inches X 56 Inches); 1 Piece= Medium Size, At Least (52 Inches X 58 Inches); 1 Piece= Large Size, At Least (54 Inches X 60 Inches); Packed With Plastic Pouch Per Size 29 2 Pieces Hairclips Material: Metal Size: At Least 67mm X 19mm Noncorrosive Packed With Plastic Pouch 30 2 Pieces Hairnet, Invisible Material: Nylon Size: 55mm (minimum) Stretchable And Unisex Type Color: Black Non Toxic Packed With Plastic Pouch 31 2 Pieces Headband Size: 6 Inches (minimum) Woven Crochet Tube Top Headband Very Stretchy, Soft Material, Comfortable And Breathable 32 2 Pieces Headband, Flannel Flannel Cloth Size : At Least 45 Cm (unstretched Circumference) Width: 8 Cm (minimum) 33 2 Pieces Infrared Iron Material: Ionic Ceramic Tourmaline-infused Plates And Abs Plastic Body Power: 70 Watts (minimum) Power Rating: 220-240 Volts Ac; Over-all Size: 24 Cm Long (minimum) Heating Plate Size Up To 50 Mm Heating Time: Within 30 Seconds; Variable Heat Settings: From 250 To 450 Degrees Fahrenheit With Digital Temperature Control Safety Mode: Auto Shut Off After 60 Minutes; With Swivel Cord Comes With Storage Pouch Branded 34 20 Pieces Mirror, Hand Mirror Size 15 Cm Diameter (minimum) Frame Thickness Including Mirror Glass: 6.5mm(minimum) Over-all Length With The Handle Is 20 Cm (minimum) Clear Mirror With No Distortion Frame And Handle Are Made Of Plastic Plane Mirror Type Packed With Carton Box With Styrofoam Protection 35 2 Pieces Mirror, Modular Mirror Type: Plain Mirror Mirror Material: Glass Frame Material: Aluminum (cut To Fit) Dimensions (hxw): 75 Cm X 65 Cm (minimum) Mirror Thickness: 6mm (minimum) 36 2 Pieces Prong Clip, Double Material: Steel Nickel Or Chrome Base Plated Size: 45 Mm Minimum Hairstyling Clip Type Packed With Plastic Handle 37 2 Pieces Prong Clip, Single Material: Steel, Plated Size: 55 Mm (minimum) Type: Single-prong Clip Packed With Plastic Pouch 38 2 Pieces Razor, Straight Blade Material: High Carbon Steel Type: Foldable Straight Razor, Replaceable Blade; Dimensions (lxw): 14 Cm X 2 Cm (minimum) When Folded; Compatible With Double-edged Razor Blades; Package Includes 10 Pieces Blade/box Noncorrosive Branded 39 2 Pieces Roller Pins Material: Metal Size: 60mm Long (minimum) Application: Hair Roller Pins Quantity By Dozen (12 Pieces) Noncorrosive Packed With Plastic Pouch 40 2 Pieces Rollers, Jumbo Material: Plastic Approximately 44mm In Diameter X 64mm Long 41 2 Pieces Rollers, Large Size Material: Plastic Size: At Least 40mm Diameter X 60mm Long Hairstyling Type Packed With Plastic Pouch 42 2 Pieces Rollers, Medium Size Material: Plastic; Diameter: 38 Mm(minimum) Length: 58mm (minimum) Hairstyling Type Packed With Plastic Pouch 43 2 Pieces Scissor, Cutting Material: Stainless Steel Total Length: 17cm (minimum) Blade Width At Least 10 Cm Noncorrosive Packed With Plastic Pouch Branded 44 2 Pieces Scissor, Thinning Blade Material: High Carbon Steel Blade Length At Least 6cm With Straight Blade Type Style: Right-handed Scissor Total Length At Least 17cm One Side Comb Cutter Noncorrosive Packed With Plastic Pouch Branded 45 2 Pieces Scoop Material: Plastic Capacity:1/2 Cup (minimum) Rounded Edges With Handle Thickness: 1.5 Mm (minimum) 46 4 Pieces Shower Cap Material: Plastic Size: One Size Fits All Or 30cm Reusable And Waterproof Packed With Plastic Pouch 47 2 Pieces Spatula Material: Plastic Dimension: Over-all Length Of 7.5 Cm Long, X 1.5 Cm Wide (minimum) Application: Hair Waxing Removal Packed With Plastic Pouch 48 2 Pieces Spray Gun Material: Transparent Plastic Capacity: 300ml (minimum) Trigger Type Sprayer Dimension: At Least Diameter Of Bottom Is 7 Cm And The Height Is 17cm 49 2 Pieces Steamer, Hair Power 450 Watts (minimum) Rating Is 220 Volts/50-60hz Hood Material: Polycarbonate Hood Has At Least 30 Cm Diameter Opening X 25 Cm Deep Timer Setting Is Up To 60 Minutes With At Least 32-ounce Water Reservoir Adjustable Height From 100 To 150cm With At Least 5 Swivel Casters With User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions, Operating Procedures, Branded 50 12 Pieces Stool Material: Metal, Electroplated Load Capacity: 150kg Design: Swivel Stool With Backrest With Hydraulic Lift To Adjust Height Freely. With Thick Sponge Cushion. With At Least Four Caster Wheels. With Thick Sponge Cushion. Swivel Stool With Backrest No Sharp Edges Branded Housekeeping Nc Ii 1 2 Pieces Alarm Clock Alarm Clock, Digital, Overall Dimensions: 13.5 X 8 X 4.5 Cm (approx.) Material: Plastic (pe/abs) Illuminated Lcd Digital Display: Time (12/24), Calendar (mm/dd), Temperature, Alarm Status (on/off), Snooze Display Size: 10 X 5 Cm (minimum), Time Can Be Read 30 Ft Daytime. Runs On Aaa Battery Which Come Together With The Item Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges, Includes User's Manual Which Contains Operation Procedure, Name Of Parts, Safety Precautions, Trouble Shooting. 2 50 Pieces Apron, Polyester-cotton Bib Apron, Sleeveless Adjustable Neck Loop Material: Polyester - Cotton Fabric Dimension: 70 To 60 Cm (minimum) With 2 Or 3 Pockets Uni-color, Dark No Sharp Edges And Loose Threads 3 10 Pieces Baskets, Laundry 3 - Bag Laundry Sorter, With Wheels Bag: Polyester, Rectangular Shape, Detachable From Frame With Metal Handle And Hanging Hook Bag Dimensions: Rectangular 22 X 15 X 8 Inch (minimum) Frame Material: Corrosion Resistant Steel, Sturdy No Wobble Frame Overall Dimensions: Rectangular, 31 X 30 X15 Inch (minimum) With Four Casters, 2-inch Diameter (minimum) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 4 2 Pieces Bed, Queen Bed Set, Queen Size (60 X 75 Inch) Rectangular 1) Frame: Knock-down Type, All Steel, Powder Coated Including Headboard, Bare Weight: 20 Kg (minimum) No Wobble And Noise 2) Comes With Fabric Covered Foam 6 Inches Thick Foam Density: 29 -33 Kg/cu.m. No Sharp Edges 5 2 Pieces Bed, Single Bed, Single Size (w36 X L75 Inch) Rectangular 1) Frame: Knock-down Type, All Steel, Powder Coated Including Head Board, Bare Weight: 13 Kg (minimum) No Wobble And Noise 2) Comes With Fabric Covered Foam 6 Inches Thick Foam Density: 29 -33 Kg/cu.m. No Sharp Edges 6 2 Pieces Board, Ironing Type: Foldable Type Ironing Board Body Shape: Standard Material: 25 Mm Tubing Approx., 0.8 Mm Thickness Board Size: 32 Inches (minimum) Body Size :120 Cm X 30 Cm X 5 Cm Color: Any Comes With Box No Sharp Edges 7 20 Pieces Boots, Safety, Plastic Upper Material: Elastic Pvc Sizes: 7inches - 5pcs 8inches - 5 Pcs 9inches - 5 Pcs 10inches - 5 Pcs 11inches - 5 Pcs Height: 13 To 14 Inches Plain Toe Type Of Boots: Unisex Rain Boots With Rugged Tractor Lug Outsole Packed With Carton Box Per Size 8 10 Pieces Brushes, For Housekeeping Brush, Floor Scrubbing, Angled Long Handle Bristle Material: Plastic, Stiff Handle Material: Metal Tubular Corrosion Resistant, Overall Length : 120 Cm. (minimum) Bristle Length: 5 Cm (=/- 1cm) Scrubbing Surface: 25 X 6 Cm (+/-1 Cm) No Sharp Edges 9 10 Pieces Buckets, Water Water Bucket Bucket Material: Hard Plastic, Round Body Capacity: 10 To 12 Liters Handle Material: Steel Smooth And Glossy Surface, No Sharp Edges 10 2 Pieces Caddy, Toilet Carrying Caddy For Toilet Cleaning Supplies Holds Spray Bottles And Other Cleaning Supplies, No. Of Compartments: 3 (minimum) Material: Plastic Tray Depth: 11 Cm (approx.) Overall Dimension: 36 X 26 Cm (approx.) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 11 2 Pieces Carpet Sweeper Carpet Sweeper, Cordless Electric Motorized Single Brush Roll (removable) Body Material: Hard Plastic, (abs) Or Its Equivalent, Any Color Equipped With Rechargeable Battery (16 Minutes Run Time On Carpet), Removable Dirt Box Sweep Width: 8 Inches (minimum) Capacity (volume): 0.35 Lit.(minimum) Handle: Metal, Powder- Coated, With Plastic/rubber Grip, Swivel Steering Assembled Height: 44 Inches (minimum) Comes With Battery Charger 220/240vac, 50/60hz With Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 3a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) No Sharp Edges Includes User's Manual Which Contains Operation Procedure, Name Of Parts, Safety Precautions, Trouble Shooting. 12 2 Pieces Cart, For Housekeeping Nc Ii Housekeeping Cart Trolley Equipped With Three-shelves With Steel/laminated Panels Single Door, Top Layer With Divider, Bag Holder, And 4 Wheels Cart Frame: Steel, Powder Coated Wheels: 2non-swivel 2 Swivel, 6 Inch Diameter, Non-markings Overall Dimensions: Rectangular 90 X 48 X 1010 Cm (minimum) Comes With Accessory Linen Bag Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 13 20 Pieces Cleaning Cloths, Lint-free Lint Free Cleaning Cloths Material: Cotton Dimensions : Rectangular 16 X 26 Inch 14 2 Pieces Coffee Maker Coffee Maker, Electric Material: Metal, Plastic, Glass Capacity: 6 Cups (minimum) Detachable Tank, With Water Level Indicator Non-stick Warming Plate: Removable And Washable Filter Non-drip Valve: Lighted On/off Switch Power Supply: 220 V -240 V Ac 50/60 Hz, 500w Minimum Comes With A Heat-resistant Glass Pitcher With A 1-meter (minimum) Power Cord, Molded Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 5a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges With Dti-bps Certification, Brand And Electrical Ratings Clearly And Permanently Mark On The Item Comes With English Manual That Contains Users Guide, List Of Parts, Maintenance Guide, Safety Guide 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service With Service Centers Located In Major Cities In The Philippines. 15 10 Pieces Dustpan Dustpan, Upright Standing Material: Plastic Overall Length: 65 Cm (minimum) Pan: Round Back, 24 X 26 X 9 Cm (minimum) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 16 10 Pieces Duster, Anti-static Anti-static Duster Duster Material: Polypropylene Micro Fiber Duster: Length : 30 Cm (minimum), Overall Length: 50 Cm (minimum) Handle Material: Hard Plastic, No Sharp Edges 17 4 Pieces Fan, Electric Stand Fan, Electric Material: Metal, Plastic Size/diameter: 18 Inches Power Rating: 70 Watts (minimum), 220 / 240 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz, Single Phase Rotation Angle: 90 Degrees Base: Stable, 16 Inches Diameter (approx.) Removable Metal Guard On Front And Rear 3-speed Settings Comes With 1.5 Meters Power Cord And With Molded Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 3a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Includes User's Manual In English Which Contains: A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names, B. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, C. Safety Precautions When Using The Equipment, D. Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedures With Dti-bps Certification, Brand And Electrical Ratings Clearly And Permanently Mark On The Item 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service 18 6 Pieces Fire Extinguisher (with Contents) 1. For Type A, B, C Fire: Dry Chemicals (monoammonium Phosphate) 2. Portable Type 3. Capacity: 5 - 6 Kgs 4. Rechargeable Cylinder Metal 5. Working Pressure Of Cylinder: 400 Psi 6. Brass Valve With Pressure Gage 7. With Rubberized Hose And Aluminum Nozzle Attached 8. With Squeeze Lever To Discharge And Safety Pin 9. Painted With Metal Primer And Red Enamel Paint 10. Includes With User's Guide In English That Contains: A. Operating Procedure On How To Use The Equipment B. Safety Precaution When Using The Equipment C. 11. 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service 12. The Item Must Be Branded And Have Good Quality 19 10 Pieces Flashlight 11 Flashlight Led 12 1,000 Lumens (minimum), Color: White, Battery: Rechargeable, At Least 3,500 Mah , Can Be Used Also With 3 X Aaa Batteries; Body: Aluminum Alloy, No Sharp Edges 13 Dimensions: 5 Inches X 1 Inch Diameter (minimum) 14 Operating Duration Of Battery When Fully Charged: At Least 2 Hours; Includes 220/240vac, 50/60hz Power Adapter /charger And User's Manual In English Which Includes: 15 A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names, 16 B. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, 17 C. Safety Precautions When Using The Equipment, 18 Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedures Branded, With 1 Year Warranty 20 2 Pieces Flat Iron Clothes Flat Iron, Electric Material: Metal /plastic Body, Heat-resistant Plastic Handle, Aluminum Sole Overall Dimension: (l X W X H) 25 Cm X 12 Cm X 12 Cm (minimum) Power Rating : 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 1000 Watts (minimum) Equipped With Light Indicator, Variable Temperature Control, Overheat Protection, Power Cord And Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 10a Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges, Comes With English Manual That Contains: Users Guide, List Of Parts, Maintenance Guide, Safety Guide. The Item Must Be Branded, With Dti-bps Certification 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service With Service Centers Located In Major Cities In The Philippines. 21 20 Pieces Foam, Scrubbing 9. Material: Cellulose And A Scouring Pad On One Side 10. Dimension: Length: 140 - 180 Mm; Width : 80 - 100 Mm ; Thickness : 12 - 20 Mm The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 22 4 Pieces Garbage Receptacles 1. Bucket / Tub Material: Hard Plastic, (ps) Polystyrene 2. Bucket / Tub Color: Any Color 3. Capacity (gallons): 3 Gal. (minimum) Comes With A Cover The Item Must Have Good Quality 23 50 Pieces Gloves, Rubber 1. Heavy-duty Latex-free Vinyl Rubber Gloves 2. Thickness: 4 Mil 3. Color: Any Color 4. Size: Medium 5. Other Features: Acid/solvent Resistant. The Item Must Be Of Good Quality 24 30 Pieces Goggles, Safety Safety Goggles, Clear Polycarbonate - One Piece Lens With 180° Panoramic View, Non-fog Size/dimension: L 17 - 18.5 Cm X W 8 Cm X D 5-7.5 Cm High Impact Resistant, Ansi "z87" Compliant Firm And Comfortable Seal Around Forehead, Cheeks, Nose And Temples Protects Against Splash, Chemicals, Dust Adjustable Head Strap Shall Bear Mark Z87 Embossed Or Engraved Or Etched On The Item. Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 25 2 Pieces Hairdryer Electric Hairdryer, With Concentrator Nozzle Two Heat Setting And 1 Speed (minimum) Rating: 220/240 Vac, 1200 W (minimum) Body Length Including Nozzle: 20 Cm Folding Handle Design, With Hanging Ring Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Branded, Brand Name And Electric Rating Permanently Mark On The Item, With Dti-bps Certification With User's Manual Written In English That Contains Operating Procedure, Parts With Description, Safety Procedure, And Maintenance. With Service Centers Located In Major Cities In The Philippines. 1 Year Warranty(parts & Service) 26 4 Pieces Hose, Water Water Hose Material: Pvc Fiber Reinforced, Three (3) Layers; Any Color. Hose Length: 50 Feet. Hose Diameter: 5/8 Inches; Pressure Capacity: 200 Pounds Per Square Inch (minimum); Fitted With Male And Female Brass Couplers (nh, 11.5 Tpi) For Spray Nozzle No Sharp Edges 27 2 Pieces Kettle, Electric Electric Kettle Cordless (with Pouring Spout), Hinged Lid, Detachable From And Can Rotate On Its Corded Base Material: Round Stainless Body, Plastic Handle, Lid And Base Capacity: 1.5 To 2 Liter Automatic Shut - Off, With Power Indicator Light Power Rating: 220//240vac, 50/60hz, 1000 -1600 Watts Base With A 50 Cm (minimum) Power Cord, Molded Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 10a Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges; Dti-bps Certified Comes With English Manual That Contains Operation Procedure, Maintenance And Safety Guide. The Item Must Be Branded, Brand Name And Electrical Ratings Permanently Mark On The Item. 28 10 Pieces Laundry Sorter 6 3 - Bag Laundry Sorter, With Wheels 7 Bag: Polyester, Rectangular Shape, Detachable From Frame With Metal Handle And Hanging Hook 8 Bag Dimensions: Rectangular 22 X 15 X 8 Inch (minimum) Frame Material: Corrosion Resistant Steel, Sturdy No Wobble 9 Frame Overall Dimensions: Rectangular, 31 X 30 X15 Inch (minimum) With Four Casters, 2 Inch Diameter (minimum) 10 Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 29 4 Pieces Light, Emergency Emergency Light, 2 Heads Led Materials: Metal, Anti-rust Coated Duration Time (2 Heads): 5 Hours (minimum) Automatically Light Up During Power Outage Overcharge And Over- Discharge Protection Built - In Ac Charger, Power Cord Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 5a Minimum Plug Adapter Is An Option) Battery Test Switch - External Safety Fuse Head: White Led 1w (minimum) 3.5 " Dome Reflector Power Rating: 220 -240 Vac , 50/60 Hz 20-24 Hours Charge Time Dimensions: Rectangular 27 X 7 X 27 Cm (approx.) Sooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Includes User's Manual In English Which Contains: A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names, B. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, C. Safety Precautions When Using The Equipment, D. Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedures The Item Must Be Branded, Brand Name And Electrical Ratings Permanently Mark On The Item 30 2 Pieces Mirror Wall Mirror With Frame Flat Glass Mirror, 2 Mm Thick (minimum), Clear With No Distortion Frame: Wood Or Plastic Commercial Finish Rectangular Shape, 3600 Sq.cm (minimum) Includes Mounting Accessories Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 31 10 10 Pieces Mop Mop, Handle And Mop Head Set, Refillable Head Handle: Aluminum Or Anti-rust Coated Steel, With Hard/stiff Plastic Mop Head Holder, Clip Type With Tightening Knob Overall Handle Dimension: 130 X 19 Cm (minimum) Mop Head: Cotton Thread/yarn, Sewn Tailband, L 34 X 16 X 4 Cm (minimum), White Handle: Plated Steel Tube Or Wood, Length: 40 (minimum), No Sharp Edges 32 2 Pieces Polisher, Floor, Electric, With Accessories Electric Floor Polisher With Accessories Material: Stainless Steel, Aluminum Alloy Handle: Stainless Tube, Adjustable Height 1 Meter Long (approximate), With Dual Switch Lever Size/capacity :13 Inch (minimum) Diameter Power Supply: 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz. Power: 1/3 Hp (minimum) Rotation Speed : 160 Rpm (minimum) Heavy Duty (royal) Power Cord Length : 12 Meters (minimum) With Type A Plug (or Providing 10a Plug Adapter Is An Option) With Pair Of Rubber Wheels, Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Comes With Pad Holder, 2 Pcs - Polishing Brush And 3 Pcs - Floor Polishing Pads Includes User's Manual In English Which Contains: A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names, B. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, C. Safety Precautions When Using The Equipment, D. Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedures Branded, Brand Name And Electric Rating Permanently Mark On The Item, With 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service The Offered Brand Of The Item Must Be An International Brand With At Least 5 Years Presence At The Local Market And Global Presence In The Usa, Europe Or In Japan Market. 33 2 Pieces Shelving Shelving, Open, Knockdown Type, Adjustable Shelves Metal Powder Coated Frame Number Of Shelves : 5 Overall Dimensions : 85 X 30 X 180 Cm(minimum) Sturdy Connection, No Wobble Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 34 10 Pieces Sign, Caution Caution Sign, A Shape-2 Panel Self-standing, With D-handle, Collapsible For Easy Storage Material: High Impact Plastic, Panel Dimension : Rectangular (lxw) 55-65 Cm X 25 X 61 0m (minimum), Panel Depth : 2 Cm (minimum) Color: Yellow Print Description: "caution: Wet Floor" On One Side "cleaning In Progress On The Other Side, Both Messages Provided With Graphics Printed In Black. Font Size: 100 -120 Mm X 50 -70 Mm, Arial Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 35 19 20 Pieces Sponges, Dish 20 Dish Sponge, Cellulose, Non-scratch Dimensions: 5 X 3 X 1 Inch (minimum) 21 Branded 36 11 10 Pieces Spray Gun, Water Barber/salon Spray Gun Material: Hdpe Transparent Plastic Capacity: 300 Ml.(minimum) Trigger Type Sprayer Dimension: Diameter :7 Cm. X Height: 16.3 Cm (minimum) Rotating Nozzle To Adjust Spray Patterns Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Must Be Branded 37 4 Pieces Squeegee Squeegee, Short Handle Head/blade Material: Stainless, Rubber Handle: Plastic Or Stainless Steel Blade Length: 25 - 30 Cm Overall Length (handle And Head) 20 - 32 Cm No Sharp Edges 38 4 Pieces Squeezer, Mop Mop Bucket With Squeezer/wringer And Wheels Hand Lever To Squeeze, Made Of Metal, With Hand Grip Material : Hard Plastic, (ps) Polystyrene Or Its Equivalent Capacity : 30 L (minimum) Overall Dimension (excluding Handle: ( L X W X H ) 40 X 27 X 57 Cm (minimum) Color: Yellow With 3 Inches Non-marking Rubber Casters "caution" Printed In Black On Both Sides Of The Mop Bucket Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 39 2 Pieces Step Ladder Material: Aluminum U Channel Capacity: 250 Lbs (minimum) Type: Flatform Type Number Of Step: 6 (including Top Step) Reach Height: 6 To 8 Feet(minimum) Width: 15 Inches Minimum Spread: 4 Feet (minimum) Twin Steps With Gripped Treads To Prevent Slipping Step Braces On Top And Bottom Step Heavy Duty Aluminum Foot Bracket With Slip-resistant Foot Pad With User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, Assembly Instructions, Branded 40 2 Pieces Vacuum Cleaner, Dry And Wet Electric Vacuum Cleaner, Wet And Dry Function, Sucks Even Screws, With 4 Swivel Caster Wheels Material: Hard Plastic, (abs) Or Rust Proof Body Equivalent Power Supply : 220/240vac, 50/60hz, 1000 Watts (minimum) Auto Shut Off Tank Capacity: 20 Liters (minimum) Equipped With Complete Accessories I.e., Detachable Vacuum Hose Assembly (flexible Non-kink), Extension Tubes/wands, Carpet (long Square) Brush Nozzle, Wet And Dry Floor Brush Nozzle, Crevice Nozzle, Hepa Filter, Sponge Filter/washable Cloth Bag. Comes With 4 Meters (minimum) Heavy Duty (royal) Power Cord, Molded Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 10a Plug Adapter Is An Option) Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges With User's Manual Written In English That Contains Operating Procedure, Parts With Description, Safety Procedure, And Maintenance. The Item Must Be Branded, Brand Name And Electric Rating Permanently Mark On The Item. 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service With Service Centers Located In Major Cities In The Philippines. The Offered Brand Of The Item Must Be An International Brand With At Least 5 Years Presence At The Local Market And Global Presence In The Usa, Europe Or In Japan Market. 41 2 Pieces Washer, Dryer Laundry 1. Front Load Electric Washer, Laundry 2. Electronic Control, Digital Indicator Display, Transparent Glass Door 3. Body Material: Steel, Powder Coated, Any Color 4. Dimensions (wxdxh): 590 Mm (minimum) X 490 Mm (minimum) X 820 Mm (minimum) 5. Drum Material: Stainless Steel 6. Capacity: 8 Kg (minimum) 7. Spin Speed: 1200 Rpm (minimum) 8. Power Rating: 220 /240vac, 50/60 Hz. 9. Comes With A 1 Meter (minimum) Heavy Duty Power Cord With Male Plug To Adapt Type A Outlet (or Providing 20a Plug Adapter Is An Option) 10. Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges 11. With Dti-bps Certification, Brand And Electrical Ratings Clearly And Permanently Mark On The Item 9. Includes User's Manual In English Which Contains: A. A Diagram Of The Parts With Their Names, B. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, C. Safety Precautions When Using The Equipment, D. Basic Troubleshooting And Maintenance Procedures 12. The Item Must Be Branded, Dti-bps Certified, 1 Year Warranty Parts And Service 13. With Service Centers Located In Major Cities In The Philippines. The Offered Brand Of The Item Must Be An International Brand With At Least 5 Years Presence At The Local Market And Global Presence In The Usa, Europe Or In Japan Market. 42 4 Pieces White Board White Board, Floor Standing, Rolling Board: White Formica Laminated, Plane Will Not Deform. Board Size: Rectangular 1800mm W X 1000 To 1200mm H, Board Edges Secured With Aluminum Clip Edging 17 Mm (minimum) With Plastic Corner Caps Comes With Metal Tray For Marker And Eraser The Stand And Frame Are Constructed With Aluminum Or Powder Coated Steel 25mm Square Tube (minimum), Sturdy, No Wobble With 4 Lockable Hard Plastic Caster Wheels Overall Height From Floor: 210 To 214cm Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges Front Office Services Nc Ii 1 5 Pieces Calculator Type: Simple Calculator, Nonscientific Body Material: Hard Plastic Minimum Size: 110mm Width X 140mm Long Lcd Display: At Least Font Size Is 8mm X 5mm With Dual Power; Solar Cell And Battery With At Least 8 Digits Display Includes Spare Battery Packed With Protective Carton Box User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions C.operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment 2 2 Pieces Cart, Bell Boy Type: Hotel Luggage Trolley Capacity: At Least 450 Kilograms Minimum Dimensions: Length - 1000mm X Width - 600mm X Height - 1700mm Frame Material: Stainless Steel Tubing Stainless Tube Diameter: At Least 35mm Black Powder Coated Steel Platform With Carpeted Surface And Rubber Bumper At The Edge With 4 Pieces X 200mm Diameter Black Pneumatic Swivel Wheels Packed With Shipping Carton Box Branded 3 1 Piece Cash Register With Drawer Printer: Width: 57mm (minimum) Speed: 2 Lines/sec (minimum) Lcd Display Size: 5cm Width X 10cm Long(minimum) With Drawer At Least 4 Bills And 5 Coins Compartments With Drawer Dimension At Least 410mm Width X 450mm Depth Input Method: Numeric 10-key Interface With At Least 2 Ports Power Source: 220-240volts Ac, 50/60hz; With Ac/dc Adapter Can Be Operated With Battery Programmable User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels 4 1 Piece Credit Card Imprinter Height Of The Imprinter 2 1/2 Inch (minimum) X Width 5 1/2 Inch (minimum) X Length 11 Inches (minimum) Carriage Material: Steel Body: Plastic Color: Black 20 Characters Per Line Card Mounting Can Accepts At Least 0.030" Thick Size Credit Cards Plate Can Accommodate Up To 5 Lines, Manual Type With User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions, C.operating Procedures 5 1 Piece Credit Card Voucher Holder Material: 3 Mm Thick Clear, Acrylic, Dimensions: Height: At Least 255 Mm, Width: At Least 210 Mm, Thickness: At Least 70 Mm 6 1 Piece Detector, Fake Bills Led Display; Led Display Size: At Least 5 Cm Width X 10 Cm Long; Hard Plastic Casing; Ultraviolet (uv) And Magnetic (mg) Sensors; Power Source: Built In Rechargeable Battery,12v Output And Ac 100- 240v Adapter; With Complete Detection; Accessories Includes: Tough Plastic Carrying Case, Power Cord, Cleaning Brush, And Power Charger; User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B.assembly Instructions 7 1 Piece Guest Folio Rack Material: Hard Plastic; Accommodates At Least 50 Room Divider Indexes; With Divider Boards With Metal Tabs; A4 Size Divider; With Metal Sidings 8 1 Piece Hypercom Memory: 1 Mb Ram (minimum) Lcd Display; 160 X 80 Pixel Graphics (minimum) With Card Reader Magnetic Stripe Pin Pad Port: 4-wire, Rs485; With Peripheral Ports For Pc Connection; Electronic Cash Register Or Journal Printer; With At Least 2400bps Modem; Support Synchronous (sdlc) And Asynchronous, Lan Operation; With Pin Encryption; With Thermal Printer At Least 576 Dots Per Line; Thermal Paper – 2 Inches Wide X 3 Inches Roll Diameter (min.); Keypad: Membrane, 12 Keys, Water-resistant 9 1 Piece Key Card Marker With Verifier Set Of Hotel Door Lock System With Management Software; A) 1 Unit - Card Type Door Lock With Inductive Distance At Least 4cm B) 1 Unit - Card Encoder Unit With 25 Pieces Door Room Key Cards Computer Software System For Door Lock And Making Cards With Complete Accessories Including The Usb Type A Cable Interface To The Computer User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions C. Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment 10 1 Piece Key Rack Rack Material: Wood Number Of Racks: Can Accommodate At Least 40 Key Cards Minimum Rack Size: 70mm Width X 110mm Height Depth Of The Rack At Least 50mm Any Color Paint Type: Wall Mounted Rack Pack With Shipping Carton Box 11 1 Piece Safety Deposit Box/drop Vault Material: Metal, Powder Coated, Solid Steel Door Thickness: 4mm(minimum) Body Thickness: 2mm(minimum) Minimum Outer Dimension: L: 30cm X H: 20cm X W: 20cm Electronic Lock System Battery Operated Digital Panel: Requires 4 X ‘aa’ Batteries User's Manual In English Which Includes: A. Parts Manual With Labels, B. Assembly Instructions, Operating Procedures On How To Use The Equipment, Branded 12 4 Pieces Speaker, Lapel Frequency At Least 500mhz With Audio Input Connector With Operation Range At Least 50meters Receiver/70ma Earphone Output Level: 32ohm, 65mw Operates With Energizer Battery With Minimum Power Consumption Of Transmitter At Least 3v/70ma Receiver: 3v/70ma Wellness Massage Nc Ii 1 1 Piece Dummy, Anatomical 1. Half Life-size Muscular Figure Measures 32" Tall (minimum). 2. This Model Features 27 Removable Parts That Are Held On By Metal Screws, Posts, And Hooks. 3. It Shows The Muscular System With Numbered Parts That Comes With A Corresponding Key. 4. It Has Removable Arms, A Removable Calvarium, And A Removable Chest Plate That Hides The Individual Numbered Organs Of The Digestive System 5. Detachable Muscles Include: Deltoid, Brachioradialis With Extensor Carpi Radialis Longus And Brevis, Biceps Brachii, Pronator Teres With Palmaris Longus And Flexor Carpi Radialis, Sartorius Muscle, Rectus Femoris, Extensor Digitorum Longus, Tensor Fasciae Latae, Gluteus Maximus, Biceps Femoris, Semitendinosus, Gastrocnemius, Soleus. 6. Removable Organs Include: Brain (2parts), Lungs (2 Parts), Heart (2 Parts, Liver, Intestines, Stomach 7. Base Is 13" X 9" (removable) 8. Weighs 12 Lbs. (approximately) 9. Plastic Material 10. Non-toxic Material 11. Carton Box Packaging 2 5 Pieces Massage Bed/table Materials: Hard Wood With Steel Bracings, Hardwood Frame, Marine Plywood Deck; Color: Black Dimensions: W:75 Cm X L:183 Cm X H: (adjustable) Height: Adjustable From 24 In. - 33in. Leg Thickness - 35mm (minimum) Cushion System: High Density Foam (7.5 Cm / 2.95") Minimum With Pu Leather Cover (1mm Thick) Finishing: Round Corner Weight Capacity: 250 Kg(minimum) Gross Weight: 21 Kg (approximate) 2 End Support Bearer To Strengthen The Base And Increase Weight Capacity Accessories - Aluminum Headrest (adjustable) + Face Plug + Armrest + Arm Sling + Carry Case Portable And Foldable 3 1 Piece Massage Chair 1. Padded With 3" Thick, High-density, Small-cell Foam 2. Size: 14"-diameter Seat (minimum) But Without Back And Arm Rest, With Metal Post And Hard Plastic Star. 3. Pneumatic Spring Will Effortlessly Adjust The Height From 18" To 24" With The Pull Of A Lever 4. Five Heavy-duty, Smooth-rolling Wheels 5. Load Capacity: 265 Lbs / 120 Kg (maximum) 6. Smooth Surface And No Sharp Edges Any Color With One Color Only For Whole Lot 4 5 Pieces Sphygmomanometer Aneroid Type; (for Adult Use) Large Cuff Sizes: 33 To 42 Cm Arm Diameters Accuracy: ±3mm Hg; Measurement Range : 0mm Hg To 300mm Hg; Smallest Scale: 1mm Hg Index And Range Markings On The Dial For Clear Readings Nylon Cuff Is Durable And Stain Resistant With A Velcro Closure Inflation System Is Latex Free And Has An Easy-release Deflation Valve Chrome-plated Brass Air Release Valve; Set Includes: 1 Unit Sphygmomanometer; 1 Zippered Nylon Carrying Case Smooth Surface And Edges, Nontoxic Material 5 5 Pieces Stethoscope Chest-piece Description: Stainless Steel Double Chest Piece Color: Black Tubing Description: Y-tube Pvc Uses Extra Soft Replaceable And Pivotable Ear Tips The Binaural Is Chromium-plated Chest-piece Diameter: 44 Mm (minimum) And Has Non-chill Rim Overall Length: 29" /74 Cm (minimum) The Stethoscope Is Latex-free Comes With A Pair Of Replacement Ear Tips, A Replacement Membrane, And A Name Plate Smooth Surface And No Sharp Edges 6 1 Piece Talking Sphygmomanometer Type: Arm Type Blood Pressure Monitor (talking English), Nylon Cuff Sizes: 33 To 42 Cm Arm Dia. Lcd Digital Display: Systolic, Diastolic, Pulse Rate With Real Voice, Loud And Clear, Announcing Blood Pressure Automatically When Reading Is Detected And Displayed Simultaneously Dimensions: 98mm*126mm*60mm (approximate) Hard Plastic Casing, Smooth Surface And No Sharp Edges, Nontoxic Materials Measurement Range : 0mm Hg To 300mm Hg; Smallest Scale: 1mm Hg Weight: 450g (approximate) Pressure Measurement Range: 20~280mmhg(0.4kpa-37.3kpa) Pressure Accuracy: ±3mmhg(±0.4kpa) Pulse Measurement Range: 40 ~199 Beats /min Voltage: 4*aaa Alkaline Batteries Or Power Adapter Certificate: Ce Rohs Intelligent Automatic Pressurization And Decompression Incorrect Prompting Function Automatic Shutdown: 1 Min After Last Operation Carton Box Packaging 7 1 Piece Talking Thermometer Case Material: Hard Plastic Sensing Unit: Thermistor Measurement Method: Actual Measurement Measurement Range: 32 C - 42 C (89.6f-107.6f) Measurement Accuracy: ± 0.1c 32c-42.0c (± 0.2 F 89.6.9f-107.6f) Power Supply: 1.5v Dc, Lr41 Alkaline-magnesium Button Battery Real Voice (loud And Clear In English) Announces Temperature Automatically When Reading Is Detected Temperature Display: 3-digit, +deg C (deg F) Display In 0.1 Degree Increment Dimension Approx.: 2.0 (w) X 4.4 (h) X 1.2 (d) Inches (not Including Probe) / 51 (w) X 110 (h) X 30 (d) Mms (not Including Probe) Choices In Degrees Celsius Or Fahrenheit Talk Button Repeats Last Temperature Reading Last Reading Memory Auto Switch Off Accessories: Protective Case, 5 Probe Covers, Instruction Sheet Paddle Shape With Sensor On Small End 8 5 Pieces Thermometer, Digital Case Material: Hard Plastic Sensing Unit: Thermistor Measurement Method: Actual Measurement Measurement Range: 32 C - 42 C (89.6f-107.6f) Measurement Accuracy: ± 0.1c 32c-42.0c (± 0.2 F 89.6.9f-107.6f) Power Supply: 1.5v Dc, 1 Lr41 Alkaline-magnesium Button Battery When Measured At A Standard Room Temperature Of 23 Deg C (73.4 Deg F) In A Test Tank Held At Constant Temperature Power Consumption: 0.1mw Low Battery Indication: Battery Symbol Displayed Temperature Display: 3-digit, +deg C (deg F) Display In 0.1 Degree Increment Memory: Last Measuring Reading Beeper Function: 1 Beep When Power On 3 Beeps After Measurement Completed External Size (mm): 19.4(w) × 132.5 (l) × 10.0(d) Accessories: Protective Case, Test Battery, 5 Probe Covers, Instruction Sheet Paddle Shape With Sensor On Small End 9 1 Piece White Board White Board, Floor Standing, Rolling Board: White Formica Laminated, Plane Will Not Deform. Board Size: Rectangular 1800mm W X 1000 To 1200mm H, Board Edges Secured With Aluminum Clip Edging 17 Mm (minimum) With Plastic Corner Caps Comes With Metal Tray For Marker And Eraser The Stand And Frame Are Constructed With Aluminum Or Powder Coated Steel 25mm Square Tube (minimum), Sturdy, No Wobble With 4 Lockable Hard Plastic Caster Wheels Overall Height From Floor: 210 To 214cm Smooth Surface, No Sharp Edges

Details: Description Republic Of The Philippines Department Of Health Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital Santa Barbara, Iloilo Invitation To Bid For Supply, Delivery And Installation Of Various Hospital Equipment Ib No. 2024-07-009-g The Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital, Through Its Bids And Awards Committee (wvsghbac), Invites Suppliers/manufacturers/distributors To Apply For Eligibility And To Bid For The Hereunder Project: Name Of Project : Supply, Delivery And Installation Of Various Hospital Equipment Location : Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital Approved Budget For : Php 70,000,000.00 The Contract (abc) Fund Source : Caf No. 2024-40-gf Delivery Period : Within Sixty (60) Working Days After Receipt Of The Notice To Proceed Line Items Abc: Php 70,000,000.00 Line Item No. Description Unit Of Measure Quantity Approved Budget Cost (php) 1 Analytical Balance. Brand New. Product Specifications: Maximum Capacity -120. Readability -0.1mg. Repeatability, Typical -0.08 Mg. Minimum Weight (u=1%, K=2), Typical -16mg. Settling Time -2 To 3 Seconds. Adjustment -internal (automatic/fact). Interfaces -usb-b (to Device), Rs232, (integrated/optional), Usb-a (to Device). User Management -password Protection. Display -4 To 5" Color Tft Touchscreen. Minimum Weight (usp, 0.1%, Typical) -160 Mg. Weighing Pan Diameter -85-95 Mm. Dimensions (hxwxd) -300-350 Mm X 200-220 Mm X 340-350 Mm. Compliance Options -password Protection Log History (basic Metadata). Approved Balance -no. Balance Line -me. Balance Type -analytical Balance. Mettler's Top Pick -yes. Features -password Protection. Recommended For -chemical, Food & Beverage. Documentation Options -printing, Basic Electronic Documentation. Housing -die-cast Aluminum, Abs. Family -standard. Level -standard. Includes Avr. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 100,000.00 2 Anesthesia Machine. Brand New. Product Specifications: General Features: -at Least 12 Inches Touch Screen, User Friendly Design Interface, Tidal Volume 20-1500 Ml, Electronic/digital Flowmeter, Mechanical Backup Flowmeter. All Ventilation Modes To Satisfy Neonate, Pediatric And Adult Patients. Gas Supply -o2, N2o, Air. Selectatec Bar -2 Vaporizer Positions. Acgo -independent Mechanical. Flowmeter -electronic Flowmeter. With Co2 Bypass. Ventilator Software -v-cmv, P-cmv As Minimum. Includes Pcv-vg, Cpap/ps, Simv-vg And Loops. Auxiliary 02 Outlets -equipped. Equipped With Central Brake. Drawers -at Least 2. With Alarmn Management, Hypoxic Guard, And Module Rack. Patient Monitor -equipped. Equipped With Lung Recruitment Function. With Auxiliary Sockets. Accessories: Sevoflurane Vaporizer, Pour Fill, Isoflurane Vaporcizer, Pour Fill, Patient Breathing Circuit, Gas Hose, Agss Kit, Oxygen Gauge, And Gcx Bracket For Patient Monitor. Led Lights Equipped To Provide Lighting. Includes Avr And Ups Power Supply. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 7,000,000.00 3 Biosafety Cabinet. Brand New. Product Specifications: General Features: External Size (wxdxh) 1300-1500x700-750x2000-2300mm. Internal Size (wxdxh) 1200-1250x600-650x650-700mm. Work Surface Height -around 750mm W/ Optional Base Stand. Height Maximum Opening -500-550mm. Tested Opening -safety Height 250-260mm. Airflow Volume: Inflow -580-590m3/h, Down Flow -55-65%: 800-900m3/h, Exhaust -35-45%:580-590m3/h. Front Window Hepa Filter -motorized: Teo-layer Laminated Toughened Glass ≥5mm. Anti Uv. Filter Guard Type Noise -aluminum Alloy Frame, Glass Filter Paper. Illumination Display ≥1000lux Lcd Display. Water Proof Socket Tap -2, Total Consumption ≤500w, Tap -water Tap 1, Gas Tap 1. Ground Resistance -≤0.10ω. Power Supply -ac220v±10%. 50/60hz. Consumption -500w. Alarm Dc Motor -abnormal Airflow Velocity: Filter Replacement: Front Window At Unsafe Height. One Ecm Motor. 110 And 220v Acceptable. Speed Adjustable, High Efficiency And Low Power Consumption. Material -stainless Steel For The Working Areas. Frame And Decorative Plate -cold-rolled Steel With Anti-bacteria Power Coating. Uv Lamp -30w, Germicidal Uv Lamp, Emission Of 250-260nanometers For Most Efficient Decontamination. Illuminating Lamp: 18w*2, Led Lamp. Standard Accessory: Illuminating Lamp, Uv Lamp*2, Base Stand, Ss Water And Gas Taps, Drain Valve, Water Proof Sockets, Stainless Steel Iv Bar With 10 Hooks. Optional Accessories: Arrest, Airflow Tester, Formalin Fumigation Sterilizer, Electric Height Adjustable Base Stand, Remote Control. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 1,880,000.00 4 Ceasarian Instrument Set. Brand New. Product Specifications: Made Of Heavy-duty Stainless Steel. Includes The Following Items: 1 Pc. Scalpel Handle #3 With Measure 125mm, 1 Pc. Scalpel Handle #4 135mm, 1 Pc. Tc Metzenbaum Scissors Cvd 180mm, 1 Pc. Lexer Scissors Narr Str 165mm, 1 Pc. Mayo-lexer Scissors Cvd 165mm, 1 Pc. Lister Bandage Scissors Hvy 180mm, 1 Pc. Standard Forceps Serr 160mm, 1 Pc. Standard Tissue Forceps 1x2 160mm, 5 Pcs. Lorna Towel Clamp Non-perf 130mm, 6 Pcs. Halsted-mosquito Forceps Delstr125mm, 6 Pcs. Halsted-mosquito Forceps Del Cvd125mm, 2 Pcs. Kelly Forceps Del Str 140mm, 6 Pcs. Moynihan Hemostatic Forceps, Crv, 150mm, 1 Pc. Tc Mayo-hegar Ndl Holder Hvyserr150mm, 1 Pc. Tc Hegar Needle Holder Hvy-serr 205mm, 1 Pc. Us-army Retrac.26x15/43x15-23x15/40x15, Set 1 760,000.00 1 Pc. Richardson-eastman Bt471rbt472r, 6 Pcs. Boys-allis Forceps 5x6 155mm, 2 Pcs. Kidney Tray Stainless Steel 250mm, 1 Pc. Bottom For 3/4 Container Height :135mm, 1 Pc. Prime Line Pro 3/4 Lid Red, 1 Pc. 3/4 Size Perf Basket 406x253x76mm, 1 Pc. Silicon Basket Liner 3/4 Size, 1 Pc. Mayo Safety Pin F/ring-hdl Inst 140mm, 1 Pc. Ident. With “wvsgh Ob/dr” Engraved In Each Instrument. Warranty -at Least 1 Year From Delivery. 5 Chemical Analyzer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Handheld Type. Product Type: Handheld Spectrometer. Battery Type: Rechargeable Internal Lithium-ion Battery Or 123a Disposable Batteries; >4 Hours Operation. Certifications/compliance: Certified To Mil-std 810g Standards For Ruggedness And Environmental Protection To Ip67 Standards Against Dust And Water Up To 1m. Description: The Handheld Spectrometer Designed For Rapid And Accurate Identification Of Unknown Chemicals Directly In The Field. Dimension As Per Manufacturers Standard. Exposure: Manual, Automatic Modes (5 Ms Minimum). Libraries: Explosives, Toxic Industrial Chemicals (tics), Chemical Warfare Agents (cwas), Narcotics Precursors, White Powders And More. Output Power: Adjustable, 75mw, 125mw, 250mw. Power Supply: 220v 60hz. Dc Wall Adapter 5vdc, 3a, 18w Max. Resolution: 7 To 10.5 Cm-1 (fwhm) Across Range. Spectral Range: 250 To 2875 Cm-1. Temperature Range (english): -4°f To +122°f. Temperature Range (metric): -20°c To +40°c. Working Distance: 16 Mm Without Nose Cone; ∽5 Mm With Nose Cone. Standard Requirements: • Bidder’s Certificate That Will Provide Manual In English Language (2 Copies Of Operator's/user's Manual And 2 Copies Of Service/technical And Maintenance Manual) Upon Delivery. • Brochure/sales Literature. Training Requirements: • Bidder’s Certificate That Will Conduct Free Technical Training And Product Demo For The End-user/s And In-house Biomed On Equipment Operation And On Maintenance Of Equipment. After Sales Service: • Bidder’s Certificate That Parts Shall Be Available At The Authorized Philippine Service Center/s For A Period Of Five (5) Years After The Warranty Period. • Certification From Local Distributor On The Availability Of Service Technicians And/or Biomedical Engineers In Case Of Equipment Breakdown. Preventive Maintenance -• Bidder’s Certificate Free Quarterly Preventive Maintenance During The Warranty Period With Preventive Maintenance Plan. Warranty Certificate: • Warranty Certificate Minimum Of Five (5) Years For Service And Three (3) Years For Parts. The Warranty Period Shall Commence From The Date Of Acceptance By The End-user After Testing And Commissioning. Calibration: • With Certificate Of Calibration Upon Delivery. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 7,000,000.00 6 Coagulation Analyzer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Fully Automated. Smart And Compact Fully Automated, True Walkaway Coagulation Analyzer Principle: Photo - Optical Measurement Principle Clotting: Scattered Light Detection System Chromogenic: Colorimetric Method Immunoassay: Latex-enhanced Turbidimetric Method Light Sources: Led: Clotting Assays Halogen Lamp: Chromogenic And Immunologic Assays Max No. Of Parameters: At Least 14 Test Protocols Parameters: Clotting: Pt, Aptt, Fibrinogen, Thrombin Time, Extrinsic And Intrinsic Coagulation Factor Assays ( Ii, V, Vii, Viii, Ix, X, Xi, Xii), Lupus Anticoagulant (screening And Confirmation), Protein S, Batroxobin Time Chromogenic: Protein C, Antithrombin Iii, Plasminogen, Α2-antiplasmin, Heparin (anti-fx) Immunologic: D-dimer, Vwf Ag, Fdp. Throughput: 60 Tests Per Hour (pt), Atleast 48 Simultaneous Tests Per Hour (pt, Aptt, Fbg) 15 D-dimer Tests Per Hour. Capability: Random Access Capability, Simultaneous Analysis Of 5 Parameters, Simultaneous Running Of Mixture Of Tubes (primary Tubes, Sample Cups, Partially-draw Tubes). With Free Training, Startup Reagents And Consumables (1 Box For Each Test Of Pt,aptt,fbg), And Ups. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 1,850,000.00 7 Common Bile Duct Exploration Supplement Set. Brand New. Product Specifications: Made Of Heavy-duty Stainless Steel. Includes The Following Items: 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Frcpsslt-cvd225mm, 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Forceps Cvd225mm, 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Frcpshvy-cvd225mm, 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Frcps U-cvd225mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 1mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 2mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 3mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 4mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 5mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 6mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 7mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 8mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 9mm, 1 Pc. Bakes Bile-duct Dilator 10mm, 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Forcep Scvd 190mm, 1 Pc. Randall Kidney-stone Fcpshvy-cvd190mm, 1 Pc. Bottom For 1/2 Container Height:135mm, 1 Pc. Primeline Pro 1/2 Lid Green, 1 Pc. 1/2 Size Perf Basket 243x253x76mm, 1 Pc. Identification Labelgreen. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Set 1 590,000.00 8 Cytocentrifuge. Brand New. Product Specifications: Adopts Steel Structure And Stainless-steel Centrifugal Chamber. Program Save And Recall Up To 10 Protocols. Microprocessor Control. Alarm Monitoring Function, Real Time Monitoring Of Lock And Motor Status, Safe And Reliable Operation. Max. Capacity: 12 Cards. Max. Speed: 3000 Rpm. Maximum Rcf -1,057. Timer -99min 59 Sec Or "free" For Long Run. Braking Rates -at Least 3 Settings. External Size (l*w*h) 335-345*420-430*275-280). With Free Avr/ups. Working Voltage -110v, 220v, 50/60hz, Power -0.5kw. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 2,150,000.00 9 Defibrillator. Brand New. Product Specifications: General Features: 7–10-inch Lcd Display, Maximum Of 3 Waveforms. High Contrast Display Mode For Bright Environments. Ambulance-ready, Rugged Casting: Ip44, Impact Test Of 0.75m. Output Energy: 1-360j. Charge Times Of <3s T O200j, <7s To 360j. Auto-volt With Smart Charging. Lithium-ion Battery Supports To 6 Hours Monitoring/200 Shocks @360j/ 4.5 Hours Pacing, With Built-in Led Power Level Indicator. Lightweight At 4-5kg., Full Configuration, Main Unit. Automatically Switch Defibrillator Energy, Cpr Prompts, And Alarm Limits Depending On Patient Type. Display Ecg During Aed Mode. Ecg Recovery Within 2.5s Or Less. Contact Status Can Be Checked Through Paddle And Monitor, Impedance Value Can Be Checked In Monitor. Auto-testing Includes Maximum Energy Discharge Test. Parameters: 3/5 Lead Ecg, Pacer. Includes: Thermal Recorder, External Paddle Kits, Ecg Cable And Lead Wires, Ecg Electrode, Multifunction Electrode Pad. Printer Paper, Electrode Gel, Power Cord, Lithium-ion Battery. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 2 1,800,000.00 10 Dish Sterilizer. Brand New. Product Specifications: − High Light Led Display, − With Special Boiler Temperature Drainage Settings , − Washing Parameters Can Be Set Free And With Control Memory Function, − Can Meet Different Washing Demand, − Self - Research Internal Water Softener, − Double Construction Design For Top Cover, − Power: 380v/50hz, − Basket Dimension : 500x500mm, − Washing Ability : At Least 60 Basket / H, − Rinse Water Quantity : 3 L/h, − Inlet Height : 400-430mm, − Machine Dimension : 800-850x800-820x1450-1500mm, − Rated Power : 14.75kw, − Gross Weight : 140-150, − Net Weight : 100-110, Warranty Period- Within 1 Year Upon Delivery And Installation To Cover Parts (excluding Wearable Parts) And Service With Preventive Maintenance Every 6 Months Within 2 Years Period. Provides Orientation And Training To End-user Representative. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 580,000.00 11 Electrocardiography Machine (ecg) Brand New. Product Specifications. High Resolution Lcd Touch Screen, 320-330x240-250vivid Waveform Display. 12 Leads Ecg Resolution Thermal Printer. Built-in Rechargeable Li-ion Battery, Ac/dc Power Supply. Anti-defibrillator And Pace Maker Detection. Complete Digital Filtering, Resisting Baseline Drift, Automatic Baseline Adjustment. Automatic Ecg Measurement And Interpretation. Large Patient Data Storage; 150 Cases, Equipped With Usb Port For Data Transfer. Three (30 Printing Formats (auto, Manual And Rhythm) Selectable. 1/2/3 Channel Ecg Waveform And Rhythm Leads Record Out. Lead Status Diagram Display. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 2 600,000.00 12 Examining Table. Brand New. Product Specifications: Designed For Ob-gyne Patient. Features: Powder Coated Steel Frame; 3 Panel Padded Foam Mattress; Pullout Foot Stool; Easy To Clean, Stain Resistant Upholstery; At Least Four Front Storage Drawers; Large Drawer; Elevating Backrest; One Pair Of Stirrup; Adjustable Leg Rest; Specifications: Backrest Angle: 0 ~ 80 Degrees; Leg Rest Angle: 270 ~ 360 Degrees; Max Capacity: 300lbs; Total Mattress Length: 178cm; Foot Stool Size: 29-30 X 18-20 X 2-3 Cm; Product Size: 140-145 X 50-55 X 85-90cm. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 4 80,000.00 13 Fetal Maternal Monitoring System: Brand New. Product Specifications: Foldable Screen. Probe Rack And Wall Mounting Rack. Handle For Easy Carrying. User-friendly Gui With 3 Display Modes. Four (4) Optional Color Background. Capable Of 24 Hours Ctg Storage. Fast Print For Store Traces. "smart Notes" Annotation. Signals Overlap Verification. Real-time And Offline Data Transmission To Pc. 10–12-inch Color Touch Screen. Excellent Algorithm. 12-crystal And 1 Mhz Water-proof Transducer For Accurate Detection. Configuration: Dual-fhr, Toco, Fm, Afm, Mecg, Nibp, Mspo2, Temp. Includes: 3 Ea Belt, 1 Ea Event Marker, 1 Bottle Ultrasound Gel, 1 Ea. Fhr Transducer, Purple, 1 Ea. Transducer, Yellow, 1 Ea Spo2 Sensor, Adult, 1 Ea. Temperature Probe, Skin, 1 Ea. Toco Probe, 1 Ea Nibp Cuff, Adult, 1 Ea. Nibp Tube, Adult. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 2 1,650,000.00 14 Hand Dynanometer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Hydraulic Adjustable Handle. Strength Can Be Viewed In Pounds Or Kilogram. Can Measure Up To 90kg (200lbs.). Durable Metal Gauge. Warranty - At Least 6 Months Upon Delivery And Installation. Unit 1 55,000.00 15 Hematology Analyzer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Fully Automated 6 Parts Which Includes Nrbc And Ig In Its Standard Analysis. It Directly Corrects For Every Nrbc Found. It Is Also Capable Of Repeat/rerun And Reflex Rule Set For Improved Workflow And Turnaround Time (tat). Through Put Up To 100 Samples/hour. Parameters: 28 Fda Approved Reportable With 11 Optional. Reportable: Wbc, Rbc, Hgb, Hct, Mcv, Mch, Mchc, Plt (plt-i), Mpv, Pdw, Pct, P-lcr, Nrbc%, Nrbc#, Rdw-sd, Rdw-cv, Neut%, Lymph%, Mono%, Eo%, Baso%, Ig%, Neut#, Lymph#, Mono#, Eo#, Baso#, Ig#. Optional: Ret#, Ret%, Irf, Lfr, Mfr, Hfr, Ret-he, Plt-o, Plt-f, Ipf, Wbc-bf, Mn#, Mn%, Pmn#, Pmn%, Tc-bf#, Rbc-bf Modes Of Analysis Whole Blood, Pre-dilution, Low Wbc, Free Select. Sample Volume Aspiration 88ul In All Modes. Must Be Modular And Scalable With Flexible Configurations (capable Of Being A Benchtop Or Floor Type Model) With Reagent Management System That Contains Reagents’ Information And Indicates Approximate Number Of Tests Per Reagent For Easy Reagent Monitoring. Has A Low Wbc Mode Of Analysis For An Extended Wbc Count For Leukocytopenic Samples. Includes A Free Select Mode Of Analysis To Allow Specific Selection Of Parameter To Be Analyzed Promoting Reagent Conservation Capable For All Types Of Body Fluids (including Capd) In Body Fluid Analysis. Free Start Up Reagents: 2 Boxes Diluent, 1 Box Lyse Reagent- Cyanide Free For Hemoglobin Determination, 1 Box Wbc Lysing Agent, 1 Box Wbc Differential Lysing Agent, 1 Box Wbc Dye Solution (fluorescent), 1 Box Wbc Differential Dye Solution (fluorescent) Training, And Computer Set With Printer And Ups. Dimension: 20-21x26-27x32.5-33.5 Inches. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 2,800,000.00 16 Hemoperfusion Machine. Brand New. Product Specifications: Indication -medication And Poison Removal. Targeted Molecules -protein-bound Medications And Poisons. Size Range Of Removed Compounds -0.5-10kda. Resin Volume -230ml. Blood Volume -145ml. Fluid Volume For Rinsing And Priming The Circuit -3000ml Of Saline (na 154mmol/l). Sorbent Composition -styrene-divinylbenzene Copolymers. Effective Surface Area -35,000m2. Cartridge Specifications: 1. Suitable Tubing: Blood Purification Extracorporeal Circulation Tubing With Inner Diameter Of 8mm And Þ6mm. 2. Venous Kettle Diameter Should Be P19-~27mm. 3. Flow Adjustment Range: 9-~450m/min(çp8mm), 6~30om/min(çh6mm). 4. Blood Pump Flow Accuracy: +5%. 5. Voltage And Input Power: Ac220v, 50 Hz; Power Is About 200w. 6. Overall Noise: About 53db When Blood Pump Flow Is 450ml/min. 7. Main Alarming Settings. Air Bubble Alarming: It Is Based On Ultrasonic Detection Principle, Minimum -0.05ml Of Air Bubble Could Be Detected. Liquid Level Alarming: It Is Based On Infrared Light Principle Which Is Simple & Reliable, No False Alarming. 8. Pressure Monitoring And Alarming Accuracy Is +1kpa Venous Pressure Is -8kpat40kpa (-135~+300mmhg). Arterial Pressure Is -20kpa+38kpa (-150~+285mmhg). 9. Alarming Setting For Arterial And Venous Pressure Top/bottom Limitation. 10. Other Alarming Functions: Heparin Injection Finish, Heparin Chock, Warmer Overheat, System Timing Finish, Heparin Timing Finish, Pump Preset Amount Finish, Open Cover, Machine High-temperature, Environment Low-temperature. 11. Dimensions 310wx240dx430hmm (without Trolley), Weight About 15kg (without Trolley). "application: 1. Blood Pump Flow Accuracy Is +5%, Which Is Higher Than Industry Standard Of +10%. 2. Voltage Fluctuation Range: Voltage Range Ac90-264v Could Ensure Machine To Work Stably. 3. Monitoring Of Interior Temperature: It Would Alarm When Interior Temperature Is Higher Than 45°c, Which Could Avoid Electronic Components Damage Caused By Poor Thermolysis In High Temperature For Long Time Working, So As To Prolong Machine Lifespan. 4. Portable Convenience: The Machine Is With Hand Holder Which Is Convenient For Its Portability. Meanwhile, Movable Trolley Could Also Be Provided At The Cost Price If The Customers Need It. 5. Overall Advantages: Mating Usage Together With Hemoperfusion Cartridges, Brand Advantage. Includes 5 Cartridges. Warranty - At Least 1 Year With Quarterly Preventive Maintenance Within Warranty Period. Includes Ups Capable Of Operation For At Least 30 Minutes. Unit 1 1,000,000.00 17 Horizontal Laminar Flow. Brand New. Product Specifications. Dimension -1440-1450x 600-640x1700-1800mm External, 1300-1350x500-550x540-560mm Internal, 700-750mm Work Surface Height, Led Display, Average Of 0.3-0.5m/s, Air Speed Adjustable. Main Body: Cold-rolled Steel With Anti-bacteria Power Coating. Work Table: 304 Stainless Steel, Polyester Fiber, Washable Pre-filter, 99.999% Efficiency At 0.3um Hepa Filter, <65db Noise, Manual, 5mm Toughened Glass, Anti-uv Front Window, 300-350mm Opening, Equipped With 16w*1 Led Lamp, 30w*1 Uv Lamp Emission Of 250-260 Nanometers. 600w Consumption. Standard Accessories: Led Lamp*2, Base Stand; Optional Accessories: Electric Height Adjustable Base Stand; Universal Wheel With Levelling Feet Caster, Ac220v±10%, 50/60hz Power Supply. 170-180 Gross Weight. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 408,000.00 18 Laboratory Oven. Brand New. Product Specifications: Working Temperature Range At Least 5 Above Ambient Temperature To +300 °c; Setting Accuracy Temperature Up To 99.9 °c: 0.1 / From 100 °c: 0.5; Setting Temperature Range +20 To +300°c; Temperature Sensor 1 Pt100 Sensor Din Class A In 4-wire-circuit. Control Cockpit Single Display. Adaptive Multifunctional Digital Pid-microprocessor Controller With High-definition Tft-colour Display; Timer Digital Backwards Counter With Target Time Setting, Adjustable From 1 Minute To 99 Days; Adjustable Parameters: Temperature (celsius Or Fahrenheit), Air Flap Position, Programme Time; Ventilation: Natural Convection, Vent Connection With Restrictor Flap; Works Calibration Certificate : Calibration At +160°c; Door Fully Insulated Stainless Steel Door With 2-point Locking (compression Door Lock); Internals 1 Stainless Steel Grid(s), Electropolished; Stainless Steel Interior; Interior Easy-to-clean Interior, Made Of Stainless Steel, Reinforced By Deep Drawn Ribbing With Integrated And Protected Large-area Heating On Four Sides; Volume 32 L; Dimensions W(a) X H(b) X D(c): 400 X 320 X 250 Mm; Max. Number Of Internals: 3; Max. Loading Of Chamber 60 Kg; Max. Loading Per Internal 20 Kg; With Free Power Back-up System, With Free Installation And Demonstration. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 155,000.00 19 Medical Freezer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Dimension -600-700x650-680x1800-1900mm External Size. Capacity -at Least 300 Liter. Capable Of -30 To -40 Temperature Range. Microprocessor Control W/ Led Display. High Or Low Temperature Alarm, Power Failure Alarm, Door Ajar Alarm, Sensor Failure Alarm, Temperature Controller's Failure Alarm. Direct Refrigeration, Mixed Refrigerant. Uni-compressor. Color Sprayed Steel External And Internal. With 4 Pcs Shelves. 300w Consumption. Power -ac220v±10%, 50/60hz. Gross Weight 100-150kgs. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 800,000.00 20 Microscope. Brand New. Product Specifications: Features -coarse Adjustment Limit Stopper. Torque Adjustment For Coarse Adjustment Knob. Manual Stage With Right Hand Control-built-in. X :76mm, Y :30mm. Focus -15mm. Dimensions: Binocular -196-199 (w) X 390-400 (d) X 385-390 (h) Mm. Trinocular :195-200 (w) X 396-398 (d) X 430-440 (h) Mm. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 125,000.00 21 Microwave Tissue Processor. Brand New. Product Specifications: Rapid And Multifunctional. Throughput Up To 100-110 Cassettes And For Specimens Up To 3 Mm Thickness. Processing Time With Needle Biopsies 30 Minutes. Processing Time For Standard Cassettes 90–120 Minutes Plus Enhanced Epitope Retrieval, Decalcification , Histo Chemical Staining, Fixation. Microwave Unit: All Stainless Steel, Heavy Duty, Designed For Laboratory Operation. Power: 0-800w +/-10% In 1% Increments With Microprocessor Control. Homogeneous Microwave Field. High Power Illuminating System. Door With 2 Safety Micro Switches. Positioning Plate. Advanced Controls: Dedicated Time At Temperature Software Control. Special Infrared Non-contact Sensor For Automatic Temperature Control. Built-in Laser Pointer For Correct Module Positioning. Built-in Magnetic Stirring With Speed Control By Software. Built-in Exhaust Fan For Microwave Cavity With Built-in Motion Sensor. Exhaust Tube For Connection To The Central Exhaust System. Dimensions: L 340mm, D 540mm, H 570mm.weight: 41 Kg. Power Supply: 230v~ 60hz. With Free Training, Startup Reagents/consumables: 6 Packs Of 1kg Paraffin Wax Pellets With Polymer, 250 Pcs Plastic Embedding Tissue Cassettes With Lid, 20 Pcs Stainless Steel Embedding Bottom Mold, 1000ml Glass Beaker, 500ml Graduated Cylinder, 2 Pcs Diamond Pen For Glass Labelling, 150 Pcs High Profile Microtome Blade, 150 Pcs Low Profile Microtome Blade, & 12-reservoir Manual Staining Set With Lids, 250-300 Ml Capacity With 1 Rack For 24 Slides; And Ups. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 2,750,000.00 22 Medical Waste Shredder. Brand New. Product Specifications: 20hp Motor Slow-speed And High Torque Dual Shaft Shredders, 5/16″ Wide Cutters, With Bearing Protection And Cleaning Fitters. Features: Efficiently Shred Syringes, Face Masks, Boxed Medical Waste, Pill Bottles, Etc., Available With A Split Cutting Chamber That Allows For Two Different Shred Widths Within One Shredder, The Manner Of In Feed And Output Are Also Divided. Includes Training And Certification, Warranty 1 Year Upon Installation. Unit 2 700,000.00 23 Newborn Hearing Screening Test Equipment. Brand New. Product Specifications: Capable Of Screening And Diagnostic Testing With Te And / Or Dpoae. • Fast Automatic Test With Pass / Refer And Graphical Test Result Display. • Direct Evaluation Via Value And Bar Diagram. • Up To 12 Frequencies Displayed Within The Device, Dp Up To 12 Khz. • 5 Dp / 2 Te Protocols With User Customizable Parameters (diagnostic Version). • High Noise Immunity For Operation In Normal Clinical Environment. • Lightweight, Small Ear Probe. • Environmentally Friendly Due To Long Life, Rechargeable Battery. • Bluetooth® Communication To Optional Printer And Pc • Evaluation Of Results In Pc. Screener With At Least 4 Frequency Dpoae Testing Protocols. • Qualified Protocols Built Into The Device. • 4 Dpoae Test Frequencies Reported. • Integration To State Tracking Systems, Hi-track Or Oz. Diagnostic With Up To 12 Frequency Dpoae Testing Protocols. • 1.5 To 12 Khz Frequency Range With Up To 12 Test Frequencies Reported. • Customizable Test Protocols Teoae Available As An Upgradeable Option. Measurement Type: Distortion Product Otoacoustic Emissions (dpoae) Transient Evoked Otoacoustic Emissions (teoae). Frequency Range: Screener Version: Dpoae: 2.0 Khz To 5.0 Khz Teoae: 1.5 Khz To 4.0 Khz. Diagnostic Version: Dpoae: 1.5 Khz To 12.0 Khz Teoae: 0.7 Khz To 4.0 Khz. Stimulus Intensity Range: Dpoae: 40 Db Spl To 70 Db Spl Teoae: 83 Db Spl Peak Equivalent (±3 Db). Microphone System Noise: -20 Db Spl @ 2 Khz (1 Hz Bandwidth)/ -13 Db Spl @ 1 Khz (1 Hz Bandwidth). Dimensions And Weight (unit): 2.5 To 3” W X 1.2 To 1.8” D X 5.5 To 6.5” H 6.2 To 6.8 Oz. Power Supply: Lithium-ion Rechargeable. Battery Life:1000 Tests Per Charge, Minimum 15 Hours On-time. Connectors/ Communications: Integrated Usb Communication Capability For Battery Charging And Communication With Pc-based Database Programs Or An Optional Printer. Hdmi Connector For Connection To The Micro-probe. Integrated Bluetooth Class 2 + Edr With Spp. Protocol For Communication With Optional Printer. Standard Accessories: Micro-probe, Box Of Single Use Ear Tips And Ear Tip Remover, Package Of Probe Tubes, Micro-usb Power Supply For Charging Lithium Ion-battery, Pc Database Software With Manual, Micro B To A Usb Cable For Pc Communicator/charging, Protective Carrying Case, Data Management Tool That Provides The Ability To Transfer Patient. Oae Test Data From The Testing Device To A Pc For The Purposes Of Viewing, Archiving, Managing, And Printing Oae Reports. Using The Database Also Gives You The Means To Create Letter Sized, Detailed Reports That Can Be Easily Filed Or Faxed. You Can Also Create A “paperless” Office By Saving The Test Results As A Pdf For Electronic Filing Or Email. Dpoae: 40 Db Spl To 70 Db Spl Teoae: 83 Db Spl Peak Equivalent (±3 Db). Includes Ups. Warranty -at Least 1 Year After Delivery And Installation. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Distributor Must Be Accredited/certified By National Hearing Reference Center. To Provide End-users Training. Unit 1 1,500,000.00 24 Parallel Bars. Brand New. Product Specifications: Adjustable And Foldable. Stainless Steel Bars And Steel Base. Height Adjusts Within 26''-40''. Width -24''-36". Length Ranges: 7-10 Feet. Unit 1 60,000.00 25 Patient Monitor System With Spco And Spmet. Brand New. Product Specifications: • Main Monitor: • System Shall Be High End Modular System With Easy Interchange, Upgradability, Data Storage, Retrieval, Display Analysis And Printing. • The Monitor Should Have At Least 6 Or 12module Slots Integrated. Upgradeable To At Least 14 Module Slots By Extension. • The Monitor Should Have Cooling System Free Of Fan To Eliminate Noise And Potential Infection Risk. • The Monitor Provides Parameter, Alarm, And Monitor Configuration Save And Transfer Function, The Clients Can Use A Usb Drive To Transfer The Configuration From One Monitor To Another Monitor That Needs The Same Settings Without Having To Set The Configurations Item By Item Again. • The Monitor Should Be Able To Work From 54kpa To 105kpa. • Portable Lithium Battery, Battery Power Supply ≥ 180 Min. • The Monitors Should Have At Least 4 Usb Connectors Support Input Devices Such As Mouse, Keyboard, And Barcode Scanner. • The Monitor Should Be Capable Of Connecting To External Display For Bigger View. • Monitor Should Be Color Tft Lcd Screen, With Screen Size Not Less Than 12 Inches, And Minimum Resolution 1920 X 1080 Pixels. • The Monitor Should Support Up To 12 Channels Of Waveform Display, And The Waveform Color And Position Are Adjustable. • The Touchscreen Shall Be Locked For Cleaning And Disinfection Purpose For A Configurable Period, From 1 Minute To Permanent. Also Support Manual Unlock. • Display Should Function Normally When Wearing Medical Gloves. Transport Monitor: • Monitor Should Be Color Tft Lcd Screen, With Screen Size Not Less Than 5.5 Inches, And Minimum Resolution 1280*720 Pixels. • Support Different Display Mode: Standard Mode And High-resolution Display Mode For More Information. • Support Assistive Touch For Quick Accessing Some Functions Or Performing Operations. • The Monitor Should Support Up To 7 Channels Of Waveform Display, And The Waveform Color And Position Are Adjustable. • Transport Monitor Should Be Compact Design, Small In Size ≤ 1kg For Better Portability. • Support Option For Handle/docking For Users To Carry/hook On Trolley Bed. Support Up To 7 Simultaneous Parameter Measurements By Own. • Portable Lithium Battery, Battery Power Supply ≥ 240 Min, Option For ≥ 480min. Parameters: • Transport Monitor Should Be Able To Use As A Standalone Device, Or As A Module For Modular Monitor. • The Transport Monitor Should Support The Following Basic Parameters With Modules: '- 3/5/6 Lead Diagnostic Ecg/respiration With Heart Rate, St Segment Analysis With 27 Or More Arrhythmia Detection. '- Can Be Upgraded To 12-lead Diagnostic Ecg, ‘- Pulse Oximetry - Spo2 (motion Tolerant And Waveform), '- Temperature - Core And Surface Temperature, '- Respiration (can Be Obtained From Ecg, Spo2 Or Etco2 As Source), '- Non - Invasive Blood Pressure (nibp), '- Option Built In Etco2. With Spco And Spmet Probes • The Monitor Should Have Capability To Upgrade To Following With Modules: '- Sphb (level Of Hemoglobin In Blood) * Ecg Monitoring: • Display Of 3/5/6 And 12 Lead Diagnostic Ecg • Frequency Range: 05 To 120hz Or Better • Heart Rate Range: 15 To 300 Bpm Or Better • Shall Have Facility For Producing A Respiration Channel • Shall Have St Segment Analysis • Shall Have Pacing Detection And Defibrillator Discharge Protection. Spo2 Monitoring: • Shall Be Motion Tolerant With 2 Wavelengths • Shall Provide Oxygen Saturation Percentage Level, Pleth Waveform And Pulse Rate In Beats Per Minute. • Measuring Range: 0 - 100% In 1% Resolution • Shal Provide For Visual And Audible Alarms For High / Low Saturation And Pulse Rate • Accuracy: ＋/－ 3% • Pulse Rate Counting Range: 30 - 300bpm • Monitor Shall Have Motion Artifact Rejection In Spo2 Measurement With Perfusion Index • Module Shall Be Capable Of Retaining Alarm Settings For Patient Transport • Support Obtain Respiration Rate From Spo2 Sensor. Nibp Monitoring: • Measuring Method: Oscillometric • 4 Measuring Modes: Manual And Automatic @ Selected Intervals, Stat And Sequence • Accuracy: +/- 4mmhg • Module Shall Trigger An Inoperative Condition Alarm If A Static Or Overpressure Is Detected • Shall Provide Venipuncture Assistant By Using Bp Cuff. Temperature Monitoring: • Range 0.0ºc To 50.0ºc/ 32ºf To 122ºf Shall Be Provided • Monitor Shall Be Capable Of Having A Minimum Of Two Temperature Channels • Accuracy +0.1ºc/ +1ºf • Shall Be Able To Monitor Both Core And Surface Temperatures Simultaneously. Spco (carboxyhemoglobin Saturation). • Non-invasive Continuous Measurement • Measurement Range: 0% To 100% • Accuracy: 0% To 40%: +3% (non-motion Conditions); >40, Unspecified • Resolution: 1% • Should Be Integrated With Patient Monitor Instead Of Standalone Spco. Spmet Methemoglobin Saturation) • Non-invasive Continuous Measurement • Measurement Range: 0.0% To 100.0% • Accuracy: 0% To 15%:41% (non-motion Conditions),; > 15%, Unspecified • Resolution: 0.1% • Should Be Integrated With Patient Monitor Instead Of Standalone Spmet. Alarms: • Advisory & Critical Warning Alarms Both In Continuous & Repetitive Audible & Visual Form • High & Low Alarm Settable For All Parameters. • Adult & Pediatric & Neonate Capability • Ability To Pause & Silence • Alarm Setting Can Be Accessed Not More Than 2 Steps, Support Central Control Alarm Setting System. Extensibility: • Shall Have Capability To Connect Anesthesia Machines And Ventilators • The Unit Shall Operate On The Power Supply Of 220v, 60 Hz Single Phases. Power Supply Cord Shall Be At Least 3 Meters In Length With A 13 Amp And Plug Top. Standard Requirements: • Bidder’s Certificate That Will Provide Manual In English Language (2 Copies Of Operator's/user's Manual And 2 Copies Of Service/technical And Maintenance Manual) Upon Delivery. • Brochure/sales Literature. Training Requirements: • Bidder’s Certificate That Will Conduct Free Technical Training And Product Demo For The End-user/s And In-house Biomed On Equipment Operation And On Maintenance Of Equipment. After Sales Service: • Bidder’s Certificate That Parts Shall Be Available At The Authorized Philippine Service Center/s For A Period Of Five (5) Years After The Warranty Period. • Certification From Local Distributor On The Availability Of Service Technicians And/or Biomedical Engineers In Case Of Equipment Breakdown. Preventive Maintenance • Bidder’s Certificate Free Quarterly Preventive Maintenance During The Warranty Period With Preventive Maintenance Plan. Warranty Certificate: • Warranty Certificate Minimum Of Five (5) Years For Service And Three (3) Years For Parts. The Warranty Period Shall Commence From The Date Of Acceptance By The End-user After Testing And Commissioning. Calibration: • With Certificate Of Calibration Upon Delivery. Unit 1 1,650,000.00 26 Pbx, Smart Hybrid. Brand New. Product Specifications: Designed For Telemedicine Use. Genuine And High-quality Brand. Pabx Built-in Extensions 16 Analog. At Least 2 Card Slots And 2 Slots Trunk Extension Card Switch System. Ability To Equip Subframe Ns-320; 12-32 Trunk Extensions. Unit 1 100,000.00 Sub-frame To Extend Pbx Ns300. Port Connected To The Main Frame. Dimensions: 40-45 X 35-36 X 86-90 Cms. Warranty -at Least 6 Months From Delivery And Installation. 27 Phototherapy Units Mobile. Brand New. Product Specifications: Photo Therapy Units (mobile). Power Supply: Ac220v-230v/ 50/60hz. Power Output: 90 - 100w. Light Source: 18 To 20w Blue Tube/ Led Tube At Least 2000hrs Life Span. Wavelength: 400-550nm. Irradiance Treatment Distance: 32 To 38cm. Effective Area: 40-50cm×22-28cm. Bilirubin Total Irradiance Maximum (ebi Max): 2000μw/cm 2 / 2500μw/cm 2. Infrared Radiation In Effective Area: ≤10mw/cm 2 (760nm28 Portable Multi-parameter Analyzer Flow Water Quality Testing. Brand New. Product Specifications: Measures Water Quality Parameter For Ph/ec/ise/do/temp. Mv/orp/px/resistivity/tds/sal./do Saturation. Features: Portable Device, Color High Contrast Lcd Touchscreen, Storage1000 Sets For Each Parameter, Support For Usb Communication, Ip65 Waterproof, Includes All Necessary Accessories And Consumables, Includes Training And Certification For Use, Warranty For 1 Year Upon Installation. Unit 1 200,000.00 29 Plasma Sterilizer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Main Features & Dry System: Rapid Warm-up And Dry System, Convenient And Safe Sterilizing Agent, 7-10” Full Touch Lcd, Easy Monitoring The Cycle Information, Plug And Play, Usb History Memory And Monitoring System, Automatic Pm Alarm System, Built In Thermal Printer, Print Out With Actual Cycle Information, Login Function, Spring Loaded Door, Less Than 10 Minutes Warm Up System, Auto Interlock & Open System, Open/close Foot Switch, Sliding Door, Volume: Total 150 Liters, Chamber / Type Of Material : Rectangular/stainless Steel ( Sus ), Dimensions / Overall Chamber : 700-750mm(w) X 1600-1610 (h)x 890-900(d), 450-500mm(w) X 450-500(h) 760-800(d), Weight: 350-400kg. Sterilizing Agent: Hydrogen Peroxide At Least 15 Cycles/bottle Tank Type. Total Cycle Time: A. Quick Cycle 30+5min, B. Standard Cycle 40+5min, C. Special Cycle 50+5min. Cycle Temperature 50+- 5ºc. Sal (sterility Assurance) 10~6. By –products: Oxygen And Vapour Water Only. Lumen Claims: Rigid Lumen & Flexible Lumen, Endoscope. Control: Microprocessor & Windows Ce Embedded. Cycle Information: Screen, Printer, Usb,100/10mbps Ethernet (optional). Pm Cycle: Automatic Alarm & Set Up. Electrical 110v/220v,50/60hz, 1 Phase, 3000w. Room Conditions: 5-40ºc,0-95% Rh (non-condensing). Printer: Built-in Thermal Printer (60 / Roll Paper) Cycle Parameters (temp, Pressure, Time, Daily & Total Cycle, Etc.) Alarm & Error Display. Others: Emergency Stop (front), Operator Id Login, Self –diagnosis, Multi-language, Rfid Coding System. Installation Requirements: Front;100cm, Rear, Left Side, Right Side:10cm Placement; Built-in Wheels Provided Mobility. Free Accessories: Crystal Sa-150 (15 Cycles/bottle -2 Bottles, Chemical Indicator Strip (250ea/pack) -1 Pack, Chemical Indicator Tape -1 Roll, Biological Indocator-1 Pack, Pouch (200mmx100mm) -1 Roll, Printer Paper (installed In The Machine) -1 Roll, Incubator -1 Set, Sealing Machine -1 Set, Ups Power Supply -1 Unit. Warranty -1 Year For Parts And Service With Free Preventive Maintenance, Technical Support -24/7 Open Line, Training -onsite After Installation. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 9,932,000.00 30 Pulley System. Brand New. Product Specifications: Single Handle/dual Tower. Chest And Floor Height Mounted Handle. Easily Adjustable Handles. Wheelchair Accessible. Warranty -at Least 1 Year Upon Delivery And Installation. Unit 1 80,000.00 31 Radiant Warmer With Phototherapy Units. Brand New: Technical Specifications: Fixed Height Radiant Warmer, Mounted On A Column. The Unit Is Supported By A T-shaped Sturdy And Stable Wheeled Base. Bases Is Provided With A Minimum Three (3) Anti-static Swivel Castors. At Least Two (2) Of The Castors Are Equipped With Brakes. The Base Is Equipped With A Side Handle/rail For Easy Positioning. The Design Of The Base Is Suitable To Be Fitted Over Standard Cradles, Cribs, And Bassinets. Overhead Radiant Heater At A Fixed Height Of 1.80-2.0m. Radiant Heating Is Achieved By Quartz/ceramic Elements, Placed In A Parabolic Reflector. The Radiator Is Equipped With A Safety Grid. The Unit Support Three (3) Modes: Pre-heating, Manual And Servo Mode. The Unit Allows For Instant Switching Been The Different Operating Modes. The Minimum Skin Temperature Setting Range Is 32°c To 37°c. The Resolution Of The Temperature Is: ± 0.5°c Or Better. In Manual And Pre-heating Modes Heating Settings Allow For A Range Of 0 – 100%. Led Spotlight(s) For Examination Are Integrated In The Overhead Radiant Heater, The Angle Of The Overhead Light Is Adjustable. Warm-up Time < 30 Min To 25°c. Power Requirements: 1 Ph, 100 - 240 Volts - 50/60 Hz 900 To 1300va (with Ups And Avr). Display Features: The Display Panel Is Integrated In The Column For Visualizing Working Parameters And Alarms. The Display Indicates: - The Current Active Mode: Pre-heating, Manual Or Servo, - The Current Heating Power In Percentages, - The Current Pre-set Temperature, - The Current Actual Skin Temperature, - The Current Air Temperature. The Unit Is Equipped With A Self-check Feature. Alarm And Safety Features: Alarms Are Audible And Visible. Alarms Indicating: - Sensor Disconnection Or Malfunction. - Power Failure. - Skin Temperature, After Stabilizing, Varying Beyond 0.5° To 1°c From Set-point. - 10 To 15 Minutes After Manual Mode Has Been Engaged An Audible Alarm Will Sound. In Addition, The Unit Will Either Reduce Or Cut The Power To The Heater. In Skin Mode, When The Temperature Exceeds 39°c, The Unit Will Cut The Power To The Heater. Supplied With: Instructions For Assembly, Use And Maintenance In English: 1 X Installed And 2 X Spare Reusable Skin Temperature Sensors, Including Connection Cable And Plug. 1 X Spare Quartz/ceramic Heating Element Or The Same With Installed Heating Element. 2 X Spare Examination Light Bulbs. 1 X Set Of Spare Fuses, If Applicable. Accessories: A Durable Light Weight Cradle/crib And Mattress. Oxygen Regulator Including A Pressure Gauge, Flow Meter, Humidifier Bottle And All Required Tubing. Integrated Weighing Scale. Electrically Operated, Slow Suction Unit Including A Vacuum Regulator, Vacuum Gauge And Autoclavable Collection Jar. Electrical Height Adjustment. T-piece Resuscitator. Integrated Phototherapy Unit. Led Phototherapy Unit 36cm: 620-2800μw/c㎡. Led Phototherapy Unit 50cm: 400-1620μw/c㎡. Estimated Life Span: Eight Years. Includes Avr. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 180,000.00 32 Refrigerator (biological). Brand New. Product Specifications: External Dimension: W = 700-750 Mm D = 730-750 Mm H = 2000-2100 Mm. Inside Dimension: Useful Space On Top W = 600-620 Mm D = 550-570 Mm H = 500-550 Mm. Useful Space At The Bottom W = 590-610 Mm D = 540-560 Mm H = 500-550 Mm. Capacity: 600 L Temperature Range: Top 2°c To 20°c Bottom 2°c To 20°c. Optional: Other Temperature Ranges. Housing Galvanized Sheet Steel With High Quality White Coating, Antibacterial Coated. With 4 Feet, Height Adjustable. Optional: Set Of 4 Castors, 2 With Brakes. Interior Space Inner Case Of Galvanized Sheet Steel With High Quality White Coating, Antibacterial Coated. Cleaning Friendly By Rounded Corners, Slippery Surface In The Interior, Meets Highest Hygiene Requirements Insulation High Density Foamed-in-place Polyurethane, With A Thickness Of 60 Mm. Cfc-free. Circulation Air Cooling For Rapid And Uniform Temperature Control, Reducing Temperature Gradients To A Minimum. When The Door Is "open" The Circulating Fan Is Switched Off Automatically By A Micro Switch In Order To Prevent Warmer Ambient Air Being Drawn In. Door 2 Pcs. Three-layer Thermally Insulating Glass Door (arranged On Above The Other), Supplied As Standard With Right Hand Hinge, Also Available With Left Hand Hinge At No Extra Cost. Grease Resistant Magnetic Seal. Optional: With Door Lock. Interior Fittings 4 Pcs. Grating-type Shelves (dim.: 530x550 Mm), White Coated. Interior Lighting With Automatic On/off Micro Switch. Optional: Stainless Steel Shelves Or Stainless-steel Drawer Compartments, With 3 Lengthwise Dividers With Telescopic-type Guides On Rollers With Stops, Usable With Between The Lengthwise Dividers: 106 Mm (lengthwise Dividers Easily Removable). Working Range 1 From 2°c To 20°c. Working Range 2 From 2°c To 20°c (assuming The Ambient Temperature Is Approximately 4°c Above The Setpoint). Temperature Accuracy +/- 1,8°c After Stabilization (with 50% Of Loading). Acoustic Signal When The Set Value Is Undercut Or Exceeded Potential-free Connection Socket For Extern Alarm Refrigerating Unit 2 Pcs. Fully Hermetically Sealed, Forced Ventilation, Fitted On Vibration - Absorbing Mounts (ambient Temperature Max. 32°c), Low Noise (48 Dba/1m), Energy Saving Compressor With High Quality Vaporization System. Refrigerant: R 290 Or Equivalent Defrost Automatically With Thermal And Time Limit. Condensate Evaporation In Heated Tray. During The Defrost Period, The Temperature Inside The Cabinet (only The Air Temperature – Not The Stored Goods) Will Arise For A Short Time. Electrical Data: Power Supply 220-230 V/50 Hz /single Phase Optional: 60 Hz. Power Input 2x 0,20 Kw. Fuse 16 A. Power Cable: 2x 1,5 M. Includes Avr. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 100,000.00 33 Steam Sterilizer. Brand New. Product Specifications: Standard Features: Sterilization Data Output: Standard Micro Printer, No Need For Separate External Connection. 7-10- Inch Color Lcd Touch Screen, Which May Display Information Such As Temperature, Pressure, Operating Status, Fault Alarm, Cause Analysis, And Solutions At The Same Time. Strong Vacuum Drying System, The Vacuum Degree Can Be Up To 92 Kpa, After Drying, The Residual Humidity Of Device Doesn't Exceed 0.25%, The Residual Humidity Of Dressing Does Not Exceed 1%. The Air In The Chamber Is Sterile And Avoids Re-contamination. Adopt Quick-release Side Cover And Top Cover For Easy Maintenance And Cleaning. Micro-controller Programmable Control Technology. Full Protective Door Cover, Effectively Prevent Burns. The Equipment Adopts Self-expanding Sealing Ring, Sealing Performance Is More Reliable And Stable. The Equipment Is Connected To The Water Source Without Manual Replenishment. After The Customer Chooses The Program, The Equipment Can Complete The Whole Process From Water Injection To Drying S Without Human Intervention. The Closing Method Adopts A Multi-point Pressing Structure Of The Radiation Rod, Safe And Reliable. After The Program Is Completed, The Sound Prompts Sterilization To Be Completed. Buil-in High-speed Steam Generator, No External Stem Source, Save Time And Effort. With Mobile Temperature Sensor, Can Meet The Special Requirements Of The Laboratory. Pressure, Mechanical And Electronic Three-layer Safety Interlock Device, With Over-temperature Protection And Over-pressure Protection, Can Eliminate All Safety Risks. Technical Parameters: Capacity-at Least 350 Liters. Max Designed Pressure -0.1/0.3mpa. Working Pressure -0.23mpa. Working Temperature -105-134-degree Celsius. Noise -at Most 85 Db. Vacuum System -water Circulating Vacuum Pump. Chamber Material-s30408. Power Supply -380v/50hz (standard); 220v/50hz Or 60hz (3-phase, Optional). Consumption - 20-25kva. External Size -1550-1570x1100-1200x1900-2000 (wxdxh) Mm. Includes Avr. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 7,500,000.00 34 Uninterrupted Power Supply. Brand New. Products Specifications: Designed For Telemedicine Operation. 3000va. Output Power Capacity-3000va, Mount: 3u Rack Mountable. Nominal Output Voltage -230v. Dimensions: 20-22 X 19-20 X 5-6 Inches. Warranty -at Least 6 Months Upon Delivery And Installation. Unit 2 400,000.00 35 Video Colposcope. Brand New. Product Specifications: Features: Complete System Security, Internal Password Protection. Easily Customizable To Specific Clinical Requirements And Preferences. Full Video Capture Capability. Statistical Analysis. Image Measurement And Annotation. System Automatically Creates Variety Of Report Options. Software Includes: Capture Card, Security Key And Foot Switch. Digital With Led Light Source To Ensure Ultra-bright Visualization And A Long-life Cycle. Spot-on-spot Subtraction Technology And Unique Optics For Multiple Filters To Ensure High-definition Images And Improved Visualization Of Blood Vessels. Pixels -1.4 To 1.5m. Magnification -40-45x. Connection -hdmi. Light Source -white Or Blue Led. Horizontal Resolution -600-650. Camera -cmos. Filters -3x Green. Working Distance -200-300mm. Field Of View -5-120mm. Video Capability -auto, Manual Focus Function. Capable Of Image Freeze Function. Main Power -100/240vac, 50/60hz. Expected Light Cycle -9,000 To 11,000 Hours. Image And Data Management Software Capable. Flat Screen Color Monitor. Includes Desktop Computer System, Printer And Ups. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 1,450,000.00 36 Water Purification System. Brand New. Product Specifications: 6000 Gdp Reverse Osmosis Machine. Up To 1200 Containers Per Day. Double U.s. Membrane. 2 Tanks 1000ltrs. For Raw & Product Water. Unit 1 350,000.00 At Least 28 Stages Of Water Filtration. To Include Piping Line From Water Station To Specified Areas Within The Health Facility. To Include Necessary. Building/structure For The Water Station. Service Warranty 1 Year After Delivery And Installation. To Include Service And User Training. Including Consumables: 50 Gallons Round Containers, 50 Gallons Slim Containers, 1 Sack Industrial Salt. 37 Wireless Digital Radiographic System Brand New. Product Specifications: (high Image Quality With Low Patient Dose): Wireless Flat Panel Detector: -image Area/active Area Measures At Least 34.5cm X 42cm. -flat Panel Type: Scintillator Cesium Iodide (csi) -flat Panel Size: 14x17inches, -pixel Size: 50micrometers (equal Or Lower), -resolution: At Least 2300 X 2800. -a/d Conversion: 16 Bit., -data Output: Wireless, -interface: Dicom 3.0, - Handle Installed At The Detector Unit. -preview/processed Acquisition Time: 5 Sec. (equal Or Lower), -patient Weight Capacity: 300lb Or Higher. Fpd Batter: -rechargeable Battery Pack: 2pcs., -battery Charger (compatible To 220 Voltage Power Supply), -battery Capacity At Least 4100 Mah. Software: A. Image Acquisition Function: - Automatically Obtain Patient Information From The Hospital’s His System Or Ris System Or The Local Medical Records., -exposure Parameters Set-up: Kv,ma,mas, And Ms. B. Image Processing Function: -automatic Adjustment Of Window Width And Position, Roi Width And Position Adjustment, Gray Scale Adjustment And Parallel Display Of Single Or Multiple Images., -image Zooming Function: Capable Of To Zoom In/zoom Out And Spot Zoom., -image Flip: Left/right Flip, Up/down Flip, And 60degrees Flip., -image Filtering: Noise Suppression, Bone Level, Tissue Details, Contrast, Etc. -labelling: Text, Arrow And Others Add Or Delete. -image Measurement: Distance, Angle And Rectangle Measurement., -image Adjustment: Gain Of Window Position And Width, Gray Scale Stretcher, Image Negative Reversal, Image Sharpness, Image Enhancement, Etc., -other Functions: Image Movement, Label Selection, Image Clipping And Other Functions. C. Image Management Functions: -it Has Real-time Monitoring Functions To Monitor The Heat Capacity Of Tube, State Of High Voltage Generator, Temperature Of Detector, Exposure Statistics And Remaining Electric Volume. Work Station (console): -personal Computer, -monitor: At Least 28inch Lcd/led, -operating System Windows 10, -central Processing Unit (cpu): Intel Core I5/amd Ryzen 5, -storage:1tb Or Higher. -random Access Memory (ram): 8gd., -connectivity: Wireless Lan, Gigabit Ethernet, -accessories: Mouse, Keyboard, Ups And Continuous Ink Supply System Printer. Terms And Conditions: Delivery: -30 Working Days, After Receiving The Purchase Order (p.o)., -freight, Electrical Materials And Installation Will Be Shouldered By Supplier. Installation: -cost Of Damages On The Existing Facility That Will Be Incurred During Delivery And Installation Of All Equipment Will Be Shouldered By The Supplier. Warranty: -12 Months Warranty On Parts And Accessories, -24 Months Warranty On Labor And Services Under Normal Use And Conditions. After Sales: -lifetime Commitment For The Availability Of The Services And Equipment Parts After The Warranty Period With Negotiable Fees, -provide Company Response Within 24-48 Hours In Case Of Technical Problems Or Equipment Breakdown, -parts Availability Within 1 Week. Preventive Maintenance: -quarterly Preventive Maintenance And Services During Warranty Period Which Is 24 Months. Training And Seminar: -training And Seminar Will Be Provided For Free Among The End Users And Maintenance Departments. Certifications: - Training Certificate Of End Users. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 2,500,000.00 38 X-ray Machine (digital Radiographic Mobile) -brand New. Product Specifications: Generator- Working Frequency - Up To 460khz. High Control Precision, Kv, Ma Real-time Control. Perfect Protection Circuit: The Generator Temperature, Overheating, Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Flint, Tube Hot-melt Overload Protection Complete. Generator With Wide Working Voltage Range, Power Distribution Design Adapts To The Actual Situation Of Power Grid. Power -30kw. Tube Current: 10ma-500ma: Higher Ma Will Be Reducing Blur Caused By Organ Motion, The Chest X-ray Examination Is Particularly Advantageous. Mas -0.1-500mas. Exposure Time -1ms-8s. Exposure Voltage Kv -40-150kv. Cooler: Natural Air Cooling. Ripple -less Than ±1%. Exposure Mode -manual. Arp -≥position. X-ray Tube: Rotating Anode X-ray Tube, Specifically Designed For Digital Systems. Anode Rotating Speed -3000-3300r/min 960hz). Enhanced Anode Heat Dissipation, Provided By High Emittance Coating And Target Design. Anode Heat Storage Capacity -100-120k/140khu. Maximum Anode Heat Dissipation Rate -475w (667hu/sec). Target Angle -12 Degrees. Nominal Focal Spot -dual Focus 0.6mm/1.2mm. Small Focus Power -10 To 14kw (50hz)/15kw (60hz). Large Focus Power -25 To 29 Kw (50hx)/30kw (60hz). Tube Voltage -40-150kv. Maximum Current Range -200-250/500ma. Housing Heat Storage Capacity -800 To 900kj/1250khu. Maximum Housing Heat Dissipation Rate -150-180w (250hu/sec). Cooling Method -neutral Cooling Method. Inherent Filtration -1 To 1.5mmal/75kv. The Bidder Must Be Iso 9001 And The Manufacturer Should Be Iso 13485 Certified. Unit 1 9,000,000.00 Total Abc (php) 70,000,000.00 Note: Winning Bidder Shall Conduct Product Demonstration/end-user’s Training Of The Actual Unit And Issue Training Certificate To The End-user And Medical Equipment Technician Of Wvsgh. The Bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract Similar To The Contract To Be Bid Should Have Been Completed Within 3 Years From The Date Of The Deadline Of Submission And Receipt Of Bids, Award For This Contract Should Have Been Awarded By A Hospital Or Health Facility And Not By Another Supplier. Likewise, The Contract Price Of The Slcc Should Be At Least 50% Of The Sum Of The Abc Of The Line Items Joined. Bidding Will Be Conducted Through Open Competitive Bidding Procedures Using A Non-discretionary “pass/fail” Criterion As Specified In The Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Republic Act (ra) 9184, Otherwise Known As The “government Procurement Reform Act”. Bidding Is Open To All Interested Bidders, Whether Local Or Foreign, Subject To The Conditions For Eligibility Provided In The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. The Complete Schedule Of Activities Is As Follows: Bac Activities Schedule Availability Of Bidding Documents July 8, 2024 At 9:00 Am To 4:00 Pm And Up To Before 9:00 Am Of July 31, 2024, At The Procurement/bac Office, Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital, Sta. Barbara, Iloilo Pre Bid Conference July 16, 2024 (tuesday), 9:00 Am At The 3rd Floor, New Building, Im Conference Room, Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital, Sta. Barbara, Iloilo Opening Of Bids July 31, 2024 (wednesday), 9:00 Am At The 3rd Floor, New Building, Im Conference Room, Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital, Sta. Barbara, Iloilo Bid Documents May Be Acquired By Interested Bidders On The Dates And Address Above And Upon Payment Of Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents In The Amount Of: Php 50,000.00 Bids Must Be Duly Received By The Bac Secretariat Through Manual Submission At The Bac/procurement Office On Or Before 9:00 Am Of July 31, 2024. Late Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. All Bids Must Be Accompanied By A Bid Security In Any Of The Acceptable Forms And In The Amount Stated In Itb Clause 14. It May Also Be Downloaded Free Of Charge From The Website Of The Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System (philgeps) And The Website Of The Procuring Entity, Wvs.doh.gov.ph , Provided That Bidders Shall Pay The Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents Not Later Than The Submission Of Their Bids. The Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital Reserves The Right To Reject Any And All Bids, Declare A Failure Of Bidding, Or Not Award The Contract At Any Time Prior To Contract Award In Accordance With Sections 35.6 And 41 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184, Without Thereby Incurring Any Liability To The Affected Bidder Or Bidders. For Further Information, Please Refer To: Gredalie R. Acopio, Rn Bac Secretariat Western Visayas Sanitarium And General Hospital Sta. Barbara, Iloilo Tel. No.: (033)332-4778 Loc. 119 Email: Wvsbac.procurement@gmail.com Website: Wvs.doh.gov.ph Faith Daphne H. Estrada, Md, Fpsms Bac Chairperson

Details: Description Philippine Bidding Documents (as Harmonized With Development Partners) Construction Of Water Impounding At Brgy. Acuit, Barotac Nuevo, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-1408-b Iloilo Provincial Government Sixth Edition Table Of Contents Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms 4 Section I. Invitation To Bid 7 Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders 9 1. Scope Of Bid 9 2. Funding Information 9 3. Bidding Requirements 9 4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices 9 5. Eligible Bidders 10 6. Origin Of Associated Goods 10 7. Subcontracts 10 8. Pre-bid Conference 10 9. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents 10 10. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components 11 11. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component 11 12. Alternative Bids 11 13. Bid Prices 12 14. Bid And Payment Currencies 12 15. Bid Security 12 16. Sealing And Marking Of Bids 12 17. Deadline For Submission Of Bids 12 18. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids 13 19. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids 13 20. Post Qualification 13 21. Signing Of The Contract 13 Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet 14 Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract 16 1. Scope Of Contract 16 2. Sectional Completion Of Works 16 3. Possession Of Site 16 4. The Contractor’s Obligations 16 5. Performance Security 17 6. Site Investigation Reports 17 7. Warranty 17 8. Liability Of The Contractor 17 9. Termination For Other Causes 17 10. Dayworks 18 11. Program Of Work 18 12. Instructions, Inspections And Audits 18 13. Advance Payment 18 14. Progress Payments 18 15. Operating And Maintenance Manuals 18 Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract 19 Section Vi. Specifications 20 Section Vii. Drawings 35 Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities 36 Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents 38 Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms Abc – Approved Budget For The Contract. Arcc – Allowable Range Of Contract Cost. Bac – Bids And Awards Committee. Bid – A Signed Offer Or Proposal To Undertake A Contract Submitted By A Bidder In Response To And In Consonance With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. Also Referred To As Proposal And Tender. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[c]) Bidder – Refers To A Contractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Distributor And/or Consultant Who Submits A Bid In Response To The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[d]) Bidding Documents – The Documents Issued By The Procuring Entity As The Bases For Bids, Furnishing All Information Necessary For A Prospective Bidder To Prepare A Bid For The Goods, Infrastructure Projects, And/or Consulting Services Required By The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[e]) Bir – Bureau Of Internal Revenue. Bsp – Bangko Sentral Ng Pilipinas. Cda – Cooperative Development Authority. Consulting Services – Refer To Services For Infrastructure Projects And Other Types Of Projects Or Activities Of The Gop Requiring Adequate External Technical And Professional Expertise That Are Beyond The Capability And/or Capacity Of The Gop To Undertake Such As, But Not Limited To: (i) Advisory And Review Services; (ii) Pre-investment Or Feasibility Studies; (iii) Design; (iv) Construction Supervision; (v) Management And Related Services; And (vi) Other Technical Services Or Special Studies. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[i]) Contract – Refers To The Agreement Entered Into Between The Procuring Entity And The Supplier Or Manufacturer Or Distributor Or Service Provider For Procurement Of Goods And Services; Contractor For Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects; Or Consultant Or Consulting Firm For Procurement Of Consulting Services; As The Case May Be, As Recorded In The Contract Form Signed By The Parties, Including All Attachments And Appendices Thereto And All Documents Incorporated By Reference Therein. Contractor – Is A Natural Or Juridical Entity Whose Proposal Was Accepted By The Procuring Entity And To Whom The Contract To Execute The Work Was Awarded. Contractor As Used In These Bidding Documents May Likewise Refer To A Supplier, Distributor, Manufacturer, Or Consultant. Cpi – Consumer Price Index. Dole – Department Of Labor And Employment. Dti – Department Of Trade And Industry. Foreign-funded Procurement Or Foreign-assisted Project – Refers To Procurement Whose Funding Source Is From A Foreign Government, Foreign Or International Financing Institution As Specified In The Treaty Or International Or Executive Agreement. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[b]). Gfi – Government Financial Institution. Gocc – Government-owned And/or –controlled Corporation. Goods – Refer To All Items, Supplies, Materials And General Support Services, Except Consulting Services And Infrastructure Projects, Which May Be Needed In The Transaction Of Public Businesses Or In The Pursuit Of Any Government Undertaking, Project Or Activity, Whether In The Nature Of Equipment, Furniture, Stationery, Materials For Construction, Or Personal Property Of Any Kind, Including Non-personal Or Contractual Services Such As The Repair And Maintenance Of Equipment And Furniture, As Well As Trucking, Hauling, Janitorial, Security, And Related Or Analogous Services, As Well As Procurement Of Materials And Supplies Provided By The Procuring Entity For Such Services. The Term “related” Or “analogous Services” Shall Include, But Is Not Limited To, Lease Or Purchase Of Office Space, Media Advertisements, Health Maintenance Services, And Other Services Essential To The Operation Of The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[r]) Gop – Government Of The Philippines. Infrastructure Projects – Include The Construction, Improvement, Rehabilitation, Demolition, Repair, Restoration Or Maintenance Of Roads And Bridges, Railways, Airports, Seaports, Communication Facilities, Civil Works Components Of Information Technology Projects, Irrigation, Flood Control And Drainage, Water Supply, Sanitation, Sewerage And Solid Waste Management Systems, Shore Protection, Energy/power And Electrification Facilities, National Buildings, School Buildings, Hospital Buildings, And Other Related Construction Projects Of The Government. Also Referred To As Civil Works Or Works. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[u]) Lgus – Local Government Units. Nfcc – Net Financial Contracting Capacity. Nga – National Government Agency. Pcab – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board. Philgeps - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System. Procurement Project – Refers To A Specific Or Identified Procurement Covering Goods, Infrastructure Project Or Consulting Services. A Procurement Project Shall Be Described, Detailed, And Scheduled In The Project Procurement Management Plan Prepared By The Agency Which Shall Be Consolidated In The Procuring Entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (gppb Circular No. 06-2019 Dated 17 July 2019) Psa – Philippine Statistics Authority. Sec – Securities And Exchange Commission. Slcc – Single Largest Completed Contract. Un – United Nations. Republic Of The Philippines Iloilo Provincial Government Section I. Invitation To Bid For Construction Of Water Impounding At Brgy. Acuit, Barotac Nuevo, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-1408-b 1. The Iloilo Provincial Government, Through The 20% Nta Fy 2024 – Water Supply Intends To Apply The Sum Of Five Million Pesos (p 5,000,000.00) Being The Approved Budget For The Contract (abc) To Payments Under The Contract For Agr-24-1408-b For The Construction Of Water Impounding At Brgy. Acuit, Barotac Nuevo, Iloilo For The Bids Received In Excess Of The Abc Shall Be Automatically Rejected At Bid Opening. 2. The Iloilo Provincial Government Now Invites Bids For The Above Procurement Project. Completion Of The Works Is Required One Hundred Sixty-five 165 Calendar Days. Bidders Should Have Completed A Contract Similar To The Project. The Description Of An Eligible Bidder Is Contained In The Bidding Documents, Particularly, In Section Ii (instructions To Bidders). 3. Bidding Will Be Conducted Through Open Competitive Bidding Procedures Using Non-discretionary “pass/fail” Criterion As Specified In The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Republic Act (ra) No. 9184. 4. Interested Bidders May Obtain Further Information From The Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines And Inspect The Bidding Documents At The Address Given Below From 8:00am To 5:00pm. 5. A Complete Set Of Bidding Documents May Be Acquired By Interested Bidders On September 26, 2024 From Given Address And Website/s Below And Upon Payment Of The Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents, Pursuant To The Latest Guidelines Issued By The Gppb, In The Amount Of Five Thousand Pesos (p5, 000.00). The Procuring Entity Shall Allow The Bidder To Present Its Proof Of Payment For The Fees In Person. 6. The Iloilo Provincial Government Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference On October 08, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines, And/or Through Videoconferencing/webcasting Via Zoom Conference Which Shall Be Open To Prospective Bidders. The Default Meeting Id And Password Shall Be: Meeting Id: 4340851724 // Password: 0922 7. Bids Must Be Duly Received By The Bac Secretariat Through Manual Submission At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City On Or Before October 22, 2024, 9:00 A.m. Late Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. 8. All Bids Must Be Accompanied By A Bid Security In Any Of The Acceptable Forms And In The Amount Stated In Itb Clause 16. 9. Bid Opening Shall Be On October 22, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines. Bids Will Be Opened In The Presence Of The Bidders’ Representatives Who Choose To Attend The Activity. 10. The Iloilo Provincial Government Reserves The Right To Reject Any And All Bids, Declare A Failure Of Bidding, Or Not Award The Contract At Any Time Prior To Contract Award In Accordance With Sections 35.6 And 41 Of The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Ra No. 9184, Without Thereby Incurring Any Liability To The Affected Bidder Or Bidders. 11. For Further Information, Please Refer To: Atty. Raemman M. Lagrada Head, Bac Secretariat 5f New Iloilo Provincial Capitol Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City Tel. No. (33) 336-0736 Fax No. (33) 337-7731 Email: Ipg_bacs@yahoo.com 12. You May Visit The Following Websites: For Downloading Of Bidding Documents: Www.iloilo.gov.ph September 18, 2024 Atty. Dennis T. Ventilacion Bac Chairperson Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders 1. Scope Of Bid The Procuring Entity, Iloilo Provincial Government Invites Bids For The Construction Of Water Impounding At Brgy. Acuit, Barotac Nuevo, Iloilo, With Project Identification Number Agr-24-1408-b. The Procurement Project (referred To Herein As “project”) Is For The Construction Of Works, As Described In Section Vi (specifications). 2. Funding Information 2.1. The Gop Through The Source Of Funding As Indicated Below For 2024 In The Amount Of Five Million Pesos (p 5,000,000.00) 2.2. The Source Of Funding Is: A. 20% Nta Fy 2024 – Water Supply 3. Bidding Requirements The Bidding For The Project Shall Be Governed By All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including Its Generic Procurement Manual And Associated Policies, Rules And Regulations As The Primary Source Thereof, While The Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source Thereof. Any Amendments Made To The Irr And Other Gppb Issuances Shall Be Applicable Only To The Ongoing Posting, Advertisement, Or Invitation To Bid By The Bac Through The Issuance Of A Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin. The Bidder, By The Act Of Submitting Its Bid, Shall Be Deemed To Have Inspected The Site, Determined The General Characteristics Of The Contracted Works And The Conditions For This Project, Such As The Location And The Nature Of The Work; (b) Climatic Conditions; (c) Transportation Facilities; (c) Nature And Condition Of The Terrain, Geological Conditions At The Site Communication Facilities, Requirements, Location And Availability Of Construction Aggregates And Other Materials, Labor, Water, Electric Power And Access Roads; And (d) Other Factors That May Affect The Cost, Duration And Execution Or Implementation Of The Contract, Project, Or Work And Examine All Instructions, Forms, Terms, And Project Requirements In The Bidding Documents. 4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices The Procuring Entity, As Well As The Bidders And Contractors, Shall Observe The Highest Standard Of Ethics During The Procurement And Execution Of The Contract. They Or Through An Agent Shall Not Engage In Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices Defined Under Annex “i” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Or Other Integrity Violations In Competing For The Project. 5. Eligible Bidders 5.1. Only Bids Of Bidders Found To Be Legally, Technically, And Financially Capable Will Be Evaluated. 5.2. The Bidder Must Have An Experience Of Having Completed A Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) That Is Similar To This Project, Equivalent To At Least Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Abc Adjusted, If Necessary, By The Bidder To Current Prices Using The Psa’s Cpi, Except Under Conditions Provided For In Section 23.4.2.4 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. A Contract Is Considered To Be “similar” To The Contract To Be Bid If It Has The Major Categories Of Work Stated In The Bds. 5.3. For Foreign-funded Procurement, The Procuring Entity And The Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution May Agree On Another Track Record Requirement, As Specified In The Bidding Document Prepared For This Purpose. 5.4. The Bidders Shall Comply With The Eligibility Criteria Under Section 23.4.2 Of The 2016 Irr Of Ra No. 9184. 6. Origin Of Associated Goods There Is No Restriction On The Origin Of Goods Other Than Those Prohibited By A Decision Of The Un Security Council Taken Under Chapter Vii Of The Charter Of The Un. 7. Subcontracts 7.1. The Bidder May Subcontract Portions Of The Project To The Extent Allowed By The Procuring Entity As Stated Herein, But In No Case More Than Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Project. The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That: A. Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. 8. Pre-bid Conference The Procuring Entity Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference For This Project On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address At Bac Office, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Iloilo City And/or Through Videoconferencing As Indicated In Paragraph 6 Of The Ib. 9. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents Prospective Bidders May Request For Clarification On And/or Interpretation Of Any Part Of The Bidding Documents. Such Requests Must Be In Writing And Received By The Procuring Entity, Either At Its Given Address Or Through Electronic Mail Indicated In The Ib, At Least Ten (10) Calendar Days Before The Deadline Set For The Submission And Receipt Of Bids. 10. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components 10.1. The First Envelope Shall Contain The Eligibility And Technical Documents Of The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. 10.2. If The Eligibility Requirements Or Statements, The Bids, And All Other Documents For Submission To The Bac Are In Foreign Language Other Than English, It Must Be Accompanied By A Translation In English, Which Shall Be Authenticated By The Appropriate Philippine Foreign Service Establishment, Post, Or The Equivalent Office Having Jurisdiction Over The Foreign Bidder’s Affairs In The Philippines. For Contracting Parties To The Apostille Convention, Only The Translated Documents Shall Be Authenticated Through An Apostille Pursuant To Gppb Resolution No. 13-2019 Dated 23 May 2019. The English Translation Shall Govern, For Purposes Of Interpretation Of The Bid. 10.3. In Joint Ventures, A Special Pcab License, And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract For This Project, Shall Be Required. Any Additional Type Of Contractor License Or Permit Shall Be Indicated In The Bds. 10.4. A List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen) Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data Shall Be Provided. These Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set In The Bds. 10.5. A List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership, Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be, Must Meet The Minimum Requirements For The Contract Set In The Bds. 11. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component 11.1. The Second Bid Envelope Shall Contain The Financial Documents For The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. 11.2. Any Bid Exceeding The Abc Indicated In Paragraph 1 Of The Ib Shall Not Be Accepted. 11.3. For Foreign-funded Procurement, A Ceiling May Be Applied To Bid Prices Provided The Conditions Are Met Under Section 31.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 918 12. Alternative Bids Bidders Shall Submit Offers That Comply With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents, Including The Basic Technical Design As Indicated In The Drawings And Specifications. Unless There Is A Value Engineering Clause In The Bds, Alternative Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. 13. Bid Prices All Bid Prices For The Given Scope Of Work In The Project As Awarded Shall Be Considered As Fixed Prices, And Therefore Not Subject To Price Escalation During Contract Implementation, Except Under Extraordinary Circumstances As Determined By The Neda And Approved By The Gppb Pursuant To The Revised Guidelines For Contract Price Escalation Guidelines. 14. Bid And Payment Currencies 14.1. Bid Prices May Be Quoted In The Local Currency Or Tradeable Currency Accepted By The Bsp At The Discretion Of The Bidder. However, For Purposes Of Bid Evaluation, Bids Denominated In Foreign Currencies Shall Be Converted To Philippine Currency Based On The Exchange Rate As Published In The Bsp Reference Rate Bulletin On The Day Of The Bid Opening. 14.2. Payment Of The Contract Price Shall Be Made In: A. Philippine Pesos. 15. Bid Security 15.1. The Bidder Shall Submit A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Form Of Bid Security In The Amount Indicated In The Bds, Which Shall Be Not Less Than The Percentage Of The Abc In Accordance With The Schedule In The Bds. 15.2. The Bid And Bid Security Shall Be Valid Until February 19, 2025. Any Bid Not Accompanied By An Acceptable Bid Security Shall Be Rejected By The Procuring Entity As Non-responsive. 16. Sealing And Marking Of Bids Each Bidder Shall Submit One Copy Of The First And Second Components Of Its Bid. The Procuring Entity May Request Additional Hard Copies And/or Electronic Copies Of The Bid. However, Failure Of The Bidders To Comply With The Said Request Shall Not Be A Ground For Disqualification. If The Procuring Entity Allows The Submission Of Bids Through Online Submission To The Given Website Or Any Other Electronic Means, The Bidder Shall Submit An Electronic Copy Of Its Bid, Which Must Be Digitally Signed. An Electronic Copy That Cannot Be Opened Or Is Corrupted Shall Be Considered Non-responsive And, Thus, Automatically Disqualified. 17. Deadline For Submission Of Bids The Bidders Shall Submit On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address Or Through Online Submission As Indicated In Paragraph 7 Of The Ib. 18. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids 18.1. The Bac Shall Open The Bids In Public At The Time, On The Date, And At The Place Specified In Paragraph 9 Of The Ib. The Bidders’ Representatives Who Are Present Shall Sign A Register Evidencing Their Attendance. In Case Videoconferencing, Webcasting Or Other Similar Technologies Will Be Used, Attendance Of Participants Shall Likewise Be Recorded By The Bac Secretariat. In Case The Bids Cannot Be Opened As Scheduled Due To Justifiable Reasons, The Rescheduling Requirements Under Section 29 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Prevail. 18.2. The Preliminary Examination Of Bids Shall Be Governed By Section 30 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. 19. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids 19.1. The Procuring Entity’s Bac Shall Immediately Conduct A Detailed Evaluation Of All Bids Rated “passed” Using Non-discretionary Pass/fail Criteria. The Bac Shall Consider The Conditions In The Evaluation Of Bids Under Section 32.2 Of 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. 19.2. If The Project Allows Partial Bids, All Bids And Combinations Of Bids As Indicated In The Bds Shall Be Received By The Same Deadline And Opened And Evaluated Simultaneously So As To Determine The Bid Or Combination Of Bids Offering The Lowest Calculated Cost To The Procuring Entity. Bid Security As Required By Itb Clause 16 Shall Be Submitted For Each Contract (lot) Separately. 19.3. In All Cases, The Nfcc Computation Pursuant To Section 23.4.2.6 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Must Be Sufficient For The Total Of The Abcs For All The Lots Participated In By The Prospective Bidder. 20. Post Qualification Within A Non-extendible Period Of Five (5) Calendar Days From Receipt By The Bidder Of The Notice From The Bac That It Submitted The Lowest Calculated Bid, The Bidder Shall Submit Its Latest Income And Business Tax Returns Filed And Paid Through The Bir Electronic Filing And Payment System (efps), And Other Appropriate Licenses And Permits Required By Law And Stated In The Bds. 21. Signing Of The Contract The Documents Required In Section 37.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Form Part Of The Contract. Additional Contract Documents Are Indicated In The Bds. Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet Itb Clause 5.2 For This Purpose, Contracts Similar To The Project Refer To Contracts Which Have The Same Major Categories Of Work, Which Shall Be: A) Construction Of Small Farm Reservoir 7.1 The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. 10.3 [specify If Another Contractor License Or Permit Is Required.] 10.4 The Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set Below: Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience 1-project Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-health & Safety Officer 1 Year 1 Year 1-foreman 1 Year 1 Year 1-skilled Laborer 1 Year 1 Year 1-unskilled Laborer 1 Year 1 Year 10.5 The Minimum Major Equipment Requirements Are The Following: Equipment Capacity Number Of Units Heavy Equipment Prime Mover - 1 Dump Truck - 1 Backhoe - 1 12 Alternative Bids Are Not Allowed 15.1 The Bid Security Shall Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Of The Following Forms And Amounts: A. The Amount Of Not Less Than Two Percent (2%) Of Abc, If Bid Security Is In Cash, Cashier’s/manager’s Check, Bank Draft/guarantee Or Irrevocable Letter Of Credit; B. The Amount Of Not Less Than Five Percent (5%) Of Abc If Bid Security Is In Surety Bond. 19.2 Partial Bid Is Not Allowed 20 No Further Instructions. 21 The Additional Contract Documents Relevant To The Project That Are Required By The Procuring Entity Are: A. Construction Schedule And S-curve; B. Manpower Schedule; C. Construction Methods; D. Equipment Utilization Schedule; E. Construction Safety And Health Program Approved By The Department Of Labor And Employment; And F. Pert/cpm Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract 1. Scope Of Contract This Contract Shall Include All Such Items, Although Not Specifically Mentioned, That Can Be Reasonably Inferred As Being Required For Its Completion As If Such Items Were Expressly Mentioned Herein. All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including The Generic Procurement Manual, And Associated Issuances, Constitute The Primary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract, And Thus, Applicable In Contract Implementation. Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract. This Is Without Prejudice To Sections 74.1 And 74.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Allowing The Gppb To Amend The Irr, Which Shall Be Applied To All Procurement Activities, The Advertisement, Posting, Or Invitation Of Which Were Issued After The Effectivity Of The Said Amendment. 2. Sectional Completion Of Works If Sectional Completion Is Specified In The Special Conditions Of Contract (scc), References In The Conditions Of Contract To The Works, The Completion Date, And The Intended Completion Date Shall Apply To Any Section Of The Works (other Than References To The Completion Date And Intended Completion Date For The Whole Of The Works). 3. Possession Of Site 4.1. The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Or Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Based On The Schedule Of Delivery Indicated In The Scc, Which Corresponds To The Execution Of The Works. If The Contractor Suffers Delay Or Incurs Cost From Failure On The Part Of The Procuring Entity To Give Possession In Accordance With The Terms Of This Clause, The Procuring Entity’s Representative Shall Give The Contractor A Contract Time Extension And Certify Such Sum As Fair To Cover The Cost Incurred, Which Sum Shall Be Paid By Procuring Entity. 4.2. If Possession Of A Portion Is Not Given By The Above Date, The Procuring Entity Will Be Deemed To Have Delayed The Start Of The Relevant Activities. The Resulting Adjustments In Contract Time To Address Such Delay May Be Addressed Through Contract Extension Provided Under Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. 4. The Contractor’s Obligations The Contractor Shall Employ The Key Personnel Named In The Schedule Of Key Personnel Indicating Their Designation, In Accordance With Itb Clause 10.3 And Specified In The Bds, To Carry Out The Supervision Of The Works. The Procuring Entity Will Approve Any Proposed Replacement Of Key Personnel Only If Their Relevant Qualifications And Abilities Are Equal To Or Better Than Those Of The Personnel Listed In The Schedule. 5. Performance Security 5.1. Within Ten (10) Calendar Days From Receipt Of The Notice Of Award From The Procuring Entity But In No Case Later Than The Signing Of The Contract By Both Parties, The Successful Bidder Shall Furnish The Performance Security In Any Of The Forms Prescribed In Section 39 Of The 2016 Revised Irr. 5.2. The Contractor, By Entering Into The Contract With The Procuring Entity, Acknowledges The Right Of The Procuring Entity To Institute Action Pursuant To Ra No. 3688 Against Any Subcontractor Be They An Individual, Firm, Partnership, Corporation, Or Association Supplying The Contractor With Labor, Materials And/or Equipment For The Performance Of This Contract. 6. Site Investigation Reports The Contractor, In Preparing The Bid, Shall Rely On Any Site Investigation Reports Referred To In The Scc Supplemented By Any Information Obtained By The Contractor. 7. Warranty 7.1. In Case The Contractor Fails To Undertake The Repair Works Under Section 62.2.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr, The Procuring Entity Shall Forfeit Its Performance Security, Subject Its Property(ies) To Attachment Or Garnishment Proceedings, And Perpetually Disqualify It From Participating In Any Public Bidding. All Payables Of The Gop In His Favor Shall Be Offset To Recover The Costs. 7.2. The Warranty Against Structural Defects/failures, Except That Occasioned-on Force Majeure, Shall Cover The Period From The Date Of Issuance Of The Certificate Of Final Acceptance By The Procuring Entity. Specific Duration Of The Warranty Is Found In The Scc. 8. Liability Of The Contractor Subject To Additional Provisions, If Any, Set Forth In The Scc, The Contractor’s Liability Under This Contract Shall Be As Provided By The Laws Of The Republic Of The Philippines. If The Contractor Is A Joint Venture, All Partners To The Joint Venture Shall Be Jointly And Severally Liable To The Procuring Entity. 9. Termination For Other Causes Contract Termination Shall Be Initiated In Case It Is Determined Prima Facie By The Procuring Entity That The Contractor Has Engaged, Before, Or During The Implementation Of The Contract, In Unlawful Deeds And Behaviors Relative To Contract Acquisition And Implementation, Such As, But Not Limited To Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices As Stated In Itb Clause 4. 10. Dayworks Subject To The Guidelines On Variation Order In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184, And If Applicable As Indicated In The Scc, The Dayworks Rates In The Contractor’s Bid Shall Be Used For Small Additional Amounts Of Work Only When The Procuring Entity’s Representative Has Given Written Instructions In Advance For Additional Work To Be Paid For In That Way. 11. Program Of Work 11.1. The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval The Said Program Of Work Showing The General Methods, Arrangements, Order, And Timing For All The Activities In The Works. The Submissions Of The Program Of Work Are Indicated In The Scc. 11.2. The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval An Updated Program Of Work At Intervals No Longer Than The Period Stated In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Submit An Updated Program Of Work Within This Period, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From The Next Payment Certificate And Continue To Withhold This Amount Until The Next Payment After The Date On Which The Overdue Program Of Work Has Been Submitted. 12. Instructions, Inspections And Audits The Contractor Shall Permit The Gop Or The Procuring Entity To Inspect The Contractor’s Accounts And Records Relating To The Performance Of The Contractor And To Have Them Audited By Auditors Of The Gop Or The Procuring Entity, As May Be Required. 13. Advance Payment The Procuring Entity Shall, Upon A Written Request Of The Contractor Which Shall Be Submitted As A Contract Document, Make An Advance Payment To The Contractor In An Amount Not Exceeding Fifteen Percent (15%) Of The Total Contract Price, To Be Made In Lump Sum, Or At The Most Two Installments According To A Schedule Specified In The Scc, Subject To The Requirements In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. 14. Progress Payments The Contractor May Submit A Request For Payment For Work Accomplished. Such Requests For Payment Shall Be Verified And Certified By The Procuring Entity’s Representative/project Engineer. Except As Otherwise Stipulated In The Scc, Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Put In Place Shall Not Be Included For Payment. 15. Operating And Maintenance Manuals 15.1. If Required, The Contractor Will Provide “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals As Specified In The Scc. 15.2. If The Contractor Does Not Provide The Drawings And/or Manuals By The Dates Stated Above, Or They Do Not Receive The Procuring Entity’s Representative’s Approval, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From Payments Due To The Contractor. Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract Gcc Clause 2 As Per Construction Schedule/contract Period 3.1 The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Upon Effectivity Of The Contracts. 6 No Further Instructions 7.2 [in Case Of Semi-permanent Structures, Such As Buildings Of Types 1, 2, And 3 As Classified Under The National Building Code Of The Philippines, Concrete/asphalt Roads, Concrete River Control, Drainage, Irrigation Lined Canals, River Landing, Deep Wells, Rock Causeway, Pedestrian Overpass, And Other Similar Semi-permanent Structures:] Five (5) Years. 10 Dayworks Are Applicable At The Rate Shown In The Contractor’s Original Bid. 11.1 No Further Instructions 11.2 No Further Instructions 13 The Amount Of The Advance Shall Not Exceed 15% Of The Total Contract Price. 14 Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Installed Or Constructed Shall Not Be Included For Payment. 15.1 The Date By Which Operating And Maintenance Manuals Are Required Shall Be At Least 5 Days Before The Testing And Commissioning. The Date By Which “as Built” Drawings Are Required Prior To The Final Billing. 15.2 The Amount To Be Withheld For Failing To Produce “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals By The Date Required Is 1% Of The Final Contract Amount. Section Vi. Specification General Requirements All Works To Be Done Shall Be With First Class Workmanship And Shall Conform To The Plans And Specifications. All Materials To Be Used Shall Be Of Good Quality And Properly Inspected By The Authorized Representative Or The Engineer In-charge. The Provincial Agriculturist Is Reserved The Right To Rescind, Terminate, Suspend The Contract If He Deems Necessary And To The Best Interest Of The Government. The Contractor Shall Be Liable For All Damages That Will Occur During The Construction Of The Project. Scope Of Works The Works Include Furnishing Of Labor, Materials, Tools, Equipment And Other Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Project Such As Miscellaneous Survey And Staking, Project Billboard / Signboard, Mobilization/demobilization And Surplus Common Excavation. Part A - General Condition A. The Works To Be Done Herein Shall Be The Construction Of Water Impounding As Of Approved And Of Quality Materials Completed As Per Plans, Details And Specifications. Supervision Of The Work Shall Be Done Under The Responsibility Of The Project Engineer With The Help Of The Construction Foreman. B. All Materials Employed And To Be Used In The Construction Shall Be Brand New, Unless Otherwise Or As Directed And Approved By The Project Engineer. C. Skilled Workmen And Workmanship Subject To Project Engineer’s Approval Shall Perform Methods Of The Construction In The Most Acceptable Manner. D. The Drawings Referred To In The Specifications Including Supplementary One, To Be Furnished As The Work Progress Are Intended To Cooperate With The Specification And To Form Part Hereof. Where Figures Are Given, They Are To Be Followed In Performance To Measurement By Scale. E. The Assigned Engineer Or Construction Foreman Shall Lay – Out The Building In Accordance With The Drawings And Directions On Plans As He Shall Not Only Responsible But Liable For Any Failure To Comply In This Respect With The Said Drawings, Specifications And Directions For Its Due And Accurate Location On The Lot. Part B – Other General Requirements B.1 Mobilization And Demobilization The Work Consists Of The Mobilization And Demobilization Of The Contractor’s Forces And Equipment Necessary For Performing The Work Required Under The Contract. It Does Not Include Mobilization And Demobilization For Specific Items Of Work In Fulfilling The Contract Requirements For The Commencement Of Work. B.1.1 Equipment And Material Mobilization Shall Include All Activities And Associated Costs For Transportation Of Contractor’s Personnel, Equipment, And Operating Supplies To The Site; Establishment Of Offices, Buildings, And Other Necessary General Facilities For The Contractor’s Operations At The Site. B.1.2 Demobilization Demobilization Shall Include All Activities And Associated Costs For Transportation Of Personnel, Equipment, And Supplies Not Required Or Included In The Contract From The Site; Including The Disassembly, Removal, And Site Cleanup Of Offices, Buildings, And Other Facilities Assembled On The Site Specifically For This Contract. B.2 Offices, Shops, Stores And Workmen’s Accommodation For Contractor The Contractor Shall Provide And Maintain Such Offices, Stores, Workshops Latrines, Housing And Messing Accommodations As Are Necessary, These Shall Be Located In The Contractor’s Compound, Distinct And Separate From The Engineer’s Compound. The Location, Dimensions And Layout Of Such Buildings And Places Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer. The Contractor Shall Not Be Permitted To Erect Temporary Buildings Or Structures On The Site Without The Specific Permission In Writing Of The Engineer Including Approval Of The Dimensions Of Such Buildings Or Structures. Before The Commencement Of The Period Of Warranty, The Contractor Shall Fence Off The Contractor’s Store Area From The Rest Of The Site. By The End Of The Period Of Warranty, The Contractor Shall Remove This Fence, Clear All Buildings And Grade The Area As Required By The Engineer. B.2.1 Measurement And Payment Work Prescribed In Section B.2 Shall Not Be Measured And Paid Separately; Same Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In Pay Items For Other Items For Work. B.3 Medical Room And First Aid Facilities 1. The Contractor Shall Provide And Maintain Throughout The Duration Of The Contract A Medical Room Together With All Necessary Supplies To Be Sited In The Contractor’s Main Area. The Medical Room Shall Be Waterproof; It Could Be A Building Or Room Designated And Used Exclusively For The Purpose. It Shall Have A Floor Area Of At Least 15 Square Meters And A Glazed Window Area Of At Least 2 Square Meters. 2. The Contractor Shall Employ Permanently On The Site A Fully Trained Medical Aide, Who Shall Be Engaged Solely On Medical Duties. 3. The Location Of The Medical Room And Any Other Arrangements Shall Be Made Known To All Employees By Posting On Prominent Locations Suitable Notices In The Site. 4. The Contractor’s Arrangement To Comply With This Section Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer And Also To The Approval Of Any Qualified Medical Officer Designated By The Government To Supervise Medical Arrangements On The Site. B.4 – Construction Survey And Staking B.4.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing The Necessary Equipment And Material To Survey, Stake, Calculate, And Record Data For The Control Of Work In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. B.4.2 Construction Requirements B.4.2.1 General Staking Activities Shall Be Included In The Construction Schedule To Be Submitted By The Contractor. Dates And Sequence Of Each Staking Activity Shall Be Included. The Engineer Shall Set Initial Reference Lines, Horizontal And Vertical Control Points, And Shall Furnish The Data For Use In Establishing Control For The Completion Of Each Element Of The Work. Data Relating To Horizontal And Vertical Alignments, Theoretical Slope Stake Catch Points, And Other Design Data Shall Be Furnished. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The True Settling Of The Works On Improvements And For Correctness Of Positions, Levels, Dimensions And Alignment Of All Parts Of The Works. He Shall Provide All Necessary Instruments, Appliances, Materials And Supplies, And Labor In Connection Therewith. The Contractor Shall Provide A Survey Crew Supervisor At The Project Site Whenever Surveying/staling Activity Is In Progress. Prior To Construction, The Engineer Shall Be Notified Of Any Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Engineer Shall Reestablish Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Contractor For Convenient Use Of Government-furnished Data Shall Perform Additional Calculations. Immediate Notification Of Apparent Errors In The Initial Staking Or In The Furnished Data Shall Be Provided. All Initial Reference And Control Points Shall Be Preserved. At The Start Of Construction, All Destroyed Or Disturbed Initial Reference Or Control Points Necessary To The Work Shall Be Replaced. Before Surveying And Staking, The Contractor Shall Discuss And Coordinate The Following With The Engineer: 1. Surveying And Staking Methods 2. Stake Marking/concrete Monuments 3. Grade Control For Courses Of Material 4. Referencing 5. Structure Control 6. Any Other Procedures And Controls Necessary For The Work Established Controls Shall Be Within The Tolerances Shown In Table 1. Table 1: Construction Survey And Staking Tolerances (1) Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical Existing Government Network Control Points ±20mm ±8mm X √k2 Local Supplemental Control Points Set From Existing Government Network Points ±10mm ±10mm X √n3 Centerline Points (4) – (pc), (pt), (pot), And (pac) Including References ±10mm ±10mm Other Centerline Points ±50mm ±50mm Cross-section Points And Slope Stakes (5) ±50mm ±50mm Slope Stakes References ±50mm ±50mm Culverts, Ditches, And Minor Drainage Structures ±50mm ±20mm Retaining Walls And Curb And Gutter ±20mm ±10mm Bridge Substructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Bridge Superstructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Clearing And Grubbing Limits ±500mm Roadway Subgrade Finish Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm Roadway Finish Grade Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm (1) At 95% Confidence Level. Tolerances Are Relative To Existing Government Network Control Points. (2) K Is The Distance In Kilometers. (3) N Is The Number Of Instruments Setups. (4) Centerline Points: Pc – Point Of Curve, Pt – Point Of Tangent, Pot – Point On Tangent, Poc – Point On Curve. (5) Take The Cross-sections Normal To The Centerline +1 Degree. (6) Bridge Control Is Established As Local Network And The Tolerances Are Relative To That Network. (7) Include Pave Ditches. The Contractor Shall Prepare Field Notes In An Approved Format. All Field Notes And Supporting Documentation Shall Become The Property Of The Government Upon Completion Of The Work. Work Shall Only Be Started After Staking For The Affected Work Is Accepted. The Construction Survey And Staking Work May Be Spot-checked By The Engineer For Accuracy, And Unacceptable Portions Of Work May Be Rejected. Rejected Work Shall Be Resurveyed, And Work That Is Not Within The Tolerances Specified In Table 1 Shall Be Corrected. Acceptance Of The Construction Staking Shall Not Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For Correcting Errors Discovered During The Work And For Bearing All Additional Costs Associated With The Error, Unless Such Error Is Based On Incorrect Data Supplied In Writing By The Engineer, In Which Case, The Expense In Rectifying The Same Shall Be At The Expense Of The Government. In The Case Of “change” Or “changed Conditions” Which Involve Any Change In Stakeout, The Contractor Shall Coordinate With The Engineer And Facilitate The Prompt Reestablishment Of The Field Control For The Altered Or Adjusted Work. All Flagging, Lath, Stakes, And Other Staking Materials Shall Be Removed And Disposed After The Project Is Completed. B.4.2.2 Equipment Survey Instruments And Supporting Equipment Capable Of Achieving The Specified Tolerances Shall Be Furnished. Acceptable Tools, Supplies, And Stakes Of The Type And Quality Normally Used In Highway Survey Work And Suitable For The Intended Use Shall Be Furnished. Stakes And Hubs Of Sufficient Length To Provide A Solid Net In The Ground With Sufficient Surface Area Above Ground For Necessary Legible Markings Shall Also Be Furnished. B.4.2.3 Survey And Staking Requirements All Survey, Staking, Recording Data, And Calculations Necessary To Construct The Project From The Initial Layout To Final Completion Shall Be Performed. Stakes Shall Be Reset As Many Times As Necessary To Construct The Work. 1. Control Points Established Initial Horizontal And Vertical Control Points In Conflict With Construction Shall Be Relocated To Areas That Will Not Be Disturbed By Construction Operations. The Coordinates And Elevations For The Relocated Points Shall Be Furnished Before The Initial Points Are Disturbed. 2. Roadway Cross-sections Roadway Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Normal Or Perpendicular To The Centerline. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 10 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing 20 Meters. Additional Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At Significant Breaks In Topography And At Changes In The Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections. Along Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded At Breaks In Topography And At Changes In Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections And Shall Be No Further Apart Than 5 Meters. Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded To At Least The Anticipated Slope Stake And Reference Locations. All Cross-section Distances Shall Be Reduced To Horizontal Distances From Centerline. 3. Slope Stakes And References Slope Stakes And References Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At The Cross-section Locations. Slope Stakes Shall Be Established In The Field As The Actual Point Of Intersection Of The Design Roadway Slope With The Natural Ground Line. Slope Stake References Shall Be Set Outside The Clearing Limits. All Reference Point And Slope Stake Information Shall Be Included On The Reference Stakes. When Initial References Are Provided, Slope Stakes May Be Set From These Points With Verification Of The Slope Stake Location With Field Measurements. Slope Stakes On Any Section That Do Not Match With The Staking Report Within The Tolerances Established In Table 1 Shall Be Recatched. Roadway Cross-section Data Shall Be Taken Between Centerline And The New Slope Stake Location. Additional References Shall Be Set Even When The Initial References Are Provided. 4. Clearing And Grubbing Limits Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shall Be Set Both Sides Of Centerline At Roadway Cross-section Locations, Extending One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. 5. Centerline Reestablishment Centerline Shall Be Reestablished From Instrument Control Points. The Maximum Spacing Between Centerline Points Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Distance Between Centerline Points Shall Be 20 Meters. 6. Grade Finishing Stakes Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Set For Grade Elevations And Horizontal Alignment, At The Centerline And At Each Shoulder Of Roadway Cross-section Locations. Stakes Shall Be Set At The Top Of Subgrade And The Top Of Each Aggregate Course. Where Turnouts Are Constructed, Stakes Shall Be Set At The Centerline, At Each Normal Shoulder, And At The Shoulder Of The Turnout. In Parking Areas, Hubs Shall Be Set At The Centerline And Along The Edges Of The Parking Area. Stakes Shall Be Set At All Ditches To Be Paved. The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 20 Meters. The Maximum Transverse Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 5 Meters. Brushes Or Guard Stakes Shall Be Used At Each Stake. 7. Culverts Culverts Shall Be Staked To Fit Field Conditions. The Location Of Culverts May Differ From The Plans. The Following Shall Be Performed: A. Survey And Record The Ground Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Including Inlet And Outlet Channel Profile Of At Least 10 Meters And As Additionally Directed By The Engineer So As To Gather All Necessary Data For The Preparation Of Pipe Projection Plan. B. Determine The Slope Catch Points At The Inlet And Outlet. C. Set The Reference Points And Record Information Necessary To Determine Culvert Length And End Treatments. D. Plot Into Scale The Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Reflecting The Natural Ground Elevation, Invert Elevation, The Flow Line, The Roadway Section, And The Size, Length And The Degree Of Elbow Of Culvert, End Treatments, Grade And Other Appurtenances. E. Plot Into Scale The Cross-section Of Inlet And Outlet Channel At Not More Than 5 Meters Interval. F. Submit The Plotted Pipe Projection Plan For Approval Of Final Culvert Length, Alignment And Headwall. G. When The Pipe Projection Plan Has Been Approved, Set Drainage Culvert Structure Survey And References Stakes, And Stake Inlet And Outlet To Make The Structure Functional. 8. Retaining Walls And Other Types Of Slope Protection Works Profile Measurements Along The Face Of The Proposed Wall And 2 Meters In Front Of The Wall Face Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Within The Limits Designated By The Engineer At Every 5 Meters Along The Length Of The Wall And All Major Breaks In Terrain. For Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded Every 5 Meters And At All Major Breaks In Terrain. Adequate References And Horizontal And Vertical Control Points Shall Be Set. 9. Borrow And Waste Site The Work Essential For Initial Layout And Measurement Of The Borrow Or Waste Site Shall Be Performed. A Referenced Baseline, Site Limits, And Clearing Limits Shall Be Established. Initial And Final Cross-sections Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. 10. Permanent Monuments And Markers All Survey And Staking Necessary To Establish Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Performed. 11. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking All Surveying, Staking, And Recording Of Data Essential For Establishing The Layout And Control Of The Following Shall Be Performed, As Applicable: A. Approach Roads And Trails B. Road Right Of Way And Construction Limit In Accordance With The Approved Parcellary Plan. C. Curb And Gutter D. Guardrail E. Parking Areas F. Paved Waterways And Outfall Structures G. Lined Canals And Other Ditches H. Chutes And Spillways I. Turf Establishment J. Utilities K. Signs, Delineators, And Object Markers L. Pavement Markings B.4.3 Method Of Measurement Construction Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Slope, Reference, And Clearing And Grubbing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Establishment Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Reestablishment Shall Be Measured Only One Time. Culvert Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Each. Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Hour Of Survey Of Work Ordered Or By The Lump Sum. For Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Paid By The Hour, The Minimum Survey Crew Size Shall Be 2 Persons. Time Spent In Making Preparations, Travelling To And From The Project Site, Performing Calculations, Plotting Cross-sections And Other Data, Processing Computer Data, And Other Efforts Necessary To Successfully Accomplish Construction Survey And Staking Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Deemed Included As Subsidiary For Each Of The Pay Item. B.5 – Project Billboard The Contractor Shall Ensure That The Project Site Is Identified With Information Billboard Which Shall Be Erected At The Beginning And Ending Of The Proposed Project. The Layout Of The Billboard Is Cited In Annex 14 Of The Prdp Operations Manual. It Shall Accord To The Specifications Pursuant To The Commission On Audit (coa) Circular No. 2013-004 Issued On January 30, 2013. Annex 14 Project Billboard Coa Billboard Pao Billboard The Billboard’s Specifications Shall Conform To The Following Requirements: A. Tarpaulin, White, 8ft X 8ft (coa) And 4ft X 8ft (pao): B. Resolution: 70 Dpi; C. Font: Helvetica; D. Font Size: Main Information – 3”; E. Sub-information – 1”; F. Font Color: Black; G. Suitable Frame: Rigid Wood Or Steel Frame With Post; And, H. Posting: Outside Display At The Project Location After Award Has Been Made. B.5.1 Measurement The Supply And Erection Of Project Billboard Shall Be In Accordance With Provisions Of This Specification And Shall Be Measured For Payment. B.5.2 Basis Of Payment Payments Shall Be In Accordance With All The Cost Associated With The Compliance Of This Specification And Shall Be Included In The Contractor’s Bid Price. No Additional Or Separate Payment Will Be Made In This Regard As Well As For The Maintenance Of The Billboard. Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement B.5 Project Billboard Each B.8 Traffic Management This Item Shall Provide The Planning And Implementation Of Traffic Plans, This Refers To The Direction, Control And Supervision Of All Vehicular And Pedestrian Traffic Around Construction Zone, To Ensure The Safety Of Construction Workers And The General Public. Traffic Control Measures Shall Include Posting Of Traffic Controllers, Roads Closure, Foothpath Closure, Detours, Signing/speed Reductions And Other Warnings/directional Signage. Part C – Earthwork Item 102 – Excavation 102.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Roadway Drainage And Borrow Excavation, And The Disposal Of Material In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 102.1.1 Roadway Excavation Roadway Excavation Will Include Excavation And Grading For Roadways, Parking Areas, Intersections, Approaches, Slope Rounding, Benching, Waterways And Ditches: Removal Of Unsuitable Material From The Roadbed And Beneath Embankment Areas: And Excavating Selected Material Found In The Roadway As Ordered By The Engineer For Specific Use In The Improvement. Roadway Excavation Will Be Classified As “unclassified Excavation”, “rock Excavation”, “common Excavation”, Or “muck Excavation” As Indicated In The Bill Of Quantities And Hereinafter Described. (1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Disposal Of All Materials Regardless Of Its Nature, Not Classified And Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under Other Pay Items. (2) Rock Excavation. Rock Excavation Shall Consist Of Excavation Of Igneous, Sedimentary And Metamorphic Rocks Which Cannot Be Excavated Without Blasting Or The Use Of Rippers, And All Boulders Or Other Detached Stones Each Having A Volume Of 1 Cubic Meter Or More As Determined By Physical Measurements Or Visually By The Engineer. (3) Common Excavation. Common Excavations Shall Consist Of All Excavation Not Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under “rock Excavation” Or Other Pay Items. (4) Muck Excavation. Muck Excavation Shall Consist Of The Removal And Disposal Of Deposits Of Saturated Or Unsaturated Mixtures Of Soils And Organic Matter Not Suitable For Foundation Materials Regardless Of Moisture Content. 102.1.2 Borrow Excavation Borrow Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Utilization Of Approved Materials Required For The Construction Of Embankments Or For Other Portions Of The Work, And Shall Be Obtained From Approved Sources, In Accordance With Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume 1 And The Following: (1) Borrow, Case 1 Borrow Case 1 Will Consist Of Material Obtained From Sources Designated On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions. (2) Borrow, Case 2 Borrow Case 2 Will Consist Of Material Obtaine4d From Sources Provided By The Contractor. The Material Shall Meet The Quality Requirements Determined By The Engineer Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract. 102.2 Construction Requirements 102.2.1 General When There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Pre-construction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Excavated Materials. All Excavation Shall Be Finished To Reasonably Smooth And Uniform Surfaces. No Materials Shall Be Wasted Without Authority Of The Engineer. Excavation Operations Shall Be Conducted So That Material Outside Of The Limits Of Slopes Will Not Be Disturbed. Prior To Excavation, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 102.2.2 Conservation Of Topsoil Where Provided For On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions, Suitable Topsoil Encountered In Excavation And On Areas Where Embankment Is To Be Placed Shall Be Removed To Such Extent And To Such Depth As The Engineer May Direct. The Removed Topsoi8l Shall Be Transported And Deposited In Storage Piles At Locations Approved By The Engineer. The Topsoil Shall Be Completely Removed To The Required Depth From Any Designated Area Prior To The Beginning Of Regular Excavation Or Embankment Work In The Area And Shall Be Kept Separate From Other Excavated Materials For Later Use. 102.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Suitable Materials Removed From The Excavation Shall Be Used In The Formation Of The Embankment, Subgrade, Shoulders, Slopes, Bedding, And Backfill For Structures, And For Other Purposes Shown On The Plans Or As Directed. The Engineer Will Designate As Unsuitable Those Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted In The Embankments. All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Shown On The Plans Or As Directed Without Delay To The Contractor. Only Approved Materials Shall Be Used In The Construction Embankments And Backfills. All Excess Materials, Including Rock And Boulders That Cannot Be Used In Embankments Shall Be Disposed Of As Directed. Materials Encountered In Excavation And Determined By The Engineer As Suitable For Topping, Road Finishing, Slope Protection, Or Other Purposes Shall Be Conserved And Utilized As Directed By The Engineer. Borrow Materials Shall Not Be Placed Until After The Readily Accessible Materials From Roadway Excavation Has Been Placed In The Fill, Unless Otherwise Permitted Or Directed By The Engineer. If The Contractor Places More Borrow Than Is Required And Thereby Causes A Waste Of Excavation, The Amount Of Such Waste Wi8ll Be Deducted From The Borrow Volume. 102.2.4 Pre-watering Excavation Areas And Borrow Pits May Be Pre-watered Before Excavating The Material. When Pre-watering Is Used, The Areas To Be Excavated Shall Be Moistened To The Full Depth, From The Surface To The Bottom Of The Excavation. The Water Shall Be Controlled So That The Excavated Material Will Contain The Proper Moisture To Permit Compaction To The Specified Density With The Use Of Standard Compacting Equipment. Pre-watering Shall Be Supplemented Where Necessary, By Truck Watering Units, To Ensure That The Embankment Material Contains The Proper Moisture At The Time Of Compaction. The Contractor Shall Provide Drilling Equipment Capable Of Suitably Checking The Moisture Penetration To The Full Depth Of The Excavation. 102.2.5 Presplitting Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract, Rock Excavation Which Requires Drilling And Shooting Shall Be Presplit. Presplitting To Obtain Faces In The Rock And Shale Formations Shall Be Performed By: (1) Drilling Holes At Uniform Intervals Along The Slope Lines, (2) Loading And Stemming The Holes With Appropriate Explosives And Stemming Material, And (3) Detonating The Holes Simultaneously. Prior To Starting Drilling Operations For Presplitting, The Contractor Shall Furnish The Engineer A Plan Outlining The Position Of All Drill Holes Depth Of Drilling, Type Of Explosives To Be Used, Loading Pattern And Sequence Of Firing. The Drilling And Blasting Plan Is For Record Purposes Only And Will Not Absolve The Contractor Of His Responsibility For Using Proper Drilling And Blasting Procedures. Controlled Blasting Shall Begin With A Short Test Section Of A Length Approved By The Engineer. The Test Section Shall Be Presplit, Production Drilled And Blasted And Sufficient Material Excavated Whereby The Engineer Can Determine If The Contractor’s Methods Are Satisfactory. The Engineer May Order Discontinuance Of The Presplitting When He Determines That The Materials Encountered Have Become Unsuitable For Being Presplit. The Holes Shall Be Charged With Explosives Of The Size, Kind, Strength And At The Spacing Suitable For The Formations Being Presplit, And With Stemming Material Which Passes A 9.5 Mm Standard Sieve And Which Has The Qualities For Proper Confinement Of Explosives. The Finished Presplit Slope Shall Be Reasonably Uniform And Free Of Loose Rock. Variance From The True Plane Of The Excavated Backs Slope Shall Not Exceed 300 Mm; However, Localized Irregularities Or Surface Variations That Do Not Constitute A Safety Hazard Or An Impairment To Drainage Courses Or Facilities Will Be Permitted. A Maximum Offset Of 600 Mm Will Be Permitted For A Construction Working Bench At The Bottom Of Each Lift For Use In Drilling The Next Lower Presplitting Pattern. 102.2.6 Excavation Of Ditches, Gutters, Etc. All Materials Excavated From Side Ditches And Gutters, Channel Changes, Irrigation Ditches, Inlet And Outlet Ditches, Toe Ditches, Furrow Ditches And Such Other Ditches As May Be Designated On The Plans Or Staked By The Engineer, Shall Be Utilized As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. Ditches Shall Conform To The Slope, Grade, And Shape Of The Required Cross-section, With No Projections Of Roots, Stumps, Rock, Or Similar Matter. The Contractor Shall Maintain And Keep Open And Free From Leaves, Sticks, And Other Debris All Ditches Dug By Him Until Final Acceptance Of The Work. Furrow Ditches Shall Be Formed By Plowing A Continuous Furrow Along The Line Staked By The Engineer. Methods Other Than Plowing May Be Used If Acceptable To The Engineer. The Ditches Shall Be Cleaned Out By Hand Shovel Work, By Ditcher, Or By Some Other Suitable Method, Throwing All Loose Materials On The Downhill Side So That The Bottom Of The Finished Ditch Shall Be Approximately 450 Mm Below The Crest Of The Loose Material Piled On The Downhill Side. Hand Finish Will Not Be Required, But The Flow Lines Shall Be In Satisfactory Shape To Provide Drainage Without Overflow. 102.2.7 Excavation Of Roadbed Level Rock Shall Be Excavated To A Depth Of 150 Mm Below Subgrade Within The Limits Of The Roadbed, And The Excavation Backfilled With Material Designated On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer And Compacted To The Required Density. When Excavation Methods Employed By The Contractor Leave Undrained Pockets In The Rock Surface, The Contractor Shall At His Own Expense, Properly Drain Such Depressions Or When Permitted By The Engineer Fill The Depressions With Approved Impermeable Material. Material Below Subgrade, Other Than Solid Rock Shall Be Thoroughly Scarified To A Depth Of 150 Mm And The Moisture Content Increased Or Reduced, As Necessary, To Bring The Material Throughout This 150 Mm Layer To The Moisture Content Suitable For Maximum Compaction. This Layer Shall Then Be Compacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. 102.2.8 Borrow Areas The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of Opening Any Borrow Areas So That The Cross-section Elevations And Measurements Of The Ground Surface After Stripping May Be Taken, And The Borrow Material Can Be Tested Before Being Used. Sufficient Time For Testing The Borrow Material Shall Be Allowed. All Borrow Areas Shall Be Bladed And Left In Such Shape To Permit Accurate Measurements After Excavation Has Been Completed. The Contractor Shall Not Excavate Beyond The Dimensions And Elevations Established, And No Material Shall Be Removed Prior To The Staking Out And Cross-sectioning Of The Site. The Finished Borrow Areas Shall Be Approximately True To Line And Grade Established And Specified And Shall Be Finished, As Prescribed In Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume 1. When Necessary To Remove Fencing, The Fencing Shall Be Replaced In At Least As Good Condition As It Was Originally. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The Confinement Of Livestock When A Portion Of The Fence Is Removed. 102.2.9 Removal Of Unsuitable Material Where The Plans Show The Top Portion Of The Roadbed To Be Selected Topping, All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Excavated To The Depth Necessary For Replacement Of The Selected Topping To The Required Compacted Thickness. Where Excavation To The Finished Graded Section Results In A Subgrade Or Slopes Of Unsuitable Soil, The Engineer May Require The Contractor To Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill To The Finished Graded Section With Approved Material. The Contractor Shall Conduct His Operations In Such A Way That The Engineer Can Take The Necessary Cross-sectional Measurements Before The Backfill Is Placed. The Excavation Of Muck Shall Be Handled In Manner That Will Not Permit The Entrapment Of Muck Within The Backfill. The Material Used For Backfilling Up To The Ground Line Or Water Level, Whichever Is Higher, Shall Be Rock Or Other Suitable Granular Material Selected From The Roadway Excavation, If Available. If Not Available, Suitable Material Shall Be Obtained From Other Approved Sources. Unsuitable Material Removed Shall Be Disposed Of In Designated Areas Shown On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer. 102.3 Method Of Measurement The Cost Of Excavation Of Material Which Is Incorporated In The Works Or In Other Areas Of Sill Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Items Of Work Where The Material Is Used. Measurement Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material Shall Be The Net Volume In Its Original Position. For Measurement Purposes, Surplus Suitable Material Shall Be Calculated As The Difference Between The Net Volumes Of Suitable Material Required To Be Used In Embankment Corrected By Applying Shrinkage Factor Or A Swell Factor In Case Of Rock Excavation, Determined By Laboratory Tests To Get Its Original Volume Measurement, And The Net Volume Of Suitable Material From Excavation In The Original Position. Separate Pay Items Shall Be Provided For Surplus Common, Unclassified And Rock Material. The Contractor Shall Be Deemed To Have Included In The Contract Unit Prices All Costs Of Obtaining Land For The Disposal Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material. Section Vii. Drawings Annex A – Architectural Design Annex B- Project Billboard Plan Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities Bid No. Agr- 24-1408-b Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost No. B.4 (10) Miscellaneous Survey And Staking 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P B.5 Project Billboard / Signboard 4.00 Each Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Each P B.9 Mobilization/demobilization 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P 102 (2) Surplus Common Excavation 46,338.38 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Total Bid Cost In Figures P Total Bid Cost In Words Summary Of Costs Item No. Bid Amount B.4 (10) Miscellaneous Survey And Staking ₱ _____________________________ B.5 Project Billboard / Signboard ₱ _____________________________ B.9 Mobilization/demobilization ₱ _____________________________ 102 (2) Surplus Common Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Total Bid Amount ₱ _____________________________ Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents I. Technical Component Envelope Class “a” Documents Legal Documents ⬜ (a) Valid Philgeps Registration Certificate (platinum Membership) (all Pages) In Accordance With Section 8.5.2 Of The Irr; Technical Documents ⬜ (b) Statement Of The Prospective Bidder Of All Its Ongoing Government And Private Contracts, Including Contracts Awarded But Not Yet Started, If Any, Whether Similar Or Not Similar In Nature And Complexity To The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ (c) Statement Of The Bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) Similar To The Contract To Be Bid, Except Under Conditions Provided Under The Rules; And ⬜ (d) Special Pcab License In Case Of Joint Ventures; And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ (e) Original Copy Of Bid Security. If In The Form Of A Surety Bond, Submit Also A Certification Issued By The Insurance Commission; Or Original Copy Of Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; And (f) Project Requirements, Which Shall Include The Following: ⬜ A. Organizational Chart For The Contract To Be Bid; ⬜ B. List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen), To Be Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data; ⬜ C. List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership Or Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be; And ⬜ (g) Original Duly Signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (oss); And If Applicable, Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate In Case Of A Corporation, Partnership, Or Cooperative; Or Original Special Power Of Attorney Of All Members Of The Joint Venture Giving Full Power And Authority To Its Officer To Sign The Oss And Do Acts To Represent The Bidder. Financial Documents ⬜ (h) The Prospective Bidder’s Computation Of Net Financial Contracting Capacity (nfcc). Class “b” Documents ⬜ (i) If Applicable, Duly Signed Joint Venture Agreement (jva) In Accordance With Ra No. 4566 And Its Irr In Case The Joint Venture Is Already In Existence; Or Duly Notarized Statements From All The Potential Joint Venture Partners Stating That They Will Enter Into And Abide By The Provisions Of The Jva In The Instance That The Bid Is Successful. Ii. Financial Component Envelope ⬜ (j) Original Of Duly Signed And Accomplished Financial Bid Form; And Other Documentary Requirements Under Ra No. 9184 ⬜ (k) Original Of Duly Signed Bid Prices In The Bill Of Quantities; And ⬜ (l) Duly Accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, Including A Summary Sheet Indicating The Unit Prices Of Construction Materials, Labor Rates, And Equipment Rentals Used In Coming Up With The Bid; And ⬜ Cash Flow By Quarter. Bid Form For The Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Bid Form Date : Project Identification No. : To: [name And Address Of Procuring Entity] Having Examined The Philippine Bidding Documents (pbds) Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin Numbers [insert Numbers], The Receipt Of Which Is Hereby Duly Acknowledged, We, The Undersigned, Declare That: A. We Have No Reservation To The Pbds, Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletins, For The Procurement Project: [insert Name Of Contract]; B. We Offer To Execute The Works For This Contract In Accordance With The Pbds; C. The Total Price Of Our Bid In Words And Figures, Excluding Any Discounts Offered Below Is: [insert Information]; D. The Discounts Offered And The Methodology For Their Application Are: [insert Information]; E. The Total Bid Price Includes The Cost Of All Taxes, Such As, But Not Limited To: [specify The Applicable Taxes, E.g. (i) Value Added Tax (vat), (ii) Income Tax, (iii) Local Taxes, And (iv) Other Fiscal Levies And Duties], Which Are Itemized Herein And Reflected In The Detailed Estimates, F. Our Bid Shall Be Valid Within A Period Stated In The Pbds, And It Shall Remain Binding Upon Us At Any Time Before The Expiration Of That Period; G. If Our Bid Is Accepted, We Commit To Obtain A Performance Security In The Amount Of [insert Percentage Amount] Percent Of The Contract Price For The Due Performance Of The Contract, Or A Performance Securing Declaration In Lieu Of The Allowable Forms Of Performance Security, Subject To The Terms And Conditions Of Issued Gppb Guidelines12 For This Purpose; H. We Are Not Participating, As Bidders, In More Than One Bid In This Bidding Process, Other Than Alternative Offers In Accordance With The Bidding Documents; I. We Understand That This Bid, Together With Your Written Acceptance Thereof Included In Your Notification Of Award, Shall Constitute A Binding Contract Between Us, Until A Formal Contract Is Prepared And Executed; And J. We Understand That You Are Not Bound To Accept The Lowest Calculated Bid Or Any Other Bid That You May Receive. K. We Likewise Certify/confirm That The Undersigned, Is The Duly Authorized Representative Of The Bidder, And Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For The [name Of Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity]. L. We Acknowledge That Failure To Sign Each And Every Page Of This Bid Form, Including The Bill Of Quantities, Shall Be A Ground For The Rejection Of Our Bid. Name: Legal Capacity: Signature: Duly Authorized To Sign The Bid For And Behalf Of: Date Bid Securing Declaration Form [shall Be Submitted With The Bid If Bidder Opts To Provide This Form Of Bid Security] Republic Of The Philippines) City Of ) S.s. Bid Securing Declaration Project Identification No.: [insert Number] To: [insert Name And Address Of The Procuring Entity] I/we, The Undersigned, Declare That: 1. I/we Understand That, According To Your Conditions, Bids Must Be Supported By A Bid Security, Which May Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration. 2. I/we Accept That: (a) I/we Will Be Automatically Disqualified From Bidding For Any Procurement Contract With Any Procuring Entity For A Period Of Two (2) Years Upon Receipt Of Your Blacklisting Order; And, (b) I/we Will Pay The Applicable Fine Provided Under Section 6 Of The Guidelines On The Use Of Bid Securing Declaration, Within Fifteen (15) Days From Receipt Of The Written Demand By The Procuring Entity For The Commission Of Acts Resulting To The Enforcement Of The Bid Securing Declaration Under Sections 23.1(b), 34.2, 40.1 And 69.1, Except 69.1(f),of The Irr Of Ra No. 9184; Without Prejudice To Other Legal Action The Government May Undertake. 3. I/we Understand That This Bid Securing Declaration Shall Cease To Be Valid On The Following Circumstances: A. Upon Expiration Of The Bid Validity Period, Or Any Extension Thereof Pursuant To Your Request; B. I Am/we Are Declared Ineligible Or Post-disqualified Upon Receipt Of Your Notice To Such Effect, And (i) I/we Failed To Timely File A Request For Reconsideration Or (ii) I/we Filed A Waiver To Avail Of Said Right; And C. I Am/we Are Declared The Bidder With The Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, And I/we Have Furnished The Performance Security And Signed The Contract. In Witness Whereof, I/we Have Hereunto Set My/our Hand/s This Day Of [month] [year] At [place Of Execution]. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice] Omnibus Sworn Statement (revised) [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Republic Of The Philippines ) City/municipality Of ) S.s. Affidavit I, [name Of Affiant], Of Legal Age, [civil Status], [nationality], And Residing At [address Of Affiant], After Having Been Duly Sworn In Accordance With Law, Do Hereby Depose And State That: 1. [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] I Am The Sole Proprietor Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am The Duly Authorized And Designated Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; 2. [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] As The Owner And Sole Proprietor, Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder], I Have Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached Duly Notarized Special Power Of Attorney; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached [state Title Of Attached Document Showing Proof Of Authorization (e.g., Duly Notarized Secretary’s Certificate, Board/partnership Resolution, Or Special Power Of Attorney, Whichever Is Applicable;)]; 3. [name Of Bidder] Is Not “blacklisted” Or Barred From Bidding By The Government Of The Philippines Or Any Of Its Agencies, Offices, Corporations, Or Local Government Units, Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution Whose Blacklisting Rules Have Been Recognized By The Government Procurement Policy Board, By Itself Or By Relation, Membership, Association, Affiliation, Or Controlling Interest With Another Blacklisted Person Or Entity As Defined And Provided For In The Uniform Guidelines On Blacklisting; 4. Each Of The Documents Submitted In Satisfaction Of The Bidding Requirements Is An Authentic Copy Of The Original, Complete, And All Statements And Information Provided Therein Are True And Correct; 5. [name Of Bidder] Is Authorizing The Head Of The Procuring Entity Or Its Duly Authorized Representative(s) To Verify All The Documents Submitted; 6. [select One, Delete The Rest:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] The Owner Or Sole Proprietor Is Not Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Partnership Or Cooperative:] None Of The Officers And Members Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Corporation Or Joint Venture:] None Of The Officers, Directors, And Controlling Stockholders Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; 7. [name Of Bidder] Complies With Existing Labor Laws And Standards; And 8. [name Of Bidder] Is Aware Of And Has Undertaken The Responsibilities As A Bidder In Compliance With The Philippine Bidding Documents, Which Includes: A. Carefully Examining All Of The Bidding Documents; B. Acknowledging All Conditions, Local Or Otherwise, Affecting The Implementation Of The Contract; C. Making An Estimate Of The Facilities Available And Needed For The Contract To Be Bid, If Any; And D. Inquiring Or Securing Supplemental/bid Bulletin(s) Issued For The [name Of The Project]. 9. [name Of Bidder] Did Not Give Or Pay Directly Or Indirectly, Any Commission, Amount, Fee, Or Any Form Of Consideration, Pecuniary Or Otherwise, To Any Person Or Official, Personnel Or Representative Of The Government In Relation To Any Procurement Project Or Activity. 10. In Case Advance Payment Was Made Or Given, Failure To Perform Or Deliver Any Of The Obligations And Undertakings In The Contract Shall Be Sufficient Grounds To Constitute Criminal Liability For Swindling (estafa) Or The Commission Of Fraud With Unfaithfulness Or Abuse Of Confidence Through Misappropriating Or Converting Any Payment Received By A Person Or Entity Under An Obligation Involving The Duty To Deliver Certain Goods Or Services, To The Prejudice Of The Public And The Government Of The Philippines Pursuant To Article 315 Of Act No. 3815 S. 1930, As Amended, Or The Revised Penal Code. In Witness Whereof, I Have Hereunto Set My Hand This Day Of , 20 At , Philippines. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice]

Details: Description Philippine Bidding Documents (as Harmonized With Development Partners) Road Opening Project At Brgy. Aguingay, Janiuay, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-1186-b Iloilo Provincial Government Sixth Edition Table Of Contents Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms 4 Section I. Invitation To Bid 7 Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders 9 1. Scope Of Bid 9 2. Funding Information 9 3. Bidding Requirements 9 4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices 9 5. Eligible Bidders 10 6. Origin Of Associated Goods 10 7. Subcontracts 10 8. Pre-bid Conference 10 9. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents 10 10. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components 11 11. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component 11 12. Alternative Bids 11 13. Bid Prices 12 14. Bid And Payment Currencies 12 15. Bid Security 12 16. Sealing And Marking Of Bids 12 17. Deadline For Submission Of Bids 12 18. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids 13 19. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids 13 20. Post Qualification 13 21. Signing Of The Contract 13 Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet 14 Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract 16 1. Scope Of Contract 16 2. Sectional Completion Of Works 16 3. Possession Of Site 16 4. The Contractor’s Obligations 16 5. Performance Security 17 6. Site Investigation Reports 17 7. Warranty 17 8. Liability Of The Contractor 17 9. Termination For Other Causes 17 10. Dayworks 18 11. Program Of Work 18 12. Instructions, Inspections And Audits 18 13. Advance Payment 18 14. Progress Payments 18 15. Operating And Maintenance Manuals 18 Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract 19 Section Vi. Specifications 20 Section Vii. Drawings 28 Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities 69 Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents 73 Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms Abc – Approved Budget For The Contract. Arcc – Allowable Range Of Contract Cost. Bac – Bids And Awards Committee. Bid – A Signed Offer Or Proposal To Undertake A Contract Submitted By A Bidder In Response To And In Consonance With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. Also Referred To As Proposal And Tender. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[c]) Bidder – Refers To A Contractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Distributor And/or Consultant Who Submits A Bid In Response To The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[d]) Bidding Documents – The Documents Issued By The Procuring Entity As The Bases For Bids, Furnishing All Information Necessary For A Prospective Bidder To Prepare A Bid For The Goods, Infrastructure Projects, And/or Consulting Services Required By The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[e]) Bir – Bureau Of Internal Revenue. Bsp – Bangko Sentral Ng Pilipinas. Cda – Cooperative Development Authority. Consulting Services – Refer To Services For Infrastructure Projects And Other Types Of Projects Or Activities Of The Gop Requiring Adequate External Technical And Professional Expertise That Are Beyond The Capability And/or Capacity Of The Gop To Undertake Such As, But Not Limited To: (i) Advisory And Review Services; (ii) Pre-investment Or Feasibility Studies; (iii) Design; (iv) Construction Supervision; (v) Management And Related Services; And (vi) Other Technical Services Or Special Studies. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[i]) Contract – Refers To The Agreement Entered Into Between The Procuring Entity And The Supplier Or Manufacturer Or Distributor Or Service Provider For Procurement Of Goods And Services; Contractor For Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects; Or Consultant Or Consulting Firm For Procurement Of Consulting Services; As The Case May Be, As Recorded In The Contract Form Signed By The Parties, Including All Attachments And Appendices Thereto And All Documents Incorporated By Reference Therein. Contractor – Is A Natural Or Juridical Entity Whose Proposal Was Accepted By The Procuring Entity And To Whom The Contract To Execute The Work Was Awarded. Contractor As Used In These Bidding Documents May Likewise Refer To A Supplier, Distributor, Manufacturer, Or Consultant. Cpi – Consumer Price Index. Dole – Department Of Labor And Employment. Dti – Department Of Trade And Industry. Foreign-funded Procurement Or Foreign-assisted Project – Refers To Procurement Whose Funding Source Is From A Foreign Government, Foreign Or International Financing Institution As Specified In The Treaty Or International Or Executive Agreement. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[b]). Gfi – Government Financial Institution. Gocc – Government-owned And/or –controlled Corporation. Goods – Refer To All Items, Supplies, Materials And General Support Services, Except Consulting Services And Infrastructure Projects, Which May Be Needed In The Transaction Of Public Businesses Or In The Pursuit Of Any Government Undertaking, Project Or Activity, Whether In The Nature Of Equipment, Furniture, Stationery, Materials For Construction, Or Personal Property Of Any Kind, Including Non-personal Or Contractual Services Such As The Repair And Maintenance Of Equipment And Furniture, As Well As Trucking, Hauling, Janitorial, Security, And Related Or Analogous Services, As Well As Procurement Of Materials And Supplies Provided By The Procuring Entity For Such Services. The Term “related” Or “analogous Services” Shall Include, But Is Not Limited To, Lease Or Purchase Of Office Space, Media Advertisements, Health Maintenance Services, And Other Services Essential To The Operation Of The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[r]) Gop – Government Of The Philippines. Infrastructure Projects – Include The Construction, Improvement, Rehabilitation, Demolition, Repair, Restoration Or Maintenance Of Roads And Bridges, Railways, Airports, Seaports, Communication Facilities, Civil Works Components Of Information Technology Projects, Irrigation, Flood Control And Drainage, Water Supply, Sanitation, Sewerage And Solid Waste Management Systems, Shore Protection, Energy/power And Electrification Facilities, National Buildings, School Buildings, Hospital Buildings, And Other Related Construction Projects Of The Government. Also Referred To As Civil Works Or Works. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[u]) Lgus – Local Government Units. Nfcc – Net Financial Contracting Capacity. Nga – National Government Agency. Pcab – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board. Philgeps - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System. Procurement Project – Refers To A Specific Or Identified Procurement Covering Goods, Infrastructure Project Or Consulting Services. A Procurement Project Shall Be Described, Detailed, And Scheduled In The Project Procurement Management Plan Prepared By The Agency Which Shall Be Consolidated In The Procuring Entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (gppb Circular No. 06-2019 Dated 17 July 2019) Psa – Philippine Statistics Authority. Sec – Securities And Exchange Commission. Slcc – Single Largest Completed Contract. Un – United Nations. Republic Of The Philippines Iloilo Provincial Government Section I. Invitation To Bid For Road Opening Project At Brgy. Aguingay, Janiuay, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-1186-b The Iloilo Provincial Government, Through The General Fund Fy 2023-capital Outlay-road Networks Intends To Apply The Sum Of Eight Million Three Hundred Thousand Pesos (p8,300,000.00) Being The Approved Budget For The Contract (abc) To Payments Under The Contract For Agr-24-1186-b For The Road Opening Project At Brgy. Aguingay, Janiuay, Iloilo For The Bids Received In Excess Of The Abc Shall Be Automatically Rejected At Bid Opening. The Iloilo Provincial Government Now Invites Bids For The Above Procurement Project. Completion Of The Works Is Required One Hundred Fifty (150) Calendar Days. Bidders Should Have Completed A Contract Similar To The Project. The Description Of An Eligible Bidder Is Contained In The Bidding Documents, Particularly, In Section Ii (instructions To Bidders). Bidding Will Be Conducted Through Open Competitive Bidding Procedures Using Non-discretionary “pass/fail” Criterion As Specified In The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Republic Act (ra) No. 9184. Interested Bidders May Obtain Further Information From The Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines And Inspect The Bidding Documents At The Address Given Below From 8:00am To 5:00pm. A Complete Set Of Bidding Documents May Be Acquired By Interested Bidders On September 10, 2024 From Given Address And Website/s Below And Upon Payment Of The Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents, Pursuant To The Latest Guidelines Issued By The Gppb, In The Amount Of Five Thousand Pesos (p5, 000.00). The Procuring Entity Shall Allow The Bidder To Present Its Proof Of Payment For The Fees In Person. The Iloilo Provincial Government Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference On September 17, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines, And/or Through Videoconferencing/webcasting Via Zoom Conference Which Shall Be Open To Prospective Bidders. The Default Meeting Id And Password Shall Be: Meeting Id: 4340851724 // Password: 0922 Bids Must Be Duly Received By The Bac Secretariat Through Manual Submission At The Office Address At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City On Or Before October 01, 2024, 9:00 A.m. Late Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. All Bids Must Be Accompanied By A Bid Security In Any Of The Acceptable Forms And In The Amount Stated In Itb Clause 16. Bid Opening Shall Be October 01, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines. Bids Will Be Opened In The Presence Of The Bidders’ Representatives Who Choose To Attend The Activity. The Iloilo Provincial Government Reserves The Right To Reject Any And All Bids, Declare A Failure Of Bidding, Or Not Award The Contract At Any Time Prior To Contract Award In Accordance With Sections 35.6 And 41 Of The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Ra No. 9184, Without Thereby Incurring Any Liability To The Affected Bidder Or Bidders. For Further Information, Please Refer To: Atty. Raemman M. Lagrada Head, Bac Secretariat 5f New Iloilo Provincial Capitol Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City Tel. No. (33) 336-0736 Fax No. (33) 337-7731 Email: Ipg_bacs@yahoo.com You May Visit The Following Websites: For Downloading Of Bidding Documents: Www.iloilo.gov.ph August 28, 2024 Atty. Dennis T. Ventilacion Bac Chairperson Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders Scope Of Bid The Procuring Entity, Iloilo Provincial Government Invites Bids For The Road Opening Project At Brgy. Aguingay, Janiuay, Iloilo With Project Identification Number Agr-24-1186-b. The Procurement Project (referred To Herein As “project”) Is For The Construction Of Works, As Described In Section Vi (specifications). Funding Information The Gop Through The Source Of Funding As Indicated Below For 2023 In The Amount Of Eight Million Three Hundred Thousand Pesos (p8,300,000.00) The Source Of Funding Is: A. General Fund Fy 2023-capital Outlay-road Networks Bidding Requirements The Bidding For The Project Shall Be Governed By All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including Its Generic Procurement Manual And Associated Policies, Rules And Regulations As The Primary Source Thereof, While The Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source Thereof. Any Amendments Made To The Irr And Other Gppb Issuances Shall Be Applicable Only To The Ongoing Posting, Advertisement, Or Invitation To Bid By The Bac Through The Issuance Of A Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin. The Bidder, By The Act Of Submitting Its Bid, Shall Be Deemed To Have Inspected The Site, Determined The General Characteristics Of The Contracted Works And The Conditions For This Project, Such As The Location And The Nature Of The Work; (b) Climatic Conditions; (c) Transportation Facilities; (c) Nature And Condition Of The Terrain, Geological Conditions At The Site Communication Facilities, Requirements, Location And Availability Of Construction Aggregates And Other Materials, Labor, Water, Electric Power And Access Roads; And (d) Other Factors That May Affect The Cost, Duration And Execution Or Implementation Of The Contract, Project, Or Work And Examine All Instructions, Forms, Terms, And Project Requirements In The Bidding Documents. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices The Procuring Entity, As Well As The Bidders And Contractors, Shall Observe The Highest Standard Of Ethics During The Procurement And Execution Of The Contract. They Or Through An Agent Shall Not Engage In Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices Defined Under Annex “i” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Or Other Integrity Violations In Competing For The Project. Eligible Bidders Only Bids Of Bidders Found To Be Legally, Technically, And Financially Capable Will Be Evaluated. The Bidder Must Have An Experience Of Having Completed A Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) That Is Similar To This Project, Equivalent To At Least Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Abc Adjusted, If Necessary, By The Bidder To Current Prices Using The Psa’s Cpi, Except Under Conditions Provided For In Section 23.4.2.4 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. A Contract Is Considered To Be “similar” To The Contract To Be Bid If It Has The Major Categories Of Work Stated In The Bds. For Foreign-funded Procurement, The Procuring Entity And The Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution May Agree On Another Track Record Requirement, As Specified In The Bidding Document Prepared For This Purpose. The Bidders Shall Comply With The Eligibility Criteria Under Section 23.4.2 Of The 2016 Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Origin Of Associated Goods There Is No Restriction On The Origin Of Goods Other Than Those Prohibited By A Decision Of The Un Security Council Taken Under Chapter Vii Of The Charter Of The Un. Subcontracts The Bidder May Subcontract Portions Of The Project To The Extent Allowed By The Procuring Entity As Stated Herein, But In No Case More Than Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Project. The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That: Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. Pre-bid Conference The Procuring Entity Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference For This Project On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address At Bac Office, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Iloilo City And/or Through Videoconferencing As Indicated In Paragraph 6 Of The Ib. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents Prospective Bidders May Request For Clarification On And/or Interpretation Of Any Part Of The Bidding Documents. Such Requests Must Be In Writing And Received By The Procuring Entity, Either At Its Given Address Or Through Electronic Mail Indicated In The Ib, At Least Ten (10) Calendar Days Before The Deadline Set For The Submission And Receipt Of Bids. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components The First Envelope Shall Contain The Eligibility And Technical Documents Of The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. If The Eligibility Requirements Or Statements, The Bids, And All Other Documents For Submission To The Bac Are In Foreign Language Other Than English, It Must Be Accompanied By A Translation In English, Which Shall Be Authenticated By The Appropriate Philippine Foreign Service Establishment, Post, Or The Equivalent Office Having Jurisdiction Over The Foreign Bidder’s Affairs In The Philippines. For Contracting Parties To The Apostille Convention, Only The Translated Documents Shall Be Authenticated Through An Apostille Pursuant To Gppb Resolution No. 13-2019 Dated 23 May 2019. The English Translation Shall Govern, For Purposes Of Interpretation Of The Bid. In Joint Ventures, A Special Pcab License, And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract For This Project, Shall Be Required. Any Additional Type Of Contractor License Or Permit Shall Be Indicated In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen) Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data Shall Be Provided. These Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership, Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be, Must Meet The Minimum Requirements For The Contract Set In The Bds. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component The Second Bid Envelope Shall Contain The Financial Documents For The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. Any Bid Exceeding The Abc Indicated In Paragraph 1 Of The Ib Shall Not Be Accepted. For Foreign-funded Procurement, A Ceiling May Be Applied To Bid Prices Provided The Conditions Are Met Under Section 31.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Alternative Bids Bidders Shall Submit Offers That Comply With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents, Including The Basic Technical Design As Indicated In The Drawings And Specifications. Unless There Is A Value Engineering Clause In The Bds, Alternative Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. Bid Prices All Bid Prices For The Given Scope Of Work In The Project As Awarded Shall Be Considered As Fixed Prices, And Therefore Not Subject To Price Escalation During Contract Implementation, Except Under Extraordinary Circumstances As Determined By The Neda And Approved By The Gppb Pursuant To The Revised Guidelines For Contract Price Escalation Guidelines. Bid And Payment Currencies Bid Prices May Be Quoted In The Local Currency Or Tradeable Currency Accepted By The Bsp At The Discretion Of The Bidder. However, For Purposes Of Bid Evaluation, Bids Denominated In Foreign Currencies Shall Be Converted To Philippine Currency Based On The Exchange Rate As Published In The Bsp Reference Rate Bulletin On The Day Of The Bid Opening. Payment Of The Contract Price Shall Be Made In: Philippine Pesos. Bid Security The Bidder Shall Submit A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Form Of Bid Security In The Amount Indicated In The Bds, Which Shall Be Not Less Than The Percentage Of The Abc In Accordance With The Schedule In The Bds. The Bid And Bid Security Shall Be Valid Until January 29, 2025. Any Bid Not Accompanied By An Acceptable Bid Security Shall Be Rejected By The Procuring Entity As Non-responsive. Sealing And Marking Of Bids Each Bidder Shall Submit One Copy Of The First And Second Components Of Its Bid. The Procuring Entity May Request Additional Hard Copies And/or Electronic Copies Of The Bid. However, Failure Of The Bidders To Comply With The Said Request Shall Not Be A Ground For Disqualification. If The Procuring Entity Allows The Submission Of Bids Through Online Submission To The Given Website Or Any Other Electronic Means, The Bidder Shall Submit An Electronic Copy Of Its Bid, Which Must Be Digitally Signed. An Electronic Copy That Cannot Be Opened Or Is Corrupted Shall Be Considered Non-responsive And, Thus, Automatically Disqualified. Deadline For Submission Of Bids The Bidders Shall Submit On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address Or Through Online Submission As Indicated In Paragraph 7 Of The Ib. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids The Bac Shall Open The Bids In Public At The Time, On The Date, And At The Place Specified In Paragraph 9 Of The Ib. The Bidders’ Representatives Who Are Present Shall Sign A Register Evidencing Their Attendance. In Case Videoconferencing, Webcasting Or Other Similar Technologies Will Be Used, Attendance Of Participants Shall Likewise Be Recorded By The Bac Secretariat. In Case The Bids Cannot Be Opened As Scheduled Due To Justifiable Reasons, The Rescheduling Requirements Under Section 29 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Prevail. The Preliminary Examination Of Bids Shall Be Governed By Section 30 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids The Procuring Entity’s Bac Shall Immediately Conduct A Detailed Evaluation Of All Bids Rated “passed” Using Non-discretionary Pass/fail Criteria. The Bac Shall Consider The Conditions In The Evaluation Of Bids Under Section 32.2 Of 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. If The Project Allows Partial Bids, All Bids And Combinations Of Bids As Indicated In The Bds Shall Be Received By The Same Deadline And Opened And Evaluated Simultaneously So As To Determine The Bid Or Combination Of Bids Offering The Lowest Calculated Cost To The Procuring Entity. Bid Security As Required By Itb Clause 16 Shall Be Submitted For Each Contract (lot) Separately. In All Cases, The Nfcc Computation Pursuant To Section 23.4.2.6 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Must Be Sufficient For The Total Of The Abcs For All The Lots Participated In By The Prospective Bidder. Post Qualification Within A Non-extendible Period Of Five (5) Calendar Days From Receipt By The Bidder Of The Notice From The Bac That It Submitted The Lowest Calculated Bid, The Bidder Shall Submit Its Latest Income And Business Tax Returns Filed And Paid Through The Bir Electronic Filing And Payment System (efps), And Other Appropriate Licenses And Permits Required By Law And Stated In The Bds. Signing Of The Contract The Documents Required In Section 37.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Form Part Of The Contract. Additional Contract Documents Are Indicated In The Bds. Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet Itb Clause 5.2 For This Purpose, Contracts Similar To The Project Refer To Contracts Which Have The Same Major Categories Of Work, Which Shall Be: Road Works/land Improvement 7.1 The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. 10.3 [specify If Another Contractor License Or Permit Is Required.] 10.4 The Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set Below: Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience 1-project Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-material Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-foreman 1 Year 1 Year 10.5 The Minimum Major Equipment Requirements Are The Following: Equipment Capacity Number Of Units Bar Cutter - 1 Heavy Equipment Prime Mover - 1 Dump Truck - 1 Plate Compactor - 1 Motorized Road Grader - 1 One Bagger Mixer - 1 Concrete Vibrator - 1 Backhoe - 1 Vibratory Roller - 1 Water Truck - 1 Bar Bender - 1 12 Alternative Bids Are Not Allowed 15.1 The Bid Security Shall Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Of The Following Forms And Amounts: The Amount Of Not Less Than Two Percent (2%) Of Abc, If Bid Security Is In Cash, Cashier’s/manager’s Check, Bank Draft/guarantee Or Irrevocable Letter Of Credit; The Amount Of Not Less Than Five Percent (5%) Of Abc If Bid Security Is In Surety Bond. 19.2 Partial Bid Is Not Allowed 20 No Further Instructions. 21 The Additional Contract Documents Relevant To The Project That Are Required By The Procuring Entity Are: A. Construction Schedule And S-curve; B. Manpower Schedule; C. Construction Methods; D. Equipment Utilization Schedule; E. Construction Safety And Health Program Approved By The Department Of Labor And Employment; And F. Pert/cpm Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract Scope Of Contract This Contract Shall Include All Such Items, Although Not Specifically Mentioned, That Can Be Reasonably Inferred As Being Required For Its Completion As If Such Items Were Expressly Mentioned Herein. All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including The Generic Procurement Manual, And Associated Issuances, Constitute The Primary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract, And Thus, Applicable In Contract Implementation. Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract. This Is Without Prejudice To Sections 74.1 And 74.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Allowing The Gppb To Amend The Irr, Which Shall Be Applied To All Procurement Activities, The Advertisement, Posting, Or Invitation Of Which Were Issued After The Effectivity Of The Said Amendment. Sectional Completion Of Works If Sectional Completion Is Specified In The Special Conditions Of Contract (scc), References In The Conditions Of Contract To The Works, The Completion Date, And The Intended Completion Date Shall Apply To Any Section Of The Works (other Than References To The Completion Date And Intended Completion Date For The Whole Of The Works). Possession Of Site The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Or Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Based On The Schedule Of Delivery Indicated In The Scc, Which Corresponds To The Execution Of The Works. If The Contractor Suffers Delay Or Incurs Cost From Failure On The Part Of The Procuring Entity To Give Possession In Accordance With The Terms Of This Clause, The Procuring Entity’s Representative Shall Give The Contractor A Contract Time Extension And Certify Such Sum As Fair To Cover The Cost Incurred, Which Sum Shall Be Paid By Procuring Entity. If Possession Of A Portion Is Not Given By The Above Date, The Procuring Entity Will Be Deemed To Have Delayed The Start Of The Relevant Activities. The Resulting Adjustments In Contract Time To Address Such Delay May Be Addressed Through Contract Extension Provided Under Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. The Contractor’s Obligations The Contractor Shall Employ The Key Personnel Named In The Schedule Of Key Personnel Indicating Their Designation, In Accordance With Itb Clause 10.3 And Specified In The Bds, To Carry Out The Supervision Of The Works. The Procuring Entity Will Approve Any Proposed Replacement Of Key Personnel Only If Their Relevant Qualifications And Abilities Are Equal To Or Better Than Those Of The Personnel Listed In The Schedule. Performance Security Within Ten (10) Calendar Days From Receipt Of The Notice Of Award From The Procuring Entity But In No Case Later Than The Signing Of The Contract By Both Parties, The Successful Bidder Shall Furnish The Performance Security In Any Of The Forms Prescribed In Section 39 Of The 2016 Revised Irr. The Contractor, By Entering Into The Contract With The Procuring Entity, Acknowledges The Right Of The Procuring Entity To Institute Action Pursuant To Ra No. 3688 Against Any Subcontractor Be They An Individual, Firm, Partnership, Corporation, Or Association Supplying The Contractor With Labor, Materials And/or Equipment For The Performance Of This Contract. Site Investigation Reports The Contractor, In Preparing The Bid, Shall Rely On Any Site Investigation Reports Referred To In The Scc Supplemented By Any Information Obtained By The Contractor. Warranty In Case The Contractor Fails To Undertake The Repair Works Under Section 62.2.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr, The Procuring Entity Shall Forfeit Its Performance Security, Subject Its Property(ies) To Attachment Or Garnishment Proceedings, And Perpetually Disqualify It From Participating In Any Public Bidding. All Payables Of The Gop In His Favor Shall Be Offset To Recover The Costs. The Warranty Against Structural Defects/failures, Except That Occasioned-on Force Majeure, Shall Cover The Period From The Date Of Issuance Of The Certificate Of Final Acceptance By The Procuring Entity. Specific Duration Of The Warranty Is Found In The Scc. Liability Of The Contractor Subject To Additional Provisions, If Any, Set Forth In The Scc, The Contractor’s Liability Under This Contract Shall Be As Provided By The Laws Of The Republic Of The Philippines. If The Contractor Is A Joint Venture, All Partners To The Joint Venture Shall Be Jointly And Severally Liable To The Procuring Entity. Termination For Other Causes Contract Termination Shall Be Initiated In Case It Is Determined Prima Facie By The Procuring Entity That The Contractor Has Engaged, Before, Or During The Implementation Of The Contract, In Unlawful Deeds And Behaviors Relative To Contract Acquisition And Implementation, Such As, But Not Limited To Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices As Stated In Itb Clause 4. Dayworks Subject To The Guidelines On Variation Order In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184, And If Applicable As Indicated In The Scc, The Dayworks Rates In The Contractor’s Bid Shall Be Used For Small Additional Amounts Of Work Only When The Procuring Entity’s Representative Has Given Written Instructions In Advance For Additional Work To Be Paid For In That Way. Program Of Work The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval The Said Program Of Work Showing The General Methods, Arrangements, Order, And Timing For All The Activities In The Works. The Submissions Of The Program Of Work Are Indicated In The Scc. The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval An Updated Program Of Work At Intervals No Longer Than The Period Stated In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Submit An Updated Program Of Work Within This Period, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From The Next Payment Certificate And Continue To Withhold This Amount Until The Next Payment After The Date On Which The Overdue Program Of Work Has Been Submitted. Instructions, Inspections And Audits The Contractor Shall Permit The Gop Or The Procuring Entity To Inspect The Contractor’s Accounts And Records Relating To The Performance Of The Contractor And To Have Them Audited By Auditors Of The Gop Or The Procuring Entity, As May Be Required. Advance Payment The Procuring Entity Shall, Upon A Written Request Of The Contractor Which Shall Be Submitted As A Contract Document, Make An Advance Payment To The Contractor In An Amount Not Exceeding Fifteen Percent (15%) Of The Total Contract Price, To Be Made In Lump Sum, Or At The Most Two Installments According To A Schedule Specified In The Scc, Subject To The Requirements In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Progress Payments The Contractor May Submit A Request For Payment For Work Accomplished. Such Requests For Payment Shall Be Verified And Certified By The Procuring Entity’s Representative/project Engineer. Except As Otherwise Stipulated In The Scc, Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Put In Place Shall Not Be Included For Payment. Operating And Maintenance Manuals If Required, The Contractor Will Provide “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals As Specified In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Provide The Drawings And/or Manuals By The Dates Stated Above, Or They Do Not Receive The Procuring Entity’s Representative’s Approval, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From Payments Due To The Contractor. Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract Gcc Clause 2 As Per Construction Schedule/contract Period 3.1 The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Upon Effectivity Of The Contracts. 6 No Further Instructions 7.2 [select One, Delete The Other.] [in Case Of Permanent Structures, Such As Buildings Of Types 4 And 5 As Classified Under The National Building Code Of The Philippines And Other Structures Made Of Steel, Iron, Or Concrete Which Comply With Relevant Structural Codes (e.g., Dpwh Standard Specifications), Such As, But Not Limited To, Steel/concrete Bridges, Flyovers, Aircraft Movement Areas, Ports, Dams, Tunnels, Filtration And Treatment Plants, Sewerage Systems, Power Plants, Transmission And Communication Towers, Railway System, And Other Similar Permanent Structures:] Fifteen (15) Years. [in Case Of Semi-permanent Structures, Such As Buildings Of Types 1, 2, And 3 As Classified Under The National Building Code Of The Philippines, Concrete/asphalt Roads, Concrete River Control, Drainage, Irrigation Lined Canals, River Landing, Deep Wells, Rock Causeway, Pedestrian Overpass, And Other Similar Semi-permanent Structures:] Five (5) Years. [in Case Of Other Structures, Such As Bailey And Wooden Bridges, Shallow Wells, Spring Developments, And Other Similar Structures:] Two (2) Years. 10 Dayworks Are Applicable At The Rate Shown In The Contractor’s Original Bid. 11.1 No Further Instructions 11.2 No Further Instructions 13 The Amount Of The Advance Shall Not Exceed 15% Of The Total Contract Price. 14 Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Installed Or Constructed Shall Not Be Included For Payment. 15.1 The Date By Which Operating And Maintenance Manuals Are Required Shall Be At Least 5 Days Before The Testing And Commissioning. The Date By Which “as Built” Drawings Are Required Prior To The Final Billing. 15.2 The Amount To Be Withheld For Failing To Produce “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals By The Date Required Is 1% Of The Final Contract Amount. Section Vi. Specification Part B – Other General Requirements B.1 Mobilization And Demobilization The Work Consists Of The Mobilization And Demobilization Of The Contractor's Forces And Equipment Necessary For Performing The Work Required Under The Contract. It Does Not Include Mobilization And Demobilization For Specific Items Of Work For Which Payment Is Provided Elsewhere In The Contract. Mobilization Will Not Be Considered As Work In Fulfilling The Contract Requirements For Commencement Of Work. B.1.1 Equipment And Material Mobilization Shall Include All Activities And Associated Costs For Transportation Of Contractor's Personnel, Equipment, And Operating Supplies To The Site; Establishment Of Offices, Buildings, And Other Necessary General Facilities For The Contractor's Operations At The Site B.1.2 Demobilization Demobilization Shall Include All Activities And Costs For Transportation Of Personnel, Equipment, And Supplies Not Required Or Included In The Contract From The Site; Including The Disassembly, Removal, And Site Cleanup Of Offices, Buildings, And Other Facilities Assembled On The Site Specifically For This Contract. B.2 Offices, Shops, Stores And Workmen’s Accommodation For Contractor The Contractor Shall Provide And Maintain Such Offices, Stores, Workshops Latrines, Housing And Messing Accommodations As Are Necessary. These Shall Be Located In The Contractor's Compound, Distinct And Separate From The Engineer's Compound. The Location, Dimensions And Layout Of Such Buildings And Places Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer. The Contractor Shall Not Be Permitted To Erect Temporary Buildings Or Structures On The Site Without The Specific Permission In Writing Of The Engineer Including Approval Of The Dimensions Of Such Buildings Or Structures. Before The Commencement Of The Period Of Warranty, The Contractor Shall Fence Off The Contractor's Store Area From The Rest Of The Site. By The End Of The Period Of Warranty, The Contractor Shall Remove This Fence, Clear All The Buildings And Grade The Area As Required By The Engineer. B.2.1 Measurement And Payment Work Prescribed In Section B.2 Shall Not Be Measured And Paid Separately; Same Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In Pay Items For Other Items For Work. B.3 Medical Room And First Aid Facilities 1. The Contractor Shall Provide And Maintain Throughout The Duration Of The Contract A Medical Room Together With All Necessary Supplies To Be Sited In The Contractor's Main Area. The Medical Room Shall Be Waterproof; It Could Be A Building Or Room Designated And Used Exclusively For The Purpose. It Shall Have A Floor Area Of At Least 15 Square Meters And A Glazed Window Area Of At Least 2 Square Meters. 2. The Contractor Shall Employ Permanently On The Site A Fully Trained Medical Aide, Who Shall Be Engaged Solely On Medical Duties. 3. The Location Of The Medical Room And Any Other Arrangements Shall Be Made Known To All Employees By Posting On Prominent Locations Suitable Notices In The Site. 4. The Contractor's Arrangement To Comply With This Section Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer And Also To The Approval Of Any Qualified Medical Officer Designated By The Government To Supervise Medical Arrangements On The Site. B.4 - Construction Survey And Staking B.4.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing The Necessary Equipment And Material To Survey, Stake, Calculate, And Record Data For The Control Of Work In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. B.4.2 Construction Requirements B.4.2.1 General Staking Activities Shall Be Included In The Construction Schedule To Be Submitted By The Contractor. Dates And Sequence Of Each Staking Activity Shall Be Included. The Engineer Shall Set Initial Reference Lines, Horizontal And Vertical Control Points, And Shall Furnish The Data For Use In Establishing Control For The Completion Of Each Element Of The Work. Data Relating To Horizontal And Vertical Alignments, Theoretical Slope Stake Catch Points, And Other Design Data Shall Be Furnished. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The True Settling Of The Works Or Improvements And For Correctness Of Positions, Levels, Dimensions And Alignment Of All Parts Of The Works. He Shall Provide All Necessary Instruments, Appliances, Materials And Supplies, And Labor In Connection Therewith. The Contractor Shall Provide A Survey Crew Supervisor At The Project Site Whenever Surveying/staking Activity Is In Progress. Prior To Construction, The Engineer Shall Be Notified Of Any Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Engineer Shall Reestablish Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Contractor For Convenient Use Of Government-furnished Data Shall Perform Additional Calculations. Immediate Notification Of Apparent Errors In The Initial Staking Or In The Furnished Data Shall Be Provided. All Initial Reference And Control Points Shall Be Preserved. At The Start Of Construction, All Destroyed Or Disturbed Initial Reference Or Control Points Necessary To The Work Shall Be Replaced. Before Surveying And Staking, The Contractor Shall Discuss And Coordinate The Following With The Engineer: 1. Surveying And Staking Methods 2. Stake Marking/concrete Monuments 3. Grade Control For Courses Of Material 4. Referencing 5. Structure Control 6. Any Other Procedures And Controls Necessary For The Work Established Controls Shall Be Within The Tolerances Shown In Table 1. Table 1: Construction Survey And Staking Tolerances (1) Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical Existing Government Network Control Points ±20mm ±8mm X √k ² Local Supplemental Control Points Set From Existing Government Network Points ±10mm ±3mm X √n³ Centerline Points (4) - (pc), (pt), (pot), And (pac) Including References ±10mm ±10mm Other Centerline Points ±50mm ±50mm Cross-section Points And Slope Stakes (5) ±50mm ±50mm Slope Stakes References ±50mm ±50mm Culverts, Ditches, And Minor Drainage Structures ±50mm ±20mm Retaining Walls And Curb And Gutter ±20mm ±10mm Bridge Substructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Bridge Superstructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Clearing And Grubbing Limits ±500mm Roadway Subgrade Finish Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm Roadway Finish Grade Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm (1) At 95% Confidence Level. Tolerances Are Relative To Existing Government Network Control Points. (2) K Is The Distance In Kilometers. (3) N Is The Number Of Instrument Setups. (4) Centerline Points: Pc - Point Of Curve, Pt - Point Of Tangent, Pot - Point On Tangent, Poc - Point On Curve (5) Take The Cross-sections Normal To The Centerline + 1 Degree. (6) Bridge Control Is Established As Local Network And The Tolerances Are Relative To That Network. (7) Include Pave Ditches. The Contractor Shall Prepare Field Notes In An Approved Format. All Field Notes And Supporting Documentation Shall Become The Property Of The Government Upon Completion Of The Work. Work Shall Only Be Started After Staking For The Affected Work Is Accepted. The Construction Survey And Staking Work May Be Spot-checked By The Engineer For Accuracy, And Unacceptable Portions Of Work May Be Rejected. Rejected Work Shall Be Resurveyed, And Work That Is Not Within The Tolerances Specified In Table 1 Shall Be Corrected. Acceptance Of The Construction Staking Shall Not Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For Correcting Errors Discovered During The Work And For Bearing All Additional Costs Associated With The Error, Unless Such Error Is Based On Incorrect Data Supplied In Writing By The Engineer, In Which Case, The Expense In Rectifying The Same Shall Be At The Expense Of The Government. In The Case Of "change" Or "changed Conditions" Which Involve Any Change In Stakeout, The Contractor Shall Coordinate With The Engineer And Facilitate The Prompt Reestablishment Of The Field Control For The Altered Or Adjusted Work. All Flagging, Lath, Stakes, And Other Staking Materials Shall Be Removed And Disposed After The Project Is Completed. B.4.2.2 Equipment Survey Instruments And Supporting Equipment Capable Of Achieving The Specified Tolerances Shall Be Furnished. Acceptable Tools, Supplies, And Stakes Of The Type And Quality Normally Used In Highway Survey Work And Suitable For The Intended Use Shall Be Furnished. Stakes And Hubs Of Sufficient Length To Provide A Solid Set In The Ground With Sufficient Surface Area Above Ground For Necessary Legible Markings Shall Also Be Furnished. B.4.2.3 Survey And Staking Requirements All Survey, Staking, Recording Of Data, And Calculations Necessary To Construct The Project From The Initial Layout To Final Completion Shall Be Performed. Stakes Shall Be Reset As Many Times As Necessary To Construct The Work. 1. Control Points Established Initial Horizontal And Vertical Control Points In Conflict With Construction Shall Be Relocated To Areas That Will Not Be Disturbed By Construction Operations. The Coordinates And Elevations For The Relocated Points Shall Be Furnished Before The Initial Points Are Disturbed. 2. Roadway Cross-sections Roadway Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Normal Or Perpendicular To The Centerline. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 10 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 20 Meters. Additional Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At Significant Breaks In Topography And At Changes In The Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections. Along Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded At Breaks In Topography And At Changes In Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections And Shall Be No Further Apart Than 5 Meters. Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded To At Least The Anticipated Slope Stake And Reference Locations. All Cross-section Distances Shall Be Reduced To Horizontal Distances From Centerline. 3. Slope Stakes And References Slope Stakes And References Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At The Cross-section Locations. Slope Stakes Shall Be Established In The Field As The Actual Point Of Intersection Of The Design Roadway Slope With The Natural Ground Line. Slope Stake References Shall Be Set Outside The Clearing Limits. All Reference Point And Slope Stake Information Shall Be Included On The Reference Stakes. When Initial References Are Provided, Slope Stakes May Be Set From These Points With Verification Of The Slope Stake Location With Field Measurements. Slope Stakes On Any Section That Do Not Match With The Staking Report Within The Tolerances Established In Table 1 Shall Be Reached. Roadway Cross-section Data Shall Be Taken Between Centerline And The New Slope Stake Location. Additional References Shall Be Set Even When The Initial References Are Provided. 4. Clearing And Grubbing Limits Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At Roadway Cross-section Locations, Extending One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. 5. Centerline Reestablishment Centerline Shall Be Reestablished From Instrument Control Points. The Maximum Spacing Between Centerline Points Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Distance Between Centerline Points Shall Be 20 Meters. 6. Grade Finishing Stakes Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Set For Grade Elevations And Horizontal Alignment, At The Centerline And At Each Shoulder Of Roadway Cross-section Locations. Stakes Shall Be Set At The Top Of Subgrade And The Top Of Each Aggregate Course. Where Turnouts Are Constructed, Stakes Shall Be Set At The Centerline, At Each Normal Shoulder, And At The Shoulder Of The Turnout. In Parking Areas, Hubs Shall Be Set At The Center And Along The Edges Of The Parking Area. Stakes Shall Be Set At All Ditches To Be Paved. The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 20 Meters. The Maximum Transverse Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 5 Meters. Brushes Or Guard Stakes Shall Be Used At Each Stake. 7. Culverts Culverts Shall Be Staked To Fit Field Conditions. The Location Of Culverts May Differ From The Plans. The Following Shall Be Performed: A. Survey And Record The Ground Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Including Inlet And Outlet Channel Profile Of At Least 10 Meters And As Additionally Directed By The Engineer So As To Gather All Necessary Data For The Preparation Of Pipe Projection Plan. B. Determine The Slope Catch Points At The Inlet And Outlet. C. Set The Reference Points And Record Information Necessary To Determine Culvert Length And End Treatments. D. Plot Into Scale The Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Reflecting The Natural Ground Elevation, Invert Elevation, The Flow Line, The Roadway Section, And The Size, Length And The Degree Of Elbow Of Culvert, End Treatments, Grade And Other Appurtenances. E. Plot Into Scale The Cross-section Of Inlet And Outlet Channel At Not More Than 5 Meters Interval. F. Submit The Plotted Pipe Projection Plan For Approval Of Final Culvert Length, Alignment And Headwall. G. When The Pipe Projection Plan Has Been Approved, Set Drainage Culvert Structure Survey And Reference Stakes, And Stake Inlet And Outlet To Make The Structure Functional. 8. Retaining Walls And Other Types Of Slope Protection Works Profile Measurements Along The Face Of The Proposed Wall And 2 Meters In Front Of The Wall Face Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Within The Limits Designated By The Engineer At Every 5 Meters Along The Length Of The Wall And All Major Breaks In Terrain. For Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded Every 5 Meters And At All Major Breaks In Terrain. Adequate References And Horizontal And Vertical Control Points Shall Be Set. 9. Borrow And Waste Sites The Work Essential For Initial Layout And Measurement Of The Borrow Or Waste Site Shall Be Performed. A Referenced Baseline, Site Limits, And Clearing Limits Shall Be Established. Initial And Final Cross-sections Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. 10. Permanent Monuments And Markers All Survey And Staking Necessary To Establish Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Performed. 11. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking All Surveying, Staking, And Recording Of Data Essential For Establishing The Layout And Control Of The Following Shall Be Performed, As Applicable: A. Approach Roads And Trails B. Road Right Of Way And Construction Limit In Accordance With The Approved Parcellary Plan. C. Curb And Gutter D. Guardrail E. Parking Areas F. Paved Waterways And Outfall Structures G. Lined Canals And Other Ditches H. Chutes And Spillways I. Turf Establishment J. Utilities K. Signs, Delineators, And Object Markers I. Pavement Markings B.4.3 Method Of Measurement Construction Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Slope, Reference, And Clearing And Grubbing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Establishment Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Reestablishment Shall Be Measured Only One Time. Culvert Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Each. Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Subgrade Shall Be Measured One Time And Each Aggregate Course Shall Also Be Measured One Time. Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Measured By Each Unit Placed And Installed At The Proper Locations. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Hour Of Survey Work Ordered Or By The Lump Sum. For Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Paid By The Hour, The Minimum Survey Crew Size Shall Be 2 Persons. Time Spent In Making Preparations, Travelling To And From The Project Site, Performing Calculations, Plotting Cross Sections And Other Data, Processing Computer Data, And Other Efforts Necessary To Successfully Accomplish Construction Survey And Staking Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Deemed Included As Subsidiary For Each Of The Pay Item. B.5 Project Billboard/signboard The Contractor Shall Ensure That The Project Site Is Identified With Information Billboard Which Shall Be Erected At The Beginning And Ending Of The Proposed Subproject. The Layout Of The Billboard Is Cited Below. It Shall Accord To The Specifications Pursuant To The Commission On Audit (coa) Circular No. 2013-004 Issued On January 30, 2013. Annex 14 Coa Billboard Pao Billboard The Billboard’s Specifications Shall Conform To The Following Requirements: Tarpaulin, White, 8ft X 8ft (coa) And 4ft X 8ft (pao): Resolution: 70 Dpi; Font: Helvetica; Font Size: Main Information – 3”; Sub-information – 1”; Font Color: Black; Suitable Frame: Rigid Wood Or Steel Frame With Post; And, Posting: Outside Display At The Project Location After Award Has Been Made. I.1 Measurement The Supply And Erection Of Project Billboard Shall Be In Accordance With Provisions Of This Specification And Shall Be Measured For Payment. I.2 Basis Of Payment Payment Shall Be In Accordance With All The Cost Associated With The Compliance Of This Specification And Shall Be Included In The Contractor’s Bid Price. No Additional Or Separate Payment Will Be Made In This Regard As Well As For The Maintenance Of The Billboard. Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement B.5 Project Billboard Each B.8 Traffic Management This Item Shall Provide The Planning And Implementation Of Traffic Plans, This Refers To The Direction, Control And Supervision Of All Vehicular And Pedestrian Traffic Around A Construction Zone, To Ensure The Safety Of Construction Workers And General Public. Traffic Control Measures Shall Include Posting Of Traffic Controllers, Road Closure, Footpath Closure, Detours, Signing/speed Reduction And Other Warnings/ Directional Signage. Part C – Earthwork Item 100 – Clearing And Grubbing 100.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Clearing, Grubbing, Removing And Disposing All Vegetation And Debris As Designated In The Contract, Except Those Objects That Are Designated To Remain In Place Or Are To Be Removed In Consonance With Other Provisions Of This Specification. The Work Shall Also Include The Preservation From Injury Or Defacement Of All Objects Designated To Remain. 100.2 Construction Requirements 100.2.1 General The Engineer Will Establish The Limits Of Work And Designate All Trees, Shrubs, Plants And Other Things To Remain. The Contractor Shall Preserve All Objects Designated To Remain. Paint Required For Cut Or Scarred Surface Of Trees Or Shrubs Selected For Retention Shall Be An Approved Asphaltum Base Paint Prepared Especially For Tree Surgery. Clearing Shall Extend One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer And Provided It Is Within The Right Of Way Limits Of The Project, With The Exception Of Trees Under The Jurisdiction Of The Forest Management Bureau (fmb). 100.2.2 Clearing And Grubbing All Surface Objects And All Trees, Stumps, Roots And Other Protruding Obstructions, Not Designated To Remain, Shall Be Cleared And/or Grubbed, Including Mowing As Required, Except As Provided Below: (1) Removal Of Undisturbed Stumps And Roots And Nonperishable Solid Objects With A Minimum Depth Of One (1) Meter Below Subgrade Or Slope Of Embankment Will Not Be Required. (2) In Areas Outside Of The Grading Limits Of Cut And Embankment Areas, Stumps And Nonperishable Solid Objects Shall Be Cut Off Not More Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) Above The Ground Line Or Low Water Level. (3) In Areas To Be Rounded At The Top Of Cut Slopes, Stumps Shall Be Cut Off Flush With Or Below The Surface Of The Final Slope Line. (4) Grubbing Of Pits, Channel Changes And Ditches Will Be Required Only To The Depth Necessitated By The Proposed Excavation Within Such Areas. (5) In Areas Covered By Cogon/talahib, Wild Grass And Other Vegetations, Top Soil Shall Be Cut To A Maximum Depth Of 150 Mm Below The Original Ground Surface Or As Designated By The Engineer, And Disposed Outside The Clearing And Grubbing Limits As Indicated In The Typical Roadway Section. Except In Areas To Be Excavated, Stump Holes And Other Holes From Which Obstructions Are Removed Shall Be Backfilled With Suitable Material And Compacted To The Required Density. If Perishable Material Is Burned, It Shall Be Burned Under The Constant Care Of Component Watchmen At Such Times And In Such A Manner That The Surrounding Vegetation, Other Adjacent Property, Or Anything Designated To Remain On The Right Of Way Will Not Be Jeopardized. If Permitted, Burning Shall Be Done In Accordance With Applicable Laws, Ordinances, And Regulation. The Contractor Shall Use High Intensity Burning Procedures, (i.e., Incinerators, High Stacking Or Pit And Ditch Burning With Forced Air Supplements) That Produce Intense Burning With Little Or No Visible Smoke Emission During The Burning Process. At The Conclusion Of Each Burning Session, The Fire Shall Be Completely Extinguished So That No Smoldering Debris Remains. In The Event That The Contractor Is Directed By The Engineer Not To Start Burning Operations Or To Suspend Such Operations Because Of Hazardous Weather Conditions, Material To Be Burned Which Interferes With Subsequent Construction Operations Shall Be Moved By The Contractor To Temporary Locations Clear Of Construction Operations And Later, If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Placed On A Designated Spot And Burned. Materials And Debris Which Cannot Be Burned And Perishable Materials May Be Disposed Off By Methods And At Locations Approved By The Engineer, On Or Off The Project. If Disposal Is By Burying, The Debris Shall Be Placed In Layers With The Material So Disturbed To Avoid Nesting. Each Layer Shall Be Covered Or Mixed With Earth Material By The Land-fill Method To Fill All Voids. The Top Layer Of Material Buried Shall Be Covered With At Least 300 Mm (12 Inches) Of Earth Or Other Approved Material And Shall Be Graded, Shaped And Compacted To Present A Pleasing Appearance. If The Disposal Location Is Off The Project, The Contractor Shall Make All Necessary Arrangements With Property Owners In Writing For Obtaining Suitable Disposal Locations Which Are Outside The Limits Of View From The Project. The Cost Involved Shall Be Included In The Unit Bid Price. A Copy Of Such Agreement Shall Be Furnished To The Engineer. The Disposal Areas Shall Be Seeded, Fertilized And Mulched At The Contractor’s Expense. Woody Material May Be Disposed Off By Chipping. The Wood Chips May Be Used For Mulch, Slope Erosion Control Or May Be Uniformly Spread Over Selected Areas As Directed By The Engineer. Wood Chips Used As Mulch For Slope Erosion Control Shall Have A Maximum Thickness Of 12 Mm (1/2 Inch) And Faces Not Exceeding 3900 Mm2 (6 Square Inches) On Any Individual Surface Area. Wood Chips Not Designated For Use Under Other Sections Shall Be Spread Over The Designated Areas In Layers Not To Exceed 75 Mm (3 Inches) Loose Thickness. Diseased Trees Shall Be Buried Or Disposed Of As Directed By The Engineer. All Merchantable Timber In The Clearing Area Which Has Not Been Removed From The Right Of Way Prior To The Beginning Of Construction, Shall Become The Property Of The Contractor, Unless Otherwise Provided. Low Hanging Branches And Unsound Or Unsightly Branches On Trees Or Shrubs Designated To Remain Shall Be Trimmed As Directed. Branches Of Trees Extending Over The Roadbed Shall Be Trimmed To Give A Clear Height Of 6 M (20 Feet) Above The Roadbed Surface. All Trimming Shall Be Done By Skilled Workmen And In Accordance With Good Tree Surgery Practices. Timber Cut Inside The Area Staked For Clearing Shall Be Felled Within The Area To Be Cleared. 100.2.3 Individual Removal Of Trees Or Stumps Individual Trees Or Stumps Designated By The Engineer For Removal And Located In Areas Other Than Those Established For Clearing And Grubbing And Roadside Cleanup Shall Be Removed And Disposed Off As Specified Under Subsection 100.2.2 Except Trees Removed Shall Be Cut As Nearly Flush With The Ground As Practicable Without Removing Stumps. 100.3 Method Of Measurement Measurement Will Be By One Or More Of The Following Alternate Methods: 1. Area Basis. The Work To Be Paid For Shall Be The Number Of Hectares And Fractions Thereof Acceptably Cleared And Grubbed Within The Limits Indicated On The Plans Or As May Be Adjusted In Field Staking By The Engineer. Areas Not Within The Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shown On The Plans Or Not Staked For Clearing And Grubbing Will Not Be Measured For Payment. 2. Lump-sum Basis. When The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Clearing And Grubbing Lump-sum Item, No Measurement Of Area Will Be Made For Such Item. 3. Individual Unit Basis (selective Clearing). The Diameter Of Trees Will Be Measured At A Height Of 1.4 M (54 Inches) Above The Ground. Trees Less Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) In Diameter Will Not Be Measured For Payment. When Bill Of Quantities Indicates Measurement Of Trees By Individual Unit Basis, The Units Will Be Designated And Measured In Accordance With The Following Schedule Of Sizes: Diameter At Height Of 1.4 M Pay Item Designation Over 150 Mm To 900 Mm Small Over 900 Mm Large 100.4 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 100.3, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities, Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 100 (1) Clearing And Grubbing Hectare 100 (2) Clearing And Grubbing Lump Sum 100 (3) Individual Removal Of Trees, Small Each 100 (4) Individual Removal Of Trees, Large Each Item 101 – Removal Of Structures And Obstructions 101.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Removal Wholly Or In Part, And Satisfactory Disposal Of All Buildings, Fences, Structures, Old Pavements, Abandoned Pipe Lines, And Any Other Obstructions Which Are Not Designated Or Permitted To Remain, Except For The Obstructions To Be Removed And Disposed Off Under Other Items In The Contract. It Shall Also Include The Salvaging Of Designated Materials And Backfilling The Resulting Trenches, Holes, And Pits. 101.2 Construction Requirements 101.2.1 General The Contractor Shall Perform The Work Described Above, Within And Adjacent To The Roadway, On Government Land Or Easement, As Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. All Designated Salvable Material Shall Be Removed, Without Unnecessary Damage, In Sections Or Pieces Which May Be Readily Transported, And Shall Be Stored By The Contractor At Specified Places On The Project Or As Otherwise Shown In The Special Provisions. Perishable Material Shall Be Handled As Designated In Subsection 100.2.2 Nonperishable Material May Be Disposed Off Outside The Limits Of View From The Project With Written Permission Of The Property Owner On Whose Property The Material Is Placed. Copies Of All Agreements With Property Owners Are To Be Furnished To The Engineer. Basements Or Cavities Left By The Structure Removal Shall Be Filled With Acceptable Material To The Level Of The Surrounding Ground And, If Within The Prism Of Construction, Shall Be Compacted To The Required Density. 101.2.2 Removal Of Existing Bridges, Culverts, And Other Drainage Structures All Existing Bridges, Culverts And Other Drainage Structures In Use By Traffic Shall Not Be Removed Until Satisfactory Arrangements Have Been Made To Accommodate Traffic. The Removal Of Existing Culverts Within Embankment Areas Will Be Required Only As Necessary For The Installation Of New Structures. Abandoned Culverts Shall Be Broken Down, Crushed And Sealed Or Plugged. All Retrieved Culvert For Future Use As Determined By The Engineer Shall Be Carefully Removed And All Precautions Shall Be Employed To Avoid Breakage Or Structural Damage To Any Of Its Part. All Sections Of Structures Removed Which Are Not Designated For Stockpiling Or Re-laying Shall Become The Property Of The Government And Be Removed From The Project Or Disposed Off In A Manner Approved By The Engineer. Unless Otherwise Directed, The Substructures Of Existing Structures Shall Be Removed Down To The Natural Stream Bottom And Those Parts Outside Of The Stream Shall Be Removed Down To At Least 300 Mm (12 Inches) Below Natural Ground Surface. Where Such Portions Of Existing Structures Lie Wholly Or In Part Within The Limits For A New Structure, They Shall Be Removed As Necessary To Accommodate The Construction Of The Proposed Structure. Steel Bridges And Wood Bridges When Specified To Be Salvaged Shall Be Carefully Dismantled Without Damaged. Steel Members Shall Be Match Marked Unless Such Match Marking Is Waived By The Engineer. All Salvaged Material Shall Be Stored As Specified In Subsection 101.2.1. Structures Designated To Become The Property Of The Contractor Shall Be Removed From The Right-of-way. Blasting Or Other Operations Necessary For The Removal Of An Existing Structure Or Obstruction, Which May Damage New Construction, Shall Be Completed Prior To Placing The New Work, Unless Otherwise Provided In The Special Provisions. 101.2.3 Removal Of Pipes Other Than Pipe Culverts Unless Otherwise Provided, All Pipes Shall Be Carefully Removed And Every Precaution Taken To Avoid Breakage Or Damaged. Pipes To Be Re-laid Shall Be Removed And Stored When Necessary, So That There Will Be No Loss Of Damage Before Re-laying. The Contractor Shall Replace Sections Lost From Storage Or Damage By Negligence, At His Own Expense. 101.2.4 Removal Of Existing Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, Etc. All Concrete Pavement, Base Course, Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, Etc., Designated For Removal, Shall Be: (1) Broken Into Pieces And Used For Riprap On The Project, Or (2) Broken Into Pieces, The Size Of Which Shall Not Exceed 300 Mm (12 Inches) In Any Dimension And Stockpiled At Designated Locations On The Project For Use By The Government, Or (3) Otherwise Demolished And Disposed Of As Directed By The Engineer. When Specified, Ballast, Gravel, Bituminous Materials Or Other Surfacing Or Pavement Materials Shall Be Removed And Stockpiled As Required In Subsection 101.2.1, Otherwise Such Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Directed. There Will Be No Separate Payment For Excavating For Removal Of Structures And Obstructions Or For Backfilling And Compacting The Remaining Cavity. 101.3 Method Of Measurement When The Contract Stipulates That Payment Will Be Made For Removal Of Obstructions On Lump-sum Basis, The Pay Item Will Include All Structures And Obstructions Encountered Within The Roadway. Where The Contract Stipulates That Payment Will Be Made For The Removal Of Specific Items On A Unit Basis, Measurement Will Be Made By The Unit Stipulated In The Contract. Whenever The Bill Of Quantities Does Not Contain An Item For Any Aforementioned Removals, The Work Will Not Be Paid For Directly, But Will Be Considered As A Subsidiary Obligation Of The Contractor Under Other Contract Items. 101.4 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 101.3, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price Or Lump Sum Price Bid For Each Of The Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Removing And Disposing Of Obstructions, Including Materials, Labor, Equipment’s, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. The Price Shall Also Include Backfilling, Salvage Of Materials Removed, Their Custody, Preservation, Storage On The Right-of-way And Disposal As Provided Herein. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 101 (1) Removal Of Structures And Obstruction Lump Sum 101 (2) Removal Of Each 101 (3) Removal Of Square Meter 101 (4) Removal Of Linear Meter Item 103 – Structure Excavation 103.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Necessary Excavation For Foundation Of Bridges, Culverts, Underdrains, And Other Structures Not Otherwise Provided For In The Specifications. Except As Otherwise Provided For Pipe Culverts, The Backfilling Of Completed Structures And The Disposal Of All Excavated Surplus Materials, Shall Be In Accordance With These Specifications And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. This Item Shall Include Necessary Diverting Of Live Streams, Bailing, Pumping, Draining, Sheeting, Bracing, And The Necessary Construction Of Cribs And Cofferdams, And Furnishing The Materials Therefore, And The Subsequent Removal Of Cribs And Cofferdams And The Placing Of All Necessary Backfill. It Shall Also Include The Furnishing And Placing Of Approved Foundation Fill Material To Replace Unsuitable Material Encountered Below The Foundation Elevation Of Structures. No Allowance Will Be Made For Classification Of Different Types Of Material Encountered. 103.2 Construction Requirements 103.2.1 Clearing And Grubbing Prior To Starting Excavation Operations In Any Area, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 103.2.2 Excavation (1) General, All Structures. The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of The Beginning Of Any Excavation So That Cross-sectional Elevations And Measurements May Be Taken On The Undisturbed Ground. The Natural Ground Adjacent To The Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission Of The Engineer. Trenches Or Foundation Pits For Structures Or Structure Footings Shall Be Excavated To The Lines And Grades Or Elevations Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. They Shall Be Of Sufficient Size To Permit The Placing Of Structures Or Structure Footings Of The Full Width And Length Shown. The Elevations Of The Bottoms Of Footings, As Shown On The Plans, Shall Be Considered As Approximate Only And The Engineer May Order, In Writing, Such Changes In Dimensions Or Elevations Of Footings As May Be Deemed Necessary, To Secure A Satisfactory Foundation. Trenches Or Foundation Pits For Structures Or Structure Footings Shall Be Excavated To The Lines And Grades Or Elevations Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. They Shall Be Of Sufficient Size To Permit The Placing Of Structures Or Structure Footings Of The Full Width And Length Shown. The Elevations Of The Bottoms Of Footings, As Shown On The Plans, Shall Be Considered As Approximate Only And The Engineer May Order, In Writing, Such Changes In Dimensions Or Elevations Of Footings As May Be Deemed Necessary, To Secure A Satisfactory Foundation. (2) Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts. All Rock Or Other Hard Foundation Materials Shall Be Cleaned All Loose Materials, And Cut To A Firm Surface, Either Level, Stepped, Or Serrated As Directed By The Engineer. All Seams Or Crevices Shall Be Cleaned And Grouted. All Loose And Disintegrated Rocks And Thin Strata Shall Be Removed. When The Footing Is To Rest On Material Other Than Rock, Excavation To Final Grade Shall Not Be Made Until Just Before The Footing Is To Be Placed. When The Foundation Material Is Soft Or Mucky Or Otherwise Unsuitable, As Determined By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill With Approved Granular Material. This Foundation Fill Shall Be Placed And Compacted In 150 Mm (6 Inches) Layers Up To The Foundation Elevation. When Foundation Piles Are Used, The Excavation Of Each Pit Shall Be Completed Before The Piles Are Driven And Any Placing Of Foundation Fill Shall Be Done After The Piles Are Driven. After The Driving Is Completed, All Loose And Displaced Materials Shall Be Removed, Leaving A Smooth, Solid Bed To Receive The Footing. (3) Pipe Culverts. The Width Of The Pipe Trench Shall Be Sufficient To Permit Satisfactory Jointing Of The Pipe And Thorough Tamping Of The Bedding Material Under And Around The Pipe. Where Rock, Hardpan, Or Other Unyielding Material Is Encountered, It Shall Be Removed Below The Foundation Grade For A Depth Of At Least 300 Mm Or 4 Mm For Each 100 Mm Of Fill Over The Top Of Pipe, Whichever Is Greater, But Not To Exceed Three-quarters Of The Vertical Inside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Width Of The Excavation Shall Be At Least 300 Mm (12 Inches) Greater Than The Horizontal Outside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Excavation Below Grade Shall Be Backfilled With Selected Fine Compressible Material, Such As Silty Clay Or Loam, And Lightly Compacted In Layers Not Over 150 Mm (6 Inches) In Uncompacted Depth To Form A Uniform But Yielding Foundation. Where A Firm Foundation Is Not Encountered At The Grade Established, Due To Soft, Spongy, Or Other Unstable Soil, Such Unstable Soil Under The Pipe And For A Width Of At Least One Diameter On Each Side Of The Pipe Shall Be Removed To The Depth Directed By The Engineer And Replaced With Approved Granular Foundation Fill Material Properly Compacted To Provide Adequate Support For The Pipe, Unless Other Special Construction Methods Are Called For On The Plans. The Foundation Surface Shall Provide A Firm Foundation Of Uniform Density Throughout The Length Of The Culvert And, If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Cambered In The Direction Parallel To The Pipe Centerline. Where Pipe Culverts Are To Be Placed In Trenches Excavated In Embankments, The Excavation Of Each Trench Shall Be Performed After The Embankment Has Been Constructed To A Plane Parallel To The Proposed Profile Grade And To Such Height Above The Bottom Of The Pipe As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. 103.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Excavated Materials, So Far As Suitable, Shall Be Utilized As Backfill Or Embankment. The Surplus Materials Shall Be Disposed Off In Such Manner As Not To Obstruct The Stream Or Otherwise Impair The Efficiency Or Appearance Of The Structure. No Excavated Materials Shall Be Deposited At Any Time So As To Endanger The Partly Finished Structure. 103.2.4 Cofferdams Suitable And Practically Watertight Cofferdams Shall Be Used Wherever Water-bearing Strata Are Encountered Above The Elevation Of The Bottom Of The Excavation. If Requested, The Contractor Shall Submit Drawings Showing His Proposed Method Of Cofferdam Construction, As Directed By The Engineer. Cofferdams Or Cribs For Foundation Construction Shall In General, Be Carried Well Below The Bottoms Of The Footings And Shall Be Well Braced And As Nearly Watertight As Practicable. In General, The Interior Dimensions Of Cofferdams Shall Be Such As To Give Sufficient Clearance For The Construction Of Forms And The Inspection Of Their Exteriors, And To Permit Pumping Outside Of The Forms. Cofferdams Or Cribs Which Are Tilted Or Moved Laterally During The Process Of Sinking Shall Be Righted Or Enlarged So As To Provide The Necessary Clearance. When Conditions Are Encountered Which, As Determined By The Engineer, Render It Impracticable To Dewater The Foundation Before Placing The Footing, The Engineer May Require The Construction Of A Concrete Foundation Seal Of Such Dimensions As He May Consider Necessary, And Of Such Thickness As To Resist Any Possible Uplift. The Concrete For Such Seal Shall Be Placed As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. The Foundation Shall Then Be Dewatered And The Footing Placed. When Weighted Cribs Are Employed And The Mass Is Utilized To Overcome Partially The Hydrostatic Pressure Acting Against The Bottom Of The Foundation Seal, Special Anchorage Such As Dowels Or Keys Shall Be Provided To Transfer The Entire Mass Of The Crib To The Foundation Seal. When A Foundation Seal Is Placed Under Water, The Cofferdams Shall Be Vented Or Ported At Low Water Level As Directed. Cofferdams Shall Be Constructed So As To Protect Green Concrete Against Damage From Sudden Rising Of The Stream And To Prevent Damage To The Foundation By Erosion. No Timber Or Bracing Shall Be Left In Cofferdams Or Cribs In Such A Way As To Extend Into Substructure Masonry, Without Written Permission From The Engineer. Any Pumping That May Be Permitted From The Interior Of Any Foundation Enclosure Shall Be Done In Such A Manner As To Preclude The Possibility Of Any Portion Of The Concrete Material Being Carried Away. Any Pumping Required During The Placing Of Concrete, Or For A Period Of At Least 24 Hours Thereafter, Shall Be Done From A Suitable Sump Located Outside The Concrete Forms. Pumping To Dewater A Sealed Cofferdam Shall Not Commence Until The Seal Has Set Sufficiently To Withstand The Hydrostatic Pressure. Unless Otherwise Provided, Cofferdams Or Cribs, With All Sheeting And Bracing Involved Therewith, Shall Be Removed By The Contractor After The Completion Of The Substructure. Removal Shall Be Effected In Such Manner As Not To Disturb Or Mar Finished Masonry. 103.2.5 Preservation Of Channel Unless Otherwise Permitted, No Excavation Shall Be Made Outside Of Caissons, Cribs, Cofferdams, Or Sheet Piling, And The Natural Stream Bed Adjacent To Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission From The Engineer. If Any Excavation Or Dredging Is Made At The Side Of The Structure Before Caissons, Cribs, Or Cofferdams Are Sunk In Place, The Contractor Shall, After The Foundation Base Is In Place, Backfill All Such Excavations To The Original Ground Surface Or Stream Bed With Material Satisfactory To The Engineer. 103.2.6 Backfill And Embankment For Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts Excavated Areas Around Structures Shall Be Backfilled With Free Draining Granular Material Approved By The Engineer And Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Over 150 Mm (6 Inches) In Thickness, To The Level Of The Original Ground Surface. Each Layer Shall Be Moistened Or Dried As Required And Thoroughly Compacted With Mechanical Tampers. In Placing Backfills Or Embankment, The Material Shall Be Placed Simultaneously In So Far As Possible To Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of An Abutment, Pier, Or Wall. If Conditions Require Placing Backfill Or Embankment Appreciably Higher On One Side Than On The Opposite Side, The Additional Material On The Higher Side Shall Not Be Placed Until The Masonry Has Been In Place For 14 Days, Or Until Tests Made By The Laboratory Under The Supervision Of The Engineer Establishes That The Masonry Has Attained Sufficient Strength To Withstand Any Pressure Created By The Methods Used And Materials Placed Without Damage Or Strain Beyond A Safe Factor. Backfill Or Embankment Shall Not Be Placed Behind The Walls Of Concrete Culverts Or Abutments Or Rigid Frame Structures Until The Top Slab Is Placed And Cured. Backfill And Embankment Behind Abutments Held At The Top By The Superstructure, And Behind The Sidewalls Of Culverts, Shall Be Carried Up Simultaneously Behind Opposite Abutments Or Sidewalls. All Embankments Adjacent To Structures Shall Be Constructed In Horizontal Layers And Compacted As Prescribed In Subsection 104.3.3 Except That Mechanical Tampers May Be Used For The Required Compaction. Special Care Shall Be Taken To Prevent Any Wedging Action Against The Structure And Slopes Bounding Or Within The Areas To Be Filled Shall Be Benched Or Serrated To Prevent Wedge Action. The Placing Of Embankment And The Benching Of Slopes Shall Continue In Such A Manner That At All Times There Will Be Horizontal Berm Of Thoroughly Compacted Material For A Distance At Least Equal To The Height Of The Abutment Or Wall To The Backfilled Against Except Insofar As Undisturbed Material Obtrudes Upon The Area. Broken Rock Or Coarse Sand And Gravel Shall Be Provided For A Drainage Filter At Weepholes As Shown On The Plans. 103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Bedding, Backfill And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Shall Be Done In Accordance With Item 500, Pipe Culverts And Storm Drains. 103.3 Method Of Measurement 103.3.1 Structure Excavation The Volume Of Excavation To Be Paid For Will Be The Number Of Cubic Metres Measured In Original Position Of Material Acceptably Excavated In Conformity With The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer, But In No Case, Except As Noted, Will Any Of The Following Volumes Be Included In The Measurement For Payment: (1) The Volume Outside Of Vertical Planes 450 Mm (18 Inches) Outside Of And Parallel To The Neat Lines Of Footings And The Inside Walls Of Pipe And Pipe-arch Culverts At Their Widest Horizontal Dimensions. (2) The Volume Of Excavation For Culvert And Sections Outside The Vertical Plane For Culverts Stipulated In (1) Above. (3) The Volume Outside Of Neat Lines Of Underdrains As Shown On The Plans, And Outside The Limits Of Foundation Fill As Ordered By The Engineer. (4) The Volume Included Within The Staked Limits Of The Roadway Excavation, Contiguous Channel Changes, Ditches, Etc., For Which Payment Is Otherwise Provided In The Specification. (5) Volume Of Water Or Other Liquid Resulting From Construction Operations And Which Can Be Pumped Or Drained Away. (6) The Volume Of Any Excavation Performed Prior To The Taking Of Elevations And Measurements Of The Undisturbed Ground. (7) The Volume Of Any Material Rehandled, Except That Where The Plans Indicate Or The Engineer Directs The Excavation After Embankment Has Been Placed And Except That When Installation Of Pipe Culverts By The Imperfect Trench Method Specified In Item 500 Is Required, The Volume Of Material Re-excavated As Directed Will Be Included. (8) The Volume Of Excavation For Footings Ordered At A Depth More Than 1.5 M (60 Inches) Below The Lowest Elevation For Such Footings Shown On The Original Contract Plans, Unless The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Pay Item For Excavation Ordered Below The Elevations Shown On The Plans For Individual Footings. 103.3.2 Bridge Excavation The Volume Of Excavation, Designated On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions As “bridge Excavation” Will Be Measured As Described Below And Will Be Kept Separate For Pay Purposes From The Excavation For All Structures. The Volume Of Bridge Excavation To Be Paid Shall Be The Vertical 450 Mm (18 Inches) Outside Of And Parallel To The Neat Lines Of The Footing. The Vertical Planes Shall Constitute The Vertical Faces Of The Volume For Pay Quantities Regardless Of Excavation Inside Or Outside Of These Planes. 103.3.3 Foundation Fill The Volume Of Foundation Fill To Be Paid For Will Be The Number Of Cubic Meters Measures In Final Position Of The Special Granular Material Actually Provided And Placed Below The Foundation Elevation Of Structures As Specified, Complete In Place And Accepted. 103.3.4 Shoring, Cribbing, And Related Work Shoring, Cribbing And Related Work Whenever Included As A Pay Item In Bill Of Quantities Will Be Paid For At The Lump Sum Bid Price. This Work Shall Include Furnishing, Constructing, Maintaining, And Removing Any And All Shoring, Cribbing, Cofferdams, Caissons, Bracing, Sheeting Water Control, And Other Operations Necessary For The Acceptable Completion Of Excavation Included In The Work Of This Section, To A Depth Of 1.5 M Below The Lowest Elevation Shown On The Plans For Each Separable Foundation Structure. 103.3.5 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 103.3, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Particular Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities. The Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For The Removal And Disposal Of Excavated Materials Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item, Except As Follows: (1) Any Excavation For Footings Ordered At A Depth More Than 1.5 M Below The Lowest Elevation Shown On The Original Contract Plans Will Be Paid For As Provided In Part K, Measurement And Payment, Unless A Pay Item For Excavation Ordered Below Plan Elevation Appears In The Bill Of Quantities. (2) Concrete Will Be Measured And Paid For As Provided Under Item 405, Structural Concrete. (3) Any Roadway Or Borrow Excavation Required In Excess Of The Quantity Excavated For Structures Will Be Measured And Paid For As Provided Under Item 102. (4) Shoring, Cribbing, And Related Work Required For Excavation Ordered More Than 1.5 M (60 Inches ) Below Plan Elevation Will Be Paid For In Accordance With Part K. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 103 (1) Structure Excavation Cubic Meter 103 (2) Bridge Excavation Cubic Meter 103 (3) Foundation Fill Cubic Meter 103 (4) Excavation Ordered Below Plan Elevation Cubic Meter 103 (5) Shoring, Cribbing, And Related Work Lump Sum 103 (6) Pipe Culverts And Drain Excavation Cubic Meter Item 104 – Embankment 104.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Construction Of Embankment In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 104.2 Material Requirements Embankments Shall Be Constructed Of Suitable Materials, In Consonance With The Following Definitions: 1. Suitable Material – Material Which Is Acceptable In Accordance With The Contract And Which Can Be Compacted In The Manner Specified In This Item. It Can Be Common Material Or Rock. Selected Borrow, For Topping – Soil Of Such Gradation That All Particles Will Pass A Sieve With 75 Mm (3 Inches) Square Openings And Not More Than 15 Mass Percent Will Pass The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve, As Determined By Aashto T 11. The Material Shall Have A Plasticity Index Of Not More Than 6 As Determined By Asshto T 90 And A Liquid Limit Of Not More Than 30 As Determined By Aashto T 89. 2. Unsuitable Material – Material Other Than Suitable Materials Such As: (a) Materials Containing Detrimental Quantities Of Organic Materials, Such As Grass, Roots And Sewerage. (b) Organic Soils Such As Peat And Muck. (c) Soils With Liquid Limit Exceeding 80 And/or Plasticity Index Exceeding 55. (d) Soils With A Natural Water Content Exceeding 100%. Soils With Very Low Natural Density, 800 Kg/m3 Or Lower. Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted As Determined By The Engineer. 104.3 Construction Requirements 104.3.1 General Prior To Construction Of Embankment, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Conformity With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. Embankment Construction Shall Consist Of Constructing Roadway Embankments, Including Preparation Of The Areas Upon Which They Are To Be Placed; The Construction Of Dikes Within Or Adjacent To The Roadway; The Placing And Compacting Of Approved Material Within Roadway Areas Where Unsuitable Material Has Been Removed; And The Placing And Compacting Of Embankment Material In Holes, Pits, And Other Depressions Within The Roadway Area. Embankments And Backfills Shall Contain No Muck, Peat, Sod, Roots Or Other Deleterious Matter. Rocks, Broken Concrete Or Other Solid, Bulky Materials Shall Not Be Placed In Embankment Areas Where Piling Is To Be Placed Or Driven. Where Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer, The Surface Of The Existing Ground Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm (6 Inches) And To The Specified Requirements Of This Item. Where Provided On The Plans And Bill Of Quantities The Top Portions Of The Roadbed In Both Cuts And Embankments, As Indicated, Shall Consist Of Selected Borrow For Topping From Excavations. 104.3.2 Methods Of Construction Where There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Preconstruction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Embankment Materials. When Embankment Is To Be Placed And Compacted On Hillsides, Or When New Embankment Is To Be Compacted Against Existing Embankments, Or When Embankment Is Built One-half Width At A Time, The Existing Slopes That Are Steeper Than 3:1 When Measured At Right Angles To The Roadway Shall Be Continuously Benched Over Those Areas As The Work Is Brought Up In Layers. Benching Will Be Subject To The Engineer’s Approval And Shall Be Of Sufficient Width To Permit Operation Of Placement And Compaction Equipment. Each Horizontal Cut Shall Begin At The Intersection Of The Original Ground And The Vertical Sides Of The Previous Cuts. Material Thus Excavated Shall Be Placed And Compacted Along With The Embankment Material In Accordance With The Procedure Described In This Section. Unless Shown Otherwise On The Plans Or Special Provisions, Where An Embankment Of Less Than 1.2 M (4 Feet) Below Subgrade Is To Be Made, All Sod And Vegetable Matter Shall Be Removed From The Surface Upon Which The Embankment Is To Be Placed, And The Cleared Surfaced Shall Be Completely Broken Up By Plowing, Scarifying, Or Steeping To A Minimum Depth Of 150 Mm Except As Provided In Subsection 102.2.2. This Area Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3. Sod Not Required To Be Removed Shall Be Thoroughly Disc Harrowed Or Scarified Before Construction Of Embankment. Wherever A Compacted Road Surface Containing Granular Materials Lies Within 900 Mm (36 Inches) Of The Subgrade, Such Old Road Surface Shall Be Scarified To A Depth Of At Least 150 Mm (6 Inches) Whenever Directed By The Engineer. These Scarified Materials Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3. When Shoulder Excavation Is Specified, The Roadway Shoulders Shall Be Excavated To The Depth And Width Shown On The Plans. The Shoulder Material Shall Be Removed Without Disturbing The Adjacent Existing Base Course Material, And All Excess Excavated Materials Shall Be Disposed Off As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. If Necessary, The Areas Shall Be Compacted Before Being Backfilled. Roadway Embankment Of Earth Material Shall Be Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm (8 Inches), Loose Measurement, And Shall Be Compacted As Specified Before The Next Layer Is Placed. However, Thicker Layer Maybe Placed If Vibratory Roller With High Compactive Effort Is Used Provided That Density Requirement Is Attained And As Approved By The Engineer. Trial Section To This Effect Must Be Conducted And Approved By The Engineer. Effective Spreading Equipment Shall Be Used On Each Lift To Obtain Uniform Thickness As Determined In The Trial Section Prior To Compaction. As The Compaction Of Each Layer Progresses, Continuous Leveling And Manipulating Will Be Required To Assure Uniform Density. Water Shall Be Added Or Removed, If Necessary, In Order To Obtain The Required Density. Removal Of Water Shall Be Accomplished Through Aeration By Plowing, Blading, Discing, Or Other Methods Satisfactory To The Engineer. Where Embankment Is To Be Constructed Across Low Swampy Ground That Will Not Support The Mass Of Trucks Or Other Hauling Equipment, The Lower Part Of The Fill May Be Constructed By Dumping Successive Loads In A Uniformly Distributed Layer Of A Thickness Not Greater Than Necessary To Support The Hauling Equipment While Placing Subsequent Layers. When Excavated Material Contains More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Diameter And Cannot Be Placed In Layers Of The Thickness Prescribed Without Crushing, Pulverizing Or Further Breaking Down The Pieces Resulting From Excavation Methods, Such Materials May Be Placed On The Embankment In Layers Not Exceeding In Thickness The Approximate Average Size Of The Larger Rocks, But Not Greater Than 600 Mm (24 Inches). Even Though The Thickness Of Layers Is Limited As Provided Above, The Placing Of Individual Rocks And Boulders Greater Than 600 Mm In Diameter Will Be Permitted Provided That When Placed, They Do Not Exceed 1200 Mm (48 Inches) In Height And Provided They Are Carefully Distributed, With The Interstices Filled With Finer Material To Form A Dense And Compact Mass. Each Layer Shall Be Leveled And Smoothed With Suitable Leveling Equipment And By Distribution Of Spalls And Finer Fragments Of Earth. Lifts Of Material Containing More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Dimensions Shall Not Be Constructed Above An Elevation 300 Mm (12 Inches) Below The Finished Subgrade. The Balance Of The Embankment Shall Be Composed Of Suitable Material Smoothed And Placed In Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm (8 Inches) In Loose Thickness And Compacted As Specified For Embankments. Dumping And Rolling Areas Shall Be Kept Separate, And No Lift Shall Be Covered By Another Until Compaction Complies With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. Hauling And Leveling Equipment Shall Be So Routed And Distributed Over Each Layer Of The Fill In Such A Manner As To Make Use Of Compaction Effort Afforded Thereby And To Minimize Rutting And Uneven Compaction. 104.3.3 Compaction Compaction Trials Before Commencing The Formation Of Embankments, The Contractor Shall Submit In Writing To The Engineer For Approval His Proposals For The Compaction Of Each Type Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works. The Proposals Shall Include The Relationship Between The Types Of Compaction Equipment, And The Number Of Passes Required And The Method Of Adjusting Moisture Content. The Contractor Shall Carry Out Full Scale Compaction Trials On Areas Not Less Than 10 M Wide And 50 M Long As Required By The Engineer And Using His Proposed Procedures Or Such Amendments Thereto As May Be Found Necessary To Satisfy The Engineer That All The Specified Requirements Regarding Compaction Can Be Consistently Achieved. Compaction Trials With The Main Types Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works Shall Be Completed Before Work With The Corresponding Materials Will Be Allowed To Commence. Throughout The Periods When Compaction Of Earthwork Is In Progress, The Contractor Shall Adhere To The Compaction Procedures Found From Compaction Trials For Each Type Of Material Being Compacted, Each Type Of Compaction Equipment Employed And Each Degree Of Compaction Specified. Earth The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed In All Embankment Layers And The Material Scarified To The Designated Depth Below Subgrade In Cut Sections, Until A Uniform Density Of Not Less Than 95 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined By Aashto T 99 Method C, Is Attained, At A Moisture Content Determined By Engineer To Be Suitable For Such Density. Acceptance Of Compaction May Be Based On Adherence To An Approved Roller Pattern Developed As Set Forth In Item 106, Compaction Equipment And Density Control Strips. The Engineer Shall During Progress Of The Work, Make Density Tests Of Compacted Material In Accordance With Aashto T 191, T 205, Or Other Approved Field Density Tests, Including The Use Of Properly Calibrated Nuclear Testing Devices. A Correction For Coarse Particles May Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 224. If, By Such Tests, The Engineer Determines That The Specified Density And Moisture Conditions Have Not Been Attained, The Contractor Shall Perform Additional Work As May Be Necessary To Attain The Specified Conditions. At Least One Group Of Three In-situ Density Tests Shall Be Carried Out For Each 500 M Of Each Layer Of Compacted Fill. Rock Density Requirements Will Not Apply To Portions Of Embankments Constructed Of Materials Which Cannot Be Tested In Accordance With Approved Methods. Embankment Materials Classified As Rock Shall Be Deposited, Spread And Leveled The Full Width Of The Fill With Sufficient Earth Or Other Fine Material So Deposited To Fill The Interstices To Produce A Dense Compact Embankment. In Addition, One Of The Rollers, Vibrators, Or Compactors Meeting The Requirements Set Forth In Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment, Shall Compact The Embankment Full Width With A Minimum Of Three Complete Passes For Each Layer Of Embankment. 104.3.4 Protection Of Roadbed During Construction During The Construction Of The Roadway, The Roadbed Shall Be Maintained In Such Condition That It Will Be Well Drained At All Times. Side Ditches Or Gutters Emptying From Cuts To Embankments Or Otherwise Shall Be So Constructed As To Avoid Damage To Embankments By Erosion. 104.3.5 Protection Of Structure If Embankment Can Be Deposited On One Side Only Of Abutments, Wing Walls, Piers Or Culvert Headwalls, Care Shall Be Taken That The Area Immediately Adjacent To The Structure Is Not Compacted To The Extent That It Will Cause Overturning Of, Or Excessive Pressure Against The Structure. When Noted On The Plans, The Fill Adjacent To The End Bent Of A Bridge Shall Not Be Placed Higher Than The Bottom Of The Backfill Of The Bent Until The Superstructure Is In Place. When Embankment Is To Be Placed On Both Sides Of A Concrete Wall Or Box Type Structure, Operations Shall Be So Conducted That The Embankment Is Always At Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of The Structure. 104.3.6 Rounding And Warping Slopes Rounding-except In Solid Rock, The Tops And Bottoms Of All Slopes, Including The Slopes Of Drainage Ditches, Shall Be Rounded As Indicated On The Plans. A Layer Of Earth Overlaying Rock Shall Be Rounded Above The Rock As Done In Earth Slopes. Warping-adjustments In Slopes Shall Be Made To Avoid Injury In Standing Trees Or Marring Of Weathered Rock, Or To Harmonize With Existing Landscape Features, And The Transition To Such Adjusted Slopes Shall Be Gradual. At Intersections Of Cuts And Fills, Slopes Shall Be Adjusted And Warped To Flow Into Each Other Or Into The Natural Ground Surfaces Without Noticeable Break. 104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed And Slopes After The Roadbed Has Been Substantially Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compact Properly Or Serve The Intended Purpose. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes Of Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Selected Material. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling, Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. All Earth Slopes Shall Be Left With Roughened Surfaces But Shall Be Reasonably Uniform, Without Any Noticeable Break, And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or Other Surfaces Indicated On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer, With No Variations Therefrom Readily Discernible As Viewed From The Road. 104.3.8 Serrated Slopes Cut Slopes In Rippable Material (soft Rock) Having Slope Ratios Between 0.75:1 And 2:1 Shall Be Constructed So That The Final Slope Line Shall Consist Of A Series Of Small Horizontal Steps. The Step Rise And Tread Dimensions Shall Be Shown On The Plans. No Scaling Shall Be Performed On The Stepped Slopes Except For Removal Of Large Rocks Which Will Obviously Be A Safety Hazard If They Fall Into The Ditchline Or Roadway. 104.3.9 Earth Berms When Called For In The Contract, Permanent Earth Berms Shall Be Constructed Of Well Graded Materials With No Rocks Having A Diameter Greater Than 0.25 The Height Of The Berm. When Local Material Is Not Acceptable, Acceptable Material Shall Be Imported, As Directed By The Engineer. Compacted Berm Compacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Moistening Or Drying And Placing Material As Necessary In Locations Shown On The Drawings Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod, Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precaution To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. Shoulder Surface Beneath Berm Will Be Roughened To Provide A Bond Between The Berm And Shoulder When Completed. The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed Until At Least 90 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Density Is Obtained As Determined By Aashto T 99, Method C. The Cross-section Of The Finished Compacted Berm Shall Reasonably Conform To The Typical Cross-section As Shown On The Plans. Uncompacted Berm Uncompacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Drying, If Necessary And Placing Material In Locations Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precautions To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. 104.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Embankment To Be Paid For Shall Be The Volume Of Material Compacted In Place, Accepted By The Engineer And Formed With Material Obtained From Any Source. Material From Excavation Per Item 102 Which Is Used In Embankment And Accepted By The Engineer Will Be Paid Under Embankment And Such Payment Will Be Deemed To Include The Cost Of Excavating, Hauling, Stockpiling And All Other Costs Incidental To The Work. Material For Selected Borrow Topping Will Be Measured And Paid For Under The Same Conditions Specified In The Preceding Paragraph. 104.5 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 104.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities. The Payment Shall Continue Full Compensation For Placing And Compacting All Materials Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 104 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter 104 (2) Selected, Borrow For Topping, Case 1 Cubic Meter 104 (3) Selected Borrow For Topping, Case 2 Cubic Meter 104 (4) Earth Berm Meter Item 105 – Subgrade Preparation 105.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Preparation Of The Subgrade For The Support Of Overlying Structural Layers. It Shall Extend To Full Width Of The Roadway. Unless Authorized By The Engineer, Subgrade Preparation Shall Not Be Done Unless The Contractor Is Able To Start Immediately The Construction Of The Pavement Structure. 105.2 Material Requirements Unless Otherwise Stated In The Contract And Except When The Sub Grade Is In Rock Cut, All Materials Below Sub Grade Level To A Depth 150 Mm Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified Shall Meet The Requirements Of Section 104.2, Selected Borrow For Topping. 105.3 Construction Requirements 105.3.1 Prior Works Prior To Commencing Preparation Of The Sub Grade, All Culverts, Cross Drains, Ducts And The Like (including Their Fully Compacted Backfill), Ditches, Drains And Drainage Outlets Shall Be Completed. Any Work On The Preparation Of The Subgrade Shall Not Be Started Unless Prior Work Herein Described Shall Have Been Approved By The Engineer. 105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances The Finished Compacted Surface Of The Subgrade Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From + 20 Mm Design Level Of Surface - 30 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity Measured By 3-m Straight Edge 30 Mm Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber + 0.5 % Permitted Variation From Design Longitudinal Grade Over 25 M Length ± 0.1 % 105.3.3 Subgrade In Common Excavation Unless Otherwise Specified, All Materials Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth 150 Mm Or Other Depth Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer Shall Be Excavated. The Material, If Suitable, Shall Be Set Side For Future Use Or, If Unsuitable, Shall Be Disposed Off In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 102.2.9. Where Material Has Been Removed From Below Subgrade Level, The Resulting Surface Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm And In Accordance With Other Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. All Materials Immediately Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth Of 150 Mm, Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified, Shall Be Compacted In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.4 Subgrade In Rock Excavation Surface Irregularities Under The Subgrade Level Remaining After Trimming Of The Rock Excavation Shall Be Leveled By Placing Specified Material And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.5 Subgrade On Embankment After The Embankment Has Been Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compacted Properly. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes, Or Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Material. The Entire Roadbed Shall Be Shaped And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling, Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Cross-sections Shown On The Plans. 105.3.6 Subgrade On Existing Pavement Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Portland Cement Concrete Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract The Slab Be Broken Into Pieces With Greatest Dimension Of Not More Than 500 Mm And The Existing Pavement Material Compacted As Specified In Subsection 104.3.3, As Directed By The Engineer. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall, As Part Pavement Construction Be Shaped To Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2 By Placing And Compacting Where Necessary A Leveling Course Comprising The Material Of The Pavement Course To Be Placed Immediately Above. Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement Or Gravel Surface Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract The Pavement Shall Be Scarified, Thoroughly Loosened, Reshaped And Recompacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2. 105.3.7 Protection Of Completed Work The Contractor Shall Be Required To Protect And Maintain At His Own Expense The Entire Work Within The Limits Of His Contract In Good Condition Satisfactory To The Engineer From The Time He First Started Work Until All Work Shall Have Been Completed. Maintenance Shall Include Repairing And Recompacting Ruts, Ridges, Soft Spots And Deteriorated Sections Of The Subgrade Caused By The Traffic Of The Contractor’s Vehicle/equipment Or That Of The Public. 105.3.8 Templates And Straight-edges The Contractor Shall Provide For Use Of The Engineer, Approved Templates And Straight-edges In Sufficient Number To Check The Accuracy Of The Work, As Provided In This Specification. 105.4 Method Of Measurement 105.4.1 Measurement Of Items For Payment Shall Be Provided Only For: The Compaction Of Existing Ground Below Subgrade Level In Cuts Of Common Material As Specified In Subsection 105.3.3. The Breaking Up Or Scarifying, Loosening, Reshaping And Recompacting Of Existing Pavement As Specified In Subsection 105.3.6. The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Area Of The Work Specified To Be Carried Out And Accepted By The Engineer. 105.4.2 Payment For All Work For The Preparation Of The Subgrade, Including Shaping To The Required Levels And Tolerances, Other Than As Specified Above Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Pay Item For Embankment. 105.5 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 105.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Appropriate Contract Unit Price For Pay Item Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For The Placing Or Removal And Disposal Of All Materials Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 105 (1) Subgrade Preparation (common Material) Square Meter 105 (2) Subgrade Preparation (existing Pavement) Square Meter 105 (3) Subgrade Preparation (unsuitable Material) Square Meter Part D – Subbase And Base Course Item 200 – Aggregate Subbase Course Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Placing And Compacting An Aggregate Subbase Course On A Prepared Subgrade In Accordance With This Specification And The Lines, Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans, Or As Directed By The Engineer. Material Requirements Aggregate For Subbase Shall Consist Of Hard, Durable Particles Or Fragments Of Crushed Stone, Crushed Slag, Or Crushed Or Natural Gravel And Filler Of Natural Or Crushed Sand Or Other Finely Divided Mineral Matter. The Composite Material Shall Be Free From Vegetable Matter And Lumps Or Balls Of Clay, And Shall Be Of Such Nature That It Can Be Compacted Readily To Form A Firm, Stable Subbase. The Subbase Material Shall Conform To Table 200.1, Grading Requirements Table 200.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard, Mm Alternate Us Standard 50 2” 100 25 1” 55 – 85 9.5 3/8” 40 – 75 0.075 No. 200 0 - 12 The Fraction Passing The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve Shall Not Be Greater Than 0.66 (two Thirds) Of The Fraction Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve. The Fraction Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve Shall Have A Liquid Limit Not Greater Than 35 And Plasticity Index Not Greater Than 12 As Determined By Aashto T 89 And T 90, Respectively. The Coarse Portion, Retained On A 2.00 Mm (no. 10) Sieve, Shall Have A Mass Percent Of Wear Not Exceeding 50 By The Los Angeles Abrasion Tests As Determined By Aashto T 96. The Material Shall Have A Soaked Cbr Value Of Not Less Than 25% As Determined By Aashto T 193. The Cbr Value Shall Be Obtained At The Maximum Dry Density And Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. Construction Requirements Preparation Of Existing Surface The Existing Surface Shall Be Graded And Finished As Provided Under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, Before Placing The Subbase Material. Placing The Aggregate Subbase Material Shall Be Placed At A Uniform Mixture On A Prepared Subgrade In A Quantity Which Will Provide The Required Compacted Thickness. When More Than One Layer Is Required, Each Layer Shall Be Shaped And Compacted Before The Succeeding Layer Is Placed. The Placing Of Material Shall Begin At The Point Designated By The Engineer. Placing Shall Be From Vehicles Especially Equipped To Distribute The Material In A Continuous Uniform Layer Or Windrow. The Layer Or Windrow Shall Be Of Such Size That When Spread And Compacted The Finished Layer Be In Reasonably Close Conformity To The Nominal Thickness Shown On The Plans. When Hauling Is Done Over Previously Placed Material, Hauling Equipment Shall Be Dispersed Uniformly Over The Entire Surface Of The Previously Constructed Layer, To Minimize Rutting Or Uneven Compaction. Spreading And Compacting When Uniformly Mixed, The Mixture Shall Be Spread To The Plan Thickness, For Compaction. Where The Required Thickness Is 150 Mm Or Less, The Material May Be Spread And Compacted In One Layer. Where The Required Thickness Is More Than 150 Mm, The Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread And Compacted In Two Or More Layers Of Approximately Equal Thickness, And The Maximum Compacted Thickness Of Any Layer Shall Not Exceed 150 Mm. All Subsequent Layers Shall Be Spread And Compacted In A Similar Manner. The Moisture Content Of Subbase Material Shall, If Necessary, Be Adjusted Prior To Compaction By Watering With Approved Sprinklers Mounted On Trucks Or By Drying Out, As Required In Order To Obtain The Required Compaction. Immediately Following Final Spreading And Smoothening, Each Layer Shall Be Compacted To The Full Width By Means Of Approved Compaction Equipment. Rolling Shall Progress Gradually From The Sides To The Center, Parallel To The Centerline Of The Road And Shall Continue Until The Whole Surface Has Been Rolled. Any Irregularities Or Depressions That Develop Shall Be Corrected By Loosening The Material At These Places And Adding Or Removing Material Until Surface Is Smooth And Uniform. Along Curbs, Headers, And Walls, And At All Places Not Accessible To The Roller, The Subbase Material Shall Be Compacted Thoroughly With Approved Tampers Or Compactors. If The Layer Of Subbase Material, Or Part Thereof, Does Not Conform To The Required Finish, The Contractor Shall, At His Own Expense, Make The Necessary Corrections. Compaction Of Each Layer Shall Continue Until A Field Density Of At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined In Accordance With Aashto T 180, Method D Has Been Achieved. In-place Density Determination Shall Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 191. Trial Sections Before Subbase Construction Is Started, The Contractor Shall Spread And Compact Trial Sections As Directed By The Engineer. The Purpose Of The Trial Sections Is To Check The Suitability Of The Materials And The Efficiency Of The Equipment And Construction Method Which Is Proposed To Be Used By The Contractor. Therefore, The Contractor Must Use The Same Material, Equipment And Procedures That He Proposes To Use For The Main Work. One Trial Section Of About 500 M2 Shall Be Made For Every Type Of Material And/or Construction Equipment/procedure Proposed For Use. After Final Compaction Of Each Trial Section, The Contractor Shall Carry Out Such Field Density Tests And Other Tests Required As Directed By The Engineer. If A Trial Section Shows That The Proposed Materials, Equipment Or Procedures In The Engineer’s Opinion Are Not Suitable For Subbase, The Material Shall Be Removed At The Contractor’s Expense, And A New Trial Section Shall Be Constructed. If The Basic Conditions Regarding The Type Of Material Or Procedure Change During The Execution Of The Work, New Trial Sections Shall Be Constructed. Tolerances Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread With Equipment That Will Provide A Uniform Layer Which When Compacted Will Conform To The Designed Level And Transverse Slopes As Shown On The Plans. The Allowable Tolerances Shall Be As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From Design Thickness Of Layer ± 20 Mm Permitted Variation From Design Level Of Surface +10 Mm -20 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity Measured By 3-m Straight-edge 20 Mm Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber ±0.3% Permitted Variation From Design Longitudinal Grade Over 25 M In Length ±0.1% Method Of Measurement Aggregate Subbase Course Will Be Measured By The Cubic Meter (m3). The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Design Volume Compacted In-place As Shown On The Plans, And Accepted In The Completed Course. No Allowance Will Be Given For Materials Placed Outside The Design Limits Shown On The Cross-sections. Trial Sections Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Shall Be Included In The Quantity Of Subbase Herein Measured. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 200.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Aggregate Subbase Course Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishings And Placing All Materials, Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 200 Aggregate Subbase Course Cubic Meter Part F – Bridge Construction Item 404 – Reinforcing Steel Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Fabricating And Placing Of Steel Reinforcement Of The Type, Size, Shape And Grade Required In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Requirements Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. Material Requirements Reinforcing Steel Shall Meet The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Construction Requirements Order Lists Before Materials Are Ordered, All Order Lists And Bending Diagrams Shall Be Furnished By The Contractor, For Approval Of The Engineer. The Approval Of Order Lists And Bending Diagrams By The Engineer Shall In No Way Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For The Correctness Of Such Lists And Diagrams. Any Expense Incident To The Revisions Of Materials Furnished In Accordance With Such Lists And Diagrams To Make Them Comply With The Plans Shall Be Borne By The Contractor. 404.3.2 Protection Of Material Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Stored Above The Surface Of The Ground Upon Platforms, Skids, Or Other Supports And Shall Be Protected As Far As Practicable From Mechanical Injury And Surface Deterioration Caused By Exposure To Conditions Producing Rust. When Placed In The Work, Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Dirt, Detrimental Rust, Loose Scale, Paint, Grease, Oil, Or Other Foreign Materials. Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Injurious Defects Such As Cracks And Laminations. Rust, Surface Seams, Surface Irregularities Or Mill Scale Will Not Be Cause For Rejection, Provided The Minimum Dimensions, Cross Sectional Area And Tensile Properties Of A Hand Wire Brushed Specimen Meets The Physical Requirements For The Size And Grade Of Steel Specified. Bending All Reinforcing Bars Requiring Bending Shall Be Cold-bent To The Shapes Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer. Bars Shall Be Bent Around A Circular Pin Having The Following Diameters (d) In Relation To The Diameter Of The Bar (d): Nominal Diameter, D, Mm Pin Diameter (d) 10 To 20 25 To 28 32 And Greater 6d 8d 10d Bends And Hooks In Stirrups Or Ties May Be Bent To The Diameter Of The Principal Bar Enclosed Therein. Placing And Fastening All Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Accurately Placed In The Position Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer And Firmly Held There During The Placing And Setting Of The Concrete. Bars Shall Be Tied At All Intersections Except Where Spacing Is Less Than 300mm In Each Directions, In Which Case, Alternate Intersections Shall Be Tied. Ties Shall Be Fastened On The Inside. Distance From The Forms Shall Be Maintained By Means Of Stays, Blocks, Ties, Hangers, Or Other Approved Supports, So That It Does Not Vary From The Position Indicated On The Plans By More Than 6mm. Blocks For Holding Reinforcement From Contact With The Forms Shall Be Precast Mortar Blocks Of Approved Shapes And Dimensions. Layers Of Bars Shall Be Separated By Precast Mortar Blocks Or By Other Equally Suitable Devices. The Use Of Pebbles, Pieces Of Broken Stone Or Brick, Metal Pipe And Wooden Blocks Shall Not Be Permitted. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer, The Minimum Distance Between Bars Shall Be 40mm. Reinforcement In Any Member Shall Be Placed And Then Inspected And Approved By The Engineer Before The Placing Of Concrete Begins. Concrete Placed In Violation Of This Provision May Be Rejected And Removal May Be Required. If Fabric Reinforcement Is Shipped In Rolls, It Shall Be Straightened Before Being Placed. Bundled Bars Shall Be Tied Together At Not More Than 1.8m Intervals. Splicing All Reinforcement Shall Be Furnished In The Full Lengths Indicated On The Plans. Splicing Of Bars, Except Were Shown On The Plans, Will Not Be Permitted Without The Written Approval Of The Engineer. Splices Shall Be Staggered As Far As Possible And With A Minimum Separation Of Not Less Than 40 Bar Diameters. Not More Than One-third Of The Bars May Be Spliced In The Same Cross-section, Except Were Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans, Bars Shall Be Lapped A Minimum Distance Of: Splice Type Grade 40 Min. Lap Grade 60 Min. Lap But Not Less Than Tension 24 Bar Dia 36 Bar Dia 300 Mm Compression 20 Bar Dia 24 Bar Dia 300 Mm In Lapped Splices, The Bars Shall Be Placed In Contact And Wired Together. Lapped Splices Will Not Be Permitted At Locations Where The Concrete Section Is Insufficient To Provide Minimum Clear Distance Of One And One-third The Maximum Size Of Coarse Aggregate Between The Splice And The Nearest Adjacent Bar. Welding Of Reinforcing Steel Shall Be Done Only If Detailed On The Plans Or If Authorized By The Engineer In Writing. Spiral Reinforcement Shall Be Spliced By Lapping At Least One And A Half Turns Or By Butt Welding Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans. Lapping Of Bar Mat Sheets Of Mesh Or Bar Mat Reinforcement Shall Overlap Each Other Sufficiently To Maintain A Uniform Strength And Shall Be Securely Fastened At The Ends And Edges. The Overlap Shall Not Be Less Than One Mesh In Width. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Reinforcing Steel To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Allowance Will Be Made For Tie-wires, Separators, Wire Chairs And Other Material Used In Fastening The Reinforcing Steel In Place. If Bars Are Substituted Upon The Contractor’s Request And Approved By The Engineer And As A Result Thereof More Steel Is Used Than Specified, Only The Mass Specified Shall Be Measured For Payment. No Measurement Or Payment Will Be Made For Splices Added By The Contractor Unless Directed Or Approved By The Engineer. When There Is No Item For Reinforcing Steel In The Bill Of Quantities, Costs Will Be Considered As Incidental To The Other Items In The Bill Of Quantities. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantity, Measured As Prescribed In Section 404.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Reinforcing Steel Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing And Placing All Materials, Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram Item 405 – Structural Concrete Description 405.1.1 Scope This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Placing And Finishing Concrete In All Structures Except Pavements In Accordance With This Specification And Conforming To The Lines, Grades, And Dimensions Shown On The Plans. Concrete Shall Consist Of A Mixture Of Portland Cement, Fine Aggregate, Coarse Aggregate, Admixture When Specified, And Water Mixed In The Proportions Specified Or Approved By The Engineer. 405.1.2 Classes And Uses Of Concrete Five Classes Of Concrete Are Provided For In This Item, Namely: A, B, C, P And Seal. Each Class Shall Be Used In That Part Of The Structure As Called For On The Plans. The Classes Of Concrete Will Generally Be Used As Follows: Class A – All Superstructures And Heavily Reinforced Substructures. The Important Parts Of The Structure Included Are Slabs, Beams, Girders, Columns, Arch Ribs, Box Culverts, Reinforced Abutments, Retaining Walls, And Reinforced Footings. Class B – Footings, Pedestals, Massive Pier Shafts, Pipe Bedding, And Gravity Walls, Unreinforced Or With Only A Small Amount Of Reinforcement. Class C – Thin Reinforced Sections, Railings, Precast R.c. Piles And Cribbing And For Filler In Steel Grid Floors. Class P – Prestressed Concrete Structures And Members. Seal – Concrete Deposited In Water. Material Requirements Portland Cement It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.1. Fine Aggregate It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.2. Coarse Aggregate It Shall Conform All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.3 Except That Gradation Shall Conform To Table 405.1. Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements For Coarse Aggregate Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard Mm Alternate Us Standard Class A Class B Class C Class P Class Seal 63 50 37.5 25 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” 1” ¾” ½” 3/8” No.4 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 0 - 5 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 - 0 - 5 100 90 – 100 40 – 70 0 – 15* 100 95 – 100 - 20 – 55 0 – 10* 100 95 – 100 - 25 – 60 - 0 – 10* * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. Water It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.4 Reinforcing Steel It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Admixtures Admixtures Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.7 Curing Materials Curing Materials Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.8. Expansion Joint Materials Expansion Joint Materials Shall Be: Preformed Sponge Rubber And Cork, Conforming To Aashto M 153. Hot-poured Elastic Type, Conforming To Aashto M 173. Preformed Fillers, Conforming To Aashto M 213. Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals These Shall Conform To Aashto M 220. Elastomeric Bearing Pads These Shall Conform To Aashto M 251 Or Item 412 – Elastomeric Bearing Pads. Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.10. Sampling And Testing Of Structural Concrete As Work Progresses, At Least One (1) Sample Consisting Of Three (3) Concrete Cylinder Test Specimens, 150 X 300mm (6 X 12 Inches), Shall Be Taken From Each Seventy-five (75) Cubic Meters Of Each Class Of Concrete Or Fraction Thereof Placed Each Day. Compliance With The Requirements Of This Section Shall Be Determined In Accordance With The Following Standard Methods Of Aashto: Sampling Of Fresh Concrete Weight Per Cubic Meter And Air Content (gravi-metric) Of Concrete Sieve Analysis Of Fine And Coarse Aggregates Slump Of Portland Cement Concrete Specific Gravity And Absorption Of Fine Aggregate T 141 T 121 T 27 T 119 T 84 Tests For Strength Shall Be Made In Accordance With The Following: Making And Curing Concrete Compressive And Flexural Tests Specimens In The Field Compressive Strength Of Molded Concrete Cylinders T 23 T 22 Production Requirements Proportioning And Strength Of Structural Concrete The Concrete Materials Shall Be Proportioned In Accordance With The Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete As Specified In Table 405.2, Using The Absolute Volume Method As Outlined In The American Concrete Institute (aci) Standard 211.1. “recommended Practice For Selecting Proportions For Normal And Heavyweight Concrete”. Other Methods Of Proportioning May Be Employed In The Mix Design With Prior Approval Of The Engineer. The Mix Shall Either Be Designed Or Approved By The Engineer. A Change In The Source Of Materials During The Progress Of Work May Necessitate A New Mix Design. The Strength Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete Shall Be As Specified In Table 405.2. Table 405.2 - Composition And Strength Of Concrete For Use In Structures Class Of Concrete Minimum Cement Content Per M3 Kg (bag**) Maximum Water/ Cement Ratio Kg/kg Consistency Range In Slump Mm (inch) Designated Size Of Coarse Aggregate Square Opening Std. Mm Minimum Compressive Strength Of 150x300mm Concrete Cylinder Specimen At 28 Days, Mn/m2 (psi) A B C P Seal 360 (9 Bags) 320 (8 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 440 (11 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 0.53 0.58 0.55 0.49 0.58 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 100 Max. (4 Max.) 100 – 200 (4 - 8) 37.5 – 4.75 (1-1/2” – No. 4) 50 – 4.75 (2” – No. 4) 12.5 – 4.75 (1/2” – No. 4) 19.0 – 4.75 (3/4” – No. 4) 25 – 4.75 (1” – No. 4) 20.7 (3000) 16.5 (2400) 20.7 (3000) 37.7 (5000) 20.7 (3000) * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus Or Minus 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. ** Based On 40 Kg/bag 405.4.2 Consistency Concrete Shall Have A Consistency Such That It Will Be Workable In The Required Position. It Shall Be Of Such A Consistency That It Will Flow Around Reinforcing Steel But Individual Particles Of The Coarse Aggregate When Isolated Shall Show A Coating Of Mortar Containing Its Proportionate Amount Of Sand. The Consistency Of Concrete Shall Be Gauged By The Ability Of The Equipment To Properly Place It And Not By The Difficulty In Mixing And Transporting. The Quantity Of Mixing Water Shall Be Determined By The Engineer And Shall Not Be Varied Without His Consent. Concrete As Dry As It Is Practical To Place With The Equipment Specified Shall Be Used. Batching Measuring And Batching Of Materials Shall Be Done At A Batching Plant. Portland Cement Either Sacked Or Bulk Cement May Be Used. No Fraction Of A Sack Of Cement Shall Be Used In A Batch Of Concrete Unless The Cement Is Weighed. All Bulk Cement Shall Be Weighed On An Approved Weighing Device. The Bulk Cement Weighing Hopper Shall Be Properly Sealed And Vented To Preclude Dusting Operation. The Discharge Chute Shall Not Be Suspended From The Weighing Hopper And Shall Be So Arranged That Cement Will Neither Be Lodged In It Nor Leak From It. Accuracy Of Batching Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 1 Mass Percent. Water Water May Be Measured Either By Volume Or By Weight. The Accuracy Of Measuring The Water Shall Be Within A Range Of Error Of Not More Than 1 Percent. Aggregates Stockpiling Of Aggregates Shall Be In Accordance With Subsection 311.2.10. All Aggregates Whether Produced Or Handled By Hydraulic Methods Or Washed, Shall Be Stockpiled Or Binned For Draining For At Least 12 Hours Prior To Batching. Rail Shipment Requiring More Than12 Hours Will Be Accepted As Adequate Binning Only If The Car Bodies Permit Free Drainage. If The Aggregates Contain High Or Non-uniform Moisture Content, Storage Or Stockpile Period In Excess Of 12 Hours May Be Required By The Engineer. Batching Shall Be Conducted As To Result In A 2-mass Percent Maximum Tolerance For The Required Materials. Bins And Scales The Batching Plant Shall Include Separate Bins For Bulk Cement, Fine Aggregate And For Each Size Of Coarse Aggregate, A Weighing Hopper, And Scales Capable Of Determining Accurately The Mass Of Each Component Of The Batch. Scales Shall Be Accurate To One-half (0.5) Percent Throughout The Range Used. Batching When Batches Are Hauled To The Mixer, Bulk Cement Shall Be Transported Either In Waterproof Compartments Or Between The Fine And Coarse Aggregate. When Cement Is Placed In Contact With Moist Aggregates, Batches Will Be Rejected Unless Mixed Within 1-1/2 Hours Of Such Contact. Sacked Cement May Be Transported On Top Of The Aggregates. Batches Shall Be Delivered To The Mixer Separate And Intact. Each Batch Shall Be Dumped Cleanly Into The Mixer Without Loss, And, When More Than One Batch Is Carried On The Truck, Without Spilling Of Material From One Batch Compartment Into Another. Admixtures The Contractor Shall Follow An Approved Procedure For Adding The Specified Amount Of Admixture To Each Batch And Will Be Responsible For Its Uniform Operation During The Progress Of The Work. He Shall Provide Separate Scales For The Admixtures Which Are To Be Proportioned By Weight, And Accurate Measures For Those To Be Proportioned By Volume. Admixtures Shall Be Measured Into The Mixer With An Accuracy Of Plus Or Minus Three (3) Percent. The Use Of Calcium Chloride As An Admixture Will Not Be Permitted. Mixing And Delivery Concrete May Be Mixed At The Site Of Construction, At A Central Point Or By A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or By A Combination Of Central Point Mixing And Truck Agitating. Mixing And Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be In Accordance With The Appropriate Requirements Of Aashto M 157 Except As Modified In The Following Paragraphs Of This Section, For Truck Mixing Or A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or Truck Agitating. Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be Regulated So That Placing Is At A Continuous Rate Unless Delayed By The Placing Operations. The Intervals Between Delivery Of Batches Shall Not Be So Great As To Allow The Concrete In Place To Harden Partially, And In No Case Shall Such An Interval Exceed 30 Minutes. In Exceptional Cases And When Volumetric Measurements Are Authorized, For Small Project Requiring Less Than 75 Cu.m. Per Day Of Pouring, The Weight Proportions Shall Be Converted To Equivalent Volumetric Proportions. In Such Cases, Suitable Allowance Shall Be Made For Variations In The Moisture Condition Of The Aggregates, Including The Bulking Effect In The Fine Aggregate. Batching And Mixing Shall Be In Accordance With Astm C 685, Section 6 Through 9. Concrete Mixing, By Chute Is Allowed Provided That A Weighing Scales For Determining The Batch Weight Will Be Used. For Batch Mixing At The Site Of Construction Or At A Central Point, A Batch Mixer Of An Approved Type Shall Be Used. Mixer Having A Rated Capacity Of Less Than A One-bag Batch Shall Not Be Used. The Volume Of Concrete Mixed Per Batch Shall Not Exceed The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Standard Rating Plate On The Mixer Except That An Overload Up To 10 Percent Above The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity May Be Permitted, Provided Concrete Test Data For Strength, Segregation, And Uniform Consistency Are Satisfactory And Provided No Spillage Of Concrete Takes Place. The Batch Shall Be So Charge Into The Drum That A Portion Of The Water Shall Enter In Advance Of The Cement And Aggregates. The Flow Of Water Shall Be Uniform And All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First 15 Seconds Of The Mixing Period. Mixing Time Shall Be Measured From The Time All Materials, Except Water, Are In The Drum. Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 60 Seconds For Mixers Having A Capacity Of 1.5m3 Or Less. For Mixers Having A Capacity Greater Than 1.5m3, The Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 90 Seconds. If Timing Starts, The Instant The Skip Reaches Its Maximum Raised Position, 4 Seconds Shall Be Added To The Specified Mixing Time. Mixing Time Ends When The Discharge Chute Opens. The Mixer Shall Be Operated At The Drum Speed As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Name Plate On The Mixer. Any Concrete Mixed Less Than The Specified Time Shall Be Discarded And Disposed Off By The Contractor At His Own Expenses. The Timing Device On Stationary Mixers Shall Be Equipped With A Bell Or Other Suitable Warning Device Adjusted To Give A Clearly Audible Signal Each Time The Lock Is Released. In Case Of Failure Of The Timing Device, The Contractor Will Be Permitted To Continue Operations While It Is Being Repaired, Provided He Furnishes An Approved Timepiece Equipped With Minute And Second Hands. If The Timing Device Is Not Placed In Good Working Order Within 24 Hours, Further Use Of The Mixer Will Be Prohibited Until Repairs Are Made. Retempering Concrete Will Not Be Permitted. Admixtures For Increasing The Workability, For Retarding The Set, Or For Accelerating The Set Or Improving The Pumping Characteristics Of The Concrete Will Be Permitted Only When Specifically Provided For In The Contract, Or Authorized In Writing By The Engineer. Mixing Concrete: General Concrete Shall Be Thoroughly Mixed In A Mixer Of An Approved Size And Type That Will Insure A Uniform Distribution Of The Materials Throughout The Mass. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed In Mechanically Operated Mixers. Mixing Plant And Equipment For Transporting And Placing Concrete Shall Be Arranged With An Ample Auxiliary Installation To Provide A Minimum Supply Of Concrete In Case Of Breakdown Of Machinery Or In Case The Normal Supply Of Concrete Is Disrupted. The Auxiliary Supply Of Concrete Shall Be Sufficient To Complete The Casting Of A Section Up To A Construction Joint That Will Meet The Approval Of The Engineer. Equipment Having Components Made Of Aluminum Or Magnesium Alloys, Which Would Have Contact With Plastic Concrete During Mixing, Transporting Or Pumping Of Portland Cement Concrete, Shall Not Be Used. Concrete Mixers Shall Be Equipped With Adequate Water Storage And A Device Of Accurately Measuring And Automatically Controlling The Amount Of Water Used. Materials Shall Be Measured By Weighing. The Apparatus Provided For Weighing The Aggregates And Cement Shall Be Suitably Designed And Constructed For This Purpose. The Accuracy Of All Weighing Devices Except That For Water Shall Be Such That Successive Quantities Can Be Measured To Within One Percent Of The Desired Amounts. The Water Measuring Device Shall Be Accurate To Plus Or Minus 0.5 Mass Percent. All Measuring Devices Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer. Scales And Measuring Devices Shall Be Tested At The Expense Of The Contractor As Frequently As The Engineer May Deem Necessary To Ensure Their Accuracy. Weighing Equipment Shall Be Insulated Against Vibration Or Movement Of Other Operating Equipment In The Plant. When The Entire Plant Is Running, The Scale Reading At Cut-off Shall Not Vary From The Weight Designated By The Engineer More Than One Mass Percent For Cement, 1-1/2 Mass Percent For Any Size Of Aggregate, Or One (1) Mass Percent For The Total Aggregate In Any Batch. Mixing Concrete At Site Concrete Mixers May Be Of The Revolving Drum Or The Revolving Blade Type And The Mixing Drum Or Blades Shall Be Operated Uniformly At The Mixing Speed Recommended By The Manufacturer. The Pick-up And Throw-over Blades Of Mixers Shall Be Restored Or Replaced When Any Part Or Section Is Worn 20mm Or More Below The Original Height Of The Manufacturer’s Design. Mixers And Agitators Which Have An Accumulation Of Hard Concrete Or Mortar Shall Not Be Used. When Bulk Cement Is Used And Volume Of The Batch Is 0.5m3 Or More, The Scale And Weigh Hopper For Portland Cement Shall Be Separate And Distinct From The Aggregate Hopper Or Hoppers. The Discharge Mechanism Of The Bulk Cement Weigh Hopper Shall Be Interlocked Against Opening Before The Full Amount Of Cement Is In The Hopper. The Discharging Mechanism Shall Also Be Interlocked Against Opening When The Amount Of Cement In The Hopper Is Underweight By More Than One (1) Mass Percent Or Overweight By More Than 3 Mass Percent Of The Amount Specified. When The Aggregate Contains More Water Than The Quantity Necessary To Produce A Saturated Surface Dry Condition, Representative Samples Shall Be Taken And The Moisture Content Determined For Each Kind Of Aggregate. The Batch Shall Be So Charged Into The Mixer That Some Water Will Enter In Advance Of Cement And Aggregate. All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First Quarter Of The Specified Mixing Time. Cement Shall Be Batched And Charged Into The Mixer So That It Will Not Result In Loss Of Cement Due To The Effect Of Wind, Or In Accumulation Of Cement On Surface Of Conveyors Or Hoppers, Or In Other Conditions Which Reduce Or Vary The Required Quantity Of Cement In The Concrete Mixture. The Entire Content Of A Batch Mixer Shall Be Removed From The Drum Before Materials For A Succeeding Batch Are Placed Therein. The Materials Composing A Batch Except Water Shall Be Deposited Simultaneously Into The Mixer. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed For A Period Of Not Less Than 1-1/2 Minutes After All Materials, Including Water, Are In The Mixer. During The Period Of Mixing, The Mixer Shall Operate At The Speed For Which It Has Been Designed. Mixers Shall Be Operated With An Automatic Timing Device That Can Be Locked By The Engineer. The Time Device And Discharge Mechanics Shall Be So Interlocked That During Normal Operation No Part Of The Batch Will Be Charged Until The Specified Mixing Time Has Elapsed. The First Batch Of Concrete Materials Placed In The Mixer Shall Contain A Sufficient Excess Of Cement, Sand, And Water To Coat Inside Of The Drum Without Reducing The Required Mortar Content Of The Mix. When Mixing Is To Cease For A Period Of One Hour Or More, The Mixer Shall Be Thoroughly Cleaned. Mixing Concrete At Central Plant Mixing At Central Plant Shall Conform To The Requirements For Mixing At The Site. Mixing Concrete In Truck Truck Mixers, Unless Otherwise Authorized By The Engineer, Shall Be Of The Revolving Drum Type, Water-tight, And So Constructed That The Concrete Can Be Mixed To Insure A Uniform Distribution Of Materials Throughout The Mass. All Solid Materials For The Concrete Shall Be Accurately Measured And Charged Into The Drum At The Proportioning Plant. Except As Subsequently Provided, The Truck Mixer Shall Be Equipped With A Device By Which The Quantity Of Water Added Can Be Readily Verified. The Mixing Water May Be Added Directly To The Batch, In Which Case A Tank Is Not Required. Truck Mixers May Be Required To Be Provided With A Means Of Which The Mixing Time Can Be Readily Verified By The Engineer. The Maximum Size Of Batch In Truck Mixers Shall Not Exceed The Minimum Rated Capacity Of The Mixer As Stated By The Manufacturer And Stamped In Metal On The Mixer. Truck Mixing, Shall, Unless Other-wise Directed Be Continued For Not Less Than 100 Revolutions After All Ingredients, Including Water, Are In The Drum. The Mixing Speed Shall Not Be Less Than 4 Rpm, Nor More Than 6 Rpm. Mixing Shall Begin Within 30 Minutes After The Cement Has Been Added Either To The Water Or Aggregate, But When Cement Is Charged Into A Mixer Drum Containing Water Or Surface Wet Aggregate And When The Temperature Is Above 32oc, This Limit Shall Be Reduced To 15 Minutes. The Limitation In Time Between The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregate And The Beginning Of The Mixing May Be Waived When, In The Judgement Of The Engineer, The Aggregate Is Sufficiently Free From Moisture, So That There Will Be No Harmful Effects On The Cement. When A Truck Mixer Is Used For Transportation, The Mixing Time Specified In Subsection 405.4.4 (3) At A Stationary Mixer May Be Reduced To 30 Seconds And The Mixing Completed In A Truck Mixer. The Mixing Time In The Truck Mixer Shall Be As Specified For Truck Mixing. Transporting Mixed Concrete Mixed Concrete May Only Be Transported To The Delivery Point In Truck Agitators Or Truck Mixers Operating At The Speed Designated By The Manufacturers Of The Equipment As Agitating Speed, Or In Non-agitating Hauling Equipment, Provided The Consistency And Workability Of The Mixed Concrete Upon Discharge At The Delivery Point Is Suitable Point For Adequate Placement And Consolidation In Place. Truck Agitators Shall Be Loaded Not To Exceed The Manufacturer’s Guaranteed Capacity. They Shall Maintain The Mixed Concrete In A Thoroughly Mixed And Uniform Mass During Hauling. No Additional Mixing Water Shall Be Incorporated Into The Concrete During Hauling Or After Arrival At The Delivery Point. The Rate Of Discharge Of Mixed Concrete From Truck Mixers Or Agitators Shall Be Controlled By The Speed Of Rotation Of The Drum In The Discharge Direction With The Discharge Gate Fully Open. When A Truck Mixer Or Agitator Is Used For Transporting Concrete To The Delivery Point, Discharge Shall Be Completed Within One Hour, Or Before 250 Revolutions Of The Drum Or Blades, Whichever Comes First, After The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregates. Under Conditions Contributing To Quick Stiffening Of The Concrete Or When The Temperature Of The Concrete Is 30oc, Or Above, A Time Less Than One Hour Will Be Required. Delivery Of Mixed Concrete The Contractor Shall Have Sufficient Plant Capacity And Transportation Apparatus To Insure Continuous Delivery At The Rate Required. The Rate Of Delivery Of Concrete During Concreting Operations Shall Be Such As To Provide For The Proper Handling, Placing And Finishing Of The Concrete. The Rate Shall Be Such That The Interval Between Batches Shall Not Exceed 20 Minutes. The Methods Of Delivering And Handling The Concrete Shall Be Such As Will Facilitate Placing Of The Minimum Handling. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Structural Concrete To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Deduction Will Be Made For The Volume Occupied By Pipe Less Than 100mm (4 Inches) In Diameter Or By Reinforcing Steel, Anchors, Conduits, Weep Holes Or Expansion Joint Materials. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 405.5, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Item Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities. Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For Furnishing, Placing And Finishing Concrete Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In The Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 405 (4) 405 (5) Structural Concrete, Class A Structural Concrete, Class B Structural Concrete, Class C Structural Concrete, Class P Seal Concrete Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Part G – Drainage And Slope Protection Structures Item 500 – Pipe Culverts And Storm Drains Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Construction Or Reconstruction Of Pipe Culverts And Storm Drains, Hereinafter Referred To As “conduit” In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines And Grades Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Requirements Material Shall Meet The Requirements Specified In The Following Specifications: Zinc Coated (galvanized) Corrugated Iron Or Steel Culverts And Underdrains Aashto M 36 Cast Iron Culvert Pipe Aashto M 64 Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain And Culvert Pipe Aashto M 86 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain And Sewer Pipe Aashto M 170 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe And Pipe Arches Aashto M 190 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain And Sewer Pipe Aashto M 206 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain And Sewer Pipe Aashto M 207 Asbestos Cement Pipe For Culverts And Storm Drains Aashto M 217 Joint Mortar – Joint Mortar For Concrete Pipes Shall Consist Of 1 Part, By Volume Of Portland Cement And Two (2) Parts Of Approved Sand With Water As Necessary To Obtain The Required Consistency. Portland Cement And Sand Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Mortar Shall Be Used Within 30 Minutes After Its Preparation. Rubber Gaskets Aashto M 198 Oakum – Oakum For Joints In Bell And Spigot Pipes Shall Be Made From Hemp (cannavis Sativa) Line Or Benares Sunn Fiber Or From A Combination Of These Fibers. The Oakum Shall Be Thoroughly Corded And Finished And Practically Free From Lumps, Dirt And Extraneous Matter. Hot Poured Joint Sealing Compound Aashto M 173 Bedding Material Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 500.3.2, Bedding. Backfill Material Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling. When The Location Of Manufacturing Plants Allow, The Plants Will Be Inspected Periodically For Compliance With Specified Manufacturing Methods, And Material Samples Will Be Obtained For Laboratory Testing For Compliance With Materials Quality Requirements. This Shall Be The Basis For Acceptance Of Manufacturing Lots As To Quality. Prior To And During Incorporation Of Materials In The Work, These Materials Will Be Subjected To The Latest Inspection And Approval Of The Engineer. Construction Requirements Trenches Excavation Trenches Shall Be Excavated In Accordance With The Requirement Of Item 103, Structure Excavation, To A Width Sufficient To Allow For Proper Jointing Of The Conduit And Thorough Compaction Of The Bedding And Backfill Materials Under And Around The Conduit. Where Feasible, Trench Wall Shall Be Vertical. The Completed Trench Bottom Shall Be Firm For Its Full Length And Width. Where Required, In The Case Of Crop Drains, The Trench Shall Have A Longitudinal Camber Of The Magnitude Specified. When So Specified On The Plans, The Excavation For Conduits Placed In Embankment Fill, Shall Be Made After The Embankment Has Been Completed To The Specified Or Directed Height Above The Designed Grade Of The Conduit. Bedding The Bedding Shall Conform To One Of The Classes Specified. When No Bedding Class Is Specified, The Requirements For Class C Bedding Shall Apply. Class A Bedding Shall Consist Of A Continuous Concrete Cradle Conforming To The Plan Details. Class B Bedding Shall Consist Of Bedding The Conduit To A Depth Of Not Less Than 30 Percent Of The Vertical Outside Diameter Of The Conduit. The Minimum Thickness Of Bedding Material Beneath The Pipe Shall Be 100 Mm. The Bedding Material Shall Be Sand Or Selected Sandy Soil All Of Which Passes A 9.5 Mm Sieve And Not More Than 10 Percent Of Which Passes A 0.075 Mm Sieve. The Layer Of The Bedding Material Shall Be Shaped To Fit The Conduit For At Least 15 Percent Of Its Total Height. Recesses In The Trench Bottom Shall Be Shaped To Accommodate The Bell When Bell And Spigot Type Conduit Is Used. Class C Bedding Shall Consist Of Bedding The Conduit To A Depth Of Not Less Than 10 Percent Of Its Total Height. The Foundation Surface, Completed In Accordance With Item 103, Structure Excavation, Shall Be Shaped To Fit The Conduit And Shall Have Recesses Shaped To Receive The Bells, If Any. For Flexible Pipe, The Bed Shall Be Roughly Shaped And A Bedding Blanket Of Sand Or Fine Granular Material As Specified Above Shall Be Provided As Follows: Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth 10 Mm 25 Mm 25 Mm 50 Mm 50 Mm 75 Mm For Large Diameter Structural Plate Pipes The Shaped Bed Need Not Exceed The Width Of Bottom Plate. Laying Conduit The Conduit Laying Shall Begin At The Downstream End Of The Conduit Line. The Lower Segment Of The Conduit Shall Be In Contact With The Shaped Bedding Throughout Its Full Length. Bell Or Groove Ends Of Rigid Conduits And Outside Circumferential Laps Of Flexible Conduits Shall Be Placed Facing Upstream. Flexible Conduit Shall Be Placed With Longitudinal Laps Or Seams At The Sides. Paved Or Partially-lined Conduit Shall Be Laid Such That The Longitudinal Center Line Of The Paved Segment Coincides With The Flow Line. Elliptical And Elliptically Reinforced Conduits Shall Be Placed With The Major Axis Within 5 Degrees Of A Vertical Plane Through The Longitudinal Axis Of The Conduit. Jointing Conduit Rigid Conduits May Either Be Of Bell And Spigot Or Tongue And Groove Design Unless Another Type Is Specified. The Method Of Joining Conduit Sections Shall Be Such That The Ends Are Fully Entered And The Inner Surfaces Are Reasonably Flush And Even. Joints Shall Be Made With (a) Portland Cement Mortar, (b) Portland Cement Grout, (c) Rubber Gaskets, (d) Oakum And Mortar, (e) Oakum And Joint Compound, (f) Plastic Sealing Compound, Or By A Combination Of These Types, Or Any Other Type, As May Be Specified. Mortar Joints Shall Be Made With An Excess Of Mortar To Form A Continuous Bead Around The Outside Of The Conduit And Finished Smooth On The Inside. For Grouted Joints, Molds Or Runners Shall Be Used To Retain The Poured Grout. Rubber Ring Gaskets Shall Be Installed So As To Form A Flexible Water-tight Seal. Where Oakum Is Used, The Joint Shall Be Called With This Material And Then Sealed With The Specified Material. When Portland Cement Mixtures Are Used, The Completed Joints Shall Be Protected Against Rapid Drying By Any Suitable Covering Material. Flexible Conduits Shall Be Firmly Joined By Coupling Bands. Conduits Shall Be Inspected Before Any Backfill Is Placed. Any Pipe Found To Be Out Of Alignment, Unduly Settled, Or Damaged Shall Be Taken Up And Re-laid Or Replaced. Field Strutting When Required By The Plans, Vertical Diameter Of Round Flexible Conduit Shall Be Increased 5 Percent By Shop Elongation Or By Means Of Jacks Applied After The Entire Line Of Conduit Has Been Installed On The Bending But Before Backfilling. The Vertical Elongation Shall Be Maintained By Means Of Sills And Struts Or By Horizontal Ties Shall Be Used On Paved Invert Pipe. Ties And Struts Shall Be 300 Mm In Place Until The Embankment Is Completed And Compacted, Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans. These Construction Specifications Shall Also Apply In The Case Of Relaid Conduits. In Addition, All Conduits Salvaged For Relaying Shall Be Cleaned Of All Foreign Materials Prior To Reinstallation. Backfilling Materials For Backfilling On Each Side Of The Conduit For The Full Trench Width And To An Elevation Of 300 Mm Above The Top Of The Conduit Shall Be Fine, Readily Compactible Soil Or Granular Material Selected From Excavation Or From A Source Of The Contractor’s Choice, And Shall Not Contain Stones That Would Be Retained On A 50 Mm Sieve, Chunks Of Highly Plastic Clay, Or Other Objectionable Material. Granular Backfill Material Shall Have Not Less Than 95 Percent Passing A 12.5 Mm Sieve And Not Less Than 95 Percent Retained On A 4.75 Mm Sieve. Oversized Material, If Present, Shall Be Removed At The Source Of The Material, Except As Directed By The Engineer. When The Top Of The Conduit Is Flushed With Or Below The Top Of The Trench, Backfill Material Shall Be Placed At Or Near Optimum Moisture Content And Compacted In Layers Not Exceeding 150 Mm (compacted) On Both Sides To An Elevation 300 Mm Above The Top Of The Conduit. Care Shall Be Exercised To Thoroughly Compact The Backfill Under The Haunches Of The Conduit. The Backfill Shall Be Brought Up Evenly On Both Sides Of The Conduit For The Full Required Length. Except Where Negative Projecting Embankment-type Installation Is Specified, The Backfill Material Shall Be Placed And Compacted For The Full Depth Of The Trench. When The Top Of The Conduit Is Above The Top Of The Trench, Backfill Shall Be Placed At Or Near Optimum Moisture Content And Compacted In Layers Not Exceeding 300 Mm (compacted) And Shall Be Brought Up Evenly On Both Sides Of The Conduit For Its Full Length To An Elevation 300 Mm Above The Top Of The Conduit. The Width Of The Backfill On Each Side Of The Conduit For The Portion Above The Top Of The Trench Shall Be Equal To Twice The Diameter Of The Conduit Or 3.5 M, Whichever Is Less. The Backfill Material Used In The Trench Section And The Portion Above The Top Of The Trench For A Distance On Each Side Of The Conduit Equal To The Horizontal Inside Diameter And To 300 Mm Above The Top Of The Conduit Shall Conform To The Requirements For Backfill Materials In This Subsection. The Remainder Of The Backfill Shall Consist Of Materials From Excavation And Borrow That Is Suitable For Embankment Construction. Compaction To The Density Specified In Item 104, Embankment, Shall Be Achieved By Use Of Mechanical Tampers Or By Rolling. All Conduits After Being Bedded And Backfill As Specified In This Subsection Shall Be Protected By One Meter Cover Of Fill Before Heavy Equipment Is Permitted To Cross During Construction Of The Roadway. 500.3.7 Imperfect Trench Under This Method, For Rigid Conduit, The Embankment Shall Be Completed As Described In Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, To A Height Above The Conduit Equal To The Vertical Outside Diameter Of The Conduit Plus 300 Mm. A Trench Equal In Width To The Outside Horizontal Diameter Of The Conduit And To The Length Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer Shall Then Be Excavated To Within 300 Mm Of The Top Of The Conduit, Trench Walls Being As Nearly Vertical As Possible. The Trench Shall Be Loosely Filled With Highly Compressible Soil. Construction Of Embankment Above Shall Then Proceed In A Normal Manner. Method Of Measurement Conduit Of The Different Types And Sizes, Both New And Relaid, Will Be Measured By The Linear Metre In Place. Conduit With Sloped Or Skewed Ends Will Be Measured Along The Invert. Each Section Will Be Measured By The Number Of Units Installed. Branch Connection And Elbows Will Be Included In The Length Measurement For Conduit, Or They May Be Measured By The Number Of Units Installed. Class B Bedding Material Placed And Approved Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Metre In Place. When The Bid Schedule Contains An Estimated Quantity For “furnishing And Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert”, The Quantity To Be Paid For Will Be The Number Of Cubic Meter Complete In Place And Accepted, Measured In Final Position Between Limits As Follows: Measurement Shall Include Backfill Material In The Trench Up To The Top Of The Original Ground Line But Will Not Include Any Material Placed Outside Of Vertical Planes 450 Mm Up Outside Of And Parallel To The Inside Wall Of Pipe At Its Widest Horizontal Dimension. When The Original Ground Line Is Less Than 300 Mm Above The Top Of The Pipe, The Measurement Will Also Include The Placing Of All Backfill Materials, Above The Original Ground Line Adjacent To The Pipe For A Height Of 300 Mm Above The Top Of Pipe And For A Distance On Each Side Of The Pipe Not Greater Than The Widest Horizontal Dimension Of The Pipe. The Measurement Shall Include The Placing Of Backfill Material In All Trenches Of The Imperfect Trench Method. Materials Re-excavated For Imperfect Trench Construction Will Be Measured For Payment Under Item 103, Structure Excavation. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities Of Conduit, Determined As Provided In Section 500.4, Method Of Measurement, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price Per Linear Meter For The Conduit Of The Types And Sizes Specified Complete In Place. End Sections And, When So Specified, Branch Connections And Elbows, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price Per Piece For The Kind And Size Specified Complete In Place. Excavation For Culverts And Storm Drains, Including Excavation Below Flow Line Grade And For Imperfect Trench, Shall Be Measured And Paid For As Provided In Item 103, Structure Excavation. Concrete For Class A Bedding Will Be Paid For Under Item 405, Structural Concrete. When The Bid Schedule Does Not Contain As Estimated Quantity For “furnishing And Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” Payment For Placing Backfill Material Around Pipe Culverts Will Be Considered As Included In The Payment For Excavation Of The Backfill Material. Payment Will Be Made Under: Payment Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 500 (1) Pipe Culverts, - Mm Linear Meter Class - 500 (2) Storm Drain, - Mm Linear Meter Class - Item 510 – Concrete Slope Protection Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Furnishing And Placing Of Concrete Slope Protection Including All Necessary Excavation, A Bed Course And Reinforced Concrete To The Required Thickness And Extent To Protect Slopes Against Erosion. Construction Details Shall Be As Shown On The Plans. Material Requirements 510.2.1 Bed Course A Bed Course, Where Required, Shall Be Granular Material Which Satisfies The Requirements For Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A. 510.2.2 Formwork Formwork, Where Necessary, Shall Be As Specified In Item 407, Concrete Structures. 510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement Steel Reinforcement Shall Be As Specified In Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 510.2.4 Concrete Concrete Shall Be Class B As Specified In Item 405, Structural Concrete, Unless Otherwise Specified Or Required By The Engineer. Construction Requirements 510.3.1 Excavation The Ground Shall Be Excavated Where Necessary In Accordance With The Dimensions, Lines And Grades Shown On The Plans. 510.3.2 Bed Course Where Shown On The Plans Or Ordered By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Provide And Lay A Bed Course, To The Depth Required, And As Specified In Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, Compacted At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density As Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. 510.3.3 Concrete The Contractor Shall Provide And Place Concrete In Accordance With The Requirements Of Item 405, Structural Concrete, To The Required Depths In The Positions And To The Grades And Elevations Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Specified, The Concrete Slabs Shall Not Be Greater Than 4m By 4m And Shall Have Between Slabs, Plain Vertical Straight Joints With No Joint Filler Or Sealer. The Toe Of The Concrete Slope Protection Shall Be Constructed And Protected A Shown On The Plans. 510.3.4 Drainage Drainage Of The Bed Course Or Backfill Shall Be Provided As Shown On The Plans Or As Required By The Engineer. 510.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Granular Material In The Bed Course To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. The Quantity Of Concrete To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities As Provided In Section 510.4, Method Of Measurement, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price According To The Pay Item In The Bid Schedule Which Price And Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For The Necessary Excavation, For All Labor, Equipment, Tools, All Materials Including Formwork And Reinforcing Steel, And Incidentals Necessary To Complete This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 510 (1) Bed Course Cubic Meter In-place Granular Material 510 (2) Concrete Cubic Meter In-place Section Vii. Drawings Annex A – Architectural Design Annex B- Project Billboard Plan Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities Bid No. Agr- 24-1186-b Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost No. I. Miscellaneous Survey And 1.00 L.s. Pesos Staking And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Ii. Project Billboard/signboard 4.00 Each Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) Each P Iii. Traffic Management 1.23 Mo. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Mo. P Iv. Mobilization/demobilization 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /l.s. P V. Clearing And Grubbing 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /l.s. P Vi. Removal Of Actual Structures 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Obstructions And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Vii. Structure Excavation 827.40 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Viii. Embankment From Roadway 688.67 Cu.m. Pesos Excavation And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Ix. Embankment From Borrow 506.05 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P X. Subgrade Preparation 5,107.20 Sq.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Sq.m. P Xi. Aggregate Sub-base Course 989.52 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Xii. Reinforcing Steel 6,165.97 Kgs Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Kgs P Xiii. Structural Concrete (24mpa, 36.40 Cu.m. Pesos 28 Days) And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m. P Xiv. Lined Canal (concrete) 376.00 Ln.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Ln.m. P Xv. Concrete Slope Protection 339.29 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Total Bid Cost In Figures P Total Bid Cost In Words Summary Of Costs Item No. Bid Amount I. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking ₱ _____________________________ Ii. Project Billboard/signboard ₱ _____________________________ Iii. Traffic Management ₱ _____________________________ Iv. Mobilization/demobilization ₱ _____________________________ V. Clearing And Grubbing ₱ _____________________________ Vi. Removal Of Actual Structures And Obstructions ₱ _____________________________ Vii. Structure Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Viii. Embankment From Roadway Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Ix. Embankment From Borrow ₱ _____________________________ X. Subgrade Preparation ₱ _____________________________ Xi. Aggregate Sub-base Course ₱ _____________________________ Xii. Reinforcing Steel ₱ _____________________________ Xiii. Structural Concrete (24 Mpa, 28 Days) ₱ _____________________________ Xiv. Lined Canal (concrete) ₱ _____________________________ Xv. Concrete Slope Protection ₱ _____________________________ Total Bid Amount ₱ _____________________________ Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents Technical Component Envelope Class “a” Documents Legal Documents ⬜ (a)valid Philgeps Registration Certificate (platinum Membership) (all Pages) In Accordance With Section 8.5.2 Of The Irr; Technical Documents ⬜ Statement Of The Prospective Bidder Of All Its Ongoing Government And Private Contracts, Including Contracts Awarded But Not Yet Started, If Any, Whether Similar Or Not Similar In Nature And Complexity To The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Statement Of The Bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) Similar To The Contract To Be Bid, Except Under Conditions Provided Under The Rules; And ⬜ Special Pcab License In Case Of Joint Ventures; And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Original Copy Of Bid Security. If In The Form Of A Surety Bond, Submit Also A Certification Issued By The Insurance Commission; Or Original Copy Of Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; And Project Requirements, Which Shall Include The Following: ⬜ Organizational Chart For The Contract To Be Bid; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen), To Be Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership Or Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be; And ⬜ Original Duly Signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (oss); And If Applicable, Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate In Case Of A Corporation, Partnership, Or Cooperative; Or Original Special Power Of Attorney Of All Members Of The Joint Venture Giving Full Power And Authority To Its Officer To Sign The Oss And Do Acts To Represent The Bidder. Financial Documents ⬜ The Prospective Bidder’s Computation Of Net Financial Contracting Capacity (nfcc). Class “b” Documents ⬜ If Applicable, Duly Signed Joint Venture Agreement (jva) In Accordance With Ra No. 4566 And Its Irr In Case The Joint Venture Is Already In Existence; Or Duly Notarized Statements From All The Potential Joint Venture Partners Stating That They Will Enter Into And Abide By The Provisions Of The Jva In The Instance That The Bid Is Successful. Financial Component Envelope ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed And Accomplished Financial Bid Form; And Other Documentary Requirements Under Ra No. 9184 ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed Bid Prices In The Bill Of Quantities; And ⬜ Duly Accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, Including A Summary Sheet Indicating The Unit Prices Of Construction Materials, Labor Rates, And Equipment Rentals Used In Coming Up With The Bid; And ⬜ Cash Flow By Quarter. Bid Form For The Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Bid Form Date : Project Identification No. : To: [name And Address Of Procuring Entity] Having Examined The Philippine Bidding Documents (pbds) Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin Numbers [insert Numbers], The Receipt Of Which Is Hereby Duly Acknowledged, We, The Undersigned, Declare That: We Have No Reservation To The Pbds, Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletins, For The Procurement Project: [insert Name Of Contract]; We Offer To Execute The Works For This Contract In Accordance With The Pbds; The Total Price Of Our Bid In Words And Figures, Excluding Any Discounts Offered Below Is: [insert Information]; The Discounts Offered And The Methodology For Their Application Are: [insert Information]; The Total Bid Price Includes The Cost Of All Taxes, Such As, But Not Limited To: [specify The Applicable Taxes, E.g. (i) Value Added Tax (vat), (ii) Income Tax, (iii) Local Taxes, And (iv) Other Fiscal Levies And Duties], Which Are Itemized Herein And Reflected In The Detailed Estimates, Our Bid Shall Be Valid Within The Period Stated In The Pbds, And It Shall Remain Binding Upon Us At Any Time Before The Expiration Of That Period; If Our Bid Is Accepted, We Commit To Obtain A Performance Security In The Amount Of [insert Percentage Amount] Percent Of The Contract Price For The Due Performance Of The Contract, Or A Performance Securing Declaration In Lieu Of The The Allowable Forms Of Performance Security, Subject To The Terms And Conditions Of Issued Gppb Guidelines12 For This Purpose; We Are Not Participating, As Bidders, In More Than One Bid In This Bidding Process, Other Than Alternative Offers In Accordance With The Bidding Documents; We Understand That This Bid, Together With Your Written Acceptance Thereof Included In Your Notification Of Award, Shall Constitute A Binding Contract Between Us, Until A Formal Contract Is Prepared And Executed; And We Understand That You Are Not Bound To Accept The Lowest Calculated Bid Or Any Other Bid That You May Receive. We Likewise Certify/confirm That The Undersigned, Is The Duly Authorized Representative Of The Bidder, And Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For The [name Of Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity]. We Acknowledge That Failure To Sign Each And Every Page Of This Bid Form, Including The Bill Of Quantities, Shall Be A Ground For The Rejection Of Our Bid. Name: Legal Capacity: Signature: Duly Authorized To Sign The Bid For And Behalf Of: Date: Bid Securing Declaration Form [shall Be Submitted With The Bid If Bidder Opts To Provide This Form Of Bid Security] Republic Of The Philippines) City Of ) S.s. Bid Securing Declaration Project Identification No.: [insert Number] To: [insert Name And Address Of The Procuring Entity] I/we, The Undersigned, Declare That: I/we Understand That, According To Your Conditions, Bids Must Be Supported By A Bid Security, Which May Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration. I/we Accept That: (a) I/we Will Be Automatically Disqualified From Bidding For Any Procurement Contract With Any Procuring Entity For A Period Of Two (2) Years Upon Receipt Of Your Blacklisting Order; And, (b) I/we Will Pay The Applicable Fine Provided Under Section 6 Of The Guidelines On The Use Of Bid Securing Declaration, Within Fifteen (15) Days From Receipt Of The Written Demand By The Procuring Entity For The Commission Of Acts Resulting To The Enforcement Of The Bid Securing Declaration Under Sections 23.1(b), 34.2, 40.1 And 69.1, Except 69.1(f),of The Irr Of Ra No. 9184; Without Prejudice To Other Legal Action The Government May Undertake. I/we Understand That This Bid Securing Declaration Shall Cease To Be Valid On The Following Circumstances: Upon Expiration Of The Bid Validity Period, Or Any Extension Thereof Pursuant To Your Request; I Am/we Are Declared Ineligible Or Post-disqualified Upon Receipt Of Your Notice To Such Effect, And (i) I/we Failed To Timely File A Request For Reconsideration Or (ii) I/we Filed A Waiver To Avail Of Said Right; And I Am/we Are Declared The Bidder With The Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, And I/we Have Furnished The Performance Security And Signed The Contract. In Witness Whereof, I/we Have Hereunto Set My/our Hand/s This Day Of [month] [year] At [place Of Execution]. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice] Omnibus Sworn Statement (revised) [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Republic Of The Philippines) City/municipality Of ) S.s. Affidavit I, [name Of Affiant], Of Legal Age, [civil Status], [nationality], And Residing At [address Of Affiant], After Having Been Duly Sworn In Accordance With Law, Do Hereby Depose And State That: [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] I Am The Sole Proprietor Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am The Duly Authorized And Designated Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] As The Owner And Sole Proprietor, Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder], I Have Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached Duly Notarized Special Power Of Attorney; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached [state Title Of Attached Document Showing Proof Of Authorization (e.g., Duly Notarized Secretary’s Certificate, Board/partnership Resolution, Or Special Power Of Attorney, Whichever Is Applicable;)]; [name Of Bidder] Is Not “blacklisted” Or Barred From Bidding By The Government Of The Philippines Or Any Of Its Agencies, Offices, Corporations, Or Local Government Units, Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution Whose Blacklisting Rules Have Been Recognized By The Government Procurement Policy Board, By Itself Or By Relation, Membership, Association, Affiliation, Or Controlling Interest With Another Blacklisted Person Or Entity As Defined And Provided For In The Uniform Guidelines On Blacklisting; Each Of The Documents Submitted In Satisfaction Of The Bidding Requirements Is An Authentic Copy Of The Original, Complete, And All Statements And Information Provided Therein Are True And Correct; [name Of Bidder] Is Authorizing The Head Of The Procuring Entity Or Its Duly Authorized Representative(s) To Verify All The Documents Submitted; [select One, Delete The Rest:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] The Owner Or Sole Proprietor Is Not Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Partnership Or Cooperative:] None Of The Officers And Members Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Corporation Or Joint Venture:] None Of The Officers, Directors, And Controlling Stockholders Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [name Of Bidder] Complies With Existing Labor Laws And Standards; And [name Of Bidder] Is Aware Of And Has Undertaken The Responsibilities As A Bidder In Compliance With The Philippine Bidding Documents, Which Includes: Carefully Examining All Of The Bidding Documents; Acknowledging All Conditions, Local Or Otherwise, Affecting The Implementation Of The Contract; Making An Estimate Of The Facilities Available And Needed For The Contract To Be Bid, If Any; And Inquiring Or Securing Supplemental/bid Bulletin(s) Issued For The [name Of The Project]. [name Of Bidder] Did Not Give Or Pay Directly Or Indirectly, Any Commission, Amount, Fee, Or Any Form Of Consideration, Pecuniary Or Otherwise, To Any Person Or Official, Personnel Or Representative Of The Government In Relation To Any Procurement Project Or Activity. In Case Advance Payment Was Made Or Given, Failure To Perform Or Deliver Any Of The Obligations And Undertakings In The Contract Shall Be Sufficient Grounds To Constitute Criminal Liability For Swindling (estafa) Or The Commission Of Fraud With Unfaithfulness Or Abuse Of Confidence Through Misappropriating Or Converting Any Payment Received By A Person Or Entity Under An Obligation Involving The Duty To Deliver Certain Goods Or Services, To The Prejudice Of The Public And The Government Of The Philippines Pursuant To Article 315 Of Act No. 3815 S. 1930, As Amended, Or The Revised Penal Code. In Witness Whereof, I Have Hereunto Set My Hand This Day Of , 20 At , Philippines. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice]

Details: Description Description Unit Qty Full Mission Bridge Simulator Dnv Class A Lot 1 1.1 Features And Application The Bridge Simulator Should Provide A Realistic, Ship-like Environment Based On Real Hardware Consoles And High-quality Visualization. The Systems Include Major Components Such As Conning, Radar/ Arpa And Ecdis, Gmdss, Navigation Equipment, Bearing Finder, Steering Control Console, Engine Control, Auto Pilot System, Overhead Display, Etc. The Simulator Can Be Utilized To A Variety Of Navigation Techniques Under Different Environmental Conditions, Serving A Wide Range Of Purposes As Follows: 1. Control Of The Ship While Navigating In The Operational And Emergency Modes In Various Weather Conditions With The Possibility Of Setting Wind And Current Parameters; 2. Analysis Of The Above-water Situation In Day And Night Conditions; In Poor Visibility By Visible Navigation Lights And Information Received From Radar/ Arpa; 3. Use Of The Electronic Chart-based Navigational Information System (ecdis); 4. Practical Use Of Radio Equipment And Global Maritime Distress And Safety System (gmdss) Facilities; 5. Application Of The International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea; 6. Ship Control During Anchoring And Mooring; 7. Ship Control During Towing Operations; 8. Ship Control During Maneuvers "man Overboard"; 9. Rational Methods Of Ship Control In Case Of Main Engines (me) And Ship And Navigation Equipment Failures During Movement; 10. Eye Survey Of Above-water And Radar Situation, Determination Of Vessel Movement Elements; 11. Navigational Situation Assessment By Visual Observation During Daytime, By Lights At Night Time And By Observation Of Transmission Of Echo Signals On Ppi Simulators In Conditions Of Limited Visibility; 12. Visual Determination Of Vessel Movement Patterns, Maneuvering Capabilities And Dimensions; 13. Selection And Execution Of Collision Avoidance Maneuvers In Open Sea, During Night And In Limited Visibility Conditions Using Radar/arpa; 14. Evaluation Of Accuracy Of Primary And Secondary Information Received From Arpa, Consideration Of Factors Affecting Accuracy Of Arpa And Delay In Formation Of Secondary Radar Information; 15. Orientation Of Ships In Complex Navigation Conditions In Daytime And Nighttime And In Conditions Of Limited Visibility; 16. Use Of Ecdis For Preliminary And Executive Plotting, Practicing Correct Response To Emergency Signals Produced By Ecdis, Solution Of Chart-metric Tasks And Ensuring Safety Of Navigation With The Use Of Information Received From Ecdis; 17. Use Of Basic Capabilities Of Marine Mobile Service And Marine Mobile Satellite Service. 1.2 The Bridge Simulator Can Be Used For The Stcw Convention Competency Requirements And Simulation Objectives. The Following Are The Items Of Navigator Competence Related To Navigation Bridge Operations That Can Be Evaluated Using The Bridge Simulator. In Addition, The Following International Standards Have Been Considered In The Development Of The Full Mission Ship Control Simulator: In Addition, The Following International Standards Have Been Considered In The Development Of The Full Mission Ship Control Simulator: Stcw Reference/competence Item/module Used Table A-ii/1.1 Plan And Execute A Passage And Determine Vessel’s Location Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.2 Maintain A Safe Navigational Watch Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Visualization Channel. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/1.3 Use Radar And Arpa To Maintain Navigational Safety Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa Imitator. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.4 Use Ecdis To Maintain Navigational Safety Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Bearing Station. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.5 Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls (alarms Panels). Table A-ii/1.6 Respond To A Distress Signal At Sea Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Navaids Simulation Module (ais). Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa. Ecdis Module. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/1.8 Transmit And Receive Information By Means Of Visual Signals Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Signaling System. Conning Display. Table A-ii/1.9 Maneuver The Ship Main Instructor And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/2.1 Plan Voyage And Navigate Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Table A-ii/2.2 Determine Position And Accuracy Of Resulting Position Fixes By Any Means Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Bearing Station. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/2.3 Determine And Consider Compass Errors Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Bearing Station. Conning Display. Table A-ii/2.4 Coordinate Search And Rescue Operations Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Sound System. Visualization Channel. Radar/arpa Imitator. Conning Display. Table A-ii/2.5 Establish Watchkeeping Procedures And Arrangements Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Exchange Data Module For Ibs. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Gmdss Support Module. Sound System. Visualization Channel. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module (gps/dgps, Loran-c, Ais, Ssas). Ecdis Module. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/2.6 Maintain Navigational Safety By Using Information From Navigational Equipment And Systems To Aid In Command Decision Making Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module (gps/dgps, Loran-c, Ais). Ecdis Module And Ecs Radar Overlay. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/2.7 Maintain Navigational Safety By Using Ecdis And Related Navigational Systems To Aid In Command Decision Making Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. "table A-ii/2.10 Maneuver And Handle The Vessel In All Conditions Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module." "table A-ii/2.11 Remote Control Of Power Plant And Engineering Systems And Services Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Main Engine Control Module. Auxiliary Systems Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module." Table A-ii/2.11 Remote Control Of Power Plant And Engineering Systems And Services Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Main Engine Control Module. Auxiliary Systems Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/3.1 Plan And Execute Coastal Passages And Determine Position Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/3.2 Maintain A Safe Navigational Watch Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Visualization Channel. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. "table A-ii/3.3 Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls (alarm Panels). Table A-ii/3.4 Respond To A Distress Signal At Sea Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Navaids Simulation Module (ais). Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa. Ecdis Module. Audio Logger." "table A-ii/3.5 Maneuver The Vessel And Operate Small Ship Power Plants Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module." "table A-ii/4.1 Operate The Ship And Follow The Helmsman’s Orders In English Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/4.2 Monitor The Situation With Sight And Hearing Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Visualization System. Sound System. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/5.2 Participate In Berthing, Anchoring And Other Moorings Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Anchoring Module. Mooring Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module." "table A-v/4-1.2 Monitor And Enforce Compliance With Legal Requirements Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-v/4-1.3 Apply Safe Work Practices, Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module." "table A-v/4-1.4 Ensure Compliance With Pollution Prevention Requirements And Prevent Environmental Hazards Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Engine Control Multi Touch Display. Evaluation And Assessment Module." "table A-v/4.2.3maintain The Safety Of The Ship’s Crew And Passengers And Maintain Life- Saving, Firefighting, And Other Safety Systems In Good Working Order. " Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Engine Control Multi Touch Display. "steering Multi Touch Display For Control Of Autopilot And Steering. Evaluation And Assessment Module. In Addition, The Following International Standards Have Been Considered In The Development Of The Full Mission Ship Control Simulator:" "1. International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea, 1972; 2. International Convention On The Safety Of Life At Sea, 1974; 3. International Convention On Standards For Training, Certification And Watchkeeping, 1978, 1995 As Amended In 2010; 4. Automatic Radar Plotting Aids Course. Regulations And Guide (department Of Trade, London 1981); 5. Imo Resolution A. 477(12). Performance Standards For Radar Equipment. Adopted On November 19, 1981; 6. Imo Resolution A. 482(12); 7. Imo Resolution A. 483(12); 8. Imo Resolution A. 823(19). Performance Standards For Automatic Radar Plotting Aids. Adopted On November 23, 1995; 9. Imo Resolution Msc64(67). Recommendation On Performance Standards For Radar Equipment. Adopted On December 04, 1996. 10. Imo Resolution Msc232(82). Adopted On December 05, 2006.""" 1.3 Ship Motion Simulation Software The Ship Motion Simulation Program Contains Simulations Of Various Effects That Cannot Be Evaluated Separately From The Functionality Of A Particular Configuration: 1. Own Ships Motion; 2. Target Ships Motion; 3. Own Tugs Motion; 4. Target Tugs Motion; 5. Mooring And Towing Lines; 6. Rescue Objects; 7. Land Objects; 8. Scene Objects; 9. Weather Effects; 10. Miscellaneous. General: 1. 6 Dof Ship Motion Equation; 2. Hull Hydrodynamics Model; 3. Hull Aerodynamics Model; 4. Propulsion Plant Model; 5. Thruster Model; 6. Rudder Model; 7. Engine Model; 8. Model Of The Environmental Influence (wind, Sea, Current); 9. Shallow Water Influence Model; 10. Roll/pitch Wave Model; 11. Model Of The Distributed Current Effect; 12. Model Of Hydrodynamic Interaction With Another Ship And Water Area Boundary; 13. Multi-functional Autopilot Model; 14. Displacement Ship And Tug Models; 15. Optional: The Following Types Of Passive Vessel And Aerial Target Models: Hovercraft, Hydrofoils, Airplanes And Helicopters; Models Are Based On Real Prototypes And Adjusted Based On Sea And Tank Tests Data. Forces: 1. Forces And Moments Of Hydrodynamic And Aerodynamic Resistance Of The Ship’s Hull; 2. Force And Moment Of Impinging Flow On The Rudder Plane; 3. Force And Moment Of The Propeller; 4. Forces And Moments Of Bow And Stern Thrusters; 5. Forces And Moments Of Hydrodynamic Interaction With Other Vessels And Water Area Boundaries (bottom, Shoal, Canal, Walls); 6. Wind Forces And Moments; 7. Forces And Moments Of Field Currents. Effects: 1. Effect Of Shallow Water On Hull Drag Force (added Mass); 2. Effect Of Shallow Water On Reduction Of Propeller Thrust; 3. Effect Of Shallow Water On Reduction Of Steering Capacity; 4. Effect Of Shallow Water On Trim And Bank Changes; 5. Hydrodynamic Forces And Moments Caused By Passing Near Other Ships And Water Area Boundaries (uneven Seabed, Shoal, Mooring Wall); 6. Hydrodynamic Forces Caused By The Propeller Jet Of Another Vessel; 7. Vessel Suction Caused By The Impact Of The Propeller Jet On The Mooring Wall; 8. Mechanical Forces And Moments Caused By Interaction With Other Ships And Water Area Boundaries (mooring Walls); 9. Ship Collision; 10. Collision Between Ship And Mooring Walls Or Aids To Navigation; 11. Hard Grounding; 12. Soft Grounding. Propulsion Types: 1. Fpp; 2. Cpp; 3. Tunnel Thruster. Engines: 1. Low And Medium Rpm Reversible Diesel Engine (reversing With Compressed Air); 2. Medium And High Rpm Non-reversible Diesel Engine (reversing With Reversing Clutch) Steering Systems: 1. Balance Rudder; 2. Steering Nozzle; 3. Z-drive. 1.2         Ship Models The Bridge Simulator, Six Degrees Of Freedom Models Are Provided Not Only For Own Ship, But Also For Target Ships. Mathematical Modeling Of The Motion Of Each Ship Should Be Based On Integration Of A System Of Up To 12 Differential Equations Describing The Spatial Motion Of A Solid Body With 6 Degrees Of Freedom In A Fluid. 1. Wind Effect Modeling Includes: 2. Calculations Of Wind Center And Area Varying With Roll/pitch; 3. Calculations Of Forces And Moments As Wind Speed And Relative Bearing Change; 4. Calculations Of Resistance To These Forces Exerted By The Underwater Part Of The Ship's Hull. 5. Wave Effect Modeling Includes The Following Calculations: 6. Surge; 7. Sway; 8. Heave; 9. Yaw; 10. Roll; 11. Pitch. Current Effect Modeling Includes: 1. Calculations Of The Instantaneous Value Of The Total Current Vector And Its Application Point In The Underwater Part Of The Ship's Hull; 2. Calculation Of The Corresponding Force And Its Momentum; 3. Calculation Of Water Resistance To This Force From The Opposite Board. Shallow Water Effect Modeling Includes: 1. Speed Reduction Calculations; 2. Calculations Of Deterioration Of Turning Characteristics; 3. Calculations Of Trim Changes Depending On The Ship's Speed And Depth Under The Keel (squat). Bank Effect (in General The Channel Walls) Simulation Consists Of The Following Calculations: 1. The Gradient Of The Bottom Rise In The Direction Of The Ship's Motion 2. Additional Arising Water Pressure Fields On The Ship's Hull; 3. Corresponding Total Forces And Moments. Modeling The Effects Of Interaction With Another Includes The Following Calculations: 1. Increased And Weakened Water Pressure Fields Occurring Around The Hulls Of Both Ships As A Function Of Approach Distance And Relative Speed; 2. Corresponding Total Forces And Moments, As Well As Their Application Points. The Library Of Own Ship Mathematical Models Should Include 55 Active Ships And Simulates The Movement Of Up To 100 Target Ships (60 Different Types, Jet Foil Hovercraft Helicopters And Airplanes) That Are Suitable For Training Purposes. The Library Of Own Ship Mathematical Models For The Bridge Simulator Should Include Tug Models That Realistically Simulate Tug Assistance When Maneuvering And Escorting. Tugs Can Be Controlled By The Instructor (automatically) And The Operator. The Simulator Includes The Ability To Simulate Pulling, Pushing, Reposition Towing And Escorting. The Tug Model Is Affected By The Own Vessel’s Speed, And As Such, Includes A Degradation Of Performance Depending On The Type Of Tug Being Simulated. It Is Possible To Work With Both Conventional And Tractor Tugs With Different Characteristics And Response Times. 1.5 The Bridge Simulator Visual System The Visual System Has An Optional Bird’s Eye Or Normal View, And The Operator’s Visual System Has A Normal View. In The Window The Instructor Can Move The Camera And Set The Yaw And Height Of The Camera. The Operator Can Activate The Binocular Mode In The Visualization System And Control The Zoom Factor, The Direction Along The Horizon And The Vertical View Of The Flight. Visual Scene Content: 1. 3d Terrestrial Surface; 2. Controlling The Binoculars' Focal Length Settings; 3. Static Shore Objects; 4. Dynamic Coastal Objects (cranes, Vehicles, Trains, Radar Antenna Units); 5. Exercise Objects (ships, Tugboats, Helicopters, Aircrafts, Barges, Bollards, Mooring And Towing Lines, Ground Objects, Buoys); 6. Sar Objects (life Raft, Life Buoy, Mob, Sart, Helicopters, Aircrafts, Floating Debris, Damaged Tanker, Dye Marker, Oil Slick), International Flags And Pennants, Distress Signals (rockets, Parachute, Red Flare, Buoyant Smoke); 7. Aids To Navigation (buoys, Lighthouses); 8. Lights (navigational, Cultural Lights); 9. Visual Effect Of Icing; 10. Detailed Own Ship’s Bow; 11. Shadows For Vessels And Scene Objects. Sky: 1. Display Of Stars, Major Asterisms, The Moon, The Sun (according To Time Of Day And Geographic Coordinates), Clouds. Sea: 1. 3d Wavy Sea Surface; 2. Ripples; 3. Reflection Of The Sky, Sun, Clouds In The Sea; 4. Water Disturbances: Wake, Bow Waves, Foam From Breaking Waves. Weather 1. Precipitation; 2. Fog; 3. Rain Clouds; 4. Lightnings. 1.6    Environmental And Weather Training The Bridge Simulated Environment Consists Of: 1. Region State Window; 2. Depth Set; 3. Stream; 4. Ground Quality; 5. Wave Condition; 6. Setting The Course And Speed Of Wind; 7. Setting The Strength Of The Sea Disturbance; 8. Setting Visibility Distance; 9. Setting Local Time; 10. Changing The Reflection And Color Of The Water; 11. Changing The Intensity Of Rain, Snow, Thunderstorm And Global Cloud Cover; 12. Setting Coordinates, Heading Speed And Density Of Falls And Clouds. 1.7 Operation Training The Bridge Simulator Shall Allow For Training And Certification Of Watch Officers, Chief Officers, Captains, And Pilots Serving On Commercial And Fishing Vessels Of 500 Gross Tonnage Or More In Accordance With The Requirements Of The Imo Stcw Convention And Model Courses: • 1.07 – Radar Navigation, Radar Plotting And Use Of Arpa; • 1.08 – Radar, Arpa, Bridge Teamwork And Search & Rescue; • 1.22 – Ship Simulator And Bridge Teamwork; • 1.27 – Operational Use Of Electronic Chart Display And Information System (ecdis); • 1.32 – Operational Use Of Integrated Bridge System; • 1.34 – Operational Use Of Ais; • 2.02 – Maritime Sar Coordinator; • 3.11 – Marine Accident And Incident Investigation With Compendium; Investigation With Compendium; • 3.19 – Ship Security Officer; • 3.23 – Actions To Be Taken To Prevent Acts Of Piracy And Armed Robbery; • 7.01 – Master And Chief Mate; • 7.03 – Officer In Charge Of Navigational Watch; • 7.05 –7.06 – Officer In Charge Of Navigational Watch Of Fishing Vessel; • 1.25 – General Operator’s Certificate For The Gmdss; • 1.26 – Restricted Operator’s Certificate For The Gmds 1.8 Operating Environment The Bridge Simulator Shall Contain 40 Sailing Areas As Well As Sub-tasks For Each Area. This Makes It Possible To Control The Motion Of All Active And Target Ships. The Simulator Should Be Designed To Manage The Training Complex, Create (design) The Exercises, Perform The Exercises In Real Time, Monitor The Exercise Execution By Operator Workstations, Change Environmental Conditions And Sailing Circumstances, Enter The Own Ship Failure Variables, Documenting And Archiving The Position And Activity Of The Ship Involved In The Exercise. 1.9 Simulated Exercise Areas Detailed 3-d Databases With High-resolution True-color Textures Can Be Displayed By Visualization Systems. The Spatial Terrain, 3-d Radar Model And Floating Object Models Support Water Level Modeling (tidal Effect). The Database Can Include Over 1000 Models Navigational, Cultural, And Industrial Objects And Consists Of More Than 500,000 Triangles.the Databases Should Be Supplied With A Set Page | 24 Technical Description Of C-map Vector Electronic Charts Matching The Database Content For Display On Ecdis And The Instructor Workstation. Possible Applications (but Not Limited To Those Listed): • Pilot Training; • Mooring Training; • General Navigation Training; • Consulting And Port Construction; • Demonstration And Gaming Purposes; Object Library May Include (but Not Limited To Those Listed): • • 3-d Underwater And Surface Terrain; • Aids To Navigation: Buoys, Lighthouses With Light Characteristics According To The British Admiralty List Of Lights And Vector Electronic Chart, Unique Labels (numbering), Shapes (top Marks), Audio Signals And Radar Beacons; • Models Of Port Facilities – Cranes, Tanks, Chimneys, Elevators, Containers, Vehicles, Towers Etc. (from A Library Of More Than 500 Objects); • Moving Targets. • Unique And Standard Models Of Buildings And Monuments, Bridges With A Night View Representation. • Piers, Jetties, And Bollard Barrels For Mooring Training. • Exercise Areas For The Radar And Visualization Scenes Should Be Available From The Areas Library. 1.9.1   Sample Exercise Areas "1. Rostock, Germany 2. Bosphorus Strait, Turkey 3. Strait Of Gibraltar 4. Tangier, Morocco 5. Accra Tema, Ghana 6. Tokyo, Japan 7. Jakarta, Indonesia 8. Singapore, Singapore 9. Vungtau Thivai, Vietnam 10. Conakry, Guinea 11. St. Petersburg, Russia 12. Kozmino, Russia" 1.10 Instructor Workstation The Instructor Workstation Is An Integral Part Of The Simulator And Is Designed To Control The Training Complex, Design (develop) Exercises, Perform Exercises In Real Time, Control Exercise Performance By Trainees, Change Environmental Conditions And Sailing Circumstances, As Well As Enter Own Ship Failure Variables, Document, And Archive The Position And Activity Of The Ship Involved In The Exercise. The Instructor Station Software Should Contain Navigation Areas As Well As Sub-tasks For Each Area, Allowing The Control Of All Active Vessels And Target Ships. 1.10.1 Main Instructor Control And Monitoring Module The Software Modules Should Provide A Possibility To Flexibly Configure The Required Bridge Configuration. General: 1. An Integrated Application For Exercise Editing, Conducting And Debriefing; 2. Highly Accurate Data Representation Based On Vector Diagrams (ability To Automatically Load All Diagrams Related To The Selected Game Area); 3. Tools For Creating Exercises And Automatic Competency Assessment Scenarios; 4. Control Of Simulator Session(s); 5. Continuous Automatic Recording Of Data During Exercise (main, Audio And Video Log Files); 6. Real Time, Slow Time, And Fast Time Modes; 7. Ability To Display And Print A New Pilot Card And A Table Of Maneuvering Characteristics Of The Ship; 8. Working With Measuring Tools: ◦ Ability To Set Erbl; ◦ Ability To Attach, Move Or Delete Erbl During An Exercise; 9. Ability To Attach Sart To The Life Raft; 10. Ability To Move Own Ship During Exercise Without Grounding Or Collision; 11. Ability To Apply Virtual Tug Force To 8 Points Of The Vessel’s Hull In Any Direction; 12. Display Of Actual Ship's Contours; 13. Continuous Display Of Parameters Of Vessel Movement And Environment Conditions: Course And Speed Of The Vessel, Course Over The Ground, Transversal Component Of Speed On The Bow And On The Stern, Gyro Heading, Rate Of Turn, Speed And Direction Of The Current And Wind, Height And Direction Of A Wave, Depth; 14. Independent Instructor Control For Wind And Swell Components Of The Wave; 15. Ability To Set Sea State Spectrum: ◦ Pierson-moskowitz; ◦ Phillips; ◦ Ittc (international Towing Tank Conference); ◦ Jonswap (joint North Sea Wave Project); ◦ User. 16. Ability To Exclude Hydrodynamic Interaction With Mooring Walls In The Required Area; 17. Ability To Create A Template Containing A Set Of Objects (ships), Save And Use This Template In Other Exercises; 18. Ability To Save Environment Settings As A Template And Load A Previously Saved Template In Any Exercise And Area; 19. Mooring Operations: ◦ Ability To Set The Rope Material; ◦ Ability To Set The Initial State Of The Mooring Winch (render, Slack Away, Stop); ◦ Ability To Set Mooring Winch Parameters (speed, Pulling Force, Holding Force); ◦ Ability To Operate The Mooring Winch At The Instructor Workplace. 20. Anchor Operations: ◦ Ability To Set User Ground Type With Required Anchor Holding Force Coefficients; ◦ Display Of Anchor Position On The Instructor's Chart On The Ground. 21. Control Of Navigational Lights And Shapes: ◦ Ability To Control The Navigational Lights; ◦ Ability To Switch On/off Deck Lights On Target Ships. 22. Loading/discharging Of Own Ship During Exercises; 23. Weather Conditions Manager: ◦ Ability To Set Predefined Weather Conditions By Beaufort Number (wind, Wave, Whitecaps And Foam, 3d Clouds, Cloud Layer, Visibility) On The Fly; ◦ Ability To Set Customized Weather Conditions; ◦ Visual Effects: Rain And Snow (low, Medium, High), Lightning, Reflection, Translucency, Sea With White Caps, Foam, Splashes, Bow-wave; ◦ Separate Settings For Wind Wave And Swell; ◦ Manual Control Of Wind Direction And Strength; ◦ Adjustment Of Atmospheric Parameters – Temperature, Humidity, Pressure; ◦ Ability To Use Thunderstorm, Precipitation; ◦ Automatic Calculation Of The Position Of The Sun, Major Stars (up To 100) And Constellations, The Angle And Phase Of The Moon; ◦ Ability To Set Wave Spectrum Type: Pierson-moskowitz; Jonswap (joint North Sea Wave Project); Phillips; User-defined; ◦ Ability To Use Thunderstorm, Precipitation. 24. Rcc, Ship And Coast Stating Assignment; 25. Log Module With Possibility To Print Out And Create Archives; 26. Window For Listening/monitoring Of The Radiotelephone Traffic Including Possibilities To Interfere With Radiotelephone Traffic; 27. Ability To Introduce Background Noise From A List And Instrument Faults To The Trainee Stations. 28. Ability To Change Names, Call Signs, Mmsi, Telex Numbers And Inmarsat Mobile Numbers Of All Emulated Ship Stations And Coast Station According To The Needs Of Different Exercises; 29. Electronic Chart With Vessel Position Indication And The Ability To Change Position, Course And Speed; 30. Ability To Display And Instantly Change Trainee Station Positions On The Electronic Map For Search And Rescue (sar) Exercises; 31. Full Monitoring Of Any Trainee Workstation – The Ability To Monitor The Status Of Each Gmdss Unit And Listen To The Radio Traffic Of Each Trainee Station; 32. Connection To An External Printer; 33. Connection To An Active Speaker For Simultaneous Viewing Of Channels; 34. Providing Functions Of A Coast Telex Or Telephone Subscriber, Coast Radio Station And Rcc Operator From The Log Window; 35. Status Window For All Instruments At Any Workstation; 36. Ability To Log Communication And Trainee Actions For Playback And Later Review; 37. Database Of Coastal Stations, Navtex And Msi Stations And Inmarsat Shore-based Stations Plotted On The Chart; 38. Information About The Gmdss Sea Areas On The Chart; 39. Approximate Estimation Of Radio Wave Propagation In The Selected Frequency Range; 40. Evaluation And Assessment Module; 41. Navtex Functionality: ◦ Ability To Send Navtex Messages On Behalf Of A Navtex Station; ◦ Ability To Edit And Use The Navtex Station Used-defined List; ◦ Ability To Save And Use Navtex Message Templates. 42. “intercom” Panel. To Monitor Intercom Communication, Execute Voice Messages From The Instructor's Side. 43. Vhf Radio Station Module. To Monitor Vhf Communication, Send Voice Messages From The Instructor’s Side, Play Pre-recorded *.wav Files. 44. Coastal Radio Station Module. Screen Layout: 45. Use Of The Mouse Wheel For Chart Centering And Scaling; 46. On-screen Display Of Mooring Walls And Piers; 47. On-screen Display Of Actual Contours Of Any Ship; 48. On-screen Display Of The Object’s Route Line And Its Actual Track; 49. On-screen Display Of The True And Relative Speed Vectors; 50. Selectable Display Mode: True Motion, Relative Motion, Course Up Or North Up; 51. Display Of Prompt And Other Information In The Status Bar: ◦ Bearing And Distance From The Current Cursor On-chart Position To The Reference Point; ◦ Coordinates Of The Current Cursor On-chart Position; ◦ Depth In The Current Cursor Position; ◦ Current Exercise Time (absolute And Relative). 52. Displaying Of Object Tracks: Contour Or Point With Selectable Resolution, Track History And Time Stamp; 53. Displaying Of Walls And Piers; 54. Use Of A Mouse Wheel For Chart Centering And Scaling; 55. User Configurable Workplace; 56. Different Panels For The Control And Monitoring Of The Exercise Fulfillment: 57. Setting Navigational Equipment Parameters And Faults: Radar, Gps, Loran C, Log, Gyro, Echo Sounder, Uais; 58. Setting The Exercise Weather And Bathymetric Conditions: Global And Local Zones, Import Of Tide And Current Databases (nts-pro 6100 (ecdis)); 59. Observing Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Ship Info Panel, Cpatcpa Panel, Events Panel; 60. Control Of Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Direct Control Of Steering And Propulsion Systems, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; 61. Setting Faults Of Navigational Equipment, Steering And Propulsion System, Fire And General Alarms; 62. Continuous Data Logging During Exercises; 63. Playback Of Recorded Exercises In Real And Fast-time Modes; 64. Performing Preliminary Exercises On The Map To Check Their Suitability For Training On The Simulator; 65. Distress Signals (flare, Smoke Signals, Dye Markers); 66. Adding New Target Ships; 67. Changing Weather Conditions; 68. Moving Buoys, Turning Off Lights On Them And Hiding Them On Both The Visualization System And Radar; 69. Control Of Automatic Tugboats On Commands From The Bridge Or From The Instructor; 70. Generating And Printing Exercise Reports. ◦ Reports Panel – To Form And Print Exercise Fulfillment Reports; ◦ Ship Info Panel – To Display Courses, Longitudinal And Transverse Speeds, Rates Of Turn For All The Ships Involved In The Exercise. ◦ Evaluation And Assessment Module Panel; ◦ Target Panel – To Control Vessel Target And Flight And Sar Objects; ◦ Objects Panel – To Promptly Select An Object On The Chart From The List Of All The Objects Available In The Exercise; ◦ Flags Panel – To Hoist/lower Ics Flag Signals On Any Of The Ships, Including Ability To Set And Keep Flag Templates ◦ Events Panel – For The Automatic Recording Of Any Important Events Related To The Incorrect Trainee Actions; ◦ Flash Light Panel – To Send Light Signals From Target Vessels, Including Automated Translation Into Morse Code; ◦ Magnetic Deviation Panel – To Configure The Magnetic Deviation Panel For The Vessels, Participating In The Exercise, Save The Panel And Apply Desired Template To Any Own Vessel, Print The Magnetic Deviation Table; ◦ Procedural Alarms Panel – For Defining User Set Of Alarm For Dedicated Vessels. Exercise Objects: 1. Collection Of 6-dof Ship Models; 2. Sar Objects: Life Raft, Mob, Damaged Tanker, Sart, Damaged Burning Tanker, Search And Rescue Transponder (sart), Emergency Position 3. Indicating Radio Beacon (epirb), Oil Slick, Helicopter Target, Aircraft Target, Floating Debris; 4. Mooring Objects: Bollard On Any Of Mooring Walls, Bitts On Another Ship, Bollard On Any Of Mooring Walls, Bitts On Another Ship, Mooring Buoy Of Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring (calm), Mooring Buoy Of Single Anchor Leg Mooring (salm); 5. Coastal Objects: Moving Cranes, Cars, Trains, Radar Antennae, Rocket Launcher, Hangar, Cistern, Signal Port Station Tableau, Etc.: Visual And Radar Images; 6. Global And Local Weather Zones: Wind, Current, Sea State, Visibility, Precipitations; 7. Fishing Objects: Fish Shoals, Underwater Pinnacles, Fishing Buoys, Lines And Zones; 8. Sound Velocity In The Water Affecting The Performance Of Hydroacoustic Fish Finder Equipment; 9. Rain Clouds; 10. Fog Areas; 11. External Tide And Current Data (c-map Databases); 12. Display Of Wave And Current Strength And Direction At Any Point In The Exercise; 13. Adjustment Of The Ship Model Characteristics; 14. Setting Operation Modes Of Navigational Aids, Their Errors And Malfunctions: Radar, Gps, Loran-c, Log, Gyro, Sounder, Uais; 15. Performing Preliminary Exercises On The Map To Check Their Suitability For Training On The Simulator; • Control Of Own Ships And Targets On The Vessel: Direct Control Of Steering Gear And Propulsion, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; • Control Of External Forces On The Chart (virtual Tug Force) Applied To 8 Points Of The Ship Hull In Any Horizontal Direction Along The Waterline; • Saving An Exercise With Initial Conditions At Any Stage Of Playback. Trainee Mission Explaining: • Loading A Previously Created Exercise On A Chart; • Playing The Exercise On The Chart To Explain The Task; • Uploading A Sample Log Of The Same Exercise To Explain The Correct Actions. Simulator Session(s) Control: • Exercise(s) Start, Pause, Re-start After The Pause, Stop On Bridge(s); • Setting The Initial Position For Own Ships; • Entering Faults Of Navigation Systems, Steering Gear, Propulsion Plant, Fire And General Alarm; • Ability To Set Faults Of Navigational Equipment; • Pulling Apart Ships That Have Collided Or Run Aground; • Control Of Target Vessels, Hoisting Flags Of The International Code Of Signals, Turning Their Sound Signals On And Turning Their Lights On/off; 16. Ics-69 Flags (international Flags And Pennants): • 26 Alphabet Flags; • 10 Numeral Pennants; • 3 Substitute Pennants; • 1 Answering Pennant. • Control Of Daylight Shapes On Vessels; • Distress Signals (flare, Smoke Signals, Dye Markers); • Changing Weather Conditions; • Adding New Target Ships; • Moving Buoys, Turning Off Lights On Them And Hiding Them On Both Visualization System And Radar; • Controlling Automatic Tugboats On Commands From The Bridge Or From The Instructor; • Using The Report Generator Wizard Tool For Printing. Own Ship Simulation Data: On Request, The Following Readings And Characteristics Of The Own Ship Are Displayed On The Monitor Of The Instructor's Workstation: § Vessel Number, Designation And Model Type; § Main Dimensions; § Displacement; § Ship’s Time; § Ship’s Gyro-compass Course Over Ground And Through Water; § Ship’s Magnetic Compass Course Over The Ground And Through Water; § Longitudinal And Transverse Components Of Speed Through Water; § Ship Speed Over Ground And Through Water; § Bow Velocity And Stern Velocity Over Ground; § Heeling, Trim And Center Of Gravity Elevation; § Angular Speed Of Ship Turns; § Current Rudder Blade Position And “put The Rudder Over” Command; § Current Position Of Propeller(s) And Pitch Change Command; § Current Rotation Speed Of Propeller(s); § Current Load Of Main Engine(s); § Thrusters Operating Mode; § Geographic And Cartesian Coordinates Of Vessel Location; § Distance Traveled By The Vessel From The Exercise Start Point; § Depth Under The Ship’s Keel; § Distance And Bearing Relative To Any Active Ship; § Cpa And Tcpa From Any Ship To Other Vessels. Passive Ships (target-ships) Simulation Data: • On Request, The Following Indicators And Motion Characteristics Of The Target Ship Are Displayed On The Instructor's Workstation: • Target Ship Number And Type; • Cog; • Sog; • Geographic And Cartesian Position Coordinates; • Distance And Bearing Relative To Any Active Ship; • The Coordinates Of The Route Change Point And The Time To Pass That Point. Evaluation And Assessment Module: The Evaluation And Assessments Module Of The Nts-pro 6100 Is Designed For The Evaluation And Assessment Of A Range Of Predefined Assessment Parameters From The Following Categories: • Planning And Conducting A Passage And Determine Position; • Maintain Safe Navigational Watch; • Using Radar And Arpa To Maintain Navigational Safety; • Ability To Operate And Analyze Information Obtained From Arpa; • Respond To Emergencies; • Use Imo Standard Marine Communication Phrases And Use English In Writing And Speaking; • Transmit And Receive Information Using Visual Signals; • Maneuver The Ship; • Colreg. The Bridge Simulator Should Have The Ability To Set Up A Scoring And Grading System To Evaluate The Operator’s Performance. The Program Allows The Instructor To Monitor The Results Of The Bridge Team / Operator Workstation Performance During The Following Scenarios: 1. Own Ship Collision; 2. Own Ship Collision With A Beacon; 3. Running Aground On Own Ship; 4. Distances For Channel Coast; 5. Own Ship Collision With Another Vessel; 6. Own Ship Collision With The Shore; 7. Own Ship’s Anchor Chain Breakage; 8. Own Ship’s Mooring Line Breakage; 9. Engine Overload. For Each Item The Following Can Be Recorded: • Time • Position; • Depth; • Distance Traveled; • Hdg; • Cog; • Log • Sog; • Angular Velocity; • Prow. Doppler Velocity; • Stern Doppler Velocity; • Ort. Velocity; • List; • Trim; • Engines Controller Position; • Main Engines Load; • Vpp Angles; • Propellers Rpms; • Rudder Setter; • Rudder Blade Position; • Thrusters Loading. Other Requirement: 10. Possibility To Connect To The Gmdss And Engine Room Simulators. 1.10.2       Instructor Module’s Main Screen General Requirement: 1. Integrated Application For Editing, Running And Debriefing Exercises. 2. High-quality Vector Chart Representation With The Ability To Load Multiple Charts; 3. Displaying Of The Actual Ship Contours; 4. Display Of Object Tracks: Contour Or Point With Selectable Resolution, Track History And Time Stamps; 5. Display Of Walls And Piers; 6. Displaying Of True Or Relative Velocity Vectors; 7. Display Mode Selection: True Or Relative Movement; 8. Using The Mouse Wheel For Chart Scaling; 9. User Configurable Workplace; 10. Setting Parameters And Faults Of Navigation Equipment: Radar, Gps, Loran C, Log, Gyro, Echo Sounder, Uais; 11. Setting Weather And Bathymetric Conditions: Global And Local Zones, Import Of Tide And Current Databases (ecdis); 12. Monitoring Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Ship Information Page Including Events Panel, Environment Page, Stats Page Including Cpa-tcpa Panel; 13. Monitoring Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Direct Control Of Steering And Propulsion Systems, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; 14. Setting The Navigational Equipment Faults, Steering And Propulsion, Fire And General Alarms; 15. Continuous Data Logging During Exercises; 16. Live And Fast-time Playback Of Recorded Exercises; 17. Generation And Printing Of Exercise Reports. Exercise Objects: 1) Collection Of 6-dof Ship Models; 2) Sar Objects: Life Raft, Mob, Damaged Tanker, Sart, Helicopter Target; 3) Global And Local Weather Zones: Wind, Current, Sea State, Visibility, Precipitation; 4) Rain Clouds; 5) External Tide And Current Data (c-map Databases). Uais Training: 1. Ability To Configure Own Ship And Target Ship Parameters For Ais Position, Ship Static And Voyage Related Data Reports; 2. Possibility To Send Ais Messages To Own Ships; 3. Possibility To Monitor The Exchange Of Ais Messages; 4. Ability To Enter Fault Data Into The Ais Transponder. 1.10.3 Instructor Gmdss Module The Instructor Gmdss Module Of The Bridge Simulator Should Have The Following Abilities: • Ability To Connect To The Gmdss Simulator; • Continuous Audio Logging Of Information Exchange From The Operator Workstation On The Bridge (requires A Gmdss Module); • Exercise Monitoring With A Video Camera (requires An Additional Visualization Module); Radar Exercise Monitoring (requires An Additional Radar/arpa Simulation Module 1.11 Radar / Arpa Module • The Bridge Simulator (radar/arpa) Module Should Have The Following Capabilities • Arpa/radar Software On The Bridge; • Selective Radar On The Instructor Workstation; General Information: • Display Simulation Of The Following Radar Types: Jrc Jma 5300 Series Target Tracking (arpa/ais): • Full Tt Functionality; • Plotting Up To 100 Targets; • Displaying Up To 1,000 Ais Targets; • The Ais Symbol Shows Whether A Target Is A Sleeping Target, A Normal, A Selected, A Dangerous Or A Lost Target. Automatic Acquisition Zones: • The Two Auto-capture Zones Can Be Set In A Sector Or In Any Shape; • Targets In The Auto-capture Zone Are Displayed With A Reverse Triangle; • The Operator Can Manually Acquire Important Targets Without Restriction, Which Is An Important Aid And Source Of Information For Evaluating The Situation. Guard Zones And Anchor Watch Zone: •guard Zones Generate Visual And Audible Alarms When Targets Enter Zones Set By The Operator; •one Of The Guard Zones Can Be Used As An Anchor Watch To Alert The Operator When Own Ship Or Targets Drift Outside The Set Zone. •radar Simulator On The Bridge; Cpa Alarm: •the Target Tracking Symbol Changes To A Triangle When Its Predicted Course Deviates From The Operator’s Set Cpa/tcpa; •the Operator Can Easily Change The Vector Length To Estimate The Trend Of The Target’s Movement. Target Trials: • The Target Trail Feature Generates Single-color Or Gradual Shading Afterglow On All Objects On The Display To Help Clarify The Traffic Situation; • Echo Trails Can Be Displayed In Either True Or Relative Motion; • Relative Trails Show Relative Motion Between Targets And Own Ship; • True Motion Trails Require A Gyrocompass Signal And Own Ship Speed Input To Cancel Own Ship Motion And Represent The True Motion Of Targets According To Their Speeds And Courses Over The Ground. Radar Map: • A Radar Map Is A Combination Of Lines And Marks That Operators Can Use To Define And Enter Data About The Navigation Area And Route; • The Radar Map Can Be Saved To Facilitate Reuse In A Frequent Navigation Area; • Planned Routes Created On The Ecdis Can Be Transferred Onto The Radar Display When Connected To The Ecdis Network. Radar Keyboard: • Full Control – All Radar Operations Can Be Performed Using The Keyboard Or On-screen With The Ps Trackball; • Actual Jma 53xx Marine-approved Radar Keyboard; • Dedicated Buttons For Basic Functions; • Large, Easy-to-use Analog Controls For Ebl, Vrm, Gain, Sea And Rain. 1.12 Ecdis Module The Bridge Simulator Should Use For Its Ecdis Preferably The Following: The “navmaster” (pc Maritime Uk), The “totem Ecdis” (totem+, Israel) And The Maris 9000 Ecdis (navico Norway) As A Dnv Type-approved Ecdis Module. All Variants Should Meet The Requirements Of The Following Regulations/ Standards: Solas 74, Reg. V/18.1, V/19.2.1.5, 2000 Hsc Code 13.8, 13.17.1, Imo Res. A 817(19) As Amended By Msc.64 (67) Annex 5 And By Msc.86(70) Annex 4, Imo Res.a.694(17) And Developed In Accordance With The Imo/iec Requirements For Integrated Navigation Systems (draft Iec 61924). Areas Of Application: 1. Bridge Task Application For The Training In The Use Of An Electronic Chart Display And Information System; 2. Ecdis Software On The Bridge; 3. Selective Ecdis On The Instructor Workstation; 4. Ecdis Simulator On The Bridge. General Information: 1. Compatible Cartography: ◦ Iho/ S-57 Edition 3 Vector Chart (iho S-63 Data Protection Scheme); ◦ Arcs Raster Chart; ◦ C-map Professional+; ◦ Compatibility With Admiralty Information Overlay (aio) For Further Navigation Safety. 2. Interface With Position Sensors, Gyro, Log, Echo-sounder And Radar For Radar Overlay, Target Track Info, Route, And Waypoint Exchange. 3. Ecdis Operating Modes: ◦ Monitor Mode, Ship’s Behavior Can Be Monitored Relative To The Planned Route. A Variety Of Voyage Monitoring Tools Are Built Into The Instant Access Panel; ◦ Chart Maintenance Mode, Allows Operators To Work With Charts To Be Used In The System; ◦ Plan Mode, Operators Can Generate And Edit Route Plans As Well As Custom Charts. It Is Also Possible To View Various Detailed Reports Generated By Ecdis On Planned Routes And Custom Charts. 4. Route Planning: ◦ Operators Can Use The Trackball To Enter Waypoints Directly Onto The Chart; ◦ Operators Can Edit The Name, Steering Mode, Radius, Channel Limit And Other Parameters Of Waypoints. 5. Creating User Chart: ◦ Operators Can Create A Custom Chart; ◦ A User Chart Is A Layer Consisting Of Marks And Lines That Can Be Created And Overlaid On The Chart; ◦ User Charts Are Intended For Marking Safety-related Areas And Objects. 6. Quick Access To Various Reports: ◦ Route Reports On Waypoint And Passage Plan, As Well As User Chart Reports On Tidal, Lines, User-entered Objects And User-defined Areas Can Be Accessed Directly For Viewing. 7. Marine Type Approved Keyboard: ◦ Panel-mounted Silicone Rubber Keyboard With Built-in Waterproof 25mm Trackball And Scroll Function; ◦ Fully Certified To Iec60945, Iacs E10, Iec 60092-504, Dnv 2.4. 1.13 Conning (conning Display) Module The Program Should Be Designed For Ship Handling, Mooring, Automatic Tug, And Navigational Instruments. Multi-level "call-up" Pages Of The Conning Display: 1. General Characteristics, Me And Autopilot Controls (“main” Page); 2. Mooring Gears And Roll And Pitch Controls (“anchor & Mooring” Page); 3. Repeater Gyrocompass And Satellite Compass (“compasses” Page); 4. Anemometer, Digital Barograph, Water And Air Temperature And Humidity Sensors (“environment” Page); 5. Binoculars Control, Observer Position Control, Searchlight Control (“light & View” Page); 6. Signal Flags, Sound Signals And Figures (“signals” Page); 7. Own Ship Data (page "ship"); 8. Fire Alarm Control Panel And Alarm List (page "alarm"); 9. Azimuth Propeller Thruster Control, Azimuth Indicators, Thruster Indicator Loading (page "azimuth"); 10. Vhf Radio (page "vhf"); 11. Intercom (page "intercom"); 12. Echo Sounder (page "echo Sounder"); 13. Pilot Card (page "pilot Card"); 14. Maneuvering Table (page "maneuvering Table"); 15. Training Result And Vdr (page "assessment/vdr"). Main Features: 1. Rudder Position Master Operation Mode Setup; 2. Rudder Position Presetting; 3. Setting The Operating Mode Of The Bow Thruster And Aft Thruster; 4. Autopilot Control; 5. Setting The Limit For The Signal Response To A Hazardous Depth Under The Keel; 6. Me Control; 7. Initiation Of The Binoculars; 8. Setting The Observer’s Angle Of View Relative To The Horizon And Vertical Line; 9. Setting The Observer’s Position In The Visualization System; 10. Control Of Sound Signals, Lights And Figures; 11. Control Of The Anchoring Gear, Mooring Lines And Fenders When Mooring To A Quay And Vessel; 12. Tug Control. Information Display: 1. Values Of Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions; 2. Control Pitch Propeller Turning Angle Values; 3. Rudder Responding Values; 4. Rate Of Turn Angular Velocity Values; 5. Operation Mode Of The Bow Thruster And Aft Thruster; 6. Gyro Compass And Magnetic Compass Course; 7. Log Speed And Speed Over The Ground; 8. Bow Thrust And Stern Speed; 9. Wind Speed And Direction (true/relative); 10. Speed And Direction Of Streams (current); 11. Date & Time Of Ship; 12. Distance Traversed; 13. Depth Under Keel; 14. Ship’s Geographical Coordinates; 15. Distance From Ship To Shore; 16. Me Loads; 17. Heel And Trim Of The Vessel; 18. Anchor Chain Length, Water Angle; 19. Length Of Mooring Lines; 20. Fire Detection Control System, List Of System Failures Alarms; 21. Vhf Point With Channel Selector; 22. Pilot Card, Maneuvering (wheelhouse Poster); 23. Assessment & Vdr 1.14 Steering Control (multi-touch Pc) Module This Module Should Have The Following Capability: The Hdg Main Is The Start Page Of The Display For The Heading Control Mode Operation. The Hdg Main Page Is Accessible Via The Corresponding Soft Key Of The Operation Mode. The Nav Main Is The Start Page Of The Display For Operation In Waypoint Steering Mode. The Nav Main Page Is Accessible Via The Corresponding Operation Mode Soft Key. The Connected Route Planning System Generates All Necessary Data For Waypoint Steering. The Nfu/fu Display Page Has Two Rudder Setting Options: • The Nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys; • The Fu Mode: Entry Of The Rudder Angle Value With The Rotary Knob. 1.15 Propulsion Control (multi-touch Pc) Module This Module Should Have The Following Capability: • Speed Digital Indicator Of Speed In Knots; • Main Engine Port And Main Engine Stbd Gauges To Display Rpm, Pitch And Speed Shaft Values Of Respective Me; • Two Emergency Engine Order Telegraphs (eeot) For Use In Case Of Machine Telegraph Failure; To Operate The Eeot Turn The Central Knob To The Required Position On The Scale; Corresponding Button Starts Flashing And Buttons Flash On The Telegraph Repeaters In Ecr And Engine Room Lop; At The Same Time Audible Signal Starts; When The Command Is Confirmed At The Ecr/er, The Button Lights Up Continuously On All Telegraphs And Audible Signal Stops; • E/r Deadman System Lamps Light Up To Indicate The System Status: System On And E/r Deadman Alarm; • Thruster Control Display For The Bow And Stern Thruster Control; • Generator Status Indication; • Control Of Rudder Pumps And Synchronization Of Rudder Fu Mode. 1.16 Navigation Aid Instruments Module Areas Of Application: • Bridge Task Application. The Program Is Designed To Simulate Satellite Navigation Systems And Shore-based Radio Navigation Systems; • Data Generated By This Module Are Transmitted To Ecdis, Radar/arpa And Auto-pilot. 1.16.1 Marine Gps Areas Of Application: 1. Automatic And Manual Operation Modes; 2. Position Indication, Geodesic Datum; 3. Waypoint Input And Storage; 4. Dead Reckoning Mode; 5. Steering Data Computation; 6. Man Overboard; 7. Instructor-controlled Faults And Errors: Power Failure. 1.16.2 Ais 1. Manual Data Entry, Updating And Data Retrieval Using The Minimum Ais Display Simulator; 2. Manual Data Entry, Updating And Data Retrieval Using The Ecdis Simulator And/or Radar; 3. Transmission Of Dynamic Information At Intervals Consistent With Applicable Requirements; 4. Periodic Automatic Transmission Of Static Information To Coastal Stations And Other Vessels Equipped With Ais Equipment; 5. Receiving And Processing Information From Coastal Stations And Other Vessels; 6. Sending Response Messages With Minimum Delay To Safety Or High Priority Requests; 7. Transmitting Ais Data Of Target Vessels To Radar Simulator For Display; 8. Transmitting Ais Data Of Target Vessels To The Ecdis Simulator For Display. 1.16.3 Bnwa System 1. Provides Light And Sound Signals To Attract The Attention Of The Officer On Watch And, If The Officer Does Not Respond, To Alert The Simulator Instructor; 2. The Bnwa Simulator Operating Modes, The Sequence Of Light And Sound Signals, And The Characteristics Of The Light And Sound Signals Meet The Requirements Of Imo Resolution Msc.128 (75). 1.16.4 Navigation Echo Sounder 1. Depth Measurement From 1 To 200 M; 2. Audible Alarm When The Vessel Reaches The Target Depth; 3. Manual Depth Setting; 4. Depth Information Display In Two Forms Simultaneously: ◦ In A Graphic Form, Displaying The Depth Profile On The Ship's Path; ◦ In Numerical Form Showing The Current Depth. 1.16.5 Doppler Speed Log 1. Display Of The Vessel’s Speed Relative To Water And Relative To The Ground; 2. Distance Traveled Display; 3. Transmission Of Vessel Speed To Radar, Ecdis And Ais Simulators. 1.16.6 Vdr Remote Alarm Panel The Interval For Recording Various Data, Including Sound, Is As Follows: 1. Radar / Ecdis Video Signals: Every 15 Seconds; 2. Audio Data Of Bridge And Vhf Conversations: In Real Time; 3. Proposals In Iec Format: Upon Receipt; 4. Analog And Digital Data: Every Second. 1.17 Bearing Finder 1. Bridge Task Application. Program Represents A Visual Channel (visual) With A Capability To Accurately Measure The Observation Angle. 2. Telescoping Bearing Sight With Optical Magnification 3. Level Indicator For Horizontal Alignment Of The Bearing Repeater 4. Accuracy Of Azimuth And Elevation Angle Settings Is 0.1degree. 1.18 Pelorus Stand – Bearing Repeater Gyrocompass 1. The Gyrocompass Is Essentially A North-seeking Gyroscope And Which Is Connected By Cables To Gyrocompass Repeater Located Through The Ship. 2. The Pelorus Is A Key Instrument In Piloting The Ship Closed To Shore And Obtaining The True Direction Of Nearby Ships. 3. The Pelorus Is Mounted On The Center Of Bridge Used As The Most Accurate Reference. 1.19 Overhead Display Mode Areas Of Application: • Bridge Task Application. The Program Is Designed For Overhead Display Simulation. • This Module Should Run On Separate Pcs. The Sensor Can Be Set For Each Display And Each Output Type For Single, Dual, Or Triple Display. The Location Of The Displays Can Be Changed And Configured To Match The Display Type. Information Displayed: 1. Engine Load; 2. Engine Rpm; 3. Propeller Pitch; 4. Speed Of Log; 5. Heading; 6. Passed Distance; 7. Vessel Time; 8. Doppler; 9. Rate Of Turn; 10. Rudder Angle; 11. Pitch And Roll; 12. Depth; 13. Wind Speed And Direction. 1.20 Gmdss Operator Module The Gmdss Operator Module Should Simulate The Electromagnetic Environment Affected By: 1. Operator-controlled Radio Stations On Vessels; 2. Coastal Stations; 3. Rescue Coordination Center Radio Stations; 4. Distortion Induced By Propagation Interference. The Software Should Simulate The Operation Of The Following Sailor 6100 Gmdss Devices: 1. Vhf Radio Station With Dsc Vhf, Sailor 6222; 2. Mf/hf Radio Station With Dsc Mf/hf, Sailor 6301; 3. Mf/hf Sailor 6300 Mf/hf Radio Telex; 4. Inmarsat-c Ses, Egc Rx With Lrit And Ssas, Sailor 6110; 5. Inmarsat Fleet Broadband Sailor 250; 6. Iridium Ses Lt-3100s Gmdss Satellite Communication System; 7. Inmarsat-b Ship Earth Station Nera Saturn-b (optional); 8. Inmarsat-fleet 77 Ship Earth Station Nera – F77 (optional); 9. Two Band Receiver Navtex Nx-700a/b, Furuno; 10. Sailor Tr733 2182 Khz Watch Receiver; 11. Cospas-sarsat Epirb Tron 60gps, Jotron; 12. Sart Tron Sart 20, Jotron; 13. Ais Sart Tron Ais Sart; 14. Two-way Vhf Radio Station Tron Tr 30 Gmdss And Maritime Vhf Radio; 15. Vhf Radio For Two-way Communication Between Vessel And Aircraft, Tron Tr 30 Air, Jotron; 16. Mcmurdo Fast Find 220 Plb; 17. Plb Ais Mcmurdo S20; 18. Gmdss Alarm Panel Sailor Ap 6103; 19. Radio Direction Finder Rt-500-m (marine); 20. Power Switchboard Sailor Bp4680; 21. Battery Charger; 22. Virtual Printer. 2.0 Main Instructor Station 2.1 Instructor Station 2.1.1 License Of The Navigation Instructor Navigation Instructor Software Includes: 1. Navigation Instructor 2. Evaluation And Assessment 3. Tug And Mooring 4. Radar/arpa 5. Ecdis (maris 9000ecdis) 6. C-map Electronic Charts 7. Bird Eye Of Instructor 8. Debriefing System 2.1.2 License Of The Gmdss Instructor Gmdds Instructor Software Includes: 1. Gmdss Instructor 2. Group 3. Setup 4. Maps 5. Equipment Status 6. Knowledge Test 7. Estimated Results By The Program 8. Scenario Editor Of The Estimator 9. Software Control Of The Handset 2.1.3 Coastal Radio Stations Coastal Radio Stations Includes: 1. Coastal Radio Stations 2. Sar Coordination Center Radio Stations 3. Radio Disturbances 2.2 Instructor Station Table And Computers 2.2.1 Instructor Station Table Instructor Station Table Specification: 1. Table Size: L 2300 X W 700 X H 750 2. Material: Formica Matt Laminate On Chipboard 3. Laser Printer A4 Colored (w/ 5 Set Of Consumables) 4. Monitor Mounting Brackets 5. Handset 6. Speaker 7. Keyboard & Mouse 8. Chair 2.2.2 Instructor’s Computer Unit 2 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1. Type Of Pc: Desktop With Cooling System 2. Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3. Ram: 8gb 4. Ssd: 250gb M.2 5. Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6. Keyboard: Wireless 7. Mouse: Wireless 8. Os: Windows Pro 64bits (eng) 2.2.3 Instructor’s Computer Unit 1 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1. Type Of Pc: Desktop With Cooling System 2. Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3. Ram: 8gb 4. Ssd: 250gb M.2 5. Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6. Keyboard: Wireless 7. Mouse: Wireless 8. Os: Windows Pro 64bits (eng) 2.2.4 Monitor 32” Led Unit 4 Minimum Monitor Requirements: 1. Type: Led 2. Size: 32” 3. Resolution: Full Hd 1920 X 1080 4. Contrast Ratio: 1, 000:1 5. Response Time: 6 Ms 6. Display Port: Hdmi 7. Mount Bracket 2.2.5 Monitor 32” Led Unit 3 Minimum Monitor Requirements: 1. Type: Led 2. Size: 32” 3. Resolution: Full Hd 1920 X 1080 4. Contrast Ratio: 1, 000:1 5. Response Time: 6 Ms 6. Display Port: Hdmi 7. Mount Bracket 2.2.6 Handset Unit 1 Handset Includes: 1. Handset 2. Cradle With A Ptt Switch 3. Usb Interface Board 4. Handset Box 2.2.7 Speaker Unit 1 Speaker Requirements: 1. Type: Desktop 2. Port: Mini Jack 3. Power: Usb 2.2.8 Network Switch Unit 1 Network Switch Specifications: 1. 24 Ports 10/100/1000mbps Rj45 Ports 2.2.9 Cctv Monitoring 1. Network Camera (nvr) 2. (1 Ea) 5mp Fisheye Fixed Dome 3. (9 Ea) Camera W/built In Mic 2.8mm Network Camera 5mp 4. (2 Ea) 6tb Storage 3.0 Main Bridge Simulator 3.1.1   Conning Display Conning Display Software Consisting Of: 1. Main Features A) Rudder Operation Mode Setup B) Rudder Presetting C) Bow & Stern Thruster Presetting D) Autopilot Control E) Signal Response Limit Presetting F) Me Control G) Binocular Initiation H) Observer’s Vision Angle Presetting I) Observer’s Position Presetting J) Sound Signals, Lights & Figures Control K) Anchor Gear, Mooring & Fenders Control L) Tugs Control 2. Information Display A) Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions Values B) Turning Angle Of Cpp Value C) Rudder Responding Value D) Angle Of Rate Value E) Gyro & Magnetic Compass Course F) Log Speed & Speed Over Ground G) Load Of Bow And Speed Of Stern H) Velocity & Direction Of Wind (true/relative) I) Velocity & Direction Of Stream (current) J) Ship Date & Time K) Traversed Distance L) Depth Under Keel M) Distance From Shore N) Me Loads O) Ship Heel And Trim P) Fire Detection Control System, System Failures Alarms List Q) Vhf Point With A Channel Selector R) Pilot Card, Maneuvering S) Assessment & Vdr T) Arpa Keyboard Control 3.1.2 Radar/arpa Display Radar/arpa Software Consisting Of: 1. Imitating Display Of Jrc Jma 5300 A) Range Scale B) Display Modes: Head Up, North Up, Tm, Rm C) Display Of Charts Of The Region 2. Arpa A) Acquisition Modes B) Target Canceling Modes C) Target Data Output Time D) Target Information E) Visual & Acoustic Alarms F) Cpa, Tcpa Limits Setting G) Trial Maneuver 3. Radar Parameter A) Operating Frequency (s-band, X-band) B) Antenna Rpm (20, 6- Rpm) C) Direction Pattern Width (vertical, Horizontal) D) Antenna Height & Tilt Angle E) Blind Sectors 3.1.3 Ecdis Display Ecdis Software License Consisting Of: 1. Multi Chart Loading 2. Chart Info 3. Chart Orientation (north Up, Head Up, Course Up) 4. Alarms (ais, Anti-grounding, Sensors, Route, Radar/target, Chart Areas,) 5. Ship Motion Data (cog, Sog, Hdg, Log) 6. Erbl For Measuring Bearings And Ranges 7. Two Modes Of Displaying (true, Relative) 8. Mob Mode 9. Routing Planning, Checking And Monitoring 10. Work With Multiple Routes 11. Interface With Position Sensor, Gyro, Log, Echo-sounder, Arpa 12. Radar Overlay 3.1.4 C-map Professional+ C-map Professional+ Is An Innovative And Dynamic Worldwide Vector Chart Database Produced By Jeppesen Marine. Dnv Type Approved Senc Format, Cm-93/3 3.1.5 Bearing Finder Display Bearing Finder Software Consisting Of: 1. Gyro Mode 2. Magnetic Compass Mode 3. Determine The Bearing Control 4. Direction Finder Elevation Control 3.1.6 Navigation Aid Instruments 1. Marine Gnss Gps – Furuno Gp170 Features: A) Automatic And Manual Operation Modes B) Position Readouts, Geodesic Datum C) Way-points Input And Storage D) Dead Reckoning Mode E) Steering Data Computing F) Man Overboard G) Faults And Errors Controlled By The Instructor 2. Ais – Samyung Si-70a Features: A) Automatic Transmission Of Static Information To Coast Stations And Other Vessels With Ais Equipments B) Reception And Processing Of Information From Coastal Stations And Other Vessels C) Sending Response Messages With Minimum Delay To Security Or High Priority Requests D) Target Vessels Ais Data Transmission 3. Bnwa System Furuno Br-5000 Features: A) Provides Light And Sound Signals To Attract The Attention Of The Officer In Charge Of The Watch B) Operation Modes With Imo Resolution Msc.128 4. Echo Sounder – Furuno Fe-800 Features: A) Measurement Of Depths From 1 To 200m B) Ship Exiting To A Given Depth Sound Signal C) Manual Setting Of A Given Depth D) Presentation Of Depth Information Simultaneously On Two Forms: - Graphic Form - Numerically 5. Doppler Speed Log – Furuno Ds-80 Features: A) Display Of The Speed (relative To Water And Relative To Ground) B) Display Of The Distance Traveled 6. Vdr – Furuno Vr-7017 Features: A) Recording Interval Of A Various Data 3.1.7 Overhead Display Overhead Display Software Displays The Following Data: 1. Engine Load 2. Engine Rpm 3. Propeller Pitch 4. Speed Of Log 5. Heading 6. Passed Distance 7. Vessel Time 8. Doppler 9. Rate Of Turn 10. Rudder Angle 11. Pitch & Roll, Depth 12. Speed & Direction Of Wind 3.1.8 Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Software Consisting Of: 1. Display Of Magnetic Compass 2. Display Of Gyro Repeater 3.1.9 Steering Display/autopilot Control Steering Display/autopilot Control Features: 1. Hdg – Heading Control Mode 1. Set Heading Display In Degree 2. Set Rot 2. Nav – Waypoint Steering Mode 3. Nfu/fu Control Page A) Nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys B) Fu Mode: Entry Of The Target Rudder Angle Value Using The Rotary Knob 4. Track Data – Logging Of The Last Past Minutes 3.1.10 Engine Control Engine Control Software Consisting Of 1. Indicator A) Me Indicator Load B) Me Indicator Rpm C) Pitch Indicator D) Shaft Rpm E) Speed Indicator F) Dead Man Alarm 2. Main Engine Control A) Nfu Control To Switch Steering Modes B) Clutch Control – Engage/de-engage C) Control Location D) Em’cy Stop E) Pitch Control – Local, Pitch Ahead/astern F) Control Mode – Constant/combinat 3. Em’cy Engine Order Telegraph 4. Thruster Control Display 5. Diesel Generators Control 6. Rudder Pumps Control 3.1.11 Gmdss Software Devices Gmdss Software Sailor 6100 Consisting Of: 1) Sailor 6222 Vhf With Dsc 2) Sailor 6300 Mf/hf With Dsc 3) Sailor 6300 Mf/hf With Dsc 4) Sailor 6110 Ses Inmarsat-c Terminal 5) Nera Ses Inmarsat-b Terminal 6) Furuno Navtex Nx-700a 7) Sailor 6100 Battery Panel 8) Sailor 6103 Alarm Panel 9) Sailor 250 Fleet Broadband 10) Radio Direction Finder Rt500m 11) Log Printer 12) Sart 13) Ais Sart 14) Cospas/sarsat 15) Plb 16) Plb Ais 17) Portable Vhf 18) Aero Vhf 19) Ssas 20) Antenna Switchbox 21) 2182 Khz Receiver 22) Irdum 3.1.12 Visualization Software Visualization 3-d Database With A High-resolution True-color Texturing Can Be Displayed. 1) Object Library Includes: A) 3-d Submarine And Above Water Terrain B) Aids To Navigation – Buoys, Lighthouse C) Port Facilities Models – Cranes, Tanks, Chimneys, Elevators, Containers, Vehicles, Towers, Etc. D) Moving Targets E) Unique And Standard Buildings, Monuments Models, Bridges With Night View Representation F) Piers, Jetties, And Bollard Barrels For Mooring Operation Training 2) Own Ships Software: A) Own Ships Mathematical Mode; Based On 6-dof B) Ship Models: Container Carrier, Bulk Carrier, Cruise Ship, Chemical Tanker, Vlcc, Lng Carrier, River-sea Tankers, Cargo, Anchor Tugs, Trawler 3) Target Ships: A) Move Automatically Along The Routes Plotted In An Exercise, Or Controlled By The Instructor B) Effected By Wind, Current And Wave Drift C) Towing And Mooring Functions 3.2 Main Bridge Simulator Consoles And Computers 3.2.1   Main Bridge – Steel Consoles Fabrication Of Main Bridge Consoles Consisting Of: 1) Conning/maneuvering Console 2) Radar Console 3) Ecdis Console 4) Bearing Console 5) Navigation Aid Equipment Console 6) Gmdss Console 7) Steering Stand/console 8) Chart Table 9) Overhead Panel 10) Gyro Repeater With Pelorus Stand 11) Binoculars 3.2.2 Computer For Bridge Consoles Unit 2 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1) Type Of Pc: Workstation With Cooling System 2) Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3) Ram: 8gb 4) Ssd: 250gb M.2 5) Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6) Keyboard: Wireless 7) Mouse: Wireless 8) Os: Ms Windows Pro 64 Bit 3.2.3 Computer For Bridge Consoles Unit 3 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1) Type Of Pc: Workstation With Cooling System 2) Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3) Ram: 8gb 4) Ssd: 250gb M.2 5) Gpu: Integrated Graphic 750 Or Above 6) Keyboard: Wireless 7) Mouse: Wireless 8) Os: Ms Windows Pro 64 Bit 3.2.4 Monitor 24” Led Unit 8 Minimum Monitor Requirements: 1) Type: Led 2) Size: 24” 3) Resolution: Full Hd 1920 X 1080 4) Contrast Ratio: 1,000:1 5) Response Time: 6 Ms 6) Display Port: Hdmi 7) Mounting Bracket 3.2.5 Engine Control Hardware Set 1 Engine Control System Consisting Of: 1) 8.4” Tft Multi-touch Display Pc 2) Universal Interface Board 3) Engine Control Telegraph 4) Thruster Setter 5) General Alarm Panel 3.2.6 Steering Control Hardware Set 1 Steering Control System Consisting Of: 1) 8.4” Tft Multi-touch Display Pc 2) Universal Interface Board 3) Steering Shaft And Wheel 4) Control Knob Panel 3.2.7 Radar/arpa Keyboard Set 1 Radar/arpa Keyboard Specifications: 1) Usb Interface 2) Console Mount Type 3.2.8 Handset Unit 1 Handset Includes: 1) Handset 2) Cradle With A Ptt Switch 3) Usb Interface Board 4) Handset Box 3.2.9 Speaker Unit 3 Speaker Specifications: 1) Type: Desktop 2) Port: Mini Jack 3) Power: Usb 3.2.10 Gyro Repeater With Pelorus Stand (1set) Gyro Repeater Includes: 1) Bearing Repeater Compass 2) Pelorus Stand 3) Power: 24vd 4) Signal: Rs422 Nmea 3.2.11 Ups 1) (2 Ea) Gxt5 10 Kva 230 V 2) Ratings 10,000 Va / 10,000 W 3) Battery Run Times: 10kva Models 4) Parallel Ports (10kva) 5) Colored Graphic Lcd Display With Gravity Orientation 6) Even High Efficiency Up To 98% In Active Eco Mode 3.3 Visualization Hardware 3.3.1 270° Main Bridge Visual Display Unit 9 270° Main Bridge Visualization Hardware Consisting Of: 1) Visual Display Specifications: A) Size: 65” B) Resolution: Full Hd 1920 X 1080 C) Contrast Ratio: 1, 000:1 D) Response Time: 6 Ms E) Display Port: Hdmi 2) Swivel Mounting Bracket 3) Monitor, Network & Power Cables 4) Mock-up Main Bridge 5) Led (atleast 4k) 3.3.2 Computer For Visualization Unit 5 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1) Type Of Pc: Workstation With Cooling System 2) Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3) Ram: 8gb 4) Ssd: 250gb M.2 5) Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6) Os: Ms Windows Pro 64bit 3.3.3 Speaker With Subwoofer Set 1 5.1 Channel Sound System Specification: 1) Interface With Visual Pc 2) Realization Of 3d Sound Effect System 4.0 Mini Bridges Simulator 4.0 Auxiliary Bridge Simulator Set 6 4.1 Auxiliary Bridge Simulator Software 4.1.1 Conning Display Conning Display Software Consisting Of: 1) Main Features Rudder Operation Mode Setup 1. Rudder Presetting 2. Bow & Stern Thruster Presetting 3. Autopilot Control 4. Signal Response Limit Presetting 5. Me Control 6. Binocular Initiation 7. Observer’s Vision Angle Presetting 8. Observer’s Position Presetting 9. Sound Signals, Lights & Figures Control 10. Anchor Gear, Mooring & Fenders Control 11.tugs Control 2) Information Display 1. Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions Values 2. Turning Angle Of Cpp Value 3. Rudder Responding Value 4. Angle Of Rate Value 5. Gyro & Magnetic Compass Course 6. Log Speed & Speed Over Ground 7. Load Of Bow And Speed Of Stern 8. Velocity & Direction Of (true/relative) 9. Velocity & Direction Of Stream (current) 10 .ship Date & Time 11. Traversed Distance 12. Depth Under Keel 13. Distance From Shore 14. Me Loads 15. Ship Heel And Trim 16. Fire Detection Control System, System Failures Alarms List 17. Vhf Point With A Channel Selector 18. Pilot Card, Maneuvering 19. Assessment & Vdr 20. Arpa Keyboard Control 4.1.2 Radar/arpa Display Radar/arpa Software Consisting Of: 1) Imitating Display Of Jrc Jma 5300 A) Range Scale B) Display Modes: Head Up, North Up, Tm, Rm C) Display Effects: Target Trials, Echo, Zoom D) Display Of Charts Of The Region 2) Arpa A) Acquisition Modes B) Target Canceling Modes C) Tracking Data Output Time D) Target Information E) Visual & Acoustic Alarms F) Cpa, Tcpa Limits Setting G) Trial Maneuver 3) Radar Parameter A) Operating Frequency (s-band, X-band) B) Antenna Rpm (20, 60 Rpm) C) Direction Pattern Width (vertical, Horizontal) D) Antenna Height & Tilt Angle E) Blind Sectors 4.1.3 Ecdis Display Ecdis Software License Consisting Of: 1) Multi Chart Loading 2) Chart Info 3) Chart Orientation (north Up, Head Up, Course Up) 4) Alarms (ais, Anti-grounding, Sensors, Route, Radar/target, Chart Areas…) 5) Ship Motion Data (cog, Sog, Hdg, Log) 6) Erbl For Measuring Bearings And Ranges 7) Two Modes Of Displaying (true, Relative) 8) Mob Mode 9) Routing Planning, Checking And Monitoring 10) Work With Multiple Routes 11) Interface With Position Sensor, Gyro, Log, Echo-sounder, Arpa 12) Radar Overlay 4.1.4 C-map Professional+ C-map Professional+ Is An Innovative And Dynamic Worldwide Vector Chart Database Produced By Jeppesen Marine. Dnv Type Approved Senc Format, Cm-93/3 4.1.5 Overhead Display Overhead Display Software Displays The Following Data: • Speed Of Log • Vessel Time • Rate Of Turn • Rudder Angle • Speed & Direction Of Wind 4.1.6 Steering Display/autopilot Control Steering Display/autopilot Control Features: • Hdg – Heading Control Mode ◦ Set Heading Display In Degree ◦ Set Rot • Nav – Waypoint Steering Mode • Nfu/fu Control Page ◦ Nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys ◦ Fu Mode: Entry Of The Target Rudder Angle Value Using The Rotary Knob • Track Data – Logging Of The Past Minutes 4.1.7 Engine Control Engine Control Software Consisting Of: A. Indicator 1. Me Indicator Load 2. Me Indicator Rpm 3. Pitch Indicator 4. Shaft Rpm 5. Dead Man Alarm B. Main Engine Control 1. Nfu Control To Switch Steering Modes 2. Clutch Control – Engage/de-engage 3. Control Location 4. Em’cy Stop 5. Pitch Control – Local, Pitch Ahead/astern 6. Control Mode – Constant/combinat C. Em’cy Engine Order Telegraph D. Thruster Control Display E. Diesel Generators Control F. Rudder Pumps Control 4.1.8 Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Software Consisting Of: 1) Display Of Magnetic Compass 2) Display Of Gyro Repeater 4.2 Auxiliary Bridge Simulator Hardware Set 6 4.2.1 Mini Bridge – Steel Consoles Set 6 Fabrication Of Main Bridge Consoles Consisting Of: 1) Conning/maneuvering Console 2) Radar Console 3) Ecdis Console 4.2.2 Computer For Operator Unit 12 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1) Type Of Pc: Workstation With Cooling System 2) Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3) Ram: 8gb 4) Ssd: 250gb M.2 5) Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6) Keyboard: Wireless 7) Mouse: Wireless 8) Os: Ms Windows Pro 64 Bit 4.2.3 Monitor 24” Led Unit 24 Speaker For Visual Sound Output: 1) Type: Desktop 2) Port: Mini Jack 3) Power: Usb 4.2.4 Network Switch Unit 1 Network Switch Specifications: 1) 24 Port 10/100/1000mbps Rj45 Ports 2) Plug And Play Network Switch 4.2.5 Engine/steering Control Hardware Set 6 Engine Control System Consisting Of: 1) 8.4” Tft Multi-touch Display Pc 2) Universal Interface Board 3) Engine Control Telegraph 4) Thruster Control 5) General Alarm Panel 6) Control Knob Panel 7) Steering Shaft And Wheel 4.2.6 Ups 1) (6 Ea) Gxt 2 Kva 230 V 2) Ratings 2,000 Va / 1800 W 3) Battery Run Times: 2 Kva Models. 4) Parallel Ports (2kva) 5) Colored Graphic Lcd Display With Gravity Orientation 6) Even High Efficiency Up To 98% In Active Eco Mode 4.0   Visualization Hardware 4.3.1 40 ﾟ Aux Bridge Visual Display Unit 6 4.3.1 40 ﾟ Aux Bridge Visual Display (x6ea) 40 ﾟauxiliary Bridge Visualization Hardware Consisting Of: Visual Displays Specifications: 1) Size: 65” 2) Resolution: Full Hd 1920 X 1080 3) Contrast Ratio: 1,000:1 4) Response Time: 6 Ms 5) Display Port: Hdmi 6) Visual Display Mounting Bracket 7) Monitor, Network & Power Cables 8) Led (atleast 4k) 4.3.2 Computer For Visualization Unit 6 Minimum Computer Requirements: 1) Type Of Pc: Workstation With Cooling System 2) Cpu: Intel Core I5 Latest Generation Processor 3) Ram: 8gb 4) Ssd: 250gb M.2 5) Gpu: Rtx 3050 Or Above 6) Os: Ms Windows Pro 64 Bit 4.3.3 Speaker Unit 6 Speaker For Visual Sound Output: 1) Type: Desktop 2) Port: Mini Jack 3) Power: Usb 4.4 Debriefing Room 4.4.1 Tv Monitor 1) Size: At Least 77" 2) Smart Tv 3) Led (atleast 4k) 4) Wall Mounted. 5) Wireless Hdmi Transmitter And Receiver 4k 5.0 Server Rack, Door Access 1) (1 Ae) 32u Data Server Rack 2) (2 Ae) Patch Panel 24 Ports│19inches│cat6│for Gigabit Network, Ethernet, And Fast Ethernet│patch Panel 24p 3) Data Cabinet Shelf │shelves For 42u 600*1000mm Server Rack Cabinet│rack Shelf Size: 485*650mm 4) Power Distribution Unit (pdu) Power Strip Unit For Data Cabinet Rack High Quality 8 Gang Other Requirements: 1. Implementation A) A 3-years Warranty For The Computer Hardware And Console Peripherals. B) The Software Comes With A 3-year Warranty Inclusive Of New Updates. C) The Project Will Be Implemented Within 150 Calendar Days. Liquidating Damages Will Be Applicable For Any Delays. D) A Comprehensive Guide Will Be Provided, Offering Detailed Instructions On System Operation And Maintenance Activities, Facilitating Ease Of Use And System Upkeep. E) Onsite Training Sessions Will Be Conducted By Certified Instructors And Technical Experts, Facilitating Smooth Knowledge Transfer And Ensuring Proficient System Operation. Certificates Will Be Provided Upon Completion Of Training Sessions. F) Structured Cabling Standards To Establish A Reliable And Efficient Network Infrastructure. 1. The Simulator Manufacturer/supplier Should Be An Iso Certified Business. The Simulator Should Be Dnv-gl/ Class Nk Certified And May Also Certified By National Authorities Of United Kingdom And Russia. 2. The Supplier Shall Conduct An Annual Face-to-face Maintenance Session To Ensure The System's Optimal Functionality And Performance. 3. The Supplier Must Resolve Any Software Or Hardware Issues Within 2 To 5 Business Days Of Their Occurrence To Minimize Downtime And Disruptions. 4. All Hardware Installations Must Adhere To Software Specifications To Guarantee Seamless Integration And Operation. 5. The Hardware Must Provide Accommodate Software Updates, Including Patches, Bug Fixes, Feature Enhancements, And Security Updates, Without Significant Performance Degradation Or Compatibility Issues. 6. The Computer Hardware Supplied Must Be Sourced From Proven Technology Hardware Companies, Quality And Performance Standards To Ensure Optimal Functionality And Compatibility With The Software. 7. Bidders Are Required To Offer Continuous Retraining Sessions Free Of Charge During The Warranty Period To Ensure Users' Proficiency With The System. 8. Bidders Must Submit A 100% Credit Line Certificate Equivalent To The Approved Budget Ceiling To Demonstrate Financial Capability And Commitment. 9. Bidders Should Provide Manufacturer Authorization Or Exclusivity Certificate To Ensure The Authenticity And Legality Of The Supplied Products. 10. The Bidder Is Responsible For Performing A Thorough Site Inspection, And A Site Inspection Certificate Issued By The Agency Shall Be Submitted As Part Of The Eligibility Requirements. 11. The Bridge Simulator Is Ready For Seamless Integration With The Future Engine Simulator, Ensuring Compatibility And Functionality. 12. The Seven (7) Stations Can Connect And Enable Them To Interact With Each Other In A Coordinated Scenario. Part Ii. Other General Requirements Project Billboard/signboard Ea. 1 Occupational Safety And Health Program L.s 1 Mobilization/demobilization L.s 1 Part Iii. Civil, Mechanical, Electrical, & Sanitary/plumbing Works Part A. Earthworks Removal Of Structures And Obstruction L.s 1 Part C. Finishings And Other Civil Works Wall, Wood Frame, Fiber Cement Board 6mm M² 68.4 Tempered Glass Door, 12mm, Reflective M² 30.96 Aluminum Glass Window M² 24.84 Doors (flush) M² 4.2 Acoustical Ceiling Panel M² 32.87 Painting Works, Masonry/concrete M² 745.2 Painting Works, Wood M² 8.4 150mm Chb Nonload Bearing(including Reinforcing Steel) M² 4 Plain Cement Plaster Finish M² 61.3 Carpet Floor Tiles M² 33.75 Part D. Electrical Panelboard With Main And Branch Breakers L.s 1 Wires And Wiring Devices L.s 1 Network Cabling L.s 1 Door Access And Card Reader System L.s 1 Part E. Mechanical Airconditioning, Package/split Type L.s 1

Details: Description Quantity Unit Item Description Lot Full Mission Bridge Simulator Dnv Class A 1 1.1 Features And Application The Bridge Simulator Should Provide A Realistic, Ship-like Environment Based On Real Hardware Consoles And High- Quality Visualization. The Systems Include Major Components Such As Conning, Radar/ Arpa And Ecdis, Gmdss, Navigation Equipment, Bearing Finder, Steering Control Console, Engine Control, Auto Pilot System, Overhead Display, Etc. The Simulator Can Be Utilized To A Variety Of Navigation Techniques Under Different Environmental Conditions, Serving A Wide Range Of Purposes As Follows: 1. Control Of The Ship While Navigating In The Operational And Emergency Modes In Various Weather Conditions With The Possibility Of Setting Wind And Current Parameters; 2. Analysis Of The Above-water Situation In Day And Night Conditions; In Poor Visibility By Visible Navigation Lights And Information Received From Radar/ Arpa; 3. Use Of The Electronic Chart-based Navigational Information System (ecdis); 4. Practical Use Of Radio Equipment And Global Maritime Distress And Safety System (gmdss) Facilities; 5. Application Of The International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea; 6. Ship Control During Anchoring And Mooring; 7. Ship Control During Towing Operations; 8. Ship Control During Maneuvers "man Overboard"; 9. Rational Methods Of Ship Control In Case Of Main Engines (me) And Ship And Navigation Equipment Failures During Movement; 10. Eye Survey Of Above-water And Radar Situation, Determination Of Vessel Movement Elements; 11. Navigational Situation Assessment By Visual Observation During Day Time, By Lights At Night Time And By Observation Of Transmission Of Echo Signals On Ppi Simulators In Conditions Of Limited Visibility; 12. Visual Determination Of Vessel Movement Patterns, Maneuvering Capabilities And Dimensions; 13. Selection And Execution Of Collision Avoidance Maneuvers In Open Sea, During Night And In Limited Visibility Conditions Using Radar/arpa; 14. Evaluation Of Accuracy Of Primary And Secondary Information Received From Arpa, Consideration Of Factors Affecting Accuracy Of Arpa And Delay In Formation Of Secondary Radar Information; 15. Orientation Of Ships In Complex Navigation Conditions In Daytime And Nighttime And In Conditions Of Limited Visibility; 16. Use Of Ecdis For Preliminary And Executive Plotting, Practicing Correct Response To Emergency Signals Produced By Ecdis, Solution Of Chart-metric Tasks And Ensuring Safety Of Navigation With The Use Of Information Received From Ecdis; 17. Use Of Basic Capabilities Of Marine Mobile Service And Marine Mobile Satellite Service. 1.2 The Bridge Simulator Can Be Used For The Stcw Convention Competency Requirements And Simulation Objectives. The Following Are The Items Of Navigator Competence Related To Navigation Bridge Operations That Can Be Evaluated Using The Bridge Simulator. In Addition, The Following International Standards Have Been Considered In The Development Of The Full Mission Ship Control Simulator: Stcw Reference/competence Item/module Used Table A-ii/1.1 Plan And Execute A Passage And Determine Vessel’s Location Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.2 Maintain A Safe Navigational Watch Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Visualization Channel. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/1.3 Use Radar And Arpa To Maintain Navigational Safetys Hip Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa Imitator. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.4 Use Ecdis To Maintain Navigational Safetys Hip Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Bearing Station. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/1.5 Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls (alarms Panels). Table A-ii/1.6 Respond To A Distress Signal At Sea Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Navaids Simulation Module (ais). Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa. Ecdis Module. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/1.8 Transmit And Receive Information By Means Of Visual Signals Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Signaling System. Conning Display. Table A-ii/1.9 Maneuver The Ship Main Instructor And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/2.1 Plan Voyage And Navigatem Ain Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Table A-ii/2.2 Determine Position And Accuracy Of Resulting Position Fixes By Any Means Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Bearing Station. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/2.3 Determine And Consider Compass Errors Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Visualization Channel. Bearing Station. Conning Display. Table A-ii/2.4 Coordinate Search And Rescue Operations Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Sound System. Visualization Channel. Radar/arpa Imitator. Conning Display. Table A-ii/2.5 Establish Watchkeeping Procedures And Arrangements Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Exchange Data Module For Ibs. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Gmdss Support Module. Sound System. Visualization Channel. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module (gps/dgps, Loran-c, Ais, Ssas). Ecdis Module. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/2.6 Maintain Navigational Safety By Using Information From Navigational Equipment And Systems To Aid In Command Decision Makingm Ain Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Radar/arpa Imitator. Navaids Simulation Module (gps/dgps, Loran-c, Ais). Ecdis Module And Ecs Radar Overlay. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/2.7 Maintain Navigational Safety By Using Ecdis And Related Navigational Systems To Aid In Command Decision Makinge Cdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/2.10 Maneuver And Handle The Vessel In All Conditions Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/2.11 Remote Control Of Power Plant And Engineering Systems And Services Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Main Engine Control Module. Auxiliary Systems Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/3.1 Plan And Execute Coastal Passages And Determine Position Ecdis Module. Navaids Simulation Module. Ship Motion Simulation. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Table A-ii/3.2 Maintain A Safe Navigational Watch Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Visualization Channel. Ecdis Module. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/3.3 Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls (alarm Panels). Table A-ii/3.4 Respond To A Distress Signal At Sea Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Gmdss Support Module. Navaids Simulation Module (ais). Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Radar/arpa. Ecdis Module. Audio Logger. Table A-ii/3.5 Maneuver The Vessel And Operate Small Ship Power Plants Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/4.1◻operate The Ship And Follow The Helmsman’s Orders In Englishm Ain Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/4.2 Monitor The Situation With Sight And Hearing. M Ain Instructor Control And Monitoring. Visualization System. Sound System. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-ii/5.2 Participate In Berthing, Anchoring And Other Moorings Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Anchoring Module. Mooring Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-v/4-1.2 Monitor And Enforce Compliance With Legal Requirements Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-v/4-1.3 Apply Safe Work Practices, Respond To Emergencies Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Ship Motion Simulation. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-v/4-1.4 Ensure Compliance With Pollution Prevention Requirements And Prevent Environmental Hazards Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Engine Control Multi Touch Display. Evaluation And Assessment Module. Table A-v/4.2.3◻maintain The Safety Of The Ship’s Crew And Passengers And Maintain Life- Saving, Firefighting, And Other Safety Systems In Good Working Order. Main Instructor Control And Monitoring. Conning Display And Ship Hardware Controls. Engine Control Multi Touch Display. Steering Multi Touch Display For Control Of Autopilot And Steering. Evaluation And Assessment Module. In Addition, The Following International Standards Have Been Considered In The Development Of The Full Mission Ship Control Simulator: 1. International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea, 1972; 2. International Convention On The Safety Of Life At Sea, 1974; 3. International Convention On Standards For Training, Certification And Watchkeeping, 1978, 1995 As Amended In 2010; 4. Automatic Radar Plotting Aids Course. Regulations And Guide (department Of Trade, London 1981); 5. I Mo Resolution A. 477(12). Performance Standards For Radar Equipment. Adopted On November 19, 1981; 6. Imo Resolution A. 482(12); 7. Imo Resolution A. 483(12); 8. Imo Resolution A. 823(19). Performance Standards For Automatic Radar Plotting Aids. Adopted On November 23, 1995; 9. Imo Resolution Msc64(67). Recommendation On Performance Standards For Radar Equipment. Adopted On December 04, 1996. 10. Imo Resolution Msc232(82). Adopted On December 05, 2006. 1.3 Ship Motion Simulation Software The Ship Motion Simulation Program Contains Simulations Of Various Effects That Cannot Be Evaluated Separately From The Functionality Of A Particular Configuration: 1. Own Ships Motion; 2. Target Ships Motion; 3. Own Tugs Motion; 4. Target Tugs Motion; 5. Mooring And Towing Lines; 6. Rescue Objects; 7. Land Objects; 8. Scene Objects; 9. Weather Effects; 10. Miscellaneous. General: 1. 6 Dof Ship Motion Equation; 2. Hull Hydrodynamics Model; 3. Hull Aerodynamics Model; 4. Propulsion Plant Model; 5. Thruster Model; 6. Rudder Model; 7. Engine Model; 8. Model Of The Environmental Influence (wind, Sea, Current); 9. Shallow Water Influence Model; 10. Roll/pitch Wave Model; 11. Model Of The Distributed Current Effect; 12. Model Of Hydrodynamic Interaction With Another Ship And Water Area Boundary; 13. Multi-functional Autopilot Model; 14. Displacement Ship And Tug Models; 15. Optional: The Following Types Of Passive Vessel And Aerial Target Models: Hovercraft, Hydrofoils, Airplanes And Helicopters; Models Are Based On Real Prototypes And Adjusted Based On Sea And Tank Tests Data. Forces: 1. Forces And Moments Of Hydrodynamic And Aerodynamic Resistance Of The Ship’s Hull; 2. Force And Moment Of Impinging Flow On The Rudder Plane; 3. Force And Moment Of The Propeller; 4. Forces And Moments Of Bow And Stern Thrusters; 5. Forces And Moments Of Hydrodynamic Interaction With Other Vessels And Water Area Boundaries (bottom, Shoal, Canal, Walls); 6. Wind Forces And Moments; 7. Forces And Moments Of Field Currents. Effects: 1. Effect Of Shallow Water On Hull Drag Force (added Mass); 2. Effect Of Shallow Water On Reduction Of Propeller Thrust; 3. Effect Of Shallow Water On Reduction Of Steering Capacity; 4. Effect Of Shallow Water On Trim And Bank Changes; 5. Hydrodynamic Forces And Moments Caused By Passing Near Other Ships And Water Area Boundaries (uneven Seabed, Shoal, Mooring Wall); 6. Hydrodynamic Forces Caused By The Propeller Jet Of Another Vessel; 7. Vessel Suction Caused By The Impact Of The Propeller Jet On The Mooring Wall; 8. Mechanical Forces And Moments Caused By Interaction With Other Ships And Water Area Boundaries (mooring Walls); 9. Ship Collision; 10. Collision Between Ship And Mooring Walls Or Aids To Navigation; 11. Hard Grounding; 12. Soft Grounding. Propulsion Types: 1. Fpp; 2. Cpp; 3. Tunnel Thruster. Engines: 1. Low And Medium Rpm Reversible Diesel Engine (reversing With Compressed Air); 2. Medium And High Rpm Non-reversible Diesel Engine (reversing With Reversing Clutch) Steering Systems: 1. Balance Rudder 2. Steering Nozzzle 3. Z-drive 1.4 Ship Models The Bridge Simulator, Six Degrees Of Freedom Models Are Provided Not Only For Own Ship, But Also For Target Ships. Mathematical Modeling Of The Motion Of Each Ship Should Be Based On Integration Of A System Of Up To 12 Differential Equations Describing The Spatial Motion Of A Solid Body With 6 Degrees Of Freedom In A Fluid. 1. Wind Effect Modeling Includes: 2. Calculations Of Wind Center And Area Varying With Roll/pitch; 3. Calculations Of Forces And Moments As Wind Speed And Relative Bearing Change; 4. Calculations Of Resistance To These Forces Exerted By The Underwater Part Of The Ship's Hull. 5. Wave Effect Modeling Includes The Following Calculations: 6. Surge; 7. Sway; 8. Heave; 9. Yaw; 10. Roll; 11.p Itch. 12. Current Effect Modeling Includes: 1. Calculations Of The Instantaneous Value Of The Total Current Vector And Its Application Point In The Underwater Part Of The Ship's Hull; 2. Calculation Of The Corresponding Force And Its Momentum; 3. Calculation Of Water Resistance To This Force From The Opposite Board. Shallow Water Effect Modeling Includes: 1. Speed Reduction Calculations; 2. Calculations Of Deterioration Of Turning Characteristics; 3. Calculations Of Trim Changes Depending On The Ship's Speed And Depth Under The Keel (squat). Bank Effect (in General The Channel Walls) Simulation Consists Of The Following Calculations: 1. The Gradient Of The Bottom Rise In The Direction Of The Ship's Motion 2. Additional Arising Water Pressure Fields On The Ship's Hull; 3. Corresponding Total Forces And Moments. Modeling The Effects Of Interaction With Another Includes The Following Calculations: 1. Increased And Weakened Water Pressure Fields Occurring Around The Hulls Of Both Ships As A Function Of Approach Distance And Relative Speed; 2. Corresponding Total Forces And Moments, As Well As Their Application Points. The Library Of Own Ship Mathematical Models Should Include 55 Active Ships And Simulates The Movement Of Up To 100 Target Ships (60 Different Types, Jet Foil Hovercraft Helicopters And Airplanes) That Are Suitable For Training Purposes. The Library Of Own Ship Mathematical Models For The Bridge Simulator Should Include Tug Models That Realistically Simulate Tug Assistance When Maneuvering And Escorting. Tugs Can Be Controlled By The Instructor (automatically) And The Operator. The Simulator Includes The Ability To Simulate Pulling, Pushing, Reposition Towing And Escorting. The Tug Model Is Affected By The Own Vessel’s Speed, And As Such, Includes A Degradation Of Performance Depending On The Type Of Tug Being Simulated. It Is Possible To Work With Both Conventional And Tractor Tugs With Different Characteristics And Response Times. 1.5. The Bridge Simulator Visual System The Visual System Has An Optional Bird’s Eye Or Normal View, And The Operator’s Visual System Has A Normal View. In The Window The Instructor Can Move The Camera And Set The Yaw And Height Of The Camera. The Operator Can Activate The Binocular Mode In The Visualization System And Control The Zoom Factor, The Direction Along The Horizon And The Vertical View Of The Flight. Visual Scene Content: 1. 3 D Terrestrial Surface; 2. Controlling The Binoculars' Focal Length Settings; 3. Static Shore Objects; 4. Dynamic Coastal Objects (cranes, Vehicles, Trains, Radar Antenna Units); 5. Exercise Objects (ships, Tugboats, Helicopters, Aircrafts, Barges, Bollards, Mooring And Towing Lines, Ground Objects, Buoys); 6. Sar Objects (life Raft, Life Buoy, Mob, Sart, Helicopters, Aircrafts, Floating Debris, Damaged Tanker, Dye Marker, Oil Slick), International Flags And Pennants, Distress Signals (rockets, Parachute, Red Flare, Buoyant Smoke); 7. Aids To Navigation (buoys, Lighthouses); 8. Lights (navigational, Cultural Lights); 9. Visual Effect Of Icing; 10. Detailed Own Ship’s Bow; 11. Shadows For Vessels And Scene Objects. Sky: 1. Display Of Stars, Major Asterisms, The Moon, The Sun (according To Time Of Day And Geographic Coordinates), Clouds. Sea: 1. 3d Wavy Sea Surface; 2. Ripples; 3. Reflection Of The Sky, Sun, Clouds In The Sea; 4. Water Disturbances: Wake, Bow Waves, Foam From Breaking Waves. Weather 1. Precipitation; 2. Fog; 3. Rain Clouds; 4. Lightnings. 5.  Ice 1.6 Environmental And Weather Training The Bridge Simulated Environment Consists Of: 1. Region State Window; 2. Depth Set; 3. Stream; 4. Ground Quality; 5. Wave Condition; 6. Setting The Course And Speed Of Wind; 7. Setting The Strength Of The Sea Disturbance; 8. Setting Visibility Distance; 9. Setting Local Time; 10. Changing The Reflection And Color Of The Water; 11. Changing The Intensity Of Rain, Snow, Thunderstorm And Global Cloud Cover; 12. Setting Coordinates, Heading Speed And Density Of Falls And Clouds. 1.7 Operation Training The Bridge Simulator Shall Allow For Training And Certification Of Watch Officers, Chief Officers, Captains, And Pilots Serving On Commercial And Fishing Vessels Of 500 Gross Tonnage Or More In Accordance With The Requirements Of The Imo Stcw Convention And Model Courses: • 1.07 – Radar Navigation, Radar Plotting And Use Of Arpa; • 1.08 – Radar, Arpa, Bridge Teamwork And Search & Rescue; • 1.22 – Ship Simulator And Bridge Teamwork; • 1.27 – Operational Use Of Electronic Chart Display And Information System (ecdis); • 1.32 – Operational Use Of Integrated Bridge System; • 1.34 – Operational Use Of Ais; • 2.02 – Maritime Sar Coordinator; • 3.11 – Marine Accident And Incident Investigation With Compendium; • 3.19 – Ship Security Officer; • 3.23 – Actions To Be Taken To Prevent Acts Of Piracy And Armed Robbery; • 7.01 – Master And Chief Mate; • 7.03 – Officer In Charge Of Navigational Watch; • 7.05 –7.06 – Officer In Charge Of Navigational Watch Of Fishing Vessel; • 1.25 – General Operator’s Certificate For The Gmdss; • 1.26 – Restricted Operator’s Certificate For The Gmds 1.8 Operating Environment The Bridge Simulator Shall Contain 40 Sailing Areas As Well As Sub-tasks For Each Area. This Makes It Possible To Control The Motion Of All Active And Target Ships. The Simulator Should Be Designed To Manage The Training Complex, Create (design) The Exercises, Perform The Exercises In Real Time, Monitor The Exercise Execution By Operator Workstations, Change Environmental Conditions And Sailing Circumstances, Enter The Own Ship Failure Variables, Documenting And Archiving The Position And Activity Of The Ship Involved In The Exercise. 1.9 Simulated Exercise Areas Detailed 3-d Databases With High-resolution True-color Textures Can Be Displayed By Visualization Systems. The Spatial Terrain, 3-d Radar Model And Floating Object Models Support Water Level Modeling (tidal Effect). The Database Can Include Over 1000 Models Navigational, Cultural, And Industrial Objects And Consists Of More Than 500,000 Triangles. The Databases Should Be Supplied With A Set Page | 24 Technical Description Of Enc Vector Electronic Charts Matching The Database Content For Display On Ecdis And The Instructor Workstation. The Exercise Areas Shall Include But Not Limited To: 1. Harbours 2. Channels 3. Approaches 4. Open Sea 5. Rivers 6. Canals Possible Applications (but Not Limited To Those Listed): • Pilot Training; • Mooring Training; • General Navigation Training; • Ice Navigation Training; • Consulting And Port Construction; • Demonstration And Gaming Purposes; Object Library May Include (but Not Limited To Those Listed): • 3-d Underwater And Surface Terrain; • Aids To Navigation: Buoys, Lighthouses With Light Characteristics According To The British Admiralty List Of Lights And Vector Electronic Chart, Unique Labels (numbering), Shapes (top Marks), Audio Signals And Radar Beacons; • Models Of Port Facilities – Cranes, Tanks, Chimneys, Elevators, Containers, Vehicles, Towers Etc. (from A Library Of More Than 500 Objects); • Moving Targets. • Unique And Standard Models Of Buildings And Monuments, Bridges With A Night View Representation. • Piers, Jetties, And Bollard Barrels For Mooring Training. Exercise Areas For The Radar And Visualization Scenes Should Be Available From The Areas Library. 1.9.1 Sample Exercise Areas 1. Rostock, Germany 2. Bosphorus Strait, Turkey 3. Strait Of Gibraltar 4. Tangier, Morocco 5. Accra Tema, Ghana 6. Tokyo, Japan 7. Jakarta, Indonesia 8. Singapore, Singapore 9. Vungtau Thivai, Vietnam 10. Conakry, Guinea 11. St. Petersburg, Russia 12. Kozmino, Russia Based On Common Proved Excercises Due To Sailing Routes: Europe: English Channel E+w, Europort, Dover Strait, Algeciras, Danish Strait, Antwerp, Rotterdam Middle East: Suez Canal + Gulf, Hormuz Strait Africa: Tema, Apapa, Cape Town Americas: New York, Houston, Montreal, Great Lakes, Hudson, Mississippi, Panama Canal Asia: Singapore, Shanghai, Malacca Str, Manila Oceania: Sydney, Fremantle, Melbourne, Brisbane, Adelaide 1.10 Instructor Workstation The Instructor Workstation Is An Integral Part Of The Simulator And Is Designed To Control The Training Complex, Design (develop) Exercises, Perform Exercises In Real Time, Control Exercise Performance By Trainees, Change Environmental Conditions And Sailing Circumstances, As Well As Enter Own Ship Failure Variables, Document, And Archive The Position And Activity Of The Ship Involved In The Exercise. The Instructor Station Software Should Contain Navigation Areas As Well As Sub-tasks For Each Area, Allowing The Control Of All Active Vessels And Target Ships. 1.10.1 Main Instructor Control And Monitoring Module The Software Modules Should Provide A Possibility To Flexibly Configure The Required Bridge Configuration. General: 1. An Integrated Application For Exercise Editing, Conducting And Debriefing; 2. Highly Accurate Data Representation Based On Vector Diagrams (ability To Automatically Load All Diagrams Related To The Selected Game Area); 3. Tools For Creating Exercises And Automatic Competency Assessment Scenarios; 4. Control Of Simulator Session(s); 5. Continuous Automatic Recording Of Data During Exercise (main, Audio And Video Log Files); 6. Real Time, Slow Time, And Fast Time Modes; 7. Ability To Display And Print A New Pilot Card And A Table Of Maneuvering Characteristics Of The Ship; 8. Working With Measuring Tools: • Ability To Set Erbl; • Ability To Attach, Move Or Delete Erbl During An Exercise; 9. Ability To Attach Sart To The Life Raft; 10. Ability To Move Own Ship During Exercise Without Grounding Or Collision; 11. Ability To Apply Virtual Tug Force To 8 Points Of The Vessel’s Hull In Any Direction; 12. Display Of Actual Ship's Contours; 13. Continuous Display Of Parameters Of Vessel Movement And Environment Conditions: Course And Speed Of The Vessel, Course Over The Ground, Transversal Component Of Speed On The Bow And On The Stern, Gyro Heading, Rate Of Turn, Speed And Direction Of The Current And Wind, Height And Direction Of A Wave, Depth; 14. Independent Instructor Control For Wind And Swell Components Of The Wave; 15. Ability To Set Sea State Spectrum: • Pierson-moskowitz; • Phillips; • Ittc (international Towing Tank Conference); • Jonswap (joint North Sea Wave Project); • User. 16. Ability To Exclude Hydrodynamic Interaction With Mooring Walls In The Required Area; 17. Ability To Create A Template Containing A Set Of Objects (ships), Save And Use This Template In Other Exercises; 18. Ability To Save Environment Settings As A Template And Load A Previously Saved Template In Any Exercise And Area; 19. Mooring Operations: ◦ ◻ability To Set The Rope Material; ◦ ◻ability To Set The Initial State Of The Mooring Winch (render, Slack Away, Stop); ◦ ◻ability To Set Mooring Winch Parameters (speed, Pulling Force, Holding Force); ◦ ◻ability To Operate The Mooring Winch At The Instructor Workplace. 20. Anchor Operations: ◦ ◻ability To Set User Ground Type With Required Anchor Holding Force Coefficients; ◦ ◻display Of Anchor Position On The Instructor's Chart On The Ground. 21. Control Of Navigational Lights And Shapes: ◦ ◻ability To Control The Navigational Lights; ◦ ◻ability To Switch On/off Deck Lights On Target Ships. 22. Loading/discharging Of Own Ship During Exercises; 23. Weather Conditions Manager: ◦ ◻ability To Set Predefined Weather Conditions By Beaufort Number (wind, Wave, Whitecaps And Foam, 3d Clouds, Cloud Layer, Visibility) On The Fly; ◦ ◻ability To Set Customized Weather Conditions; ◦ ◻visual Effects: Rain And Snow (low, Medium, High), Lightning, Reflection, Translucency, Sea With White Caps, Foam, Splashes, Bow-wave; ◦ ◻separate Settings For Wind Wave And Swell; ◦ ◻manual Control Of Wind Direction And Strength; ◦ ◻adjustment Of Atmospheric Parameters – Temperature, Humidity, Pressure; ◦ ◻ability To Use Thunderstorm, Precipitation; ◦ ◻automatic Calculation Of The Position Of The Sun, Moon, Major Stars (up To 100) And Constellations, The Angle And Phase Of The Moon; ◦◻ability To Set Wave Spectrum Type: Pierson-moskowitz; Jonswap (joint North Sea Wave Project); Phillips; User-defined; 24. Rcc, Ship And Coast Stating Assignment; 25. Log Module With Possibility To Print Out And Create Archives; 26. Window For Listening/monitoring Of The Radiotelephone Traffic Including Possibilities To Interfere With Radiotelephone Traffic; 27. Ability To Introduce Background Noise From A List And Instrument Faults To The Trainee Stations. 28. Ability To Change Names, Call Signs, Mmsi, Telex Numbers And Inmarsat Mobile Numbers Of All Emulated Ship Stations And Coast Station According To The Needs Of Different Exercises; 29. Electronic Chart With Vessel Position Indication And The Ability To Change Position, Course And Speed; 30. Ability To Display And Instantly Change Trainee Station Positions On The Electronic Map For Search And Rescue (sar) Exercises; 31. Full Monitoring Of Any Trainee Workstation – The Ability To Monitor The Status Of Each Gmdss Unit And Listen To The Radio Traffic Of Each Trainee Station; 32. Connection To An External Printer; 33. Connection To An Active Speaker For Simultaneous Viewing Of Channels; 34. Providing Functions Of A Coast Telex Or Telephone Subscriber, Coast Radio Station And Rcc Operator From The Log Window; 35. Status Window For All Instruments At Any Workstation; 36. Ability To Log Communication And Trainee Actions For Playback And Later Review; 37. Database Of Coastal Stations, Navtex And Msi Stations And Inmarsat Shore-based Stations Plotted On The Chart; 38. Information About The Gmdss Sea Areas On The Chart; 39. Approximate Estimation Of Radio Wave Propagation In The Selected Frequency Range; 40. Evaluation And Assessment Module; 41. Navtex Functionality: ◦ ◻ability To Send Navtex Messages On Behalf Of A Navtex Station; ◦◻ability To Edit And Use The Navtex Station Used-defined List; ◦◻ability To Save And Use Navtex Message Templates. 42.“intercom” Panel. To Monitor Intercom Communication, Execute Voice Messages From The Instructor's Side. 43. Vhf Radio Station Module. To Monitor Vhf Communication, Send Voice Messages From The Instructor’s Side, Play Pre-recorded *.wav Files. 44. Coastal Radio Station Module. Screen Layout: 45. Use Of The Mouse Wheel For Chart Centering And Scaling; 46. On-screen Display Of Mooring Walls And Piers; 47. On-screen Display Of Actual Contours Of Any Ship; 48. On-screen Display Of The Object’s Route Line And Its Actual Track; 49. On-screen Display Of The True And Relative Speed Vectors; 50. Selectable Display Mode: True Motion, Relative Motion, Course Up Or North Up; 51. Display Of Prompt And Other Information In The Status Bar: ◦ ◻bearing And Distance From The Current Cursor On-chart Position To The Reference Point; ◦ ◻coordinates Of The Current Cursor On-chart Position; ◦ ◻depth In The Current Cursor Position; ◦ ◻current Exercise Time (absolute And Relative). 52. Displaying Of Object Tracks: Contour Or Point With Selectable Resolution, Track History And Time Stamp; 53. Displaying Of Walls And Piers; 54. Use Of A Mouse Wheel For Chart Centering And Scaling; 55. User Configurable Workplace; 56. Different Panels For The Control And Monitoring Of The Exercise Fulfillment: ◦◻reports Panel – To Form And Print Exercise Fulfillment Reports; ◦◻ Ship Info Panel – To Display Courses, Longitudinal And Transverse Speeds, Rates Of Turn For All The Ships Involved In The Exercise. ◦ ◻evaluation And Assessment Module Panel; ◦ ◻target Panel – To Control Vessel Target And Flight And Sar Objects; ◦ ◻objects Panel – To Promptly Select An Object On The Chart From The List Of All The Objects Available In The Exercise; ◦ ◻flags Panel – To Hoist/lower Ics Flag Signals On Any Of The Ships, Including Ability To Set And Keep Flag Templates ◦ ◻events Panel – For The Automatic Recording Of Any Important Events Related To The Incorrect Trainee Actions; ◦ ◻flash Light Panel – To Send Light Signals From Target Vessels, Including Automated Translation Into Morse Code; ◦ ◻magnetic Deviation Panel – To Configure The Magnetic Deviation Panel For The Vessels, Participating In The Exercise, Save The Panel And Apply Desired Template To Any Own Vessel, Print The Magnetic Deviation Table; ◦ ◻procedural Alarms Panel – For Defining User Set Of Alarm For Dedicated Vessels. 57. Setting Navigational Equipment Parameters And Faults: Radar, Gps, Loran C, Log, Gyro, Echo Sounder, Uais; 58. Setting The Exercise Weather And Bathymetric Conditions: Global And Local Zones, Import Of Tide And Current Databases;observing Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Ship Info Panel, Cpatcpa Panel, Events Panel; Observing Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Ship Info Panel, Cpatcpa Panel, Events Panel; 59.  Control Of Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Direct Control Of Steering And Propulsion Systems, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; 60. Setting Faults Of Navigational Equipment, Steering And Propulsion System, Fire And General Alarms; 62. Continuous Data Logging During Exercises; 61. Playback Of Recorded Exercises In Real And Fast-time Modes; 62. Performing Preliminary Exercises On The Map To Check Their Suitability For Training On The Simulator; 63. Distress Signals (flare, Smoke Signals, Dye Markers); 64. Adding New Target Ships; 65. Changing Weather Conditions; 66. Moving Buoys, Turning Off Lights On Them And Hiding Them On Both The Visualization System And Radar; 67. Control Of Automatic Tugboats On Commands From The Bridge Or From The Instructor; 69. Generating And Printing Exercise Reports Exercise Objects: 1. collection Of 6-dof Ship Models; 2. Sar Objects: Life Raft, Mob, Damaged Tanker, Sart, Damaged Burning Tanker, Search And Rescue Transponder (sart), Emergency Position 3. Indicating Radio Beacon (epirb), Oil Slick, Helicopter Target, Aircraft Target, Floating Debris; 4. Mooring Objects: Bollard On Any Of Mooring Walls, Bitts On Another Ship, Bollard On Any Of Mooring Walls, Bitts On Another Ship, Mooring Buoy Of Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring (calm), Mooring Buoy Of Single Anchor Leg Mooring (salm); 5. Coastal Objects: Moving Cranes, Cars, Trains, Radar Antennae, Rocket Launcher, Hangar, Cistern, Signal Port Station Tableau, Etc.: Visual And Radar Images; 6. Global And Local Weather Zones: Wind, Current, Sea State, Visibility, Precipitations; 7. Fishing Objects: Fish Shoals, Underwater Pinnacles, Fishing Buoys, Lines And Zones; 8. Sound Velocity In The Water Affecting The Performance Of Hydroacoustic Fish Finder Equipment; 9. Rain Clouds; 10. Fog Areas; 11. External Tide And Current Data (enc Databases); 12. Display Of Wave And Current Strength And Direction At Any Point In The Exercise; 13. Adjustment Of The Ship Model Characteristics; 14. Setting Operation Modes Of Navigational Aids, Their Errors And Malfunctions: Radar, Gps, Loran-c, Log, Gyro, Sounder, Uais; 15. Performing Preliminary Exercises On The Map To Check Their Suitability For Training On The Simulator; • ◻control Of Own Ships And Targets On The Vessel: Direct Control Of Steering Gear And Propulsion, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; • ◻control Of External Forces On The Chart (virtual Tug Force) Applied To 8 Points Of The Ship Hull In Any Horizontal Direction Along The Waterline; •◻saving An Exercise With Initial Conditions At Any Stage Of Playback. Trainee Mission Explaining: • ◻loading A Previously Created Exercise On A Chart; • ◻playing The Exercise On The Chart To Explain The Task; • ◻uploading A Sample Log Of The Same Exercise To Explain The Correct Actions. Simulator Session(s) Control: • ◻exercise(s) Start, Pause, Re-start After The Pause, Stop On Bridge(s); • ◻setting The Initial Position For Own Ships; • ◻entering Faults Of Navigation Systems, Steering Gear, Propulsion Plant, Fire And General Alarm; • ◻ability To Set Faults Of Navigational Equipment; • ◻pulling Apart Ships That Have Collided Or Run Aground; • ◻control Of Target Vessels, Hoisting Flags Of The International Code Of Signals, Turning Their Sound Signals On And Turning Their Lights On/off; 16. I Cs-69 Flags (international Flags And Pennants): • ◻26 Alphabet Flags; • ◻10 Numeral Pennants; • ◻3 Substitute Pennants; • ◻1 Answering Pennant. • ◻control Of Daylight Shapes On Vessels; • ◻distress Signals (flare, Smoke Signals, Dye Markers); • ◻changing Weather Conditions; • ◻adding New Target Ships; • ◻moving Buoys, Turning Off Lights On Them And Hiding Them On Both Visualization System And Radar; • ◻controlling Automatic Tugboats On Commands From The Bridge Or From The Instructor; • ◻using The Report Generator Wizard Tool For Printing. Own Ship Simulation Data: On Request, The Following Readings And Characteristics Of The Own Ship Are Displayed On The Monitor Of The Instructor's Workstation: • ◻vessel Number, Designation And Model Type; • ◻main Dimensions; • ◻displacement; • ◻ship’s Time; • ◻ship’s Gyro-compass Course Over Ground And Through Water; • ◻longitudinal And Transverse Components Of Speed Through Water; • ◻ship Speed Over Ground And Through Water; • ◻bow Velocity And Stern Velocity Over Ground; • ◻heeling, Trim And Center Of Gravity Elevation; • ◻angular Speed Of Ship Turns; • ◻current Rudder Blade Position And “put The Rudder Over” Command; • ◻current Position Of Propeller(s) And Pitch Change Command; • ◻current Rotation Speed Of Propeller(s); • ◻current Load Of Main Engine(s); • ◻thrusters Operating Mode; • ◻geographic And Cartesian Coordinates Of Vessel Location; • ◻distance Traveled By The Vessel From The Exercise Start Point; • ◻depth Under The Ship’s Keel; • ◻distance And Bearing Relative To Any Active Ship; • ◻cpa And Tcpa From Any Ship To Other Vessels. Passive Ships (target-ships) Simulation Data: • ◻on Request, The Following Indicators And Motion Characteristics Of The Target Ship Are Displayed On The Instructor's Workstation: • ◻target Ship Number And Type; • ◻cog; • ◻sog; • ◻geographic And Cartesian Position Coordinates; • ◻distance And Bearing Relative To Any Active Ship; • ◻the Coordinates Of The Route Change Point And The Time To Pass That Point. Evaluation And Assessment Module: The Evaluation And Assessments Module Are Designed For The Evaluation And Assessment Of A Range Of Predefined Assessment Parameters From The Following Categories: • ◻planning And Conducting A Passage And Determine Position; • ◻maintain Safe Navigational Watch; • ◻using Radar And Arpa To Maintain Navigational Safety; • ◻ability To Operate And Analyze Information Obtained From Arpa; • ◻respond To Emergencies; • ◻use Imo Standard Marine Communication Phrases And Use English In Writing And Speaking; • ◻transmit And Receive Information Using Visual Signals; • ◻maneuver The Ship; • ◻colreg. The Bridge Simulator Should Have The Ability To Set Up A Scoring And Grading System To Evaluate The Operator’s Performance. The Program Allows The Instructor To Monitor The Results Of The Bridge Team / Operator Workstation Performance During The Following Scenarios: 1. Own Ship Collision; 2. Own Ship Collision With A Beacon; 3. Running Aground On Own Ship; 4. Distances For Channel Coast; 5. Own Ship Collision With Another Vessel; 6. Own Ship Collision With The Shore; 7. Own Ship’s Anchor Chain Breakage; 8. Own Ship’s Mooring Line Breakage; 9. Engine Overload. For Each Item The Following Can Be Recorded: • ◻time • ◻position; • ◻depth; • ◻distance Traveled; • ◻hdg; • ◻cog; • ◻log • ◻sog; • ◻angular Velocity; • ◻prow. Doppler Velocity; • ◻stern Doppler Velocity; • ◻ort. Velocity; • ◻list; • ◻trim; • ◻engines Controller Position; • ◻main Engines Load; • ◻vpp Angles; • ◻propellers Rpms; • ◻rudder Setter; • ◻rudder Blade Position; • ◻thrusters Loading. 1.10.2 Instructor Module’s Main Screen General Requirement: 1. Integrated Application For Editing, Running And Debriefing Exercises. 2. High-quality Vector Chart Representation With The Ability To Load Multiple Charts; 3. Displaying Of The Actual Ship Contours; 4. Display Of Object Tracks: Contour Or Point With Selectable Resolution, Track History And Time Stamps; 5. Display Of Walls And Piers; 6. Displaying Of True Or Relative Velocity Vectors; 7. Display Mode Selection: True Or Relative Movement; 8. Using The Mouse Wheel For Chart Scaling; 9. User Configurable Workplace; 10. Setting Parameters And Faults Of Navigation Equipment: Radar, Gps, Loran C, Log, Gyro, Echo Sounder, Uais; 11.s Etting Weather And Bathymetric Conditions: Global And Local Zones, Import Of Tide And Current Databases (ecdis); 12. Monitoring Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Ship Information Page Including Events Panel, Environment Page, Stats Page Including Cpa-tcpa Panel; 13. Monitoring Own Ships And Targets On The Chart: Direct Control Of Steering And Propulsion Systems, Autopilot, Mooring Lines, Anchors; 14. Setting The Navigational Equipment Faults, Steering And Propulsion, Fire And General Alarms; 15. Continuous Data Logging During Exercises; 16. Live And Fast-time Playback Of Recorded Exercises; 17. Generation And Printing Of Exercise Reports. Exercise Objects: 1) Collection Of 6-dof Ship Models; 2) Sar Objects: Life Raft, Mob, Damaged Tanker, Sart, Helicopter Target; 3) Global And Local Weather Zones: Wind, Current, Sea State, Visibility, Precipitation; 4) Rain Clouds; 5) External Tide And Current Data (enc Databases). Uais Training: 1. Ability To Configure Own Ship And Target Ship Parameters For Ais Position, Ship Static And Voyage Related Data Reports; 2. Possibility To Send Ais Messages To Own Ships; 3. Possibility To Monitor The Exchange Of Ais Messages; 4. Ability To Enter Fault Data Into The Ais Transponder. 1.10.3 Instructor Gmdss Module The Instructor Gmdss Module Of The Bridge Simulator Should Have The Following Abilities: • ◻ability To Connect To The Gmdss Simulator; • ◻continuous Audio Logging Of Information Exchange From The Operator Workstation On The Bridge (requires A Gmdss Module); • ◻exercise Monitoring With A Video Camera (requires An Additional Visualization Module); Radar Exercise Monitoring (requires An Additional Radar/arpa Simulation Module 1.11 Radar / Arpa Module • ◻the Bridge Simulator (radar/arpa) Module Should Have The Following Capabilities • ◻arpa/radar Software On The Bridge; • ◻selective Radar On The Instructor Workstation; • ◻radar Simulator On The Bridge; General Information: • ◻display Simulations Of The Following Radar Types: Target Tracking (arpa/ais): • ◻full Tt Functionality; • ◻plotting Up To 100 Targets; • ◻displaying Up To 1,000 Ais Targets; • ◻the Ais Symbol Shows Whether A Target Is A Sleeping Target, A Normal, A Selected, A Dangerous Or A Lost Target. Automatic Acquisition Zones: • ◻the Two Auto-capture Zones Can Be Set In A Sector Or In Any Shape; • ◻targets In The Auto-capture Zone Are Displayed With A Reverse Triangle; • ◻the Operator Can Manually Acquire Important Targets Without Restriction, Which Is An Important Aid And Source Of Information For Evaluating The Situation. Guard Zones And Anchor Watch Zone: • ◻guard Zones Generate Visual And Audible Alarms When Targets Enter Zones Set By The Operator; • ◻one Of The Guard Zones Can Be Used As An Anchor Watch To Alert The Operator When Own Ship Or Targets Drift Outside The Set Zone. • ◻radar Simulator On The Bridge; Cpa Alarm: • ◻the Target Tracking Symbol Changes To A Triangle When Its Predicted Course Deviates From The Operator’s Set Cpa/tcpa; • ◻the Operator Can Easily Change The Vector Length To Estimate The Trend Of The Target’s Movement. Target Trials: • ◻the Target Trail Feature Generates Single-color Or Gradual Shading Afterglow On All Objects On The Display To Help Clarify The Traffic Situation; • ◻echo Trails Can Be Displayed In Either True Or Relative Motion; • ◻relative Trails Show Relative Motion Between Targets And Own Ship; • ◻true Motion Trails Require A Gyrocompass Signal And Own Ship Speed Input To Cancel Own Ship Motion And Represent The True Motion Of Targets According To Their Speeds And Courses Over The Ground. Radar Map: • ◻a Radar Map Is A Combination Of Lines And Marks That Operators Can Use To Define And Enter Data About The Navigation Area And Route; • ◻the Radar Map Can Be Saved To Facilitate Reuse In A Frequent Navigation Area; • ◻planned Routes Created On The Ecdis Can Be Transferred Onto The Radar Display When Connected To The Ecdis Network. Radar Keyboard: • ◻full Control – All Radar Operations Can Be Performed Using The Keyboard Or On-screen With The Ps Trackball; • ◻actual Marine - Approved Radar Keyboard • ◻dedicated Buttons For Basic Functions; • ◻large, Easy-to-use Analog Controls For Ebl, Vrm, Gain, Sea And Rain. 1.12 Ecdis Module Dnv Type-approved Ecdis And Must Meet The Requirements Of The Following Regulations/ Standards: Solas 74, Reg. V/18.1, V/19.2.1.5, 2000 Hsc Code 13.8, 13.17.1, Imo Res. A 817(19) As Amended By Msc.64 (67) Annex 5 And By Msc.86(70) Annex 4, Imo Res.a.694(17) And Developed In Accordance With The Imo/iec Requirements For Integrated Navigation Systems (draft Iec 61924). Areas Of Application: 1. Bridge Task Application For The Training In The Use Of An Electronic Chart Display And Information System; 2. Ecdis Software On The Bridge; 3. Selective Ecdis On The Instructor Workstation; 4. Ecdis Simulator On The Bridge. General Information: 1.   Compatible Cartography: ◦ I◻ho/ S-57 Edition 3 Vector Chart (iho S-63 Data Protection Scheme); ◦ ◻arcs Raster Chart; ◦ ◻enc ◦ ◻dnv Type Approved Senc Format, Cm-93/3 ◦ ◻perpetual License ◦ ◻compatibility With Admiralty Information Overlay (aio) For Further Navigation Safety. 2.   Interface With Position Sensors, Gyro, Log, Echo- Sounder And Radar For Radar Overlay, Target Track Info, Route, And Waypoint Exchange. 3. Ecdis Operating Modes: ◦ ◻monitor Mode, Ship’s Behavior Can Be Monitored Relative To The Planned Route. A Variety Of Voyage Monitoring Tools Are Built Into The Instant Access Panel; ◦ ◻chart Maintenance Mode, Allows Operators To Work With Charts To Be Used In The System; ◦ ◻plan Mode, Operators Can Generate And Edit Route Plans As Well As Custom Charts. It Is Also Possible To View Various Detailed Reports Generated By Ecdis On Planned Routes And Custom Charts. 4. Route Planning: ◦ ◻operators Can Use The Trackball To Enter Waypoints Directly Onto The Chart; ◦ ◻operators Can Edit The Name, Steering Mode, Radius, Channel Limit And Other Parameters Of Waypoints. 5. Creating User Chart: ◦ ◻operators Can Create A Custom Chart; ◦ ◻a User Chart Is A Layer Consisting Of Marks And Lines That Can Be Created And Overlaid On The Chart; ◦ ◻user Charts Are Intended For Marking Safety-related Areas And Objects. 6. Quick Access To Various Reports: ◦ ◻route Reports On Waypoint And Passage Plan, As Well As User Chart Reports On Tidal, Lines, User-entered Objects And User-defined Areas Can Be Accessed Directly For Viewing. 7.marine Type Approved Keyboard: ◦ ◻panel-mounted Silicone Rubber Keyboard With Built-in Waterproof 25mm Trackball And Scroll Function; ◦ ◻fully Certified To Iec60945, Iacs E10, Iec 60092-504, Dnv 2.4. 1.13 Conning (conning Display) Module The Program Should Be Designed For Ship Handling, Mooring, Automatic Tug, And Navigational Instruments. Multi-level "call-up" Pages Of The Conning Display: 1. General Characteristics, Me And Autopilot Controls (“main” Page); 2. Mooring Gears And Roll And Pitch Controls (“anchor & Mooring” Page); 3. Repeater Gyrocompass And Satellite Compass (“compasses” Page); 4. Anemometer, Digital Barograph, Water And Air Temperature And Humidity Sensors (“environment” Page); 5. Binoculars Control, Observer Position Control, Searchlight Control (“light & View” Page); 6. Signal Flags, Sound Signals And Figures (“signals” Page); 7. Own Ship Data (page "ship"); 8. Fire Alarm Control Panel And Alarm List (page "alarm"); 9. Azimuth Propeller Thruster Control, Azimuth Indicators, Thruster Indicator Loading (page "azimuth"); 10. Vhf Radio (page "vhf"); 11.i Ntercom (page "intercom"); 12. Echo Sounder (page "echo Sounder"); 13. Pilot Card (page "pilot Card"); 14. M Aneuvering Table (page "maneuvering Table"); 15. Training Result And Vdr (page "assessment/vdr"). Main Features: 1. Rudder Position Master Operation Mode Setup; 2. Rudder Position Presetting; 3. Setting The Operating Mode Of The Bow Thruster And Aft Thruster; 4. Autopilot Control; 5. Setting The Limit For The Signal Response To A Hazardous Depth Under The Keel; 6. Me Control; 7. Initiation Of The Binoculars; 8. Setting The Observer’s Angle Of View Relative To The Horizon And Vertical Line; 9. Setting The Observer’s Position In The Visualization System; 10. Control Of Sound Signals, Lights And Figures; 11. Control Of The Anchoring Gear, Mooring Lines And Fenders When Mooring To A Quay And Vessel; 12. Tug Control. Information Display: 1. Values Of Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions; 2. Control Pitch Propeller Turning Angle Values; 3. Rudder Responding Values; 4. Rate Of Turn Angular Velocity Values; 5. Operation Mode Of The Bow Thruster And Aft Thruster; 6. Gyro Compass And Magnetic Compass Course; 7. Log Speed And Speed Over The Ground; 8. Bow Thrust And Stern Speed; 9. Wind Speed And Direction (true/relative); 10. Speed And Direction Of Streams (current); 11. Date & Time Of Ship; 12. Distance Traversed; 13. Depth Under Keel; 14. Ship’s Geographical Coordinates; 15. Distance From Ship To Shore; 16. Me Loads; 17. Heel And Trim Of The Vessel; 18. Anchor Chain Length, Water Angle; 19. Length Of Mooring Lines; 20. Fire Detection Control System, List Of System Failures Alarms; 21. Vhf Point With Channel Selector; 22. Pilot Card, Maneuvering (wheelhouse Poster); 23. Assessment & Vdr. 1.14 Steering Control (multi-touch Pc) Module This Module Should Have The Following Capability: The Hdg Main Is The Start Page Of The Display For The Heading Control Mode Operation. The Hdg Main Page Is Accessible Via The Corresponding Soft Key Of The Operation Mode. The Nav Main Is The Start Page Of The Display For Operation In Waypoint Steering Mode. The Nav Main Page Is Accessible Via The Corresponding Operation Mode Soft Key. The Connected Route Planning System Generates All Necessary Data For Waypoint Steering. The Nfu/fu Display Page Has Two Rudder Setting Options: • ◻the Nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys; • ◻the Fu Mode: Entry Of The Rudder Angle Value With The Rotary Knob. 1.15 Propulsion Control (multi-touch Pc) Module This Module Should Have The Following Capability: • ◻speed Digital Indicator Of Speed In Knots; • ◻main Engine Port And Main Engine Stbd Gauges To Display Rpm, Pitch And Speed Shaft Values Of Respective Me; • ◻two Emergency Engine Order Telegraphs (eeot) For Use In Case Of Machine Telegraph Failure; To Operate The Eeot Turn The Central Knob To The Required Position On The Scale; Corresponding Button Starts Flashing And Buttons Flash On The Telegraph Repeaters In Ecr And Engine Room Lop; At The Same Time Audible Signal Starts; When The Command Is Confirmed At The Ecr/er, The Button Lights Up Continuously On All Telegraphs And Audible Signal Stops; • ◻e/r Deadman System Lamps Light Up To Indicate The System Status: System On And E/r Deadman Alarm; • ◻thruster Control Display For The Bow And Stern Thruster Control; • ◻generator Status Indication; • ◻control Of Rudder Pumps And Synchronization Of Rudder Fu Mode. 1.16 Navigation Aid Instruments Module Areas Of Application: • ◻bridge Task Application. The Program Is Designed To Simulate Satellite Navigation Systems And Shore-based Radio Navigation Systems; • ◻data Generated By This Module Are Transmitted To Ecdis, Radar/arpa And Auto-pilot. 1.16.1 Marine Gps Areas Of Application: 1. Automatic And Manual Operation Modes; 2. Position Indication, Geodesic Datum; 3. Waypoint Input And Storage; 4. Dead Reckoning Mode; 5. Steering Data Computation; 6. Man Overboard; 7. Instructor-controlled Faults And Errors: Power Failure. 1.16.2 Ais 1. Manual Data Entry, Updating And Data Retrieval Using The Minimum Ais Display Simulator; 2. Manual Data Entry, Updating And Data Retrieval Using The Ecdis Simulator And/or Radar; 3. Transmission Of Dynamic Information At Intervals Consistent With Applicable Requirements; 4. Periodic Automatic Transmission Of Static Information To Coastal Stations And Other Vessels Equipped With Ais Equipment; 5. Receiving And Processing Information From Coastal Stations And Other Vessels; 6. Sending Response Messages With Minimum Delay To Safety Or High Priority Requests; 7. Transmitting Ais Data Of Target Vessels To Radar Simulator For Display; 8. Transmitting Ais Data Of Target Vessels To The Ecdis Simulator For Display. 1.16.3 Bnwa System 1. Provides Light And Sound Signals To Attract The Attention Of The Officer On Watch And, If The Officer Does Not Respond, To Alert The Simulator Instructor; 2. The Bnwa Simulator Operating Modes, The Sequence Of Light And Sound Signals, And The Characteristics Of The Light And Sound Signals Meet The Requirements Of Imo Resolution Msc.128 (75). 1.16.4 Navigation Echo Sounder 1. Depth Measurement From 1 To 200 M; 2. Audible Alarm When The Vessel Reaches The Target Depth; 3. Manual Depth Setting; 4. Depth Information Display In Two Forms Simultaneously: ◦ In A Graphic Form, Displaying The Depth Profile On The Ship's Path; ◦ In Numerical Form Showing The Current Depth. 1.16.5 Doppler Speed Log 1. Display Of The Vessel’s Speed Relative To Water And Relative To The Ground; 2. Distance Traveled Display; 3. Transmission Of Vessel Speed To Radar, Ecdis And Ais Simulators. 1.16.6 Vdr Remote Alarm Panel The Interval For Recording Various Data, Including Sound, Is As Follows: 1. Radar / Ecdis Video Signals: Every 15 Seconds; 2. Audio Data Of Bridge And Vhf Conversations: In Real Time; 3. Proposals In Iec Format: Upon Receipt; 4. Analog And Digital Data: Every Second. 1.17 Bearing Finder 1. Bridge Task Application. Program Represents A Visual Channel (visual) With A Capability To Accurately Measure The Observation Angle. 2. Telescoping Bearing Sight With Optical Magnification 3. Level Indicator For Horizontal Alignment Of The Bearing Repeater 4. Accuracy Of Azimuth And Elevation Angle Settings Is 0.1degree. 1.18 Pelorus Stand – Bearing Repeater Gyrocompass 1. The Gyrocompass Is Essentially A North-seeking Gyroscope And Which Is Connected By Cables To Gyro Compass Repeater Located Through The Ship. 2. The Pelorus Is A Key Instrument In Piloting The Ship Closed To Shore And Obtaining The True Direction Of Nearby Ships. 3. The Pelorus Is Mounted On The Center Of Bridge Used As The Most Accurate Reference. 1.19 Overhead Display Mode Areas Of Application: • ◻ Bridge Task Application. The Program Is Designed For Overhead Display Simulation. • ◻ This Module Should Run On Separate Pcs. The Sensor Can Be Set For Each Display And Each Output Type For Single, Dual, Or Triple Display. The Location Of The Displays Can Be Changed And Configured To Match The Display Type. Information Displayed: 1. Engine Load; 2. Engine Rpm; 3. Propeller Pitch; 4. Speed Of Log; 5. Heading; 6. Passed Distance; 7. Vessel Time; 8. Doppler; 9. Rate Of Turn; 10. Rudder Angle; 11. Pitch And Roll; 12. Depth; 13. Wind Speed And Direction. 1.20 Gmdss Operator Module The Gmdss Operator Module Should Simulate The Electromagnetic Environment Affected By: 1. Operator-controlled Radio Stations On Vessels; 2. Coastal Stations; 3. Rescue Coordination Center Radio Stations; 4. Distortion Induced By Propagation Interference. The Software Should Simulate The Operation Of The Following Gmdss Devices: 1. Vhf Radio Station With Dsc Vhf, 2. Mf/hf Radio Station With Dsc Mf/hf, 3. Mf/hf Mf/hf Radio Telex; 4. Inmarsat-c Ses, Egc Rx With Lrit And Ssas, 5. Inmarsat Fleet Broadband, 6. Iridium Gmdss Satellite Communication System; 7. Inmarsat-b Ship Earth Station Nera Saturn-b (optional); 8. Inmarsat-fleet 77 Ship Earth Station Nera –f77 (optional); 9.two Band Receiver Navtex, 10. 2182 Khz Watch Receiver; 11.c Ospas-sarsat Epirb; 12. Sart Tron Sart 20, 13. Ais Sart Tron Ais Sart; 14. Two-way Vhf Radio Station Tron Tr 30 Gmdss And Maritime Vhf Radio; 15. Vhf Radio For Two-way Communication Between Vessel And Aircraft, Tron Tr 30 Air, 16. Mcmurdo Fast Find 220 Plb; 17. Plb Ais Mcmurdo S20; 18. Gmdss Alarm Panel 19. Radio Direction Finder Rt-500-m (marine); 20. Power Switchboard 21. Battery Charger; 22. Virtual Printer. 2.0 Main Instructor Station 2.1 Instructor Station 2.1.1 License Of The Navigation Instructor Navigation Instructor Software Includes: 1. Navigation Instructor 2. Evaluation And Assessment 3. Tug And Mooring 4. Radar/arpa 5. Enc: • ◻dnv Type Approved • ◻senc Format, Cm-93/3 • ◻perpetual License Bird Eye Of Instructor 6. Debriefing System 2.1.2 License Of The Gmdss Instructor Gmdds Instructor Software Includes: 1. Gmdss Instructor 2. Group 3. Setup 4. Maps 5. Equipment Status 6. Knowledge Test 7. Estimated Results By The Program 8. Scenario Editor Of The Estimator 9. Software Control Of The Handset 2.1.3 Coastal Radio Stations Coastal Radio Stations Includes: 1. Coastal Radio Stations 2. Sar Coordination Center Radio Stations 3. Radio Disturbances 2.2 Instructor Station Table And Computers 2 2.2.1 Instructor Station Table Instructor Station Table Specification: 1. Table Size: L 2300 X W 700 X H 750 Mm 2. Material: Formica Matt Laminate On Chipboard 3. Ergodynamic Chair 1 Unit 2.2.2 Instructor’s Computer 2.2.3 Instructor Station 1 1 Pc • ◻computer: • 2x 24” Monitor O1 X Pc • Intel Core I5 Processor O1 6 Gb Ram • 256 M.2 Ssd • R Tx 4070 Or Higher O1 X Keyboard/mouse • 1 X Ups 1.5kva 1 Pcs • ◻printer: • 1 X Laser Printer A4 • A4 Print Speed Up To 48 Ppm • Auto 2-sided (duplex) Printing, 1-line Lcd • Wifi, Airprint, Mopria, Wifi Direct, Lan, Usb 2.0 • Colored Printer Set • ◻nas And Exercise Server • N As Disk Station Quadcore Processor O2 X 4 Tb Hdd Set • ◻drone View Monitor (environment View Of Instructor) • ◻smart Tv • W/ 55” Tv Led 1 Unit 2.2.4 Instructor Station 2 ◻requirements: • 2x 24” Monitor • 1x Pc • Intel Core I5 Processor • 16 Gb Ram • 256 M.2 Ssd • Rtx 4070 Or Higher • 1x Keyboard/mouse • 1x Ups 1.5kva 1 Unit 2.2.5 Server Station Requirements: • ◻computer: • 1x 24” Monitor O1 X Pc • Intel Core I5 Processor O1 6 Gb Ram • 256 M.2 Ssd • Rtx 4070 Or Higher O1 X Keyboard/mouse • 1 X Ups 1.5kva 1 Unit 2.2.6 Handset Handset Includes: 1. Handset 2. Cradle With A Ptt Switch 3. Usb Interface Board 4. Handset Box 1 Unit 2.2.7 Speaker Speaker Requirements: 1. Type: Desktop 2. Port: Mini Jack 3. Power: Usb 1 Unit 2.2.8 Network Switch Network Switch Specifications Manage: 24 Ports 10/100/1000mbps Rj45 Ports Set 2.2.9 Cctv Monitoring 1 Pc Nvr Atleast 16 Channel 9 Pcs 6 Mp Fixed Dome Network Camera With Mic 2 Pcs 8 Mp Bullet Camera With Mic 2 Pcs 6tb Storage (design For Cctv) 1 Pc Network Poe Switch Specification: 24 Ports 10/100/1000mbps Rj45 Ports 1 Lot >upvc, Conduit, Pull Box, Fittings, Hanger, And Support And Other Materials If Needed. Including Utp Cat6 Shielded Pure Copper, Fiber Optic Cable. >installation, Engineering Labor For Entire Project. Cable Laying, Labeling, Harnessing, Project Management, Mobilization And Di-mobilization 3.0 Main Bridge Simulator Software 3.1.1 Conning Display Conning Display Software Consisting Of: 1.main Features A) Rudder Operation Mode Setup B) Rudder Presetting C) Bow & Stern Thruster Presetting D) Autopilot Control E) Signal Response Limit Presetting F) Me Control G) Binocular Initiation H) Observer’s Vision Angle Presetting I) Observer’s Position Presetting J) Sound Signals, Lights & Figures Control K) Anchor Gear, Mooring & Fenders Control L) Tugs Control 2. Information Display A) Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions Values B) Turning Angle Of Cpp Value C) Rudder Responding Value D) Angle Of Rate Value E) Gyro & Magnetic Compass Course F) Log Speed & Speed Over Ground G) Load Of Bow And Speed Of Stern H) Velocity & Direction Of Wind (true/relative) I) Velocity & Direction Of Stream (current) J) Ship Date & Time K) Traversed Distance L) Depth Under Keel M)  Distance From Shore N) Me Loads O) Ship Heel And Trim P) Fire Detection Control System, System Failures Alarms List Q) Vhf Point With A Channel Selector R) Pilot Card, Maneuvering S) Assessment & Vdr T) Arpa Keyboard Control 3.1.2radar/arpa Display Radar/arpa Software Consisting Of: 1. Imitating Display Of Raday/arpa A) Range Scale B) Display Modes: Head Up, North Up, Tm, Rm C) Display Of Charts Of The Region 2. Arpa A) Acquisition Modes B) Target Canceling Modes C) Target Data Output Time D) Target Information E) Visual & Acoustic Alarms F) Cpa, Tcpa Limits Setting G) Trial Maneuver 3. Radar Parameter A) Operating Frequency (s-band, X-band) B) Antenna Rpm (20, 6- Rpm) C) Direction Pattern Width (vertical, Horizontal) D) Antenna Height & Tilt Angle E) Blind Sectors 3.1.3 Ecdis Display Ecdis Software License Consisting Of: 1. M Ulti Chart Loading 2. Chart Info 3. Chart Orientation (north Up, Head Up, Course Up) 4. Alarms (ais, Anti-grounding, Sensors, Route, Radar/target, Chart Areas,) 5. Ship Motion Data (cog, Sog, Hdg, Log) 6. Erbl For Measuring Bearings And Ranges 7. Two Modes Of Displaying (true, Relative) 8. Mob Mode 9. Routing Planning, Checking And Monitoring 10. Work With Multiple Routes 11. Interface With Position Sensor, Gyro, Log, Echo- Sounder, Arpa 12. Radar Overlay 3.1.4 Electronic Navigation Chart 1. Dnv Type Approved 2. Senc Format, Cm-93/3 3. Perpetual License C-map Professional+ Is An Innovative And Dynamic Worldwide Vector Chart Database Produced By Jeppesen Marine. Dnv Type Approved Senc Format, Cm-93/3 3.1.5 Bearing Finder Display Bearing Finder Software Consisting Of: 1. G Yro Mode 2. Magnetic Compass Mode 3. Determine The Bearing Control 4. Direction Finder Elevation Control 3.1.6 Navigation Aid Instruments 1.marine Gnss Gps A) Automatic And Manual Operation Modes B) Position Readouts, Geodesic Datum C) Way-points Input And Storage D) Dead Reckoning Mode E) Steering Data Computing F) Man Overboard G) Faults And Errors Controlled By The Instructor 2. Ais Features: A) Automatic Transmission Of Static Information To Coast Stations And Other Vessels With Ais Equipments B) Reception And Processing Of Information From Coastal Stations And Other Vessels C) Sending Response Messages With Minimum Delay To Security Or High Priority Requests D) Target Vessels Ais Data Transmission 3. Bnwa System Features: A) Provides Light And Sound Signals To Attract The Attention Of The Officer In Charge Of The Watch B) Operation Modes With Imo Resolution Msc.128 4. Echo Sounder Features: A) Measurement Of Depths From 1 To 200m B) Ship Exiting To A Given Depth Sound Signal C) Manual Setting Of A Given Depth D) Presentation Of Depth Information Simultaneously On Two Forms: - Graphic Form - Numerically 5. Doppler Speed Log Features: A) Display Of The Speed (relative To Water And Relative To Ground) B) Display Of The Distance Traveled 6.vdr Features: A) Recording Interval Of A Various Data 3.1.7 Overhead Display Overhead Display Software Displays The Following Data: 1. Engine Load 2. Engine Rpm 3. Propeller Pitch 4. Speed Of Log 5. Heading 6. Passed Distance 7. Vessel Time 8. Doppler 9. Rate Of Turn 10. Rudder Angle 11. Pitch & Roll, Depth 12. Speed & Direction Of Wind 3.1.8 Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Software Consisting Of: 1. Display Of Magnetic Compass 2. Display Of Gyro Repeater 3.1.9 Steering Display/autopilot Control Steering Display/autopilot Control Features: 1. Hdg – Heading Control Mode 1. Set Heading Display In Degree 2. Set Rot 2. Nav – Waypoint Steering Mode 3. N Fu/fu Control Page A) Nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys B) Fu Mode: Entry Of The Target Rudder Angle Value Using The Rotary Knob 4.track Data – Logging Of The Last Past Minutes 3.1.10 Engine Control Engine Control Software Consisting Of 1. I Ndicator A) Me Indicator Load B) Me Indicator Rpm C) Pitch Indicator D) Shaft Rpm E) Speed Indicator F) Dead Man Alarm 2. M Ain Engine Control A) Nfu Control To Switch Steering Modes B) Clutch Control – Engage/de-engage C) Control Location D) Em’cy Stop E) Pitch Control – Local, Pitch Ahead/astern F) Control Mode – Constant/combinat 3. Em’cy Engine Order Telegraph 4. thruster Control Display 5. Diesel Generators Control 6. Rudder Pumps Control 3.1.11 Gmdss Software Devices Gmdss Software Consisting Of: 1. Vhf 2. Mf/hf Dsc 3. Epirb 4. Handhold Uhf 5. Handhold Vhf Gmdss 6. H Andhold Vhf Air 7. Ais Sart 8. Sart 9. Inmarsat Mini C 10. Iridium 3.1.12 Visualization Software Visualization 3-d Database With A High-resolution True-color Texturing Can Be Displayed. 1) Object Library Includes: A) 3-d Submarine And Above Water Terrain B) Aids To Navigation – Buoys, Lighthouse C) Port Facilities Models – Cranes, Tanks, Chimneys, Elevators, Containers, Vehicles, Towers, Etc. D) Moving Targets E) Unique And Standard Buildings, Monuments Models, Bridges With Night View Representation F) Piers, Jetties, And Bollard Barrels For Mooring Operation Training 2) Own Ships Software: A) Own Ships Mathematical Mode; Based On 6-dof B) Ship Models: Container Carrier, Bulk Carrier, Cruise Ship, Chemical Tanker, Vlcc, Lng Carrier, River-sea Tankers, Cargo, Anchor Tugs, Trawler, Tugboats 3) Target Ships: A) Move Automatically Along The Routes Plotted In An Exercise, Or Controlled By The Instructor B) Effected By Wind, Current And Wave Drift C) Towing And Mooring Functions 1 Set 3.2 Main Bridge Simulator Consoles And Computers 3.2.1 Main Bridge – Steel Consoles Horizon Field View Of 240 Degrees Fabrication Of Main Bridge Consoles Consisting Of: 1) Conning/maneuvering Console 2) Radar Console 3) Ecdis Console 4) Bearing Console 5) Navigation Aid Equipment Console 6) Gmdss Console 7) Steering Stand/console 8) Chart Table (standard Size) 9) Overhead Panel 10) Gyro Repeater With Pelorus Stand 11) Binoculars 12) The Console Must Made Of Steel 7 Sets 3.2.2 ◻70” Visual Screens Led Backlit • ◻7x Pc Visual Channel • I◻ntel Core I5 Processor • ◻16 Gb Ram ◻ • ◻256 M.2 Ssd◻ • ◻7x Rtx 4070 Or Higher • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻7x 70” Tv Led Backlit 4k Display • I◻nstrument Consoles • ◻7x Hdmi Cable • ◻7x 1.5k Ups 1 Sets 3.2.3 Conning Console • ◻1 X Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram • ◻256 M.2 Ssd • ◻2x Monitor 24” • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻1x Ups 1kva • ◻console Made Of Steel (tct 0.8 Mm To 2 Mm) Instrument Adds On Conning Console. 1 Sets 3.2.4 Ecdis Console • ◻1 X Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram • ◻256 M.2 Ssd • ◻2x Monitor 24” • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻1x Ups 1kva • ◻console Made Of Steel (tct 0.8 Mm To 2 Mm) • Instrument Adds On Conning Console. 1 Set 3.2.5 Radar / Arpa Console • ◻1 X Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram • ◻256 M.2 Ssd • ◻1x Monitor 24” • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻1x Ups 1kva • ◻console Made Of Steel (tct 0.8 Mm To 2 Mm) 1 Set 3.2.6 Chart Table Console With Monitor With Goose Neck Dimmable Light • ◻1x Chart Table Console 1300mm X 1312mm • ◻1 X Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram • ◻256 M.2 Ssd • ◻2x Monitor 24” • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻1x Ups 1kva • ◻1x Parallel Ruler • ◻1x One-hand Compass Divider • ◻2x Plotting Triangle With Handle • ◻1x Deck Log Book • ◻admiralty Paper Charts Related To Installed Maps In Simulator 1 Set 3.2.7 Binocular And Instrument Pc • ◻1x Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram • ◻256 M.2. Ssd • ◻rtx 4070 Or Higher • ◻keyboard/mouse • ◻2x 24" Monitor • ◻1x Ups 1.5kva • ◻console Made Of Steel (tct 0.8 Mm To 2 Mm) 1 Set 3.2.8 Radar/arpa Keyboard Radar/arpa Keyboard (1 Set) Specifications: 1) Usb Interface 2) Console Mount Type 1 Set 3.2.9 Handset Handset Includes: 3) Handset 4) Cradle With A Ptt Switch 5) Usb Interface Board 6) Handset Box 1 Set 3.2.10 Speaker With Subwoofer Channel Sound System Specification: 6. Interface With Visual Pc 7. Realization Of 3d Sound Effect System 8. Atleast 450watts Speaker With Subwoofer 9. Port: Mini Jack 10. Power: Usb 1 Set 3.2.11 Gyro Repeater With Pelorus Stand Gyro Repeater Includes: 11) Bearing Repeater Compass 12) Pelorus Stand 13) Power: 24vd 14) Signal: Rs422 Nmea 1 Set 3.2.12 Whether Instruments Whether Instruments Includes: 1) 1x Ships Clock 2) 1x Aneroid Barometer 2) 1x Hygrometer 6 Set 4.0 Mini Bridges Simulator 4.1 Mini Bridge Simulator Software 4.1.1 Conning Display Conning Display Software Consisting Of: 1) Main Features Rudder Operation Mode Setup 1. Rudder Presetting 2. Bow & Stern Thruster Presetting 3. Autopilot Control 4. Signal Response Limit Presetting 5. Me Control 6. Binocular Initiation 7. Observer’s Vision Angle Presetting 8. Observer’s Position Presetting 9. Sound Signals, Lights & Figures Control 10. Anchor Gear, Mooring & Fenders Control 11. Tugs Control 2) Information Display 1. Propeller Shaft(s) Revolutions Values 2. Turning Angle Of Cpp Value 3. Rudder Responding Value 4. Angle Of Rate Value 5. Gyro & Magnetic Compass Course 6. Log Speed & Speed Over Ground 7. Load Of Bow And Speed Of Stern 8. Velocity & Direction Of (true/relative) 9. Velocity & Direction Of Stream (current) 10. Ship Date & Time 11.t Raversed Distance 12. Depth Under Keel 13. Distance From Shore 14. Me Loads 15. Ship Heel And Trim 16. Fire Detection Control System, System Failures Alarms List 17. Vhf Point With A Channel Selector 18. Pilot Card, Maneuvering 19. Assessment & Vdr 20. Arpa Keyboard Control 4.1.2 Radar/arpa Display Radar/arpa Software Consisting Of: 1)i Mitating Display Of Radar/arpa A) Range Scale B) Display Modes: Head Up, North Up, Tm, Rm C) Display Effects: Target Trials, Echo, Zoom D) Display Of Charts Of The Region 2) Arpa A) Acquisition Modes B) Target Canceling Modes C) Tracking Data Output Time D) Target Information E) Visual & Acoustic Alarms F) Cpa, Tcpa Limits Setting G) Trial Maneuver 3) Radar Parameter A) Operating Frequency (s-band, X-band) B) Antenna Rpm (20, 60 Rpm) C) Direction Pattern Width (vertical, Horizontal) D) Antenna Height & Tilt Angle E) Blind Sectors 4.1.3 Ecdis Display Dnv Type Approved Ecdis Software License Consisting Of: 1) Multi Chart Loading 2) Chart Info 3) Chart Orientation (north Up, Head Up, Course Up) 4) Alarms (ais, Anti-grounding, Sensors, Route, Radar/target, Chart Areas…) 5) Ship Motion Data (cog, Sog, Hdg, Log) 6) Erbl For Measuring Bearings And Ranges 7) Two Modes Of Displaying (true, Relative) 8) Mob Mode 9) Routing Planning, Checking And Monitoring 10) Work With Multiple Routes 11) I Nterface With Position Sensor, Gyro, Log, Echo- Sounder, Arpa 12) Radar Overlay 4.1.4electronic Navigation Chart 1. Dnv Type Approved 2. Senc Format, Cm-93/3 3. Perpetual License 4.1.5 Overhead Display Overhead Display Software Displays The Following Data: • ◻speed Of Log • ◻vessel Time • ◻rate Of Turn • ◻rudder Angle • ◻speed & Direction Of Wind 4.1.6 Steering Display/autopilot Control Steering Display/autopilot Control Features: • ◻hdg – Heading Control Mode ◦ ◻set Heading Display In Degree ◦ ◻set Rot • ◻nav – Waypoint Steering Mode • ◻nfu/fu Control Page ◦ ◻nfu Mode: Rudder Angle Is Set Using The Control Keys ◦ ◻fu Mode: Entry Of The Target Rudder Angle Value Using The Rotary Knob • ◻track Data – Logging Of The Past Minutes 4.1.7 Engine Control Engine Control Software Consisting Of: A.i Ndicator 1. Me Indicator Load 2. Me Indicator Rpm 3. Pitch Indicator 4. Shaft Rpm 5. Dead Man Alarm B. Main Engine Control 1. Nfu Control To Switch Steering Modes 2. Clutch Control – Engage/de-engage 3. Control Location 4. Em’cy Stop 5. Pitch Control – Local, Pitch Ahead/astern 6. Control Mode – Constant/combinat C. Em’cy Engine Order Telegraph D. Thruster Control Display E.d Iesel Generators Control F.r Udder Pumps Control 4.1.8 Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Steering Magnetic Compass & Gyro Repeater Software Consisting Of: 1) Display Of Magnetic Compass 2) Display Of Gyro Repeater Stations 4.2 Mini Bridge Simulator Hardware 6 Set 4.2.1 Mini Bridge – Consoles Made In Formica Laminated Board Fabrication Of Main Bridge Consoles Consisting Of: 1) Conning Console 2) Radar Console 3) Ecdis Console 4) Maneuvering Console 5) Chart Table With Gooseneck Dimming Light 6 Unit 4.2.2 Mini Bridge Desktop Station 70” 4k Display For Visual Pc Wall Mounted • ◻70” Tv Led Backlit 4k Display -1 X Bridge Image Generator Computer (for Visual, Conning, Radar, Maneuvering) • ◻1x Pc • I◻ntel Core I5 Processor • ◻16 Gb Ram ◻ • ◻256 M.2 Ssd◻ • ◻rtx 4070 Or Higher◻ • ◻1 X Keyboard/mouse • ◻2 X 24” Monitor • ◻1x Ups 1.5kva • ◻1 X Ecdis Computer • ◻1 X Pc • ◻intel Core I5 Processor • ◻8 Gb Ram ◻ • ◻256 M.2 Ssd◻ • ◻1x Keyboard/mouse • ◻1x 24” Monitor • ◻1x Ups 1.5kva • ◻1 X Speakers • ◻1 X Goose Neck Microphone • ◻1 X Set Desktop Instrument Console Including: • ◻steering System / Autopilot / Nfu • ◻steering Wheel Stand • ◻dual Telegraph • ◻1 X Console Tables • ◻1 X Handheld Uhf Equipment • ◻1 X Console Made In Formica Laminated Board (tct 3/4 Inches) 6 Unit 4.2.3 Speaker With Subwoofer Channel Sound System Specification 1. Interface With Visual Pc 2. Realization Of 3d Sound Effect System 3. Atleast 150 Watts Speaker With Subwoofer 4. Port: Mini Jack 5. Power: Usb 6 Sets 4.2.4 Chart Table And Plotting Aids • ◻1x Plotting Charts • ◻1x Parallel Ruler Plastic • ◻1x One-hand Compass Divider Steel • ◻2x Plotting Triangle With Handle Plastic • ◻1x Chart Table 1300mm X 1312mm • ◻1x Deck Log Book 4 Sets 4.3 Virtual Bridge Familiarization W/ Virtual Reality Device The Supplier Shall Provide A Virtual Bridge With The Use Of Virtual Reality Providing The Following Visualizations: • B Ridge Wing Equipment -speaker Mic -rate Of Turn -engine Rpm -quick Release Lifebouy -remote Panel -gyro Compass Repeater -fire Box -hatch For Maintenance -thermometer • Main Bridge -epirb -sart -clear View Screen -location Of Fire Extinguishers -pantry With Equipment -pilot Chair -smoke Detectors -damage Control Plans -radar 1 And 2 And 3 -gps With Other Equipment -helm Wheel -indicator Control -deck Light Control -admiralty And Other Maritime Publications -fireplan -rudder Angle Indicator -voice Recorder -whistle Horn -water Tight Door Indicators -window Wipers -pa Systems -cargo Hold Fan Control -smoke Alarm System -fire Alarm System -general Alarm System -vhf System -log Books And Other Documentation -ecdis Voyage Planner -pressure Recorder -portable Uhfs -lifejackets, Rocket Flare, And Rocket Line -location Of Immersion Suits -barometer -utc Clock -radio Room Configuration -posters -charts -compass Deck / Monkey Island Or Adar Equipment -antennas -anemometer -and Other Equipment On The Monkey Bridge The Virtual Reality Bridge Must Be Complete With Hotspots, Identification Tags And Descriptions. It Shall Also Be Available On An Offline System, Navigable. 1.     Hardware For Virtual Bridge Familiarization - Display: • ◻type: Lcd • ◻resolution: 2064 X 2208 Per Eye • ◻refresh Rate: 120 Hz - Field Of View: • ◻horizontal: 97 Degrees • ◻vertical: 93 Degrees - Processor: • ◻chipset: Qualcomm Snapdragon Xr2 Gen 2 • ◻ram: 12gb - Storage: • ◻options: 128gb, 256gb, And 512gb Variants - Audio: • Integrated: 3d Spatial Audio With Improved Speakers • ◻microphone: Built-in With Improved Noise Cancellation - Tracking: • Inside-out: 6dof (six Degrees Of Freedom) With Four Wide- Angle Cameras For Room-scale Tracking • ◻hand Tracking: Improved Hand Tracking Capability - Controllers: • ◻type: Meta Touch Pro Controllers •features: Haptic Feedback, Improved Ergonomics, Rechargeable Batteries - Battery: •headset: Approximately 2-3 Hours Of Active Use •charging: Usb-c Fast Charging - Connectivity: •wireless: Wi-fi 6e Support •bluetooth: 5.2 - Software: •operating System: Meta's Custom Os Based On Android •compatibility: Supports All Vr Apps. •exclusive Features: Mixed Reality Capabilities With Color Passthrough - Additional Features: •passthrough: Full-color Passthrough For Mixed Reality Experiences •eye Tracking: No Built-in Eye Tracking •face Tracking: No Built-in Face Tracking -what’s Included In The Box: •headset •touch Pro Controllers (pair) •charging Cable (usb-c) •power Adapter W/ Extra 1 Battery Each •controller Lanyards •glasses Spacer -add On’s: •2x Strap With Battery •8x Silicone Cover Face Cover •4x Silicone Protective Case •8x Silicone Case For Controller 2. 3 Row Vr Storage Cabinet With Lock 4.4 Debriefing Room 1 Pc 4.4.1 Tv Monitor 1) Size: At Least 70" 2) Smart Tv 3) Led (atleast 4k) 4) Wall Mounted. 5) Hdmi 10meters 1 Pc 4.4.2 Computer 1) 1 X Pc 2) I Ntel Core I5 Processor 3) 8 Gb Ram 4) 256 M.2 Ssd 5) Low Profile Video Card 6) 1x Keyboard/mouse 7) 1x Ups 1kva 8) 1x W/ Computer Table Table Size: L 2300 X W 700 X H 750 Mm 9) 1x Ergodynamic Chair Briefing And Debriefing Rooms With Playback Capability (playing Of Recorded Exercise And Assessment In Simulator Other Requirements 1. Implementation A) A 3-year Warranty For The Computer Hardware And Console Peripherals B) The Software Comes With A 3-year Warranty Inclusive Of New Updates. C) The Project Will Be Implemented Within 150 Cd. Liquidating Damages Will Be Applicable For Any Delays. D) A Comprehensive Guide Will Be Provided, Offering Detailed Instructions On System Operation And Maintenance Activities, Facilitating Ease Of Use And System Upkeep. E) Onsite Training Sessions Will Be Conducted By Certified Instructors And Technical Experts, Facilitating Smooth Knowledge Transfer And Ensuring Proficient System Operation. Certificates Will Be Provided Upon Completion Of Training Sessions. F) Structured Cabling Standards To Establish A Reliable And Efficient Network Infrastructure. 1. The Simulator Manufacturer Should Be An Iso 9001:2015 And Iso 14001:2015 Certified Business. The Simulator Should Be Class Certified (dnv Class A St-0033 Maritime Simulator Systems Standard) Or Equivalent, And May Also Be Certified By National Authorities. 2. The Software Must Be Perpetual License. 3. The Supplier Shall Conduct An Annual Face-to-face Maintenance Session To Ensure The System's Optimal Functionality And Performance. 4. The Supplier Must Resolve Any Software Or Hardware Issues Within 2 To 5 Business Cd Of Their Occurrence To Minimize Downtime And Disruptions. 5. All Hardware Installations Must Adhere To Software Specifications To Guarantee Seamless Integration And Operation. 6. The Computer Hardware Supplied Must Be Sourced From Proven Technology Hardware Companies, Quality And Performance Standards To Ensure Optimal Functionality And Compatibility With The Software. 7. Bidders Are Required To Offer Continuous Retraining Sessions Free Of Charge During The Warranty Period To Ensure Users' Proficiency With The System. 8. Bidders Must Submit A 100% Credit Line Certificate Equivalent To The Approved Budget Ceiling To Demonstrate Financial Capability And Commitment. 9. Bidders Should Provide Manufacturer Authorization Or Exclusivity Certificate To Ensure The Authenticity And Legality Of The Supplied Products. 10. The Bidder Is Responsible For Performing A Thorough Site Inspection, And A Site Inspection Certificate Issued By The Agency Shall Be Submitted As Part Of The Eligibility Requirements. 11. The Bridge Simulator Is Ready For Seamless Integration With The Future Engine Simulator And Cargo Simulator, Ensuring Compatibility And Functionality. 12. The Seven (6) Stations Can Connect And Enable Them To Interact With Each Other In A Coordinated Scenario. 13. Instructor Station 2 Will Be Used In The Simulator Scenario Development Station As An Instructor Station Capable Of Deploying Scenarios To Other Stations. 14. All Other Simulator Specifications And Capabilities Not Indicated Herein, The Simulator Shall Comply With The Simulator Performance Standards As Required In Maritime Industry Authority (marina) Evaluation Instrument For Full Mission Bridge Simulator. 15. The Bidders Should Provide A Breakdown Of The Unit Prices Of The Major Components In The Original Of Duly Signed And Accomplished Price Schedule(s) Under Financial Component Envelope Upon Bid Submission. Furthermore, They Should Provide A More Detailed Breakdown As A Condition For Issuance Of Notice To Proceed. Part Ii. Other General Requirements 1 Ea. Project Billboard/signboard 1 L.s Occupational Safety And Health Program 1 L.s Mobilization/demobilization Part Iii. Civil, Mechanical, Electrical, & Sanitary/plumbing Works Part A. Earthworks 1 L.s Removal Of Structures And Obstruction Part C. Finishings And Other Civil Works 68.4 M² Wall, Wood Frame, Fiber Cement Board 6mm 30.96 M² Tempered Glass Door, 12mm, Reflective 24.84 M² Aluminum Glass Window 4.2 M² Doors (flush) 32.87 M² Acoustical Ceiling Panel 745.2 M² Painting Works, Masonry/concrete 8.4 M² Painting Works, Wood 4 M² 150mm Chb Nonload Bearing(including Reinforcing Steel) 61.3 M² Plain Cement Plaster Finish 33.75 M² Carpet Floor Tiles Part D. Electrical 1 L.s Panelboard With Main And Branch Breakers 1 L.s Wires And Wiring Devices 1 L.s Network Cabling 1 L.s Door Access And Card Reader System Part E. Mechanical 1 L.s Airconditioning, Package/split Type

Details: Description Quantity Unit Of Issue Description 1 1 Pc 1 "long Nose Plier, Overall Length: 7.75 Inches; Steel Alloy; Handle Finish: Plastic-dipped " 1 1 Pc 1 "diagonal Cutting Plier, Overall Length: 7.75 Inches; Material: Carbon Steel; Handle Finish: Ergonomic Grip Rubberized Cushion " 1 1 Set 1 Screwdriver, Flat Screw & Phillip Screw, Cushion Grip Screwdriver; Magnetized Tip For Easy Pick-up Of Screws , 6 Pcs (slotted/standard 6mm X 150mm, Slotted/standard Parallel 5mm X 100mm, Slotted/standard Parallel 3mm X 100mm, Slotted/standard Parallel 5mm X 150mm, Ph2 X 150mm, Ph1 X 100mm) 1 1 Pc 1 "soldering Iron, 30 Watts 220-240 Volts/60hz, Heat Pencil Tip " 1 1 Set 1 Allen Wrench, 9-pc, 1.5 Mm, 2.0 Mm, 2.5 Mm, 3.0 Mm, 4.0 Mm, 5.0 Mm, 6.0 Mm, 8.0 Mm, 10.0 Mm; Chrome Vanadium Steel; Long Arm 1 1 Pc 1 Utility Knife, Blade: 61mm(l) X 19mm(w) X 0.6(t), 110g, Zinc Alloy Body 1 1 Set 1 "torx/star Bit Set, 7-pc Magnetic, Made Of Alloy Steel, Shank Type: 1/4 Hex Shank Size: T10 / T15 / T20 / T25 / T27 / T30 / T40 (50x6.35mm/1.97x0.25inch), Silver" 1 1 Pc 1 Volt Meter/ Multimeter Tester, Electric Up To Maximum 230v, Dcv: 0.25/2.5 /10/50/250/ 1000v, Acv: 10/ 50/250/100v 1 1 Pc 1 "oscilloscope, Handheld, Digital, Up To 400v Signal, 80khz /5.0v Pwm, Display: 2.4inch Color Screen With Backlight, Battery: 1 * Lithium Battery, 1500mah, Recharging: Usb Type-c, 5v" 1 1 Pc 1 Magnifyer, Material: Abs+glass+acrylic, Size: 190*83*28mm, Weight: 0.18 Kg, With 3 Led Lights 1 1 Set 1 Cleaning Brush, 4pc Set Soft Cleaning Brush, Brush Material: Nylon, Handle Material: Wood, 11cmx1.8cm, 11cmx2.6cm, 11.5cmx2.8cm, 12cmx2.8cm 1 1 Roll 1 Soldering Lead Wire, Premium Lead, 0.8mm/1.0mm 1 1 Roll 1 Lead Free Solder Wire, Material: Tin & Copper, Net Weight: 100g/ 0.22lb, Diameter: 0.8mm 13. Lead Free Solder Wire, Material: Tin & Copper, Net Weight: 100g/ 0.22lb, Diameter: 0.8mm 13. Lead Free Solder Wire, Material: Tin & Copper, Net Weight: 100g/ 0.22lb, Diameter: 0.8mm 13. Lead Free Solder Wire, Material: Tin & Copper, Net Weight: 100g/ 0.22lb, Diameter: 0.8mm 1 1 Roll 1 Stranded Wire, 10m Red, #22 14. Stranded Wire, 10m Red, #22 14. Stranded Wire, 10m Red, #22 14. Stranded Wire, 10m Red, #22 1 1 Pc 1 Silicone Grease, Dielectric, 11g 15. Silicone Grease, Dielectric, 11g 15. Silicone Grease, Dielectric, 11g 15. Silicone Grease, Dielectric, 11g 1 1 Set 1 Resistor Kit, 2,600pc 130 Values Metal Fim Resistor, 1/4w 0.25w 1% 16. Resistor Kit, 2,600pc 130 Values Metal Fim Resistor, 1/4w 0.25w 1% 16. Resistor Kit, 2,600pc 130 Values Metal Fim Resistor, 1/4w 0.25w 1% 16. Resistor Kit, 2,600pc 130 Values Metal Fim Resistor, 1/4w 0.25w 1% 1 1 Set 1 Capacitors, 500-pc Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors, 24 Values, 16-50v 0.1uf-1000uf 17. Capacitors, 500-pc Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors, 24 Values, 16-50v 0.1uf-1000uf 17. Capacitors, 500-pc Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors, 24 Values, 16-50v 0.1uf-1000uf 17. Capacitors, 500-pc Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors, 24 Values, 16-50v 0.1uf-1000uf 1 1 Pc 1 Transformer, 12volts 1 Ampere 220v (input Red) To 12v (output Blue), Current: 220-12v-1, Dimension (lxwxh): 5x2x4.5cm 18. Transformer, 12volts 1 Ampere 220v (input Red) To 12v (output Blue), Current: 220-12v-1, Dimension (lxwxh): 5x2x4.5cm 18. Transformer, 12volts 1 Ampere 220v (input Red) To 12v (output Blue), Current: 220-12v-1, Dimension (lxwxh): 5x2x4.5cm 18. Transformer, 12volts 1 Ampere 220v (input Red) To 12v (output Blue), Current: 220-12v-1, Dimension (lxwxh): 5x2x4.5cm 2 Pc Crow Bar: At Least 36" Long; Length Tolerance: +- 1/8; Material: Forged Steel Carbon 2 1 Pc Claw Hammer: Round Head, Head Weight: At Least 16oz; Overall Weight: Approximately 17oz-23oz; Head Material: Forged Steel, Handle Materlial: Fiberglass Handle With Rubber Cushion; Overall Length: Approximately 12-14" 2. Claw Hammer: Round Head, Head Weight: At Least 16oz; Overall Weight: Approximately 17oz-23oz; Head Material: Forged Steel, Handle Materlial: Fiberglass Handle With Rubber Cushion; Overall Length: Approximately 12-14" 2. Claw Hammer: Round Head, Head Weight: At Least 16oz; Overall Weight: Approximately 17oz-23oz; Head Material: Forged Steel, Handle Materlial: Fiberglass Handle With Rubber Cushion; Overall Length: Approximately 12-14" 2. Claw Hammer: Round Head, Head Weight: At Least 16oz; Overall Weight: Approximately 17oz-23oz; Head Material: Forged Steel, Handle Materlial: Fiberglass Handle With Rubber Cushion; Overall Length: Approximately 12-14" 2 1 Pc Hacksaw With Blade: Material: Aluminum Alloy Frame With Soft-grip Handle; At Least 12"-15" Long Including Handle; With Soft-grip Rubber Handle; Bi-metal; Blade Length: About 30cm, Width: 3cm 3. Hacksaw With Blade: Material: Aluminum Alloy Frame With Soft-grip Handle; At Least 12"-15" Long Including Handle; With Soft-grip Rubber Handle; Bi-metal; Blade Length: About 30cm, Width: 3cm 3. Hacksaw With Blade: Material: Aluminum Alloy Frame With Soft-grip Handle; At Least 12"-15" Long Including Handle; With Soft-grip Rubber Handle; Bi-metal; Blade Length: About 30cm, Width: 3cm 3. Hacksaw With Blade: Material: Aluminum Alloy Frame With Soft-grip Handle; At Least 12"-15" Long Including Handle; With Soft-grip Rubber Handle; Bi-metal; Blade Length: About 30cm, Width: 3cm 2 1 Pc Meter Tape With Magnetic Hook: Blade Material: Nylon Coated Blade; Dimensions: 16ft (l) X 25mm (w) 4. Meter Tape With Magnetic Hook: Blade Material: Nylon Coated Blade; Dimensions: 16ft (l) X 25mm (w) 4. Meter Tape With Magnetic Hook: Blade Material: Nylon Coated Blade; Dimensions: 16ft (l) X 25mm (w) 4. Meter Tape With Magnetic Hook: Blade Material: Nylon Coated Blade; Dimensions: 16ft (l) X 25mm (w) 2 1 Pc "handsaw: Blade Length: About 15""; Blade Material: Carbon Steel; Handle Length: 5"";; Handle Material: Plastic/rubber; Color: Gray; 8 Teeth Per Inch" 5. "handsaw: Blade Length: About 15""; Blade Material: Carbon Steel; Handle Length: 5"";; Handle Material: Plastic/rubber; Color: Gray; 8 Teeth Per Inch" 5. "handsaw: Blade Length: About 15""; Blade Material: Carbon Steel; Handle Length: 5"";; Handle Material: Plastic/rubber; Color: Gray; 8 Teeth Per Inch" 5. "handsaw: Blade Length: About 15""; Blade Material: Carbon Steel; Handle Length: 5"";; Handle Material: Plastic/rubber; Color: Gray; 8 Teeth Per Inch" 2 1 Pc Shovel: Rectangular End, Tempered Steel Blade: 22-26 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm 6. Shovel: Rectangular End, Tempered Steel Blade: 22-26 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm 6. Shovel: Rectangular End, Tempered Steel Blade: 22-26 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm 6. Shovel: Rectangular End, Tempered Steel Blade: 22-26 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm 2 1 Pc 7. Shovel: Round End, Tempered Steel Blade: 17-23 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm; Capacity: 350-400 Lbs 7. Shovel: Round End, Tempered Steel Blade: 17-23 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm; Capacity: 350-400 Lbs 7. Shovel: Round End, Tempered Steel Blade: 17-23 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm; Capacity: 350-400 Lbs 7. Shovel: Round End, Tempered Steel Blade: 17-23 Cm; Blade Tip Width; 22-28cm Blade Tip Length; All Metal Handle; Overall Length: 100cm-115 Cm; Capacity: 350-400 Lbs 2 1 Pc 8. Level Bar: Aluminum Frame, Length: At Least 24"/60cm; Aluminum Thickness: 1.5mm; Double Side Milles; 0.5mm/m Accurate Vials 8. Level Bar: Aluminum Frame, Length: At Least 24"/60cm; Aluminum Thickness: 1.5mm; Double Side Milles; 0.5mm/m Accurate Vials 8. Level Bar: Aluminum Frame, Length: At Least 24"/60cm; Aluminum Thickness: 1.5mm; Double Side Milles; 0.5mm/m Accurate Vials 8. Level Bar: Aluminum Frame, Length: At Least 24"/60cm; Aluminum Thickness: 1.5mm; Double Side Milles; 0.5mm/m Accurate Vials 2 1 Pc 9. Steel Float/plastering Trowel: Thickness: At Least 0.7 Mm; Surface Measurement, Length: 12", Width: 4"; Material: High Carbon Steel With Wood Handle 9. Steel Float/plastering Trowel: Thickness: At Least 0.7 Mm; Surface Measurement, Length: 12", Width: 4"; Material: High Carbon Steel With Wood Handle 9. Steel Float/plastering Trowel: Thickness: At Least 0.7 Mm; Surface Measurement, Length: 12", Width: 4"; Material: High Carbon Steel With Wood Handle 9. Steel Float/plastering Trowel: Thickness: At Least 0.7 Mm; Surface Measurement, Length: 12", Width: 4"; Material: High Carbon Steel With Wood Handle 2 1 Pc Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 10. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 10. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 10. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 2 1 Pc Masonry Trowel: Length: At Least 12"long, Width: 6"; Material: Flat Steel, With Wood Handle 11. Masonry Trowel: Length: At Least 12"long, Width: 6"; Material: Flat Steel, With Wood Handle 11. Masonry Trowel: Length: At Least 12"long, Width: 6"; Material: Flat Steel, With Wood Handle 11. Masonry Trowel: Length: At Least 12"long, Width: 6"; Material: Flat Steel, With Wood Handle 2 1 Pc Circular Saw: Voltage: 220-240v; Frequency: 50-60hz; Input Power: 1400w; No-load Speed: Atleast 4800rpm; Blade Diameter: 185mm; Cutting Capacity: 45degree: 44mm, 90 Degree: 65mm; Maximum Cutting Depth: Atleast 90°62mm, Weight: Maximum Of 5.2kg; Item Approximate Dimension: 15-17cm (h), 25-28cm (w), 30-35cm (l) 2 1 Pc Masonry Square/metric Square: Material: Aluminum; Length: Approx. 24", Width: 16", 1/8 '' Thickness 13. Masonry Square/metric Square: Material: Aluminum; Length: Approx. 24", Width: 16", 1/8 '' Thickness 13. Masonry Square/metric Square: Material: Aluminum; Length: Approx. 24", Width: 16", 1/8 '' Thickness 13. Masonry Square/metric Square: Material: Aluminum; Length: Approx. 24", Width: 16", 1/8 '' Thickness 2 1 Pc Mason's Level: At Least 48'' Long, Aluminum Reinforced Frame 2 1 Pc Mason's Line: #18 Braided Nylon; 500 Ft./roll, Color Orange 2 1 Pc Sledgehammer: Weight: At Least 3 Lbs With Fiberglass Handle; Forged Steel Round Head; Length: Approximately 25-27" 2 1 Pc Concrete Chisel: Pointed Sharp End, Material: Forged Steel Chisel, With Rubberized Handle; Length: Approximately 10'' 2 1 Pc Putty Knife/paint Scraper Set (4pcs): Stainless Steel Blade With Rubberized Handle; Blade Width: 1", 2" And 3", Length Including Handle: Approximately 8-9" 2 1 Pc Angle Grinder Cutting Disk: 10 Pcs.per Set; Dimensions: Approx. 105mm (4") X 1.2mm (3/64"') X 16mm (5/8") 2 1 Pc Angle Grinder: Rated Input Power: 730w; Wheel Diameter: 4"; Rated Voltage: 220v; Frequency: 60hz; No Load Speed: 12,000 Rpm; Weight: Approximately 1.6kg; Grinding Spindle Thread: M10; Disc Diameter: 100mm X 1 X 16mm, Dimension: 298mm (l), 77mm (w), 102mm (h) 2 1 Pc Wooden Float: Size: At Least 12x4"; Has 5/8" Thick Rubber Pad; With Wooden Handle 7 Pc 1. Welding Helmet: Auto Darkening Helmet, Power Supply: Battery And Solar Powered; Light Shade: Din9-1;, Dark Shade: Din4; Switching Time: 1/25000s; Delay Time: 0.1-0.8s; Sensitivity Adjustment: Stepless Control; Operation Temperature: -5 Degrees- 55 Degrees; Active Viewing Area: 93mmx43mm; Active Viewing Area Size: (+/- 10mm); Item Weight: At Least 1.85 Pounds; Package Dimensions: ‎approximately 12-12.4" (l) X 9-9.61" (w) X 7-7.68" (h) 1. Welding Helmet: Auto Darkening Helmet, Power Supply: Battery And Solar Powered; Light Shade: Din9-1;, Dark Shade: Din4; Switching Time: 1/25000s; Delay Time: 0.1-0.8s; Sensitivity Adjustment: Stepless Control; Operation Temperature: -5 Degrees- 55 Degrees; Active Viewing Area: 93mmx43mm; Active Viewing Area Size: (+/- 10mm); Item Weight: At Least 1.85 Pounds; Package Dimensions: ‎approximately 12-12.4" (l) X 9-9.61" (w) X 7-7.68" (h) 1. Welding Helmet: Auto Darkening Helmet, Power Supply: Battery And Solar Powered; Light Shade: Din9-1;, Dark Shade: Din4; Switching Time: 1/25000s; Delay Time: 0.1-0.8s; Sensitivity Adjustment: Stepless Control; Operation Temperature: -5 Degrees- 55 Degrees; Active Viewing Area: 93mmx43mm; Active Viewing Area Size: (+/- 10mm); Item Weight: At Least 1.85 Pounds; Package Dimensions: ‎approximately 12-12.4" (l) X 9-9.61" (w) X 7-7.68" (h) 1. Welding Helmet: Auto Darkening Helmet, Power Supply: Battery And Solar Powered; Light Shade: Din9-1;, Dark Shade: Din4; Switching Time: 1/25000s; Delay Time: 0.1-0.8s; Sensitivity Adjustment: Stepless Control; Operation Temperature: -5 Degrees- 55 Degrees; Active Viewing Area: 93mmx43mm; Active Viewing Area Size: (+/- 10mm); Item Weight: At Least 1.85 Pounds; Package Dimensions: ‎approximately 12-12.4" (l) X 9-9.61" (w) X 7-7.68" (h) 7 Set Welding Magnets: 6 Pcs/set, Overall Length: At Least (3"); Hold Capacity: Up To 25lbs; Arrow Design Supports Angle: 45°, 90°, And 135°; Item Weight: 295g; Package Dimensions: ‎4.88 X 4.72 X 3.98 Inches; ‎material: Steel; Magnets Size: Approximately - Top (1-1.4cm), Bottom (6.5-7cm), Side (7-7.5cm) Thickness (1-1.3cm) 2. Welding Magnets: 6 Pcs/set, Overall Length: At Least (3"); Hold Capacity: Up To 25lbs; Arrow Design Supports Angle: 45°, 90°, And 135°; Item Weight: 295g; Package Dimensions: ‎4.88 X 4.72 X 3.98 Inches; ‎material: Steel; Magnets Size: Approximately - Top (1-1.4cm), Bottom (6.5-7cm), Side (7-7.5cm) Thickness (1-1.3cm) 2. Welding Magnets: 6 Pcs/set, Overall Length: At Least (3"); Hold Capacity: Up To 25lbs; Arrow Design Supports Angle: 45°, 90°, And 135°; Item Weight: 295g; Package Dimensions: ‎4.88 X 4.72 X 3.98 Inches; ‎material: Steel; Magnets Size: Approximately - Top (1-1.4cm), Bottom (6.5-7cm), Side (7-7.5cm) Thickness (1-1.3cm) 2. Welding Magnets: 6 Pcs/set, Overall Length: At Least (3"); Hold Capacity: Up To 25lbs; Arrow Design Supports Angle: 45°, 90°, And 135°; Item Weight: 295g; Package Dimensions: ‎4.88 X 4.72 X 3.98 Inches; ‎material: Steel; Magnets Size: Approximately - Top (1-1.4cm), Bottom (6.5-7cm), Side (7-7.5cm) Thickness (1-1.3cm) 7 Pc Speed Square: Material: Cast Aluminum; Size: About 18x18x2cm/7.09x7.09x0.79"; Weight: About 130g; Triangle-shaped 3. Speed Square: Material: Cast Aluminum; Size: About 18x18x2cm/7.09x7.09x0.79"; Weight: About 130g; Triangle-shaped 3. Speed Square: Material: Cast Aluminum; Size: About 18x18x2cm/7.09x7.09x0.79"; Weight: About 130g; Triangle-shaped 3. Speed Square: Material: Cast Aluminum; Size: About 18x18x2cm/7.09x7.09x0.79"; Weight: About 130g; Triangle-shaped 7 Unit Portable Welding Machine: Input Voltage: 220-240; Frequency: 50-60hz; Output Current: 10-220a; Led Display; No-load Voltage: 85v; Max. Output Current: 220a; Diameter Of Electrode: 1.6-3.2mm; Inclusions: 1 Pc Electrode Holder, 1 Pc Earth Clamp With Cable, 4. Portable Welding Machine: Input Voltage: 220-240; Frequency: 50-60hz; Output Current: 10-220a; Led Display; No-load Voltage: 85v; Max. Output Current: 220a; Diameter Of Electrode: 1.6-3.2mm; Inclusions: 1 Pc Electrode Holder, 1 Pc Earth Clamp With Cable, 4. Portable Welding Machine: Input Voltage: 220-240; Frequency: 50-60hz; Output Current: 10-220a; Led Display; No-load Voltage: 85v; Max. Output Current: 220a; Diameter Of Electrode: 1.6-3.2mm; Inclusions: 1 Pc Electrode Holder, 1 Pc Earth Clamp With Cable, 4. Portable Welding Machine: Input Voltage: 220-240; Frequency: 50-60hz; Output Current: 10-220a; Led Display; No-load Voltage: 85v; Max. Output Current: 220a; Diameter Of Electrode: 1.6-3.2mm; Inclusions: 1 Pc Electrode Holder, 1 Pc Earth Clamp With Cable, 7 Pc Heavy Duty Corded Drill: Rated Input Power: 750w; Chuck Capacity: Upto 13mm; Drill Capacity: Metal (16mm), Wood (25mm), Masonry (12mm); Dimension: 268mm (l) X 69mm (w) X 192mm (h); Weight W/out Cable: Approximately 1.6-1.8 Kg; Spindle Collar Diameter Of 43 Mm 5. Heavy Duty Corded Drill: Rated Input Power: 750w; Chuck Capacity: Upto 13mm; Drill Capacity: Metal (16mm), Wood (25mm), Masonry (12mm); Dimension: 268mm (l) X 69mm (w) X 192mm (h); Weight W/out Cable: Approximately 1.6-1.8 Kg; Spindle Collar Diameter Of 43 Mm 5. Heavy Duty Corded Drill: Rated Input Power: 750w; Chuck Capacity: Upto 13mm; Drill Capacity: Metal (16mm), Wood (25mm), Masonry (12mm); Dimension: 268mm (l) X 69mm (w) X 192mm (h); Weight W/out Cable: Approximately 1.6-1.8 Kg; Spindle Collar Diameter Of 43 Mm 5. Heavy Duty Corded Drill: Rated Input Power: 750w; Chuck Capacity: Upto 13mm; Drill Capacity: Metal (16mm), Wood (25mm), Masonry (12mm); Dimension: 268mm (l) X 69mm (w) X 192mm (h); Weight W/out Cable: Approximately 1.6-1.8 Kg; Spindle Collar Diameter Of 43 Mm 7 Set Metal Drill Bit Set: Material: High Speed Steel; 19pcs Per Set (1mm,1.5mm,2mm,2.5mm,3mm,3.5mm,4mm,4.5mm,5mm,5.5mm,6mm,6.5mm,7mm,7.5mm,8mm,8.5mm,9mm,9.5mm,10mm); Point Angle:118degree C; Standards: Din 338; Bit Geometry: Standard Twist Bit 6. Metal Drill Bit Set: Material: High Speed Steel; 19pcs Per Set (1mm,1.5mm,2mm,2.5mm,3mm,3.5mm,4mm,4.5mm,5mm,5.5mm,6mm,6.5mm,7mm,7.5mm,8mm,8.5mm,9mm,9.5mm,10mm); Point Angle:118degree C; Standards: Din 338; Bit Geometry: Standard Twist Bit 6. Metal Drill Bit Set: Material: High Speed Steel; 19pcs Per Set (1mm,1.5mm,2mm,2.5mm,3mm,3.5mm,4mm,4.5mm,5mm,5.5mm,6mm,6.5mm,7mm,7.5mm,8mm,8.5mm,9mm,9.5mm,10mm); Point Angle:118degree C; Standards: Din 338; Bit Geometry: Standard Twist Bit 6. Metal Drill Bit Set: Material: High Speed Steel; 19pcs Per Set (1mm,1.5mm,2mm,2.5mm,3mm,3.5mm,4mm,4.5mm,5mm,5.5mm,6mm,6.5mm,7mm,7.5mm,8mm,8.5mm,9mm,9.5mm,10mm); Point Angle:118degree C; Standards: Din 338; Bit Geometry: Standard Twist Bit 7 Pc Angle Grinder: Rated Input Power: 730w; Wheel Diameter: 4"; Rated Voltage: 220v; Frequency: 60hz; No Load Speed: 12,000 Rpm; Weight: Approximately 1.6kg; Grinding Spindle Thread: M10; Disc Diameter: 100mm X 1 X 16mm, Dimension: 298mm (l), 77mm (w), 102mm (h) 7. Angle Grinder: Rated Input Power: 730w; Wheel Diameter: 4"; Rated Voltage: 220v; Frequency: 60hz; No Load Speed: 12,000 Rpm; Weight: Approximately 1.6kg; Grinding Spindle Thread: M10; Disc Diameter: 100mm X 1 X 16mm, Dimension: 298mm (l), 77mm (w), 102mm (h) 7. Angle Grinder: Rated Input Power: 730w; Wheel Diameter: 4"; Rated Voltage: 220v; Frequency: 60hz; No Load Speed: 12,000 Rpm; Weight: Approximately 1.6kg; Grinding Spindle Thread: M10; Disc Diameter: 100mm X 1 X 16mm, Dimension: 298mm (l), 77mm (w), 102mm (h) 7. Angle Grinder: Rated Input Power: 730w; Wheel Diameter: 4"; Rated Voltage: 220v; Frequency: 60hz; No Load Speed: 12,000 Rpm; Weight: Approximately 1.6kg; Grinding Spindle Thread: M10; Disc Diameter: 100mm X 1 X 16mm, Dimension: 298mm (l), 77mm (w), 102mm (h) 7 Pc Angle Grinder Cutting Disk: 10 Pcs.per Set; Dimensions: Approx. 105mm (4") X 1.2mm (3/64"') X 16mm (5/8") 8. Angle Grinder Cutting Disk: 10 Pcs.per Set; Dimensions: Approx. 105mm (4") X 1.2mm (3/64"') X 16mm (5/8") 8. Angle Grinder Cutting Disk: 10 Pcs.per Set; Dimensions: Approx. 105mm (4") X 1.2mm (3/64"') X 16mm (5/8") 8. Angle Grinder Cutting Disk: 10 Pcs.per Set; Dimensions: Approx. 105mm (4") X 1.2mm (3/64"') X 16mm (5/8") 7 Pc Welding Suit: 100% Cotton With Pyrovatex; 2 Back Pockets And Rule Pocket With Safety Gusset Feature; High Quality And Long Lasting; Two Way Zipper; Approximate Cloth Size: Large 9. Welding Suit: 100% Cotton With Pyrovatex; 2 Back Pockets And Rule Pocket With Safety Gusset Feature; High Quality And Long Lasting; Two Way Zipper; Approximate Cloth Size: Large 9. Welding Suit: 100% Cotton With Pyrovatex; 2 Back Pockets And Rule Pocket With Safety Gusset Feature; High Quality And Long Lasting; Two Way Zipper; Approximate Cloth Size: Large 9. Welding Suit: 100% Cotton With Pyrovatex; 2 Back Pockets And Rule Pocket With Safety Gusset Feature; High Quality And Long Lasting; Two Way Zipper; Approximate Cloth Size: Large 7 Pc Needle File Set: (6 Pieces Hand Metal Files, Hardened Alloy, Strength Steel Set Includes Flat, Flat Warding, Square, Triangular, Round, And Half-round File); Color Black; Metal Type: Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Wood, Alloy Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 6.1" (l) X 3" (w) X 0.5" (h) 10. Needle File Set: (6 Pieces Hand Metal Files, Hardened Alloy, Strength Steel Set Includes Flat, Flat Warding, Square, Triangular, Round, And Half-round File); Color Black; Metal Type: Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Wood, Alloy Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 6.1" (l) X 3" (w) X 0.5" (h) 10. Needle File Set: (6 Pieces Hand Metal Files, Hardened Alloy, Strength Steel Set Includes Flat, Flat Warding, Square, Triangular, Round, And Half-round File); Color Black; Metal Type: Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Wood, Alloy Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 6.1" (l) X 3" (w) X 0.5" (h) 10. Needle File Set: (6 Pieces Hand Metal Files, Hardened Alloy, Strength Steel Set Includes Flat, Flat Warding, Square, Triangular, Round, And Half-round File); Color Black; Metal Type: Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Wood, Alloy Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 6.1" (l) X 3" (w) X 0.5" (h) 7 Pc Mig Welding Pliers: Overall Length: Atleast 210mm; Material: High Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Thermoplastic Rubber 11. Mig Welding Pliers: Overall Length: Atleast 210mm; Material: High Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Thermoplastic Rubber 11. Mig Welding Pliers: Overall Length: Atleast 210mm; Material: High Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Thermoplastic Rubber 11. Mig Welding Pliers: Overall Length: Atleast 210mm; Material: High Carbon Steel; Handle Material: Thermoplastic Rubber 7 Pc Chipping Hammer: Item Weight: ‎at Least 13.8 Ounces; Product Dimensions: ‎11" (l) X 1" (w) X 7.5" (h); Material:, Genuine Leather Grip And Forged Steel 12. Chipping Hammer: Item Weight: ‎at Least 13.8 Ounces; Product Dimensions: ‎11" (l) X 1" (w) X 7.5" (h); Material:, Genuine Leather Grip And Forged Steel 12. Chipping Hammer: Item Weight: ‎at Least 13.8 Ounces; Product Dimensions: ‎11" (l) X 1" (w) X 7.5" (h); Material:, Genuine Leather Grip And Forged Steel 12. Chipping Hammer: Item Weight: ‎at Least 13.8 Ounces; Product Dimensions: ‎11" (l) X 1" (w) X 7.5" (h); Material:, Genuine Leather Grip And Forged Steel 20 Pack 5 Lead Sinker, Pahaba: 2" Long; 24-26g; Material: Pure Lead 20 15 Pack 2 2. Pataw #3, 100 Pcs/pack 2. Pataw #3, 100 Pcs/pack 2. Pataw #3, 100 Pcs/pack 2. Pataw #3, 100 Pcs/pack 3 1 Bundle 1 Nylon Net, #20, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #20, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #20, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #20, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 10 5 Pc 5 Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 4. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 4. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 4. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 14 9 Pc 2 Square Banyera Fish Crate, Plastic Fruit Crate 24x60x40 Cm 5. Square Banyera Fish Crate, Plastic Fruit Crate 24x60x40 Cm 5. Square Banyera Fish Crate, Plastic Fruit Crate 24x60x40 Cm 5. Square Banyera Fish Crate, Plastic Fruit Crate 24x60x40 Cm 3 2 Pc 5 Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 6. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 6. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 6. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 4 2 Pc 1 Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 7. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 7. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 7. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 4 3 Unit 1 Weighing Scale: Analog; 20kg-30kg Capacity; Approx. Dimensions: 6-7" (l); 8-9" (w); 10-11" (h); Dual Unit (kg And Pounds). 8. Weighing Scale: Analog; 20kg-30kg Capacity; Approx. Dimensions: 6-7" (l); 8-9" (w); 10-11" (h); Dual Unit (kg And Pounds). 8. Weighing Scale: Analog; 20kg-30kg Capacity; Approx. Dimensions: 6-7" (l); 8-9" (w); 10-11" (h); Dual Unit (kg And Pounds). 8. Weighing Scale: Analog; 20kg-30kg Capacity; Approx. Dimensions: 6-7" (l); 8-9" (w); 10-11" (h); Dual Unit (kg And Pounds). 3 2 Pc Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 9. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 9. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 9. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 7 2 Pc Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 10. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 10. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 10. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 4 2 Pc 1 Boning Knife: Material: Stainless Steel; Size: Approx. 5-6" (l); Handle Length: At Least 4.7"; Blade Length: Atleast 5.7"; Width Of Knife's Blade: 20mm; Weight: Minimum Of 110.6 G 11. Boning Knife: Material: Stainless Steel; Size: Approx. 5-6" (l); Handle Length: At Least 4.7"; Blade Length: Atleast 5.7"; Width Of Knife's Blade: 20mm; Weight: Minimum Of 110.6 G 11. Boning Knife: Material: Stainless Steel; Size: Approx. 5-6" (l); Handle Length: At Least 4.7"; Blade Length: Atleast 5.7"; Width Of Knife's Blade: 20mm; Weight: Minimum Of 110.6 G 11. Boning Knife: Material: Stainless Steel; Size: Approx. 5-6" (l); Handle Length: At Least 4.7"; Blade Length: Atleast 5.7"; Width Of Knife's Blade: 20mm; Weight: Minimum Of 110.6 G 11 6 Kg Nylon/tansi, #100 12. Nylon/tansi, #100 12. Nylon/tansi, #100 12. Nylon/tansi, #100 3 2 Unit Gasoline Marine Engine, Power: 6.5hp, Type: Single Cylinder, 4 Stroke, Forced Air Cooling, Bore: 68mm, Stroke: 54mm, Displacement: 19cm3, Rated Speed: 2,500rpm, Net Tourqe: 9.1 Lb-ft (12.4nm), Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.1l :, Engine Oil Cap.: 0.6l, Ignition System: Transistorized; Shafting Size:19mm. 1. Gasoline Marine Engine, Power: 6.5hp, Type: Single Cylinder, 4 Stroke, Forced Air Cooling, Bore: 68mm, Stroke: 54mm, Displacement: 19cm3, Rated Speed: 2,500rpm, Net Tourqe: 9.1 Lb-ft (12.4nm), Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.1l :, Engine Oil Cap.: 0.6l, Ignition System: Transistorized; Shafting Size:19mm. 1. Gasoline Marine Engine, Power: 6.5hp, Type: Single Cylinder, 4 Stroke, Forced Air Cooling, Bore: 68mm, Stroke: 54mm, Displacement: 19cm3, Rated Speed: 2,500rpm, Net Tourqe: 9.1 Lb-ft (12.4nm), Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.1l :, Engine Oil Cap.: 0.6l, Ignition System: Transistorized; Shafting Size:19mm. 1. Gasoline Marine Engine, Power: 6.5hp, Type: Single Cylinder, 4 Stroke, Forced Air Cooling, Bore: 68mm, Stroke: 54mm, Displacement: 19cm3, Rated Speed: 2,500rpm, Net Tourqe: 9.1 Lb-ft (12.4nm), Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.1l :, Engine Oil Cap.: 0.6l, Ignition System: Transistorized; Shafting Size:19mm. 5 5 Roll Nylon Rope/pisi, #110, (200mtrs/roll) 7. Nylon Rope/pisi, #110, (200mtrs/roll) 7. Nylon Rope/pisi, #110, (200mtrs/roll) 7. Nylon Rope/pisi, #110, (200mtrs/roll) 5 5 Roll Nylon Rope/pisi, #120, (200mtrs/roll) 8. Nylon Rope/pisi, #120, (200mtrs/roll) 8. Nylon Rope/pisi, #120, (200mtrs/roll) 8. Nylon Rope/pisi, #120, (200mtrs/roll) 1 1 Roll Nylon Rope/pisi, #10, (200mtrs/roll) 10. Nylon Rope/pisi, #10, (200mtrs/roll) 10. Nylon Rope/pisi, #10, (200mtrs/roll) 10. Nylon Rope/pisi, #10, (200mtrs/roll) 5 5 Kg 1 Nylon/tansi, #55 13. Nylon/tansi, #55 13. Nylon/tansi, #55 13. Nylon/tansi, #55 1 Pc Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 8. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 8. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 8. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 1 1 Bundle Nylon Net, #30, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #30, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #30, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 3. Nylon Net, #30, Diameter Of Hole: Approx. 9mm, 50mesh, 2ply, (1000mtrs X 4ftwidth/bundle) 1 Pc Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 9. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 9. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 9. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 3 Pc Curling Iron, 38.5cm, Tourmaline Ceramic, 25-39w, 360 Degree Rotatable 3 Pc Flat Iron, Ceramic Wide Plate, 100-240v Dual Votage, 40-59w, 27.8cm Long 3 Pc Paddle Brush, 8cm, Wooden 3. Paddle Brush, 8cm, Wooden 3. Paddle Brush, 8cm, Wooden 3. Paddle Brush, 8cm, Wooden 3 Pc Wide-tooth Comb, 16cm Plastic, Durable 4. Wide-tooth Comb, 16cm Plastic, Durable 4. Wide-tooth Comb, 16cm Plastic, Durable 4. Wide-tooth Comb, 16cm Plastic, Durable 3 Dz Hair Aligator Clips, 12pc Black For Hair Sectioning 5. Hair Aligator Clips, 12pc Black For Hair Sectioning 5. Hair Aligator Clips, 12pc Black For Hair Sectioning 5. Hair Aligator Clips, 12pc Black For Hair Sectioning 3 Pc Hair Towel Turban, 49x18cm Microfiber 6. Hair Towel Turban, 49x18cm Microfiber 6. Hair Towel Turban, 49x18cm Microfiber 6. Hair Towel Turban, 49x18cm Microfiber 3 Pc Hair Blower, 2 Speed - 3 Heat Settings, 2400w, Removable Filter Cover, Cool Shut Function, Dimension: 21.5x8.5x26.5cm 7. Hair Blower, 2 Speed - 3 Heat Settings, 2400w, Removable Filter Cover, Cool Shut Function, Dimension: 21.5x8.5x26.5cm 7. Hair Blower, 2 Speed - 3 Heat Settings, 2400w, Removable Filter Cover, Cool Shut Function, Dimension: 21.5x8.5x26.5cm 7. Hair Blower, 2 Speed - 3 Heat Settings, 2400w, Removable Filter Cover, Cool Shut Function, Dimension: 21.5x8.5x26.5cm 6 Pack Plastic Hair Roller, 25mm Assorted, 10-pc Large 8. Plastic Hair Roller, 25mm Assorted, 10-pc Large 8. Plastic Hair Roller, 25mm Assorted, 10-pc Large 8. Plastic Hair Roller, 25mm Assorted, 10-pc Large 3 Set Hair Dying Tool Set, (5-pc) Small Brush - 19.5cmx4.5cm, Big Brush - 20.5x6cm, Secondary Comb - 19x5.5cm, Small Bowl - 13x4.5cm, 1 Pair Of Earmuffs 8x4.5cm 9. Hair Dying Tool Set, (5-pc) Small Brush - 19.5cmx4.5cm, Big Brush - 20.5x6cm, Secondary Comb - 19x5.5cm, Small Bowl - 13x4.5cm, 1 Pair Of Earmuffs 8x4.5cm 9. Hair Dying Tool Set, (5-pc) Small Brush - 19.5cmx4.5cm, Big Brush - 20.5x6cm, Secondary Comb - 19x5.5cm, Small Bowl - 13x4.5cm, 1 Pair Of Earmuffs 8x4.5cm 9. Hair Dying Tool Set, (5-pc) Small Brush - 19.5cmx4.5cm, Big Brush - 20.5x6cm, Secondary Comb - 19x5.5cm, Small Bowl - 13x4.5cm, 1 Pair Of Earmuffs 8x4.5cm 3 Box Make Up Brush Kit, 12 Pcs With Box 10. Make Up Brush Kit, 12 Pcs With Box 10. Make Up Brush Kit, 12 Pcs With Box 10. Make Up Brush Kit, 12 Pcs With Box 3 Set Make Up Kit, 35pcs (1 Eyeshadow, 1 Concealer, 4 Osmetic Brush, 3 Lipgloss, 1 Eyebrow Pencil, 1 Pressed Powder, 4 Lipstick, 4 Face Makeup, 1 Lip Balm, 1 12.5cmx19cm Makeup Bag, 1 Eyebrow Cream, 1 Primer, 1 Powder Puff, 1 Mascara) 11. Make Up Kit, 35pcs (1 Eyeshadow, 1 Concealer, 4 Osmetic Brush, 3 Lipgloss, 1 Eyebrow Pencil, 1 Pressed Powder, 4 Lipstick, 4 Face Makeup, 1 Lip Balm, 1 12.5cmx19cm Makeup Bag, 1 Eyebrow Cream, 1 Primer, 1 Powder Puff, 1 Mascara) 11. Make Up Kit, 35pcs (1 Eyeshadow, 1 Concealer, 4 Osmetic Brush, 3 Lipgloss, 1 Eyebrow Pencil, 1 Pressed Powder, 4 Lipstick, 4 Face Makeup, 1 Lip Balm, 1 12.5cmx19cm Makeup Bag, 1 Eyebrow Cream, 1 Primer, 1 Powder Puff, 1 Mascara) 11. Make Up Kit, 35pcs (1 Eyeshadow, 1 Concealer, 4 Osmetic Brush, 3 Lipgloss, 1 Eyebrow Pencil, 1 Pressed Powder, 4 Lipstick, 4 Face Makeup, 1 Lip Balm, 1 12.5cmx19cm Makeup Bag, 1 Eyebrow Cream, 1 Primer, 1 Powder Puff, 1 Mascara) 3 Set Eyebrow Grooming Kit, 6pcs (2 Eyebrow Razor, 1 Facial Razor, 1 Brush, 1 Scissors, 1 Tweezer) 12. Eyebrow Grooming Kit, 6pcs (2 Eyebrow Razor, 1 Facial Razor, 1 Brush, 1 Scissors, 1 Tweezer) 12. Eyebrow Grooming Kit, 6pcs (2 Eyebrow Razor, 1 Facial Razor, 1 Brush, 1 Scissors, 1 Tweezer) 12. Eyebrow Grooming Kit, 6pcs (2 Eyebrow Razor, 1 Facial Razor, 1 Brush, 1 Scissors, 1 Tweezer) 3 Pc Makeup Kit Organizer, 50cmx39.5cmx21.5cm, Black,046 Glittery, Checkered 13. Makeup Kit Organizer, 50cmx39.5cmx21.5cm, Black,046 Glittery, Checkered 13. Makeup Kit Organizer, 50cmx39.5cmx21.5cm, Black,046 Glittery, Checkered 13. Makeup Kit Organizer, 50cmx39.5cmx21.5cm, Black,046 Glittery, Checkered 2 Pc 2 In 1 Steam Pro Hair Straightener (straightener & Curler): Tourmaline Ceramic Wide Plates - 1.25" Wide Heating Plate; Adjustable Temperature Display - 150-235◦c, 360◦; Swivel Cord - Tangle-free; Hanger Design; Ptc Heater - Instant Heat-up 2 Pack Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 2. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 2. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 2. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 2 Pack Hair Clips (alligator); Plastic; Product Size: Approx. 4.5"; Color: Black; 12pcs/pack 3. Hair Clips (alligator); Plastic; Product Size: Approx. 4.5"; Color: Black; 12pcs/pack 3. Hair Clips (alligator); Plastic; Product Size: Approx. 4.5"; Color: Black; 12pcs/pack 3. Hair Clips (alligator); Plastic; Product Size: Approx. 4.5"; Color: Black; 12pcs/pack 2 Set Hair Colourant; 100ml; With 16 Colors Inclusions: 0.00 Dust, 1.0 Black, 2.0 Black, 3.0 Dark Brown, 4.0 Medium Brown, 5.0 Light Brown, 6.0 Dark Blonde, 7.0 Medium Blonde, 8.0 Light Blonde, 9.0, Lighter Blonde, 10.0 Lightest Blonde, 6.1 Dark Ash-blonde, 8.1 Light Ash-blonde, 0.19 Ash, 7.4 Light Copper, 5.4 Dark Copper. 2 Set Hair Combs, Material: Plastic; Inclusions: Flat Comb Size - 21.5cm (l) X 4.2cm (w); Massage Comb Size: 22cm (l) X 8.5cm (w); Ribs Comb Size: 21.5cm (l) X 4cm (w); Curling Comb Size: 20.2cm (l) X 2.5cm (w); Mirror Size: Atleast 22cm (l) X 10cm (w); Storage Base Size: Atleast 10cm (l) X 15cm (w); Package Size: Approx. 22-23cm (l) X 16cm (w) X 11cm (h); Package Weight: Approx. 305g 2 Pc Hair Dryer: With 3 Temperature Setting (from High To Low); Size: Atleast 200mm (h), 74mm (w); Weight: Minimum Of 315g; Wattage: 2200w; Voltage: 120-240v; Body Material: Plastic 2 Set Hairdressing Scissors Set, Inclusion: Short-blade Scissors, Approx. Length: 4-5.5 Inches, Long-blade Scissors, Approx. Length: 6-7.5inches, Thinning Shears, Length: 6inches, With 25-50 Sharp Teeth, Texturizing Scissors, Approx. Length: 5.5-6inches, With 30-60 Sharp Teeth, Wide-tooth Chunking Shears, Length: 6inches, With 10-20 Wide Teeth, Swivel Shears, Length: 5.5inches, Material: Metal 2 Pc Salon Towels: Material: Pure Cotton; Sizes: 72cm (l) X 32cm (w); Color: White 2 Pc Salon Shawl Magnetic Cape; Magnetic Buckle; Waterproof; Material: Polyvinyl Chloride (pvc); Dimension: 68cm (l) X 43cm (w) 2 Unit Salon Shampoo Bed; Inclusions: Bed + Frame, With Hard Plastic Shampoo Bowl, Faucet, Shower, Hose; Dimension: 81cm (h) X 62cm (w) X 144cm (l) 2 Pc 4-layer Salon Trolley; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; With 5 Drawers & Retractable Top Tray; 360 Degree 4-universal Roller Wheels; Dimension: 83cm (h) X 30cm (w) X 36cm (l) 4 2 Pc Spray Bottle, Clear, Plastic, 300 Ml 2 Set Hair Rebonding Cream Set, (1liter Each) 2 Liter Oxidizing Cream, 1gal 4 2 Liter Acetone/nail Polish Remover 4 2 Liter Cuticle Remover 2. Cuticle Remover 2. Cuticle Remover 2. Cuticle Remover 2 1 Set Nail Tool Set, Material: Stainless Steel; Case: Leather; Package Size: Approximately 15-15.5cm (l) X 8cm (w) X 2cm (h); Inclusions: Cuticle Trimmer (95mm), Blackhead Needle And Loop Remover (83mm), Eyebrow Tweezer (86mm) Peeling Knife (90mm), Nail File (75mm), Ear Pick (78mm), Double Pick (75mm), Dead Skin Fork (86mm), Small Pedicure Plier (95mm), Acne Needle (83mm), Small Nail Clipper (62mm) Bevel Nail Clipper (61mm), Large Nail Clipper (82mm), Beauty Tip Scissor (89mm), Pusher 3. Nail Tool Set, Material: Stainless Steel; Case: Leather; Package Size: Approximately 15-15.5cm (l) X 8cm (w) X 2cm (h); Inclusions: Cuticle Trimmer (95mm), Blackhead Needle And Loop Remover (83mm), Eyebrow Tweezer (86mm) Peeling Knife (90mm), Nail File (75mm), Ear Pick (78mm), Double Pick (75mm), Dead Skin Fork (86mm), Small Pedicure Plier (95mm), Acne Needle (83mm), Small Nail Clipper (62mm) Bevel Nail Clipper (61mm), Large Nail Clipper (82mm), Beauty Tip Scissor (89mm), Pusher 3. Nail Tool Set, Material: Stainless Steel; Case: Leather; Package Size: Approximately 15-15.5cm (l) X 8cm (w) X 2cm (h); Inclusions: Cuticle Trimmer (95mm), Blackhead Needle And Loop Remover (83mm), Eyebrow Tweezer (86mm) Peeling Knife (90mm), Nail File (75mm), Ear Pick (78mm), Double Pick (75mm), Dead Skin Fork (86mm), Small Pedicure Plier (95mm), Acne Needle (83mm), Small Nail Clipper (62mm) Bevel Nail Clipper (61mm), Large Nail Clipper (82mm), Beauty Tip Scissor (89mm), Pusher 3. Nail Tool Set, Material: Stainless Steel; Case: Leather; Package Size: Approximately 15-15.5cm (l) X 8cm (w) X 2cm (h); Inclusions: Cuticle Trimmer (95mm), Blackhead Needle And Loop Remover (83mm), Eyebrow Tweezer (86mm) Peeling Knife (90mm), Nail File (75mm), Ear Pick (78mm), Double Pick (75mm), Dead Skin Fork (86mm), Small Pedicure Plier (95mm), Acne Needle (83mm), Small Nail Clipper (62mm) Bevel Nail Clipper (61mm), Large Nail Clipper (82mm), Beauty Tip Scissor (89mm), Pusher 2 1 Pack Cotton Balls, 300 Balls/pack 4. Cotton Balls, 300 Balls/pack 4. Cotton Balls, 300 Balls/pack 4. Cotton Balls, 300 Balls/pack 2 1 Set Nail Polish Quick Dry, 12pcs/set, Assorted Color 5. Nail Polish Quick Dry, 12pcs/set, Assorted Color 5. Nail Polish Quick Dry, 12pcs/set, Assorted Color 5. Nail Polish Quick Dry, 12pcs/set, Assorted Color 2 1 Set Nail Polish, 12pcs/set, Colorless, 15ml 6. Nail Polish, 12pcs/set, Colorless, 15ml 6. Nail Polish, 12pcs/set, Colorless, 15ml 6. Nail Polish, 12pcs/set, Colorless, 15ml 2 1 Set Nail Polish, Volume: 15ml; With 24 Colors Inclusions: 14k Gold, 18k Gold, 24k Gold, African Plum, Baby Pink, Black Velvet, Carolina Peach, Cashmere, Emerald Shimmer, Golden Bronze, Italian Nude, Platinum Special, Pussy Red, Red Pearl, Sapphire Glow, Silver Platinum, Simply Red, Tahiti Brown, White Satin, White Rose, Platinum Silver, Touch Of Tan, Touch Of Beige, Colorless 7. Nail Polish, Volume: 15ml; With 24 Colors Inclusions: 14k Gold, 18k Gold, 24k Gold, African Plum, Baby Pink, Black Velvet, Carolina Peach, Cashmere, Emerald Shimmer, Golden Bronze, Italian Nude, Platinum Special, Pussy Red, Red Pearl, Sapphire Glow, Silver Platinum, Simply Red, Tahiti Brown, White Satin, White Rose, Platinum Silver, Touch Of Tan, Touch Of Beige, Colorless 7. Nail Polish, Volume: 15ml; With 24 Colors Inclusions: 14k Gold, 18k Gold, 24k Gold, African Plum, Baby Pink, Black Velvet, Carolina Peach, Cashmere, Emerald Shimmer, Golden Bronze, Italian Nude, Platinum Special, Pussy Red, Red Pearl, Sapphire Glow, Silver Platinum, Simply Red, Tahiti Brown, White Satin, White Rose, Platinum Silver, Touch Of Tan, Touch Of Beige, Colorless 7. Nail Polish, Volume: 15ml; With 24 Colors Inclusions: 14k Gold, 18k Gold, 24k Gold, African Plum, Baby Pink, Black Velvet, Carolina Peach, Cashmere, Emerald Shimmer, Golden Bronze, Italian Nude, Platinum Special, Pussy Red, Red Pearl, Sapphire Glow, Silver Platinum, Simply Red, Tahiti Brown, White Satin, White Rose, Platinum Silver, Touch Of Tan, Touch Of Beige, Colorless 2 1 Pc Foot Spa Machine, With Pumice Stone; Package Dimensions: Approximately 16.42" X 13.58" X 7.91", Weight: About 4.63 Pounds; Rated Power: 500 Watts; Rated Voltage: 110~120v; Rated Frequency: 50hz; Temperature Adjustable Range: 35 To 48; 8. Foot Spa Machine, With Pumice Stone; Package Dimensions: Approximately 16.42" X 13.58" X 7.91", Weight: About 4.63 Pounds; Rated Power: 500 Watts; Rated Voltage: 110~120v; Rated Frequency: 50hz; Temperature Adjustable Range: 35 To 48; 8. Foot Spa Machine, With Pumice Stone; Package Dimensions: Approximately 16.42" X 13.58" X 7.91", Weight: About 4.63 Pounds; Rated Power: 500 Watts; Rated Voltage: 110~120v; Rated Frequency: 50hz; Temperature Adjustable Range: 35 To 48; 8. Foot Spa Machine, With Pumice Stone; Package Dimensions: Approximately 16.42" X 13.58" X 7.91", Weight: About 4.63 Pounds; Rated Power: 500 Watts; Rated Voltage: 110~120v; Rated Frequency: 50hz; Temperature Adjustable Range: 35 To 48; 6 3 Bottle Astringent Foot Soaker, 128oz 9. Astringent Foot Soaker, 128oz 9. Astringent Foot Soaker, 128oz 9. Astringent Foot Soaker, 128oz 4 2 Pc Cooling Foot Soak, Product Dimensions: ‎approximately 6.5-7" X 2.38-2.50" X 9.259.50", Weight: At Least 900g 10. Cooling Foot Soak, Product Dimensions: ‎approximately 6.5-7" X 2.38-2.50" X 9.259.50", Weight: At Least 900g 10. Cooling Foot Soak, Product Dimensions: ‎approximately 6.5-7" X 2.38-2.50" X 9.259.50", Weight: At Least 900g 10. Cooling Foot Soak, Product Dimensions: ‎approximately 6.5-7" X 2.38-2.50" X 9.259.50", Weight: At Least 900g 2 1 Pc Collapsible Foot Soaking Tub: Size (folded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 7.3 Cm, Size (expanded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 21.8 Cm, Material: Plastic (pp/tpr Materials), High Temperature Resistance, Style: Foldable 11. Collapsible Foot Soaking Tub: Size (folded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 7.3 Cm, Size (expanded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 21.8 Cm, Material: Plastic (pp/tpr Materials), High Temperature Resistance, Style: Foldable 11. Collapsible Foot Soaking Tub: Size (folded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 7.3 Cm, Size (expanded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 21.8 Cm, Material: Plastic (pp/tpr Materials), High Temperature Resistance, Style: Foldable 11. Collapsible Foot Soaking Tub: Size (folded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 7.3 Cm, Size (expanded): 41.6 Cm X 49.7 Cm X 21.8 Cm, Material: Plastic (pp/tpr Materials), High Temperature Resistance, Style: Foldable 2 1 Bottle Exfoliating Foot Scrub, Package Dimensions: Approximately‎ 7.05-7.50" X 2.32-3" X 1.97-2", Weight: At Least 6oz 12. Exfoliating Foot Scrub, Package Dimensions: Approximately‎ 7.05-7.50" X 2.32-3" X 1.97-2", Weight: At Least 6oz 12. Exfoliating Foot Scrub, Package Dimensions: Approximately‎ 7.05-7.50" X 2.32-3" X 1.97-2", Weight: At Least 6oz 12. Exfoliating Foot Scrub, Package Dimensions: Approximately‎ 7.05-7.50" X 2.32-3" X 1.97-2", Weight: At Least 6oz 2 1 Gallon Foot Scrub 13. Foot Scrub 13. Foot Scrub 13. Foot Scrub 2 1 Pc Foot File And Callous Remover, Material: Metal, Steel; Item Dimensions: Approx. 10-10.78" X 2.7" X 0.29"; Item Weight: 3.2 Pounds 14. Foot File And Callous Remover, Material: Metal, Steel; Item Dimensions: Approx. 10-10.78" X 2.7" X 0.29"; Item Weight: 3.2 Pounds 14. Foot File And Callous Remover, Material: Metal, Steel; Item Dimensions: Approx. 10-10.78" X 2.7" X 0.29"; Item Weight: 3.2 Pounds 14. Foot File And Callous Remover, Material: Metal, Steel; Item Dimensions: Approx. 10-10.78" X 2.7" X 0.29"; Item Weight: 3.2 Pounds 2 1 Pc Manicurist Bag, Made Of Heavy Duty Nylon; Large Capacity: Enough Room To Hold Up To 42 Bottles Of 15ml Nail Polish; Size: Approx. 8-9" (l) X 6-7" (w) X 4-5" (h), 15. Manicurist Bag, Made Of Heavy Duty Nylon; Large Capacity: Enough Room To Hold Up To 42 Bottles Of 15ml Nail Polish; Size: Approx. 8-9" (l) X 6-7" (w) X 4-5" (h), 15. Manicurist Bag, Made Of Heavy Duty Nylon; Large Capacity: Enough Room To Hold Up To 42 Bottles Of 15ml Nail Polish; Size: Approx. 8-9" (l) X 6-7" (w) X 4-5" (h), 15. Manicurist Bag, Made Of Heavy Duty Nylon; Large Capacity: Enough Room To Hold Up To 42 Bottles Of 15ml Nail Polish; Size: Approx. 8-9" (l) X 6-7" (w) X 4-5" (h), 1 Unit Gas Range With Lpg Tank: Approx. 55-70cm (l) X 50-60cm (w) X 86-93cm (h); 4-gas Burner; 62l Gas Oven; Button Ignition; Top Glass Lid; Net Weight: Maximum Of 28kg; Pan Support: Light Cast Iron Pan Support". Lpg Tank With Gas Regulator And Accessories: Capacity: 11kg Cylinder With Gauge And Safety Device; Safety Push Protection For Leakage; Gas Auto Safe Controller; Rubber Gasket, Steel Belted, About 1.8m Hose, With Clamp 1 Unit "standmixer: 2-in-1 360 Automatic Rotating Bowl Electric Stand & Hand Mixer, 4.5l W/ 5-speed Turbo Function; Power: 350w230v A.c./ 60 Hz: Material: Stainless Steel: Approximate Dimension: (l: 40-42cm X W: 29-32cm X H:39-41cm); Preferably Color Black""" 1 Pack Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 4. 12 Pcs/pack 1 Pack Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 5. 12 Pcs/pack 1 Pack Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 6.12 Pcs/pack 5. Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 6.12 Pcs/pack 5. Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 6.12 Pcs/pack 5. Mamon Molders (aluminum) Size 6.12 Pcs/pack 1 Set Measuring Cups (set For Dry), Smithcraft Stainless Steel Measuring Cups Set Have 8 Cups. The Sizes Are: 1 Cup (240ml), 3/4 Cup (180ml), 2/3 Cup (160ml), 1/2 Cup (120ml), 1/3 Cup (80ml), 1/4 Cup (60ml), 1/8 Cup (30ml), 1/16 Cup (15ml),1 Locking Ring. 6. Measuring Cups (set For Dry), Smithcraft Stainless Steel Measuring Cups Set Have 8 Cups. The Sizes Are: 1 Cup (240ml), 3/4 Cup (180ml), 2/3 Cup (160ml), 1/2 Cup (120ml), 1/3 Cup (80ml), 1/4 Cup (60ml), 1/8 Cup (30ml), 1/16 Cup (15ml),1 Locking Ring. 6. Measuring Cups (set For Dry), Smithcraft Stainless Steel Measuring Cups Set Have 8 Cups. The Sizes Are: 1 Cup (240ml), 3/4 Cup (180ml), 2/3 Cup (160ml), 1/2 Cup (120ml), 1/3 Cup (80ml), 1/4 Cup (60ml), 1/8 Cup (30ml), 1/16 Cup (15ml),1 Locking Ring. 6. Measuring Cups (set For Dry), Smithcraft Stainless Steel Measuring Cups Set Have 8 Cups. The Sizes Are: 1 Cup (240ml), 3/4 Cup (180ml), 2/3 Cup (160ml), 1/2 Cup (120ml), 1/3 Cup (80ml), 1/4 Cup (60ml), 1/8 Cup (30ml), 1/16 Cup (15ml),1 Locking Ring. 1 Set Measuring Spoons (set), 7pcs. Stainless Measuring Spoon Kit, The Kit Includes: 1/8 Tsp (0.63ml), 1/4 Tsp (1.25ml), 1/2 Tsp (2.5ml), 3/4 Tsp (3.75ml), 1 Tsp ( 5ml), 1/2 Tbsp (7.5ml), 1 Tbsp (15ml). 7. Measuring Spoons (set), 7pcs. Stainless Measuring Spoon Kit, The Kit Includes: 1/8 Tsp (0.63ml), 1/4 Tsp (1.25ml), 1/2 Tsp (2.5ml), 3/4 Tsp (3.75ml), 1 Tsp ( 5ml), 1/2 Tbsp (7.5ml), 1 Tbsp (15ml). 7. Measuring Spoons (set), 7pcs. Stainless Measuring Spoon Kit, The Kit Includes: 1/8 Tsp (0.63ml), 1/4 Tsp (1.25ml), 1/2 Tsp (2.5ml), 3/4 Tsp (3.75ml), 1 Tsp ( 5ml), 1/2 Tbsp (7.5ml), 1 Tbsp (15ml). 7. Measuring Spoons (set), 7pcs. Stainless Measuring Spoon Kit, The Kit Includes: 1/8 Tsp (0.63ml), 1/4 Tsp (1.25ml), 1/2 Tsp (2.5ml), 3/4 Tsp (3.75ml), 1 Tsp ( 5ml), 1/2 Tbsp (7.5ml), 1 Tbsp (15ml). 1 Set Butter Spatula Set / Plastic Scraper Spatula Set, 3 Pcs. 1 Medium Size Spatula: 23cm X 2.5cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatula: 35cm X 4.2cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatul: 24xm X 5cm X 0.5cm. 8. Butter Spatula Set / Plastic Scraper Spatula Set, 3 Pcs. 1 Medium Size Spatula: 23cm X 2.5cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatula: 35cm X 4.2cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatul: 24xm X 5cm X 0.5cm. 8. Butter Spatula Set / Plastic Scraper Spatula Set, 3 Pcs. 1 Medium Size Spatula: 23cm X 2.5cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatula: 35cm X 4.2cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatul: 24xm X 5cm X 0.5cm. 8. Butter Spatula Set / Plastic Scraper Spatula Set, 3 Pcs. 1 Medium Size Spatula: 23cm X 2.5cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatula: 35cm X 4.2cm X 0.5cm, 1 Large Size Spatul: 24xm X 5cm X 0.5cm. 50 50 Pc Peanut Butter Jars; Dimension: Large 15cm (h) X 7cm (dia) Pet Jar With Lid; 500ml 50 50 Pc Peanut Butter Jars; Dimension: Small 10cm (h) X 5cm (dia) Plastic Pet Jar With Lid; 250ml 2. Peanut Butter Jars; Dimension: Small 10cm (h) X 5cm (dia) Plastic Pet Jar With Lid; 250ml 2. Peanut Butter Jars; Dimension: Small 10cm (h) X 5cm (dia) Plastic Pet Jar With Lid; 250ml 2. Peanut Butter Jars; Dimension: Small 10cm (h) X 5cm (dia) Plastic Pet Jar With Lid; 250ml 1 1 Unit Adjustable Hot Air Blower Sealing Machine Heating Machine; Power Supply: Ac220v; Output: 2000w ; Air Flow: 250-450l/min; No-load Speed: 8000rpm; Temperature Range: 60-600°c; Item Size: Approx. 25cm (l) X 7cm (w) X 19.5cm (h) 3. Adjustable Hot Air Blower Sealing Machine Heating Machine; Power Supply: Ac220v; Output: 2000w ; Air Flow: 250-450l/min; No-load Speed: 8000rpm; Temperature Range: 60-600°c; Item Size: Approx. 25cm (l) X 7cm (w) X 19.5cm (h) 3. Adjustable Hot Air Blower Sealing Machine Heating Machine; Power Supply: Ac220v; Output: 2000w ; Air Flow: 250-450l/min; No-load Speed: 8000rpm; Temperature Range: 60-600°c; Item Size: Approx. 25cm (l) X 7cm (w) X 19.5cm (h) 3. Adjustable Hot Air Blower Sealing Machine Heating Machine; Power Supply: Ac220v; Output: 2000w ; Air Flow: 250-450l/min; No-load Speed: 8000rpm; Temperature Range: 60-600°c; Item Size: Approx. 25cm (l) X 7cm (w) X 19.5cm (h) 2 2 Pack Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 119 Mm X 30-35 Mm ;100pcs/pack 4. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 119 Mm X 30-35 Mm ;100pcs/pack 4. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 119 Mm X 30-35 Mm ;100pcs/pack 4. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 119 Mm X 30-35 Mm ;100pcs/pack 1 1 Pack Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 91mm X 26-30mm; 100pcs/pack 5. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 91mm X 26-30mm; 100pcs/pack 5. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 91mm X 26-30mm; 100pcs/pack 5. Shrink Wrap Film/ Cap Seal; Dimension: 91mm X 26-30mm; 100pcs/pack 1 1 Unit "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 6. "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 6. "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 6. "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 1 1 Pc Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 7. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 7. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 7. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 2 2 Pc Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 8. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 8. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 8. Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 1 1 Pack Spanish Peanuts: 5kg 9. Spanish Peanuts: 5kg 9. Spanish Peanuts: 5kg 9. Spanish Peanuts: 5kg 1 1 Pc Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 10. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 10. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 10. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 1 1 Pc Ladle, Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle, Total Length Of Item: Approx. 20inches-24 Inches. 11. Ladle, Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle, Total Length Of Item: Approx. 20inches-24 Inches. 11. Ladle, Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle, Total Length Of Item: Approx. 20inches-24 Inches. 11. Ladle, Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle, Total Length Of Item: Approx. 20inches-24 Inches. 1 1 Pack Brown Sugar, 10kg/pack 12. Brown Sugar, 10kg/pack 12. Brown Sugar, 10kg/pack 12. Brown Sugar, 10kg/pack 1 1 Gallon Cooking Oil, 1gallon 13. Cooking Oil, 1gallon 13. Cooking Oil, 1gallon 13. Cooking Oil, 1gallon 1 1 Pc Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 14. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 14. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 14. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 1 1 Pack Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 15. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 15. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 15. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 1 1 Box Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 16. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 16. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 16. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 1 1 Box Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 17. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 17. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 17. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 1.00 Unit Peanut Grinding Machine; Electric, 220v; 300w; 50-60hz;material: High Quality Stainless Steel Body And Base;color: Black; Dimension: Approx. Length: 43.5cm;width: 23cm; Height: 13.5cm. 2 Unit "l1300 A3 Ink Tank Printer. Printing Technology: Print Method: On-demand Inkjet (piezoelectric). Maximum Print Resolution: 5760 X 1440 Dpi (with Variable-sized Droplet Technology). Minimum Ink Droplet Volume: 3pl. Automatic Duplex Printing: Print Speed:. Photo Default - 10 X 15 Cm / 4 X 6 "" *2:. Approx. 58 Sec Per Photo (with Border) *1 Max Photo Draft - 10 X 15 Cm / 4 X 6 "" *2:. Approx. 31 Sec Per Photo (with Border) *1. Draft, A4 (black / Colour):.approx. 30 Ppm / 17 Ppm *1 Iso 24734, A4 Simplex (black / Colour):. Approx. 15 Ipm / 5.5ipm *1. Paper Handling:: Paper Feed Method:friction Feed. Number Of Paper Trays:1, Standard Paper Input Capacity: Up To 100 Sheets, A4 Plain Paper (75g/m2). Up To 20 Sheets, Premium Glossy Photo Paper. Output Capacity:. Up To 50 Sheets, A4 Plain Paper. Up To 30 Sheets, Premium Glossy Photo Paper. Maximum Paper Size: 12.95 X 44"". Paper Sizes:. A3+, A3, B4, A4, A5, A6, B5, 10x15cm (4x6), 13x18cm (5x7""), 16:9 Wide Size, Letter (8.5x11""), Legal (8.5x14""), Half Letter (5.5x8.5""), 9x13cm (3.5x5""), 13x20cm(5x8""), 20x25cm(8x10"") Envelopes: #10(4.125x9.5"") Dl(110x220mm), C4 (229x324mm), C6(114x162mm). Print Margin: 3mm Top, Left, Right, Bottom No. Black Nozzle Configuration: 360. Colour Nozzle Configuration:59 Per Colour (cyan, Magenta, Yellow). Print Direction:.bi-directional Printing, Uni-directional Printing" 6 Pc Claw Hammer: Round Head, Head Weight: At Least 16oz; Overall Weight: Approximately 17oz-23oz; Head Material: Forged Steel, Handle Materlial: Fiberglass Handle With Rubber Cushion; Overall Length: Approximately 12-14" 3 1 Pc Meter Tape With Magnetic Hook: Blade Material: Nylon Coated Blade; Dimensions: 16ft (l) X 25mm (w) 3 1 Pc Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 3 1 Pack Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 4. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 4. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 4. Disposable Latex Free Gloves; Non-sterile; 100 Pcs/pack; Product Dimensions: Approx.‎ 8.6" (l) X 4.9" (w) X 3" (h); Weight: 1.25 Pounds; Material: Synthetic Pvc; Color Black 3 1 Pc Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 6 2 Pc Pail With Lid And Metal Handle, Plastic, 20 Liters Capacity, H15inches, Diameter: 32cm. 3 1 Unit "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 3 1 Pc Folding Table: 4ft. Solid Top, L48inches X W24inches X H29inches, Plastic Granite Top, Steel Legs, Preferably Color White. 1 1 Unir "hand Cobbler Shoe Repair Machine Dual Cotton Nylon Line Sewing Machine Manual Leather Machine Shoe Sewing Machine Color Silver Product Dimensions 14.4""d X 20.5""w X 5.5""h Material: Cast Iron Item Weight: 22 Pounds Power Source: Crank" 3 3 Set Upholstery Stitching Thread Black 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 2. Upholstery Stitching Thread Black 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 2. Upholstery Stitching Thread Black 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 2. Upholstery Stitching Thread Black 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3 3 Set Upholstery Stitching Thread Brown 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3. Upholstery Stitching Thread Brown 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3. Upholstery Stitching Thread Brown 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3. Upholstery Stitching Thread Brown 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3 3 Set Upholstery Stitching Thread White 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 4. Upholstery Stitching Thread White 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 4. Upholstery Stitching Thread White 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 4. Upholstery Stitching Thread White 100 Mtr. 1 Pcs Upholstery Hand Stitching Tools For Belts, Saddles, Shoes, Fabric Household Use Handwork Sewing Leather Craft Shoes Repairing 3 3 Pc "wooden Handle Shoes Repairing Awl Shoe Sewing Tool Diy Craft Repair Hand Straight Hook Shoes Sewing Awl Type: Shoes Sewing Awl Material: Wood+metal Features: Shoes Sewing Awl, Repair Hand , Crochet Needle Tool Dimension: 1: App.2x13.5x6cm/0.79x5.31x2.36in 2: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in 3: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in Color: Wood Color+silver" 5. "wooden Handle Shoes Repairing Awl Shoe Sewing Tool Diy Craft Repair Hand Straight Hook Shoes Sewing Awl Type: Shoes Sewing Awl Material: Wood+metal Features: Shoes Sewing Awl, Repair Hand , Crochet Needle Tool Dimension: 1: App.2x13.5x6cm/0.79x5.31x2.36in 2: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in 3: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in Color: Wood Color+silver" 5. "wooden Handle Shoes Repairing Awl Shoe Sewing Tool Diy Craft Repair Hand Straight Hook Shoes Sewing Awl Type: Shoes Sewing Awl Material: Wood+metal Features: Shoes Sewing Awl, Repair Hand , Crochet Needle Tool Dimension: 1: App.2x13.5x6cm/0.79x5.31x2.36in 2: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in 3: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in Color: Wood Color+silver" 5. "wooden Handle Shoes Repairing Awl Shoe Sewing Tool Diy Craft Repair Hand Straight Hook Shoes Sewing Awl Type: Shoes Sewing Awl Material: Wood+metal Features: Shoes Sewing Awl, Repair Hand , Crochet Needle Tool Dimension: 1: App.2x13.5x6cm/0.79x5.31x2.36in 2: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in 3: App.2x13x5.5cm/0.79x5.12x2.17in Color: Wood Color+silver" 1 1 Unit Electric High Speed Sewing Machine, Power: 90w; Rated Voltage: 220v; Gross Weight: About 7kg; Max Sewing Speed: 1,100 Stiches/min; Materials: Stainless Steel Needle Plate, Metal Frame; Dimensions: Approximately 44cm (l) X 16cm (w) X 28cm (h); Voltage: 220v, Secondary Lifting Height Or Presser Foot: 14mm; Needle Pitch: From 0-4.5mm, Needle Width: From 0-7.0mm. 1. Electric High Speed Sewing Machine, Power: 90w; Rated Voltage: 220v; Gross Weight: About 7kg; Max Sewing Speed: 1,100 Stiches/min; Materials: Stainless Steel Needle Plate, Metal Frame; Dimensions: Approximately 44cm (l) X 16cm (w) X 28cm (h); Voltage: 220v, Secondary Lifting Height Or Presser Foot: 14mm; Needle Pitch: From 0-4.5mm, Needle Width: From 0-7.0mm. 1. Electric High Speed Sewing Machine, Power: 90w; Rated Voltage: 220v; Gross Weight: About 7kg; Max Sewing Speed: 1,100 Stiches/min; Materials: Stainless Steel Needle Plate, Metal Frame; Dimensions: Approximately 44cm (l) X 16cm (w) X 28cm (h); Voltage: 220v, Secondary Lifting Height Or Presser Foot: 14mm; Needle Pitch: From 0-4.5mm, Needle Width: From 0-7.0mm. 1. Electric High Speed Sewing Machine, Power: 90w; Rated Voltage: 220v; Gross Weight: About 7kg; Max Sewing Speed: 1,100 Stiches/min; Materials: Stainless Steel Needle Plate, Metal Frame; Dimensions: Approximately 44cm (l) X 16cm (w) X 28cm (h); Voltage: 220v, Secondary Lifting Height Or Presser Foot: 14mm; Needle Pitch: From 0-4.5mm, Needle Width: From 0-7.0mm. 1 1 Unit Edging/ Overlock Sewing Machine With 3 Threads, Material: Metal; No Of Stiches: 10 Stiches Per Minute: Atleast 800 Stiches; Weight: About 12kg; Dimension: Approximately 12" (l) X 13" (w) X 14" (h), Portable 2. Edging/ Overlock Sewing Machine With 3 Threads, Material: Metal; No Of Stiches: 10 Stiches Per Minute: Atleast 800 Stiches; Weight: About 12kg; Dimension: Approximately 12" (l) X 13" (w) X 14" (h), Portable 2. Edging/ Overlock Sewing Machine With 3 Threads, Material: Metal; No Of Stiches: 10 Stiches Per Minute: Atleast 800 Stiches; Weight: About 12kg; Dimension: Approximately 12" (l) X 13" (w) X 14" (h), Portable 2. Edging/ Overlock Sewing Machine With 3 Threads, Material: Metal; No Of Stiches: 10 Stiches Per Minute: Atleast 800 Stiches; Weight: About 12kg; Dimension: Approximately 12" (l) X 13" (w) X 14" (h), Portable 1 1 Pc Dressmaker's Shears: Material: Stainless Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 0.8" (l) X 3.9" (w) X 10" (h); Blade Length: 8"; Item Weight: Approximately 8.8 Ounces 3. Dressmaker's Shears: Material: Stainless Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 0.8" (l) X 3.9" (w) X 10" (h); Blade Length: 8"; Item Weight: Approximately 8.8 Ounces 3. Dressmaker's Shears: Material: Stainless Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 0.8" (l) X 3.9" (w) X 10" (h); Blade Length: 8"; Item Weight: Approximately 8.8 Ounces 3. Dressmaker's Shears: Material: Stainless Steel; Item Dimensions: Approximately 0.8" (l) X 3.9" (w) X 10" (h); Blade Length: 8"; Item Weight: Approximately 8.8 Ounces 1 1 Pc French Curve: Material: Plastic; Color: White; Size: Approx. 58cm (l) X 40cm (w) 4. French Curve: Material: Plastic; Color: White; Size: Approx. 58cm (l) X 40cm (w) 4. French Curve: Material: Plastic; Color: White; Size: Approx. 58cm (l) X 40cm (w) 4. French Curve: Material: Plastic; Color: White; Size: Approx. 58cm (l) X 40cm (w) 1 1 Pc Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 5. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 5. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 5. Steel Square: Carpenter's Framing Square, Blade Width: 2" Scale: At Least 16" (l) X 24" (w); Material: Steel 1 1 Box Tailor Chalk: 30pcs Per Box; Rectangular Shape; Orange (color); Dimensions 2.3x2.3x2.3 Inches; 0.2 Ounces 6. Tailor Chalk: 30pcs Per Box; Rectangular Shape; Orange (color); Dimensions 2.3x2.3x2.3 Inches; 0.2 Ounces 6. Tailor Chalk: 30pcs Per Box; Rectangular Shape; Orange (color); Dimensions 2.3x2.3x2.3 Inches; 0.2 Ounces 6. Tailor Chalk: 30pcs Per Box; Rectangular Shape; Orange (color); Dimensions 2.3x2.3x2.3 Inches; 0.2 Ounces 1 1 Unit Weighing Scale: Analog; 20kg-30kg Capacity; Approx. Dimensions: 6-7" (l); 8-9" (w); 10-11" (h); Dual Unit (kg And Pounds). 10 10 Pc 2. Plastic Vegetable/fruit Crate 21x15x12 Inches 1 1 Pc Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 1 1 Pc Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 4. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 4. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 4. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 2 2 Pc Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 5. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 5. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 5. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 1 1 Set "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 6. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 6. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 6. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 1 1 Box Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 7. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 7. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 7. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 1 1 Pc Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 8. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 8. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 8. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 1 1 Box Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 9. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 9. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 9. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 16 1 Unit "2 Burner Gas Stoves With Hose, Regulator, Clamp And Lpg Tank With 11kls Content. " 16 1 Pc Caldero: Aluminum; #2; Diameter Height 28cmx16cm With Double Handle 2. Caldero: Aluminum; #2; Diameter Height 28cmx16cm With Double Handle 2. Caldero: Aluminum; #2; Diameter Height 28cmx16cm With Double Handle 2. Caldero: Aluminum; #2; Diameter Height 28cmx16cm With Double Handle 32 1 Pc Kawali; Material: Cast Iron, Approx. 39cm-45cm Diameter, Depth: 9 Cm, Single Black Handle, Without Lid 3. Kawali; Material: Cast Iron, Approx. 39cm-45cm Diameter, Depth: 9 Cm, Single Black Handle, Without Lid 3. Kawali; Material: Cast Iron, Approx. 39cm-45cm Diameter, Depth: 9 Cm, Single Black Handle, Without Lid 3. Kawali; Material: Cast Iron, Approx. 39cm-45cm Diameter, Depth: 9 Cm, Single Black Handle, Without Lid 40 1 Pc 4. Wok Ladle: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle: Total Length Of Item: 24 Inches 4. Wok Ladle: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle: Total Length Of Item: 24 Inches 4. Wok Ladle: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle: Total Length Of Item: 24 Inches 4. Wok Ladle: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle: Total Length Of Item: 24 Inches 40 1 Pc Wok Spatula: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle; Total Length Of Item:24 Inches 5. Wok Spatula: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle; Total Length Of Item:24 Inches 5. Wok Spatula: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle; Total Length Of Item:24 Inches 5. Wok Spatula: Material: Stainless Steel With Wooden Handle; Total Length Of Item:24 Inches 20 1 Pc 6. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 6. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 6. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 6. Stainless Steel Long Wooden Handle Skimmer Strainer: Material: Stainess Steel; Size: 32.3*11.5cm 20 1 Set Food Warmer/chafing Dish: Rectangular; 2l Capacity; 6 Pcs In 1 Set Stainless Steel, No Side Handle; Glass Lid Cover With Handle; Dimensions: Same Sizes - 32cm (l) X 26cm (w) X 8cm (h) 7. Food Warmer/chafing Dish: Rectangular; 2l Capacity; 6 Pcs In 1 Set Stainless Steel, No Side Handle; Glass Lid Cover With Handle; Dimensions: Same Sizes - 32cm (l) X 26cm (w) X 8cm (h) 7. Food Warmer/chafing Dish: Rectangular; 2l Capacity; 6 Pcs In 1 Set Stainless Steel, No Side Handle; Glass Lid Cover With Handle; Dimensions: Same Sizes - 32cm (l) X 26cm (w) X 8cm (h) 7. Food Warmer/chafing Dish: Rectangular; 2l Capacity; 6 Pcs In 1 Set Stainless Steel, No Side Handle; Glass Lid Cover With Handle; Dimensions: Same Sizes - 32cm (l) X 26cm (w) X 8cm (h) 16 1 Pc Display Rack With Screen Door, Glass With Aluminum Sidings, 2 Layers, Dimension: 24inches(l) X 18inches(h), 12inches(bottom Width) X 10inches(top Width). 8. Display Rack With Screen Door, Glass With Aluminum Sidings, 2 Layers, Dimension: 24inches(l) X 18inches(h), 12inches(bottom Width) X 10inches(top Width). 8. Display Rack With Screen Door, Glass With Aluminum Sidings, 2 Layers, Dimension: 24inches(l) X 18inches(h), 12inches(bottom Width) X 10inches(top Width). 8. Display Rack With Screen Door, Glass With Aluminum Sidings, 2 Layers, Dimension: 24inches(l) X 18inches(h), 12inches(bottom Width) X 10inches(top Width). 1 1 Set "oscilloscope, Handheld, Digital, Up To 400v Signal, 80khz /5.0v Pwm, Display: 2.4inch Color Screen With Backlight, Battery: 1 * Lithium Battery, 1500mah, Recharging: Usb Type-c, 5v" 20 1 Pc Frying Tongs; Materials: Stainless Steel With Rubber Or Plastic Coated Handles ; 12 Inch Long 10. Frying Tongs; Materials: Stainless Steel With Rubber Or Plastic Coated Handles ; 12 Inch Long 10. Frying Tongs; Materials: Stainless Steel With Rubber Or Plastic Coated Handles ; 12 Inch Long 10. Frying Tongs; Materials: Stainless Steel With Rubber Or Plastic Coated Handles ; 12 Inch Long 16 1 Pc Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 11. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 11. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 11. Non-slip Rectangular Chopping Board; Material: Polypropylene Plastic; Approx. Dimension 15"-18" (l), Approx. 10"-12" (w); Thickness Atleast 1cm 16 1 Set "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 12. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 12. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 12. "knife Set, (1 * 8 Inch Chef Knife 1 * 8 Inch Bread Knife 1 * 8 Inch Slicing Knife 1 * 7 Inch Santoku Knife 1 * 5 Inch Utility Knife 1 * 3.5 Inch Paring Knife), Stainless Steel, Plastic Handle, 6 Knives Per Set. " 16 1 Pc Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 13. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 13. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 13. Butcher's Knife, 8 Inches Blade Length, High Carbon Steel, Wood Handle, 12.5cm Handle Length. 16 1 Set Melamine Plate, 12pc/set, Diam: 11inches 14. Melamine Plate, 12pc/set, Diam: 11inches 14. Melamine Plate, 12pc/set, Diam: 11inches 14. Melamine Plate, 12pc/set, Diam: 11inches 16 1 Dz Stainless Table Spoon, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 15. Stainless Table Spoon, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 15. Stainless Table Spoon, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 15. Stainless Table Spoon, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 16 1 Dz Stainless Table Fork, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 16. Stainless Table Fork, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 16. Stainless Table Fork, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 16. Stainless Table Fork, 12pcs/set, L-8inches 20 1 Pc Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 17. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 17. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 17. Plastic Table, Square, 38 X 24 Inches (l X W), 4 Seaters With 40" Round Umbrella Metal Pole With White Finish, Round, H5ft, Fabric High Density Polyester, 8 Ribs, Manual Lift Opening Mechanism, Muticolor (set). 64 Pc Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 18. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 18. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 18. Monoblock Chair – White (36 Inches X 36 Inches) 20 1 Pc Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 19. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 19. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 19. Cooler Container: Chest Insulated Cooler, Materials: Polystyrene, Sizes And Capacities: 30 Liters - 45.5cm(l) X 39cm(w) X 31cm(h); Color: Blue Or Red 16 1 Dz "melamine Soup Bowl, 12pcs/set, Diam: 9inches, Depth: 4inches " 20. "melamine Soup Bowl, 12pcs/set, Diam: 9inches, Depth: 4inches " 20. "melamine Soup Bowl, 12pcs/set, Diam: 9inches, Depth: 4inches " 20. "melamine Soup Bowl, 12pcs/set, Diam: 9inches, Depth: 4inches " 20 1 Pack Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 21. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 21. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 21. Hairnet, Reusable Hair Nets For Food Service, Black, Stretchable/elastic, 12pcs/pack. 20 1 Box Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 22. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 22. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 22. Facemask, 3 Ply, With Earloop, Disposable/non-woven, 50 Pcs/box, Blue Color 20 1 Box Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 23. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 23. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 23. Gloves, Disposable, Plastic, Transparent, 50pcs/box. 20 1 Pc Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 24. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 24. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 24. Apron, Rubberized, Approx. Length 95cm/ 37.4cm, Approx. Width 65cm/25.59cm 20 1 Pc Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 25. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 25. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 25. Kawa: 19.5" Cast Iron With Double Handle Depth/height: 21cm (medium) 15 Set Casserole Starter Kit; 5pcs/set,16cm, 18cm, 20cm, 22cm, 24cm, Stainless Steel, 2 Handles 4 1 Unit 1. 3 In 1 Burger Griller With Deep Fryer And Steamer With Lpg Tank: Gas Type; Made Of Stainless Steel And Polished Metal Griddle Plate; Dimensions: Burger Griddle - 18" (l) X 12" (w); Deep Fryer - 8" (l) X 12" (w), Capacity: 2.5 L; Steamer: 11" (l) X 12" (w). Lpg Tank With Gas Regulator And Accessories: Capacity: 11kg Cylinder With Gauge And Safety Device; Safety Push Protection For Leakage; Gas Auto Safe Controller; Rubber Gasket, Steel Belted, About 1.8m Hose, With Clamp 16 4 Pc Round Canister Food Storage: Plastic 5"x6.5"; For Sauce. 10. Round Canister Food Storage: Plastic 5"x6.5"; For Sauce. 10. Round Canister Food Storage: Plastic 5"x6.5"; For Sauce. 10. Round Canister Food Storage: Plastic 5"x6.5"; For Sauce. 16 4 Pc Plastic Squeeze Bottle: Material: Food Grade Plastic Bottle Color: Transparent; Lid Color: Red, Blue (random); Size: Diameter: 1.9in/4.8cm X Overall Height: 7.4in/18.8cm; Capacity: 8oz 11. Plastic Squeeze Bottle: Material: Food Grade Plastic Bottle Color: Transparent; Lid Color: Red, Blue (random); Size: Diameter: 1.9in/4.8cm X Overall Height: 7.4in/18.8cm; Capacity: 8oz 11. Plastic Squeeze Bottle: Material: Food Grade Plastic Bottle Color: Transparent; Lid Color: Red, Blue (random); Size: Diameter: 1.9in/4.8cm X Overall Height: 7.4in/18.8cm; Capacity: 8oz 11. Plastic Squeeze Bottle: Material: Food Grade Plastic Bottle Color: Transparent; Lid Color: Red, Blue (random); Size: Diameter: 1.9in/4.8cm X Overall Height: 7.4in/18.8cm; Capacity: 8oz 1 1 Unit Grill/ Ihawan With Stand,material Of Body And Stand: Stainless , 24x12x33inches (lxwxh), Depth: 5inches 16. Grill/ Ihawan With Stand,material Of Body And Stand: Stainless , 24x12x33inches (lxwxh), Depth: 5inches 16. Grill/ Ihawan With Stand,material Of Body And Stand: Stainless , 24x12x33inches (lxwxh), Depth: 5inches 16. Grill/ Ihawan With Stand,material Of Body And Stand: Stainless , 24x12x33inches (lxwxh), Depth: 5inches

Details: Description Philippine Bidding Documents (as Harmonized With Development Partners) Road Opening Project - Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-961-b Iloilo Provincial Government Sixth Edition Table Of Contents Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms 4 Section I. Invitation To Bid 7 Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders 9 1. Scope Of Bid 9 2. Funding Information 9 3. Bidding Requirements 9 4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices 9 5. Eligible Bidders 10 6. Origin Of Associated Goods 10 7. Subcontracts 10 8. Pre-bid Conference 10 9. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents 10 10. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components 11 11. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component 11 12. Alternative Bids 11 13. Bid Prices 12 14. Bid And Payment Currencies 12 15. Bid Security 12 16. Sealing And Marking Of Bids 12 17. Deadline For Submission Of Bids 12 18. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids 13 19. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids 13 20. Post Qualification 13 21. Signing Of The Contract 13 Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet 14 Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract 16 1. Scope Of Contract 16 2. Sectional Completion Of Works 16 3. Possession Of Site 16 4. The Contractor’s Obligations 16 5. Performance Security 17 6. Site Investigation Reports 17 7. Warranty 17 8. Liability Of The Contractor 17 9. Termination For Other Causes 17 10. Dayworks 18 11. Program Of Work 18 12. Instructions, Inspections And Audits 18 13. Advance Payment 18 14. Progress Payments 18 15. Operating And Maintenance Manuals 18 Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract 19 Section Vi. Specifications 20 Section Vii. Drawings 28 Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities 65 Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents 69 Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms Abc – Approved Budget For The Contract. Arcc – Allowable Range Of Contract Cost. Bac – Bids And Awards Committee. Bid – A Signed Offer Or Proposal To Undertake A Contract Submitted By A Bidder In Response To And In Consonance With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. Also Referred To As Proposal And Tender. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[c]) Bidder – Refers To A Contractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Distributor And/or Consultant Who Submits A Bid In Response To The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[d]) Bidding Documents – The Documents Issued By The Procuring Entity As The Bases For Bids, Furnishing All Information Necessary For A Prospective Bidder To Prepare A Bid For The Goods, Infrastructure Projects, And/or Consulting Services Required By The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[e]) Bir – Bureau Of Internal Revenue. Bsp – Bangko Sentral Ng Pilipinas. Cda – Cooperative Development Authority. Consulting Services – Refer To Services For Infrastructure Projects And Other Types Of Projects Or Activities Of The Gop Requiring Adequate External Technical And Professional Expertise That Are Beyond The Capability And/or Capacity Of The Gop To Undertake Such As, But Not Limited To: (i) Advisory And Review Services; (ii) Pre-investment Or Feasibility Studies; (iii) Design; (iv) Construction Supervision; (v) Management And Related Services; And (vi) Other Technical Services Or Special Studies. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[i]) Contract – Refers To The Agreement Entered Into Between The Procuring Entity And The Supplier Or Manufacturer Or Distributor Or Service Provider For Procurement Of Goods And Services; Contractor For Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects; Or Consultant Or Consulting Firm For Procurement Of Consulting Services; As The Case May Be, As Recorded In The Contract Form Signed By The Parties, Including All Attachments And Appendices Thereto And All Documents Incorporated By Reference Therein. Contractor – Is A Natural Or Juridical Entity Whose Proposal Was Accepted By The Procuring Entity And To Whom The Contract To Execute The Work Was Awarded. Contractor As Used In These Bidding Documents May Likewise Refer To A Supplier, Distributor, Manufacturer, Or Consultant. Cpi – Consumer Price Index. Dole – Department Of Labor And Employment. Dti – Department Of Trade And Industry. Foreign-funded Procurement Or Foreign-assisted Project – Refers To Procurement Whose Funding Source Is From A Foreign Government, Foreign Or International Financing Institution As Specified In The Treaty Or International Or Executive Agreement. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[b]). Gfi – Government Financial Institution. Gocc – Government-owned And/or –controlled Corporation. Goods – Refer To All Items, Supplies, Materials And General Support Services, Except Consulting Services And Infrastructure Projects, Which May Be Needed In The Transaction Of Public Businesses Or In The Pursuit Of Any Government Undertaking, Project Or Activity, Whether In The Nature Of Equipment, Furniture, Stationery, Materials For Construction, Or Personal Property Of Any Kind, Including Non-personal Or Contractual Services Such As The Repair And Maintenance Of Equipment And Furniture, As Well As Trucking, Hauling, Janitorial, Security, And Related Or Analogous Services, As Well As Procurement Of Materials And Supplies Provided By The Procuring Entity For Such Services. The Term “related” Or “analogous Services” Shall Include, But Is Not Limited To, Lease Or Purchase Of Office Space, Media Advertisements, Health Maintenance Services, And Other Services Essential To The Operation Of The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[r]) Gop – Government Of The Philippines. Infrastructure Projects – Include The Construction, Improvement, Rehabilitation, Demolition, Repair, Restoration Or Maintenance Of Roads And Bridges, Railways, Airports, Seaports, Communication Facilities, Civil Works Components Of Information Technology Projects, Irrigation, Flood Control And Drainage, Water Supply, Sanitation, Sewerage And Solid Waste Management Systems, Shore Protection, Energy/power And Electrification Facilities, National Buildings, School Buildings, Hospital Buildings, And Other Related Construction Projects Of The Government. Also Referred To As Civil Works Or Works. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[u]) Lgus – Local Government Units. Nfcc – Net Financial Contracting Capacity. Nga – National Government Agency. Pcab – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board. Philgeps - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System. Procurement Project – Refers To A Specific Or Identified Procurement Covering Goods, Infrastructure Project Or Consulting Services. A Procurement Project Shall Be Described, Detailed, And Scheduled In The Project Procurement Management Plan Prepared By The Agency Which Shall Be Consolidated In The Procuring Entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (gppb Circular No. 06-2019 Dated 17 July 2019) Psa – Philippine Statistics Authority. Sec – Securities And Exchange Commission. Slcc – Single Largest Completed Contract. Un – United Nations. Republic Of The Philippines Iloilo Provincial Government Section I. Invitation To Bid For Road Opening Project - Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-961-b The Iloilo Provincial Government, Through The 20% Nta Development Fund Fy-2024 – Road Networks – Farm To Market Road Intends To Apply The Sum Of Two Million Four Hundred Fifty Thousand Pesos (p2,450,000.00) Being The Approved Budget For The Contract (abc) To Payments Under The Contract For Agr-24-961-b For The Road Opening Project-farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo For The Bids Received In Excess Of The Abc Shall Be Automatically Rejected At Bid Opening. The Iloilo Provincial Government Now Invites Bids For The Above Procurement Project. Completion Of The Works Is Required Sixty (60) Calendar Days. Bidders Should Have Completed A Contract Similar To The Project. The Description Of An Eligible Bidder Is Contained In The Bidding Documents, Particularly, In Section Ii (instructions To Bidders). Bidding Will Be Conducted Through Open Competitive Bidding Procedures Using Non-discretionary “pass/fail” Criterion As Specified In The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Republic Act (ra) No. 9184. Interested Bidders May Obtain Further Information From The Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines And Inspect The Bidding Documents At The Address Given Below From 8:00am To 5:00pm. A Complete Set Of Bidding Documents May Be Acquired By Interested Bidders On July 29, 2024 From Given Address And Website/s Below And Upon Payment Of The Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents, Pursuant To The Latest Guidelines Issued By The Gppb, In The Amount Of Five Thousand Pesos (p5,000.00). The Procuring Entity Shall Allow The Bidder To Present Its Proof Of Payment For The Fees In Person. The Iloilo Provincial Government Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference On August 6, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines, And/or Through Videoconferencing/webcasting Via Zoom Conference Which Shall Be Open To Prospective Bidders. The Default Meeting Id And Password Shall Be: Meeting Id: 4340851724 // Password: 0922 Bids Must Be Duly Received By The Bac Secretariat Through Manual Submission At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City On Or Before August 20, 2024, 9:00 A.m. Late Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. All Bids Must Be Accompanied By A Bid Security In Any Of The Acceptable Forms And In The Amount Stated In Itb Clause 16. Bid Opening Shall Be On August 20, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines. Bids Will Be Opened In The Presence Of The Bidders’ Representatives Who Choose To Attend The Activity. The Iloilo Provincial Government Reserves The Right To Reject Any And All Bids, Declare A Failure Of Bidding, Or Not Award The Contract At Any Time Prior To Contract Award In Accordance With Sections 35.6 And 41 Of The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Ra No. 9184, Without Thereby Incurring Any Liability To The Affected Bidder Or Bidders. For Further Information, Please Refer To: Atty. Raemman M. Lagrada Head, Bac Secretariat 5f New Iloilo Provincial Capitol Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City Tel. No. (33) 336-0736 Fax No. (33) 337-7731 Email: Ipg_bacs@yahoo.com You May Visit The Following Websites: For Downloading Of Bidding Documents: Www.iloilo.gov.ph July 15, 2024 Atty. Dennis T. Ventilacion Bac Chairperson Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders Scope Of Bid The Procuring Entity, Iloilo Provincial Government Invites Bids For The Road Opening Project – Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo With Project Identification Number Agr-24-961-b. The Procurement Project (referred To Herein As “project”) Is For The Construction Of Works, As Described In Section Vi (specifications). Funding Information The Gop Through The Source Of Funding As Indicated Below For 2024 In The Amount Of Two Million Four Hundred Fifty Thousand Pesos (p2,450,000.00) The Source Of Funding Is: A. 20% Nta Development Fund Fy 2024 – Road Networks – Farm To Market Road Bidding Requirements The Bidding For The Project Shall Be Governed By All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including Its Generic Procurement Manual And Associated Policies, Rules And Regulations As The Primary Source Thereof, While The Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source Thereof. Any Amendments Made To The Irr And Other Gppb Issuances Shall Be Applicable Only To The Ongoing Posting, Advertisement, Or Invitation To Bid By The Bac Through The Issuance Of A Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin. The Bidder, By The Act Of Submitting Its Bid, Shall Be Deemed To Have Inspected The Site, Determined The General Characteristics Of The Contracted Works And The Conditions For This Project, Such As The Location And The Nature Of The Work; (b) Climatic Conditions; (c) Transportation Facilities; (c) Nature And Condition Of The Terrain, Geological Conditions At The Site Communication Facilities, Requirements, Location And Availability Of Construction Aggregates And Other Materials, Labor, Water, Electric Power And Access Roads; And (d) Other Factors That May Affect The Cost, Duration And Execution Or Implementation Of The Contract, Project, Or Work And Examine All Instructions, Forms, Terms, And Project Requirements In The Bidding Documents. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices The Procuring Entity, As Well As The Bidders And Contractors, Shall Observe The Highest Standard Of Ethics During The Procurement And Execution Of The Contract. They Or Through An Agent Shall Not Engage In Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices Defined Under Annex “i” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Or Other Integrity Violations In Competing For The Project. Eligible Bidders Only Bids Of Bidders Found To Be Legally, Technically, And Financially Capable Will Be Evaluated. The Bidder Must Have An Experience Of Having Completed A Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) That Is Similar To This Project, Equivalent To At Least Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Abc Adjusted, If Necessary, By The Bidder To Current Prices Using The Psa’s Cpi, Except Under Conditions Provided For In Section 23.4.2.4 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. A Contract Is Considered To Be “similar” To The Contract To Be Bid If It Has The Major Categories Of Work Stated In The Bds. For Foreign-funded Procurement, The Procuring Entity And The Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution May Agree On Another Track Record Requirement, As Specified In The Bidding Document Prepared For This Purpose. The Bidders Shall Comply With The Eligibility Criteria Under Section 23.4.2 Of The 2016 Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Origin Of Associated Goods There Is No Restriction On The Origin Of Goods Other Than Those Prohibited By A Decision Of The Un Security Council Taken Under Chapter Vii Of The Charter Of The Un. Subcontracts The Bidder May Subcontract Portions Of The Project To The Extent Allowed By The Procuring Entity As Stated Herein, But In No Case More Than Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Project. The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That: Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. Pre-bid Conference The Procuring Entity Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference For This Project On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address At Bac Office, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Iloilo City And/or Through Videoconferencing As Indicated In Paragraph 6 Of The Ib. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents Prospective Bidders May Request For Clarification On And/or Interpretation Of Any Part Of The Bidding Documents. Such Requests Must Be In Writing And Received By The Procuring Entity, Either At Its Given Address Or Through Electronic Mail Indicated In The Ib, At Least Ten (10) Calendar Days Before The Deadline Set For The Submission And Receipt Of Bids. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components The First Envelope Shall Contain The Eligibility And Technical Documents Of The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. If The Eligibility Requirements Or Statements, The Bids, And All Other Documents For Submission To The Bac Are In Foreign Language Other Than English, It Must Be Accompanied By A Translation In English, Which Shall Be Authenticated By The Appropriate Philippine Foreign Service Establishment, Post, Or The Equivalent Office Having Jurisdiction Over The Foreign Bidder’s Affairs In The Philippines. For Contracting Parties To The Apostille Convention, Only The Translated Documents Shall Be Authenticated Through An Apostille Pursuant To Gppb Resolution No. 13-2019 Dated 23 May 2019. The English Translation Shall Govern, For Purposes Of Interpretation Of The Bid. In Joint Ventures, A Special Pcab License, And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract For This Project, Shall Be Required. Any Additional Type Of Contractor License Or Permit Shall Be Indicated In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen) Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data Shall Be Provided. These Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership, Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be, Must Meet The Minimum Requirements For The Contract Set In The Bds. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component The Second Bid Envelope Shall Contain The Financial Documents For The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. Any Bid Exceeding The Abc Indicated In Paragraph 1 Of The Ib Shall Not Be Accepted. For Foreign-funded Procurement, A Ceiling May Be Applied To Bid Prices Provided The Conditions Are Met Under Section 31.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Alternative Bids Bidders Shall Submit Offers That Comply With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents, Including The Basic Technical Design As Indicated In The Drawings And Specifications. Unless There Is A Value Engineering Clause In The Bds, Alternative Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. Bid Prices All Bid Prices For The Given Scope Of Work In The Project As Awarded Shall Be Considered As Fixed Prices, And Therefore Not Subject To Price Escalation During Contract Implementation, Except Under Extraordinary Circumstances As Determined By The Neda And Approved By The Gppb Pursuant To The Revised Guidelines For Contract Price Escalation Guidelines. Bid And Payment Currencies Bid Prices May Be Quoted In The Local Currency Or Tradeable Currency Accepted By The Bsp At The Discretion Of The Bidder. However, For Purposes Of Bid Evaluation, Bids Denominated In Foreign Currencies Shall Be Converted To Philippine Currency Based On The Exchange Rate As Published In The Bsp Reference Rate Bulletin On The Day Of The Bid Opening. Payment Of The Contract Price Shall Be Made In: Philippine Pesos. Bid Security The Bidder Shall Submit A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Form Of Bid Security In The Amount Indicated In The Bds, Which Shall Be Not Less Than The Percentage Of The Abc In Accordance With The Schedule In The Bds. The Bid And Bid Security Shall Be Valid Until December 18, 2024. Any Bid Not Accompanied By An Acceptable Bid Security Shall Be Rejected By The Procuring Entity As Non-responsive. Sealing And Marking Of Bids Each Bidder Shall Submit One Copy Of The First And Second Components Of Its Bid. The Procuring Entity May Request Additional Hard Copies And/or Electronic Copies Of The Bid. However, Failure Of The Bidders To Comply With The Said Request Shall Not Be A Ground For Disqualification. If The Procuring Entity Allows The Submission Of Bids Through Online Submission To The Given Website Or Any Other Electronic Means, The Bidder Shall Submit An Electronic Copy Of Its Bid, Which Must Be Digitally Signed. An Electronic Copy That Cannot Be Opened Or Is Corrupted Shall Be Considered Non-responsive And, Thus, Automatically Disqualified. Deadline For Submission Of Bids The Bidders Shall Submit On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address Or Through Online Submission As Indicated In Paragraph 7 Of The Ib. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids The Bac Shall Open The Bids In Public At The Time, On The Date, And At The Place Specified In Paragraph 9 Of The Ib. The Bidders’ Representatives Who Are Present Shall Sign A Register Evidencing Their Attendance. In Case Videoconferencing, Webcasting Or Other Similar Technologies Will Be Used, Attendance Of Participants Shall Likewise Be Recorded By The Bac Secretariat. In Case The Bids Cannot Be Opened As Scheduled Due To Justifiable Reasons, The Rescheduling Requirements Under Section 29 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Prevail. The Preliminary Examination Of Bids Shall Be Governed By Section 30 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids The Procuring Entity’s Bac Shall Immediately Conduct A Detailed Evaluation Of All Bids Rated “passed” Using Non-discretionary Pass/fail Criteria. The Bac Shall Consider The Conditions In The Evaluation Of Bids Under Section 32.2 Of 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. If The Project Allows Partial Bids, All Bids And Combinations Of Bids As Indicated In The Bds Shall Be Received By The Same Deadline And Opened And Evaluated Simultaneously So As To Determine The Bid Or Combination Of Bids Offering The Lowest Calculated Cost To The Procuring Entity. Bid Security As Required By Itb Clause 16 Shall Be Submitted For Each Contract (lot) Separately. In All Cases, The Nfcc Computation Pursuant To Section 23.4.2.6 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Must Be Sufficient For The Total Of The Abcs For All The Lots Participated In By The Prospective Bidder. Post Qualification Within A Non-extendible Period Of Five (5) Calendar Days From Receipt By The Bidder Of The Notice From The Bac That It Submitted The Lowest Calculated Bid, The Bidder Shall Submit Its Latest Income And Business Tax Returns Filed And Paid Through The Bir Electronic Filing And Payment System (efps), And Other Appropriate Licenses And Permits Required By Law And Stated In The Bds. Signing Of The Contract The Documents Required In Section 37.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Form Part Of The Contract. Additional Contract Documents Are Indicated In The Bds. Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet Itb Clause 5.2 For This Purpose, Contracts Similar To The Project Refer To Contracts Which Have The Same Major Categories Of Work, Which Shall Be: Road Works/land Improvement 7.1 The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. 10.3 [specify If Another Contractor License Or Permit Is Required.] 10.4 The Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set Below: Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience 1-project Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-material Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-foreman 1 Year 1 Year 10.5 The Minimum Major Equipment Requirements Are The Following: Equipment Capacity Number Of Units Heavy Equipment Prime Mover - 2 Backhoe - 1 Dump Truck - 1 Motorized Road Grader - 1 Vibratory Roller - 1 Water Truck - 1 Bar Cutter & Bar Bender - 1 Concrete Vibrator - 1 One-bagger Mixer - 1 12 Alternative Bids Are Not Allowed 15.1 The Bid Security Shall Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Of The Following Forms And Amounts: The Amount Of Not Less Than Two Percent (2%) Of Abc, If Bid Security Is In Cash, Cashier’s/manager’s Check, Bank Draft/guarantee Or Irrevocable Letter Of Credit; The Amount Of Not Less Than Five Percent (5%) Of Abc If Bid Security Is In Surety Bond. 19.2 Partial Bid Is Not Allowed 20 No Further Instructions. 21 The Additional Contract Documents Relevant To The Project That Are Required By The Procuring Entity Are: A. Construction Schedule And S-curve; B. Manpower Schedule; C. Construction Methods; D. Equipment Utilization Schedule; E. Construction Safety And Health Program Approved By The Department Of Labor And Employment; And F. Pert/cpm Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract Scope Of Contract This Contract Shall Include All Such Items, Although Not Specifically Mentioned, That Can Be Reasonably Inferred As Being Required For Its Completion As If Such Items Were Expressly Mentioned Herein. All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including The Generic Procurement Manual, And Associated Issuances, Constitute The Primary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract, And Thus, Applicable In Contract Implementation. Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract. This Is Without Prejudice To Sections 74.1 And 74.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Allowing The Gppb To Amend The Irr, Which Shall Be Applied To All Procurement Activities, The Advertisement, Posting, Or Invitation Of Which Were Issued After The Effectivity Of The Said Amendment. Sectional Completion Of Works If Sectional Completion Is Specified In The Special Conditions Of Contract (scc), References In The Conditions Of Contract To The Works, The Completion Date, And The Intended Completion Date Shall Apply To Any Section Of The Works (other Than References To The Completion Date And Intended Completion Date For The Whole Of The Works). Possession Of Site The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Or Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Based On The Schedule Of Delivery Indicated In The Scc, Which Corresponds To The Execution Of The Works. If The Contractor Suffers Delay Or Incurs Cost From Failure On The Part Of The Procuring Entity To Give Possession In Accordance With The Terms Of This Clause, The Procuring Entity’s Representative Shall Give The Contractor A Contract Time Extension And Certify Such Sum As Fair To Cover The Cost Incurred, Which Sum Shall Be Paid By Procuring Entity. If Possession Of A Portion Is Not Given By The Above Date, The Procuring Entity Will Be Deemed To Have Delayed The Start Of The Relevant Activities. The Resulting Adjustments In Contract Time To Address Such Delay May Be Addressed Through Contract Extension Provided Under Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. The Contractor’s Obligations The Contractor Shall Employ The Key Personnel Named In The Schedule Of Key Personnel Indicating Their Designation, In Accordance With Itb Clause 10.3 And Specified In The Bds, To Carry Out The Supervision Of The Works. The Procuring Entity Will Approve Any Proposed Replacement Of Key Personnel Only If Their Relevant Qualifications And Abilities Are Equal To Or Better Than Those Of The Personnel Listed In The Schedule. Performance Security Within Ten (10) Calendar Days From Receipt Of The Notice Of Award From The Procuring Entity But In No Case Later Than The Signing Of The Contract By Both Parties, The Successful Bidder Shall Furnish The Performance Security In Any Of The Forms Prescribed In Section 39 Of The 2016 Revised Irr. The Contractor, By Entering Into The Contract With The Procuring Entity, Acknowledges The Right Of The Procuring Entity To Institute Action Pursuant To Ra No. 3688 Against Any Subcontractor Be They An Individual, Firm, Partnership, Corporation, Or Association Supplying The Contractor With Labor, Materials And/or Equipment For The Performance Of This Contract. Site Investigation Reports The Contractor, In Preparing The Bid, Shall Rely On Any Site Investigation Reports Referred To In The Scc Supplemented By Any Information Obtained By The Contractor. Warranty In Case The Contractor Fails To Undertake The Repair Works Under Section 62.2.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr, The Procuring Entity Shall Forfeit Its Performance Security, Subject Its Property(ies) To Attachment Or Garnishment Proceedings, And Perpetually Disqualify It From Participating In Any Public Bidding. All Payables Of The Gop In His Favor Shall Be Offset To Recover The Costs. The Warranty Against Structural Defects/failures, Except That Occasioned-on Force Majeure, Shall Cover The Period From The Date Of Issuance Of The Certificate Of Final Acceptance By The Procuring Entity. Specific Duration Of The Warranty Is Found In The Scc. Liability Of The Contractor Subject To Additional Provisions, If Any, Set Forth In The Scc, The Contractor’s Liability Under This Contract Shall Be As Provided By The Laws Of The Republic Of The Philippines. If The Contractor Is A Joint Venture, All Partners To The Joint Venture Shall Be Jointly And Severally Liable To The Procuring Entity. Termination For Other Causes Contract Termination Shall Be Initiated In Case It Is Determined Prima Facie By The Procuring Entity That The Contractor Has Engaged, Before, Or During The Implementation Of The Contract, In Unlawful Deeds And Behaviors Relative To Contract Acquisition And Implementation, Such As, But Not Limited To Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices As Stated In Itb Clause 4. Dayworks Subject To The Guidelines On Variation Order In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184, And If Applicable As Indicated In The Scc, The Dayworks Rates In The Contractor’s Bid Shall Be Used For Small Additional Amounts Of Work Only When The Procuring Entity’s Representative Has Given Written Instructions In Advance For Additional Work To Be Paid For In That Way. Program Of Work The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval The Said Program Of Work Showing The General Methods, Arrangements, Order, And Timing For All The Activities In The Works. The Submissions Of The Program Of Work Are Indicated In The Scc. The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval An Updated Program Of Work At Intervals No Longer Than The Period Stated In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Submit An Updated Program Of Work Within This Period, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From The Next Payment Certificate And Continue To Withhold This Amount Until The Next Payment After The Date On Which The Overdue Program Of Work Has Been Submitted. Instructions, Inspections And Audits The Contractor Shall Permit The Gop Or The Procuring Entity To Inspect The Contractor’s Accounts And Records Relating To The Performance Of The Contractor And To Have Them Audited By Auditors Of The Gop Or The Procuring Entity, As May Be Required. Advance Payment The Procuring Entity Shall, Upon A Written Request Of The Contractor Which Shall Be Submitted As A Contract Document, Make An Advance Payment To The Contractor In An Amount Not Exceeding Fifteen Percent (15%) Of The Total Contract Price, To Be Made In Lump Sum, Or At The Most Two Installments According To A Schedule Specified In The Scc, Subject To The Requirements In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Progress Payments The Contractor May Submit A Request For Payment For Work Accomplished. Such Requests For Payment Shall Be Verified And Certified By The Procuring Entity’s Representative/project Engineer. Except As Otherwise Stipulated In The Scc, Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Put In Place Shall Not Be Included For Payment. Operating And Maintenance Manuals If Required, The Contractor Will Provide “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals As Specified In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Provide The Drawings And/or Manuals By The Dates Stated Above, Or They Do Not Receive The Procuring Entity’s Representative’s Approval, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From Payments Due To The Contractor. Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract Gcc Clause 2 As Per Construction Schedule/contract Period 3.1 The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Upon Effectivity Of The Contracts. 6 No Further Instructions 7.2 [in Case Of Other Structures, Such As Bailey And Wooden Bridges, Shallow Wells, Spring Developments, And Other Similar Structures:] Two (2) Years. 10 Dayworks Are Applicable At The Rate Shown In The Contractor’s Original Bid. 11.1 No Further Instructions 11.2 No Further Instructions 13 The Amount Of The Advance Shall Not Exceed 15% Of The Total Contract Price. 14 Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Installed Or Constructed Shall Not Be Included For Payment. 15.1 The Date By Which Operating And Maintenance Manuals Are Required Shall Be At Least 5 Days Before The Testing And Commissioning. The Date By Which “as Built” Drawings Are Required Prior To The Final Billing. 15.2 The Amount To Be Withheld For Failing To Produce “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals By The Date Required Is 1% Of The Final Contract Amount. Section Vi. Specification Scope Of Works The Works Include Furnishing Of Labor, Materials, Tools, Equipment And Other Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Project Such As: Miscellaneous Survey And Staking, Project Billboard/signboard, Mobilization/demobilization, Clearing And Grubbing, Structure Excavation, Embankment From Roadway Excavation, Embankment From Borrow, Subgrade Preparation, Aggregate Subbase Course, Reinforcing Steel, Structural Concrete (24 Mpa), And Concrete Slope Protection. Part B – Other General Requirements B.4 - Construction Survey And Staking B.4.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing The Necessary Equipment And Material To Survey, Stake, Calculate, And Record Data For The Control Of Work In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. B.4.2 Construction Requirements B.4.2.1 General Staking Activities Shall Be Included In The Construction Schedule To Be Submitted By The Contractor. Dates And Sequence Of Each Staking Activity Shall Be Included. The Engineer Shall Set Initial Reference Lines, Horizontal And Vertical Control Points, And Shall Furnish The Data For Use In Establishing Control For The Completion Of Each Element Of The Work. Data Relating To Horizontal And Vertical Alignments, Theoretical Slope Stake Catch Points, And Other Design Data Shall Be Furnished. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The True Settling Of The Works Or Improvements And For Correctness Of Positions, Levels, Dimensions And Alignment Of All Parts Of The Works. He Shall Provide All Necessary Instruments, Appliances, Materials And Supplies, And Labor In Connection Therewith. The Contractor Shall Provide A Survey Crew Supervisor At The Project Site Whenever Surveying/staking Activity Is In Progress. Prior To Construction, The Engineer Shall Be Notified Of Any Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Engineer Shall Reestablish Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Contractor For Convenient Use Of Government-furnished Data Shall Perform Additional Calculations. Immediate Notification Of Apparent Errors In The Initial Staking Or In The Furnished Data Shall Be Provided. All Initial Reference And Control Points Shall Be Preserved. At The Start Of Construction, All Destroyed Or Disturbed Initial Reference Or Control Points Necessary To The Work Shall Be Replaced. Before Surveying And Staking, The Contractor Shall Discuss And Coordinate The Following With The Engineer: 1. Surveying And Staking Methods 2. Stake Marking/concrete Monuments 3. Grade Control For Courses Of Material 4. Referencing 5. Structure Control 6. Any Other Procedures And Controls Necessary For The Work Established Controls Shall Be Within The Tolerances Shown In Table 1. Table 1: Construction Survey And Staking Tolerances (1) Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical Existing Government Network Control Points ±20mm ±8mm X √k ² Local Supplemental Control Points Set From Existing Government Network Points ±10mm ±3mm X √n³ Centerline Points (4) - (pc), (pt), (pot), And (pac) Including References ±10mm ±10mm Other Centerline Points ±50mm ±50mm Cross-section Points And Slope Stakes (5) ±50mm ±50mm Slope Stakes References ±50mm ±50mm Culverts, Ditches, And Minor Drainage Structures ±50mm ±20mm Retaining Walls And Curb And Gutter ±20mm ±10mm Bridge Substructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Bridge Superstructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Clearing And Grubbing Limits ±500mm Roadway Subgrade Finish Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm Roadway Finish Grade Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm (1) At 95% Confidence Level. Tolerances Are Relative To Existing Government Network Control Points. (2) K Is The Distance In Kilometers. (3) N Is The Number Of Instrument Setups. (4) Centerline Points: Pc - Point Of Curve, Pt - Point Of Tangent, Pot - Point On Tangent, Poc - Point On Curve (5) Take The Cross-sections Normal To The Centerline + 1 Degree. (6) Bridge Control Is Established As Local Network And The Tolerances Are Relative To That Network. (7) Include Pave Ditches. The Contractor Shall Prepare Field Notes In An Approved Format. All Field Notes And Supporting Documentation Shall Become The Property Of The Government Upon Completion Of The Work. Work Shall Only Be Started After Staking For The Affected Work Is Accepted. The Construction Survey And Staking Work May Be Spot-checked By The Engineer For Accuracy, And Unacceptable Portions Of Work May Be Rejected. Rejected Work Shall Be Resurveyed, And Work That Is Not Within The Tolerances Specified In Table 1 Shall Be Corrected. Acceptance Of The Construction Staking Shall Not Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For Correcting Errors Discovered During The Work And For Bearing All Additional Costs Associated With The Error, Unless Such Error Is Based On Incorrect Data Supplied In Writing By The Engineer, In Which Case, The Expense In Rectifying The Same Shall Be At The Expense Of The Government. In The Case Of "change" Or "changed Conditions" Which Involve Any Change In Stakeout, The Contractor Shall Coordinate With The Engineer And Facilitate The Prompt Reestablishment Of The Field Control For The Altered Or Adjusted Work. All Flagging, Lath, Stakes, And Other Staking Materials Shall Be Removed And Disposed After The Project Is Completed. B.4.2.2 Equipment Survey Instruments And Supporting Equipment Capable Of Achieving The Specified Tolerances Shall Be Furnished. Acceptable Tools, Supplies, And Stakes Of The Type And Quality Normally Used In Highway Survey Work And Suitable For The Intended Use Shall Be Furnished. Stakes And Hubs Of Sufficient Length To Provide A Solid Set In The Ground With Sufficient Surface Area Above Ground For Necessary Legible Markings Shall Also Be Furnished. B.4.2.3 Survey And Staking Requirements All Survey, Staking, Recording Of Data, And Calculations Necessary To Construct The Project From The Initial Layout To Final Completion Shall Be Performed. Stakes Shall Be Reset As Many Times As Necessary To Construct The Work. 1. Control Points Established Initial Horizontal And Vertical Control Points In Conflict With Construction Shall Be Relocated To Areas That Will Not Be Disturbed By Construction Operations. The Coordinates And Elevations For The Relocated Points Shall Be Furnished Before The Initial Points Are Disturbed. 2. Roadway Cross-sections Roadway Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Normal Or Perpendicular To The Centerline. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 10 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 20 Meters. Additional Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At Significant Breaks In Topography And At Changes In The Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections. Along Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded At Breaks In Topography And At Changes In Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections And Shall Be No Further Apart Than 5 Meters. Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded To At Least The Anticipated Slope Stake And Reference Locations. All Cross-section Distances Shall Be Reduced To Horizontal Distances From Centerline. 3. Slope Stakes And References Slope Stakes And References Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At The Cross-section Locations. Slope Stakes Shall Be Established In The Field As The Actual Point Of Intersection Of The Design Roadway Slope With The Natural Ground Line. Slope Stake References Shall Be Set Outside The Clearing Limits. All Reference Point And Slope Stake Information Shall Be Included On The Reference Stakes. When Initial References Are Provided, Slope Stakes May Be Set From These Points With Verification Of The Slope Stake Location With Field Measurements. Slope Stakes On Any Section That Do Not Match With The Staking Report Within The Tolerances Established In Table 1 Shall Be Recatched. Roadway Cross-section Data Shall Be Taken Between Centerline And The New Slope Stake Location. Additional References Shall Be Set Even When The Initial References Are Provided. 4. Clearing And Grubbing Limits Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At Roadway Cross-section Locations, Extending One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. 5. Centerline Reestablishment Centerline Shall Be Reestablished From Instrument Control Points. The Maximum Spacing Between Centerline Points Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Distance Between Centerline Points Shall Be 20 Meters. 6. Grade Finishing Stakes Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Set For Grade Elevations And Horizontal Alignment, At The Centerline And At Each Shoulder Of Roadway Cross-section Locations. Stakes Shall Be Set At The Top Of Subgrade And The Top Of Each Aggregate Course. Where Turnouts Are Constructed, Stakes Shall Be Set At The Centerline, At Each Normal Shoulder, And At The Shoulder Of The Turnout. In Parking Areas, Hubs Shall Be Set At The Center And Along The Edges Of The Parking Area. Stakes Shall Be Set At All Ditches To Be Paved. The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 20 Meters. The Maximum Transverse Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 5 Meters. Brushes Or Guard Stakes Shall Be Used At Each Stake. 7. Culverts Culverts Shall Be Staked To Fit Field Conditions. The Location Of Culverts May Differ From The Plans. The Following Shall Be Performed: A. Survey And Record The Ground Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Including Inlet And Outlet Channel Profile Of At Least 10 Meters And As Additionally Directed By The Engineer So As To Gather All Necessary Data For The Preparation Of Pipe Projection Plan. B. Determine The Slope Catch Points At The Inlet And Outlet. C. Set The Reference Points And Record Information Necessary To Determine Culvert Length And End Treatments. D. Plot Into Scale The Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Reflecting The Natural Ground Elevation, Invert Elevation, The Flow Line, The Roadway Section, And The Size, Length And The Degree Of Elbow Of Culvert, End Treatments, Grade And Other Appurtenances. E. Plot Into Scale The Cross-section Of Inlet And Outlet Channel At Not More Than 5 Meters Interval. F. Submit The Plotted Pipe Projection Plan For Approval Of Final Culvert Length, Alignment And Headwall. G. When The Pipe Projection Plan Has Been Approved, Set Drainage Culvert Structure Survey And Reference Stakes, And Stake Inlet And Outlet To Make The Structure Functional. 8. Retaining Walls And Other Types Of Slope Protection Works Profile Measurements Along The Face Of The Proposed Wall And 2 Meters In Front Of The Wall Face Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Within The Limits Designated By The Engineer At Every 5 Meters Along The Length Of The Wall And All Major Breaks In Terrain. For Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded Every 5 Meters And At All Major Breaks In Terrain. Adequate References And Horizontal And Vertical Control Points Shall Be Set. 9. Borrow And Waste Sites The Work Essential For Initial Layout And Measurement Of The Borrow Or Waste Site Shall Be Performed. A Referenced Baseline, Site Limits, And Clearing Limits Shall Be Established. Initial And Final Cross-sections Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. 10. Permanent Monuments And Markers All Survey And Staking Necessary To Establish Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Performed. 11. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking All Surveying, Staking, And Recording Of Data Essential For Establishing The Layout And Control Of The Following Shall Be Performed, As Applicable: A. Approach Roads And Trails B. Road Right Of Way And Construction Limit In Accordance With The Approved Parcellary Plan. C. Curb And Gutter D. Guardrail E. Parking Areas F. Paved Waterways And Outfall Structures G. Lined Canals And Other Ditches H. Chutes And Spillways I. Turf Establishment-s J. Utilities K. Signs, Delineators, And Object 9 Markers I. Pavement Markings B.4.3 Method Of Measurement Construction Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Slope, Reference, And Clearing And Grubbing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Establishment Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Reestablishment Shall Be Measured Only One Time. Culvert Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Each. Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Subgrade Shall Be Measured One Time And Each Aggregate Course Shall Also Be Measured One Time. Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Measured By Each Unit Placed And Installed At The Proper Locations. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Hour Of Survey Work Ordered Or By The Lump Sum. For Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Paid By The Hour, The Minimum Survey Crew Size Shall Be 2 Persons. Time Spent In Making Preparations, Travelling To And From The Project Site, Performing Calculations, Plotting Cross Sections And Other Data, Processing Computer Data, And Other Efforts Necessary To Successfully Accomplish Construction Survey And Staking Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Deemed Included As Subsidiary For Each Of The Pay Item. Project Sign Board / Billboard The Contractor Shall Ensure That The Project Site Is Identified With Information Billboard Which Shall Be Erected At The Beginning And Ending Of The Proposed Project. The Layout Of The Billboard Shall Accord To The Specifications Pursuant To The Commission On Audit (coa) Circular No. 2013-004 Issued On January 30, 2013. Coa Billboard Pao Billboard The Billboard’s Specifications Shall Conform To The Following Requirements: Tarpaulin, White, 8ft X 8ft (coa) And 4ft X 8ft (pao): Resolution: 70 Dpi; Font: Helvetica; Font Size: Main Information – 3”; Sub-information – 1”; Font Color: Black; Suitable Frame: Rigid Wood Or Steel Frame With Post; And, Posting: Outside Display At The Project Location After Award Has Been Made. Measurement The Supply And Erection Of Project Billboard Shall Be In Accordance With Provisions Of This Specification And Shall Be Measured For Payment. Basis Of Payment Payment Shall Be In Accordance With All The Cost Associated With The Compliance Of This Specification And Shall Be Included In The Contractor’s Bid Price. No Additional Or Separate Payment Will Be Made In This Regard As Well As For The Maintenance Of The Billboard. Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement B.5 Project Billboard Each Part C – Earthwork Item 100 – Clearing And Grubbing 100.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Clearing, Grubbing, Removing And Disposing All Vegetation And Debris As Designated In The Contract, Except Those Objects That Are Designated To Remain In Place Or Are To Be Removed In Consonance With Other Provisions Of This Specification. The Work Shall Also Include The Preservation From Injury Or Defacement Of All Objects Designated To Remain. 100.2 Construction Requirements 100.2.1 General The Engineer Will Establish The Limits Of Work And Designate All Trees, Shrubs, Plants And Other Things To Remain. The Contractor Shall Preserve All Objects Designated To Remain. Paint Required For Cut Or Scarred Surface Of Trees Or Shrubs Selected For Retention Shall Be An Approved Asphaltum Base Paint Prepared Especially For Tree Surgery. Clearing Shall Extend One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer And Provided It Is Within The Right Of Way Limits Of The Project, With The Exception Of Trees Under The Jurisdiction Of The Forest Management Bureau (fmb). 100.2.2 Clearing And Grubbing All Surface Objects And All Trees, Stumps, Roots And Other Protruding Obstructions, Not Designated To Remain, Shall Be Cleared And/or Grubbed, Including Mowing As Required, Except As Provided Below: (1) Removal Of Undisturbed Stumps And Roots And Nonperishable Solid Objects With A Minimum Depth Of One (1) Meter Below Subgrade Or Slope Of Embankment Will Not Be Required. (2) In Areas Outside Of The Grading Limits Of Cut And Embankment Areas, Stumps And Nonperishable Solid Objects Shall Be Cut Off Not More Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) Above The Ground Line Or Low Water Level. (3) In Areas To Be Rounded At The Top Of Cut Slopes, Stumps Shall Be Cut Off Flush With Or Below The Surface Of The Final Slope Line. (4) Grubbing Of Pits, Channel Changes And Ditches Will Be Required Only To The Depth Necessitated By The Proposed Excavation Within Such Areas. (5) In Areas Covered By Cogon/talahib, Wild Grass And Other Vegetations, Top Soil Shall Be Cut To A Maximum Depth Of 150 Mm Below The Original Ground Surface Or As Designated By The Engineer, And Disposed Outside The Clearing And Grubbing Limits As Indicated In The Typical Roadway Section. Except In Areas To Be Excavated, Stump Holes And Other Holes From Which Obstructions Are Removed Shall Be Backfilled With Suitable Material And Compacted To The Required Density. If Perishable Material Is Burned, It Shall Be Burned Under The Constant Care Of Component Watchmen At Such Times And In Such A Manner That The Surrounding Vegetation, Other Adjacent Property, Or Anything Designated To Remain On The Right Of Way Will Not Be Jeopardized. If Permitted, Burning Shall Be Done In Accordance With Applicable Laws, Ordinances, And Regulation. The Contractor Shall Use High Intensity Burning Procedures, (i.e., Incinerators, High Stacking Or Pit And Ditch Burning With Forced Air Supplements) That Produce Intense Burning With Little Or No Visible Smoke Emission During The Burning Process. At The Conclusion Of Each Burning Session, The Fire Shall Be Completely Extinguished So That No Smoldering Debris Remains. In The Event That The Contractor Is Directed By The Engineer Not To Start Burning Operations Or To Suspend Such Operations Because Of Hazardous Weather Conditions, Material To Be Burned Which Interferes With Subsequent Construction Operations Shall Be Moved By The Contractor To Temporary Locations Clear Of Construction Operations And Later, If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Placed On A Designated Spot And Burned. Materials And Debris Which Cannot Be Burned And Perishable Materials May Be Disposed Off By Methods And At Locations Approved By The Engineer, On Or Off The Project. If Disposal Is By Burying, The Debris Shall Be Placed In Layers With The Material So Disturbed To Avoid Nesting. Each Layer Shall Be Covered Or Mixed With Earth Material By The Land-fill Method To Fill All Voids. The Top Layer Of Material Buried Shall Be Covered With At Least 300 Mm (12 Inches) Of Earth Or Other Approved Material And Shall Be Graded, Shaped And Compacted To Present A Pleasing Appearance. If The Disposal Location Is Off The Project, The Contractor Shall Make All Necessary Arrangements With Property Owners In Writing For Obtaining Suitable Disposal Locations Which Are Outside The Limits Of View From The Project. The Cost Involved Shall Be Included In The Unit Bid Price. A Copy Of Such Agreement Shall Be Furnished To The Engineer. The Disposal Areas Shall Be Seeded, Fertilized And Mulched At The Contractor’s Expense. Woody Material May Be Disposed Off By Chipping. The Wood Chips May Be Used For Mulch, Slope Erosion Control Or May Be Uniformly Spread Over Selected Areas As Directed By The Engineer. Wood Chips Used As Mulch For Slope Erosion Control Shall Have A Maximum Thickness Of 12 Mm (1/2 Inch) And Faces Not Exceeding 3900 Mm2 (6 Square Inches) On Any Individual Surface Area. Wood Chips Not Designated For Use Under Other Sections Shall Be Spread Over The Designated Areas In Layers Not To Exceed 75 Mm (3 Inches) Loose Thickness. Diseased Trees Shall Be Buried Or Disposed Off As Directed By The Engineer. All Merchantable Timber In The Clearing Area Which Has Not Been Removed From The Right Of Way Prior To The Beginning Of Construction, Shall Become The Property Of The Contractor, Unless Otherwise Provided. Low Hanging Branches And Unsound Or Unsightly Branches On Trees Or Shrubs Designated To Remain Shall Be Trimmed As Directed. Branches Of Trees Extending Over The Roadbed Shall Be Trimmed To Give A Clear Height Of 6 M (20 Feet) Above The Roadbed Surface. All Trimming Shall Be Done By Skilled Workmen And In Accordance With Good Tree Surgery Practices. Timber Cut Inside The Area Staked For Clearing Shall Be Felled Within The Area To Be Cleared. 100.2.3 Individual Removal Of Trees Or Stumps Individual Trees Or Stumps Designated By The Engineer For Removal And Located In Areas Other Than Those Established For Clearing And Grubbing And Roadside Cleanup Shall Be Removed And Disposed Off As Specified Under Subsection 100.2.2 Except Trees Removed Shall Be Cut As Nearly Flush With The Ground As Practicable Without Removing Stumps. 100.3 Method Of Measurement Measurement Will Be By One Or More Of The Following Alternate Methods: 1. Area Basis. The Work To Be Paid For Shall Be The Number Of Hectares And Fractions Thereof Acceptably Cleared And Grubbed Within The Limits Indicated On The Plans Or As May Be Adjusted In Field Staking By The Engineer. Areas Not Within The Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shown On The Plans Or Not Staked For Clearing And Grubbing Will Not Be Measured For Payment. 2. Lump-sum Basis. When The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Clearing And Grubbing Lump-sum Item, No Measurement Of Area Will Be Made For Such Item. 3. Individual Unit Basis (selective Clearing). The Diameter Of Trees Will Be Measured At A Height Of 1.4 M (54 Inches) Above The Ground. Trees Less Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) In Diameter Will Not Be Measured For Payment. When Bill Of Quantities Indicates Measurement Of Trees By Individual Unit Basis, The Units Will Be Designated And Measured In Accordance With The Following Schedule Of Sizes: Diameter At Height Of 1.4 M Pay Item Designation Over 150 Mm To 900 Mm Small Over 900 Mm Large 100.4 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 100.3, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities, Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 100 (1) Clearing And Grubbing Hectare 100 (2) Clearing And Grubbing Lump Sum 100 (3) Individual Removal Of Trees, Small Each 100 (4) Individual Removal Of Trees, Large Each Item 102 - Excavation 102.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Roadway Drainage And Borrow Excavation, And The Disposal Of Material In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 102.1.1 Roadway Excavation Roadway Excavation Will Include Excavation And Grading For Roadways, Parking Areas, Intersections, Approaches, Slope Rounding, Benching, Waterways And Ditches; Removal Of Unsuitable Material From The Roadbed And Beneath Embankment Areas; And Excavating Selected Material Found In The Roadway As Ordered By The Engineer For Specific Use In The Improvement. Roadway Excavation Will Be Classified As "unclassified Excavation", "rock Excavation", "common Excavation", Or "muck Excavation" As Indicated In The Bill Of Quantities And Hereinafter Described. (1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Disposal Of All Materials Regardless Of Its Nature, Not Classified And Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under Other Pay Items. (2) Rock Excavation. Rock Excavation Shall Consist Of Excavation Of Igneous, Sedimentary And Metamorphic Rocks Which Cannot Be Excavated Without Blasting Or The Use Of Rippers, And All Boulders Or Other Detached Stones Each Having A Volume Of 1 Cubic Meter Or More As Determined By Physical Measurements Or Visually By The Engineer. (3) Common Excavation. Common Excavations Shall Consist Of All Excavation Not Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under "rock Excavation" Or Other Pay Items. (4) Muck Excavation. Muck Excavation Shall Consist Of The Removal And Disposal Of Deposits Of Saturated Or Unsaturated Mixtures Of Soils And Organic Matter Not Suitable For Foundation Materials Regardless Of Moisture Content. 102.1.2 Borrow Excavation Borrow Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Utilization Of Approved Materials Required For The Construction Of Embankments Or For Other Portions Of The Work, And Shall Be Obtained From Approved Sources, In Accordance With Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume I And The Following: Borrow, Case 1 Borrow Case 1 Will Consist Of Material Obtained From Sources Designated On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions. Borrow, Case 2 Borrow Case 2 Will Consist Of Material Obtained From Sources Provided By The Contractor. The Material Shall Meet The Quality Requirements Determined By The Engineer Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract. 102.2 Construction Requirements 102.2.1 General When There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Pre-construction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Excavated Materials. All Excavations Shall Be Finished To Reasonably Smooth And Uniform Surfaces. No Materials Shall Be Wasted Without Authority Of The Engineer. Excavation Operations Shall Be Conducted So That Material Outside Of The Limits Of Slopes Will Not Be Disturbed. Prior To Excavation, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 102.2.2 Conservation Of Topsoil Where Provided For On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions, Suitable Topsoil Encountered In Excavation And On Areas Where Embankment Is To Be Placed Shall Be Removed To Such Extent And To Such Depth As The Engineer May Direct. The Removed Topsoil Shall Be Transported And Deposited In Storage Piles At Locations Approved By The Engineer. The Topsoil Shall Be Completely Removed To The Required Depth From Any Designated Area Prior To The Beginning Of Regular Excavation Or Embankment Work In The Area And Shall Be Kept Separate From Other Excavated Materials For Later Use. 102.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Suitable Materials Removed From The Excavation Shall Be Used In The Formation Of The Embankment, Subgrade, Shoulders, Slopes, Bedding, And Backfill For Structures, And For Other Purposes Shown On The Plans Or As Directed. The Engineer Will Designate As Unsuitable Those Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted In Embankments. All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Shown On The Plans Or As Directed Without Delay To The Contractor. Only Approved Materials Shall Be Used In The Construction Of Embankments And Backfills. All Excess Materials, Including Rock And Boulders That Cannot Be Used In Embankments Shall Be Disposed Of As Directed. Materials Encountered In The Excavation And Determined By The Engineer As Suitable For Topping, Road Finishing, Slope Protection, Or Other Purposes Shall Be Conserved And Utilized As Directed By The Engineer. Borrow Materials Shall Not Be Placed Until After The Readily Accessible Materials From Roadway Excavation Has Been Placed In The Fill, Unless Otherwise Permitted Or Directed By The Engineer. If The Contractor Places More Borrow Than Is Required And Thereby Causes A Waste Of Excavation, The Amount Of Such Waste Will Be Deducted From The Borrow Volume. 102.2.4 Prewatering Excavation Areas And Borrow Pits May Be Prewatered Before Excavating The Material. When Prewatering Is Used, The Areas To Be Excavated Shall Be Moistened To The Full Depth, From The Surface To The Bottom Of The Excavation. The Water Shall Be Controlled So That The Excavated Material Will Contain The Proper Moisture To Permit Compaction To The Specified Density With The Use Of Standard Compacting Equipment. Prewatering Shall Be Supplemented Where Necessary, By Truck Watering Units, To Ensure That The Embankment Material Contains The Proper Moisture At The Time Of Compaction. The Contractor Shall Provide Drilling Equipment Capable Of Suitably Checking The Moisture Penetration To The Full Depth Of The Excavation. 102.2.5 Presplitting Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract, Rock Excavation Which Requires Drilling And Shooting Shall Be Presplit. Presplitting To Obtain Faces In The Rock And Shale Formations Shall Be Performed By: (1) Drilling Holes At Uniform Intervals Along The Slope Lines, (2) Loading And Stemming The Holes With Appropriate Explosives And Stemming Material, And (3) Detonating The Holes Simultaneously. Prior To Starting Drilling Operations For Presplitting, The Contractor Shall Furnish The Engineer A Plan Outlining The Position Of All Drill Holes Depth Of Drilling, Type Of Explosives To Be Used, Loading Pattern And Sequence Of Firing. The Drilling And Blasting Plan Is For Record Purposes Only And. Will Not Absolve The Contractor Of His Responsibility For Using Proper Drilling And Blasting Procedures. Controlled Blasting Shall Begin With A Short Test Section Of A Length Approved By The Engineer. The Test Section Shall Be Presplit, Production Drilled And Blasted And Sufficient Material Excavated Whereby The Engineer Can Determine If The Contractor’s Methods Are Satisfactory. The Engineer May Order Discontinuance Of The Presplitting When He Determines That The Materials Encountered Have Become Unsuitable For Being Presplit. The Holes Shall Be Charged With Explosives Of The Size, Kind, Strength, And At The Spacing Suitable For The Formations Being Presplit, And With Stemming Material Which Passes A 9.5 Mm Standard Sieve And Which Has The Qualities For Proper Confinement Of The Explosives. The Finished Presplit Slope Shall Be Reasonably Uniform And Free Of Loose Rock. Variance From The True Plane Of The Excavated Backs Lope Shall Not Exceed 300 Mm; However, Localized Irregularities Or Surface Variations That Do Not Constitute A Safety Hazard Or An Impairment To Drainage Courses Or Facilities Will Be Permitted. A Maximum Offset Of 600 Mm Will Be Permitted For A Construction Working Bench At The Bottom Of Each Lift For Use In Drilling The Next Lower Presplitting Pattern. 102.2.6 Excavation Of Ditches, Gutters, Etc. All Materials Excavated From Side Ditches And Gutters, Channel Changes, Irrigation Ditches, Inlet And Outlet Ditches, Toe Ditches, Furrow Ditches And Such Other Ditches As May Be Designated On The Plans Or Staked' By The Engineer, Shall Be Utilized As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. Ditches Shall Conform To The Slope, Grade, And Shape Of The Required Cross-section, With No Projections Of Roots, Stumps, Rock, Or Similar Matter. The Contractor Shall Maintain And Keep Open And Free From Leaves, Sticks, And Other Debris All Ditches Dug By Him Until Final Acceptance Of The Work. Furrow Ditches Shall Be Formed By Plowing A Continuous Furrow Along The Line Staked By The Engineer. Methods Other Than Plowing May Be Used If Acceptable To The Engineer. The Ditches Shall Be Cleaned Out By Hand Shovel Work, By Ditcher, Or By Some Other Suitable Method, Throwing All Loose Materials On The Downhill Side So That The Bottom Of The Finished Ditch Shall Be Approximately 450 Mm Below The Crest Of The Loose Material Piled On The Downhill Side. Hand Finish Will Not Be Required, But The Flow Lines Shall Be In Satisfactory Shape To Provide Drainage Without Overflow. 102.2.7 Excavation Of Roadbed Level Rock Shall Be Excavated To A Depth Of 150 Mm Below Subgrade Within The Limits Of The Roadbed, And The Excavation Backfilled With Material Designated On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer And Compacted To The Required Density. When Excavation Methods Employed By The Contractor Leave Undrained Pockets In The Rock Surface, The Contractor Shall At His Own Expense, Properly Drain Such Depressions Or When Permitted By The Engineer Fill The Depressions With Approved Impermeable Material. Material Below Subgrade, Other Than Solid Rock Shall Be Thoroughly Scarified To A Depth Of 150 Mm And The Moisture Content Increased Or Reduced, As Necessary, To Bring The Material Throughout This 150 Mm Layer To The Moisture Content Suitable For Maximum Compaction. This Layer Shall Then Be Compacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. 102.2.8 Borrow Areas The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of Opening Any Borrow Areas So That Cross-section Elevations And Measurements Of The Ground Surface After Stripping May Be Taken, And The Borrow Material Can Be Tested Before Being Used. Sufficient Time For Testing The Borrow Material Shall Be Allowed. All Borrow Areas Shall Be Bladed And Left In Such Shape As To Permit Accurate Measurements After Excavation Has Been Completed. The Contractor Shall Not Excavate Beyond The Dimensions And Elevations Established, And No Material Shall Be Removed Prior To The Staking Out And Cross-sectioning Of The Site. The Finished Borrow Areas Shall Be Approximately True To Line And Grade Established And Specified And Shall Be Finished, As Prescribed In Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume 1. When Necessary To Remove Fencing, The Fencing Shall Be Replaced In At Least As Good Condition As It Was Originally. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The Confinement Of Livestock When A Portion Of The Fence Is Removed. 102.2.9 Removal Of Unsuitable Material Where The Plans Show The Top Portion Of The Roadbed To Be Selected Topping, All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Excavated To The Depth Necessary For Replacement Of The Selected Topping To The Required Compacted Thickness. Where Excavation To The Finished Graded Section Results In A Subgrade Or Slopes Of Unsuitable Soil, The Engineer May Require The Contractor To Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill To The Finished Graded Section With Approved Material. The Contractor Shall Conduct His Operations In Such A Way That The Engineer Can Take The Necessary Cross-sectional Measurements Before The Backfill Is Placed. The Excavation Of Muck Shall Be Handled In A Manner That Will Not Permit The Entrapment Of Muck Within The Backfill. The Material Used For Backfilling Up To The Ground Line Or Water Level, Whichever Is Higher, Shall Be Rock Or Other Suitable Granular Material Selected From The Roadway Excavation, If Available. If Not Available, Suitable Material Shall Be Obtained From Other Approved Sources. Unsuitable Material Removed Shall Be Disposed Of In Designated Areas Shown On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer. 102.3 Method Of Measurement The Cost Of Excavation Of Material Which Is Incorporated In The Works Or In Other Areas Of Fill Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Items Of Work Where The Material Is Used. Measurement Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material Shall Be The Net Volume In Its Original Position. For Measurement Purposes, Surplus Suitable Material Shall Be Calculated As The Difference Between The Net Volumes Of Suitable Material Required To Be Used In Embankment Corrected By Applying Shrinkage Factor Or A Swell Factor In Case Of Rock Excavation, Determined By Laboratory Tests To Get Its Original Volume Measurement, And The Net Volume Of Suitable Material From Excavation In The Original Position. Separate Pay Items Shall Be Provided For Surplus Common, Unclassified And Rock Material. The Contractor Shall Be Deemed To Have Included In The Contract Unit Prices All Costs Of Obtaining Land For The Disposal Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material. Item 103 - Structure Excavation 103.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Necessary Excavation For Foundation Of Bridges, Culverts, Underdrains, And Other Structures Not Otherwise Provided For In The Specifications. Except As Otherwise Provided For Pipe Culverts, The Backfilling Of Completed Structures And The Disposal Of All Excavated Surplus Materials, Shall Be In Accordance With These Specifications And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. This Item Shall Include Necessary Diverting Of Live Streams, Bailing, Pumping, Draining, Sheeting, Bracing, And The Necessary Construction Of Cribs And Cofferdams, And Furnishing The Materials Therefore, And The Subsequent Removal Of Cribs And Cofferdams And The Placing Of All Necessary Backfill. It Shall Also Include The Furnishing And Placing Of Approved Foundation Fill Material To Replace Unsuitable Material Encountered Below The Foundation Elevation Of Structures. No Allowance Will Be Made For Classification Of Different Types Of Material Encountered. 103.2 Construction Requirements 103.2.1 Clearing And Grubbing Prior To Starting Excavation Operations In Any Area, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 103.2.2 Excavation (1) General, All Structures. The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of The Beginning Of Any Excavation So That Cross-sectional Elevations And Measurements May Be Taken On The Undisturbed Ground. The Natural Ground Adjacent To The Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission Of The Engineer. Trenches Or Foundation Pits For Structures Or Structure Footings Shall Be Excavated To The Lines And Grades Or Elevations Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. They Shall Be Of Sufficient Size To Permit The Placing Of Structures Or Structure Footings Of The Full Width And Length Shown. The Elevations Of The Bottoms Of Footings, As Shown On The Plans, Shall Be Considered As Approximate Only And The Engineer May Order, In Writing, Such Changes In Dimensions Or Elevations Of Footings As May Be Deemed Necessary, To Secure A Satisfactory Foundation. Boulders, Logs, And Other Objectionable Materials Encountered In Excavation Shall Be Removed. After Each Excavation Is Completed, The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer To That Effect And No Footing, Bedding Material Or Pipe Culvert Shall Be Placed Until The Engineer Has Approved The Depth Of Excavation And The Character Of The Foundation Material. (2) Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts. All Rock Or Other Hard Foundation Materials Shall Be Cleaned Of All Loose Materials, And Cut To A Firm Surface, Either Level, Stepped, Or Serrated As Directed By The Engineer. All Seams Or Crevices Shall Be Cleaned And Grouted. All Loose And Disintegrated Rocks And Thin Strata Shall Be Removed. When The Footing Is To Rest On Material Other Than Rock, Excavation To Final Grade Shall Not Be Made Until Just Before The Footing Is To Be Placed. When The Foundation Material Is Soft Or Mucky Or Otherwise Unsuitable, As Determined By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill With Approved Granular Material. This Foundation Fill Shall Be Placed And Compacted In 150 Mm Layers Up To The Foundation Elevation. When Foundation Piles Are Used, The Excavation Of Each Pit Shall Be Completed Before The Piles Are Driven And Any Placing Of Foundation Fill Shall Be Done After The Piles Are Driven. After The Driving Is Completed, All Loose And Displaced Materials Shall Be Removed, Leaving A Smooth, Solid Bed To Receive The Footing. (3) Pipe Culverts. The Width Of The Pipe Trench Shall Be Sufficient To Permit Satisfactory Jointing Of The Pipe And Thorough Tamping Of The Bedding Material Under And Around The Pipe. Where Rock, Hardpan, Or Other Unyielding Material Is Encountered, It Shall Be Removed Below The Foundation Grade For A Depth Of At Least 300 Mm Or 4 Mm For Each 100 Mm Of Fill Over The Top Of Pipe, Whichever Is Greater, But Not To Exceed Three-quarters Of The Vertical Inside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Width Of The Excavation Shall Be At Least 300 Mm Greater Than The Horizontal Outside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Excavation Below Grade Shall Be Backfilled With Selected Fine Compressible Material, Such As Silty Clay Or Loam, And Lightly Compacted In Layers Not Over 150 Mm In Uncompacted Depth To Form A Uniform But Yielding Foundation. Where A Firm Foundation Is Not Encountered At The Grade Established, Due To Soft, Spongy, Or Other Unstable Soil, Such Unstable Soil Under The Pipe And For A Width Of At Least One Diameter On Each Side Of The Pipe Shall Be Removed To The Depth Directed By The Engineer And Replaced With Approved Granular Foundation Fill Material Properly Compacted To Provide Adequate Support For The Pipe, Unless Other Special Construction Methods Are Called For On The Plans. The Foundation Surface Shall Provide A Firm Foundation Of Uniform Density Throughout The Length Of The Culvert And If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Cambered In The Direction Parallel To The Pipe Centerline. Where Pipe Culverts Are To Be Placed In Trenches Excavated In Embankments, The Excavation Of Each Trench Shall Be Performed After The Embankment Has Been Constructed To A Plane Parallel To The Proposed Profile Grade And To Such Height Above The Bottom Of The Pipe As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. 103.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Excavated Materials, So Far As Suitable, Shall Be Utilized As Backfill Or Embankment. The Surplus Materials Shall Be Disposed Of In Such Manner As Not To Obstruct The Stream Or Otherwise Impair The Efficiency Or Appearance Of The Structure. No Excavated Materials Shall Be Deposited At Any Time So As To Endanger The Partly Finished Structure. 103.2.4 Cofferdams Suitable And Practically Watertight Cofferdams Shall Be Used Wherever Water-bearing Strata Are Encountered Above The Elevation Of The Bottom Of The Excavation. If Requested, The Contractor Shall Submit Drawings Showing His Proposed Method Of Cofferdam Construction, As Directed By The Engineer. Cofferdams Or Cribs For Foundation Construction Shall In General, Be Carried Well Below The Bottoms Of The Footings And Shall Be Well Braced And As Nearly Watertight As Practicable. In General, The Interior Dimensions Of Cofferdams Shall Be Such As To Give Sufficient Clearance For The Construction Of Forms And The Inspection Of Their Exteriors, And To Permit Pumping Outside Of The Forms. Cofferdams Or Cribs Which Are Tilted Or Moved Laterally During The Process Of Sinking Shall Be Righted Or Enlarged So As To Provide The Necessary Clearance. When Conditions Are Encountered Which, As Determined By The Engineer, Render It Impracticable To Dewater The Foundation Before Placing The Footing, The Engineer May Require The Construction Of A Concrete Foundation Seal Of Such Dimensions As He May Consider Necessary, And Of Such Thickness As To Resist Any Possible Uplift. The Concrete For Such Seal Shall Be Placed As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. The Foundation Shall Then Be Dewatered And The Footing Placed. When Weighted Cribs Are Employed And The Mass Is Utilized To Overcome Partially The Hydrostatic Pressure Acting Against The Bottom Of The Foundation Seal, Special Anchorage Such As Dowels Or Keys Shall Be Provided To Transfer The Entire Mass Of The Crib To The Foundation Seal. When A Foundation Seal Is Placed Under Water, The Cofferdams Shall Be Vented Or Ported At Low Water Level As Directed. Cofferdams Shall Be Constructed So As To Protect Green Concrete Against Damage From Sudden Rising Of The Stream And To Prevent Damage To The Foundation By Erosion. No Timber Or Bracing Shall Be Left 30 In Cofferdams Or Cribs In Such A Way As To Extend Into Substructure Masonry, Without Written Permission From The Engineer. Any Pumping That May Be Permitted From The Interior Of Any Foundation Enclosure Shall Be Done In Such A Manner As To Preclude The Possibility Of Any Portion Of The Concrete Material Being Carried Away. Any Pumping Required During The Placing Of Concrete, Or For A Period Of At Least 24 Hours Thereafter, Shall Be Done From A Suitable Sump Located Outside The Concrete Forms. Pumping To Dewater A Sealed Cofferdam Shall Not Commence Until The Seal Has Set Sufficiently To Withstand The Hydrostatic Pressure. Unless Otherwise Provided, Cofferdams Or Cribs, With All Sheeting And Bracing Involved Therewith, Shall Be Removed By The Contractor After The Completion Of The Substructure. Removal Shall Be Effected In Such Manner As Not To Disturb Or Mar Finished Masonry. 103.2.5 Preservation Of Channel Unless Otherwise Permitted, No Excavation Shall Be Made Outside Of Caissons, Cribs, Cofferdams, Or Sheet Piling, And The Natural Stream Bed Adjacent To Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission From The Engineer. If Any Excavation Or Dredging Is Made At The Side Of The Structure Before Caissons, Cribs, Or Cofferdams Are Sunk In Place, The Contractor Shall, After The Foundation Base Is In Place, Backfill All Such Excavations To The Original Ground Surface Or Stream Bed With Material Satisfactory To The Engineer. 103.2.6 Backfill And Embankment For Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts Excavated Areas Around Structures Shall Be Backfilled With Free Draining Granular Material Approved By The Engineer And Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Over 150 Mm In Thickness, To The Level Of The Original Ground Surface. Each Layer Shall Be Moistened Or Dried As Required And Thoroughly Compacted With Mechanical Tampers. In Placing Backfills Or Embankment, The Material Shall Be Placed Simultaneously In So Far As Possible To Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of An Abutment, Pier, Or Wall. If Conditions Require Placing Backfill Or Embankment Appreciably Higher On One Side Than On The Opposite Side, The Additional Material On The Higher Side Shall Not Be Placed Until The Masonry Has Been In Place For 14 Days, Or Until Tests Made By The Laboratory Under The Supervision Of The Engineer Establishes That The Masonry Has Attained Sufficient Strength To Withstand Any Pressure Created By The Methods Used And Materials Placed Without Damage Or Strain Beyond A Safe Factor. Backfill Or Embankment Shall Not Be Placed Behind The Walls Of Concrete Culverts Or Abutments Or Rigid Frame Structures Until The Top Slab Is Placed And Cured. Backfill And Embankment Behind Abutments Held At The Top By The Superstructure, And Behind The Sidewalls Of Culverts, Shall Be Carried Up Simultaneously Behind Opposite Abutments Or Sidewalls. All Embankments Adjacent To Structures Shall Be Constructed In Horizontal Layers And Compacted As Prescribed In Subsection 104.3.3 Except That Mechanical Tampers May Be Used For The Required Compaction. Special Care Shall Be Taken To Prevent Any Wedging Action Against The Structure, And Slopes Bounding Or Within The Areas To Be Filled Shall Be Benched Or Serrated To Prevent Wedge Action. The Placing Of Embankment And The Benching Of Slopes Shall Continue In Such A Manner That At All Times There Will Be Horizontal Berm Of Thoroughly Compacted Material For A Distance At Least Equal To The Height Of The Abutment Or Wall To Be Backfilled Against Except Insofar As Undisturbed Material Obtrudes Upon The Area. Broken Rock Or Coarse Sand And Gravel Shall Be Provided For A Drainage Filter At Weepholes As Shown On The Plans. 103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Bedding, Backfill And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Shall Be Done In Accordance With Item 500, Pipe Culverts And Storm Drains. 103.3 Method Of Measurement 103.3.1 Structure Excavation The Volume Of Excavation To Be Paid For Will Be The Number Of Cubic Meters Measured In Original Position Of Material Acceptably Excavated In Conformity With The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer, But In No Case, Except As Noted, Will Any Of The Following Volumes Be Included In The Measurement For Payment: (1) The Volume Outside Of Vertical Planes 450 Mm Outside Of And Parallel To The Neat Lines Of Footings And The Inside Walls Of Pipe And Pipe-arch Culverts At Their Widest Horizontal Dimensions. (2) The Volume Of Excavation For Culvert And Sections Outside The Vertical Plane For Culverts Stipulated In (1) Above. (3) The Volume Outside Of Neat Lines Of Underdrains As Shown On The Plans, And Outside The Limits Of Foundation Fill As Ordered By The Engineer. (4) The Volume Included Within The Staked Limits Of The Roadway Excavation, Contiguous Channel Changes, Ditches, Etc., For Which Payment Is Otherwise Provided In The Specification. (5) Volume Of Water Or Other Liquid Resulting From Construction Operations And Which Can Be Pumped Or Drained Away. (6) The Volume Of Any Excavation Performed Prior To The Taking Of Elevations And Measurements Of The Undisturbed Ground. (7) The Volume Of Any Material Rehandled, Except That Where The Plans Indicate Or The Engineer Directs The Excavation After Embankment Has Been Placed And Except That When Installation Of Pipe Culverts By The Imperfect Trench Method Specified In Item 500 Is Required, The Volume Of Material Reexcavated As Directed Will Be Included. (8) The Volume Of Excavation For Footings Ordered At A Depth More Than 1.5 M Below The Lowest Elevation For Such Footings Shown On The Original Contract Plans, Unless The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Pay Item For Excavation Ordered Below The Elevations Shown On The Plans For Individual Footings. Item 104 - Embankment 104.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Construction Of Embankment In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 104.2 Material Requirements Embankments Shall Be Constructed Of Suitable Materials, In Consonance With The Following Definitions: Suitable Material - Material Which Is Acceptable In Accordance With The Contract And Which Can Be Compacted In The Manner Specified In This Item. It Can Be Common Material Or Rock. Selected Borrow, For Topping - Soil Of Such Gradation That All Particles Will Pass A Sieve With 75 Mm Square Openings And Not More Than 15 Mass Percent Will Pass The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve, As Determined By Aashto T 11. The Material Shall Have A Plasticity Index Of Not More Than 6 As Determined By Aashto T 90 And A Liquid Limit Of Not More Than 30 As Determined By Aashto T 89. Unsuitable Material - Material Other Than Suitable Materials Such As: (a) Materials Containing Detrimental Quantities Of Organic Materials, Such As Grass, Roots And Sewerage. (b) Organic Soils Such As Peat And Mucks. (c) Soils With Liquid Limit Exceeding 80 And/or Plasticity Index Exceeding 55. (d) Soils With A Natural Water Content Exceeding 100% (e) Soils With Very Low Natural Density, 800 Kg/m3 Or Lower. (f) Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted As Determined By The Engineer. 104.3 Construction Requirements 104.3.1 General Prior To Construction Of Embankment, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Conformity With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. Embankment Construction Shall Consist Of Constructing Roadway Embankments, Including Preparation Of The Areas Upon Which They Are To Be Placed; The Construction Of Dikes Within Or Adjacent To The Roadway; The Placing And Compacting Of Approved Material Within Roadway Areas Where Unsuitable Material Has Been Removed; And The Placing And Compacting Of Embankment Material In Holes, Pits, And Other Depressions Within The Roadway Area. Embankments And Backfills Shall Contain No Muck, Peat, Sod, Roots Or Other Deleterious Matter. Rocks, Broken Concrete Or Other Solid, Bulky Materials Shall Not Be Placed In Embankment Areas Where Piling Is To Be Placed Or Driven. Where Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer, The Surface Of The Existing Ground Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm And To The Specified Requirements Of This Item. Where Provided On The Plans And Bill Of Quantities The Top Portions Of The Roadbed In Both Cuts And Embankments, As Indicated, Shall Consist Of Selected Borrow For Topping From Excavations. 104.3.2 Methods Of Construction Where There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Preconstruction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Embankment Materials. When Embankment Is To Be Placed And Compacted On Hillsides, Or When New Embankment Is To Be Compacted Against Existing Embankments, Or When Embankment Is Built One-half Width At A Time, The Existing Slopes That Are Steeper Than 3: 1 When Measured At Right Angles To The Roadway Shall Be Continuously Benched Over Those Areas As The Work Is Brought Up In Layers. Benching Will Be Subject To The Engineer’s Approval And Shall Be Of Sufficient Width To Permit Operation Of Placement And Compaction Equipment. Each Horizontal Cut Shall Begin At The Intersection Of The Original Ground And The Vertical Sides Of The Previous Cuts. Material Thus Excavated Shall Be Placed And Compacted Along With The Embankment Material In Accordance With The Procedure Described In This Section. Unless Shown Otherwise On The Plans Or Special Provisions, Wherein Embankment Of Less Than 1.2 M Below Subgrade Is To Be Made, Also And Vegetable Matter Shall Be Removed From The Surface Upon Which The Embankment Is To Be Placed, And The Cleared Surfaced Shall Be Completely Broken Up By Plowing, Scarifying, Or Steeping To A Minimum Depth Of 150 Mm Except As Provided In Subsection 102.2.2.this Area Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3.sod Not Required To Be Removed Shall Be Thoroughly Disc Harrowed Or Scarified Before Construction Of Embankment. Wherever A Compacted Road Surface Containing Granular Materials Lies Within 900 Mm Of The Subgrade, Such Old Road Surface Shall Be Scarified To A Depth Of At Least150 Mm Whenever Directed By The Engineer. These Scarified Materials Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3. When Shoulder Excavation Is Specified, The Roadway Shoulders Shall Be Excavated To The Depth And Width Shown On The Plans. The Shoulder Material Shall Be Removed Without Disturbing The Adjacent Existing Base Course Material, And All Excess Excavated Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. If Necessary, The Areas Shall Be Compacted Before Being Backfilled. Roadway Embankment Of Earth Material Shall Be Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm, Loose Measurement, And Shall Be Compacted As Specified Before The Next Layer Is Placed. However, Thicker Layer Maybe Placed If Vibratory Roller With High Compactive Effort Is Used Provided That Density Requirement Is Attained And As Approved By The Engineer. Trial Section To This Effect Must Be Conducted And Approved By The Engineer. Effective Spreading Equipment Shall Be Used On Each Lift To Obtain Uniform Thickness As Determined In The Trial Section Prior To Compaction. As The Compaction Of Each Layer Progresses, Continuous Leveling And Manipulating Will Be Required To Assure Uniform Density. Water Shall Be Added Or Removed, If Necessary, In Order To Obtain The Required Density. Removal Of Water Shall Be Accomplished Through Aeration By Plowing, Blading, Discing, Or Other Methods Satisfactory To The Engineer. Where Embankment Is To Be Constructed Across Low Swampy Ground That Will Not Support The Mass Of Trucks Or Other Hauling Equipment, The Lower Part Of The Fill May Be Constructed By Dumping Successive Loads In A Uniformly Distributed Layer Of A Thickness Not Greater Than Necessary To Support The Hauling Equipment While Placing Subsequent Layers. When Excavated Material Contains More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Diameter And Cannot Be Placed In Layers Of The Thickness Prescribed Without Crushing, Pulverizing Or Further Breaking Down The Pieces Resulting From Excavation Methods, Such Materials May Be Placed On The Embankment In Layers Not Exceeding In Thickness The Approximate Average Size Of The Larger Rocks, But Not Greater Than 600 Mm. Even Though The Thickness Of Layers Is Limited As Provided Above, The Placing Of Individual Rocks And Boulders Greater Than 600 Mm In Diameter Will Be Permitted Provided That When Placed, They Do Not Exceed 1200 Mm In Height And Provided They Are Carefully Distributed, With The Interstices Filled With Finer Material To Form A Dense And Compact Mass. Each Layer Shall Be Leveled And Smoothed With Suitable Leveling Equipment And By Distribution Of Spalls And Finer Fragments Of Earth. Lifts Of Material Containing More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Dimensions Shall Not Be Constructed Above An Elevation 300 Mm Below The Finished Subgrade. The Balance Of The Embankment Shall Be Composed Of Suitable Material Smoothed And Placed In Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm In Loose Thickness And Compacted As Specified For Embankments. Dumping And Rolling Areas Shall Be Kept Separate, And No Lift Shall Be Covered By Another Until Compaction Complies With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. Hauling And Leveling Equipment Shall Be So Routed And Distributed Over Each Layer Of The Fill In Such A Manner As To Make Use Of Compaction Effort Afforded Thereby And To Minimize Rutting And Uneven Compaction. 104.3.3 Compaction Compaction Trials Before Commencing The Formation Of Embankments, The Contractor Shall Submit In Writing To The Engineer For Approval His Proposals For The Compaction Of Each Type Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works. The Proposals Shall Include The Relationship Between The Types Of Compaction Equipment, The Number Of Passes Required And The Method Of Adjusting Moisture Content. The Contractor Shall Carry Out Full Scale Compaction Trials On Areas Not Less Than 10m Wide And 50 M Long As Required By The Engineer And Using His Proposed Procedures Or Such Amendments Thereto As May Be Found Necessary To Satisfy The Engineer That All The Specified Requirements Regarding Compaction Can Be Consistently Achieved. Compaction Trials With The Main Types Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works Shall Be Completed Before Work With The Corresponding Materials Will Be Allowed To Commence. Throughout The Periods When Compaction Of Earthwork Is In Progress, The Contractor Shall Adhere To The Compaction Procedures Found From Compaction Trials For Each Type Of Material Being Compacted, Each Type Of Compaction Equipment Employed And Each Degree Of Compaction Specified. Earth The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed In All Embankment Layers And The Material Scarified To The Designated Depth Below Subgrade In Cut Sections, Until A Uniform Density Of Not Less Than 95 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined By Aashto T99 Method C, Is Attained, At A Moisture Content Determined By Engineer To Be Suitable For Such Density. Acceptance Of Compaction May Be Based On Adherence To An Approved Roller Pattern Developed As Set Forth In Item 106, Compaction Equipment And Density Control Strips. The Engineer Shall During Progress Of The Work, Make Density Tests Of Compacted Material In Accordance With Aashto T 191, T 205, Or Other Approved Field Density Tests, Including The Use Of Properly Calibrated Nuclear Testing Devices. A Correction For Coarse Particles May Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 224. If, By Such Tests, The Engineer Determines That The Specified Density And Moisture Conditions Have Not Been Attained, The Contractor Shall Perform Additional Work As May Be Necessary To Attain The Specified Conditions. At Least One Group Of Three In-situ Density Tests Shall Be Carried Out For Each 500 M2 Of Each Layer Of Compacted Fill. Rock Density Requirements Will Not Apply To Portions Of Embankments Constructed Of Materials Which Cannot Be Tested In Accordance With Approved Methods. Embankment Materials Classified As Rock Shall Be Deposited, Spread And Leveled The Full Width Of The Fill With Sufficient Earth Or Other Fine Material So Deposited To Fill The Interstices To Produce A Dense Compact Embankment. In Addition, One Of The Rollers, Vibrators, Or Compactors Meeting The Requirements Set Forth In Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment, Shall Compact The Embankment Full Width With A Minimum Of Three-complete Passes For Each Layer Of Embankment. 104.3.4 Protection Of Roadbed During Construction During The Construction Of The Roadway, The Roadbed Shall Be Maintained In Such Condition That It Will Be Well Drained At All Times. Side Ditches Or Gutters Emptying From Cuts To Embankments Or Otherwise Shall Be So Constructed As To Avoid Damage To Embankments By Erosion. 104.3.5 Protection Of Structure If Embankment Can Be Deposited On One-side Only Of Abutments, Wing Walls, Piers Or Culvert Headwalls, Care Shall Be Taken That The Area Immediately Adjacent To The Structure Is Not Compacted To The Extent That It Will Cause Overturning Of, Or Excessive Pressure Against The Structure. When Noted On The Plans, The Fill Adjacent To The End Bent Of A Bridge Shall Not Be Placed Higher Than The Bottom Of The Backfill Of The Bent Until The Superstructure Is In Place. When Embankment Is To Be Placed On Both Sides Of A Concrete Wall Or Box Type Structure: Operations Shall Be So Conducted That The Embankment Is Always At Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of The Structure. 104.3.6 Rounding And Warping Slopes Rounding-except In Solid Rock, The Tops And Bottoms Of All Slopes, Including The Slopes Of Drainage Ditches, Shall Be Rounded As Indicated On The Plans. A Layer Of Earth Overlaying Rock Shall Be Rounded Above The Rock As Done In Earth Slopes. Warping-adjustments In Slopes Shall Be Made To Avoid Injury In Standing Trees Or Marring Of Weathered Rock, Or To Harmonize With Existing Landscape Features, And The Transition To Such Adjusted Slopes Shall Be Gradual. At Intersections Of Cuts And Fills, Slopes Shall Be Adjusted And Warped To Flow Into Each Other Or Into The Natural Ground Surfaces Without Noticeable Break. 104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed And Slopes After The Roadbed Has Been Substantially Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compact Properly Or Serve The Intended Purpose. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes Or Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Selected Material. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling, Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. All Earth Slopes Shall Be Left With Roughened Surfaces But Shall Be Reasonably Uniform, Without Any Noticeable Break, And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or Other Surfaces Indicated On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer, With No Variations Therefrom Readily Discernible As Viewed From The Road. 104.3.8 Serrated Slopes Cut Slopes In Rippable Material (soft Rock) Having Slope Ratios Between 0.75:1 And 2:1 Shall Be Constructed So That The Final Slope Line Shall Consist Of A Series Of Small Horizontal Steps. The Step Rises And Tread Dimensions Shall Be Shown On The Plans. No Scaling Shall Be Performed On The Stepped Slopes Except For Removal Of Large Rocks Which Will Obviously Be A Safety Hazard If They Fall Into The Ditch Line Or Roadway. 104.3.9 Earth Berms When Called For In The Contract, Permanent Earth Berms Shall Be Constructed Of Well Graded Materials With No Rocks Having A Diameter Greater Than 0.25 The Height Of The Berm. When Local Material Is Not Acceptable, Acceptable Material Shall Be Imported, As Directed By The Engineer. Compacted Berm Compacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Moistening Or Drying And Placing Material As Necessary In Locations Shown On The Drawings Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod, Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precaution To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. Shoulder Surface Beneath Berm Will Be Roughened To Provide A Bond Between The Berm And Shoulder When Completed. The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed Until At Least 90 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Density Is Obtained As Determined By Aashto T 99, Method C. The Cross-section Of The Finished Compacted Berm Shall Reasonably Conform To The Typical Cross-section As Shown On The Plans. Uncompacted Berm Uncompacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Drying, If Necessary And Placing Material In Locations Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precautions To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. 104.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Embankment To Be Paid For Shall Be The Volume Of Material Compacted In Place, Accepted By The Engineer And Formed With Material Obtained From Any Source. Material From Excavation Per Item 102 Which Is Used In Embankment And Accepted By The Engineer Will Be Paid Under Embankment And Such Payment Will Be Deemed To Include The Cost Of Excavating, Hauling, Stockpiling And All Other Costs Incidental To The Work. Material For Selected Borrow Topping Will Be Measured And Paid For Under The Same Conditions Specified In The Preceding Paragraph. Item 105 - Subgrade Preparation 105.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Preparation Of The Subgrade For The Support Of Overlying Structural Layers. It Shall Extend To Full Width Of The Roadway. Unless Authorized By The Engineer, Subgrade Preparation Shall Not Be Done Unless The Contractor Is Able To Start Immediately The Construction Of The Pavement Structure. 105.2 Material Requirements Unless Otherwise Stated In The Contract And Except When The Subgrade Is In Rock Cut, All Materials Below Subgrade Level To A Depth 150 Mm Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified Shall Meet The Requirements Of Section 104.2, Material Requirements. 105.3 Construction Requirements 105.3.1 Prior Works Prior To Commencing Preparation Of The Subgrade, All Culverts, Cross Drains, Ducts And The Like (including Their Fully Compacted Backfill) Ditches, Drains And Drainage Outlets Shall Be Completed. Any Work On The Preparation Of The Subgrade Shall Not Be Started Unless Prior Work Herein Described Shall Have Been Approved By The Engineer. 105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances The Finished Compacted Surface Of The Subgrade Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From +20 Mm Design Level Of Surface -30 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity Measured By 3-m Straight Edge 30 Mm Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber ± 0.50% Permitted Variation From ± 0.10% Design Longitudinal Grade Over 25 M Length 105.3.3 Subgrade In Common Excavation Unless Otherwise Specified, All Materials Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth 150 Mm Or Other Depth Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer Shall Be Excavated. The Material, If Suitable, Shall Be Set Aside For Future Use Or, If Unsuitable, Shall Be Disposed Of In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 102.2.9. Where Material Has Been Removed From Below Subgrade Level, The Resulting Surface Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm And In Accordance With Other Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. All Materials Immediately Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth Of 150 Mm, Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified, Shall Be Compacted In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.4 Subgrade In Rock Excavation Surface Irregularities Under The Subgrade Level Remaining After Trimming Of The Rock Excavation Shall Be Leveled By Placing Specified Material And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.5 Subgrade On Embankment After The Embankment Has Been Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compacted Properly. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes Be Or Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Material. The Entire Roadbed Shall Be Shaped And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Cross-sections Shown On The Plans. 105.3.6 Subgrade On Existing Pavement Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Portland Cement Concrete Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract, The Slab Shall Be Broken Into Pieces With Greatest Dimension Of Not More Than 500 Mm And The Existing Pavement Material Compacted As Specified In Subsection 104.3.3, As Directed By The Engineer. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall, As Part Of Pavement Construction Be Shaped To Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2 By Placing And Compacting Where Necessary A Leveling Course Comprising The Material Of The Pavement Course To Be Placed Immediately Above. Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement Or Gravel Surface Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract, The Pavement Shall Be Scarified, Thoroughly Loosened, Reshaped And Recompacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2. 105.3.7 Protection Of Completed Work The Contractor Shall Be Required To Protect And Maintain At His Own Expense The Entire Work Within The Limits Of His Contract In Good Condition Satisfactory To The Engineer From The Time He First Started Work Until All Work Shall Have Been Completed. Maintenance Shall Include Repairing And Recompacting Ruts, Ridges, Soft Spots And Deteriorated Sections Of The Subgrade Caused By The Traffic Of The Contractor's Vehicle/equipment Or That Of The Public. 105.3.8 Templates And Straight-edges The Contractor Shall Provide For Use Of The Engineer, Approved Templates And Straight-edges In Sufficient Number To Check The Accuracy Of The Work, As Provided In This Specification. 105.4 Method Of Measurement 105.4.1 Measurement Of Items For Payment Shall Be Provided Only For: 1. The Compaction Of Existing Ground Below Subgrade Level In Cuts Of Common Material As Specified In Subsection 105.3.3. 2. The Breaking Up Or Scarifying, Loosening, Reshaping And Recompacting Of Existing Pavement As Specified In Subsection 105.3.6. The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Area Of The Work Specified To Be Carried Out And Accepted By The Engineer. 105.4.2 Payment For All Work For The Preparation Of The Subgrade, Including Shaping To The Required Levels And Tolerances, Other Than As Specified Above Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Pay Item For Embankment. Part D – Subbase And Base Course Item 200 - Aggregate Subbase Course 200.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Placing And Compacting An Aggregate Subbase Course On A Prepared Subgrade In~ Accordance With This Specification And The Lines, Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans, Or As Directed By The Engineer. 200.2 Material Requirements Aggregate For Subbase Shall Consist Of Hard, Durable Particles Or Fragments Of Crushed Stone, Crushed Slag, Or Crushed Or Natural Gravel And Filler Of Natural Or Crushed Sand Or Other Finely Divided Mineral Matter. The Composite Material Shall Be Free From Vegetable Matter And Lumps Or Balls Of Clay, And Shall Be Of Such Nature That It Can Be Compacted Readily To Form A Firm, Stable Subbase. The Subbase Material Shall Conform To Table 200.1, Grading Requirements. Table 200.1 - Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard, Mm Alternate Us Standard 50 25 9.5 0.075 2” 1” 3/8” No. 200 100 55 – 85 40 – 75 0 - 12 The Fraction Passing The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve Shall Not Be Greater Than 0.66 (two Thirds) Of The Fractions Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve. The Fraction Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve Shall Have A Liquid Limit Not Greater Than 35 And Plasticity Index Not Greater Than 12 As Determined By Aashto T 89 And T 90, Respectively. The Coarse Portion, Retained On A 2.00 Mm (no. 10) Sieve, Shall Have A Mass Percent Of Wear Not Exceeding 50 'by The Los Angeles Abrasion Tests As Determined By Aashto T 96. The Material Shall Have A Soaked Cbr Value Of Not Less Than 30% As Determined By Aashto T 193. The Cbr Value Shall Be Obtained At The Maximum Dry Density And Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. 200.3 Construction Requirements 200.3.1 Preparation Of Existing Surface The Existing Surface Shall Be Graded And Finished As Provided Under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, Before Placing The Subbase Material. 200.3.2 Placing The Aggregate Subbase Material Shall Be Placed At A Uniform Mixture On A Prepared Subgrade In A Quantity Which Will Provide The Required Compacted Thickness. When More Than One Layer Is Required, Each Layer Shall Be Shaped And Compacted Before The Succeeding Layer Is Placed. The Placing Of Material Shall Begin At The Point Designated By The Engineer. Placing Shall Be From Vehicles Especially Equipped To Distribute The Material In A Continuous Uniform Layer Or Windrow. The Layer Or Windrow Shall Be Of Such Size That When Spread And Compacted, The Finished Layer Shall Be In Reasonably Close Conformity To The Nominal Thickness Shown On The Plans. When Hauling Is Done Over Previously Placed Material, Hauling Equipment Shall Be Dispersed Uniformly Over The Entire Surface Of The Previously Constructed Layer, To Minimize Rutting Or Uneven Compaction. 200.3.3 Spreading And Compacting When Uniformly Mixed, The Mixture Shall Be Spread To The Plan Thickness, For Compaction. Where The Required Thickness Is 150 Mm Or Less, The Material May Be Spread And Compacted In One Layer. Where The Required Thickness Is More Than 150 Mm, The Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread And Compacted In Two Or More Layers Of Approximately Equal Thickness, And The Maximum Compacted Thickness Of Any Layer Shall Not Exceed 150 Mm. All Subsequent Layers Shall Be Spread And Compacted In A Similar Manner. The Moisture Content Of Subbase Material Shall, If Necessary, Be Adjusted Prior To Compaction By Watering With Approved Sprinklers Mounted On Trucks Or By Drying Out, As Required In Order To Obtain The Required Compaction. Immediately Following Final Spreading And Smoothening, Each Layer Shall Be Compacted To The Full Width By Means Of Approved Compaction Equipment. Rolling Shall Progress Gradually From The Sides To The Center, Parallel To The Centerline Of The Road And Shall Continue Until The Whole Surface Has Been Rolled. Any Irregularities Or Depressions That Develop Shall Be Corrected By Loosening The Material At These Places And Adding Or Removing Material Until Surface Is Smooth And Uniform. Along Curbs, Headers And Walls, And At All Places Not Accessible To The Roller, The Subbase Material Shall Be Compacted Thoroughly With Approved Tampers Or Compactors. If The Layer Of Subbase Material, Or Part Thereof, Does Not Conform To The Required Finish, The Contractor Shall, At His Own Expense, Make The Necessary Corrections. Compaction Of Each Layer Shall Continue Until A Field Density Of At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined In Accordance With Aashto T 180, Method D Has Been Achieved. In-place Density Determination Shall Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 191. 200.3.4 Trial Sections Before Subbase Construction Is Started, The Contractor Shall Spread And Compact Trial Sections As Directed By The Engineer. The Purpose Of The Trial Sections Is To Check The Suitability Of The Materials, The Efficiency Of The Equipment And The Construction Method Which Is Proposed To Be Used By The Contractor. Therefore, The Contractor Must Use The Same Material, Equipment And Procedures That He Proposes To Use For The Main Work. One Trial Section Of About 500 M2 Shall Be Made For Every Type Of Material And/or Construction Equipment Procedure Proposed For Use. After Final Compaction Of Each Trial Section, The Contractor Shall Carry Out Such Field Density Tests And Other Tests Required As Directed By The Engineer. If A Trial Section Shows That The Proposed Materials, Equipment Or Procedures In The Engineer's Opinion Are Not Suitable For Subbase, The Material Shall Be Removed At The Contractor's Expense, And A New Trial Section Shall Be Constructed. If The Basic Conditions Regarding The Type Of Material Or Procedure Change During The Execution Of The Work, New Trial Sections Shall Be Constructed. 200.3.5 Tolerances Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread With Equipment That Will Provide A Uniform Layer Which When Compacted Will Conform To The Designed Level And Transverse Slopes As Shown On The Plans. The Allowable Tolerances Shall Be As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From Design ± 20 Mm Thickness Of Layer Permitted Variation From Design + 10 Mm Level Of Surface - 20 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity 20mm Measured By 3-m Straight-edge Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber ± 0.30 % Permitted Variation From Design Longitudinal Grade Over ± 0.10 % 25 M In Length 200.4 Method Of Measurement Aggregate Subbase Course Will Be Measured By The Cubic Meter (m³). The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Design Volume Compacted In-place As Shown On The Plans And Accepted In The Completed Course. No Allowance Will Be Given For Materials Placed Outside The Design Limits Shown On The Cross-sections. Trial Sections Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Shall Be Included In The Quantity Of Subbase Herein Measured. Item 404 – Reinforcing Steel Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Fabricating And Placing Of Steel Reinforcement Of The Type, Size, Shape And Grade Required In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Requirements Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. Strictly Implement The Usage Of Grade 40 Reinforcing Steel. Material Requirements Reinforcing Steel Shall Meet The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Construction Requirements 404.3.1 Order Lists Before Materials Are Ordered, All Order Lists And Bending Diagrams Shall Be Furnished By The Contractor, For Approval Of The Engineer. The Approval Of Order Lists And Bending Diagrams By The Engineer Shall In No Way Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For The Correctness Of Such Lists And Diagrams. Any Expense Incident To The Revisions Of Materials Furnished In Accordance With Such Lists And Diagrams To Make Them Comply With The Plans Shall Be Borne By The Contractor. 404.3.2 Protection Of Material Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Stored Above The Surface Of The Ground Upon Platforms, Skids, Or Other Supports And Shall Be Protected As Far As Practicable From Mechanical Injury And Surface Deterioration Caused By Exposure To Conditions Producing Rust. When Placed In The Work, Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Dirt, Detrimental Rust, Loose Scale, Paint, Grease, Oil, Or Other Foreign Materials. Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Injurious Defects Such As Cracks And Laminations. Rust, Surface Seams, Surface Irregularities Or Mill Scale Will Not Be Cause For Rejection, Provided The Minimum Dimensions, Cross Sectional Area And Tensile Properties Of A Hand Wire Brushed Specimen Meets The Physical Requirements For The Size And Grade Of Steel Specified. Bending All Reinforcing Bars Requiring Bending Shall Be Cold-bent To The Shapes Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer. Bars Shall Be Bent Around A Circular Pin Having The Following Diameters (d) In Relation To The Diameter Of The Bar (d): Nominal Diameter, D, Mm Pin Diameter (d) 10 To 20 25 To 28 32 And Greater 6d 8d 10d Bends And Hooks In Stirrups Or Ties May Be Bent To The Diameter Of The Principal Bar Enclosed Therein. Placing And Fastening All Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Accurately Placed In The Position Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer And Firmly Held There During The Placing And Setting Of The Concrete. Bars Shall Be Tied At All Intersections Except Where Spacing Is Less Than 300mm In Each Directions, In Which Case, Alternate Intersections Shall Be Tied. Ties Shall Be Fastened On The Inside. Distance From The Forms Shall Be Maintained By Means Of Stays, Blocks, Ties, Hangers, Or Other Approved Supports, So That It Does Not Vary From The Position Indicated On The Plans By More Than 6mm. Blocks For Holding Reinforcement From Contact With The Forms Shall Be Precast Mortar Blocks Of Approved Shapes And Dimensions. Layers Of Bars Shall Be Separated By Precast Mortar Blocks Or By Other Equally Suitable Devices. The Use Of Pebbles, Pieces Of Broken Stone Or Brick, Metal Pipe And Wooden Blocks Shall Not Be Permitted. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer, The Minimum Distance Between Bars Shall Be 40mm. Reinforcement In Any Member Shall Be Placed And Then Inspected And Approved By The Engineer Before The Placing Of Concrete Begins. Concrete Placed In Violation Of This Provision May Be Rejected And Removal May Be Required. If Fabric Reinforcement Is Shipped In Rolls, It Shall Be Straightened Before Being Placed. Bundled Bars Shall Be Tied Together At Not More Than 1.8m Intervals. Splicing All Reinforcement Shall Be Furnished In The Full Lengths Indicated On The Plans. Splicing Of Bars, Except Where Shown On The Plans, Will Not Be Permitted Without The Written Approval Of The Engineer. Splices Shall Be Staggered As Far As Possible And With A Minimum Separation Of Not Less Than 40 Bar Diameters. Not More Than One-third Of The Bars May Be Spliced In The Same Cross-section, Except Where Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans, Bars Shall Be Lapped A Minimum Distance Of: Splice Type Grade 40 Min. Lap Grade 60 Min. Lap But Not Less Than Tension 24 Bar Dia 36 Bar Dia 300 Mm Compression 20 Bar Dia 24 Bar Dia 300 Mm In Lapped Splices, The Bars Shall Be Placed In Contact And Wired Together. Lapped Splices Will Not Be Permitted At Locations Where The Concrete Section Is Insufficient To Provide Minimum Clear Distance Of One And One-third The Maximum Size Of Coarse Aggregate Between The Splice And The Nearest Adjacent Bar. Welding Of Reinforcing Steel Shall Be Done Only If Detailed On The Plans Or If Authorized By The Engineer In Writing. Spiral Reinforcement Shall Be Spliced By Lapping At Least One And A Half Turns Or By Butt Welding Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans. Lapping Of Bar Mat Sheets Of Mesh Or Bar Mat Reinforcement Shall Overlap Each Other Sufficiently To Maintain A Uniform Strength And Shall Be Securely Fastened At The Ends And Edges. The Overlap Shall Not Be Less Than One Mesh In Width. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Reinforcing Steel To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Allowance Will Be Made For Tie-wires, Separators, Wire Chairs And Other Material Used In Fastening The Reinforcing Steel In Place. If Bars Are Substituted Upon The Contractor’s Request And Approved By The Engineer And As A Result Thereof More Steel Is Used Than Specified, Only The Mass Specified Shall Be Measured For Payment. No Measurement Or Payment Will Be Made For Splices Added By The Contractor Unless Directed Or Approved By The Engineer. When There Is No Item For Reinforcing Steel In The Bill Of Quantities, Costs Will Be Considered As Incidental To The Other Items In The Bill Of Quantities. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantity, Measured As Prescribed In Section 404.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Reinforcing Steel Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing And Placing All Materials, Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram Item 405 – Structural Concrete Description 405.1.1 Scope This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Placing And Finishing Concrete In All Structures Except Pavements In Accordance With This Specification And Conforming To The Lines, Grades, And Dimensions Shown On The Plans. Concrete Shall Consist Of A Mixture Of Portland Cement, Fine Aggregate, Coarse Aggregate, Admixture When Specified, And Water Mixed In The Proportions Specified Or Approved By The Engineer. The Structural Strength Of Concrete Shall Be 24 Mpa. 405.1.2 Classes And Uses Of Concrete Five Classes Of Concrete Are Provided For In This Item, Namely: A, B, C, P And Seal. Each Class Shall Be Used In That Part Of The Structure As Called For On The Plans. The Classes Of Concrete Will Generally Be Used As Follows: Class A – All Superstructures And Heavily Reinforced Substructures. The Important Parts Of The Structure Included Are Slabs, Beams, Girders, Columns, Arch Ribs, Box Culverts, Reinforced Abutments, Retaining Walls, And Reinforced Footings. Class B – Footings, Pedestals, Massive Pier Shafts, Pipe Bedding, And Gravity Walls, Unreinforced Or With Only A Small Amount Of Reinforcement. Class C – Thin Reinforced Sections, Railings, Precast R.c. Piles And Cribbing And For Filler In Steel Grid Floors. Class P – Prestressed Concrete Structures And Members. Seal – Concrete Deposited In Water. Material Requirements 405.2.1 Portland Cement It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.1. Fine Aggregate It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.2. Coarse Aggregate It Shall Conform All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.3 Except That Gradation Shall Conform To Table 405.1. Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements For Coarse Aggregate Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard Mm Alternate Us Standard Class A Class B Class C Class P Class Seal 63 50 37.5 25 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” 1” ¾” ½” 3/8” No.4 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 0 - 5 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 - 0 - 5 100 90 – 100 40 – 70 0 – 15* 100 95 – 100 - 20 – 55 0 – 10* 100 95 – 100 - 25 – 60 - 0 – 10* * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. Water It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.4 Reinforcing Steel It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Admixtures Admixtures Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.7 Curing Materials Curing Materials Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.8. Expansion Joint Materials Expansion Joint Materials Shall Be: Preformed Sponge Rubber And Cork, Conforming To Aashto M 153. Hot-poured Elastic Type, Conforming To Aashto M 173. Preformed Fillers, Conforming To Aashto M 213. Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals These Shall Conform To Aashto M 220. Elastomeric Bearing Pads These Shall Conform To Aashto M 251 Or Item 412 – Elastomeric Bearing Pads. Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.10. Sampling And Testing Of Structural Concrete As Work Progresses, At Least One (1) Sample Consisting Of Three (3) Concrete Cylinder Test Specimens, 150 X 300mm (6 X 12 Inches), Shall Be Taken From Each Seventy-five (75) Cubic Meters Of Each Class Of Concrete Or Fraction Thereof Placed Each Day. Compliance With The Requirements Of This Section Shall Be Determined In Accordance With The Following Standard Methods Of Aashto: Sampling Of Fresh Concrete Weight Per Cubic Metre And Air Content (gravi- Metric) Of Concrete Sieve Analysis Of Fine And Coarse Aggregates Slump Of Portland Cement Concrete Specific Gravity And Absorption Of Fine Aggregate T 141 T 121 T 27 T 119 T 84 Tests For Strength Shall Be Made In Accordance With The Following: Making And Curing Concrete Compressive And Flexural Tests Specimens In The Field Compressive Strength Of Molded Concrete Cylinders T 23 T 22 Production Requirements Proportioning And Strength Of Structural Concrete The Concrete Materials Shall Be Proportioned In Accordance With The Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete As Specified In Table 405.2, Using The Absolute Volume Method As Outlined In The American Concrete Institute (aci) Standard 211.1. “recommended Practice For Selecting Proportions For Normal And Heavyweight Concrete”. Other Methods Of Proportioning May Be Employed In The Mix Design With Prior Approval Of The Engineer. The Mix Shall Either Be Designed Or Approved By The Engineer. A Change In The Source Of Materials During The Progress Of Work May Necessitate A New Mix Design. The Strength Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete Shall Be As Specified In Table 405.2. Table 405.2 - Composition And Strength Of Concrete For Use In Structures Class Of Concrete Minimum Cement Content Per M3 Kg (bag**) Maximum Water/ Cement Ratio Kg/kg Consistency Range In Slump Mm (inch) Designated Size Of Coarse Aggregate Square Opening Std. Mm Minimum Compressive Strength Of 150x300mm Concrete Cylinder Specimen At 28 Days, Mn/m2 (psi) A B C P Seal 360 (9 Bags) 320 (8 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 440 (11 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 0.53 0.58 0.55 0.49 0.58 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 100 Max. (4 Max.) 100 – 200 (4 - 8) 37.5 – 4.75 (1-1/2” – No. 4) 50 – 4.75 (2” – No. 4) 12.5 – 4.75 (1/2” – No. 4) 19.0 – 4.75 (3/4” – No. 4) 25 – 4.75 (1” – No. 4) 20.7 (3000) 16.5 (2400) 20.7 (3000) 37.7 (5000) 20.7 (3000) * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus Or Minus 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. ** Based On 40 Kg/bag 405.4.2 Consistency Concrete Shall Have A Consistency Such That It Will Be Workable In The Required Position. It Shall Be Of Such A Consistency That It Will Flow Around Reinforcing Steel But Individual Particles Of The Coarse Aggregate When Isolated Shall Show A Coating Of Mortar Containing Its Proportionate Amount Of Sand. The Consistency Of Concrete Shall Be Gauged By The Ability Of The Equipment To Properly Place It And Not By The Difficulty In Mixing And Transporting. The Quantity Of Mixing Water Shall Be Determined By The Engineer And Shall Not Be Varied Without His Consent. Concrete As Dry As It Is Practical To Place With The Equipment Specified Shall Be Used. 405.4.3 Batching Measuring And Batching Of Materials Shall Be Done At A Batching Plant. Portland Cement Either Sacked Or Bulk Cement May Be Used. No Fraction Of A Sack Of Cement Shall Be Used In A Batch Of Concrete Unless The Cement Is Weighed. All Bulk Cement Shall Be Weighed On An Approved Weighing Device. The Bulk Cement Weighing Hopper Shall Be Properly Sealed And Vented To Preclude Dusting Operation. The Discharge Chute Shall Not Be Suspended From The Weighing Hopper And Shall Be So Arranged That Cement Will Neither Be Lodged In It Nor Leak From It. Accuracy Of Batching Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 1 Mass Percent. Water Water May Be Measured Either By Volume Or By Weight. The Accuracy Of Measuring The Water Shall Be Within A Range Of Error Of Not More Than 1 Percent. Aggregates Stockpiling Of Aggregates Shall Be In Accordance With Subsection 311.2.10. All Aggregates Whether Produced Or Handled By Hydraulic Methods Or Washed, Shall Be Stockpiled Or Binned For Draining For At Least 12 Hours Prior To Batching. Rail Shipment Requiring More Than12 Hours Will Be Accepted As Adequate Binning Only If The Car Bodies Permit Free Drainage. If The Aggregates Contain High Or Non-uniform Moisture Content, Storage Or Stockpile Period In Excess Of 12 Hours May Be Required By The Engineer. Batching Shall Be Conducted As To Result In A 2 Mass Percent Maximum Tolerance For The Required Materials. Bins And Scales The Batching Plant Shall Include Separate Bins For Bulk Cement, Fine Aggregate And For Each Size Of Coarse Aggregate, A Weighing Hopper, And Scales Capable Of Determining Accurately The Mass Of Each Component Of The Batch. Scales Shall Be Accurate To One-half (0.5) Percent Throughout The Range Used. Batching When Batches Are Hauled To The Mixer, Bulk Cement Shall Be Transported Either In Waterproof Compartments Or Between The Fine And Coarse Aggregate. When Cement Is Placed In Contact With Moist Aggregates, Batches Will Be Rejected Unless Mixed Within 1-1/2 Hours Of Such Contact. Sacked Cement May Be Transported On Top Of The Aggregates. Batches Shall Be Delivered To The Mixer Separate And Intact. Each Batch Shall Be Dumped Cleanly Into The Mixer Without Loss, And, When More Than One Batch Is Carried On The Truck, Without Spilling Of Material From One Batch Compartment Into Another. Admixtures The Contractor Shall Follow An Approved Procedure For Adding The Specified Amount Of Admixture To Each Batch And Will Be Responsible For Its Uniform Operation During The Progress Of The Work. He Shall Provide Separate Scales For The Admixtures Which Are To Be Proportioned By Weight, And Accurate Measures For Those To Be Proportioned By Volume. Admixtures Shall Be Measured Into The Mixer With An Accuracy Of Plus Or Minus Three (3) Percent. The Use Of Calcium Chloride As An Admixture Will Not Be Permitted. 405.4.4 Mixing And Delivery Concrete May Be Mixed At The Site Of Construction, At A Central Point Or By A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or By A Combination Of Central Point Mixing And Truck Agitating. Mixing And Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be In Accordance With The Appropriate Requirements Of Aashto M 157 Except As Modified In The Following Paragraphs Of This Section, For Truck Mixing Or A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or Truck Agitating. Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be Regulated So That Placing Is At A Continuous Rate Unless Delayed By The Placing Operations. The Intervals Between Delivery Of Batches Shall Not Be So Great As To Allow The Concrete Inplace To Harden Partially, And In No Case Shall Such An Interval Exceed 30 Minutes. In Exceptional Cases And When Volumetric Measurements Are Authorized, For Small Project Requiring Less Than 75 Cu.m. Per Day Of Pouring, The Weight Proportions Shall Be Converted To Equivalent Volumetric Proportions. In Such Cases, Suitable Allowance Shall Be Made For Variations In The Moisture Condition Of The Aggregates, Including The Bulking Effect In The Fine Aggregate. Batching And Mixing Shall Be In Accordance With Astm C 685, Section 6 Through 9. Concrete Mixing, By Chute Is Allowed Provided That A Weighing Scales For Determining The Batch Weight Will Be Used. For Batch Mixing At The Site Of Construction Or At A Central Point, A Batch Mixer Of An Approved Type Shall Be Used. Mixer Having A Rated Capacity Of Less Than A One-bag Batch Shall Not Be Used. The Volume Of Concrete Mixed Per Batch Shall Not Exceed The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Standard Rating Plate On The Mixer Except That An Overload Up To 10 Percent Above The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity May Be Permitted, Provided Concrete Test Data For Strength, Segregation, And Uniform Consistency Are Satisfactory And Provided No Spillage Of Concrete Takes Place. The Batch Shall Be So Charge Into The Drum That A Portion Of The Water Shall Enter In Advance Of The Cement And Aggregates. The Flow Of Water Shall Be Uniform And All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First 15 Seconds Of The Mixing Period. Mixing Time Shall Be Measured From The Time All Materials, Except Water, Are In The Drum. Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 60 Seconds For Mixers Having A Capacity Of 1.5m3 Or Less. For Mixers Having A Capacity Greater Than 1.5m3, The Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 90 Seconds. If Timing Starts, The Instant The Skip Reaches Its Maximum Raised Position, 4 Seconds Shall Be Added To The Specified Mixing Time. Mixing Time Ends When The Discharge Chute Opens. The Mixer Shall Be Operated At The Drum Speed As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Name Plate On The Mixer. Any Concrete Mixed Less Than The Specified Time Shall Be Discarded And Disposed Off By The Contractor At His Own Expenses. The Timing Device On Stationary Mixers Shall Be Equipped With A Bell Or Other Suitable Warning Device Adjusted To Give A Clearly Audible Signal Each Time The Lock Is Released. In Case Of Failure Of The Timing Device, The Contractor Will Be Permitted To Continue Operations While It Is Being Repaired, Provided He Furnishes An Approved Timepiece Equipped With Minute And Second Hands. If The Timing Device Is Not Placed In Good Working Order Within 24 Hours, Further Use Of The Mixer Will Be Prohibited Until Repairs Are Made. Retempering Concrete Will Not Be Permitted. Admixtures For Increasing The Workability, For Retarding The Set, Or For Accelerating The Set Or Improving The Pumping Characteristics Of The Concrete Will Be Permitted Only When Specifically Provided For In The Contract, Or Authorized In Writing By The Engineer. Mixing Concrete: General Concrete Shall Be Thoroughly Mixed In A Mixer Of An Approved Size And Type That Will Insure A Uniform Distribution Of The Materials Throughout The Mass. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed In Mechanically Operated Mixers. Mixing Plant And Equipment For Transporting And Placing Concrete Shall Be Arranged With An Ample Auxiliary Installation To Provide A Minimum Supply Of Concrete In Case Of Breakdown Of Machinery Or In Case The Normal Supply Of Concrete Is Disrupted. The Auxiliary Supply Of Concrete Shall Be Sufficient To Complete The Casting Of A Section Up To A Construction Joint That Will Meet The Approval Of The Engineer. Equipment Having Components Made Of Aluminum Or Magnesium Alloys, Which Would Have Contact With Plastic Concrete During Mixing, Transporting Or Pumping Of Portland Cement Concrete, Shall Not Be Used. Concrete Mixers Shall Be Equipped With Adequate Water Storage And A Device Of Accurately Measuring And Automatically Controlling The Amount Of Water Used. Materials Shall Be Measured By Weighing. The Apparatus Provided For Weighing The Aggregates And Cement Shall Be Suitably Designed And Constructed For This Purpose. The Accuracy Of All Weighing Devices Except That For Water Shall Be Such That Successive Quantities Can Be Measured To Within One Percent Of The Desired Amounts. The Water Measuring Device Shall Be Accurate To Plus Or Minus 0.5 Mass Percent. All Measuring Devices Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer. Scales And Measuring Devices Shall Be Tested At The Expense Of The Contractor As Frequently As The Engineer May Deem Necessary To Insure Their Accuracy. Weighing Equipment Shall Be Insulated Against Vibration Or Movement Of Other Operating Equipment In The Plant. When The Entire Plant Is Running, The Scale Reading At Cut-off Shall Not Vary From The Weight Designated By The Engineer More Than One Mass Percent For Cement, 1-1/2 Mass Percent For Any Size Of Aggregate, Or One (1) Mass Percent For The Total Aggregate In Any Batch. Mixing Concrete At Site Concrete Mixers May Be Of The Revolving Drum Or The Revolving Blade Type And The Mixing Drum Or Blades Shall Be Operated Uniformly At The Mixing Speed Recommended By The Manufacturer. The Pick-up And Throw-over Blades Of Mixers Shall Be Restored Or Replaced When Any Part Or Section Is Worn 20mm Or More Below The Original Height Of The Manufacturer’s Design. Mixers And Agitators Which Have An Accumulation Of Hard Concrete Or Mortar Shall Not Be Used. When Bulk Cement Is Used And Volume Of The Batch Is 0.5m3 Or More, The Scale And Weigh Hopper For Portland Cement Shall Be Separate And Distinct From The Aggregate Hopper Or Hoppers. The Discharge Mechanism Of The Bulk Cement Weigh Hopper Shall Be Interlocked Against Opening Before The Full Amount Of Cement Is In The Hopper. The Discharging Mechanism Shall Also Be Interlocked Against Opening When The Amount Of Cement In The Hopper Is Underweight By More Than One (1) Mass Percent Or Overweight By More Than 3 Mass Percent Of The Amount Specified. When The Aggregate Contains More Water Than The Quantity Necessary To Produce A Saturated Surface Dry Condition, Representative Samples Shall Be Taken And The Moisture Content Determined For Each Kind Of Aggregate. The Batch Shall Be So Charged Into The Mixer That Some Water Will Enter In Advance Of Cement And Aggregate. All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First Quarter Of The Specified Mixing Time. Cement Shall Be Batched And Charged Into The Mixer So That It Will Not Result In Loss Of Cement Due To The Effect Of Wind, Or In Accumulation Of Cement On Surface Of Conveyors Or Hoppers, Or In Other Conditions Which Reduce Or Vary The Required Quantity Of Cement In The Concrete Mixture. The Entire Content Of A Batch Mixer Shall Be Removed From The Drum Before Materials For A Succeeding Batch Are Placed Therein. The Materials Composing A Batch Except Water Shall Be Deposited Simultaneously Into The Mixer. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed For A Period Of Not Less Than 1-1/2 Minutes After All Materials, Including Water, Are In The Mixer. During The Period Of Mixing, The Mixer Shall Operate At The Speed For Which It Has Been Designed. Mixers Shall Be Operated With An Automatic Timing Device That Can Be Locked By The Engineer. The Time Device And Discharge Mechanics Shall Be So Interlocked That During Normal Operation No Part Of The Batch Will Be Charged Until The Specified Mixing Time Has Elapsed. The First Batch Of Concrete Materials Placed In The Mixer Shall Contain A Sufficient Excess Of Cement, Sand, And Water To Coat Inside Of The Drum Without Reducing The Required Mortar Content Of The Mix. When Mixing Is To Cease For A Period Of One Hour Or More, The Mixer Shall Be Thoroughly Cleaned. Mixing Concrete At Central Plant Mixing At Central Plant Shall Conform To The Requirements For Mixing At The Site. Mixing Concrete In Truck Truck Mixers, Unless Otherwise Authorized By The Engineer, Shall Be Of The Revolving Drum Type, Water-tight, And So Constructed That The Concrete Can Be Mixed To Insure A Uniform Distribution Of Materials Throughout The Mass. All Solid Materials For The Concrete Shall Be Accurately Measured And Charged Into The Drum At The Proportioning Plant. Except As Subsequently Provided, The Truck Mixer Shall Be Equipped With A Device By Which The Quantity Of Water Added Can Be Readily Verified. The Mixing Water May Be Added Directly To The Batch, In Which Case A Tank Is Not Required. Truck Mixers May Be Required To Be Provided With A Means Of Which The Mixing Time Can Be Readily Verified By The Engineer. The Maximum Size Of Batch In Truck Mixers Shall Not Exceed The Minimum Rated Capacity Of The Mixer As Stated By The Manufacturer And Stamped In Metal On The Mixer. Truck Mixing, Shall, Unless Other-wise Directed Be Continued For Not Less Than 100 Revolutions After All Ingredients, Including Water, Are In The Drum. The Mixing Speed Shall Not Be Less Than 4 Rpm, Nor More Than 6 Rpm. Mixing Shall Begin Within 30 Minutes After The Cement Has Been Added Either To The Water Or Aggregate, But When Cement Is Charged Into A Mixer Drum Containing Water Or Surface Wet Aggregate And When The Temperature Is Above 32oc, This Limit Shall Be Reduced To 15 Minutes. The Limitation In Time Between The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregate And The Beginning Of The Mixing May Be Waived When, In The Judgement Of The Engineer, The Aggregate Is Sufficiently Free From Moisture, So That There Will Be No Harmful Effects On The Cement. When A Truck Mixer Is Used For Transportation, The Mixing Time Specified In Subsection 405.4.4 (3) At A Stationary Mixer May Be Reduced To 30 Seconds And The Mixing Completed In A Truck Mixer. The Mixing Time In The Truck Mixer Shall Be As Specified For Truck Mixing. Transporting Mixed Concrete Mixed Concrete May Only Be Transported To The Delivery Point In Truck Agitators Or Truck Mixers Operating At The Speed Designated By The Manufacturers Of The Equipment As Agitating Speed, Or In Non-agitating Hauling Equipment, Provided The Consistency And Workability Of The Mixed Concrete Upon Discharge At The Delivery Point Is Suitable Point For Adequate Placement And Consolidation In Place. Truck Agitators Shall Be Loaded Not To Exceed The Manufacturer’s Guaranteed Capacity. They Shall Maintain The Mixed Concrete In A Thoroughly Mixed And Uniform Mass During Hauling. No Additional Mixing Water Shall Be Incorporated Into The Concrete During Hauling Or After Arrival At The Delivery Point. The Rate Of Discharge Of Mixed Concrete From Truck Mixers Or Agitators Shall Be Controlled By The Speed Of Rotation Of The Drum In The Discharge Direction With The Discharge Gate Fully Open. When A Truck Mixer Or Agitator Is Used For Transporting Concrete To The Delivery Point, Discharge Shall Be Completed Within One Hour, Or Before 250 Revolutions Of The Drum Or Blades, Whichever Comes First, After The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregates. Under Conditions Contributing To Quick Stiffening Of The Concrete Or When The Temperature Of The Concrete Is 30oc, Or Above, A Time Less Than One Hour Will Be Required. Delivery Of Mixed Concrete The Contractor Shall Have Sufficient Plant Capacity And Transportation Apparatus To Insure Continuous Delivery At The Rate Required. The Rate Of Delivery Of Concrete During Concreting Operations Shall Be Such As To Provide For The Proper Handling, Placing And Finishing Of The Concrete. The Rate Shall Be Such That The Interval Between Batches Shall Not Exceed 20 Minutes. The Methods Of Delivering And Handling The Concrete Shall Be Such As Will Facilitate Placing Of The Minimum Handling. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Structural Concrete To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Deduction Will Be Made For The Volume Occupied By Pipe Less Than 100mm (4 Inches) In Diameter Or By Reinforcing Steel, Anchors, Conduits, Weep Holes Or Expansion Joint Materials. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 405.5, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Item Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities. Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For Furnishing, Placing And Finishing Concrete Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In The Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 405 (4) 405 (5) Structural Concrete, Class A Structural Concrete, Class B Structural Concrete, Class C Structural Concrete, Class P Seal Concrete Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Item 510 – Concrete Slope Protection 510.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Furnishing And Placing Of Concrete Slope Protection Including All Necessary Excavation, A Bed Course And Reinforced Concrete To The Required Thickness And Extent To Protect Slopes Against Erosion. Construction Details Shall Be As Shown On The Plans. 510.2 Material Requirements 510.2.1 Bed Course A Bed Course, Where Required, Shall Be Granular Material Which Satisfies The Requirements For Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A. 510.2.2 Formwork Formwork, Where Necessary, Shall Be As Specified In Item 407, Concrete Structures. 510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement Steel Reinforcement Shall Be As Specified In Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 510.2.4 Concrete Concrete Shall Be Class B As Specified In Item 405, Structural Concrete, Unless Otherwise Specified Or Required By The Engineer. 510.3 Construction Requirements 510.3.1 Excavation The Ground Shall Be Excavated Where Necessary In Accordance With The Dimensions, Lines And Grades Shown On The Plans. 510.3.2 Bed Course Where Shown On The Plans Or Ordered By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Provide And Lay A Bed Course, To The Depth Required, As Specified In Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, Compacted At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density As Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. 510.3.3 Concrete The Contractor Shall Provide And Place Concrete In Accordance With The Requirements Of Item 405, Structural Concrete, To The Required Depths In The Positions And To The Grades And Elevations Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Specified, The Concrete Slabs Shall Not Be Greater Than 4m By 4m And Shall Have Between Slabs, Plain Vertical Straight Joints With No Joint Filler Or Sealer. The Toe Of The Concrete Slope Protection Shall Be Constructed And Protected As Shown On The Plans. 510.3.4 Drainage Drainage Of The Bed Course Or Backfill Shall Be Provided As Shown On The Plans Or As Required By The Engineer. 510.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Granular Material In The Bed Course To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. The Quantity Of Concrete To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. 510.5 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities As Provided In Section 510.4, Method Of Measurement, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price According To The Pay Item In The Bid Schedule Which Price And Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For The Necessary Excavation, For All Labor, Equipment, Tools, All Materials Including Formwork And Reinforcing Steel, And Incidentals Necessary To Complete This Item. Section Vii. Drawings Annex A – Architectural Design Annex B- Project Billboard Plan Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities Bid No. Agr- 24-961-b Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost No. I. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Ii. Project Billboard / Sognboard 4.00 Each Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) Each P Iii. Mobilization/ Demobilization 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Iv. Clearing And Grubbing 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /l.s. P V. Structure Excavation 61.07 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /cu.m P Vi. Embankment From Roadway Excavation 399.83 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Vii. Embankment From Borrow 97.75 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Viii. Subgrade Preparation 2,048.00 Sq.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Sq.m P Ix. Aggregate Subbase Course 409.60 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P X. Reinforcing Steel 1,855.25 Kgs Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Kgs P Xi. Structural Concrete (24 Mpa) 11.06 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Xii. Concrete Slope Protection 94.74 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P 8 Total Bid Cost In Figures P Total Bid Cost In Words Summary Of Costs Item No. Bid Amount Miscellaneous Survey And Staking ₱ _____________________________ Project Billboard / Signboard ₱ _____________________________ Mobilization / Demobilization ₱ _____________________________ Iv. Clearing And Grubbing ₱ _____________________________ V. Structure Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Vi. Embankment From Roadway Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Vii. Embankment From Borrow ₱ _____________________________ Viii. Subgrade Preparation ₱ _____________________________ Ix. Aggregate Subbase Course ₱ _____________________________ X. Reinforcing Steel ₱ _____________________________ Xi. Structural Concrete (24 Mpa) ₱ _____________________________ Xii. Concrete Slope Protection ₱ _____________________________ Total Bid Amount ₱ _____________________________ Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents Technical Component Envelope Class “a” Documents Legal Documents ⬜ Valid Philgeps Registration Certificate (platinum Membership) (all Pages) In Accordance With Section 8.5.2 Of The Irr; Technical Documents ⬜ Statement Of The Prospective Bidder Of All Its Ongoing Government And Private Contracts, Including Contracts Awarded But Not Yet Started, If Any, Whether Similar Or Not Similar In Nature And Complexity To The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Statement Of The Bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) Similar To The Contract To Be Bid, Except Under Conditions Provided Under The Rules; And ⬜ Special Pcab License In Case Of Joint Ventures; And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Original Copy Of Bid Security. If In The Form Of A Surety Bond, Submit Also A Certification Issued By The Insurance Commission; Or Original Copy Of Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; And Project Requirements, Which Shall Include The Following: ⬜ Organizational Chart For The Contract To Be Bid; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen), To Be Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership Or Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be; And ⬜ Original Duly Signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (oss); And If Applicable, Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate In Case Of A Corporation, Partnership, Or Cooperative; Or Original Special Power Of Attorney Of All Members Of The Joint Venture Giving Full Power And Authority To Its Officer To Sign The Oss And Do Acts To Represent The Bidder. Financial Documents ⬜ The Prospective Bidder’s Computation Of Net Financial Contracting Capacity (nfcc). Class “b” Documents ⬜ If Applicable, Duly Signed Joint Venture Agreement (jva) In Accordance With Ra No. 4566 And Its Irr In Case The Joint Venture Is Already In Existence; Or Duly Notarized Statements From All The Potential Joint Venture Partners Stating That They Will Enter Into And Abide By The Provisions Of The Jva In The Instance That The Bid Is Successful. Financial Component Envelope ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed And Accomplished Financial Bid Form; And Other Documentary Requirements Under Ra No. 9184 ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed Bid Prices In The Bill Of Quantities; And ⬜ Duly Accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, Including A Summary Sheet Indicating The Unit Prices Of Construction Materials, Labor Rates, And Equipment Rentals Used In Coming Up With The Bid; And ⬜ Cash Flow By Quarter. Bid Form For The Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Bid Form Date : Project Identification No. : To: [name And Address Of Procuring Entity] Having Examined The Philippine Bidding Documents (pbds) Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin Numbers [insert Numbers], The Receipt Of Which Is Hereby Duly Acknowledged, We, The Undersigned, Declare That: We Have No Reservation To The Pbds, Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletins, For The Procurement Project: [insert Name Of Contract]; We Offer To Execute The Works For This Contract In Accordance With The Pbds; The Total Price Of Our Bid In Words And Figures, Excluding Any Discounts Offered Below Is: [insert Information]; The Discounts Offered And The Methodology For Their Application Are: [insert Information]; The Total Bid Price Includes The Cost Of All Taxes, Such As, But Not Limited To: [specify The Applicable Taxes, E.g. (i) Value Added Tax (vat), (ii) Income Tax, (iii) Local Taxes, And (iv) Other Fiscal Levies And Duties], Which Are Itemized Herein And Reflected In The Detailed Estimates, Our Bid Shall Be Valid Within The Period Stated In The Pbds, And It Shall Remain Binding Upon Us At Any Time Before The Expiration Of That Period; If Our Bid Is Accepted, We Commit To Obtain A Performance Security In The Amount Of [insert Percentage Amount] Percent Of The Contract Price For The Due Performance Of The Contract, Or A Performance Securing Declaration In Lieu Of The The Allowable Forms Of Performance Security, Subject To The Terms And Conditions Of Issued Gppb Guidelines12 For This Purpose; We Are Not Participating, As Bidders, In More Than One Bid In This Bidding Process, Other Than Alternative Offers In Accordance With The Bidding Documents; We Understand That This Bid, Together With Your Written Acceptance Thereof Included In Your Notification Of Award, Shall Constitute A Binding Contract Between Us, Until A Formal Contract Is Prepared And Executed; And We Understand That You Are Not Bound To Accept The Lowest Calculated Bid Or Any Other Bid That You May Receive. We Likewise Certify/confirm That The Undersigned, Is The Duly Authorized Representative Of The Bidder, And Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For The [name Of Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity]. We Acknowledge That Failure To Sign Each And Every Page Of This Bid Form, Including The Bill Of Quantities, Shall Be A Ground For The Rejection Of Our Bid. Name: Legal Capacity: Signature: Duly Authorized To Sign The Bid For And Behalf Of: Date: 12 Currently Based On Gppb Resolution No. 0 Bid Securing Declaration Form [shall Be Submitted With The Bid If Bidder Opts To Provide This Form Of Bid Security] Republic Of The Philippines) City Of ) S.s. Bid Securing Declaration Project Identification No.: [insert Number] To: [insert Name And Address Of The Procuring Entity] I/we, The Undersigned, Declare That: I/we Understand That, According To Your Conditions, Bids Must Be Supported By A Bid Security, Which May Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration. I/we Accept That: (a) I/we Will Be Automatically Disqualified From Bidding For Any Procurement Contract With Any Procuring Entity For A Period Of Two (2) Years Upon Receipt Of Your Blacklisting Order; And, (b) I/we Will Pay The Applicable Fine Provided Under Section 6 Of The Guidelines On The Use Of Bid Securing Declaration, Within Fifteen (15) Days From Receipt Of The Written Demand By The Procuring Entity For The Commission Of Acts Resulting To The Enforcement Of The Bid Securing Declaration Under Sections 23.1(b), 34.2, 40.1 And 69.1, Except 69.1(f),of The Irr Of Ra No. 9184; Without Prejudice To Other Legal Action The Government May Undertake. I/we Understand That This Bid Securing Declaration Shall Cease To Be Valid On The Following Circumstances: Upon Expiration Of The Bid Validity Period, Or Any Extension Thereof Pursuant To Your Request; I Am/we Are Declared Ineligible Or Post-disqualified Upon Receipt Of Your Notice To Such Effect, And (i) I/we Failed To Timely File A Request For Reconsideration Or (ii) I/we Filed A Waiver To Avail Of Said Right; And I Am/we Are Declared The Bidder With The Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, And I/we Have Furnished The Performance Security And Signed The Contract. In Witness Whereof, I/we Have Hereunto Set My/our Hand/s This Day Of [month] [year] At [place Of Execution]. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice] Omnibus Sworn Statement (revised) [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Republic Of The Philippines ) City/municipality Of ) S.s. Affidavit I, [name Of Affiant], Of Legal Age, [civil Status], [nationality], And Residing At [address Of Affiant], After Having Been Duly Sworn In Accordance With Law, Do Hereby Depose And State That: [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] I Am The Sole Proprietor Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am The Duly Authorized And Designated Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] As The Owner And Sole Proprietor, Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder], I Have Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached Duly Notarized Special Power Of Attorney; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached [state Title Of Attached Document Showing Proof Of Authorization (e.g., Duly Notarized Secretary’s Certificate, Board/partnership Resolution, Or Special Power Of Attorney, Whichever Is Applicable;)]; [name Of Bidder] Is Not “blacklisted” Or Barred From Bidding By The Government Of The Philippines Or Any Of Its Agencies, Offices, Corporations, Or Local Government Units, Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution Whose Blacklisting Rules Have Been Recognized By The Government Procurement Policy Board, By Itself Or By Relation, Membership, Association, Affiliation, Or Controlling Interest With Another Blacklisted Person Or Entity As Defined And Provided For In The Uniform Guidelines On Blacklisting; Each Of The Documents Submitted In Satisfaction Of The Bidding Requirements Is An Authentic Copy Of The Original, Complete, And All Statements And Information Provided Therein Are True And Correct; [name Of Bidder] Is Authorizing The Head Of The Procuring Entity Or Its Duly Authorized Representative(s) To Verify All The Documents Submitted; [select One, Delete The Rest:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] The Owner Or Sole Proprietor Is Not Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Partnership Or Cooperative:] None Of The Officers And Members Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Corporation Or Joint Venture:] None Of The Officers, Directors, And Controlling Stockholders Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [name Of Bidder] Complies With Existing Labor Laws And Standards; And [name Of Bidder] Is Aware Of And Has Undertaken The Responsibilities As A Bidder In Compliance With The Philippine Bidding Documents, Which Includes: Carefully Examinin Philippine Bidding Documents (as Harmonized With Development Partners) Road Opening Project - Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-961-b Iloilo Provincial Government Sixth Edition Table Of Contents Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms 4 Section I. Invitation To Bid 7 Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders 9 1. Scope Of Bid 9 2. Funding Information 9 3. Bidding Requirements 9 4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices 9 5. Eligible Bidders 10 6. Origin Of Associated Goods 10 7. Subcontracts 10 8. Pre-bid Conference 10 9. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents 10 10. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components 11 11. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component 11 12. Alternative Bids 11 13. Bid Prices 12 14. Bid And Payment Currencies 12 15. Bid Security 12 16. Sealing And Marking Of Bids 12 17. Deadline For Submission Of Bids 12 18. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids 13 19. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids 13 20. Post Qualification 13 21. Signing Of The Contract 13 Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet 14 Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract 16 1. Scope Of Contract 16 2. Sectional Completion Of Works 16 3. Possession Of Site 16 4. The Contractor’s Obligations 16 5. Performance Security 17 6. Site Investigation Reports 17 7. Warranty 17 8. Liability Of The Contractor 17 9. Termination For Other Causes 17 10. Dayworks 18 11. Program Of Work 18 12. Instructions, Inspections And Audits 18 13. Advance Payment 18 14. Progress Payments 18 15. Operating And Maintenance Manuals 18 Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract 19 Section Vi. Specifications 20 Section Vii. Drawings 28 Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities 65 Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents 69 Glossary Of Terms, Abbreviations, And Acronyms Abc – Approved Budget For The Contract. Arcc – Allowable Range Of Contract Cost. Bac – Bids And Awards Committee. Bid – A Signed Offer Or Proposal To Undertake A Contract Submitted By A Bidder In Response To And In Consonance With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. Also Referred To As Proposal And Tender. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[c]) Bidder – Refers To A Contractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Distributor And/or Consultant Who Submits A Bid In Response To The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[d]) Bidding Documents – The Documents Issued By The Procuring Entity As The Bases For Bids, Furnishing All Information Necessary For A Prospective Bidder To Prepare A Bid For The Goods, Infrastructure Projects, And/or Consulting Services Required By The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[e]) Bir – Bureau Of Internal Revenue. Bsp – Bangko Sentral Ng Pilipinas. Cda – Cooperative Development Authority. Consulting Services – Refer To Services For Infrastructure Projects And Other Types Of Projects Or Activities Of The Gop Requiring Adequate External Technical And Professional Expertise That Are Beyond The Capability And/or Capacity Of The Gop To Undertake Such As, But Not Limited To: (i) Advisory And Review Services; (ii) Pre-investment Or Feasibility Studies; (iii) Design; (iv) Construction Supervision; (v) Management And Related Services; And (vi) Other Technical Services Or Special Studies. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[i]) Contract – Refers To The Agreement Entered Into Between The Procuring Entity And The Supplier Or Manufacturer Or Distributor Or Service Provider For Procurement Of Goods And Services; Contractor For Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects; Or Consultant Or Consulting Firm For Procurement Of Consulting Services; As The Case May Be, As Recorded In The Contract Form Signed By The Parties, Including All Attachments And Appendices Thereto And All Documents Incorporated By Reference Therein. Contractor – Is A Natural Or Juridical Entity Whose Proposal Was Accepted By The Procuring Entity And To Whom The Contract To Execute The Work Was Awarded. Contractor As Used In These Bidding Documents May Likewise Refer To A Supplier, Distributor, Manufacturer, Or Consultant. Cpi – Consumer Price Index. Dole – Department Of Labor And Employment. Dti – Department Of Trade And Industry. Foreign-funded Procurement Or Foreign-assisted Project – Refers To Procurement Whose Funding Source Is From A Foreign Government, Foreign Or International Financing Institution As Specified In The Treaty Or International Or Executive Agreement. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[b]). Gfi – Government Financial Institution. Gocc – Government-owned And/or –controlled Corporation. Goods – Refer To All Items, Supplies, Materials And General Support Services, Except Consulting Services And Infrastructure Projects, Which May Be Needed In The Transaction Of Public Businesses Or In The Pursuit Of Any Government Undertaking, Project Or Activity, Whether In The Nature Of Equipment, Furniture, Stationery, Materials For Construction, Or Personal Property Of Any Kind, Including Non-personal Or Contractual Services Such As The Repair And Maintenance Of Equipment And Furniture, As Well As Trucking, Hauling, Janitorial, Security, And Related Or Analogous Services, As Well As Procurement Of Materials And Supplies Provided By The Procuring Entity For Such Services. The Term “related” Or “analogous Services” Shall Include, But Is Not Limited To, Lease Or Purchase Of Office Space, Media Advertisements, Health Maintenance Services, And Other Services Essential To The Operation Of The Procuring Entity. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[r]) Gop – Government Of The Philippines. Infrastructure Projects – Include The Construction, Improvement, Rehabilitation, Demolition, Repair, Restoration Or Maintenance Of Roads And Bridges, Railways, Airports, Seaports, Communication Facilities, Civil Works Components Of Information Technology Projects, Irrigation, Flood Control And Drainage, Water Supply, Sanitation, Sewerage And Solid Waste Management Systems, Shore Protection, Energy/power And Electrification Facilities, National Buildings, School Buildings, Hospital Buildings, And Other Related Construction Projects Of The Government. Also Referred To As Civil Works Or Works. (2016 Revised Irr, Section 5[u]) Lgus – Local Government Units. Nfcc – Net Financial Contracting Capacity. Nga – National Government Agency. Pcab – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board. Philgeps - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System. Procurement Project – Refers To A Specific Or Identified Procurement Covering Goods, Infrastructure Project Or Consulting Services. A Procurement Project Shall Be Described, Detailed, And Scheduled In The Project Procurement Management Plan Prepared By The Agency Which Shall Be Consolidated In The Procuring Entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (gppb Circular No. 06-2019 Dated 17 July 2019) Psa – Philippine Statistics Authority. Sec – Securities And Exchange Commission. Slcc – Single Largest Completed Contract. Un – United Nations. Republic Of The Philippines Iloilo Provincial Government Section I. Invitation To Bid For Road Opening Project - Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo Bid No. Agr-24-961-b The Iloilo Provincial Government, Through The 20% Nta Development Fund Fy-2024 – Road Networks – Farm To Market Road Intends To Apply The Sum Of Two Million Four Hundred Fifty Thousand Pesos (p2,450,000.00) Being The Approved Budget For The Contract (abc) To Payments Under The Contract For Agr-24-961-b For The Road Opening Project-farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo For The Bids Received In Excess Of The Abc Shall Be Automatically Rejected At Bid Opening. The Iloilo Provincial Government Now Invites Bids For The Above Procurement Project. Completion Of The Works Is Required Sixty (60) Calendar Days. Bidders Should Have Completed A Contract Similar To The Project. The Description Of An Eligible Bidder Is Contained In The Bidding Documents, Particularly, In Section Ii (instructions To Bidders). Bidding Will Be Conducted Through Open Competitive Bidding Procedures Using Non-discretionary “pass/fail” Criterion As Specified In The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Republic Act (ra) No. 9184. Interested Bidders May Obtain Further Information From The Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines And Inspect The Bidding Documents At The Address Given Below From 8:00am To 5:00pm. A Complete Set Of Bidding Documents May Be Acquired By Interested Bidders On July 29, 2024 From Given Address And Website/s Below And Upon Payment Of The Applicable Fee For The Bidding Documents, Pursuant To The Latest Guidelines Issued By The Gppb, In The Amount Of Five Thousand Pesos (p5,000.00). The Procuring Entity Shall Allow The Bidder To Present Its Proof Of Payment For The Fees In Person. The Iloilo Provincial Government Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference On August 6, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines, And/or Through Videoconferencing/webcasting Via Zoom Conference Which Shall Be Open To Prospective Bidders. The Default Meeting Id And Password Shall Be: Meeting Id: 4340851724 // Password: 0922 Bids Must Be Duly Received By The Bac Secretariat Through Manual Submission At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City On Or Before August 20, 2024, 9:00 A.m. Late Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. All Bids Must Be Accompanied By A Bid Security In Any Of The Acceptable Forms And In The Amount Stated In Itb Clause 16. Bid Opening Shall Be On August 20, 2024, 9:00 A.m. At Bids And Awards Committee Secretariat, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City, Philippines. Bids Will Be Opened In The Presence Of The Bidders’ Representatives Who Choose To Attend The Activity. The Iloilo Provincial Government Reserves The Right To Reject Any And All Bids, Declare A Failure Of Bidding, Or Not Award The Contract At Any Time Prior To Contract Award In Accordance With Sections 35.6 And 41 Of The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules And Regulations (irr) Of Ra No. 9184, Without Thereby Incurring Any Liability To The Affected Bidder Or Bidders. For Further Information, Please Refer To: Atty. Raemman M. Lagrada Head, Bac Secretariat 5f New Iloilo Provincial Capitol Bonifacio Drive, Iloilo City Tel. No. (33) 336-0736 Fax No. (33) 337-7731 Email: Ipg_bacs@yahoo.com You May Visit The Following Websites: For Downloading Of Bidding Documents: Www.iloilo.gov.ph July 15, 2024 Atty. Dennis T. Ventilacion Bac Chairperson Section Ii. Instructions To Bidders Scope Of Bid The Procuring Entity, Iloilo Provincial Government Invites Bids For The Road Opening Project – Farm To Market Road At Brgy. Ilong Bukid, Badiangan, Iloilo With Project Identification Number Agr-24-961-b. The Procurement Project (referred To Herein As “project”) Is For The Construction Of Works, As Described In Section Vi (specifications). Funding Information The Gop Through The Source Of Funding As Indicated Below For 2024 In The Amount Of Two Million Four Hundred Fifty Thousand Pesos (p2,450,000.00) The Source Of Funding Is: A. 20% Nta Development Fund Fy 2024 – Road Networks – Farm To Market Road Bidding Requirements The Bidding For The Project Shall Be Governed By All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including Its Generic Procurement Manual And Associated Policies, Rules And Regulations As The Primary Source Thereof, While The Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source Thereof. Any Amendments Made To The Irr And Other Gppb Issuances Shall Be Applicable Only To The Ongoing Posting, Advertisement, Or Invitation To Bid By The Bac Through The Issuance Of A Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin. The Bidder, By The Act Of Submitting Its Bid, Shall Be Deemed To Have Inspected The Site, Determined The General Characteristics Of The Contracted Works And The Conditions For This Project, Such As The Location And The Nature Of The Work; (b) Climatic Conditions; (c) Transportation Facilities; (c) Nature And Condition Of The Terrain, Geological Conditions At The Site Communication Facilities, Requirements, Location And Availability Of Construction Aggregates And Other Materials, Labor, Water, Electric Power And Access Roads; And (d) Other Factors That May Affect The Cost, Duration And Execution Or Implementation Of The Contract, Project, Or Work And Examine All Instructions, Forms, Terms, And Project Requirements In The Bidding Documents. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices The Procuring Entity, As Well As The Bidders And Contractors, Shall Observe The Highest Standard Of Ethics During The Procurement And Execution Of The Contract. They Or Through An Agent Shall Not Engage In Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices Defined Under Annex “i” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Or Other Integrity Violations In Competing For The Project. Eligible Bidders Only Bids Of Bidders Found To Be Legally, Technically, And Financially Capable Will Be Evaluated. The Bidder Must Have An Experience Of Having Completed A Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) That Is Similar To This Project, Equivalent To At Least Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Abc Adjusted, If Necessary, By The Bidder To Current Prices Using The Psa’s Cpi, Except Under Conditions Provided For In Section 23.4.2.4 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. A Contract Is Considered To Be “similar” To The Contract To Be Bid If It Has The Major Categories Of Work Stated In The Bds. For Foreign-funded Procurement, The Procuring Entity And The Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution May Agree On Another Track Record Requirement, As Specified In The Bidding Document Prepared For This Purpose. The Bidders Shall Comply With The Eligibility Criteria Under Section 23.4.2 Of The 2016 Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Origin Of Associated Goods There Is No Restriction On The Origin Of Goods Other Than Those Prohibited By A Decision Of The Un Security Council Taken Under Chapter Vii Of The Charter Of The Un. Subcontracts The Bidder May Subcontract Portions Of The Project To The Extent Allowed By The Procuring Entity As Stated Herein, But In No Case More Than Fifty Percent (50%) Of The Project. The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That: Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. Pre-bid Conference The Procuring Entity Will Hold A Pre-bid Conference For This Project On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address At Bac Office, 5th Floor, New Iloilo Provincial Capitol, Iloilo City And/or Through Videoconferencing As Indicated In Paragraph 6 Of The Ib. Clarification And Amendment Of Bidding Documents Prospective Bidders May Request For Clarification On And/or Interpretation Of Any Part Of The Bidding Documents. Such Requests Must Be In Writing And Received By The Procuring Entity, Either At Its Given Address Or Through Electronic Mail Indicated In The Ib, At Least Ten (10) Calendar Days Before The Deadline Set For The Submission And Receipt Of Bids. Documents Comprising The Bid: Eligibility And Technical Components The First Envelope Shall Contain The Eligibility And Technical Documents Of The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. If The Eligibility Requirements Or Statements, The Bids, And All Other Documents For Submission To The Bac Are In Foreign Language Other Than English, It Must Be Accompanied By A Translation In English, Which Shall Be Authenticated By The Appropriate Philippine Foreign Service Establishment, Post, Or The Equivalent Office Having Jurisdiction Over The Foreign Bidder’s Affairs In The Philippines. For Contracting Parties To The Apostille Convention, Only The Translated Documents Shall Be Authenticated Through An Apostille Pursuant To Gppb Resolution No. 13-2019 Dated 23 May 2019. The English Translation Shall Govern, For Purposes Of Interpretation Of The Bid. In Joint Ventures, A Special Pcab License, And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract For This Project, Shall Be Required. Any Additional Type Of Contractor License Or Permit Shall Be Indicated In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen) Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data Shall Be Provided. These Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set In The Bds. A List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership, Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be, Must Meet The Minimum Requirements For The Contract Set In The Bds. Documents Comprising The Bid: Financial Component The Second Bid Envelope Shall Contain The Financial Documents For The Bid As Specified In Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents. Any Bid Exceeding The Abc Indicated In Paragraph 1 Of The Ib Shall Not Be Accepted. For Foreign-funded Procurement, A Ceiling May Be Applied To Bid Prices Provided The Conditions Are Met Under Section 31.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Alternative Bids Bidders Shall Submit Offers That Comply With The Requirements Of The Bidding Documents, Including The Basic Technical Design As Indicated In The Drawings And Specifications. Unless There Is A Value Engineering Clause In The Bds, Alternative Bids Shall Not Be Accepted. Bid Prices All Bid Prices For The Given Scope Of Work In The Project As Awarded Shall Be Considered As Fixed Prices, And Therefore Not Subject To Price Escalation During Contract Implementation, Except Under Extraordinary Circumstances As Determined By The Neda And Approved By The Gppb Pursuant To The Revised Guidelines For Contract Price Escalation Guidelines. Bid And Payment Currencies Bid Prices May Be Quoted In The Local Currency Or Tradeable Currency Accepted By The Bsp At The Discretion Of The Bidder. However, For Purposes Of Bid Evaluation, Bids Denominated In Foreign Currencies Shall Be Converted To Philippine Currency Based On The Exchange Rate As Published In The Bsp Reference Rate Bulletin On The Day Of The Bid Opening. Payment Of The Contract Price Shall Be Made In: Philippine Pesos. Bid Security The Bidder Shall Submit A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Form Of Bid Security In The Amount Indicated In The Bds, Which Shall Be Not Less Than The Percentage Of The Abc In Accordance With The Schedule In The Bds. The Bid And Bid Security Shall Be Valid Until December 18, 2024. Any Bid Not Accompanied By An Acceptable Bid Security Shall Be Rejected By The Procuring Entity As Non-responsive. Sealing And Marking Of Bids Each Bidder Shall Submit One Copy Of The First And Second Components Of Its Bid. The Procuring Entity May Request Additional Hard Copies And/or Electronic Copies Of The Bid. However, Failure Of The Bidders To Comply With The Said Request Shall Not Be A Ground For Disqualification. If The Procuring Entity Allows The Submission Of Bids Through Online Submission To The Given Website Or Any Other Electronic Means, The Bidder Shall Submit An Electronic Copy Of Its Bid, Which Must Be Digitally Signed. An Electronic Copy That Cannot Be Opened Or Is Corrupted Shall Be Considered Non-responsive And, Thus, Automatically Disqualified. Deadline For Submission Of Bids The Bidders Shall Submit On The Specified Date And Time And Either At Its Physical Address Or Through Online Submission As Indicated In Paragraph 7 Of The Ib. Opening And Preliminary Examination Of Bids The Bac Shall Open The Bids In Public At The Time, On The Date, And At The Place Specified In Paragraph 9 Of The Ib. The Bidders’ Representatives Who Are Present Shall Sign A Register Evidencing Their Attendance. In Case Videoconferencing, Webcasting Or Other Similar Technologies Will Be Used, Attendance Of Participants Shall Likewise Be Recorded By The Bac Secretariat. In Case The Bids Cannot Be Opened As Scheduled Due To Justifiable Reasons, The Rescheduling Requirements Under Section 29 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Prevail. The Preliminary Examination Of Bids Shall Be Governed By Section 30 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Detailed Evaluation And Comparison Of Bids The Procuring Entity’s Bac Shall Immediately Conduct A Detailed Evaluation Of All Bids Rated “passed” Using Non-discretionary Pass/fail Criteria. The Bac Shall Consider The Conditions In The Evaluation Of Bids Under Section 32.2 Of 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. If The Project Allows Partial Bids, All Bids And Combinations Of Bids As Indicated In The Bds Shall Be Received By The Same Deadline And Opened And Evaluated Simultaneously So As To Determine The Bid Or Combination Of Bids Offering The Lowest Calculated Cost To The Procuring Entity. Bid Security As Required By Itb Clause 16 Shall Be Submitted For Each Contract (lot) Separately. In All Cases, The Nfcc Computation Pursuant To Section 23.4.2.6 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Must Be Sufficient For The Total Of The Abcs For All The Lots Participated In By The Prospective Bidder. Post Qualification Within A Non-extendible Period Of Five (5) Calendar Days From Receipt By The Bidder Of The Notice From The Bac That It Submitted The Lowest Calculated Bid, The Bidder Shall Submit Its Latest Income And Business Tax Returns Filed And Paid Through The Bir Electronic Filing And Payment System (efps), And Other Appropriate Licenses And Permits Required By Law And Stated In The Bds. Signing Of The Contract The Documents Required In Section 37.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Shall Form Part Of The Contract. Additional Contract Documents Are Indicated In The Bds. Section Iii. Bid Data Sheet Itb Clause 5.2 For This Purpose, Contracts Similar To The Project Refer To Contracts Which Have The Same Major Categories Of Work, Which Shall Be: Road Works/land Improvement 7.1 The Procuring Entity Has Prescribed That Subcontracting Is Not Allowed. 10.3 [specify If Another Contractor License Or Permit Is Required.] 10.4 The Key Personnel Must Meet The Required Minimum Years Of Experience Set Below: Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience 1-project Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-material Engineer 1 Year 1 Year 1-foreman 1 Year 1 Year 10.5 The Minimum Major Equipment Requirements Are The Following: Equipment Capacity Number Of Units Heavy Equipment Prime Mover - 2 Backhoe - 1 Dump Truck - 1 Motorized Road Grader - 1 Vibratory Roller - 1 Water Truck - 1 Bar Cutter & Bar Bender - 1 Concrete Vibrator - 1 One-bagger Mixer - 1 12 Alternative Bids Are Not Allowed 15.1 The Bid Security Shall Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration Or Any Of The Following Forms And Amounts: The Amount Of Not Less Than Two Percent (2%) Of Abc, If Bid Security Is In Cash, Cashier’s/manager’s Check, Bank Draft/guarantee Or Irrevocable Letter Of Credit; The Amount Of Not Less Than Five Percent (5%) Of Abc If Bid Security Is In Surety Bond. 19.2 Partial Bid Is Not Allowed 20 No Further Instructions. 21 The Additional Contract Documents Relevant To The Project That Are Required By The Procuring Entity Are: A. Construction Schedule And S-curve; B. Manpower Schedule; C. Construction Methods; D. Equipment Utilization Schedule; E. Construction Safety And Health Program Approved By The Department Of Labor And Employment; And F. Pert/cpm Section Iv. General Conditions Of Contract Scope Of Contract This Contract Shall Include All Such Items, Although Not Specifically Mentioned, That Can Be Reasonably Inferred As Being Required For Its Completion As If Such Items Were Expressly Mentioned Herein. All The Provisions Of Ra No. 9184 And Its 2016 Revised Irr, Including The Generic Procurement Manual, And Associated Issuances, Constitute The Primary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract, And Thus, Applicable In Contract Implementation. Herein Clauses Shall Serve As The Secondary Source For The Terms And Conditions Of The Contract. This Is Without Prejudice To Sections 74.1 And 74.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184 Allowing The Gppb To Amend The Irr, Which Shall Be Applied To All Procurement Activities, The Advertisement, Posting, Or Invitation Of Which Were Issued After The Effectivity Of The Said Amendment. Sectional Completion Of Works If Sectional Completion Is Specified In The Special Conditions Of Contract (scc), References In The Conditions Of Contract To The Works, The Completion Date, And The Intended Completion Date Shall Apply To Any Section Of The Works (other Than References To The Completion Date And Intended Completion Date For The Whole Of The Works). Possession Of Site The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Or Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Based On The Schedule Of Delivery Indicated In The Scc, Which Corresponds To The Execution Of The Works. If The Contractor Suffers Delay Or Incurs Cost From Failure On The Part Of The Procuring Entity To Give Possession In Accordance With The Terms Of This Clause, The Procuring Entity’s Representative Shall Give The Contractor A Contract Time Extension And Certify Such Sum As Fair To Cover The Cost Incurred, Which Sum Shall Be Paid By Procuring Entity. If Possession Of A Portion Is Not Given By The Above Date, The Procuring Entity Will Be Deemed To Have Delayed The Start Of The Relevant Activities. The Resulting Adjustments In Contract Time To Address Such Delay May Be Addressed Through Contract Extension Provided Under Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. The Contractor’s Obligations The Contractor Shall Employ The Key Personnel Named In The Schedule Of Key Personnel Indicating Their Designation, In Accordance With Itb Clause 10.3 And Specified In The Bds, To Carry Out The Supervision Of The Works. The Procuring Entity Will Approve Any Proposed Replacement Of Key Personnel Only If Their Relevant Qualifications And Abilities Are Equal To Or Better Than Those Of The Personnel Listed In The Schedule. Performance Security Within Ten (10) Calendar Days From Receipt Of The Notice Of Award From The Procuring Entity But In No Case Later Than The Signing Of The Contract By Both Parties, The Successful Bidder Shall Furnish The Performance Security In Any Of The Forms Prescribed In Section 39 Of The 2016 Revised Irr. The Contractor, By Entering Into The Contract With The Procuring Entity, Acknowledges The Right Of The Procuring Entity To Institute Action Pursuant To Ra No. 3688 Against Any Subcontractor Be They An Individual, Firm, Partnership, Corporation, Or Association Supplying The Contractor With Labor, Materials And/or Equipment For The Performance Of This Contract. Site Investigation Reports The Contractor, In Preparing The Bid, Shall Rely On Any Site Investigation Reports Referred To In The Scc Supplemented By Any Information Obtained By The Contractor. Warranty In Case The Contractor Fails To Undertake The Repair Works Under Section 62.2.2 Of The 2016 Revised Irr, The Procuring Entity Shall Forfeit Its Performance Security, Subject Its Property(ies) To Attachment Or Garnishment Proceedings, And Perpetually Disqualify It From Participating In Any Public Bidding. All Payables Of The Gop In His Favor Shall Be Offset To Recover The Costs. The Warranty Against Structural Defects/failures, Except That Occasioned-on Force Majeure, Shall Cover The Period From The Date Of Issuance Of The Certificate Of Final Acceptance By The Procuring Entity. Specific Duration Of The Warranty Is Found In The Scc. Liability Of The Contractor Subject To Additional Provisions, If Any, Set Forth In The Scc, The Contractor’s Liability Under This Contract Shall Be As Provided By The Laws Of The Republic Of The Philippines. If The Contractor Is A Joint Venture, All Partners To The Joint Venture Shall Be Jointly And Severally Liable To The Procuring Entity. Termination For Other Causes Contract Termination Shall Be Initiated In Case It Is Determined Prima Facie By The Procuring Entity That The Contractor Has Engaged, Before, Or During The Implementation Of The Contract, In Unlawful Deeds And Behaviors Relative To Contract Acquisition And Implementation, Such As, But Not Limited To Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, And Obstructive Practices As Stated In Itb Clause 4. Dayworks Subject To The Guidelines On Variation Order In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184, And If Applicable As Indicated In The Scc, The Dayworks Rates In The Contractor’s Bid Shall Be Used For Small Additional Amounts Of Work Only When The Procuring Entity’s Representative Has Given Written Instructions In Advance For Additional Work To Be Paid For In That Way. Program Of Work The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval The Said Program Of Work Showing The General Methods, Arrangements, Order, And Timing For All The Activities In The Works. The Submissions Of The Program Of Work Are Indicated In The Scc. The Contractor Shall Submit To The Procuring Entity’s Representative For Approval An Updated Program Of Work At Intervals No Longer Than The Period Stated In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Submit An Updated Program Of Work Within This Period, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From The Next Payment Certificate And Continue To Withhold This Amount Until The Next Payment After The Date On Which The Overdue Program Of Work Has Been Submitted. Instructions, Inspections And Audits The Contractor Shall Permit The Gop Or The Procuring Entity To Inspect The Contractor’s Accounts And Records Relating To The Performance Of The Contractor And To Have Them Audited By Auditors Of The Gop Or The Procuring Entity, As May Be Required. Advance Payment The Procuring Entity Shall, Upon A Written Request Of The Contractor Which Shall Be Submitted As A Contract Document, Make An Advance Payment To The Contractor In An Amount Not Exceeding Fifteen Percent (15%) Of The Total Contract Price, To Be Made In Lump Sum, Or At The Most Two Installments According To A Schedule Specified In The Scc, Subject To The Requirements In Annex “e” Of The 2016 Revised Irr Of Ra No. 9184. Progress Payments The Contractor May Submit A Request For Payment For Work Accomplished. Such Requests For Payment Shall Be Verified And Certified By The Procuring Entity’s Representative/project Engineer. Except As Otherwise Stipulated In The Scc, Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Put In Place Shall Not Be Included For Payment. Operating And Maintenance Manuals If Required, The Contractor Will Provide “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals As Specified In The Scc. If The Contractor Does Not Provide The Drawings And/or Manuals By The Dates Stated Above, Or They Do Not Receive The Procuring Entity’s Representative’s Approval, The Procuring Entity’s Representative May Withhold The Amount Stated In The Scc From Payments Due To The Contractor. Section V. Special Conditions Of Contract Gcc Clause 2 As Per Construction Schedule/contract Period 3.1 The Procuring Entity Shall Give Possession Of All Parts Of The Site To The Contractor Upon Effectivity Of The Contracts. 6 No Further Instructions 7.2 [in Case Of Other Structures, Such As Bailey And Wooden Bridges, Shallow Wells, Spring Developments, And Other Similar Structures:] Two (2) Years. 10 Dayworks Are Applicable At The Rate Shown In The Contractor’s Original Bid. 11.1 No Further Instructions 11.2 No Further Instructions 13 The Amount Of The Advance Shall Not Exceed 15% Of The Total Contract Price. 14 Materials And Equipment Delivered On The Site But Not Completely Installed Or Constructed Shall Not Be Included For Payment. 15.1 The Date By Which Operating And Maintenance Manuals Are Required Shall Be At Least 5 Days Before The Testing And Commissioning. The Date By Which “as Built” Drawings Are Required Prior To The Final Billing. 15.2 The Amount To Be Withheld For Failing To Produce “as Built” Drawings And/or Operating And Maintenance Manuals By The Date Required Is 1% Of The Final Contract Amount. Section Vi. Specification Scope Of Works The Works Include Furnishing Of Labor, Materials, Tools, Equipment And Other Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Project Such As: Miscellaneous Survey And Staking, Project Billboard/signboard, Mobilization/demobilization, Clearing And Grubbing, Structure Excavation, Embankment From Roadway Excavation, Embankment From Borrow, Subgrade Preparation, Aggregate Subbase Course, Reinforcing Steel, Structural Concrete (24 Mpa), And Concrete Slope Protection. Part B – Other General Requirements B.4 - Construction Survey And Staking B.4.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing The Necessary Equipment And Material To Survey, Stake, Calculate, And Record Data For The Control Of Work In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. B.4.2 Construction Requirements B.4.2.1 General Staking Activities Shall Be Included In The Construction Schedule To Be Submitted By The Contractor. Dates And Sequence Of Each Staking Activity Shall Be Included. The Engineer Shall Set Initial Reference Lines, Horizontal And Vertical Control Points, And Shall Furnish The Data For Use In Establishing Control For The Completion Of Each Element Of The Work. Data Relating To Horizontal And Vertical Alignments, Theoretical Slope Stake Catch Points, And Other Design Data Shall Be Furnished. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The True Settling Of The Works Or Improvements And For Correctness Of Positions, Levels, Dimensions And Alignment Of All Parts Of The Works. He Shall Provide All Necessary Instruments, Appliances, Materials And Supplies, And Labor In Connection Therewith. The Contractor Shall Provide A Survey Crew Supervisor At The Project Site Whenever Surveying/staking Activity Is In Progress. Prior To Construction, The Engineer Shall Be Notified Of Any Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Engineer Shall Reestablish Missing Initial Reference Lines, Controls, Points, Or Stakes. The Contractor For Convenient Use Of Government-furnished Data Shall Perform Additional Calculations. Immediate Notification Of Apparent Errors In The Initial Staking Or In The Furnished Data Shall Be Provided. All Initial Reference And Control Points Shall Be Preserved. At The Start Of Construction, All Destroyed Or Disturbed Initial Reference Or Control Points Necessary To The Work Shall Be Replaced. Before Surveying And Staking, The Contractor Shall Discuss And Coordinate The Following With The Engineer: 1. Surveying And Staking Methods 2. Stake Marking/concrete Monuments 3. Grade Control For Courses Of Material 4. Referencing 5. Structure Control 6. Any Other Procedures And Controls Necessary For The Work Established Controls Shall Be Within The Tolerances Shown In Table 1. Table 1: Construction Survey And Staking Tolerances (1) Staking Phase Horizontal Vertical Existing Government Network Control Points ±20mm ±8mm X √k ² Local Supplemental Control Points Set From Existing Government Network Points ±10mm ±3mm X √n³ Centerline Points (4) - (pc), (pt), (pot), And (pac) Including References ±10mm ±10mm Other Centerline Points ±50mm ±50mm Cross-section Points And Slope Stakes (5) ±50mm ±50mm Slope Stakes References ±50mm ±50mm Culverts, Ditches, And Minor Drainage Structures ±50mm ±20mm Retaining Walls And Curb And Gutter ±20mm ±10mm Bridge Substructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Bridge Superstructures ±10mm (6) ±10mm Clearing And Grubbing Limits ±500mm Roadway Subgrade Finish Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm Roadway Finish Grade Stakes (7) ±50mm ±10mm (1) At 95% Confidence Level. Tolerances Are Relative To Existing Government Network Control Points. (2) K Is The Distance In Kilometers. (3) N Is The Number Of Instrument Setups. (4) Centerline Points: Pc - Point Of Curve, Pt - Point Of Tangent, Pot - Point On Tangent, Poc - Point On Curve (5) Take The Cross-sections Normal To The Centerline + 1 Degree. (6) Bridge Control Is Established As Local Network And The Tolerances Are Relative To That Network. (7) Include Pave Ditches. The Contractor Shall Prepare Field Notes In An Approved Format. All Field Notes And Supporting Documentation Shall Become The Property Of The Government Upon Completion Of The Work. Work Shall Only Be Started After Staking For The Affected Work Is Accepted. The Construction Survey And Staking Work May Be Spot-checked By The Engineer For Accuracy, And Unacceptable Portions Of Work May Be Rejected. Rejected Work Shall Be Resurveyed, And Work That Is Not Within The Tolerances Specified In Table 1 Shall Be Corrected. Acceptance Of The Construction Staking Shall Not Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For Correcting Errors Discovered During The Work And For Bearing All Additional Costs Associated With The Error, Unless Such Error Is Based On Incorrect Data Supplied In Writing By The Engineer, In Which Case, The Expense In Rectifying The Same Shall Be At The Expense Of The Government. In The Case Of "change" Or "changed Conditions" Which Involve Any Change In Stakeout, The Contractor Shall Coordinate With The Engineer And Facilitate The Prompt Reestablishment Of The Field Control For The Altered Or Adjusted Work. All Flagging, Lath, Stakes, And Other Staking Materials Shall Be Removed And Disposed After The Project Is Completed. B.4.2.2 Equipment Survey Instruments And Supporting Equipment Capable Of Achieving The Specified Tolerances Shall Be Furnished. Acceptable Tools, Supplies, And Stakes Of The Type And Quality Normally Used In Highway Survey Work And Suitable For The Intended Use Shall Be Furnished. Stakes And Hubs Of Sufficient Length To Provide A Solid Set In The Ground With Sufficient Surface Area Above Ground For Necessary Legible Markings Shall Also Be Furnished. B.4.2.3 Survey And Staking Requirements All Survey, Staking, Recording Of Data, And Calculations Necessary To Construct The Project From The Initial Layout To Final Completion Shall Be Performed. Stakes Shall Be Reset As Many Times As Necessary To Construct The Work. 1. Control Points Established Initial Horizontal And Vertical Control Points In Conflict With Construction Shall Be Relocated To Areas That Will Not Be Disturbed By Construction Operations. The Coordinates And Elevations For The Relocated Points Shall Be Furnished Before The Initial Points Are Disturbed. 2. Roadway Cross-sections Roadway Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Normal Or Perpendicular To The Centerline. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 10 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At A Maximum Centerline Spacing Of 20 Meters. Additional Cross-sections Shall Be Taken At Significant Breaks In Topography And At Changes In The Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections. Along Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded At Breaks In Topography And At Changes In Typical Roadway Section Including Transition Change To Super Elevated Sections And Shall Be No Further Apart Than 5 Meters. Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded To At Least The Anticipated Slope Stake And Reference Locations. All Cross-section Distances Shall Be Reduced To Horizontal Distances From Centerline. 3. Slope Stakes And References Slope Stakes And References Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At The Cross-section Locations. Slope Stakes Shall Be Established In The Field As The Actual Point Of Intersection Of The Design Roadway Slope With The Natural Ground Line. Slope Stake References Shall Be Set Outside The Clearing Limits. All Reference Point And Slope Stake Information Shall Be Included On The Reference Stakes. When Initial References Are Provided, Slope Stakes May Be Set From These Points With Verification Of The Slope Stake Location With Field Measurements. Slope Stakes On Any Section That Do Not Match With The Staking Report Within The Tolerances Established In Table 1 Shall Be Recatched. Roadway Cross-section Data Shall Be Taken Between Centerline And The New Slope Stake Location. Additional References Shall Be Set Even When The Initial References Are Provided. 4. Clearing And Grubbing Limits Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shall Be Set On Both Sides Of Centerline At Roadway Cross-section Locations, Extending One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. 5. Centerline Reestablishment Centerline Shall Be Reestablished From Instrument Control Points. The Maximum Spacing Between Centerline Points Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Distance Between Centerline Points Shall Be 20 Meters. 6. Grade Finishing Stakes Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Set For Grade Elevations And Horizontal Alignment, At The Centerline And At Each Shoulder Of Roadway Cross-section Locations. Stakes Shall Be Set At The Top Of Subgrade And The Top Of Each Aggregate Course. Where Turnouts Are Constructed, Stakes Shall Be Set At The Centerline, At Each Normal Shoulder, And At The Shoulder Of The Turnout. In Parking Areas, Hubs Shall Be Set At The Center And Along The Edges Of The Parking Area. Stakes Shall Be Set At All Ditches To Be Paved. The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 10 Meters When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Less Than Or Equal To 100 Meters. When The Centerline Horizontal Curve Radius Is Greater Than 150 Meters And Vertical Parabolic Curve Radius Is Greater Than 100 Meters, The Maximum Longitudinal Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 20 Meters. The Maximum Transverse Spacing Between Stakes Shall Be 5 Meters. Brushes Or Guard Stakes Shall Be Used At Each Stake. 7. Culverts Culverts Shall Be Staked To Fit Field Conditions. The Location Of Culverts May Differ From The Plans. The Following Shall Be Performed: A. Survey And Record The Ground Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Including Inlet And Outlet Channel Profile Of At Least 10 Meters And As Additionally Directed By The Engineer So As To Gather All Necessary Data For The Preparation Of Pipe Projection Plan. B. Determine The Slope Catch Points At The Inlet And Outlet. C. Set The Reference Points And Record Information Necessary To Determine Culvert Length And End Treatments. D. Plot Into Scale The Profile Along The Culvert Centerline Reflecting The Natural Ground Elevation, Invert Elevation, The Flow Line, The Roadway Section, And The Size, Length And The Degree Of Elbow Of Culvert, End Treatments, Grade And Other Appurtenances. E. Plot Into Scale The Cross-section Of Inlet And Outlet Channel At Not More Than 5 Meters Interval. F. Submit The Plotted Pipe Projection Plan For Approval Of Final Culvert Length, Alignment And Headwall. G. When The Pipe Projection Plan Has Been Approved, Set Drainage Culvert Structure Survey And Reference Stakes, And Stake Inlet And Outlet To Make The Structure Functional. 8. Retaining Walls And Other Types Of Slope Protection Works Profile Measurements Along The Face Of The Proposed Wall And 2 Meters In Front Of The Wall Face Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. Cross-sections Shall Be Taken Within The Limits Designated By The Engineer At Every 5 Meters Along The Length Of The Wall And All Major Breaks In Terrain. For Each Cross-section, Points Shall Be Measured And Recorded Every 5 Meters And At All Major Breaks In Terrain. Adequate References And Horizontal And Vertical Control Points Shall Be Set. 9. Borrow And Waste Sites The Work Essential For Initial Layout And Measurement Of The Borrow Or Waste Site Shall Be Performed. A Referenced Baseline, Site Limits, And Clearing Limits Shall Be Established. Initial And Final Cross-sections Shall Be Surveyed And Recorded. 10. Permanent Monuments And Markers All Survey And Staking Necessary To Establish Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Performed. 11. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking All Surveying, Staking, And Recording Of Data Essential For Establishing The Layout And Control Of The Following Shall Be Performed, As Applicable: A. Approach Roads And Trails B. Road Right Of Way And Construction Limit In Accordance With The Approved Parcellary Plan. C. Curb And Gutter D. Guardrail E. Parking Areas F. Paved Waterways And Outfall Structures G. Lined Canals And Other Ditches H. Chutes And Spillways I. Turf Establishment-s J. Utilities K. Signs, Delineators, And Object 9 Markers I. Pavement Markings B.4.3 Method Of Measurement Construction Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Slope, Reference, And Clearing And Grubbing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Establishment Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Centerline Reestablishment Shall Be Measured Only One Time. Culvert Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Each. Grade Finishing Stakes Shall Be Measured By The Kilometer. Subgrade Shall Be Measured One Time And Each Aggregate Course Shall Also Be Measured One Time. Permanent Monuments And Markers Shall Be Measured By Each Unit Placed And Installed At The Proper Locations. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Shall Be Measured By The Hour Of Survey Work Ordered Or By The Lump Sum. For Miscellaneous Survey And Staking Paid By The Hour, The Minimum Survey Crew Size Shall Be 2 Persons. Time Spent In Making Preparations, Travelling To And From The Project Site, Performing Calculations, Plotting Cross Sections And Other Data, Processing Computer Data, And Other Efforts Necessary To Successfully Accomplish Construction Survey And Staking Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Deemed Included As Subsidiary For Each Of The Pay Item. Project Sign Board / Billboard The Contractor Shall Ensure That The Project Site Is Identified With Information Billboard Which Shall Be Erected At The Beginning And Ending Of The Proposed Project. The Layout Of The Billboard Shall Accord To The Specifications Pursuant To The Commission On Audit (coa) Circular No. 2013-004 Issued On January 30, 2013. Coa Billboard Pao Billboard The Billboard’s Specifications Shall Conform To The Following Requirements: Tarpaulin, White, 8ft X 8ft (coa) And 4ft X 8ft (pao): Resolution: 70 Dpi; Font: Helvetica; Font Size: Main Information – 3”; Sub-information – 1”; Font Color: Black; Suitable Frame: Rigid Wood Or Steel Frame With Post; And, Posting: Outside Display At The Project Location After Award Has Been Made. Measurement The Supply And Erection Of Project Billboard Shall Be In Accordance With Provisions Of This Specification And Shall Be Measured For Payment. Basis Of Payment Payment Shall Be In Accordance With All The Cost Associated With The Compliance Of This Specification And Shall Be Included In The Contractor’s Bid Price. No Additional Or Separate Payment Will Be Made In This Regard As Well As For The Maintenance Of The Billboard. Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement B.5 Project Billboard Each Part C – Earthwork Item 100 – Clearing And Grubbing 100.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Clearing, Grubbing, Removing And Disposing All Vegetation And Debris As Designated In The Contract, Except Those Objects That Are Designated To Remain In Place Or Are To Be Removed In Consonance With Other Provisions Of This Specification. The Work Shall Also Include The Preservation From Injury Or Defacement Of All Objects Designated To Remain. 100.2 Construction Requirements 100.2.1 General The Engineer Will Establish The Limits Of Work And Designate All Trees, Shrubs, Plants And Other Things To Remain. The Contractor Shall Preserve All Objects Designated To Remain. Paint Required For Cut Or Scarred Surface Of Trees Or Shrubs Selected For Retention Shall Be An Approved Asphaltum Base Paint Prepared Especially For Tree Surgery. Clearing Shall Extend One (1) Meter Beyond The Toe Of The Fill Slopes Or Beyond Rounding Of Cut Slopes As The Case Maybe For The Entire Length Of The Project Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer And Provided It Is Within The Right Of Way Limits Of The Project, With The Exception Of Trees Under The Jurisdiction Of The Forest Management Bureau (fmb). 100.2.2 Clearing And Grubbing All Surface Objects And All Trees, Stumps, Roots And Other Protruding Obstructions, Not Designated To Remain, Shall Be Cleared And/or Grubbed, Including Mowing As Required, Except As Provided Below: (1) Removal Of Undisturbed Stumps And Roots And Nonperishable Solid Objects With A Minimum Depth Of One (1) Meter Below Subgrade Or Slope Of Embankment Will Not Be Required. (2) In Areas Outside Of The Grading Limits Of Cut And Embankment Areas, Stumps And Nonperishable Solid Objects Shall Be Cut Off Not More Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) Above The Ground Line Or Low Water Level. (3) In Areas To Be Rounded At The Top Of Cut Slopes, Stumps Shall Be Cut Off Flush With Or Below The Surface Of The Final Slope Line. (4) Grubbing Of Pits, Channel Changes And Ditches Will Be Required Only To The Depth Necessitated By The Proposed Excavation Within Such Areas. (5) In Areas Covered By Cogon/talahib, Wild Grass And Other Vegetations, Top Soil Shall Be Cut To A Maximum Depth Of 150 Mm Below The Original Ground Surface Or As Designated By The Engineer, And Disposed Outside The Clearing And Grubbing Limits As Indicated In The Typical Roadway Section. Except In Areas To Be Excavated, Stump Holes And Other Holes From Which Obstructions Are Removed Shall Be Backfilled With Suitable Material And Compacted To The Required Density. If Perishable Material Is Burned, It Shall Be Burned Under The Constant Care Of Component Watchmen At Such Times And In Such A Manner That The Surrounding Vegetation, Other Adjacent Property, Or Anything Designated To Remain On The Right Of Way Will Not Be Jeopardized. If Permitted, Burning Shall Be Done In Accordance With Applicable Laws, Ordinances, And Regulation. The Contractor Shall Use High Intensity Burning Procedures, (i.e., Incinerators, High Stacking Or Pit And Ditch Burning With Forced Air Supplements) That Produce Intense Burning With Little Or No Visible Smoke Emission During The Burning Process. At The Conclusion Of Each Burning Session, The Fire Shall Be Completely Extinguished So That No Smoldering Debris Remains. In The Event That The Contractor Is Directed By The Engineer Not To Start Burning Operations Or To Suspend Such Operations Because Of Hazardous Weather Conditions, Material To Be Burned Which Interferes With Subsequent Construction Operations Shall Be Moved By The Contractor To Temporary Locations Clear Of Construction Operations And Later, If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Placed On A Designated Spot And Burned. Materials And Debris Which Cannot Be Burned And Perishable Materials May Be Disposed Off By Methods And At Locations Approved By The Engineer, On Or Off The Project. If Disposal Is By Burying, The Debris Shall Be Placed In Layers With The Material So Disturbed To Avoid Nesting. Each Layer Shall Be Covered Or Mixed With Earth Material By The Land-fill Method To Fill All Voids. The Top Layer Of Material Buried Shall Be Covered With At Least 300 Mm (12 Inches) Of Earth Or Other Approved Material And Shall Be Graded, Shaped And Compacted To Present A Pleasing Appearance. If The Disposal Location Is Off The Project, The Contractor Shall Make All Necessary Arrangements With Property Owners In Writing For Obtaining Suitable Disposal Locations Which Are Outside The Limits Of View From The Project. The Cost Involved Shall Be Included In The Unit Bid Price. A Copy Of Such Agreement Shall Be Furnished To The Engineer. The Disposal Areas Shall Be Seeded, Fertilized And Mulched At The Contractor’s Expense. Woody Material May Be Disposed Off By Chipping. The Wood Chips May Be Used For Mulch, Slope Erosion Control Or May Be Uniformly Spread Over Selected Areas As Directed By The Engineer. Wood Chips Used As Mulch For Slope Erosion Control Shall Have A Maximum Thickness Of 12 Mm (1/2 Inch) And Faces Not Exceeding 3900 Mm2 (6 Square Inches) On Any Individual Surface Area. Wood Chips Not Designated For Use Under Other Sections Shall Be Spread Over The Designated Areas In Layers Not To Exceed 75 Mm (3 Inches) Loose Thickness. Diseased Trees Shall Be Buried Or Disposed Off As Directed By The Engineer. All Merchantable Timber In The Clearing Area Which Has Not Been Removed From The Right Of Way Prior To The Beginning Of Construction, Shall Become The Property Of The Contractor, Unless Otherwise Provided. Low Hanging Branches And Unsound Or Unsightly Branches On Trees Or Shrubs Designated To Remain Shall Be Trimmed As Directed. Branches Of Trees Extending Over The Roadbed Shall Be Trimmed To Give A Clear Height Of 6 M (20 Feet) Above The Roadbed Surface. All Trimming Shall Be Done By Skilled Workmen And In Accordance With Good Tree Surgery Practices. Timber Cut Inside The Area Staked For Clearing Shall Be Felled Within The Area To Be Cleared. 100.2.3 Individual Removal Of Trees Or Stumps Individual Trees Or Stumps Designated By The Engineer For Removal And Located In Areas Other Than Those Established For Clearing And Grubbing And Roadside Cleanup Shall Be Removed And Disposed Off As Specified Under Subsection 100.2.2 Except Trees Removed Shall Be Cut As Nearly Flush With The Ground As Practicable Without Removing Stumps. 100.3 Method Of Measurement Measurement Will Be By One Or More Of The Following Alternate Methods: 1. Area Basis. The Work To Be Paid For Shall Be The Number Of Hectares And Fractions Thereof Acceptably Cleared And Grubbed Within The Limits Indicated On The Plans Or As May Be Adjusted In Field Staking By The Engineer. Areas Not Within The Clearing And Grubbing Limits Shown On The Plans Or Not Staked For Clearing And Grubbing Will Not Be Measured For Payment. 2. Lump-sum Basis. When The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Clearing And Grubbing Lump-sum Item, No Measurement Of Area Will Be Made For Such Item. 3. Individual Unit Basis (selective Clearing). The Diameter Of Trees Will Be Measured At A Height Of 1.4 M (54 Inches) Above The Ground. Trees Less Than 150 Mm (6 Inches) In Diameter Will Not Be Measured For Payment. When Bill Of Quantities Indicates Measurement Of Trees By Individual Unit Basis, The Units Will Be Designated And Measured In Accordance With The Following Schedule Of Sizes: Diameter At Height Of 1.4 M Pay Item Designation Over 150 Mm To 900 Mm Small Over 900 Mm Large 100.4 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 100.3, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Items Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities, Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 100 (1) Clearing And Grubbing Hectare 100 (2) Clearing And Grubbing Lump Sum 100 (3) Individual Removal Of Trees, Small Each 100 (4) Individual Removal Of Trees, Large Each Item 102 - Excavation 102.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Roadway Drainage And Borrow Excavation, And The Disposal Of Material In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 102.1.1 Roadway Excavation Roadway Excavation Will Include Excavation And Grading For Roadways, Parking Areas, Intersections, Approaches, Slope Rounding, Benching, Waterways And Ditches; Removal Of Unsuitable Material From The Roadbed And Beneath Embankment Areas; And Excavating Selected Material Found In The Roadway As Ordered By The Engineer For Specific Use In The Improvement. Roadway Excavation Will Be Classified As "unclassified Excavation", "rock Excavation", "common Excavation", Or "muck Excavation" As Indicated In The Bill Of Quantities And Hereinafter Described. (1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Disposal Of All Materials Regardless Of Its Nature, Not Classified And Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under Other Pay Items. (2) Rock Excavation. Rock Excavation Shall Consist Of Excavation Of Igneous, Sedimentary And Metamorphic Rocks Which Cannot Be Excavated Without Blasting Or The Use Of Rippers, And All Boulders Or Other Detached Stones Each Having A Volume Of 1 Cubic Meter Or More As Determined By Physical Measurements Or Visually By The Engineer. (3) Common Excavation. Common Excavations Shall Consist Of All Excavation Not Included In The Bill Of Quantities Under "rock Excavation" Or Other Pay Items. (4) Muck Excavation. Muck Excavation Shall Consist Of The Removal And Disposal Of Deposits Of Saturated Or Unsaturated Mixtures Of Soils And Organic Matter Not Suitable For Foundation Materials Regardless Of Moisture Content. 102.1.2 Borrow Excavation Borrow Excavation Shall Consist Of The Excavation And Utilization Of Approved Materials Required For The Construction Of Embankments Or For Other Portions Of The Work, And Shall Be Obtained From Approved Sources, In Accordance With Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume I And The Following: Borrow, Case 1 Borrow Case 1 Will Consist Of Material Obtained From Sources Designated On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions. Borrow, Case 2 Borrow Case 2 Will Consist Of Material Obtained From Sources Provided By The Contractor. The Material Shall Meet The Quality Requirements Determined By The Engineer Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract. 102.2 Construction Requirements 102.2.1 General When There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Pre-construction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Excavated Materials. All Excavations Shall Be Finished To Reasonably Smooth And Uniform Surfaces. No Materials Shall Be Wasted Without Authority Of The Engineer. Excavation Operations Shall Be Conducted So That Material Outside Of The Limits Of Slopes Will Not Be Disturbed. Prior To Excavation, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 102.2.2 Conservation Of Topsoil Where Provided For On The Plans Or In The Special Provisions, Suitable Topsoil Encountered In Excavation And On Areas Where Embankment Is To Be Placed Shall Be Removed To Such Extent And To Such Depth As The Engineer May Direct. The Removed Topsoil Shall Be Transported And Deposited In Storage Piles At Locations Approved By The Engineer. The Topsoil Shall Be Completely Removed To The Required Depth From Any Designated Area Prior To The Beginning Of Regular Excavation Or Embankment Work In The Area And Shall Be Kept Separate From Other Excavated Materials For Later Use. 102.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Suitable Materials Removed From The Excavation Shall Be Used In The Formation Of The Embankment, Subgrade, Shoulders, Slopes, Bedding, And Backfill For Structures, And For Other Purposes Shown On The Plans Or As Directed. The Engineer Will Designate As Unsuitable Those Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted In Embankments. All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Shown On The Plans Or As Directed Without Delay To The Contractor. Only Approved Materials Shall Be Used In The Construction Of Embankments And Backfills. All Excess Materials, Including Rock And Boulders That Cannot Be Used In Embankments Shall Be Disposed Of As Directed. Materials Encountered In The Excavation And Determined By The Engineer As Suitable For Topping, Road Finishing, Slope Protection, Or Other Purposes Shall Be Conserved And Utilized As Directed By The Engineer. Borrow Materials Shall Not Be Placed Until After The Readily Accessible Materials From Roadway Excavation Has Been Placed In The Fill, Unless Otherwise Permitted Or Directed By The Engineer. If The Contractor Places More Borrow Than Is Required And Thereby Causes A Waste Of Excavation, The Amount Of Such Waste Will Be Deducted From The Borrow Volume. 102.2.4 Prewatering Excavation Areas And Borrow Pits May Be Prewatered Before Excavating The Material. When Prewatering Is Used, The Areas To Be Excavated Shall Be Moistened To The Full Depth, From The Surface To The Bottom Of The Excavation. The Water Shall Be Controlled So That The Excavated Material Will Contain The Proper Moisture To Permit Compaction To The Specified Density With The Use Of Standard Compacting Equipment. Prewatering Shall Be Supplemented Where Necessary, By Truck Watering Units, To Ensure That The Embankment Material Contains The Proper Moisture At The Time Of Compaction. The Contractor Shall Provide Drilling Equipment Capable Of Suitably Checking The Moisture Penetration To The Full Depth Of The Excavation. 102.2.5 Presplitting Unless Otherwise Provided In The Contract, Rock Excavation Which Requires Drilling And Shooting Shall Be Presplit. Presplitting To Obtain Faces In The Rock And Shale Formations Shall Be Performed By: (1) Drilling Holes At Uniform Intervals Along The Slope Lines, (2) Loading And Stemming The Holes With Appropriate Explosives And Stemming Material, And (3) Detonating The Holes Simultaneously. Prior To Starting Drilling Operations For Presplitting, The Contractor Shall Furnish The Engineer A Plan Outlining The Position Of All Drill Holes Depth Of Drilling, Type Of Explosives To Be Used, Loading Pattern And Sequence Of Firing. The Drilling And Blasting Plan Is For Record Purposes Only And. Will Not Absolve The Contractor Of His Responsibility For Using Proper Drilling And Blasting Procedures. Controlled Blasting Shall Begin With A Short Test Section Of A Length Approved By The Engineer. The Test Section Shall Be Presplit, Production Drilled And Blasted And Sufficient Material Excavated Whereby The Engineer Can Determine If The Contractor’s Methods Are Satisfactory. The Engineer May Order Discontinuance Of The Presplitting When He Determines That The Materials Encountered Have Become Unsuitable For Being Presplit. The Holes Shall Be Charged With Explosives Of The Size, Kind, Strength, And At The Spacing Suitable For The Formations Being Presplit, And With Stemming Material Which Passes A 9.5 Mm Standard Sieve And Which Has The Qualities For Proper Confinement Of The Explosives. The Finished Presplit Slope Shall Be Reasonably Uniform And Free Of Loose Rock. Variance From The True Plane Of The Excavated Backs Lope Shall Not Exceed 300 Mm; However, Localized Irregularities Or Surface Variations That Do Not Constitute A Safety Hazard Or An Impairment To Drainage Courses Or Facilities Will Be Permitted. A Maximum Offset Of 600 Mm Will Be Permitted For A Construction Working Bench At The Bottom Of Each Lift For Use In Drilling The Next Lower Presplitting Pattern. 102.2.6 Excavation Of Ditches, Gutters, Etc. All Materials Excavated From Side Ditches And Gutters, Channel Changes, Irrigation Ditches, Inlet And Outlet Ditches, Toe Ditches, Furrow Ditches And Such Other Ditches As May Be Designated On The Plans Or Staked' By The Engineer, Shall Be Utilized As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. Ditches Shall Conform To The Slope, Grade, And Shape Of The Required Cross-section, With No Projections Of Roots, Stumps, Rock, Or Similar Matter. The Contractor Shall Maintain And Keep Open And Free From Leaves, Sticks, And Other Debris All Ditches Dug By Him Until Final Acceptance Of The Work. Furrow Ditches Shall Be Formed By Plowing A Continuous Furrow Along The Line Staked By The Engineer. Methods Other Than Plowing May Be Used If Acceptable To The Engineer. The Ditches Shall Be Cleaned Out By Hand Shovel Work, By Ditcher, Or By Some Other Suitable Method, Throwing All Loose Materials On The Downhill Side So That The Bottom Of The Finished Ditch Shall Be Approximately 450 Mm Below The Crest Of The Loose Material Piled On The Downhill Side. Hand Finish Will Not Be Required, But The Flow Lines Shall Be In Satisfactory Shape To Provide Drainage Without Overflow. 102.2.7 Excavation Of Roadbed Level Rock Shall Be Excavated To A Depth Of 150 Mm Below Subgrade Within The Limits Of The Roadbed, And The Excavation Backfilled With Material Designated On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer And Compacted To The Required Density. When Excavation Methods Employed By The Contractor Leave Undrained Pockets In The Rock Surface, The Contractor Shall At His Own Expense, Properly Drain Such Depressions Or When Permitted By The Engineer Fill The Depressions With Approved Impermeable Material. Material Below Subgrade, Other Than Solid Rock Shall Be Thoroughly Scarified To A Depth Of 150 Mm And The Moisture Content Increased Or Reduced, As Necessary, To Bring The Material Throughout This 150 Mm Layer To The Moisture Content Suitable For Maximum Compaction. This Layer Shall Then Be Compacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. 102.2.8 Borrow Areas The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of Opening Any Borrow Areas So That Cross-section Elevations And Measurements Of The Ground Surface After Stripping May Be Taken, And The Borrow Material Can Be Tested Before Being Used. Sufficient Time For Testing The Borrow Material Shall Be Allowed. All Borrow Areas Shall Be Bladed And Left In Such Shape As To Permit Accurate Measurements After Excavation Has Been Completed. The Contractor Shall Not Excavate Beyond The Dimensions And Elevations Established, And No Material Shall Be Removed Prior To The Staking Out And Cross-sectioning Of The Site. The Finished Borrow Areas Shall Be Approximately True To Line And Grade Established And Specified And Shall Be Finished, As Prescribed In Clause 61, Standard Specifications For Public Works And Highways, Volume 1. When Necessary To Remove Fencing, The Fencing Shall Be Replaced In At Least As Good Condition As It Was Originally. The Contractor Shall Be Responsible For The Confinement Of Livestock When A Portion Of The Fence Is Removed. 102.2.9 Removal Of Unsuitable Material Where The Plans Show The Top Portion Of The Roadbed To Be Selected Topping, All Unsuitable Materials Shall Be Excavated To The Depth Necessary For Replacement Of The Selected Topping To The Required Compacted Thickness. Where Excavation To The Finished Graded Section Results In A Subgrade Or Slopes Of Unsuitable Soil, The Engineer May Require The Contractor To Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill To The Finished Graded Section With Approved Material. The Contractor Shall Conduct His Operations In Such A Way That The Engineer Can Take The Necessary Cross-sectional Measurements Before The Backfill Is Placed. The Excavation Of Muck Shall Be Handled In A Manner That Will Not Permit The Entrapment Of Muck Within The Backfill. The Material Used For Backfilling Up To The Ground Line Or Water Level, Whichever Is Higher, Shall Be Rock Or Other Suitable Granular Material Selected From The Roadway Excavation, If Available. If Not Available, Suitable Material Shall Be Obtained From Other Approved Sources. Unsuitable Material Removed Shall Be Disposed Of In Designated Areas Shown On The Plans Or Approved By The Engineer. 102.3 Method Of Measurement The Cost Of Excavation Of Material Which Is Incorporated In The Works Or In Other Areas Of Fill Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Items Of Work Where The Material Is Used. Measurement Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material Shall Be The Net Volume In Its Original Position. For Measurement Purposes, Surplus Suitable Material Shall Be Calculated As The Difference Between The Net Volumes Of Suitable Material Required To Be Used In Embankment Corrected By Applying Shrinkage Factor Or A Swell Factor In Case Of Rock Excavation, Determined By Laboratory Tests To Get Its Original Volume Measurement, And The Net Volume Of Suitable Material From Excavation In The Original Position. Separate Pay Items Shall Be Provided For Surplus Common, Unclassified And Rock Material. The Contractor Shall Be Deemed To Have Included In The Contract Unit Prices All Costs Of Obtaining Land For The Disposal Of Unsuitable Or Surplus Material. Item 103 - Structure Excavation 103.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Necessary Excavation For Foundation Of Bridges, Culverts, Underdrains, And Other Structures Not Otherwise Provided For In The Specifications. Except As Otherwise Provided For Pipe Culverts, The Backfilling Of Completed Structures And The Disposal Of All Excavated Surplus Materials, Shall Be In Accordance With These Specifications And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. This Item Shall Include Necessary Diverting Of Live Streams, Bailing, Pumping, Draining, Sheeting, Bracing, And The Necessary Construction Of Cribs And Cofferdams, And Furnishing The Materials Therefore, And The Subsequent Removal Of Cribs And Cofferdams And The Placing Of All Necessary Backfill. It Shall Also Include The Furnishing And Placing Of Approved Foundation Fill Material To Replace Unsuitable Material Encountered Below The Foundation Elevation Of Structures. No Allowance Will Be Made For Classification Of Different Types Of Material Encountered. 103.2 Construction Requirements 103.2.1 Clearing And Grubbing Prior To Starting Excavation Operations In Any Area, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Accordance With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. 103.2.2 Excavation (1) General, All Structures. The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer Sufficiently In Advance Of The Beginning Of Any Excavation So That Cross-sectional Elevations And Measurements May Be Taken On The Undisturbed Ground. The Natural Ground Adjacent To The Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission Of The Engineer. Trenches Or Foundation Pits For Structures Or Structure Footings Shall Be Excavated To The Lines And Grades Or Elevations Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. They Shall Be Of Sufficient Size To Permit The Placing Of Structures Or Structure Footings Of The Full Width And Length Shown. The Elevations Of The Bottoms Of Footings, As Shown On The Plans, Shall Be Considered As Approximate Only And The Engineer May Order, In Writing, Such Changes In Dimensions Or Elevations Of Footings As May Be Deemed Necessary, To Secure A Satisfactory Foundation. Boulders, Logs, And Other Objectionable Materials Encountered In Excavation Shall Be Removed. After Each Excavation Is Completed, The Contractor Shall Notify The Engineer To That Effect And No Footing, Bedding Material Or Pipe Culvert Shall Be Placed Until The Engineer Has Approved The Depth Of Excavation And The Character Of The Foundation Material. (2) Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts. All Rock Or Other Hard Foundation Materials Shall Be Cleaned Of All Loose Materials, And Cut To A Firm Surface, Either Level, Stepped, Or Serrated As Directed By The Engineer. All Seams Or Crevices Shall Be Cleaned And Grouted. All Loose And Disintegrated Rocks And Thin Strata Shall Be Removed. When The Footing Is To Rest On Material Other Than Rock, Excavation To Final Grade Shall Not Be Made Until Just Before The Footing Is To Be Placed. When The Foundation Material Is Soft Or Mucky Or Otherwise Unsuitable, As Determined By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Remove The Unsuitable Material And Backfill With Approved Granular Material. This Foundation Fill Shall Be Placed And Compacted In 150 Mm Layers Up To The Foundation Elevation. When Foundation Piles Are Used, The Excavation Of Each Pit Shall Be Completed Before The Piles Are Driven And Any Placing Of Foundation Fill Shall Be Done After The Piles Are Driven. After The Driving Is Completed, All Loose And Displaced Materials Shall Be Removed, Leaving A Smooth, Solid Bed To Receive The Footing. (3) Pipe Culverts. The Width Of The Pipe Trench Shall Be Sufficient To Permit Satisfactory Jointing Of The Pipe And Thorough Tamping Of The Bedding Material Under And Around The Pipe. Where Rock, Hardpan, Or Other Unyielding Material Is Encountered, It Shall Be Removed Below The Foundation Grade For A Depth Of At Least 300 Mm Or 4 Mm For Each 100 Mm Of Fill Over The Top Of Pipe, Whichever Is Greater, But Not To Exceed Three-quarters Of The Vertical Inside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Width Of The Excavation Shall Be At Least 300 Mm Greater Than The Horizontal Outside Diameter Of The Pipe. The Excavation Below Grade Shall Be Backfilled With Selected Fine Compressible Material, Such As Silty Clay Or Loam, And Lightly Compacted In Layers Not Over 150 Mm In Uncompacted Depth To Form A Uniform But Yielding Foundation. Where A Firm Foundation Is Not Encountered At The Grade Established, Due To Soft, Spongy, Or Other Unstable Soil, Such Unstable Soil Under The Pipe And For A Width Of At Least One Diameter On Each Side Of The Pipe Shall Be Removed To The Depth Directed By The Engineer And Replaced With Approved Granular Foundation Fill Material Properly Compacted To Provide Adequate Support For The Pipe, Unless Other Special Construction Methods Are Called For On The Plans. The Foundation Surface Shall Provide A Firm Foundation Of Uniform Density Throughout The Length Of The Culvert And If Directed By The Engineer, Shall Be Cambered In The Direction Parallel To The Pipe Centerline. Where Pipe Culverts Are To Be Placed In Trenches Excavated In Embankments, The Excavation Of Each Trench Shall Be Performed After The Embankment Has Been Constructed To A Plane Parallel To The Proposed Profile Grade And To Such Height Above The Bottom Of The Pipe As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. 103.2.3 Utilization Of Excavated Materials All Excavated Materials, So Far As Suitable, Shall Be Utilized As Backfill Or Embankment. The Surplus Materials Shall Be Disposed Of In Such Manner As Not To Obstruct The Stream Or Otherwise Impair The Efficiency Or Appearance Of The Structure. No Excavated Materials Shall Be Deposited At Any Time So As To Endanger The Partly Finished Structure. 103.2.4 Cofferdams Suitable And Practically Watertight Cofferdams Shall Be Used Wherever Water-bearing Strata Are Encountered Above The Elevation Of The Bottom Of The Excavation. If Requested, The Contractor Shall Submit Drawings Showing His Proposed Method Of Cofferdam Construction, As Directed By The Engineer. Cofferdams Or Cribs For Foundation Construction Shall In General, Be Carried Well Below The Bottoms Of The Footings And Shall Be Well Braced And As Nearly Watertight As Practicable. In General, The Interior Dimensions Of Cofferdams Shall Be Such As To Give Sufficient Clearance For The Construction Of Forms And The Inspection Of Their Exteriors, And To Permit Pumping Outside Of The Forms. Cofferdams Or Cribs Which Are Tilted Or Moved Laterally During The Process Of Sinking Shall Be Righted Or Enlarged So As To Provide The Necessary Clearance. When Conditions Are Encountered Which, As Determined By The Engineer, Render It Impracticable To Dewater The Foundation Before Placing The Footing, The Engineer May Require The Construction Of A Concrete Foundation Seal Of Such Dimensions As He May Consider Necessary, And Of Such Thickness As To Resist Any Possible Uplift. The Concrete For Such Seal Shall Be Placed As Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer. The Foundation Shall Then Be Dewatered And The Footing Placed. When Weighted Cribs Are Employed And The Mass Is Utilized To Overcome Partially The Hydrostatic Pressure Acting Against The Bottom Of The Foundation Seal, Special Anchorage Such As Dowels Or Keys Shall Be Provided To Transfer The Entire Mass Of The Crib To The Foundation Seal. When A Foundation Seal Is Placed Under Water, The Cofferdams Shall Be Vented Or Ported At Low Water Level As Directed. Cofferdams Shall Be Constructed So As To Protect Green Concrete Against Damage From Sudden Rising Of The Stream And To Prevent Damage To The Foundation By Erosion. No Timber Or Bracing Shall Be Left 30 In Cofferdams Or Cribs In Such A Way As To Extend Into Substructure Masonry, Without Written Permission From The Engineer. Any Pumping That May Be Permitted From The Interior Of Any Foundation Enclosure Shall Be Done In Such A Manner As To Preclude The Possibility Of Any Portion Of The Concrete Material Being Carried Away. Any Pumping Required During The Placing Of Concrete, Or For A Period Of At Least 24 Hours Thereafter, Shall Be Done From A Suitable Sump Located Outside The Concrete Forms. Pumping To Dewater A Sealed Cofferdam Shall Not Commence Until The Seal Has Set Sufficiently To Withstand The Hydrostatic Pressure. Unless Otherwise Provided, Cofferdams Or Cribs, With All Sheeting And Bracing Involved Therewith, Shall Be Removed By The Contractor After The Completion Of The Substructure. Removal Shall Be Effected In Such Manner As Not To Disturb Or Mar Finished Masonry. 103.2.5 Preservation Of Channel Unless Otherwise Permitted, No Excavation Shall Be Made Outside Of Caissons, Cribs, Cofferdams, Or Sheet Piling, And The Natural Stream Bed Adjacent To Structure Shall Not Be Disturbed Without Permission From The Engineer. If Any Excavation Or Dredging Is Made At The Side Of The Structure Before Caissons, Cribs, Or Cofferdams Are Sunk In Place, The Contractor Shall, After The Foundation Base Is In Place, Backfill All Such Excavations To The Original Ground Surface Or Stream Bed With Material Satisfactory To The Engineer. 103.2.6 Backfill And Embankment For Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts Excavated Areas Around Structures Shall Be Backfilled With Free Draining Granular Material Approved By The Engineer And Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Over 150 Mm In Thickness, To The Level Of The Original Ground Surface. Each Layer Shall Be Moistened Or Dried As Required And Thoroughly Compacted With Mechanical Tampers. In Placing Backfills Or Embankment, The Material Shall Be Placed Simultaneously In So Far As Possible To Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of An Abutment, Pier, Or Wall. If Conditions Require Placing Backfill Or Embankment Appreciably Higher On One Side Than On The Opposite Side, The Additional Material On The Higher Side Shall Not Be Placed Until The Masonry Has Been In Place For 14 Days, Or Until Tests Made By The Laboratory Under The Supervision Of The Engineer Establishes That The Masonry Has Attained Sufficient Strength To Withstand Any Pressure Created By The Methods Used And Materials Placed Without Damage Or Strain Beyond A Safe Factor. Backfill Or Embankment Shall Not Be Placed Behind The Walls Of Concrete Culverts Or Abutments Or Rigid Frame Structures Until The Top Slab Is Placed And Cured. Backfill And Embankment Behind Abutments Held At The Top By The Superstructure, And Behind The Sidewalls Of Culverts, Shall Be Carried Up Simultaneously Behind Opposite Abutments Or Sidewalls. All Embankments Adjacent To Structures Shall Be Constructed In Horizontal Layers And Compacted As Prescribed In Subsection 104.3.3 Except That Mechanical Tampers May Be Used For The Required Compaction. Special Care Shall Be Taken To Prevent Any Wedging Action Against The Structure, And Slopes Bounding Or Within The Areas To Be Filled Shall Be Benched Or Serrated To Prevent Wedge Action. The Placing Of Embankment And The Benching Of Slopes Shall Continue In Such A Manner That At All Times There Will Be Horizontal Berm Of Thoroughly Compacted Material For A Distance At Least Equal To The Height Of The Abutment Or Wall To Be Backfilled Against Except Insofar As Undisturbed Material Obtrudes Upon The Area. Broken Rock Or Coarse Sand And Gravel Shall Be Provided For A Drainage Filter At Weepholes As Shown On The Plans. 103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Bedding, Backfill And Embankment For Pipe Culverts Shall Be Done In Accordance With Item 500, Pipe Culverts And Storm Drains. 103.3 Method Of Measurement 103.3.1 Structure Excavation The Volume Of Excavation To Be Paid For Will Be The Number Of Cubic Meters Measured In Original Position Of Material Acceptably Excavated In Conformity With The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer, But In No Case, Except As Noted, Will Any Of The Following Volumes Be Included In The Measurement For Payment: (1) The Volume Outside Of Vertical Planes 450 Mm Outside Of And Parallel To The Neat Lines Of Footings And The Inside Walls Of Pipe And Pipe-arch Culverts At Their Widest Horizontal Dimensions. (2) The Volume Of Excavation For Culvert And Sections Outside The Vertical Plane For Culverts Stipulated In (1) Above. (3) The Volume Outside Of Neat Lines Of Underdrains As Shown On The Plans, And Outside The Limits Of Foundation Fill As Ordered By The Engineer. (4) The Volume Included Within The Staked Limits Of The Roadway Excavation, Contiguous Channel Changes, Ditches, Etc., For Which Payment Is Otherwise Provided In The Specification. (5) Volume Of Water Or Other Liquid Resulting From Construction Operations And Which Can Be Pumped Or Drained Away. (6) The Volume Of Any Excavation Performed Prior To The Taking Of Elevations And Measurements Of The Undisturbed Ground. (7) The Volume Of Any Material Rehandled, Except That Where The Plans Indicate Or The Engineer Directs The Excavation After Embankment Has Been Placed And Except That When Installation Of Pipe Culverts By The Imperfect Trench Method Specified In Item 500 Is Required, The Volume Of Material Reexcavated As Directed Will Be Included. (8) The Volume Of Excavation For Footings Ordered At A Depth More Than 1.5 M Below The Lowest Elevation For Such Footings Shown On The Original Contract Plans, Unless The Bill Of Quantities Contains A Pay Item For Excavation Ordered Below The Elevations Shown On The Plans For Individual Footings. Item 104 - Embankment 104.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Construction Of Embankment In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Lines, Grades And Dimensions Shown On The Plans Or Established By The Engineer. 104.2 Material Requirements Embankments Shall Be Constructed Of Suitable Materials, In Consonance With The Following Definitions: Suitable Material - Material Which Is Acceptable In Accordance With The Contract And Which Can Be Compacted In The Manner Specified In This Item. It Can Be Common Material Or Rock. Selected Borrow, For Topping - Soil Of Such Gradation That All Particles Will Pass A Sieve With 75 Mm Square Openings And Not More Than 15 Mass Percent Will Pass The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve, As Determined By Aashto T 11. The Material Shall Have A Plasticity Index Of Not More Than 6 As Determined By Aashto T 90 And A Liquid Limit Of Not More Than 30 As Determined By Aashto T 89. Unsuitable Material - Material Other Than Suitable Materials Such As: (a) Materials Containing Detrimental Quantities Of Organic Materials, Such As Grass, Roots And Sewerage. (b) Organic Soils Such As Peat And Mucks. (c) Soils With Liquid Limit Exceeding 80 And/or Plasticity Index Exceeding 55. (d) Soils With A Natural Water Content Exceeding 100% (e) Soils With Very Low Natural Density, 800 Kg/m3 Or Lower. (f) Soils That Cannot Be Properly Compacted As Determined By The Engineer. 104.3 Construction Requirements 104.3.1 General Prior To Construction Of Embankment, All Necessary Clearing And Grubbing In That Area Shall Have Been Performed In Conformity With Item 100, Clearing And Grubbing. Embankment Construction Shall Consist Of Constructing Roadway Embankments, Including Preparation Of The Areas Upon Which They Are To Be Placed; The Construction Of Dikes Within Or Adjacent To The Roadway; The Placing And Compacting Of Approved Material Within Roadway Areas Where Unsuitable Material Has Been Removed; And The Placing And Compacting Of Embankment Material In Holes, Pits, And Other Depressions Within The Roadway Area. Embankments And Backfills Shall Contain No Muck, Peat, Sod, Roots Or Other Deleterious Matter. Rocks, Broken Concrete Or Other Solid, Bulky Materials Shall Not Be Placed In Embankment Areas Where Piling Is To Be Placed Or Driven. Where Shown On The Plans Or Directed By The Engineer, The Surface Of The Existing Ground Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm And To The Specified Requirements Of This Item. Where Provided On The Plans And Bill Of Quantities The Top Portions Of The Roadbed In Both Cuts And Embankments, As Indicated, Shall Consist Of Selected Borrow For Topping From Excavations. 104.3.2 Methods Of Construction Where There Is Evidence Of Discrepancies On The Actual Elevations And That Shown On The Plans, A Preconstruction Survey Referred To The Datum Plane Used In The Approved Plan Shall Be Undertaken By The Contractor Under The Control Of The Engineer To Serve As Basis For The Computation Of The Actual Volume Of The Embankment Materials. When Embankment Is To Be Placed And Compacted On Hillsides, Or When New Embankment Is To Be Compacted Against Existing Embankments, Or When Embankment Is Built One-half Width At A Time, The Existing Slopes That Are Steeper Than 3: 1 When Measured At Right Angles To The Roadway Shall Be Continuously Benched Over Those Areas As The Work Is Brought Up In Layers. Benching Will Be Subject To The Engineer’s Approval And Shall Be Of Sufficient Width To Permit Operation Of Placement And Compaction Equipment. Each Horizontal Cut Shall Begin At The Intersection Of The Original Ground And The Vertical Sides Of The Previous Cuts. Material Thus Excavated Shall Be Placed And Compacted Along With The Embankment Material In Accordance With The Procedure Described In This Section. Unless Shown Otherwise On The Plans Or Special Provisions, Wherein Embankment Of Less Than 1.2 M Below Subgrade Is To Be Made, Also And Vegetable Matter Shall Be Removed From The Surface Upon Which The Embankment Is To Be Placed, And The Cleared Surfaced Shall Be Completely Broken Up By Plowing, Scarifying, Or Steeping To A Minimum Depth Of 150 Mm Except As Provided In Subsection 102.2.2.this Area Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3.sod Not Required To Be Removed Shall Be Thoroughly Disc Harrowed Or Scarified Before Construction Of Embankment. Wherever A Compacted Road Surface Containing Granular Materials Lies Within 900 Mm Of The Subgrade, Such Old Road Surface Shall Be Scarified To A Depth Of At Least150 Mm Whenever Directed By The Engineer. These Scarified Materials Shall Then Be Compacted As Provided In Subsection 104.3.3. When Shoulder Excavation Is Specified, The Roadway Shoulders Shall Be Excavated To The Depth And Width Shown On The Plans. The Shoulder Material Shall Be Removed Without Disturbing The Adjacent Existing Base Course Material, And All Excess Excavated Materials Shall Be Disposed Of As Provided In Subsection 102.2.3. If Necessary, The Areas Shall Be Compacted Before Being Backfilled. Roadway Embankment Of Earth Material Shall Be Placed In Horizontal Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm, Loose Measurement, And Shall Be Compacted As Specified Before The Next Layer Is Placed. However, Thicker Layer Maybe Placed If Vibratory Roller With High Compactive Effort Is Used Provided That Density Requirement Is Attained And As Approved By The Engineer. Trial Section To This Effect Must Be Conducted And Approved By The Engineer. Effective Spreading Equipment Shall Be Used On Each Lift To Obtain Uniform Thickness As Determined In The Trial Section Prior To Compaction. As The Compaction Of Each Layer Progresses, Continuous Leveling And Manipulating Will Be Required To Assure Uniform Density. Water Shall Be Added Or Removed, If Necessary, In Order To Obtain The Required Density. Removal Of Water Shall Be Accomplished Through Aeration By Plowing, Blading, Discing, Or Other Methods Satisfactory To The Engineer. Where Embankment Is To Be Constructed Across Low Swampy Ground That Will Not Support The Mass Of Trucks Or Other Hauling Equipment, The Lower Part Of The Fill May Be Constructed By Dumping Successive Loads In A Uniformly Distributed Layer Of A Thickness Not Greater Than Necessary To Support The Hauling Equipment While Placing Subsequent Layers. When Excavated Material Contains More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Diameter And Cannot Be Placed In Layers Of The Thickness Prescribed Without Crushing, Pulverizing Or Further Breaking Down The Pieces Resulting From Excavation Methods, Such Materials May Be Placed On The Embankment In Layers Not Exceeding In Thickness The Approximate Average Size Of The Larger Rocks, But Not Greater Than 600 Mm. Even Though The Thickness Of Layers Is Limited As Provided Above, The Placing Of Individual Rocks And Boulders Greater Than 600 Mm In Diameter Will Be Permitted Provided That When Placed, They Do Not Exceed 1200 Mm In Height And Provided They Are Carefully Distributed, With The Interstices Filled With Finer Material To Form A Dense And Compact Mass. Each Layer Shall Be Leveled And Smoothed With Suitable Leveling Equipment And By Distribution Of Spalls And Finer Fragments Of Earth. Lifts Of Material Containing More Than 25 Mass Percent Of Rock Larger Than 150 Mm In Greatest Dimensions Shall Not Be Constructed Above An Elevation 300 Mm Below The Finished Subgrade. The Balance Of The Embankment Shall Be Composed Of Suitable Material Smoothed And Placed In Layers Not Exceeding 200 Mm In Loose Thickness And Compacted As Specified For Embankments. Dumping And Rolling Areas Shall Be Kept Separate, And No Lift Shall Be Covered By Another Until Compaction Complies With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. Hauling And Leveling Equipment Shall Be So Routed And Distributed Over Each Layer Of The Fill In Such A Manner As To Make Use Of Compaction Effort Afforded Thereby And To Minimize Rutting And Uneven Compaction. 104.3.3 Compaction Compaction Trials Before Commencing The Formation Of Embankments, The Contractor Shall Submit In Writing To The Engineer For Approval His Proposals For The Compaction Of Each Type Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works. The Proposals Shall Include The Relationship Between The Types Of Compaction Equipment, The Number Of Passes Required And The Method Of Adjusting Moisture Content. The Contractor Shall Carry Out Full Scale Compaction Trials On Areas Not Less Than 10m Wide And 50 M Long As Required By The Engineer And Using His Proposed Procedures Or Such Amendments Thereto As May Be Found Necessary To Satisfy The Engineer That All The Specified Requirements Regarding Compaction Can Be Consistently Achieved. Compaction Trials With The Main Types Of Fill Material To Be Used In The Works Shall Be Completed Before Work With The Corresponding Materials Will Be Allowed To Commence. Throughout The Periods When Compaction Of Earthwork Is In Progress, The Contractor Shall Adhere To The Compaction Procedures Found From Compaction Trials For Each Type Of Material Being Compacted, Each Type Of Compaction Equipment Employed And Each Degree Of Compaction Specified. Earth The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed In All Embankment Layers And The Material Scarified To The Designated Depth Below Subgrade In Cut Sections, Until A Uniform Density Of Not Less Than 95 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined By Aashto T99 Method C, Is Attained, At A Moisture Content Determined By Engineer To Be Suitable For Such Density. Acceptance Of Compaction May Be Based On Adherence To An Approved Roller Pattern Developed As Set Forth In Item 106, Compaction Equipment And Density Control Strips. The Engineer Shall During Progress Of The Work, Make Density Tests Of Compacted Material In Accordance With Aashto T 191, T 205, Or Other Approved Field Density Tests, Including The Use Of Properly Calibrated Nuclear Testing Devices. A Correction For Coarse Particles May Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 224. If, By Such Tests, The Engineer Determines That The Specified Density And Moisture Conditions Have Not Been Attained, The Contractor Shall Perform Additional Work As May Be Necessary To Attain The Specified Conditions. At Least One Group Of Three In-situ Density Tests Shall Be Carried Out For Each 500 M2 Of Each Layer Of Compacted Fill. Rock Density Requirements Will Not Apply To Portions Of Embankments Constructed Of Materials Which Cannot Be Tested In Accordance With Approved Methods. Embankment Materials Classified As Rock Shall Be Deposited, Spread And Leveled The Full Width Of The Fill With Sufficient Earth Or Other Fine Material So Deposited To Fill The Interstices To Produce A Dense Compact Embankment. In Addition, One Of The Rollers, Vibrators, Or Compactors Meeting The Requirements Set Forth In Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment, Shall Compact The Embankment Full Width With A Minimum Of Three-complete Passes For Each Layer Of Embankment. 104.3.4 Protection Of Roadbed During Construction During The Construction Of The Roadway, The Roadbed Shall Be Maintained In Such Condition That It Will Be Well Drained At All Times. Side Ditches Or Gutters Emptying From Cuts To Embankments Or Otherwise Shall Be So Constructed As To Avoid Damage To Embankments By Erosion. 104.3.5 Protection Of Structure If Embankment Can Be Deposited On One-side Only Of Abutments, Wing Walls, Piers Or Culvert Headwalls, Care Shall Be Taken That The Area Immediately Adjacent To The Structure Is Not Compacted To The Extent That It Will Cause Overturning Of, Or Excessive Pressure Against The Structure. When Noted On The Plans, The Fill Adjacent To The End Bent Of A Bridge Shall Not Be Placed Higher Than The Bottom Of The Backfill Of The Bent Until The Superstructure Is In Place. When Embankment Is To Be Placed On Both Sides Of A Concrete Wall Or Box Type Structure: Operations Shall Be So Conducted That The Embankment Is Always At Approximately The Same Elevation On Both Sides Of The Structure. 104.3.6 Rounding And Warping Slopes Rounding-except In Solid Rock, The Tops And Bottoms Of All Slopes, Including The Slopes Of Drainage Ditches, Shall Be Rounded As Indicated On The Plans. A Layer Of Earth Overlaying Rock Shall Be Rounded Above The Rock As Done In Earth Slopes. Warping-adjustments In Slopes Shall Be Made To Avoid Injury In Standing Trees Or Marring Of Weathered Rock, Or To Harmonize With Existing Landscape Features, And The Transition To Such Adjusted Slopes Shall Be Gradual. At Intersections Of Cuts And Fills, Slopes Shall Be Adjusted And Warped To Flow Into Each Other Or Into The Natural Ground Surfaces Without Noticeable Break. 104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed And Slopes After The Roadbed Has Been Substantially Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compact Properly Or Serve The Intended Purpose. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes Or Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Selected Material. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling, Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer. All Earth Slopes Shall Be Left With Roughened Surfaces But Shall Be Reasonably Uniform, Without Any Noticeable Break, And In Reasonably Close Conformity With The Plans Or Other Surfaces Indicated On The Plans Or As Staked By The Engineer, With No Variations Therefrom Readily Discernible As Viewed From The Road. 104.3.8 Serrated Slopes Cut Slopes In Rippable Material (soft Rock) Having Slope Ratios Between 0.75:1 And 2:1 Shall Be Constructed So That The Final Slope Line Shall Consist Of A Series Of Small Horizontal Steps. The Step Rises And Tread Dimensions Shall Be Shown On The Plans. No Scaling Shall Be Performed On The Stepped Slopes Except For Removal Of Large Rocks Which Will Obviously Be A Safety Hazard If They Fall Into The Ditch Line Or Roadway. 104.3.9 Earth Berms When Called For In The Contract, Permanent Earth Berms Shall Be Constructed Of Well Graded Materials With No Rocks Having A Diameter Greater Than 0.25 The Height Of The Berm. When Local Material Is Not Acceptable, Acceptable Material Shall Be Imported, As Directed By The Engineer. Compacted Berm Compacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Moistening Or Drying And Placing Material As Necessary In Locations Shown On The Drawings Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod, Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precaution To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. Shoulder Surface Beneath Berm Will Be Roughened To Provide A Bond Between The Berm And Shoulder When Completed. The Contractor Shall Compact The Material Placed Until At Least 90 Mass Percent Of The Maximum Density Is Obtained As Determined By Aashto T 99, Method C. The Cross-section Of The Finished Compacted Berm Shall Reasonably Conform To The Typical Cross-section As Shown On The Plans. Uncompacted Berm Uncompacted Berm Construction Shall Consist Of Drying, If Necessary And Placing Material In Locations Shown On The Plans Or As Established By The Engineer. Material Shall Contain No Frozen Material, Roots, Sod Or Other Deleterious Materials. Contractor Shall Take Precautions To Prevent Material From Escaping Over The Embankment Slope. 104.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Embankment To Be Paid For Shall Be The Volume Of Material Compacted In Place, Accepted By The Engineer And Formed With Material Obtained From Any Source. Material From Excavation Per Item 102 Which Is Used In Embankment And Accepted By The Engineer Will Be Paid Under Embankment And Such Payment Will Be Deemed To Include The Cost Of Excavating, Hauling, Stockpiling And All Other Costs Incidental To The Work. Material For Selected Borrow Topping Will Be Measured And Paid For Under The Same Conditions Specified In The Preceding Paragraph. Item 105 - Subgrade Preparation 105.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Preparation Of The Subgrade For The Support Of Overlying Structural Layers. It Shall Extend To Full Width Of The Roadway. Unless Authorized By The Engineer, Subgrade Preparation Shall Not Be Done Unless The Contractor Is Able To Start Immediately The Construction Of The Pavement Structure. 105.2 Material Requirements Unless Otherwise Stated In The Contract And Except When The Subgrade Is In Rock Cut, All Materials Below Subgrade Level To A Depth 150 Mm Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified Shall Meet The Requirements Of Section 104.2, Material Requirements. 105.3 Construction Requirements 105.3.1 Prior Works Prior To Commencing Preparation Of The Subgrade, All Culverts, Cross Drains, Ducts And The Like (including Their Fully Compacted Backfill) Ditches, Drains And Drainage Outlets Shall Be Completed. Any Work On The Preparation Of The Subgrade Shall Not Be Started Unless Prior Work Herein Described Shall Have Been Approved By The Engineer. 105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances The Finished Compacted Surface Of The Subgrade Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From +20 Mm Design Level Of Surface -30 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity Measured By 3-m Straight Edge 30 Mm Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber ± 0.50% Permitted Variation From ± 0.10% Design Longitudinal Grade Over 25 M Length 105.3.3 Subgrade In Common Excavation Unless Otherwise Specified, All Materials Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth 150 Mm Or Other Depth Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer Shall Be Excavated. The Material, If Suitable, Shall Be Set Aside For Future Use Or, If Unsuitable, Shall Be Disposed Of In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 102.2.9. Where Material Has Been Removed From Below Subgrade Level, The Resulting Surface Shall Be Compacted To A Depth Of 150 Mm And In Accordance With Other Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. All Materials Immediately Below Subgrade Level In Earth Cuts To A Depth Of 150 Mm, Or To Such Greater Depth As May Be Specified, Shall Be Compacted In Accordance With The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.4 Subgrade In Rock Excavation Surface Irregularities Under The Subgrade Level Remaining After Trimming Of The Rock Excavation Shall Be Leveled By Placing Specified Material And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.5 Subgrade On Embankment After The Embankment Has Been Completed, The Full Width Shall Be Conditioned By Removing Any Soft Or Other Unstable Material That Will Not Compacted Properly. The Resulting Areas And All Other Low Sections, Holes Be Or Depressions Shall Be Brought To Grade With Suitable Material. The Entire Roadbed Shall Be Shaped And Compacted To The Requirements Of Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, Blading, Dragging, Rolling Or Other Methods Of Work Shall Be Performed Or Used As Necessary To Provide A Thoroughly Compacted Roadbed Shaped To The Cross-sections Shown On The Plans. 105.3.6 Subgrade On Existing Pavement Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Portland Cement Concrete Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract, The Slab Shall Be Broken Into Pieces With Greatest Dimension Of Not More Than 500 Mm And The Existing Pavement Material Compacted As Specified In Subsection 104.3.3, As Directed By The Engineer. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall, As Part Of Pavement Construction Be Shaped To Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2 By Placing And Compacting Where Necessary A Leveling Course Comprising The Material Of The Pavement Course To Be Placed Immediately Above. Where The New Pavement Is To Be Constructed Immediately Over An Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement Or Gravel Surface Pavement And If So Specified In The Contract, The Pavement Shall Be Scarified, Thoroughly Loosened, Reshaped And Recompacted In Accordance With Subsection 104.3.3. The Resulting Subgrade Level Shall Conform To The Allowable Tolerances Of Subsection 105.3.2. 105.3.7 Protection Of Completed Work The Contractor Shall Be Required To Protect And Maintain At His Own Expense The Entire Work Within The Limits Of His Contract In Good Condition Satisfactory To The Engineer From The Time He First Started Work Until All Work Shall Have Been Completed. Maintenance Shall Include Repairing And Recompacting Ruts, Ridges, Soft Spots And Deteriorated Sections Of The Subgrade Caused By The Traffic Of The Contractor's Vehicle/equipment Or That Of The Public. 105.3.8 Templates And Straight-edges The Contractor Shall Provide For Use Of The Engineer, Approved Templates And Straight-edges In Sufficient Number To Check The Accuracy Of The Work, As Provided In This Specification. 105.4 Method Of Measurement 105.4.1 Measurement Of Items For Payment Shall Be Provided Only For: 1. The Compaction Of Existing Ground Below Subgrade Level In Cuts Of Common Material As Specified In Subsection 105.3.3. 2. The Breaking Up Or Scarifying, Loosening, Reshaping And Recompacting Of Existing Pavement As Specified In Subsection 105.3.6. The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Area Of The Work Specified To Be Carried Out And Accepted By The Engineer. 105.4.2 Payment For All Work For The Preparation Of The Subgrade, Including Shaping To The Required Levels And Tolerances, Other Than As Specified Above Shall Be Deemed To Be Included In The Pay Item For Embankment. Part D – Subbase And Base Course Item 200 - Aggregate Subbase Course 200.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Placing And Compacting An Aggregate Subbase Course On A Prepared Subgrade In~ Accordance With This Specification And The Lines, Grades And Cross-sections Shown On The Plans, Or As Directed By The Engineer. 200.2 Material Requirements Aggregate For Subbase Shall Consist Of Hard, Durable Particles Or Fragments Of Crushed Stone, Crushed Slag, Or Crushed Or Natural Gravel And Filler Of Natural Or Crushed Sand Or Other Finely Divided Mineral Matter. The Composite Material Shall Be Free From Vegetable Matter And Lumps Or Balls Of Clay, And Shall Be Of Such Nature That It Can Be Compacted Readily To Form A Firm, Stable Subbase. The Subbase Material Shall Conform To Table 200.1, Grading Requirements. Table 200.1 - Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard, Mm Alternate Us Standard 50 25 9.5 0.075 2” 1” 3/8” No. 200 100 55 – 85 40 – 75 0 - 12 The Fraction Passing The 0.075 Mm (no. 200) Sieve Shall Not Be Greater Than 0.66 (two Thirds) Of The Fractions Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve. The Fraction Passing The 0.425 Mm (no. 40) Sieve Shall Have A Liquid Limit Not Greater Than 35 And Plasticity Index Not Greater Than 12 As Determined By Aashto T 89 And T 90, Respectively. The Coarse Portion, Retained On A 2.00 Mm (no. 10) Sieve, Shall Have A Mass Percent Of Wear Not Exceeding 50 'by The Los Angeles Abrasion Tests As Determined By Aashto T 96. The Material Shall Have A Soaked Cbr Value Of Not Less Than 30% As Determined By Aashto T 193. The Cbr Value Shall Be Obtained At The Maximum Dry Density And Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. 200.3 Construction Requirements 200.3.1 Preparation Of Existing Surface The Existing Surface Shall Be Graded And Finished As Provided Under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, Before Placing The Subbase Material. 200.3.2 Placing The Aggregate Subbase Material Shall Be Placed At A Uniform Mixture On A Prepared Subgrade In A Quantity Which Will Provide The Required Compacted Thickness. When More Than One Layer Is Required, Each Layer Shall Be Shaped And Compacted Before The Succeeding Layer Is Placed. The Placing Of Material Shall Begin At The Point Designated By The Engineer. Placing Shall Be From Vehicles Especially Equipped To Distribute The Material In A Continuous Uniform Layer Or Windrow. The Layer Or Windrow Shall Be Of Such Size That When Spread And Compacted, The Finished Layer Shall Be In Reasonably Close Conformity To The Nominal Thickness Shown On The Plans. When Hauling Is Done Over Previously Placed Material, Hauling Equipment Shall Be Dispersed Uniformly Over The Entire Surface Of The Previously Constructed Layer, To Minimize Rutting Or Uneven Compaction. 200.3.3 Spreading And Compacting When Uniformly Mixed, The Mixture Shall Be Spread To The Plan Thickness, For Compaction. Where The Required Thickness Is 150 Mm Or Less, The Material May Be Spread And Compacted In One Layer. Where The Required Thickness Is More Than 150 Mm, The Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread And Compacted In Two Or More Layers Of Approximately Equal Thickness, And The Maximum Compacted Thickness Of Any Layer Shall Not Exceed 150 Mm. All Subsequent Layers Shall Be Spread And Compacted In A Similar Manner. The Moisture Content Of Subbase Material Shall, If Necessary, Be Adjusted Prior To Compaction By Watering With Approved Sprinklers Mounted On Trucks Or By Drying Out, As Required In Order To Obtain The Required Compaction. Immediately Following Final Spreading And Smoothening, Each Layer Shall Be Compacted To The Full Width By Means Of Approved Compaction Equipment. Rolling Shall Progress Gradually From The Sides To The Center, Parallel To The Centerline Of The Road And Shall Continue Until The Whole Surface Has Been Rolled. Any Irregularities Or Depressions That Develop Shall Be Corrected By Loosening The Material At These Places And Adding Or Removing Material Until Surface Is Smooth And Uniform. Along Curbs, Headers And Walls, And At All Places Not Accessible To The Roller, The Subbase Material Shall Be Compacted Thoroughly With Approved Tampers Or Compactors. If The Layer Of Subbase Material, Or Part Thereof, Does Not Conform To The Required Finish, The Contractor Shall, At His Own Expense, Make The Necessary Corrections. Compaction Of Each Layer Shall Continue Until A Field Density Of At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density Determined In Accordance With Aashto T 180, Method D Has Been Achieved. In-place Density Determination Shall Be Made In Accordance With Aashto T 191. 200.3.4 Trial Sections Before Subbase Construction Is Started, The Contractor Shall Spread And Compact Trial Sections As Directed By The Engineer. The Purpose Of The Trial Sections Is To Check The Suitability Of The Materials, The Efficiency Of The Equipment And The Construction Method Which Is Proposed To Be Used By The Contractor. Therefore, The Contractor Must Use The Same Material, Equipment And Procedures That He Proposes To Use For The Main Work. One Trial Section Of About 500 M2 Shall Be Made For Every Type Of Material And/or Construction Equipment Procedure Proposed For Use. After Final Compaction Of Each Trial Section, The Contractor Shall Carry Out Such Field Density Tests And Other Tests Required As Directed By The Engineer. If A Trial Section Shows That The Proposed Materials, Equipment Or Procedures In The Engineer's Opinion Are Not Suitable For Subbase, The Material Shall Be Removed At The Contractor's Expense, And A New Trial Section Shall Be Constructed. If The Basic Conditions Regarding The Type Of Material Or Procedure Change During The Execution Of The Work, New Trial Sections Shall Be Constructed. 200.3.5 Tolerances Aggregate Subbase Shall Be Spread With Equipment That Will Provide A Uniform Layer Which When Compacted Will Conform To The Designed Level And Transverse Slopes As Shown On The Plans. The Allowable Tolerances Shall Be As Specified Hereunder: Permitted Variation From Design ± 20 Mm Thickness Of Layer Permitted Variation From Design + 10 Mm Level Of Surface - 20 Mm Permitted Surface Irregularity 20mm Measured By 3-m Straight-edge Permitted Variation From Design Crossfall Or Camber ± 0.30 % Permitted Variation From Design Longitudinal Grade Over ± 0.10 % 25 M In Length 200.4 Method Of Measurement Aggregate Subbase Course Will Be Measured By The Cubic Meter (m³). The Quantity To Be Paid For Shall Be The Design Volume Compacted In-place As Shown On The Plans And Accepted In The Completed Course. No Allowance Will Be Given For Materials Placed Outside The Design Limits Shown On The Cross-sections. Trial Sections Shall Not Be Measured Separately But Shall Be Included In The Quantity Of Subbase Herein Measured. Item 404 – Reinforcing Steel Description This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Fabricating And Placing Of Steel Reinforcement Of The Type, Size, Shape And Grade Required In Accordance With This Specification And In Conformity With The Requirements Shown On The Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer. Strictly Implement The Usage Of Grade 40 Reinforcing Steel. Material Requirements Reinforcing Steel Shall Meet The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Construction Requirements 404.3.1 Order Lists Before Materials Are Ordered, All Order Lists And Bending Diagrams Shall Be Furnished By The Contractor, For Approval Of The Engineer. The Approval Of Order Lists And Bending Diagrams By The Engineer Shall In No Way Relieve The Contractor Of Responsibility For The Correctness Of Such Lists And Diagrams. Any Expense Incident To The Revisions Of Materials Furnished In Accordance With Such Lists And Diagrams To Make Them Comply With The Plans Shall Be Borne By The Contractor. 404.3.2 Protection Of Material Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Stored Above The Surface Of The Ground Upon Platforms, Skids, Or Other Supports And Shall Be Protected As Far As Practicable From Mechanical Injury And Surface Deterioration Caused By Exposure To Conditions Producing Rust. When Placed In The Work, Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Dirt, Detrimental Rust, Loose Scale, Paint, Grease, Oil, Or Other Foreign Materials. Reinforcement Shall Be Free From Injurious Defects Such As Cracks And Laminations. Rust, Surface Seams, Surface Irregularities Or Mill Scale Will Not Be Cause For Rejection, Provided The Minimum Dimensions, Cross Sectional Area And Tensile Properties Of A Hand Wire Brushed Specimen Meets The Physical Requirements For The Size And Grade Of Steel Specified. Bending All Reinforcing Bars Requiring Bending Shall Be Cold-bent To The Shapes Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer. Bars Shall Be Bent Around A Circular Pin Having The Following Diameters (d) In Relation To The Diameter Of The Bar (d): Nominal Diameter, D, Mm Pin Diameter (d) 10 To 20 25 To 28 32 And Greater 6d 8d 10d Bends And Hooks In Stirrups Or Ties May Be Bent To The Diameter Of The Principal Bar Enclosed Therein. Placing And Fastening All Steel Reinforcement Shall Be Accurately Placed In The Position Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer And Firmly Held There During The Placing And Setting Of The Concrete. Bars Shall Be Tied At All Intersections Except Where Spacing Is Less Than 300mm In Each Directions, In Which Case, Alternate Intersections Shall Be Tied. Ties Shall Be Fastened On The Inside. Distance From The Forms Shall Be Maintained By Means Of Stays, Blocks, Ties, Hangers, Or Other Approved Supports, So That It Does Not Vary From The Position Indicated On The Plans By More Than 6mm. Blocks For Holding Reinforcement From Contact With The Forms Shall Be Precast Mortar Blocks Of Approved Shapes And Dimensions. Layers Of Bars Shall Be Separated By Precast Mortar Blocks Or By Other Equally Suitable Devices. The Use Of Pebbles, Pieces Of Broken Stone Or Brick, Metal Pipe And Wooden Blocks Shall Not Be Permitted. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans Or Required By The Engineer, The Minimum Distance Between Bars Shall Be 40mm. Reinforcement In Any Member Shall Be Placed And Then Inspected And Approved By The Engineer Before The Placing Of Concrete Begins. Concrete Placed In Violation Of This Provision May Be Rejected And Removal May Be Required. If Fabric Reinforcement Is Shipped In Rolls, It Shall Be Straightened Before Being Placed. Bundled Bars Shall Be Tied Together At Not More Than 1.8m Intervals. Splicing All Reinforcement Shall Be Furnished In The Full Lengths Indicated On The Plans. Splicing Of Bars, Except Where Shown On The Plans, Will Not Be Permitted Without The Written Approval Of The Engineer. Splices Shall Be Staggered As Far As Possible And With A Minimum Separation Of Not Less Than 40 Bar Diameters. Not More Than One-third Of The Bars May Be Spliced In The Same Cross-section, Except Where Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans, Bars Shall Be Lapped A Minimum Distance Of: Splice Type Grade 40 Min. Lap Grade 60 Min. Lap But Not Less Than Tension 24 Bar Dia 36 Bar Dia 300 Mm Compression 20 Bar Dia 24 Bar Dia 300 Mm In Lapped Splices, The Bars Shall Be Placed In Contact And Wired Together. Lapped Splices Will Not Be Permitted At Locations Where The Concrete Section Is Insufficient To Provide Minimum Clear Distance Of One And One-third The Maximum Size Of Coarse Aggregate Between The Splice And The Nearest Adjacent Bar. Welding Of Reinforcing Steel Shall Be Done Only If Detailed On The Plans Or If Authorized By The Engineer In Writing. Spiral Reinforcement Shall Be Spliced By Lapping At Least One And A Half Turns Or By Butt Welding Unless Otherwise Shown On The Plans. Lapping Of Bar Mat Sheets Of Mesh Or Bar Mat Reinforcement Shall Overlap Each Other Sufficiently To Maintain A Uniform Strength And Shall Be Securely Fastened At The Ends And Edges. The Overlap Shall Not Be Less Than One Mesh In Width. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Reinforcing Steel To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Allowance Will Be Made For Tie-wires, Separators, Wire Chairs And Other Material Used In Fastening The Reinforcing Steel In Place. If Bars Are Substituted Upon The Contractor’s Request And Approved By The Engineer And As A Result Thereof More Steel Is Used Than Specified, Only The Mass Specified Shall Be Measured For Payment. No Measurement Or Payment Will Be Made For Splices Added By The Contractor Unless Directed Or Approved By The Engineer. When There Is No Item For Reinforcing Steel In The Bill Of Quantities, Costs Will Be Considered As Incidental To The Other Items In The Bill Of Quantities. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantity, Measured As Prescribed In Section 404.4, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Reinforcing Steel Which Price And Payment Shall Be Full Compensation For Furnishing And Placing All Materials, Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In This Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram Item 405 – Structural Concrete Description 405.1.1 Scope This Item Shall Consist Of Furnishing, Bending, Placing And Finishing Concrete In All Structures Except Pavements In Accordance With This Specification And Conforming To The Lines, Grades, And Dimensions Shown On The Plans. Concrete Shall Consist Of A Mixture Of Portland Cement, Fine Aggregate, Coarse Aggregate, Admixture When Specified, And Water Mixed In The Proportions Specified Or Approved By The Engineer. The Structural Strength Of Concrete Shall Be 24 Mpa. 405.1.2 Classes And Uses Of Concrete Five Classes Of Concrete Are Provided For In This Item, Namely: A, B, C, P And Seal. Each Class Shall Be Used In That Part Of The Structure As Called For On The Plans. The Classes Of Concrete Will Generally Be Used As Follows: Class A – All Superstructures And Heavily Reinforced Substructures. The Important Parts Of The Structure Included Are Slabs, Beams, Girders, Columns, Arch Ribs, Box Culverts, Reinforced Abutments, Retaining Walls, And Reinforced Footings. Class B – Footings, Pedestals, Massive Pier Shafts, Pipe Bedding, And Gravity Walls, Unreinforced Or With Only A Small Amount Of Reinforcement. Class C – Thin Reinforced Sections, Railings, Precast R.c. Piles And Cribbing And For Filler In Steel Grid Floors. Class P – Prestressed Concrete Structures And Members. Seal – Concrete Deposited In Water. Material Requirements 405.2.1 Portland Cement It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.1. Fine Aggregate It Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.2. Coarse Aggregate It Shall Conform All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.3 Except That Gradation Shall Conform To Table 405.1. Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements For Coarse Aggregate Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing Standard Mm Alternate Us Standard Class A Class B Class C Class P Class Seal 63 50 37.5 25 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” 1” ¾” ½” 3/8” No.4 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 0 - 5 100 95 – 100 - 35 – 70 - 10 – 30 - 0 - 5 100 90 – 100 40 – 70 0 – 15* 100 95 – 100 - 20 – 55 0 – 10* 100 95 – 100 - 25 – 60 - 0 – 10* * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. Water It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.4 Reinforcing Steel It Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel And Wire Rope. Admixtures Admixtures Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.7 Curing Materials Curing Materials Shall Conform To The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.8. Expansion Joint Materials Expansion Joint Materials Shall Be: Preformed Sponge Rubber And Cork, Conforming To Aashto M 153. Hot-poured Elastic Type, Conforming To Aashto M 173. Preformed Fillers, Conforming To Aashto M 213. Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals These Shall Conform To Aashto M 220. Elastomeric Bearing Pads These Shall Conform To Aashto M 251 Or Item 412 – Elastomeric Bearing Pads. Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Storage Of Cement And Aggregates Shall Conform To All The Requirements Of Subsection 311.2.10. Sampling And Testing Of Structural Concrete As Work Progresses, At Least One (1) Sample Consisting Of Three (3) Concrete Cylinder Test Specimens, 150 X 300mm (6 X 12 Inches), Shall Be Taken From Each Seventy-five (75) Cubic Meters Of Each Class Of Concrete Or Fraction Thereof Placed Each Day. Compliance With The Requirements Of This Section Shall Be Determined In Accordance With The Following Standard Methods Of Aashto: Sampling Of Fresh Concrete Weight Per Cubic Metre And Air Content (gravi- Metric) Of Concrete Sieve Analysis Of Fine And Coarse Aggregates Slump Of Portland Cement Concrete Specific Gravity And Absorption Of Fine Aggregate T 141 T 121 T 27 T 119 T 84 Tests For Strength Shall Be Made In Accordance With The Following: Making And Curing Concrete Compressive And Flexural Tests Specimens In The Field Compressive Strength Of Molded Concrete Cylinders T 23 T 22 Production Requirements Proportioning And Strength Of Structural Concrete The Concrete Materials Shall Be Proportioned In Accordance With The Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete As Specified In Table 405.2, Using The Absolute Volume Method As Outlined In The American Concrete Institute (aci) Standard 211.1. “recommended Practice For Selecting Proportions For Normal And Heavyweight Concrete”. Other Methods Of Proportioning May Be Employed In The Mix Design With Prior Approval Of The Engineer. The Mix Shall Either Be Designed Or Approved By The Engineer. A Change In The Source Of Materials During The Progress Of Work May Necessitate A New Mix Design. The Strength Requirements For Each Class Of Concrete Shall Be As Specified In Table 405.2. Table 405.2 - Composition And Strength Of Concrete For Use In Structures Class Of Concrete Minimum Cement Content Per M3 Kg (bag**) Maximum Water/ Cement Ratio Kg/kg Consistency Range In Slump Mm (inch) Designated Size Of Coarse Aggregate Square Opening Std. Mm Minimum Compressive Strength Of 150x300mm Concrete Cylinder Specimen At 28 Days, Mn/m2 (psi) A B C P Seal 360 (9 Bags) 320 (8 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 440 (11 Bags) 380 (9.5 Bags) 0.53 0.58 0.55 0.49 0.58 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 100 Max. (4 Max.) 100 – 200 (4 - 8) 37.5 – 4.75 (1-1/2” – No. 4) 50 – 4.75 (2” – No. 4) 12.5 – 4.75 (1/2” – No. 4) 19.0 – 4.75 (3/4” – No. 4) 25 – 4.75 (1” – No. 4) 20.7 (3000) 16.5 (2400) 20.7 (3000) 37.7 (5000) 20.7 (3000) * The Measured Cement Content Shall Be Within Plus Or Minus 2 Mass Percent Of The Design Cement Content. ** Based On 40 Kg/bag 405.4.2 Consistency Concrete Shall Have A Consistency Such That It Will Be Workable In The Required Position. It Shall Be Of Such A Consistency That It Will Flow Around Reinforcing Steel But Individual Particles Of The Coarse Aggregate When Isolated Shall Show A Coating Of Mortar Containing Its Proportionate Amount Of Sand. The Consistency Of Concrete Shall Be Gauged By The Ability Of The Equipment To Properly Place It And Not By The Difficulty In Mixing And Transporting. The Quantity Of Mixing Water Shall Be Determined By The Engineer And Shall Not Be Varied Without His Consent. Concrete As Dry As It Is Practical To Place With The Equipment Specified Shall Be Used. 405.4.3 Batching Measuring And Batching Of Materials Shall Be Done At A Batching Plant. Portland Cement Either Sacked Or Bulk Cement May Be Used. No Fraction Of A Sack Of Cement Shall Be Used In A Batch Of Concrete Unless The Cement Is Weighed. All Bulk Cement Shall Be Weighed On An Approved Weighing Device. The Bulk Cement Weighing Hopper Shall Be Properly Sealed And Vented To Preclude Dusting Operation. The Discharge Chute Shall Not Be Suspended From The Weighing Hopper And Shall Be So Arranged That Cement Will Neither Be Lodged In It Nor Leak From It. Accuracy Of Batching Shall Be Within Plus (+) Or Minus (-) 1 Mass Percent. Water Water May Be Measured Either By Volume Or By Weight. The Accuracy Of Measuring The Water Shall Be Within A Range Of Error Of Not More Than 1 Percent. Aggregates Stockpiling Of Aggregates Shall Be In Accordance With Subsection 311.2.10. All Aggregates Whether Produced Or Handled By Hydraulic Methods Or Washed, Shall Be Stockpiled Or Binned For Draining For At Least 12 Hours Prior To Batching. Rail Shipment Requiring More Than12 Hours Will Be Accepted As Adequate Binning Only If The Car Bodies Permit Free Drainage. If The Aggregates Contain High Or Non-uniform Moisture Content, Storage Or Stockpile Period In Excess Of 12 Hours May Be Required By The Engineer. Batching Shall Be Conducted As To Result In A 2 Mass Percent Maximum Tolerance For The Required Materials. Bins And Scales The Batching Plant Shall Include Separate Bins For Bulk Cement, Fine Aggregate And For Each Size Of Coarse Aggregate, A Weighing Hopper, And Scales Capable Of Determining Accurately The Mass Of Each Component Of The Batch. Scales Shall Be Accurate To One-half (0.5) Percent Throughout The Range Used. Batching When Batches Are Hauled To The Mixer, Bulk Cement Shall Be Transported Either In Waterproof Compartments Or Between The Fine And Coarse Aggregate. When Cement Is Placed In Contact With Moist Aggregates, Batches Will Be Rejected Unless Mixed Within 1-1/2 Hours Of Such Contact. Sacked Cement May Be Transported On Top Of The Aggregates. Batches Shall Be Delivered To The Mixer Separate And Intact. Each Batch Shall Be Dumped Cleanly Into The Mixer Without Loss, And, When More Than One Batch Is Carried On The Truck, Without Spilling Of Material From One Batch Compartment Into Another. Admixtures The Contractor Shall Follow An Approved Procedure For Adding The Specified Amount Of Admixture To Each Batch And Will Be Responsible For Its Uniform Operation During The Progress Of The Work. He Shall Provide Separate Scales For The Admixtures Which Are To Be Proportioned By Weight, And Accurate Measures For Those To Be Proportioned By Volume. Admixtures Shall Be Measured Into The Mixer With An Accuracy Of Plus Or Minus Three (3) Percent. The Use Of Calcium Chloride As An Admixture Will Not Be Permitted. 405.4.4 Mixing And Delivery Concrete May Be Mixed At The Site Of Construction, At A Central Point Or By A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or By A Combination Of Central Point Mixing And Truck Agitating. Mixing And Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be In Accordance With The Appropriate Requirements Of Aashto M 157 Except As Modified In The Following Paragraphs Of This Section, For Truck Mixing Or A Combination Of Central Point And Truck Mixing Or Truck Agitating. Delivery Of Concrete Shall Be Regulated So That Placing Is At A Continuous Rate Unless Delayed By The Placing Operations. The Intervals Between Delivery Of Batches Shall Not Be So Great As To Allow The Concrete Inplace To Harden Partially, And In No Case Shall Such An Interval Exceed 30 Minutes. In Exceptional Cases And When Volumetric Measurements Are Authorized, For Small Project Requiring Less Than 75 Cu.m. Per Day Of Pouring, The Weight Proportions Shall Be Converted To Equivalent Volumetric Proportions. In Such Cases, Suitable Allowance Shall Be Made For Variations In The Moisture Condition Of The Aggregates, Including The Bulking Effect In The Fine Aggregate. Batching And Mixing Shall Be In Accordance With Astm C 685, Section 6 Through 9. Concrete Mixing, By Chute Is Allowed Provided That A Weighing Scales For Determining The Batch Weight Will Be Used. For Batch Mixing At The Site Of Construction Or At A Central Point, A Batch Mixer Of An Approved Type Shall Be Used. Mixer Having A Rated Capacity Of Less Than A One-bag Batch Shall Not Be Used. The Volume Of Concrete Mixed Per Batch Shall Not Exceed The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Standard Rating Plate On The Mixer Except That An Overload Up To 10 Percent Above The Mixer’s Nominal Capacity May Be Permitted, Provided Concrete Test Data For Strength, Segregation, And Uniform Consistency Are Satisfactory And Provided No Spillage Of Concrete Takes Place. The Batch Shall Be So Charge Into The Drum That A Portion Of The Water Shall Enter In Advance Of The Cement And Aggregates. The Flow Of Water Shall Be Uniform And All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First 15 Seconds Of The Mixing Period. Mixing Time Shall Be Measured From The Time All Materials, Except Water, Are In The Drum. Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 60 Seconds For Mixers Having A Capacity Of 1.5m3 Or Less. For Mixers Having A Capacity Greater Than 1.5m3, The Mixing Time Shall Not Be Less Than 90 Seconds. If Timing Starts, The Instant The Skip Reaches Its Maximum Raised Position, 4 Seconds Shall Be Added To The Specified Mixing Time. Mixing Time Ends When The Discharge Chute Opens. The Mixer Shall Be Operated At The Drum Speed As Shown On The Manufacturer’s Name Plate On The Mixer. Any Concrete Mixed Less Than The Specified Time Shall Be Discarded And Disposed Off By The Contractor At His Own Expenses. The Timing Device On Stationary Mixers Shall Be Equipped With A Bell Or Other Suitable Warning Device Adjusted To Give A Clearly Audible Signal Each Time The Lock Is Released. In Case Of Failure Of The Timing Device, The Contractor Will Be Permitted To Continue Operations While It Is Being Repaired, Provided He Furnishes An Approved Timepiece Equipped With Minute And Second Hands. If The Timing Device Is Not Placed In Good Working Order Within 24 Hours, Further Use Of The Mixer Will Be Prohibited Until Repairs Are Made. Retempering Concrete Will Not Be Permitted. Admixtures For Increasing The Workability, For Retarding The Set, Or For Accelerating The Set Or Improving The Pumping Characteristics Of The Concrete Will Be Permitted Only When Specifically Provided For In The Contract, Or Authorized In Writing By The Engineer. Mixing Concrete: General Concrete Shall Be Thoroughly Mixed In A Mixer Of An Approved Size And Type That Will Insure A Uniform Distribution Of The Materials Throughout The Mass. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed In Mechanically Operated Mixers. Mixing Plant And Equipment For Transporting And Placing Concrete Shall Be Arranged With An Ample Auxiliary Installation To Provide A Minimum Supply Of Concrete In Case Of Breakdown Of Machinery Or In Case The Normal Supply Of Concrete Is Disrupted. The Auxiliary Supply Of Concrete Shall Be Sufficient To Complete The Casting Of A Section Up To A Construction Joint That Will Meet The Approval Of The Engineer. Equipment Having Components Made Of Aluminum Or Magnesium Alloys, Which Would Have Contact With Plastic Concrete During Mixing, Transporting Or Pumping Of Portland Cement Concrete, Shall Not Be Used. Concrete Mixers Shall Be Equipped With Adequate Water Storage And A Device Of Accurately Measuring And Automatically Controlling The Amount Of Water Used. Materials Shall Be Measured By Weighing. The Apparatus Provided For Weighing The Aggregates And Cement Shall Be Suitably Designed And Constructed For This Purpose. The Accuracy Of All Weighing Devices Except That For Water Shall Be Such That Successive Quantities Can Be Measured To Within One Percent Of The Desired Amounts. The Water Measuring Device Shall Be Accurate To Plus Or Minus 0.5 Mass Percent. All Measuring Devices Shall Be Subject To The Approval Of The Engineer. Scales And Measuring Devices Shall Be Tested At The Expense Of The Contractor As Frequently As The Engineer May Deem Necessary To Insure Their Accuracy. Weighing Equipment Shall Be Insulated Against Vibration Or Movement Of Other Operating Equipment In The Plant. When The Entire Plant Is Running, The Scale Reading At Cut-off Shall Not Vary From The Weight Designated By The Engineer More Than One Mass Percent For Cement, 1-1/2 Mass Percent For Any Size Of Aggregate, Or One (1) Mass Percent For The Total Aggregate In Any Batch. Mixing Concrete At Site Concrete Mixers May Be Of The Revolving Drum Or The Revolving Blade Type And The Mixing Drum Or Blades Shall Be Operated Uniformly At The Mixing Speed Recommended By The Manufacturer. The Pick-up And Throw-over Blades Of Mixers Shall Be Restored Or Replaced When Any Part Or Section Is Worn 20mm Or More Below The Original Height Of The Manufacturer’s Design. Mixers And Agitators Which Have An Accumulation Of Hard Concrete Or Mortar Shall Not Be Used. When Bulk Cement Is Used And Volume Of The Batch Is 0.5m3 Or More, The Scale And Weigh Hopper For Portland Cement Shall Be Separate And Distinct From The Aggregate Hopper Or Hoppers. The Discharge Mechanism Of The Bulk Cement Weigh Hopper Shall Be Interlocked Against Opening Before The Full Amount Of Cement Is In The Hopper. The Discharging Mechanism Shall Also Be Interlocked Against Opening When The Amount Of Cement In The Hopper Is Underweight By More Than One (1) Mass Percent Or Overweight By More Than 3 Mass Percent Of The Amount Specified. When The Aggregate Contains More Water Than The Quantity Necessary To Produce A Saturated Surface Dry Condition, Representative Samples Shall Be Taken And The Moisture Content Determined For Each Kind Of Aggregate. The Batch Shall Be So Charged Into The Mixer That Some Water Will Enter In Advance Of Cement And Aggregate. All Water Shall Be In The Drum By The End Of The First Quarter Of The Specified Mixing Time. Cement Shall Be Batched And Charged Into The Mixer So That It Will Not Result In Loss Of Cement Due To The Effect Of Wind, Or In Accumulation Of Cement On Surface Of Conveyors Or Hoppers, Or In Other Conditions Which Reduce Or Vary The Required Quantity Of Cement In The Concrete Mixture. The Entire Content Of A Batch Mixer Shall Be Removed From The Drum Before Materials For A Succeeding Batch Are Placed Therein. The Materials Composing A Batch Except Water Shall Be Deposited Simultaneously Into The Mixer. All Concrete Shall Be Mixed For A Period Of Not Less Than 1-1/2 Minutes After All Materials, Including Water, Are In The Mixer. During The Period Of Mixing, The Mixer Shall Operate At The Speed For Which It Has Been Designed. Mixers Shall Be Operated With An Automatic Timing Device That Can Be Locked By The Engineer. The Time Device And Discharge Mechanics Shall Be So Interlocked That During Normal Operation No Part Of The Batch Will Be Charged Until The Specified Mixing Time Has Elapsed. The First Batch Of Concrete Materials Placed In The Mixer Shall Contain A Sufficient Excess Of Cement, Sand, And Water To Coat Inside Of The Drum Without Reducing The Required Mortar Content Of The Mix. When Mixing Is To Cease For A Period Of One Hour Or More, The Mixer Shall Be Thoroughly Cleaned. Mixing Concrete At Central Plant Mixing At Central Plant Shall Conform To The Requirements For Mixing At The Site. Mixing Concrete In Truck Truck Mixers, Unless Otherwise Authorized By The Engineer, Shall Be Of The Revolving Drum Type, Water-tight, And So Constructed That The Concrete Can Be Mixed To Insure A Uniform Distribution Of Materials Throughout The Mass. All Solid Materials For The Concrete Shall Be Accurately Measured And Charged Into The Drum At The Proportioning Plant. Except As Subsequently Provided, The Truck Mixer Shall Be Equipped With A Device By Which The Quantity Of Water Added Can Be Readily Verified. The Mixing Water May Be Added Directly To The Batch, In Which Case A Tank Is Not Required. Truck Mixers May Be Required To Be Provided With A Means Of Which The Mixing Time Can Be Readily Verified By The Engineer. The Maximum Size Of Batch In Truck Mixers Shall Not Exceed The Minimum Rated Capacity Of The Mixer As Stated By The Manufacturer And Stamped In Metal On The Mixer. Truck Mixing, Shall, Unless Other-wise Directed Be Continued For Not Less Than 100 Revolutions After All Ingredients, Including Water, Are In The Drum. The Mixing Speed Shall Not Be Less Than 4 Rpm, Nor More Than 6 Rpm. Mixing Shall Begin Within 30 Minutes After The Cement Has Been Added Either To The Water Or Aggregate, But When Cement Is Charged Into A Mixer Drum Containing Water Or Surface Wet Aggregate And When The Temperature Is Above 32oc, This Limit Shall Be Reduced To 15 Minutes. The Limitation In Time Between The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregate And The Beginning Of The Mixing May Be Waived When, In The Judgement Of The Engineer, The Aggregate Is Sufficiently Free From Moisture, So That There Will Be No Harmful Effects On The Cement. When A Truck Mixer Is Used For Transportation, The Mixing Time Specified In Subsection 405.4.4 (3) At A Stationary Mixer May Be Reduced To 30 Seconds And The Mixing Completed In A Truck Mixer. The Mixing Time In The Truck Mixer Shall Be As Specified For Truck Mixing. Transporting Mixed Concrete Mixed Concrete May Only Be Transported To The Delivery Point In Truck Agitators Or Truck Mixers Operating At The Speed Designated By The Manufacturers Of The Equipment As Agitating Speed, Or In Non-agitating Hauling Equipment, Provided The Consistency And Workability Of The Mixed Concrete Upon Discharge At The Delivery Point Is Suitable Point For Adequate Placement And Consolidation In Place. Truck Agitators Shall Be Loaded Not To Exceed The Manufacturer’s Guaranteed Capacity. They Shall Maintain The Mixed Concrete In A Thoroughly Mixed And Uniform Mass During Hauling. No Additional Mixing Water Shall Be Incorporated Into The Concrete During Hauling Or After Arrival At The Delivery Point. The Rate Of Discharge Of Mixed Concrete From Truck Mixers Or Agitators Shall Be Controlled By The Speed Of Rotation Of The Drum In The Discharge Direction With The Discharge Gate Fully Open. When A Truck Mixer Or Agitator Is Used For Transporting Concrete To The Delivery Point, Discharge Shall Be Completed Within One Hour, Or Before 250 Revolutions Of The Drum Or Blades, Whichever Comes First, After The Introduction Of The Cement To The Aggregates. Under Conditions Contributing To Quick Stiffening Of The Concrete Or When The Temperature Of The Concrete Is 30oc, Or Above, A Time Less Than One Hour Will Be Required. Delivery Of Mixed Concrete The Contractor Shall Have Sufficient Plant Capacity And Transportation Apparatus To Insure Continuous Delivery At The Rate Required. The Rate Of Delivery Of Concrete During Concreting Operations Shall Be Such As To Provide For The Proper Handling, Placing And Finishing Of The Concrete. The Rate Shall Be Such That The Interval Between Batches Shall Not Exceed 20 Minutes. The Methods Of Delivering And Handling The Concrete Shall Be Such As Will Facilitate Placing Of The Minimum Handling. Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Structural Concrete To Be Paid For Will Be The Final Quantity Placed And Accepted In The Completed Structure. No Deduction Will Be Made For The Volume Occupied By Pipe Less Than 100mm (4 Inches) In Diameter Or By Reinforcing Steel, Anchors, Conduits, Weep Holes Or Expansion Joint Materials. Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities, Measured As Prescribed In Section 405.5, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price For Each Of The Pay Item Listed Below That Is Included In The Bill Of Quantities. Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For Furnishing, Placing And Finishing Concrete Including All Labor, Equipment, Tools And Incidentals Necessary To Complete The Work Prescribed In The Item. Payment Will Be Made Under: Pay Item Number Description Unit Of Measurement 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 405 (4) 405 (5) Structural Concrete, Class A Structural Concrete, Class B Structural Concrete, Class C Structural Concrete, Class P Seal Concrete Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Item 510 – Concrete Slope Protection 510.1 Description This Item Shall Consist Of The Furnishing And Placing Of Concrete Slope Protection Including All Necessary Excavation, A Bed Course And Reinforced Concrete To The Required Thickness And Extent To Protect Slopes Against Erosion. Construction Details Shall Be As Shown On The Plans. 510.2 Material Requirements 510.2.1 Bed Course A Bed Course, Where Required, Shall Be Granular Material Which Satisfies The Requirements For Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A. 510.2.2 Formwork Formwork, Where Necessary, Shall Be As Specified In Item 407, Concrete Structures. 510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement Steel Reinforcement Shall Be As Specified In Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 510.2.4 Concrete Concrete Shall Be Class B As Specified In Item 405, Structural Concrete, Unless Otherwise Specified Or Required By The Engineer. 510.3 Construction Requirements 510.3.1 Excavation The Ground Shall Be Excavated Where Necessary In Accordance With The Dimensions, Lines And Grades Shown On The Plans. 510.3.2 Bed Course Where Shown On The Plans Or Ordered By The Engineer, The Contractor Shall Provide And Lay A Bed Course, To The Depth Required, As Specified In Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, Compacted At Least 100 Percent Of The Maximum Dry Density As Determined By Aashto T 180, Method D. 510.3.3 Concrete The Contractor Shall Provide And Place Concrete In Accordance With The Requirements Of Item 405, Structural Concrete, To The Required Depths In The Positions And To The Grades And Elevations Shown On The Plans. Unless Otherwise Specified, The Concrete Slabs Shall Not Be Greater Than 4m By 4m And Shall Have Between Slabs, Plain Vertical Straight Joints With No Joint Filler Or Sealer. The Toe Of The Concrete Slope Protection Shall Be Constructed And Protected As Shown On The Plans. 510.3.4 Drainage Drainage Of The Bed Course Or Backfill Shall Be Provided As Shown On The Plans Or As Required By The Engineer. 510.4 Method Of Measurement The Quantity Of Granular Material In The Bed Course To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. The Quantity Of Concrete To Be Paid For Shall Be Measured By The Cubic Meter In-place And Accepted As Shown On The Plans. 510.5 Basis Of Payment The Accepted Quantities As Provided In Section 510.4, Method Of Measurement, Shall Be Paid For At The Contract Unit Price According To The Pay Item In The Bid Schedule Which Price And Payment Shall Constitute Full Compensation For The Necessary Excavation, For All Labor, Equipment, Tools, All Materials Including Formwork And Reinforcing Steel, And Incidentals Necessary To Complete This Item. Section Vii. Drawings Annex A – Architectural Design Annex B- Project Billboard Plan Section Viii. Bill Of Quantities Bid No. Agr- 24-961-b Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Cost No. I. Miscellaneous Survey And Staking 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Ii. Project Billboard / Sognboard 4.00 Each Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) Each P Iii. Mobilization/ Demobilization 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / L.s. P Iv. Clearing And Grubbing 1.00 L.s. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /l.s. P V. Structure Excavation 61.07 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) /cu.m P Vi. Embankment From Roadway Excavation 399.83 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Vii. Embankment From Borrow 97.75 Cu.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Viii. Subgrade Preparation 2,048.00 Sq.m. Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Sq.m P Ix. Aggregate Subbase Course 409.60 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P X. Reinforcing Steel 1,855.25 Kgs Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Kgs P Xi. Structural Concrete (24 Mpa) 11.06 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P Xii. Concrete Slope Protection 94.74 Cu.m Pesos And Ctvs. (p ) / Cu.m P 8 Total Bid Cost In Figures P Total Bid Cost In Words Summary Of Costs Item No. Bid Amount Miscellaneous Survey And Staking ₱ _____________________________ Project Billboard / Signboard ₱ _____________________________ Mobilization / Demobilization ₱ _____________________________ Iv. Clearing And Grubbing ₱ _____________________________ V. Structure Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Vi. Embankment From Roadway Excavation ₱ _____________________________ Vii. Embankment From Borrow ₱ _____________________________ Viii. Subgrade Preparation ₱ _____________________________ Ix. Aggregate Subbase Course ₱ _____________________________ X. Reinforcing Steel ₱ _____________________________ Xi. Structural Concrete (24 Mpa) ₱ _____________________________ Xii. Concrete Slope Protection ₱ _____________________________ Total Bid Amount ₱ _____________________________ Section Ix. Checklist Of Technical And Financial Documents Technical Component Envelope Class “a” Documents Legal Documents ⬜ Valid Philgeps Registration Certificate (platinum Membership) (all Pages) In Accordance With Section 8.5.2 Of The Irr; Technical Documents ⬜ Statement Of The Prospective Bidder Of All Its Ongoing Government And Private Contracts, Including Contracts Awarded But Not Yet Started, If Any, Whether Similar Or Not Similar In Nature And Complexity To The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Statement Of The Bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (slcc) Similar To The Contract To Be Bid, Except Under Conditions Provided Under The Rules; And ⬜ Special Pcab License In Case Of Joint Ventures; And Registration For The Type And Cost Of The Contract To Be Bid; And ⬜ Original Copy Of Bid Security. If In The Form Of A Surety Bond, Submit Also A Certification Issued By The Insurance Commission; Or Original Copy Of Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; And Project Requirements, Which Shall Include The Following: ⬜ Organizational Chart For The Contract To Be Bid; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Key Personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, And Foremen), To Be Assigned To The Contract To Be Bid, With Their Complete Qualification And Experience Data; ⬜ List Of Contractor’s Major Equipment Units, Which Are Owned, Leased, And/or Under Purchase Agreements, Supported By Proof Of Ownership Or Certification Of Availability Of Equipment From The Equipment Lessor/vendor For The Duration Of The Project, As The Case May Be; And ⬜ Original Duly Signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (oss); And If Applicable, Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate In Case Of A Corporation, Partnership, Or Cooperative; Or Original Special Power Of Attorney Of All Members Of The Joint Venture Giving Full Power And Authority To Its Officer To Sign The Oss And Do Acts To Represent The Bidder. Financial Documents ⬜ The Prospective Bidder’s Computation Of Net Financial Contracting Capacity (nfcc). Class “b” Documents ⬜ If Applicable, Duly Signed Joint Venture Agreement (jva) In Accordance With Ra No. 4566 And Its Irr In Case The Joint Venture Is Already In Existence; Or Duly Notarized Statements From All The Potential Joint Venture Partners Stating That They Will Enter Into And Abide By The Provisions Of The Jva In The Instance That The Bid Is Successful. Financial Component Envelope ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed And Accomplished Financial Bid Form; And Other Documentary Requirements Under Ra No. 9184 ⬜ Original Of Duly Signed Bid Prices In The Bill Of Quantities; And ⬜ Duly Accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, Including A Summary Sheet Indicating The Unit Prices Of Construction Materials, Labor Rates, And Equipment Rentals Used In Coming Up With The Bid; And ⬜ Cash Flow By Quarter. Bid Form For The Procurement Of Infrastructure Projects [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Bid Form Date : Project Identification No. : To: [name And Address Of Procuring Entity] Having Examined The Philippine Bidding Documents (pbds) Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletin Numbers [insert Numbers], The Receipt Of Which Is Hereby Duly Acknowledged, We, The Undersigned, Declare That: We Have No Reservation To The Pbds, Including The Supplemental Or Bid Bulletins, For The Procurement Project: [insert Name Of Contract]; We Offer To Execute The Works For This Contract In Accordance With The Pbds; The Total Price Of Our Bid In Words And Figures, Excluding Any Discounts Offered Below Is: [insert Information]; The Discounts Offered And The Methodology For Their Application Are: [insert Information]; The Total Bid Price Includes The Cost Of All Taxes, Such As, But Not Limited To: [specify The Applicable Taxes, E.g. (i) Value Added Tax (vat), (ii) Income Tax, (iii) Local Taxes, And (iv) Other Fiscal Levies And Duties], Which Are Itemized Herein And Reflected In The Detailed Estimates, Our Bid Shall Be Valid Within The Period Stated In The Pbds, And It Shall Remain Binding Upon Us At Any Time Before The Expiration Of That Period; If Our Bid Is Accepted, We Commit To Obtain A Performance Security In The Amount Of [insert Percentage Amount] Percent Of The Contract Price For The Due Performance Of The Contract, Or A Performance Securing Declaration In Lieu Of The The Allowable Forms Of Performance Security, Subject To The Terms And Conditions Of Issued Gppb Guidelines12 For This Purpose; We Are Not Participating, As Bidders, In More Than One Bid In This Bidding Process, Other Than Alternative Offers In Accordance With The Bidding Documents; We Understand That This Bid, Together With Your Written Acceptance Thereof Included In Your Notification Of Award, Shall Constitute A Binding Contract Between Us, Until A Formal Contract Is Prepared And Executed; And We Understand That You Are Not Bound To Accept The Lowest Calculated Bid Or Any Other Bid That You May Receive. We Likewise Certify/confirm That The Undersigned, Is The Duly Authorized Representative Of The Bidder, And Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For The [name Of Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity]. We Acknowledge That Failure To Sign Each And Every Page Of This Bid Form, Including The Bill Of Quantities, Shall Be A Ground For The Rejection Of Our Bid. Name: Legal Capacity: Signature: Duly Authorized To Sign The Bid For And Behalf Of: Date: 12 Currently Based On Gppb Resolution No. 0 Bid Securing Declaration Form [shall Be Submitted With The Bid If Bidder Opts To Provide This Form Of Bid Security] Republic Of The Philippines) City Of ) S.s. Bid Securing Declaration Project Identification No.: [insert Number] To: [insert Name And Address Of The Procuring Entity] I/we, The Undersigned, Declare That: I/we Understand That, According To Your Conditions, Bids Must Be Supported By A Bid Security, Which May Be In The Form Of A Bid Securing Declaration. I/we Accept That: (a) I/we Will Be Automatically Disqualified From Bidding For Any Procurement Contract With Any Procuring Entity For A Period Of Two (2) Years Upon Receipt Of Your Blacklisting Order; And, (b) I/we Will Pay The Applicable Fine Provided Under Section 6 Of The Guidelines On The Use Of Bid Securing Declaration, Within Fifteen (15) Days From Receipt Of The Written Demand By The Procuring Entity For The Commission Of Acts Resulting To The Enforcement Of The Bid Securing Declaration Under Sections 23.1(b), 34.2, 40.1 And 69.1, Except 69.1(f),of The Irr Of Ra No. 9184; Without Prejudice To Other Legal Action The Government May Undertake. I/we Understand That This Bid Securing Declaration Shall Cease To Be Valid On The Following Circumstances: Upon Expiration Of The Bid Validity Period, Or Any Extension Thereof Pursuant To Your Request; I Am/we Are Declared Ineligible Or Post-disqualified Upon Receipt Of Your Notice To Such Effect, And (i) I/we Failed To Timely File A Request For Reconsideration Or (ii) I/we Filed A Waiver To Avail Of Said Right; And I Am/we Are Declared The Bidder With The Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, And I/we Have Furnished The Performance Security And Signed The Contract. In Witness Whereof, I/we Have Hereunto Set My/our Hand/s This Day Of [month] [year] At [place Of Execution]. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice] Omnibus Sworn Statement (revised) [shall Be Submitted With The Bid] Republic Of The Philippines ) City/municipality Of ) S.s. Affidavit I, [name Of Affiant], Of Legal Age, [civil Status], [nationality], And Residing At [address Of Affiant], After Having Been Duly Sworn In Accordance With Law, Do Hereby Depose And State That: [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] I Am The Sole Proprietor Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am The Duly Authorized And Designated Representative Of [name Of Bidder] With Office Address At [address Of Bidder]; [select One, Delete The Other:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] As The Owner And Sole Proprietor, Or Authorized Representative Of [name Of Bidder], I Have Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached Duly Notarized Special Power Of Attorney; [if A Partnership, Corporation, Cooperative, Or Joint Venture:] I Am Granted Full Power And Authority To Do, Execute And Perform Any And All Acts Necessary To Participate, Submit The Bid, And To Sign And Execute The Ensuing Contract For [name Of The Project] Of The [name Of The Procuring Entity], As Shown In The Attached [state Title Of Attached Document Showing Proof Of Authorization (e.g., Duly Notarized Secretary’s Certificate, Board/partnership Resolution, Or Special Power Of Attorney, Whichever Is Applicable;)]; [name Of Bidder] Is Not “blacklisted” Or Barred From Bidding By The Government Of The Philippines Or Any Of Its Agencies, Offices, Corporations, Or Local Government Units, Foreign Government/foreign Or International Financing Institution Whose Blacklisting Rules Have Been Recognized By The Government Procurement Policy Board, By Itself Or By Relation, Membership, Association, Affiliation, Or Controlling Interest With Another Blacklisted Person Or Entity As Defined And Provided For In The Uniform Guidelines On Blacklisting; Each Of The Documents Submitted In Satisfaction Of The Bidding Requirements Is An Authentic Copy Of The Original, Complete, And All Statements And Information Provided Therein Are True And Correct; [name Of Bidder] Is Authorizing The Head Of The Procuring Entity Or Its Duly Authorized Representative(s) To Verify All The Documents Submitted; [select One, Delete The Rest:] [if A Sole Proprietorship:] The Owner Or Sole Proprietor Is Not Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Partnership Or Cooperative:] None Of The Officers And Members Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [if A Corporation Or Joint Venture:] None Of The Officers, Directors, And Controlling Stockholders Of [name Of Bidder] Is Related To The Head Of The Procuring Entity, Members Of The Bids And Awards Committee (bac), The Technical Working Group, And The Bac Secretariat, The Head Of The Project Management Office Or The End-user Unit, And The Project Consultants By Consanguinity Or Affinity Up To The Third Civil Degree; [name Of Bidder] Complies With Existing Labor Laws And Standards; And [name Of Bidder] Is Aware Of And Has Undertaken The Responsibilities As A Bidder In Compliance With The Philippine Bidding Documents, Which Includes: Carefully Examining All Of The Bidding Documents; Acknowledging All Conditions, Local Or Otherwise, Affecting The Implementation Of The Contract; Making An Estimate Of The Facilities Available And Needed For The Contract To Be Bid, If Any; And Inquiring Or Securing Supplemental/bid Bulletin(s) Issued For The [name Of The Project]. [name Of Bidder] Did Not Give Or Pay Directly Or Indirectly, Any Commission, Amount, Fee, Or Any Form Of Consideration, Pecuniary Or Otherwise, To Any Person Or Official, Personnel Or Representative Of The Government In Relation To Any Procurement Project Or Activity. In Case Advance Payment Was Made Or Given, Failure To Perform Or Deliver Any Of The Obligations And Undertakings In The Contract Shall Be Sufficient Grounds To Constitute Criminal Liability For Swindling (estafa) Or The Commission Of Fraud With Unfaithfulness Or Abuse Of Confidence Through Misappropriating Or Converting Any Payment Received By A Person Or Entity Under An Obligation Involving The Duty To Deliver Certain Goods Or Services, To The Prejudice Of The Public And The Government Of The Philippines Pursuant To Article 315 Of Act No. 3815 S. 1930, As Amended, Or The Revised Penal Code. In Witness Whereof, I Have Hereunto Set My Hand This Day Of , 20 At , Philippines. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice] G All Of The Bidding Documents; Acknowledging All Conditions, Local Or Otherwise, Affecting The Implementation Of The Contract; Making An Estimate Of The Facilities Available And Needed For The Contract To Be Bid, If Any; And Inquiring Or Securing Supplemental/bid Bulletin(s) Issued For The [name Of The Project]. [name Of Bidder] Did Not Give Or Pay Directly Or Indirectly, Any Commission, Amount, Fee, Or Any Form Of Consideration, Pecuniary Or Otherwise, To Any Person Or Official, Personnel Or Representative Of The Government In Relation To Any Procurement Project Or Activity. In Case Advance Payment Was Made Or Given, Failure To Perform Or Deliver Any Of The Obligations And Undertakings In The Contract Shall Be Sufficient Grounds To Constitute Criminal Liability For Swindling (estafa) Or The Commission Of Fraud With Unfaithfulness Or Abuse Of Confidence Through Misappropriating Or Converting Any Payment Received By A Person Or Entity Under An Obligation Involving The Duty To Deliver Certain Goods Or Services, To The Prejudice Of The Public And The Government Of The Philippines Pursuant To Article 315 Of Act No. 3815 S. 1930, As Amended, Or The Revised Penal Code. In Witness Whereof, I Have Hereunto Set My Hand This Day Of , 20 At , Philippines. [insert Name Of Bidder Or Its Authorized Representative] [insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] Affiant [jurat] [format Shall Be Based On The Latest Rules On Notarial Practice]